Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Manual
(LRFD)
M 23-50.16
June 2016
To get the latest information on WSDOT publications, sign up forindividual email updates at
www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/manuals.
Phone: 360-705-7753
Email: sargenw@wsdot.wa.gov
www.wsdot.wa.gov/eesc/bridge/index.cfm?fuseaction=home
Foreword
1.1.2 Specifications
This manual and the current editions of the following AASHTO Specifications are the
basic documents used to design highway bridges and structures in Washington State:
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (AASHTO LRFD)
AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design
(AASHTOSeismic)
The Bridge Design Manual is not intended to duplicate the AASHTO Specifications.
This manual supplements the AASHTO Specifications by providing additional
direction, design aides, examples, and information on office practice. The Bridge
Design Manual takes precedence where conflict exists with theAASHTO
Specifications. The WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer will provide guidance
asnecessary.
The prescripted terms used in the BDM are defined as follows:
The term shall indicates that a provision in the BDM is mandatory.
The term should indicates a strong preference for a given criteria.
The term may indicates a criterion that is usable, but other local and suitable
documented, verified, and approved criterion may also be used in a manner
consistent with the LRFD approach to bridge design.
The term recommended is used to give guidance based on past experience.
References are listed at the end of eachchapter.
1.1.3 Format
A. General
The Bridge Design Manual consists of one volume with each chapter organized as
follows:
Criteria or other information (printed on white paper)
Appendix A (printed on yellow paper) Design Aids
Appendix B (printed on salmon paper) Design Examples
B. Chapters
1. General Information 9. Bearings and Expansion
2. Preliminary Design Joints
C. Numbering System
1.
The numbering system for the criteria consists of a set of numbers followed
by letters as required to designate individual subjects by chapter, section,
andsubsection.
Example:
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures (Chapter)
5.3 Reinforced Concrete Box Girder Bridges (Section)
5.3.2Reinforcement(Subsection)
A. Top Slab Reinforcement
1. Near Center of Span
a.Transverse Reinforcement
2. Numbering of Sheets
Each section starts a new page numbering sequence. The page numbers are
located in the lower outside corners and begin with the chapter number,
followed by the section number, then a hyphen and sequential pagenumber.
Example: 5-1, 5-2, etc.
3. Appendices
Appendices are included to provide the designer with design aids (AppendixA)
and examples (Appendix B). Design aids are generally standard in nature,
whereas examples are modified to meet specific job requirements.
An appendix is numbered using the chapter followed by section number and
then a hyphen and the letter of the appendix followed by consecutivenumbers.
Example: 5.3-A1 (Box Girder Bridges) designates a design aid required or
useful to accomplish the work described in Chapter 5, Section 3.
4. Numbering of Tables and Figures
Tables and figures shall be numbered using the chapter, section, subsection in
which they are located, and then a hyphen followed by consecutive numbers.
Example: Figure 5.3.2-1 is the first figure found in Chapter 5, section 3,
subsection 2.
1.1.4 Revisions
Revisions to this manual are related to emerging concepts, new state or federal
legislation, and comments forwarded to the Bridge Design Office. Some revisions are
simple spot changes, whileothers aremajor chapter rewrites. The current version of the
manual is available online at: www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/manuals/m23-50.htm.
All pages include a revision number and publication date. When a page is revised, the
revision number and publication date are revised. Revisions shall be clearly indicated
in the text.
The process outlined below is followed for Bridge Design Manual revisions:
1. Revisions are prepared, checked and coordinated with chapter authors.
2. Revisions are submitted to the Bridge Design Engineer and the FHWA WA
Division Bridge Engineer for approval. However, comments related to grammar
and clarity can be sent directly to the BDM Coordinator without Bridge Design
Engineer or the FHWA approval.
3. After approval from the Bridge Design Engineer and FHWA, the BDM Coordinator
works with WSDOT Engineering Publications to revise the manual.
4. Revised pages from Engineering Publications are checked for accuracy and
corrected ifnecessary.
5. A Publication Transmittal is prepared by Engineering Publications. Publication
Transmittals include remarks and instructions for updating the manual. After
the Publications Transmittal has been signed by the State Bridge and Structures
Engineer, Engineering Publications will post the complete manual and revision at:
www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/manuals/m23-50.htm.
6. Engineering Publications will coordinate electronic and hard copy distributions.
A Revision QA/QC Worksheet (see Appendix 1.1-A1) shall be prepared to document
and track the revisionprocess.
The Scheduling Engineer monitors the design work schedule for the Bridge and
Structures Office, updates the Bridge Design Schedule (BDS) and maintains
records of bridge contract costs. Other duties include coordinating progress
reports to Regions by the Unit Supervisors and S&E Engineers through the
Project Delivery Information System (PDIS).
The Computer Support Unit is responsible for computer resource planning and
implementation, computer user support, liaison with Management Information
Systems (MIS), computer aided engineer operation support, and software
development activities. In addition, the unit works closely with the Bridge
Project Support Unit in updating this manual and Standard Plans.
The Consultant Liaison Engineer prepares bridge consultant agreements and
coordinates consultant PS&E development activities with those of the Bridge
Office. The Consultant Liaison Engineer negotiates bridge design contracts
withconsultants.
In addition, the Bridge Asset Management Engineer manages the bridge deck
protection, deck testing and the bridge research programs. It is responsible for the
planning, development, coordination, and implementation of new programs (e.g.,
Seismic Retrofit and Preventative Maintenance), experimental feature projects, new
product evaluation, and technology transfer.
The Bridge Asset Management Engineer is the Bridge and Structures Offices
official Public Disclosure contact. (See Section 1.3.9 Public Disclosure Policy
Regarding Bridge Plans).
E. State Bridge and Structures Architect
The State Bridge and Structures Architect is responsible for reviewing and
approving bridge preliminary plans, retaining walls, preparing renderings,
coordinating aesthetic activities with Regions (i.e. suggesting corridor themes and
approving public art), and other duties to improve the aesthetics of our bridges
and structures. The State Bridge and Structures Architect works closely with
bridge office and region staff. During the design phase, designers should get the
Architects approval for any changes to architectural details shown on the approved
preliminaryplan.
F. Staff Support Unit
The Staff Support Unit is responsible for many support functions, such as:
typing, timekeeping, payroll, receptionist, vehicle management, mail, inventory
management, and other duties requested by the Bridge and Structures Engineer.
Other duties include: filing field data, plans for bridges under contract or
constructed, and design calculations. This unit also maintains office supplies and
provides other services.
G. Office Administrator
The Office Administrator is responsible for coordinating personnel actions,
updating the organizational chart, ordering technical materials, and other duties
requested by the Bridge and Structures Engineer. Staff development and training
are coordinated through the Office Administrator. The Office Administrator also
handles logistical support, office and building maintenance issues.
ii. Provides justification for any deviation from Bridge Design Manual/
AASHTO.
iii. Provides justification for design approach.
iv. Provides justification for any deviation from office practices regarding
design and details.
v. Other differences.
c. Meet with the Region design staff and other project stakeholders early in
the design process to resolve as many issues as possible before proceeding
with final design and detailing.
d. Identify coordination needs with other designers, units, and offices.
e. Early in the project, the bridge sheet numbering system should be
coordinated with the Region design staff. For projects with multiple
bridges, each set of bridge sheets should have a unique set of bridge
sheetnumbers.
f. At least monthly or as directed by the Design Unit Manager:
i. Update Project Schedule and List of Sheets.
ii. Estimate percent complete.
iii. Estimate time to complete.
iv. Work with Design Unit Manager to adjust resources, if necessary.
g. Develop preliminary quantities for all cost estimates after the Preliminary
Plan stage.
h. Near end of project:
i. Develop quantities, Not Included in Bridge Quantity List, and Special
Provisions Checklist that are to be turned in with the plans. (See
Section12.4.4).
ii. Prepare the Bar List.
iii. Coordinate all final changes, including review comments received from
the Bridge Specifications and Estimates Engineer.
iv. Meet with Region design staff and other project stakeholders at the
constructabality review/round table review meetings to address final
project coordination issues.
The designer should inform the Design Unit Manager of any areas of the
design, which should receive special attention during checking and review.
The design calculations are prepared by the designer and become a very
important record document. Design calculations will be a reference
document during the construction of the structure and throughout the life
of the structure. It is critical that the design calculations be user friendly.
The design calculations shall be well organized, clear, properly referenced,
and include numbered pages along with a table of contents. The design
and check calculations shall be bound and archived in accordance with
Section 1.3.8. The bound calculations shall be stamped, signed, and dated
by a registered professional Engineer in the State of Washington and shall
follow the WSDOT Bridge and Structures offices policy for stamping
of plan sheets in accordance with Section 1.4.3.A.7. Computer files
shall be archived for use during construction, in the event that changed
conditionsarise.
The designer or another assigned individual is also responsible for resolving
construction problems referred to the Bridge Office during the life of
the contract. These issues will generally be referred through the Bridge
Technical Advisor, the Design Unit Manager, the Construction Support
Unit, or the HQ Construction-Bridge.
3. Structural Detailer Responsibility
The structural detailer is responsible for the quality and consistency of the
contract plan sheets. The structural detailer shall ensure that the Bridge Office
drafting standards as explained in Chapter 11 areupheld.
a. Refer to Chapter 11, for detailing practices.
b. Provide necessary and adequate information to ensure the contract plans are
accurate, complete, and readable.
c. Detail plan sheets in a consistent manner and follow accepted detailing
practices.
d. Check plans for geometry, reinforcing steel congestion, consistency, and
verify control dimensions.
e. Check for proper grammar and spelling.
f. On multiple bridge contracts, work with the Designer/Project Coordinator
to ensure that the structural detailing of all bridges within the contract shall
be coordinated to maximize consistency of detailing from bridge to bridge.
Extra effort will be required to ensure uniformity of details, particularly
if multiple design units and/or consultants are involved in preparing
bridgeplans.
g. Maintain an ongoing understanding of bridge construction techniques
andpractices.
4. Specialist Responsibility
All bridge and wall projects initiated with a signed Bridge Preliminary Plan.
The primary responsibility of the specialist is to act as a knowledge resource
for the Bridge and Structures Office, WSDOT, other governmental agencies
and consultants. Designers are encouraged to consult specialists for complex
projects early in the design process. Design Unit Managers overseeing a design
project should actively identify any complex or unusual features, early in
the design process, and encourage the designers involved to seek input from
the suitable Specialist. The Specialists maintain an active knowledge of their
specialty area, along with a current file of products and design procedures. The
Specialists maintain industry contacts. Specialists provide training in their area
of expertise.
Specialists are expected to remain engaged with the design efforts being
carried out in the office related to their specialty. At the discretion of the
Design Unit Manager, the Specialists may be requested to review, comment
on and initial plans in their area of expertise prepared by other designers.
Specialists are expected to review selected design work for consistency with
other WSDOT projects, and for adherence to current office practice and current
industrypractice.
Specialists assist the Bridge and Structures Engineer in reviewing and voting
on amendments to AASHTO specifications.
Specialists are responsible for keeping their respective chapters of the Bridge
Design Manual M 23-50 up to date.
The Concrete and Steel specialist act as Design Unit Managers for the
Structural Detailers within their unit. They are responsible for the day-to-day
supervision of the Structural Detailers, including timesheet and evaluation
responsibilities. The Concrete and Steel Specialists are also relied upon to assist
the Design Unit Manager in allocating detailing staff, and completing Structural
Detailer staffing projections.
A secondary responsibility of the Concrete and Steel Specialist is to serve as
Design Unit Manager when the Design Unit Manager is absent.
Sign Structure design, Wall design, and Traffic Barrier & Rail design are three
specialty areas where design and review work has traditionally been directed
to dedicated staff in each of the three main design groups within the Bridge
Design Office (see Section 1.2.3). Design guidance or review requests for
unusual or unique projects involving these three specialty areas should be
directed to the applicable Design Unit Manager for design or review.
5. Specification and Estimating Engineer Responsibilities
The S&E Engineer is responsible for compiling the PS&E package for bridge
and/or related highway structural components. This PS&E package includes
Special Provisions (Bridge Special Provisions or BSPs and General Special
Provisions or GSPs as appropriate), construction cost estimate, construction
working day schedule, test hole boring logs and other appendices as
appropriate, and the design plan package.
The S&E Engineer is also responsible for soliciting, receiving, compiling and
turning over to the designer all review comments received after the Bridge
Plans turn-in. It is imperative that all review comments are channeled through
the S&E Engineer to ensure consistency between the final bridge plans,
specifications and estimate.
For a detailed description of the S&E Engineers responsibilities, see
Section12.4.
c. The Design Unit Manager works closely with the design team during the
plan review phase. Review efforts should concentrate on reviewing the
completed plan details and design calculations for completeness and for
agreement with office criteria and office practices. Review the following
periodically and at the end of the project:
i. Design Criteria
Seismic design methodology, acceleration coefficient (a value), and any
seismic analysis assumptions.
Foundation report recommendations, selection of alternates.
Deviations from AASHTO, this manual and proper consideration of any
applicable Design Memorandums.
ii. Design Time and Budget
d. Estimate time to complete the project. Plan resource allocation for
completing the project to meet the scheduled Ad Date and budget. Monitor
monthly time spent on the project.
Plan and assign workforce to ensure a timely delivery of the project
within the estimated time and budget. At monthly Design Unit Managers
scheduling meetings, notify the Bridge Project Support Engineer if a project
is behind schedule.
e. Advise the Region of any project scope creep and construction cost
increases. As a minimum, use quarterly status reports to update Region on
project progress.
f. Use appropriate computer scheduling software or other means to monitor
time usage, to allocate resources, and to plan projects.
g. Review constructability issues. Are there any problems unique to the
project?
7. Bridge Design Engineers Responsibilities
The Bridge Design Engineer is the coach, mentor, and facilitator for the
WSDOT Bridge Design Procedure. The leadership and support provided by
this position is a major influence in assuring quality for structural designs
performed by both WSDOT and consultants. The following summarizes the
key responsibilities of the Bridge Design Engineer:
a. Prior to the Bridge Design Engineer stamping and signing any plans, he/
she shall perform a structural/constructability review of the plans. This
action is consistent with the responsible charge requirements of state laws
relating to Professional Engineers.
b. Review and approve the Preliminary Bridge Plans. The primary focus for
this responsibility is to assure that the most cost-effective and appropriate
structure type is selected for a particular bridge site.
c. Review unique project special provisions and Standard Specifications
M41-10 modifications relating to structures.
d. Facilitate partnerships between WSDOT, consultants, and the construction
industry stakeholders.
C. File Inclusions
The following items should be included in the file:
1. Index Sheets
Number all calculation sheets and prepare an index by subject with the
corresponding sheet numbers.
List the name of the project, SR Number, designer/checker initials, date
(month, day, and year), and Design Unit Managers initials.
2. Design Calculations
The design calculations should include design criteria, design assumptions,
loadings, structural analysis, one set of moment and shear diagrams and
pertinent computer input and output data (reduced to 8 by 11 sheet size).
The design criteria, design assumptions, and special design features should
follow in that order behind the index.
Computer-generated design calculations may be used instead of longhand
calculations. The calculation sheets shall be formatted similar to WSDOT
standard calculation sheets (WSDOT Form 232-007) for longhand designs. The
header for electronic calculation sheets shall carry WSDOT logo along with
project name, S.R. number, designer and checkers name, date, supervising
engineer, and sheet numbers.
All computer-generated or longhand design calculations shall be initialed by
the designer and checker. Checkers initial may not be necessary if separate
check calculations are provided.
Output from commercial software shall be integrated into design calculations
with a cover sheet that includes the WSDOT logo along with project name,
S.R. number, designer and checker's name, date, supervising engineer, and
sheetnumbers.
Consultant submitted design calculations shall comply with the above
requirements.
Design calculations prepared by the Bridge Design Office or Consultants
shall be sealed and signed by the Engineer of Record. Design calculations are
considered part of the process that develops contract plans which are the final
documents.
See Appendix 1.5-A2 for examples of Excel template for computer-generated
design calculations. Code and other references used in developing calculations
shall be specified. In general, when using Excel spreadsheet, enough
information and equations shall be provided/shown in the spreadsheet so that
an independent checker can follow the calculations.
3. Special Design Features
Brief narrative of major design decisions or revisions and the reasons for them.
from the Project Engineer. The Bridge Office does not have the entire
30-day review period to complete the review. Therefore, designers should
give construction reviews high priority and complete reviews in a timely
manner so costly construction delays are avoided. Time is also required
for marking, mailing and other processing. It is the goal of the Bridge
and Structures Office to return reviewed submittals back to the Project
Engineer within 7 to 14 days of their receipt by the Bridge Construction
SupportUnit.
Return all shop drawings and Contract Plans to the Construction Support
Unit when checking is completed. Include a list of any deviations from the
Contract Plans that are allowed and a list of any disagreements with the
Project Engineers comments (regardless of how minor they may be).
If deviations from the Contract Plans are to be allowed, a Change Order
may be required. Alert the Construction Support Unit so that their
transmittal letter may inform the Region and the HQ Construction Engineer
assigned to the project.
Under no circumstances should the reviewer mark on the shop plans that
a change order is required or notify the Project Engineer that a change
order is required. The authority for determining whether a change order
isrequired rests with HQ Construction Engineer assigned to the project.
B. Sign Structure, Signal, and Illumination Shop Plans
In addition to the instructions described under Section 1.3.6.A, thefollowing
instructions apply:
1. Review the shop plans to ensure that the pole sizes conform to the Contract
Plans. Determine if the fabricator has supplied plans for each pole or type of
pole called for in the contract.
2. Manufacturers details may vary slightly from contract plan requirements,
butmust be structurally adequate to be acceptable.
C. Geotechnical Submittals
The Bridge Office and the Geotechnical Services Branch concurrently review these
submittals which may include special design proprietary retaining walls, drilled
shafts, ground anchors, and soldier piles. HQ Construction Office is included
for the review of drilled shaft installation plans. The Construction Support Unit
combines these comments and prepares a unified reply that is returned to the
Project Engineer.
1.3.7 Contract Plan Changes (Change Orders and As-Builts)
A. Request for Changes
The following is intended as a guide for processing changes to the design plans
after a project has been awarded.
For projects which have been assigned a Bridge Technical Advisor (BTA),
structural design change orders can be approved at the Project Engineers
level provided the instructions outlined in the Construction Manual M 41-01
arefollowed.
For all other projects, all changes are to be forwarded through the Construction
Support Unit, which will inform the HQ Construction Engineer - Bridge.
Responses to inquiries should be handled as follows:
1. Request by Contractor or Supplier
A designer, BTA, or Design Unit Manager contacted directly by a contractor/
supplier may discuss a proposed change with the contractor/supplier, but shall
clearly tell the contractor/supplier to formally submit the proposed change
though the Project Engineer and that the discussion in no way implies approval
of the proposed change. Designers are to inform their Design Unit Manager if
they are contacted.
2. Request From the Region Project Engineer
Requests for changes directly from the Project Engineer to designer or the
Design Unit Manager should be discouraged. The Project Engineer should
contact HQ Construction - Bridge, who in turn will contact the designer
or Design Unit Manager if clarification is needed regarding changes. The
Construction Support Unit should be informed of any changes.
3. Request From the Region Construction Engineer
Requests from the Region Construction Engineer are to be handled like
requests from the Region Project Engineer.
4. Request From the HQ Construction Bridge
Requests for changes from HQ Construction Engineer assigned to the project
are usually made through the Construction Support Unit and not directly to
the Design Unit. However, sometimes, it is necessary to work directly with
the Design Unit. The Construction Support Unit should be informed of any
decisions made involving changes to the Contract Plans.
5. Request From the Design Unit
Request for changes from the Design Unit due to plan errors or omissions shall
be discussed with the Design Unit Manager prior to revising and issuing new
plan sheets.
B. Processing Contract Revisions
Changes to the Contract Plans or Specifications subsequent to the award of the
contract may require a contract plan revision. Revised or additional plan sheets,
which clearly identify the change on the plans, may be needed. When a revision
or an additional drawing is necessary, request the original plan sheets from the
Construction Support Units Bridge Archive Engineer and prepare revised or new
original plan sheets.
Sign, date, and send the new plan sheets to the Bridge Archive Engineer, to HQ
Construction Engineer assigned to the project, and to the Construction Support
Unit. The Designer is responsible for making the prints and distributing them.
This process applies to all contracts including HQ Ad and Award, Region Ad and
Award, or Local Agency Ad and Award.
Whenever new plan sheets are required as part of a contract revision, the
information in the title blocks of these sheets must be identical to the title blocks
of the contract they are for (e.g., Job Number, Contract No., Approved by, and
the Project Name). These title blocks shall also be initialed by the Bridge Design
Engineer, Design Unit Manager, designer, and reviewer before they are distributed.
If the changes are modifications made to an existing sheet, the sheet number will
remain the same. A new sheet shall be assigned the same number as the one in the
originals that it most closely resembles and shall be given a letter after the number
(e.g., if the new sheet applies to the original sheet 25 of 53, then it will have
number 25A of 53). The Bridge Plans Engineer in the Construction Support Unit
shall store the 11 by 17 original revision sheets.
Every revision will be assigned a number, which shall be enclosed inside a triangle.
The assigned number shall be located both at the location of the change on the
sheet and in the revision block of the plan sheet along with an explanation of
thechange.
Any revised sheets shall be sent to HQ Construction-Bridge with a written
explanation describing the changes to the contract, justification for the changes,
and a list of material quantity additions or deletions.
C. As-Built Plan Process
For more information on the as-built plan process for bridges, see the As-Built
Plans Manual, prepared by the Bridge and Structures Office, dated August 2003.
Copies are available from the Bridge Archive Engineer.
1.3.8 Archiving Design Calculations, Design Files, and S&E Files
A. Upon Award of the Project
The designer and checker will place a job file cover label on the bound design and
check calculations folder (see Figure 1.3-8.1). The designer shall then turn these in
to the Design Unit Manager or the assigned ProjectCoordinator.
The Unit Design Unit Manager or Project Coordinator shall turn in the bound
project design calculations and check calculations to the Bridge Archive Engineer.
The S&E Engineer is required to give the Bridge Archive Engineer the signed plan
sheets, job file, and S&E file.
Files will be placed in a temporary storage space marked as Design Unit
Document Temporary Storage. These cabinets will be locked, and only the Bridge
Archive Engineer, the Scheduling Engineer, and the Office Administrator will have
keys to them. The Design Files, S&E Files, and Design Calculations are organized
by the contract number.
A Bridge and Structures staff member may access the Design Files, S&E Files,
or Design Calculations by requesting the files from the Bridge Archive Engineer
or the Scheduling Engineer, who will check out the files and note the date and
persons name. If a person other than a Bridge and Structures Office staff member
requests these documents, the approval of the Bridge Design Engineer or Bridge
Asset Management Engineer will be required for release of the documents.
SR # County CS #
Bridge Name
Bridge # Contract #
Contents
Designed by Checked by
Cover
Cover Label
Label
Figure
Figure 1.3.8-1
1.3.8-1
Uponthe
B. B.Upon thePhysical
PhysicalContract
ContractCompletion
Completion The designer will update the
bound calculation file with any contract plan changes that have occurred
The designer
during will update the bound calculation file with any contract plan changes
construction.
that have occurred duringconstruction.
C. Nine Months After Physical Completion of the Contract
The Bridge Archive Engineer will place all reports, signed and stamped special
provisions, and bound design and check calculations in an archiving box and send
the documents to the Office of Secretary of State for archive storage, except as
otherwise approved by the Bridge Design Engineer.
The Bridge Archive Engineer will maintain a record of the documents location and
archive status.
D. Consultant Designs
Page 1-28 Prior to Ad, the Bridge and Structures office plan reviewer
WSDOT ofDesign
Bridge a Consultant
Manual design
M 23-50.15
December 2015
shall request the following from the design Consultant:
1. The bound project design calculations in paper form.
2. The signed and stamped structural plan sheets.
This request shall go through either the Bridge and Structures offices Consultant
Liaison or the Region Project Engineering office.
These documents shall be sent in the mail to the address shown in Standard
Specifications Section 6-02.3(16)A but shall be directed to the Bridge office PS&E
Engineer. The Bridge office PS&E Engineer will then give these documents to the
Bridge Archive Engineer.
All Consultant Ad Ready signed and stamped plan sheets and calculations need
tobe received by the Bridge office on later than two weeks prior to the Ad date.
E. Design-Build Projects
The Design-Builder shall follow the requirements of the RFP for submission of the
signed and stamped structural plan sheets and boundcalculations.
The Bridge Project Support Unit has Bridge Construction Cost Summary books.
These are grouped according to bridge types and have records of design time,
number of drawings, and bridge cost.
B. Estimate Design Time Required
The design team leader or the Unit Supervisor shall determine an estimate of
design time required to complete the project. The use of a spreadsheet, or other
means is encouraged to ensure timely completion and adherence to the schedule.
Use 150 hours for one staff month.
The following percentages should be used for the following activities:
Activity No. Percentage
1 40
2 20
3 20
4 5
5 5
6 5
7 5
Total 100%
The individual activities include the specific items as follows under each major
activity.
Activity No. 1 Design See Section 1.3.2.A.2 Includes:
1. Project coordination and maintaining the Design File.
2. Geometric computations.
3. Design calculations.
4. Complete check of all plan sheets by the designer.
5. Compute quantities and prepare barlist.
6. Preparing special provisions checklist.
7. Assemble backup data covering any unusual feature in the Design File.
Activity No. 2 Design Check See Section 1.3.2.A.3 Includes:
1. Checking design at maximum stress locations.
2. Checking major items on the drawings, including geometrics.
3. Additional checking required.
Activity No. 3 Drawings See Section 1.3.2.A.4 Includes:
1. Preparation of all drawings.
1.7 Appendices
Appendix 1.1-A1 Bridge Design Manual Revision QC/QA Worksheet
Appendix 1.3-A1 Bridge & Structures Design Calculations
Appendix 1.4-A1 QC/QA Signature Sheet
Revision Author
Revision Checker
Chapter Author
BDM Coordinator
Revision Description:
Charge Number:
WRITER
JOB FILE
STEEL
COMPLETE
Design Lead:
ARCHITECT
SEISMIC
& BEARING
CONCRETE
SPECIFICATION
Appendix 1.4-A1
CHECKER
DETAILER
DESIGNER
Date:
EXPANSION JOINT
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
QC/QA Signature Sheet
Chapter 1 General Information
1.99 References
1. LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Latest Edition and Interims. American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
Washington, D.C.
2. Design Manual M 22-01.
3. Construction Manual M 41-01.
4. As-Built Plans Manual, WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office, August2003.
5. AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design, Latest Edition
and Interims. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO), Washington, D.C.
5. Visit the project site with the Region, Materials Laboratory Geotechnical
Services Branch, and HQ Hydraulics staff.
FHWA expects specific information on scour and backwater elevations for the
permanent bridge piers, as well as, for any temporary falsework bents placed in the
waterway opening.
After the piers have been located, a memo requesting a Hydraulics Report should
be sent to the HQ Hydraulics Unit. The HQ Hydraulics Unit will submit a report
for inclusion as an appendix tothe TS&Lreport.
The State Bridge and Structures Architect should be consulted early in the TS&L
study period. Notes to the File should be made documenting the aesthetic
requirements and recommendations of the State Bridge and Structures Architect.
Cost backup data is needed for any costs used in the TS&L study. FHWA expects
TS&L costs to be based on estimated quantities. This cost data is to be included in
an appendix to the TS&L report. The quantities should be compatible with the S&E
Engineers cost breakdown method. The Specifications & Estimates Engineers
will check the designer's estimated costs included in TS&L reports. Inthe case
of consultant prepared TS&L reports, the designer shall have the S&E Engineers
check the construction costs.
B. TS&L Outline
The TS&L report should describe the project, the proposed structure, and give
reasons why the bridge type, size, and location were selected.
1. Cover, Title Sheet, and Index
These should identify the project, owner, location and the contents of the
TS&L.
2. Photographs
There should be enough color photographs to provide the look and feel of
the bridge site. Theprints should be numbered and labeled and the location
indicated on a diagram.
3. Introduction
The introduction describes the report, references, and other reports used to
prepare the TS&L study. The following reports should be listed, if used.
Design Reports and Supplements
Environmental Reports
Architectural Visual Assessment or Corridor Theme Reports
Hydraulic Report
Geotechnical Reports
4. Project Description
The TS&L report clearly defines the project. A vicinity map should be shown.
Care should be taken to describe the project adequately but briefly. The project
description summarizes the preferred alternative for the projectdesign.
5. Design Criteria
The design criteria identify the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
and AASHTO Guide Specifications that will be used in the bridge design.
Sometimes other design criteria or special loadings are used. These criteria
should be listed in the TS&L. Some examples in this category might be the
temperature loading used for segmental bridges or areas defined aswetlands.
6. Structural Studies
The structural studies section documents how the proposed structure Type,
Size, and Location were determined. The following considerations should
beaddressed.
Aesthetics Foundations
Cost estimates Hydraulics
Geometric constraints Feasibility of
Project staging and construction
stage construction Structural constraints
requirements Maintenance
This section should describe how each of these factors leads to the preferred
alternative. Show how each constraint eliminated or supported the preferred
alternatives. Here are some examples. Prestressed concrete girders could not
be used because environmental restrictions required that no permanent piers
could be placed in the river. This requires a 230-foot clear span. Restrictions
on falsework placement forced the use of self supporting precast concrete or
steel girders.
7. Executive Summary
The executive summary should be able to stand alone as a separate document.
The project and structure descriptions should be given. Show the recommended
alternative(s) with costs and include a summary of considerations used to select
preferred alternatives or to eliminate otheralternatives.
8. Drawings
Preliminary plan drawings of the recommended alternative are included in
an appendix. The drawings show the plan, elevation, and typical section. For
projects where alternative designs are specified as recommended alternatives,
preliminary plan drawings for each of the different structure types shall be
included. Supplemental drawings showing special features, such as complex
piers, are often included to clearly define the project.
B. Site Reconnaissance
The site data submitted by the Region will include photographs and a video of the
site. Even forminor projects, this may not be enough information for the designer
to work from to develop apreliminary plan. For most bridge projects, site visits
arenecessary.
Site visits with Region project staff and other project stakeholders, such as,
Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Services Branch, HQ Hydraulics, and Region
Design should be arranged with the knowledge and approval of the Bridge Project
Support Engineer.
C. Coordination
The designer is responsible for coordinating the design and review process
throughout the project. This includes seeking input from various WSDOT units
and outside agencies. The designer should consult with Materials Laboratory
Geotechnical Services Branch, HQ Hydraulics, Bridge Preservation Office, and
Region design and maintenance, and other resources for their input.
D. Consideration of Alternatives
In the process of developing the Preliminary Plan, the designer should brainstorm,
develop, and evaluate various design alternatives. See Section 2.2.3 General
Factors for Consideration and how they apply to a particular site. See also Section
2.1.5A. Preliminary design calculations shall be done to verify feasibility of girder
span and spacing, falsework span capacity, geometry issues, and construction
clearances. Generally, the number of alternatives will usually be limited to only
a few for most projects. For some smaller projects and most major projects,
design alternatives merit development and close evaluation. The job file should
contain reasons for considering and rejecting design alternatives. Thisprovides
documentation for the preferredalternative.
E. Designer Recommendation
The designer should be able to make a recommendation for the preferred
alternative after a thorough analysis of the needs and limitations of the site,
studying all information, and developing and evaluating the design alternatives for
the project. At this stage, the designer should discuss the recommendation with the
Bridge Project SupportEngineer.
F. Concept Approval
For some projects, the presentation, in E above, to the Bridge Project Support
Engineer will satisfy the need for concept approval. Large complex projects,
projects of unique design, or projects where two or more alternatives appear viable,
should be presented to the Bridge Design Engineer for his/her concurrence before
plan development is completed. For unique or complex projects a presentation
to the Region Project Engineer, and Bridge and Structures Office Peer Review
Committee may be appropriate.
2.2.2 Documentation
A. Job File
An official job file is created by the Bridge Scheduling Engineer when a memo
transmitting site data from the region is received by the Bridge and Structures
Office. This job file serves as a depository for all communications and resource
information for the job. Scheduling and time estimates are kept in this file, as
well as cost estimates, preliminary quantities, and documentation of all approvals.
Records of important telephone conversations and copies of e-mails approving
decisions are also kept in the job file.
After completing the Preliminary Plan, the job file continues to serve as a
depository for useful communications and documentation for all pertinent project
related information and decisions during the design process through andincluding
preparation of the Final Bridge PS&E.
B. Structure Site Data
All Preliminary Plans are developed from site data submitted by the Region. This
submittal will consist of a memorandum intra-departmental communication, and
appropriate attachments as specified by the Design Manual M22-01. When this
information is received, it should be reviewed for completeness so that missing or
incomplete information can be noted andrequested.
C. Request for Preliminary Foundation Data
A request for preliminary foundation data is sent to the Geotechnical Services
Branch to solicit any foundation data that is available at the preliminary bridge
design stage. See Appendix 2.2-A5. The Materials Laboratory Geotechnical
Services Branch is provided with approximate dimensions for the overall structure
length and width, approximate number of intermediate piers (if applicable), and
approximate stations for beginning and end of structure on the alignment.
Based on test holes from previous construction in the area, geological maps, and
soil surveys. The Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Services Branch responds by
memo and a report with an analysis of what foundation conditions are likely to be
encountered and what foundation types are best suited for the bridge site.
D. Request for Preliminary Hydraulics Data
A Request for preliminary hydraulics data is sent to the Hydraulics Branch to
document hydraulic requirements that must be considered in the structure design.
The Hydraulics Branch is provided a contour plan and other bridge site data.
The Hydraulics Branch will send a memo providing the following minimum data:
seal vent elevations, normal water, 100-year and 500-year flood elevations and
flows (Q), pier configuration, scour depth and minimum footing cover required, ice
pressure, minimum waterway channel width, riprap requirements, and minimum
clearance required to the 100-year flood elevation.
D. Structural
Limitation on structure depth
Requirements for future widening
Foundation and groundwater conditions
Anticipated settlement
Stage construction
Falsework limitations
E. Environmental
Site conditions (wetlands, environmentally sensitive areas, and cultural resources)
Environmental requirements
Mitigating measures
Construction access
F. Aesthetic
General appearance
Compatibility with surroundings and adjacent structures
Visual exposure and experience for public
G. Construction
Ease of construction
Falsework clearances and requirements
Erection problems
Hauling difficulties and access to site
Construction season
Time limit for construction
H. Hydraulic
Bridge deck drainage
Stream flow conditions and drift
Passage of flood debris
Scour, effect of pier as an obstruction (shape, width, skew, number of columns)
Bank and pier protection
Consideration of a culvert as an alternate solution
Permit requirements for navigation and stream work limitations
I. Maintenance
Concrete vs. Steel
Expansion joints
Bearings
Deck protective systems
Inspection and Maintenance Access (UBIT clearances) (see Figure 2.3.11-1)
J. Other
Prior commitments made to other agency officials and individuals of the
community Recommendations resulting from preliminary studies
K. Bridge Security
Mitigation measures for the inappropriate and illegal access to the bridge
Employing the methods of Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design
(CPTED)
2.2.4 Permits
A. Coast Guard
As outlined in the Design Manual M 22-01, Additional Data for Waterway
Crossings, the Bridge and Structures Office is responsible for coordinating and
applying for Coast Guard permits for bridges over waterways. The Coast Guard
Liaison Engineer in the Bridge Project Support Unit of the Bridge and Structures
Office handles this.
A determination of whether a bridge project requires a Coast Guard permit is
typically determined by Region Environmental during the early scoping phase.
This scoping is done before the bridge site data is sent to the Bridge and Structures
Design Office/Unit.
The Region Design Engineer should request that the Environmental Coordinator
consult with the Coast Guard Liaison Engineer prior to sending the bridge site data
if possible.
Generally, tidal-influenced waterways and waterways used for commercial
navigation will require Coast Guard permits. See the Design Manual M22-01,
chapter covering Environmental Permits and Approvals, or the Environmental
Manual M 31-11, Chapter 500 for general permitting information. Section 9
Permit Bridge Work in Navigable Waters can be found on the WSDOT Federal
Environmental Permits and Approval web page, www.wsdot.wa.gov/environment/
permitting/permitfsl.htm. Permitting procedures are available on the WSDOT
Environmental Permitting tools and help page, www.wsdot.wa.gov/environment/
permitting/permittools.htm
For all waterway crossings, the Coast Guard Liaison Engineer is required to initial
the Preliminary Plan as to whether a Coast Guard permit or exemption is required.
This box regarding Coast Guard permit status is located in the center left margin
of the plan. If a permit is required, the permit target date will also be noted. The
reduced print, signed by the Coast Guard Liaison Engineer, shall be placed in the
job file.
The work on developing the permit application should be started before the bridge
site data is complete so that it is ready to be sent to the Coast Guard at least eight
months prior to the project ad date. The Coast Guard Liaison Engineer should
be given a copy of the preliminary plans from which to develop the Coast Guard
Application plan sheets, which become part of the permit.
B. Other
All other permits will be the responsibility of the Region (see the Design Manual
M22-01). The Bridge and Structures Office may be asked to provide information
to the Region to assist them in making applications for thesepermits.
The architectural concept for a project corridor is generally developed in draft form
and reviewed with the project stakeholders prior to finalizing. When finalized,
itshould be signed by the Region Administrator or his/her designee.
Approval from the State Bridge and Structures Architect is required on all retaining
walls and noise wall aesthetics including finishes and materials, and configuration.
In order to achieve superstructure type optimization and detailing consistency,
the following guidelines shall be used for the preparation of all future
PreliminaryPlans:
Preliminary Plans for all steel bridges and structures shall be reviewed by the
Steel Specialist.
Preliminary Plans for all concrete bridges and structures shall be reviewed by
the Concrete Specialist.
Detailing of all Preliminary Plans shall be reviewed by the Preliminary Plans
DetailingSpecialist.
These individuals shall signify their approval by signing the preliminary plan in the
Architect/Specialist block on the first plan sheet, together with the State Bridge and
Structures Architect.
B. Bridge Design
The Bridge Project Support Engineer signs the preliminary plan after it has been
checked and approved by the Architect/Specialists. At this point, itis ready for
review, approval, and signing by the Bridge Design Engineer.
After the Bridge Design Engineer has signed the preliminary plan, it is returned to
the designer. The designer places the original signed preliminary plan in the job file
and enters the names of the signers in the signature block. This preliminary plan
will be sent to region for their review and approval.
The transmittal memo includes the preliminary plan and the WSDOT Form
230-038 Not Included in Bridge Quantities List and a brief explanation of the
preliminary cost estimate. This is a list of non-bridge items that appear on the
bridge preliminary plan and eventually will be covered in the Regions design
plans. It is addressed to the Region Administrator/Project Development Engineer
from the Bridge and Structures Engineer/Bridge Design Engineer. The memo is
reviewed by the Bridge Project Support Engineer and is initialed by the Bridge
Design Engineer.
The following should be included in the cc distribution list with attachments:
1. FHWA Washington Division Bridge Engineer (when project has Federal
Funding),
2. Region Project Engineer,
3. Bridge Project Support Engineer,
4. Bridge Design Unit Manager, State Geotechnical Engineer,
5. HQ Hydraulics Engineer (when it is a water crossing),
For completed shelf projects, the S&E Engineer will contact the Region Project
Engineer and inform the Design Unit Manager or lead reviewer on the need for
shoring plans for structures adjacent to railroads. Ifshoring plans are required, the
Design Unit Manager or lead designer may ask the Construction Support Unit to
prepare shoringplans.
At the 50 percent PS&E plan completion stage or sooner if possible, especially for
seismic retrofit project, the S&E Engineer will send four (4) copies of the layout,
foundation plan, temporary shoring plans, and appropriate special provision section
for structures adjacent to railroads to the HQ RR Liaison Engineer, who will submit
this package to the appropriate railroad for review and approval. The shoring plans
shall show the pressure loading diagram and calculations to expedite the railroads
review and approval.
Bridge piers and abutments ideally should be placed such that the minimum
clearances can besatisfied. However, if for structural or economic reasons, the best
span arrangement requires apier tobe within clear zone or recovery area, and then
guardrail or barrier can be used to mitigatethehazard.
There are instances where it may not be possible to provide the minimum
horizontal clearance evenwith guardrail or barrier. An example would be
placement of a bridge pier in a narrow median.The required column size may
be such that it would infringe on the shoulder of the roadway. In such cases, the
barrier safety shape would be incorporated into the shape of the column. Barrier
or guardrail would need to taper into the pier at a flare rate satisfying the criteria
in the DesignManualM 22-01. See Figure 2.3.1-2. The reduced clearance to the
pier would need to be approved by the Region. Horizontal clearances, reduced
temporarily for construction, arecovered inSection 2.3.9.
D. Vertical Clearances
The required minimum vertical clearances are established by the functional
classification of the highway and the construction classification of the project.
Forstate highways, this is as outlined in the Design Manual M22-01. For city and
county arterials, this is as outlined in Chapter IV of theLocalAgency Guidelines
M36-63.
Actual minimum vertical clearances are shown on the Preliminary Plan (to the
nearest 0.1 foot). The approximate location of the minimum vertical clearance
is noted in the upper left margin of the plan. For structures crossing divided
highways, minimum vertical clearances for both directions are noted.
E. End Slopes
The type and rate of end slope used at bridge sites is dependent on several factors.
Soil conditions and stability, right of way availability, fill height or depth of cut,
roadway alignment and functional classification, and existing site conditions are
important.
The region should have made a preliminary determination based on these factors
during the preparation of the bridge site data. The side slopes noted on the
Roadway Section for the roadway should indicate the type and rate of end slope.
The Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Services Branch will recommend the
minimum rate of end slope. This should be compared to the rate recommended
inthe Roadway Section and to existing site conditions (if applicable). The types
ofend slopes and bridge slope protection are discussed in the DesignManual
M22-01. Examples of slope protection are shown in Standard PlansM 21-01
Section A.
F. Determination of Bridge Length
Establishing the location of the end piers for a highway crossing is a function of the
profile grade of the overcrossing roadway, the superstructure depth, the minimum
vertical and horizontal clearances required for the structure, the profile grade and
channelization (including future widening) of the undercrossing roadway, and the
type and rate of end slope used.
For the general case of bridges in cut or fill slopes, the control point is where
the cut or fill slope plane meets the bottom of roadside ditch or edge of shoulder
as applicable. From this point, the fill or cut slope plane is established at the
recommended rate up to where the slope plane intersects the grade of the roadway
at the shoulder. Following the requirements of Standard Plans M 21-01 SectionA,
the back of pavement seat, end of wing wall or end of retaining wall can be
established at 3 behind the slope intersection. See Figure 2.3.1-3
For the general case of bridges on wall type abutments or closed abutments,
the controlling factors are the required horizontal clearance and the size of the
abutment. This situation would most likely occur in an urban setting or where right
of way or span length is limited.
G. Pedestrian Crossings
Pedestrian crossings follow the same format as highway crossings. Geometric
criteria for bicycle and pedestrian facilities are established in the Design Manual
M 22-01. Width and clearances would be as established there and as confirmed by
region. Minimum vertical clearance over a roadway isgiven in the Design Manual
M 22-01. Unique items to be addressed with pedestrian facilities include ADA
requirements, the railing to be used, handrail requirements, overhead enclosure
requirements, andprofile grade requirements for ramps andstairs.
H. Bridge Redundancy
Design bridges to minimize the risk of catastrophic collapse by using redundant
supporting elements (columns and girders).
For substructure design use:
One column minimum for roadways 40 wide and under. Two columns minimum
for roadways over 40 to 60. Three columns minimum for roadways over 60.
Collision protection or design for collision loads for piers with one or two columns
is required. For superstructure design use:
Three girders (webs) minimum for roadways 32 and under. Four girders (webs)
minimum for roadways over 32. See Appendix 2.3-A2-1 for details.
Note: Any deviation from the above guidelines shall have a written approval by the
Bridge Design Engineer.
Horizontal clearance shall be measured from the center of the outside track to
the face of pier. When the track is on a curve, the minimum horizontal clearance
shall be increased at the rate of 1 for each degree of curvature. An additional
8 of clearance for off-track equipment shall only be provided when specifically
requested by the railroad.
The actual minimum horizontal clearances shall be shown in the Plan view of the
Preliminary Plan (tothe nearest 0.1 foot).
E. Crash Walls
Crash walls, when required, shall be designed to conform to the criteria of
the AREMA Manual. To determine when crash walls are required, consult the
following:
Union Pacific Railroad Guidelines for Design of Highway Separation Structures
over Railroad (Overhead Grade Separation)
AREMA Manual Railroad Liaison Engineer the Railroad.
F. Vertical Clearances
For railway over highway grade separations, the provisions of Section2.3.1
pertaining to vertical clearances of highway crossings shall apply. For highway
over railway grade separations, the minimum vertical clearance shall satisfy the
requirements of the DesignManual M 22-01.
The actual minimum vertical clearances shall be shown on the Preliminary Plan
(tothe nearest 0.1foot). The approximate location ofthe minimum vertical
clearance is noted in the upper left margin ofthe plan.
G. Determination of Bridge Length
For railway over highway grade separations, the provisions of Section 2.3.1
pertaining to the determination of bridge length shall apply. For highway over
railway grade separations, the minimum bridge length shall satisfy the minimum
horizontal clearance requirements. The minimum bridge length shall generally
satisfy the requirements of Figure 2.3.2-1.
H. Special Considerations
For highway over railway grade separations, the top of footings for bridge piers or
retaining walls adjacent to railroad tracks shall be 2 or more below the elevation of
the top of tie and shall not have less than 2 of cover from the finished ground. The
footing face shall not be closer than 10 to the center of the track. Any cofferdams,
footings, excavation, etc., encroaching within 10 of the center of the track requires
the approval of the railroad.
I. Construction Openings
For railroad clearances, see Design Manual M 22-01. The minimum horizontal
construction opening is 9 to either side of the centerline of track. The minimum
vertical construction opening is 23-6 above the top of rail at 6 offset from the
centerline of track. Falsework openings shall be checked to verify that enough
space is available for falsework beams to span the required horizontal distances and
still provide the minimum vertical falsework clearance. Minimum vertical openings
of less than 23-6 shall be coordinated with the HQ Railroad LiaisonEngineer.
2.3.3 Water Crossings
A. Bridge Width
The provisions of Section 2.3.1 pertaining to bridge width for highway crossings
apply here.
B. Horizontal Clearances
Water crossings over navigable waters requiring clearance for navigation channels
shall satisfy the horizontal clearances required by the Coast Guard. Communication
with the Coast Guard will be handled through the Coast Guard Liaison Engineer.
For bridges over navigable waters, the centerline of the navigation channel and
the horizontal clearances (to the nearest 0.1 foot) to the piers or the pier protection
shall be shown on the Plan view of the Preliminary Plan. Pier locations shall be
reviewed by the HQ Hydraulics unit.
C. Vertical Clearances
Vertical clearances for water crossings must satisfy floodway clearance and, where
applicable, navigation clearance.
Bridges over navigable waters must satisfy the vertical clearances required by
the Coast Guard. Communication with the Coast Guard will be handled through
the Coast Guard Liaison Engineer. The actual minimum vertical clearance (to the
nearest 0.1 foot) for the channel span shall be shown on the Preliminary Plan.
The approximate location of the minimum vertical clearance shall be noted in the
upper left margin of the plan. The clearance shall be shown to the water surface as
required by the Coast Guard criteria.
Floodway vertical clearance will need to be discussed with the Hydraulics Branch.
In accordance with the flood history, nature of the site, character of drift, and other
factors, they will determine a minimum vertical clearance for the 100-year flood.
The roadway profile and the bridge superstructure depth must accommodate this.
The actual minimum vertical clearance to the 100-year flood shall be shown (to
the nearest 0.1 foot) on the Preliminary Plan, and the approximate location of the
minimum vertical clearance shall be noted in the upper left margin of the plan.
D. End Slopes
The type and rate of end slopes for water crossings is similar to that for highway
crossings. Soil conditions and stability, fill height, location of toe of fill, existing
channel conditions, flood and scour potential, and environmental concerns are
allimportant.
As with highway crossings, the Region, and Materials Laboratory Geotechnical
Services Branch will make preliminary recommendations as to the type and rate of
end slope. The Hydraulics Branch will also review the Regions recommendation
for slope protection.
E. Determination of Bridge Length
Determining the overall length of a water crossing is not as simple and
straightforward as for a highway crossing. Floodway requirements and
environmental factors have a significant impact on where piers and fill can be
placed.
If a water crossing is required to satisfy floodway and environmental concerns, it
will be known by the time the Preliminary Plan has been started. Environmental
studies and the Design Report prepared by the region will document any
restrictions on fill placement, pier arrangement, and overall floodway clearance.
The Hydraulics Branch will need to review the size, shape, and alignment of all
bridge piers in the floodway and the subsequent effect they will have on the base
flood elevation. The overall bridge length may need to be increased depending
on the span arrangement selected and the change in the flood backwater, or
justification will need to bedocumented.
F. Scour
The Hydraulics Branch will indicate the anticipated depth of scour at the bridge
piers. They will recommend pier shapes to best streamline flow and reduce the
scour forces. They will also recommend measures to protect the piers from scour
activity or accumulation of drift (use of deep foundations, minimum cover to
top of footing, riprap, pier alignment to stream flow, closure walls between pier
columns,etc.).
G. Pier Protection
For bridges over navigable channels, piers adjacent to the channel may require
pier protection such as fenders or pile dolphins. The Coast Guard will determine
whether pier protection is required. This determination is based on the horizontal
clearance provided for the navigation channel and the type of navigation traffic
using the channel.
H. Construction Access and Time Restrictions
Water crossings will typically have some sort of construction restrictions associated
with them. These must be considered during preliminary plan preparation.
The time period that the Contractor will be allowed to do the work within the
waterway may be restricted by regulations administered by various agencies.
Depending on the time limitations, a bridge with fewer piers or faster pier
construction may be more advantageous even if more expensive.
Contractor access to the water may also be restricted. Shore areas supporting
certain plant species are sometimes classified as wetlands. A work trestle may be
necessary in order to work in or gain access through such areas. Work trestles may
also be necessary for bridge removal as well as new bridge construction. Work
trestle feasibility, location, staging, deck area and approximate number of piles,
and estimated cost need to be determined to inform the Region as part of the bridge
preliminary plan.
I. Culvert that qualify as a bridge per National Bridge Inspection Standards (NBIS)
shall be designed to meet above requirements for Water Crossings.
2.3.4 Bridge Widening
A. Bridge Width
The provisions of Section 2.3.1 pertaining to bridge width for highway crossings
shall apply. In most cases, the width to be provided by the widening will be what is
called for by the design standards, unless a deviation isapproved.
B. Traffic Restrictions
Bridge widening involve traffic restrictions on the widened bridge and, if
applicable, on the lanes below the bridge. The bridge site data submitted by the
region should contain information regarding temporary lane widths and staging
configurations. This information should be checked to be certain that the existing
bridge width and the bridge roadway width during the intermediate construction
stages of the bridge are sufficient for the lane widths, shy distances, temporary
barriers, and construction room for the contractor. These temporary lane widths
and shy distances are noted on the Preliminary Plan. The temporary lane widths
and shy distances on the roadway beneath the bridge being widened should also be
checked to ensure adequate clearance is available for any substructureconstruction.
C. Construction Sequence
A construction sequence shall be developed using the traffic restriction data in the
bridge site data. The construction sequence shall take into account the necessary
steps for construction of the bridge widening including both the substructure and
superstructure. Placement of equipment is critical because of limited access and
working space limitations. Space is required for cranes to construct shafts and erect
the girders. Consult the Construction Support Unit for crane information, such
as: boom angle, capacities, working loads, working radius, and crane footprint.
Construction work off of and adjacent to the structure and the requirements of
traffic flow on and below the structure shall be taken into account. Generally,
cranes are not allowed to lift loads while supported from the existing structure.
Checks shall be made to be certain that girder spacing, closure pours, and removal
work are all compatible with the traffic arrangements.
Projects with several bridges being widened at the same time should have
sequencing that is compatible with the Regions traffic plans during construction
and that allow the Contractor room to work. It is important to meet with the Region
project staff to assure that the construction staging and channelization of traffic
during construction is feasible and minimizes impact to the travelingpublic.
Limits of Under Bridge Inspection Truck
Figure 2.3.11-1
B. Safety Cables
Safety cables strung on steel plate girders or trusses allow for walking access. Care
must be given to the application and location. Built-up plate girder bridges are
detailed with a safety cable for inspectors walking the bottom flange. However,
when the girders become more than 8 deep, the inspection of the top flange and top
lateral connections becomes difficult to access. It is not feasible for the inspectors
to stand on the bottom flanges when the girders are less than 5 deep. On large
trusses, large gusset plates (3 or more wide) are difficult to circumvent. Tie-off
cables are best located on the interior side of the exterior girder of the bridge except
at large gusset plates. At these locations, cables or lanyard anchors should be
placed on the inside face of the truss so inspectors can utilize bottom lateral gusset
plates to stand on while traversing around the main truss gussetplates.
C. Travelers
Under bridge travelers, placed on rails that remain permanently on the bridge, can
be considered on large steel structures. This is an expensive option, but it should be
evaluated for large bridges with high average daily traffic (ADT) because access
to the bridge would be limited by traffic windows that specify when a lane can be
closed. Some bridges are restricted to weekend UBIT inspection forthisreason.
D. Abutment Slopes
Slopes in front of abutments shall provide enough overhead clearance to the bottom
of the superstructure to access bearings for inspection and possible replacement
(usually 3minimum).
E. Inspection Lighting and Access
1. Reinforced Concrete Box and Post-Tensioned Concrete Box Girders
Refer to Section 5.2.6 for design criteria.
2. Composite Steel Box Girders
All steel box or tub girders shall have inspection lighting and access.
Inside clear height shall be 5feet or greater to provide reasonable
inspection access.
Refer to Section 6.4.9 for design criteria.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
i. Constant Depth
Simple span 1/22
Continuous spans 1/25
ii. Variable Depth
Adjust ratios to account for change in relative stiffness of positive and
negative momentsections.
B. Reinforced Concrete Tee-Beam
1. Application
This type of Super Structure is not recommended for new bridges. It could
only be used for bridge widening and bridges with tight curvature or unusual
geometry.
Used for continuous spans 30 to 60. Has been used for longer spans with
inclined legpiers.
2. Characteristics
Forming and falsework is more complicated than for aconcrete slab.
Construction time is longer than for a concrete slab.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
i. Constant Depth
Simple spans 1/13
Continuous spans 1/15
ii. Variable Depth
Adjust ratios to account for change in relative stiffness ofpositive and
negative momentsections.
C. Reinforced Concrete Box Girder
WSDOT restricts the use of cast-in-place reinforced concrete box girder for bridge
superstructure. This type of superstructure may only be used for bridges with tight
curvatures orirregular geometry upon Bridge Design Engineer approval.
1. Application
This type of super structure is not recommended for new bridges. It could
only be used for bridge widening and bridges with tight curvature or unusual
geometry.
Used for continuous spans 50 to 120. Maximum simple span 100 to limit
excessive dead load deflections.
2. Characteristics
Forming and falsework is somewhat complicated. Construction time is
approximately the same as for a tee-beam. High torsional resistance makes it
desirable for curved alignments.
3. Depth/Span Ratios*
i. Constant Depth
Simple spans 1/18
Continuous spans 1/20
ii. Variable Depth
Adjust ratios to account for change in relative stiffness ofpositive and
negative moment sections.
*If the configuration of the exterior web is sloped and curved, a larger
depth/span ratio may be necessary.
D. Post-tensioned Concrete Box Girder
1. Application
Normally used for continuous spans longer than 120 or simple spans longer
than 100. Should be considered for shorter spans if a shallower structure depth
is needed.
2. Characteristics
Construction time is somewhat longer due to post-tensioning operations. High
torsional resistance makes it desirable for curved alignments.
3. Depth/Span Ratios*
i. Constant Depth
Simple spans 1/20.5
Continuous spans 1/25
ii. Variable Depth
Two span structures
At Center of span 1/25
At Intermediate pier 1/12.5
Multi-span structures
At Center of span 1/36
At Intermediate pier 1/18
*If the configuration of the exterior web is sloped and curved, a larger
depth/span ratio may be necessary.
2. Characteristics
Superstructure design is quick for pre-tensioned girders with proven user-
friendly software (PGSuper, PGSplice, and QConBridge)
Construction details and forming are fairly simple. Construction time is less
than for a cast-in-place bridge. Little or no falsework is required. Falsework
over traffic is usually not required; construction time over existing traffic
isreduced.
Precast girders usually require that the bridge roadway superelevation
transitions begin and end at or near piers; location of piers should consider this.
The Region may be requested to adjust these transition points ifpossible.
Fully reinforced, composite 8 inch cast-in-place deck slabs continuous over
interior piers or reinforced 5 inch cast-in-place deck slabs continuous over
interior piers have been used withe.and f.
F. Composite Steel Plate Girder
1. Application
Used for simple spans up to 260 and for continuous spans from 120 to 400.
Relatively low dead load when compared to a concrete superstructure makes
this bridge type an asset in areas where foundation materials are poor.
2. Characteristics
Construction details and forming are fairly simple Construction time is
comparatively short. Shipping and erecting of large sections must be reviewed.
Cost of maintenance is higher than for concrete bridges. Current cost
information should be considered because of changing steel market conditions.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
i. Constant Depth
Simple spans 1/22
Continuous spans 1/25
ii. Variable Depth
@ Center of span 1/40
@ Intermediate pier 1/20
G. Composite Steel Box Girder
1. Use
Used for simple spans up to 260 and for continuous spans from 120 to 400.
Relatively low dead load when compared to a concrete superstructure makes
this bridge type an asset in areas where foundation materials are poor.
Inside clear height of less than 5feet shall not be used because reasonable
inspection access cannot be provided.
2. Characteristics
Construction details and forming are more difficult than for a steel plate
girder. Shipping and erecting of large sections must be reviewed. Current cost
information should be considered because of changing steel market conditions.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
i. Constant Depth
Simple spans 1/22
Continuous spans 1/25
ii. Variable Depth
At Center of span 1/40
At Intermediate pier 1/20
Note: Sloping webs are not used on box girders of variable depth.
H. Steel Truss
1. Application
Used for simple spans up to 300 and for continuous spans up to 1,200. Used
where vertical clearance requirements dictate a shallow superstructure and
long spans or where terrain dictates long spans and construction by cantilever
method.
2. Characteristics
Construction details are numerous and can be complex. Cantilever construction
method can facilitate construction over inaccessible areas. Through trusses
are discouraged because of the resulting restricted horizontal and vertical
clearances for the roadway.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
a. Simple spans 1/6
b. Continuous spans
@ Center of span 1/18
@ Intermediate pier 1/9
I. Segmental Concrete Box Girder
1. Application
Used for continuous spans from 200 to 700. Used where site dictates long
spans and construction by cantilever method.
2. Characteristics
Use of travelers for the form apparatus facilitates the cantilever construction
method enabling long-span construction without falsework. Precast concrete
segments may be used. Tight geometric control is required during construction
to ensure proper alignment.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
Variable depth
At Center of span 1/50
At Intermediate pier 1/20
J. Railroad Bridges
1. Use
For railway over highway grade separations, most railroad companies prefer
simple span steel construction. This is to simplify repair and reconstruction in
the event of derailment or some other damage to the structure.
2. Characteristics
The heavier loads of the railroad live load require deeper and stiffer members
than for highway bridges. Through girders can be used to reduce overall
structure depth if the railroad concurs. Piers should be normal to the railroad to
eliminate skew loading effects.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
Constant depth
Simple spans 1/12
Continuous two span 1/14
Continuous multi-span 1/15
K. Timber
1. Use
Generally used for spans under 40. Usually used for detour bridges and
other temporary structures. Timber bridges are not recommended for
WSDOTBridges.
2. Characteristics
Excellent for short-term duration as for a detour. Simple design and details.
3. Depth/Span Ratios
Constant depth
Simple span Timber beam 1/10
Simple span Glulam beam 1/12
Continuous spans 1/14
L. Other
Bridge types such as cable-stayed, suspension, arch, tied arch, and floating bridges
have special and limited applications. The use of these bridge types is generally
dictated by site conditions. Preliminary design studies will generally bedone when
these types of structures are considered.
D. Architectural Details
Rustication grooves, relief panels, pilasters, and decorative finishes may visually
improve appearance at transitions between different structure types such as cast-
in-place abutments to structural earth retaining walls. Contact the State Bridge and
Structures Architect forguidance.
In special circumstances custom designs may be provided. Designs rising to
the level of art shall be subject to the procedures outlined in the Design Manual
M22-01
2.5.5 Superstructure
The horizontal elements of the bridge are perhaps the strongest features. The sizing
of the structure depth based on the span/depth ratios in Section2.4.1, will generally
produce a balanced relationship.
Designs rising to the level of "Art" shall be subject to the procedures outlined in the
Design Manual M22-01.
Haunches or rounding of girders at the piers can enhance the structures appearance.
The use of such features should be kept within reason considering fabrication of
materials and construction of formwork. The amount of haunch should be carefully
reviewed for overall balance from the primary viewing perspective. Haunches are not
limited to cast-in-place superstructures, but may be used in special cases on precast,
prestressed I girders. They require job-specific forms which increase cost, and standard
design software is not directly applicable.
The slab overhang dimension should approach that used for the structure depth. This
dimension should be balanced between what looks good for aesthetics and what is
possible with a reasonable slab thickness andreinforcement.
For box girders, the exterior webs can be sloped, but vertical webs arepreferred. The
amount of slope should not exceed l: l for structural reasons, and should be limited
to 4:1 if sloped webs are desired. Sloped webs should only be used in locations of high
aesthetic impact.
When using precast, prestressed girders, all spans shall be the same series, unless
approved otherwise by the Bridge Design Engineer.
2.6 Miscellaneous
2.6.1 Structure Costs
See Section 12.3 for preparing cost estimates for preliminary bridgedesign.
2.6.2 Handling and Shipping Precast Members and Steel Beams
Bridges utilizing precast concrete beams or steel beams need to have their access
routes checked and sites reviewed to be certain that the beams can be transported to
thesite. It must also be determined that they can be erected once they reach the site.
Both the size and the weight of the beams must be checked. Likely routes to the site
must be adequate to handle the truck and trailer hauling the beams. Avoid narrow
roads with sharp turns, steep grades, and/or load-rated bridges, which may prevent the
beams from reaching the site. The Bridge Preservation Office should be consulted for
limitations on hauling lengths and weights.
Generally 252 kips is the maximum weight of a girder that may be hauled by truck.
The site should be reviewed for adequate space for the contractor to set up the cranes
and equipment necessary to pick up and place the girders. The reach and boom angle
should be checked and should accommodate standard cranes.
2.6.3 Salvage of Materials
When a bridge is being replaced or widened, the material being removed should be
reviewed for anything that WSDOT may want to salvage. Items such as aluminum
rail, luminaire poles, sign structures, and steel beams should be identified for possible
salvage. The Region should be asked if such items are to be salvaged since they will
beresponsible for storage and inventory of these items.
C. Superstructure
Concrete Slab 7 inch minimum thickness with epoxy coated steel reinforcing
bars in general with 5 inch minimum thickness for deck girders and 8 inch
minimum thickness for steel girders.
Prestressed Girders Girder spacing will vary depending on roadway width
and span length. Theslaboverhang dimension is approximately half of the girder
spacing. Girder spacing typically ranges between 6 and 12.
Intermediate Diaphragms Locate in accordance with Table 5.6.2-1 and Section
5.6.4.C. Provide full or partial depth in accordance with Section 5.6.4.C.4.
End Diaphragms End Wall on Girder type.
Traffic Barrier Use 3-6 high F-shape or Single-sloped barrier to meet
worker fall protection requirements.
Fixed Diaphragm at Inter. Piers Full or partial width of crossbeam between
girders and outside of the exterior girders.
Hinged Diaphragm at Inter. Piers Partial width of crossbeam between girders.
Sloped curtain panel full width of crossbeam outside of exterior girders, fixed to
ends of crossbeam.
BP Rail 36 overall height for pedestrian traffic. 46 overall height for
bicycle traffic.
Sidewalk 6-inch height at curb line. Transverse slope of -0.02feet per foot
towards the curb line.
Sidewalk barrier Inside face is vertical. Outside face slopes 1:12outward.
The following table provides guidance regarding maximum bridge superstructure
length beyond which the use of either intermediate expansion joints or modular
expansion joints at the ends isrequired.
Maximum Length Maximum Length
(Western WA) (Eastern WA)
Superstructure Type Stub Abutment L-Abutment Stub Abutment L-Abutment
Concrete Superstructure
Prestressed Girders* 450' 900' 450' 900'
PT Spliced Girder ** 400' 700' *** 400' 700' ***
CIP-PT Box Girders ** 400' 400' 400' 700' ***
Steel Superstructure
Steel Plate Girder
300' 1000' 300' 800'
Steel Box Girder
* Based upon 0.16" creep shortening per 100' of superstructure length, and 0.12" shrinkage shortening per 100' of
superstructure length
** Based upon 0.31" creep shortening per 100' of superstructure length, and 0.19" shrinkage shortening per 100' of
superstructure length
*** Can be increased to 800' if the joint opening at 64F at time of construction is specified in the expansion joint table to
be less than the minimum installation width of 1". This condition is acceptable if the gland is already installed when
steel shapes are installed in the blockout. Otherwise (staged construction for example) the gland would need to be
installed at temperatures less than 45F.
Table 2.7.1
D. Examples
Appendices 2.3-A2-1 and 2.7-A1-1 detail the standard design elements of a
standard highwaybridge.
The following bridges are good examples of a standard highway bridge. However,
they do have some modifications to the standard.
SR 17 Undercrossing 395/110 Contract 3785
Mullenix Road Overcrossing 16/203E&W Contract 4143
2.7.2 Detailing the Preliminary Plan
The Bridge or Culvert Preliminary Plan is used and reviewed by the Bridge and
Structures Office or consultant who will do the structural design, Region designers
and managers, Geotechnical engineers, Hydraulics engineers, Program managers,
FHWA engineers and local agency designers and managers. It sometimes is used in
public presentation of projects. With such visibility it is important that it's detailing is
clear, complete, professional, and attractive. The designer, detailer, and checker shall
strive for completeness and consistency in information, layout, line style, and fonts.
AppendixB contains examples of Preliminary Plans following time-proven format that
may be helpful. See also Chapter 11, DetailingPractice.
Typical sheet layout is as follows:
1. Plan and Elevation views. (This sheet ultimately becomes the Layout sheet of the
design plan set)
2. Typical Section including details of stage construction.
Superelevation diagrams, tables of existing elevations, Notes to Region, and other
miscellaneous details as required shall go on Sheet 2, 3, or 4, as many as required.
See also the Preliminary Plan Checklist for details, dimensions, and notes typically
required. The completed plan sheets shall be reviewed for consistency by the
Preliminary Plans Detailing Specialist.
Natural surveillance and access control strategies limit the opportunity for crime.
Territorial reinforcement promotes social control through a variety of measures.
These may include enhanced aesthetics or public art. Image/maintenance and
activity support provide the community with reassurance and the ability to stop
crime by themselves. Target hardening strategies may involve fencing or concrete
enclosures or they may include all techniques to resolve crime or chronic trespass
into one final step.
B. WSDOT implements FHWAs CSS design development principles through
Executive Order E 1028. The CSS methods require designers to consider the
physical, economic, and social setting of a project. Stakeholders interests are
tobeaccounted for; including area residents and business owners.
2.8.3 Design Criteria
New bridges need to address design for the environment by basic criteria:
Slopes under bridges need to be steep slope, and hardened with something like
solid concrete so that flat areas cannot be carved into the hillside. Flat areas under
bridge superstructures attract inappropriate uses and should beomitted.
Illegal urban campers have been known to build shelters between the concrete
girders. Abutment walls need to be high enough that they deny access to the
superstructure elements. When it is not feasible to design for deterrence the sites
need to be hardened with fencing buried severalfeet into the soil or with solid
concrete walls. See Figures 2.8.3-1 and 2.8.3-2 for high security fence and concrete
wall examples.
Regular chain link is easy cut, therefore stouter material needs to be specified.
Landscape design should coordinate with region or headquarters landscape
architects. Areas need to be visible to law enforcement.
Plan
Figure 2.8.3-1
Page 2-48
1" GAP (TYP. AT
GALV. STEEL WELDED HORIZONTAL ELEMENTS)
WIRE MESH FABRIC
BRIDGE SECURITY FENCE
Preliminary Design
ON TOP OF ABUTMENT
PRY RESISTANT ELEMENT WITH
DIRECT CONNECTION TO RAIL
POST (TYP.)
GALV. STEEL WELDED
WIRE MESH FABRIC SEE DETAIL 1
RAIL (TYP.)
ABUTMENT FOUNDTAION
Figure 2.8.3-2
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
Chapter 2
Chapter 2 Preliminary Design
2.10 Appendices
Appendix 2.2-A1 Bridge Site Data General
Appendix 2.2-A2 Bridge Site Data Rehabilitation
Appendix 2.2-A3 Bridge Site Data Stream Crossing
Appendix 2.2-A4 Preliminary Plan Checklist
Appendix 2.2-A5 Request For Preliminary Geotechnical Information
Appendix 2.3-A1 Bridge Stage Construction Comparison
Bridge Information
SR Bridge Name Control Section Project No.
Are overlays planned for a contract subsequent to this contract? Are there bridge security issues, such as the presence of illegal
Yes No N/A campers, that require design considerations?
Tabulated field surveyed and measured stations, offsets, and elevations of existing roadways (See Design Manual M 22-01, Chapter 710)
Photographs and video of structure site, adjacent existing structures and surrounding terrain
Bridge Information
SR Bridge Name Control Section Project No.
Existing wearing surface (concrete, HMA, HMA w /membrane, MC, epoxy, other) Thickness
Attachments
Video tape of project
Bridge Information
SR Bridge Name Control Section Project No.
Highway Section Section, Township & Range Datum (e.g. NGVD29, NAVD88, USGS)
Attachments
Site Contour Map (See Sect. 710.04 WSDOT Design Manual)
Streambed: Profile and Cross Sections (See Sect. 710.04 WSDOT Design Manual)
Photographs
Other Data Relative to Selection of Type and Design of Bridge, Including your Recommendations (e.g., requirements of riprap,
permission of piers in channel.)
Typical Section
Bridge Roadway Width
Lane and Shoulder Widths
Profile Grade and Pivot Point
Superelevation Rate
Survey Line
Overlay Type and Depth
Barrier Face Treatment
Limits of Pigmented Sealer
BP/Pedestrian Rail dimensions
Stage Construction, Stage traffic
Locations of Temporary Concrete Barrier
Closure Pour
Structure Depth/Prestressed Girder Type
Conduits/Utilities in bridge
Substructure Dimensions
Bridge Inspection Lighting and Access
Left Margin
Job Number
Bridge (before/with/after) Approach Fills
Structure Depth/Prestressed Girder Type
Deck Protective System
Coast Guard Permit Status
(Requirement for all water crossing)
Railroad Agreement Status
Points of Minimum Vertical Clearance
Cast-in-Place Concrete Strength
Right Margin
Control Section
Project Number
Region
Highway Section
SR Number
Structure Name
Project Name:
Project Location:
Furnish information on anticipated foundation type, pile or shaft sizes, permanent vs. temporary casing, expected pile or
shaft lengths, special excavation, underground water table elevation and the need for seals/cofferdams:
Liquefaction Issues. Indicate potential for liquefaction at the piers, anticipated depth of liquefaction, potential for lateral
spread, and the need for soil remediation:
Not Included In
Bridge Quantities List
Environmental And Engineering Service Center
Bridge and Structures Office
Type of Structure
The following is a list of items for which the Bridge and Structures Office is relying on the Region to furnish
plans, specifications and estimates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Not Included In
Bridge Quantities List
Environmental And Engineering Service Center
Bridge and Structures Office
Type of Structure
The following is a list of items for which the Bridge and Structures Office is relying on the Region to furnish
plans, specifications and estimates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
2.99 References
1. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) publication Federal Aid Highway
ProgramManual.
FHWA Order 5520.1 (dated December 24, 1990) contains the criteria pertaining to
Type, Size, and Location studies.
Volume 6, Chapter 6, Section 2, Subsection 1, Attachment 1 (Transmittal 425)
contains the criteria pertaining to railroad undercrossings and overcrossings.
2. WAC480-60 Railroad Companies - Clearances
3. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance Association (AREMA) Manual
forRailroad Engineering. Note: This manual is used as the basic design and
geometric criteria by all railroads. Use these criteria unless superseded by FHWA
or WSDOT criteria.
4. WSDOT Design Manual M22-01.
5. WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.
6. WSDOT Hydraulics Manual M 23-03.
7. WSDOT Local Agency Guidelines M 36-63.
8. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specification.
9. The Union Pacific Railroad Guidelines for Design of Highway Separation
Structures over Railroad (Overhead Grade Separation)
10. WSDOT Context Sensitive Solutions Executive Order E 1028
11. Newman, O. Defensible Space: Crime Prevention Through Urban Design. New
York: Macmillan. 1972.
12. Jacobs, Jane. The Death and Life of Great American Cities. New York: Random
House. 1961.
3.1 Scope
AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specifications shall be the
minimum design criteria used for all bridges except as modified herein.
3.2 Definitions
The definitions in this section supplement those given in LRFD Section 3.
Permanent Loads Loads and forces that are, or are assumed to be, either constant
upon completion ofconstruction or varying only over a long time interval.
Transient Loads Loads and forces that can vary over a short time interval relative
tothe lifetime of thestructure.
The load factor for down drag loads shall be as specified in the AASHTO LRFD
Specifications Table 3.4.1-2. The Geotechnical Report will provide the down drag force
(DD). The down drag force (DD) is a load applied to the pile/shaft with the load factor
specified in the Geotechnical Report. Generally, live loads (LL) are less than the down
drag force and should be omitted when considering down drag forces.
The Load Factors for Superimposed Deformations are provided in Table3.5-3below.
PS CR, SH
Superstructure 1.0 1.0
Substructures that are fixed at the base and have
alongitudinal connection with the superstructure
0.5 0.5
(suchasahinged or integral connection) and analyzed
using thegross moment of inertial (Ig)
All other substructure supporting Superstructure analyzed
using either gross moment of inertia (Ig) or the effective 1.0 1.0
cracked moment of inertia (Ieffective)
In the table above, causing moment and causing shear are taken to be the moment
and shear causing axial, uplift, and lateral loading respectively. Resisting is taking to
mean those force effects that are diminishing axial capacity, uplift, and lateralloading.
Permanent Loads
Table 3.8-1
For lightweight concrete barrier, multiply the normal weight concrete barrier weight
from Table 3.8-1 by (125/155).
3.8.1 Deck Overlay Requirement
Vehicular traffic will generate wear and rutting on a concrete bridge deck over the
life of a bridge. One option to correct excessive wear is to add a Hot Mix Asphalt
(HMA) overlay on top of the existing concrete deck. This type of overlay requires less
construction time and is less expensive compared to removing a portion of the deck
and adding a modified concrete overlay. The initial bridge design needs to incorporate
the future overlay dead load.
Concrete bridge deck protection systems shall be in accordance with Section5.7.4 for
new bridge construction and widening projects. To accommodate a future deck overlay,
bridges shall be designed as shown Table 3.8-2 below.
Overlay Future
Concrete shown in Design
Superstructure Type Cover theplan Overlay
Deck Protection Systems 1 and 4:
Precast concrete, steel I or box girder with
cast-in-place slab 2 (Including
Precast slabs with cast-in-place slab wearing None 2 HMA
Reinforced and post-tensioned box beams surface)
and slabbridges
Mainline Bridges on State Routes
Deck Protection Systems 1 and 4:
2 (Including
Undercrossing bridge that carries traffic from
wearing None None
a city street or county road
surface)
Bridges with raised sidewalks
Deck Protection System 2:
Varies Varies None
Concrete Overlays
Deck Protection System 3:
Varies Varies None
HMA Overlays
Deck Protection System 5:
1 (Including 1 Modified
Segmental bridges
wearing Concrete None
Bridge Decks with longitudinal or transverse surface) Overlay
post-tensioning
CROSSBEAM
CROSSBEAM
For steel and prestressed concrete superstructure where the live load is transferred to
substructure through bearings, cross frames or diaphragms, the girder reaction may be
used for substructure design. Live load placement is dependent on the member under
design. Some examples of live load placement are as follows. The exterior vehicle
wheel is placed 2feet from the curb for maximum crossbeam cantilever moment or
maximum eccentric foundation moment.
For crossbeam design between supports, the lanes are placed toobtain the maximum
positive moment in the member; then re-located to obtain the maximum shear or
negative momentinthe member.
For column design, the design lanes are placed to obtain the maximum transverse
moment at the top of the column; then re-located to obtain the maximum axialforce
ofthe column.
3.9.4 Bridge Load Rating
Bridge designers are responsible for Design, Legal, and Permit load rating of new
bridges in accordance with the National Bridge Inspection Standards (NBIS) and the
AASHTO Manual Bridge Evaluation. SeeChapter 13 for detailed information on
loading requirements for bridge load rating.
3.99 References
1. AASHTO, LRFD Bridge Design Specifications for Design of Highway Bridges,
7thEdition.
4.1 General
Seismic design ofnew bridges and bridge widenings shall conform toAASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design as modified by Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
Analysis and design ofseismic retrofits for existing bridges shall be completedin
accordance with Section4.4. Seismic design ofretaining walls shall bein accordance
with Section4.5. For nonconventional bridges, bridges that are deemed critical or
essential, or bridges that fall outside the scope of the Guide Specifications for any other
reasons, project specific design requirements shall be developed and submitted to the
WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer for approval.
The importance classifications for all highway bridges in Washington State are
classified as Normal except for special major bridges. Special major bridges fitting
the classifications of either Critical or Essential will be so designated by either the
WSDOT Bridge and Structures Engineer or the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
The performance objective for normal bridges is life safety. Bridges designed in
accordance with AASHTO Guide Specifications are intended to achieve the life safety
performance goals.
Longitudinal Response
Upon Approval
Permissible Permissible
1 Upon
2
Approval
Plastic hinges in inspectable locations or
elastic design of columns.
Abutment resistance not required as part of Isolation bearings accommodate full
ERS displacement
Knock-off backwalls permissible Abutment not required as part of ERS
3 4
Permissible Permissible
Upon
Plastic hinges in inspectable locations Approval
Plastic hinges in inspectable locations.
Isolation bearings with or without
Abutment not required in ERS, breakaway shear keys energy dissipaters to limit overall
permissible with WSDOT Bridge Design Engineers displacements
Approval
2
Permissible Above ground / near
ground plastic hinges
Not Permissible
5
Piles with pinned-head conditions 6 Permissible Upon
Approval
Permissible Upon Approval Columns with moment
reducing or pinned hinge
details
Ductile End-diaphragms in
4
3 superstructure (Article 7 .4 .6) Not Permissible
5
Not Permissible
8 9
In-ground hinging in shafts or piles .
Not Permissible
Ensure Limited Ductility Response
in Piles according to Article 4 .7 .1
Batter pile systems in which the geotechnical
Permissible Upon capacities and/or in-ground hinging define the
plastic mechanisms .
Approval for Liquefied
Configuration Ensure Limited Ductility Response in Piles
according to Article 4 .7 .1
Figure3.3-3 Earthquake-Resisting Elements that Are Not Recommended for New Bridges
BDM Figure4.2.2-4
Figure 3.3-3 Earthquake-Resisting Elements that Are Not Recommended for New Bridges
4.2.3 Seismic Ground Shaking Hazard
Guide Specifications Article 3.4 For bridges that are considered critical or essential
or normal bridges with a site Class F, the seismic ground shaking hazard shall be
determined based on the WSDOT Geotechnical Engineer recommendations.
In cases where the site coefficients used to adjust mapped values of design ground
motion for local conditions are inappropriate to determine the design spectra in
accordance with general procedure of Article 3.4.1 (such as the period at the end of
constant design spectral acceleration plateau (Ts) is greater than 1.0 second or the
period at the beginning of constant design spectral acceleration plateau (To) is less than
0.2 second), a site-specific ground motion response analysis shall be performed.
4.2.4 Selection ofSeismic Design Category (SDC)
Guide Specifications Article 3.5 Pushover analysis shall be used todetermine
displacement capacity for both SDCs C and D.
4.2.5 Temporary and Staged Construction
Guide Specifications Article 3.6 For bridges that are designed for a reduced seismic
demand, the contract plans shall either include a statement that clearly indicatesthat
the bridge was designed as temporary using a reduced seismic demand or show the
Acceleration Response Spectrum (ARS) used for design.
4.2.11 Abutments
Guide Specifications Article 5.2 Diaphragm Abutment type shown in Figure
5.2.3.2-1 shall not be used for WSDOT bridges.
Guide Specifications Article 5.2 Abutments to be revised as follows:
5.2.1 - General
The participation of abutment walls in providing resistance to seismically induced
inertial loads may be considered in the seismic design of bridges either to reduce
column sizes or reduce the ductility demand on the columns. Damage to backwalls
and wingwalls during earthquakes may be considered acceptable when considering no
collapse criteria, provided that unseating or other damage to the superstructure does
not occur. Abutment participation in the overall dynamic response of the bridge system
shall reflect the structural configuration, the load transfer mechanism from the bridge to
the abutment system, the effective stiffness and force capacity of the wall-soil system,
and the level of acceptable abutment damage. The capacity of the abutments to resist
the bridge inertial loads shall be compatible with the soil resistance that can be reliably
mobilized, the structural design of the abutment wall, and whether the wall is permitted
to be damaged by the design earthquake. The lateral load capacity of walls shall be
evaluated on the basis of a rational passive earth-pressure theory.
The participation of the bridge approach slab in the overall dynamic response of bridge
systems to earthquake loading and in providing resistance to seismically induced
inertial loads may be considered permissible upon approval from both the WSDOT
Bridge Design Engineer and the WSDOT Geotechnical Engineer.
The participation of the abutment in the ERS should be carefully evaluated with the
Geotechnical Engineer and the Owner when the presence of the abutment backfill may
be uncertain, as in the case of slumping or settlement due to liquefaction below or near
the abutment.
5.2.2 - Longitudinal Direction
Under earthquake loading, the earth pressure action on abutment walls changes from a
static condition to one of two possible conditions:
The dynamic active pressure condition as the wall moves away from the backfill, or
The passive pressure condition as the inertial load of the bridge pushes the wall
into the backfill.
The governing earth pressure condition depends on the magnitude of seismically
induced movement of the abutment walls, the bridge superstructure, and the bridge/
abutment configuration.
For semi-integral (Figure 5.2.2-a), L-shape abutment with backwall fuse
(Figure 5.2.2-b), or without backwall fuse (Figure 5.2.2-c), for which the expansion
joint is sufficiently large to accommodate both the cyclic movement between the
abutment wall and the bridge superstructure (i.e., superstructure does not push
against abutment wall), the seismically induced earth pressure on the abutment wall
shall be considered to be the dynamic active pressure condition. However, when the
gap at the expansion joint is not sufficient to accommodate the cyclic wall/bridge
seismic movements, a transfer of forces will occur from the superstructure to the
abutment wall. As a result, the active earth pressure condition will not be valid and
the earth pressure approaches a much larger passive pressure load condition behind
the backwall.
Longitudinal
Longitudinal
Longitudinal This shall
restrainers
restrainers
restrainerslarger
shall load
shallnot
not
notbe
be condition
beused
used
usedatatatthe
theisend
the thepiers
end
end main(abutments).
piers
piers cause for abutment damage,
(abutments).
(abutments).
as demonstrated in past earthquakes. For semi-integral or L-shape abutments,
4.2.11
4.2.11
4.2.11 Abutments
Abutments
Abutments
the abutment stiffness and capacity under passive pressure loading are primary
designconcerns.
(a)
(a)
(a) Semi-integral
(a)Semi-integral
Semi-integral Abutment
Semi-integralAbutment
Abutment
Abutment (b) L-shape Abutment (c) L-shape Abutment Backwall
(b)
(b) L-shape
(b)L-shape
L-shape Abutment
Abutment
BackwallFuses
Backwall
AbutmentBackwall
Backwall (c)
(c)
(c)L-shape
L-shape
L-shapeAbutment
Abutment
AbutmentBackwall
Does Not Fuse
Backwall
Backwall
Fuses
Fuses
Fuses Does
Does
DoesNot
Not
NotFuse
Fuse
Fuse
Figure 5.2.2 - Abutment Stiffness and Passive Pressure Estimate
Figure
Figure
Figure5.2.2
5.2.2
5.2.2---Abutment
Abutment
AbutmentStiffness
Stiffness
Stiffness
Figure and
and
andPassive
Passive
4.2.11-1PassivePressure
Pressure
PressureEstimate
Estimate
Estimate
BDM
BDM
BDMFigure
Figure
Figure4.2.11-1
4.2.11-1
4.2.11-1
Where the passive pressure resistance of soils behind semi-integral or L-shape
abutments will be mobilized through large longitudinal superstructure displacements,
Where
Where
Wherethe the
thepassive
passive
passivepressure
pressure
pressureresistance
resistance
resistanceof of
ofsoils
soils
soilsbehind
behind
behindsemi-integral
semi-integral
semi-integralor ororL-shape
L-shape
L-shapeabut- abut-
abut-
the bridge may be designed with the abutments as key elements of the longitudinal
ments
ments
mentswillwill
willbebe
bemobilized
mobilized
mobilizedthrough through
throughlargelarge
largelongitudinal
longitudinal
longitudinalsuperstructure
superstructure
superstructuredisplacements,
displacements,
displacements,the the
the
ERS. Abutments shall be designed to sustain the design earthquake displacements.
bridge
bridge
bridge may
may
may be
be
be designed
designed
designed with
with
with the
the
the abutments
abutments
abutments as
as
as key
key
key
When abutment stiffness and capacity are included in the design, it should be elements
elements
elements ofof
ofthe
the
thelongitudinal
longitudinal
longitudinal ERS.
ERS.
ERS.
Abutments
Abutments
Abutments
recognized shall
shall
shallbebebedesigned
that designed
designed
the passive to
totosustain
sustain
sustain
pressure the
the
thedesign
design
design
zone earthquake
earthquake
earthquake
mobilized bydisplacements.
displacements.
displacements.
abutment displacement When
When
When extends
abutment
abutment
abutment
beyond stiffness
stiffness
stiffness and
the activeand
andcapacity
capacity
capacityare
pressure are
are
zoneincluded
included
included
normally in
ininthe
the
thedesign,
design,
used design, itititshould
for static should
should be
servicebe
berecognized
recognized
recognized
load design. This is
that
that
thatthe
the
thepassive
passive
passivepressure
illustrated pressure
pressurezone
schematically zone
zonemobilized
mobilized
mobilized
in Figuresby by
by abutment
abutment
abutment
4.2.11-1a displacement
displacement
and displacement
4.2.11-1b.extends extends
extendsbeyond
Dynamic beyond
beyond
active earth
the
the
theactive
active
activepressure
pressure pressure
pressure
acting zone
zone
zone
on normally
normally
thenormally
abutment used
used
usedneedfor
for
forstatic
static
static
not be service
service
service load
load
consideredloaddesign.
design.
design.
in theThis
This
Thisisisisillustrat-
dynamic illustrat-
illustrat-
analysis of
ed
ed the bridge. The
edschematically
schematically
schematically in passive1a
ininFigures
Figures
Figures 1a abutment
1a and
and
and1b. 1b. resistance
1b. Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamicactive shall
active be
activeearth
earth
earthlimited
pressure
pressureto 70
pressure percent
acting
acting
acting on
on
ontheof the value
the
the
obtained
abutment
abutment
abutment need
need
need using
not
not
notbebe the
be procedure
considered
considered
considered iningiven
in the
the in Article
thedynamic
dynamic
dynamic 5.2.2.1.
analysis
analysis
analysis of
ofofthethe
thebridge.
bridge.
bridge. The The
Thepassive
passive
passive
abutment
abutment
abutment
5.2.2.1 resistance
resistance
resistance
- Abutment shall
shall
shallbe be
belimited
limited
limitedand
Stiffness to
toto70%
70%
70% of
of
ofthe
Passive the
thePressure
value
value
valueobtained
obtained
obtained
Estimate using
using
usingthethe
theprocedure
procedure
procedure
given
given
givenin ininArticle
Article
Article5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.
Abutment stiffness, Keff in kip/ft, and passive capacity, Pp in kips, should be
5.2.2.1characterized
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.1 ---Abutment
Abutment
Abutment by a bilinear
Stiffness
Stiffness
Stiffness and
and
andorPassive
other higher
Passive
Passive Pressure
Pressure
Pressureorder nonlinear relationship as shown in
Estimate
Estimate
Estimate
Figure 5.2.2.1. When the motion of the back wall is primarily translation, passive
pressures
Abutment
Abutment
Abutment may K
stiffness,
stiffness,
stiffness, be
KKeff
effassumed
in
eff kip/ft,uniformly
ininkip/ft,
kip/ft, and
and
andpassive
passive
passive distributed
capacity,PPover
capacity,
capacity, P
pppin the
ininkips,kips,height
kips, should
should
should (H
be
be
be )charac-
of the backwall
wcharac-
charac-
terizedor by
terized
terized end
byaaadiaphragm.
by bilinear
bilinear
bilinearor or The higher
orother
other
other total
higher
higher passive
order
order force
ordernonlinear
nonlinear
nonlinear may be determined
relationship
relationship
relationship as
as as: in
asshown
shown
shown ininFigure
Figure
Figure
5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.WhenWhen
Whenthe the
themotion
motion
motionof of
ofthe
the
theback
back
backPwallwall
wall is
isisprimarily
primarily
primarily translation,
translation,
translation, passive
passive
passive pressures
pressures
pressures
p = pp Hw Ww (5.2.2.1-1)
may
may
maybe be
beassumed
assumed
assumeduniformly
uniformly
uniformlydistributed
distributed
distributedover over
overthe
the
theheight
height
height(H (H
(Hww)w))ofofofthe
the
thebackwall
backwall
backwallor ororend
end
end
Where:
diaphragm.
diaphragm.
diaphragm. p The
The
The
= total
total
totalpassive
passive passive
passive force
lateralforce
force may
earth may
may be
be
bedetermined
pressure determined
determined as:
as:
as:
behind backwall or diaphragm (ksf)
p
Hw = height of back wall or end diaphragm exposed to passive earth pressure (feet)
PPP
Ww = pp=
p==pppppH
width pH
H W
wof
wwWW
back
www (5.2.2.1-1)
(5.2.2.1-1)
(5.2.2.1-1)
wall or diaphragm (feet)
where:
where:
where:
For L-shape abutments, the expansion gap should be included in the initial estimate of
For L-shapetheabutments, the expansion
secant stiffness gap in:
as specified should be included in the initial estimate of
the secant stiffness as specified in:
Pp
K eff 1 = (5.2.2.3-2)
(F
w H w + Dg ) (5.2.2.3-2)
Where:
Dg = where:
width of gap between backwall and superstructure (feet)
For SDCs C and D, where pushover analyses are conducted, values of Pp and the initial
= width
estimate ofDKg eff1 should ofbe gap between
used backwall
to define and load-displacement
a bilinear superstructure (ft) behavior of the
abutment for the capacity assessment.
For SDCs C and D, where pushover analyses are conducted, values of Pp and the ini-
5.2.2.4 - Modeling
tial estimate Passive Pressure
of Keff1 should Stiffness
be used toindefine
the Longitudinal Direction
a bilinear load-displacement behavior of
In the longitudinal
the abutment direction, when
for the the bridge
capacity is moving toward the soil, the full
assessment.
passive resistance of the soil may be mobilized, but when the bridge moves away
from the soil no soil resistance
5.2.2.4-Modeling is mobilized.
Passive PressureSince passiveinpressure
Stiffness acts at onlyDirection
the Longitudinal
one abutment at a time, linear elastic dynamic models and frame pushover models
should onlyIninclude a passive direction,
the longitudinal pressure spring
when attheone abutment
bridge in any
is moving giventhe
toward model.
soil, the full pas-
Secant stiffness values for passive pressure shall be developed independently
sive resistance of the soil may be mobilized, but when the bridge moves for each
away from
abutment. the soil no soil resistance is mobilized. Since passive pressure acts at only one
As an alternative,
abutment foratstraight
a time,or withelastic
linear horizontal curves
dynamic up to and
models 30 degrees single frame
frame pushover models should
bridges, and compression models in straight multi-frame bridges where the
only include a passive pressure spring at one abutment in any given model. Secant
stiffness
passive pressure valuesisfor
stiffness passive
similar pressure
between shall be developed
abutments, a spring mayindependently for each abut-
be used at each
ment.
abutment concurrently. In this case, the assigned spring values at each end need to
be reduced by half because they act in simultaneously, whereas the actual backfill
passive resistance acts only in one direction and at one time. Correspondingly, the
actual peak passive resistance force at either abutment will be equal to the sum of the
peak forces developed in two springs. In this case, secant stiffness values for passive
pressure shall be developed based on the sum of peak forces developed in each spring.
If computed abutment forces exceed the soil capacity, the stiffness should be softened
iteratively until abutment displacements are consistent (within 30 percent) with the
assumed stiffness.
5.2.3 - Transverse Direction
Transverse stiffness of abutments may be considered in the overall dynamic response
of bridge systems on a case by case basis upon Bridge Design Engineer approval.
Upon approval, the transverse abutment stiffness used in the elastic demand models
may be taken as 50 percent of the elastic transverse stiffness of the adjacent bent.
Girder stops are typically designed to transmit the lateral shear forces generated by
small to moderate earthquakes and service loads and are expected to fuse at the design
event earthquake level of acceleration to limit the demand and control the damage
in the abutments and supporting piles/shafts. Linear elastic analysis cannot capture
the inelastic response of the girder stops, wingwalls or piles/shafts. Therefore, the
forces generated with elastic demand assessment models should not be used to size
the abutment girder stops. Girder stops for abutments supported on a spread footing
shall be designed to sustain the lesser of the acceleration coefficient, As, times the
superstructure dead load reaction at the abutment plus the weight of abutment and
its footing or sliding friction forces of spread footings. Girder stops for pile/shaft
supported foundations shall be designed to sustain the sum of 75 percent total lateral
capacity of the piles/shafts and shear capacity of one wingwall.
The elastic resistance may be taken to include the use of bearings designed to
accommodate the design displacements, soil frictional resistance acting against the
base of a spread footing supported abutment, or pile resistance provided by piles acting
in their elastic range.
The stiffness of fusing or breakaway abutment elements such as wingwalls (yielding
or non-yielding), elastomeric bearings, and sliding footings shall not be relied upon to
reduce displacement demands at intermediate piers.
Unless fixed bearings are used, girder stops shall be provided between all girders
regardless of the elastic seismic demand. The design of girder stops should consider
that unequal forces that may develop in each stop.
When fusing girder stops, transverse shear keys, or other elements that potentially
release the restraint of the superstructure are used, then adequate support length
meeting the requirements of Article 4.12 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications
for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design must be provided. Additionally, the expected
redistribution of internal forces in the superstructure and other bridge system element
must be considered. Bounding analyses considering incremental release of transverse
restraint at each end of the bridge should also be considered.
5.2.4 - Curved and Skewed Bridges
Passive earth pressure at abutments may be considered as a key element of the ERS of
straight and curved bridges with abutment skews up to 20 degrees. For larger skews,
due to a combination of longitudinal and transverse response, the span has a tendency
to rotate in the direction of decreasing skew. Such motion will tend to cause binding in
the obtuse corner and generate uneven passive earth pressure forces on the abutment,
exceeding the passive pressure near one end of the backwall, and providing little or no
resistance at other end. This requires a more refined analysis to determine the amount
of expected movement. The passive pressure resistance in soils behind semi-integral
or L-shape abutments shall be based on the projected width of the abutment wall
normal to the centerline of the bridge. Abutment springs shall be included in the local
coordinate system of the abutment wall.
4.2.12 Foundation General
Guide Specifications Article 5.3.1 The required foundation modeling method
(FMM) and the requirements for estimation of foundation springs for spread footings,
pile foundations, and drilled shafts shall be based on the WSDOT Geotechnical
Engineers recommendations.
4.2.13 Foundation Spread Footing
Guide Specifications Article C5.3.2 Foundation springs for spread footings
shall bedeterminedin accordance with Section7.2.7, Geotechnical Design Manual
Section6.5.1.1 and the WSDOTGeotechnical Engineers recommendations.
Guide Specifications Article C8.4.1 Add the following paragraph to Article C8.4.1.
The requirement for plastic hinging and capacity protected members do not apply to
the structures in SDC A, therefore use of ASTM A706 Grade 80 reinforcing steel is
permitted in SDC A.
For SDCs B, C, and D, the moment-curvature analyses based on strain compatibility
and nonlinear 4.2.18 Longitudinal
stress strain relations are Direction
used to determineRequirements
the plastic moment capacities
4.2.18 ofLongitudinal Direction
all ductile concrete Requirements
4.2.19 members.
Liquefaction FurtherDesignresearchRequirements
is required to establish the shape and
model of the stress-strain curve, expected reinforcing strengths, strain limits, and the
4.2.19 Liquefaction Design Requirements
stress-strain relationshipsGuide for concrete confined Article
Specifications by lateral 6.8reinforcement made with
Soil liquefaction assessment shall be ba
ASTM A 706 Grade 80 reinforcing steel.
Guide Specifications Article 6.8 Soil liquefaction assessment shall be basedWSDOT
WSDOT Geotechnical Engineers recommendation and on the Geotechn
WSDOT GeotechnicalDesign Manual
Engineers Section 6.4.2.8.and WSDOT Geotechnical
recommendation
4.2.21 Concrete Modeling
Design Manual Section 6.4.2.8.
4.2.20 Article
Guide Specifications Reinforcing Steel the last paragraph as follows:
8.4.4- Revise
4.2.20 Reinforcing Steel
Where in-ground 4.2.21
plasticConcrete
hinging approved Modeling by the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer is
4.2.21 part
Concrete
of the ERS, Modeling
the confined concrete core shall be limited to a maximum compressive
4.2.22 Expected Nominal Moment Capacity
strain of 0.008. The clear spacing between the longitudinal reinforcements and between
4.2.22 spirals
Expected Nominal
and hoops Moment
in drilled Capacity
shaftsSpecifications
shall not be less than 68.5 inches
Guide Article Addorthemore than 8 inches
following paragraphs after the
when tremie placement of concrete
paragraph. is anticipated.
Guide Specifications Article 8.5 Add the following paragraphs after the third
4.2.22 Expected paragraph.
Nominal Moment TheCapacity
expected nominal capacity of capacity protected members using ASTM
TheSpecifications
Guide expected nominal Grade
capacity
Article 8.580reinforcement
of
Add capacity shall paragraphs
protected
the following bemembers
determined bythird
using
after strength
ASTM Adesign
706 formulas sp
paragraph.
Grade 80 reinforcement AASHTO
theshall LRFD Bridge
be determined design design
by strength Specifications
formulas based on theinexpected con
specified
Thethe
expected nominal capacity
strength of capacity
and protected
reinforcing steelmember
yield
AASHTO LRFD Bridge design Specifications based on the expected concrete using
strengths ASTM
when A 706
the concrete reaches 0.0
Grade 80 reinforcement
strength and reinforcing shall be
reinforcing determined
steel yield steel by strength
strain reaches
strengths when the design
0.090 based
for #10
concrete on the
bars and
reaches expected
0.003smaller,
or the 0.060 for #1
concrete strength and yield strength
larger. of 80 ksi when the concrete
reinforcing steel strain reaches 0.090 for #10 bars and smaller, 0.060 for #11 bars and reaches 0.003 or the
reinforcing
larger. steel strain reaches 0.090 for #10 bars and smaller, 0.060 for #11 bars
andlarger. Replace the definition of mo with the following:
Replace the definition of with the following:
Replace the definition of momo =with the following:
overstrength factor
mo = overstrength factor = 1.2
= overstrength factorfor ASTM A 706 Grade 60 reinforcement
= 1.2 for
= 1.2 for ASTM A 706 ASTM A
Grade 706 Grade 60 reinforcement
= 1.4 for 60ASTMreinforcement
A 615 Grade 60 reinforcement
= 1.4 for ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcement
= 1.4 for ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcement
4.2.23 Interlocking Bar Size
4.2.23 Interlocking Bar Size
4.2.23 Interlocking Bar Size
Guide Specifications Article Guide Specifications
8.6.7 The longitudinal 8.6.7 Thebar
Articlereinforcing longitudinal
inside the reinforcing bar insid
Guide Specifications
interlocking interlocking
portion ofcolumn Article 8.6.7 portion
(interlocking of
Thebars) a column
shall be (interlocking
longitudinal reinforcing
the same size bars)
bar shall
inside
ofbars the
used be the same size o
interlocking
outside used
portion portion.
the interlocking outside the interlocking portion.
of a column (interlocking bars) shall be the same size of bars
used outside the interlocking portion.
4.2.24 Splicing ofLongitudinal4.2.24 Splicing of Longitudinal
Reinforcementin Columns Reinforcement in Columns Subject to Du
Subject toDuctility
4.2.24 Splicing
Demands ofDemands
Longitudinal
forSDCsCandD for SDCs C and D in Columns Subject to Ductility
Reinforcement
Demands for SDCs C and D
Guide Specifications Article Guide Specifications
8.8.3 The splicing Article 8.8.3 Thecolumn
of longitudinal splicing of longitudinal column
reinforcement outside thereinforcement
Guide Specifications plastic 8.8.3 outside
Articlehinging region the plastic
shall
The splicing be hinging region
of accomplished
longitudinal shall be accomplished usin
using
column
mechanical couplers
reinforcement outside mechanical
that arethecapable couplers
of developing
plastic hinging that are
region the capable
tensile
shall of developing
strength of the
be accomplished the tensile strength of t
spliced
using
bar.mechanical
Splices shallcouplers bar. are
be staggered
that Splicesleastshall
at capable 2 ft.ofbe
Lap staggered
splices shall
developing at least
the not 2beft.
tensile Lap splices
used.
strength The theshall
of design not be used. Th
spliced
engineer shall clearly
bar. Splices engineer
identify
shall be staggered shall
the locations clearly
at least 2 where identify
ft. Lapsplices the locations
splicesinshall where
longitudinal
not be used. splices
column
The designin longitudinal co
reinforcement
engineer shall are clearly
permittedreinforcement
on thethe
identify plans. areInpermitted
locations general on
wherewhere thethe
splices plans. In general
inlength of the rebar
longitudinal where the length of the
column
cage is less than 60 ft (72 ft for No.
reinforcement are permitted on the plans. In general where the length of the rebar 14 and No. 18 bars), no splice in the lo
cage is less than 60 ft reinforcement
(72 ft for No. 14 shall
andbeNo. allowed.
18 bars), no splice in the longitudinal
reinforcement shall be allowed.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual 4.2.25
M 23-50.16 Development Length for Column Bars Extended Pageinto Oversized P
4-15
June 2016
4.2.25 Development Length for Column Bars Extended into Oversized Pile
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
cage is less than 60 ft (72 ft for No. 14 and No. 18 bars), no splice in the longitudinal
reinforcement shall be allowed.
4.2.25 Development Length for Column Bars Extended intoOversized Pile Shaftsf
orSDCsCandD
Guide Specifications Article 8.8.10 Extending column bars intooversized shaft
shall be per Section7.4.4.C, based on TRAC Report WA-RD 417.1 Non-Contact Lap
Splice inBridge Column-Shaft Connections.
4.2.26 Lateral Confinement for Oversized Pile Shaft for SDCs C and D
Guide Specifications Article 8.8.12 The requirement ofthis article for shaft lateral
reinforcementin the column-shaft splice zone may bereplaced with Section7.8.2 K.
4.2.27 Lateral Confinement for Non-Oversized Strengthened Pile Shaft for
SDCsCandD
Guide Specifications Article 8.8.13 Non oversized column shaft (the cross
section of the confined core is the same for both the column and the pile shaft) is not
permissible unless approved by the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
4.2.28 Requirements for Capacity Protected Members
Guide Specifications Article 8.9 Add the following paragraphs:
For SDCs C and D where liquefaction is identified, with the WSDOT Bridge Design
Engineers approval, pile and drilled shaft in-ground hinging may be considered as an
ERE. Where in-ground hinging is part of ERS, the confined concrete core should be
limited to a maximum compressive strain of 0.008 and the member ductility demand
shall be limited to 4.
Bridges shall be analyzed and designed for the non-liquefied condition and the
liquefied condition in accordance with Article 6.8. The capacity protected members
shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Article 4.11. To ensure the
formation of plastic hinges in columns, oversized pile shafts shall be designed for an
expected nominal moment capacity, Mne, at any location along the shaft, that is, equal
to 1.25 times moment demand generated by the overstrength column plastic hinge
moment and associated shear force at the base of the column. The safety factor of 1.25
may be reduced to 1.0 depending on the soil properties and upon the WSDOT Bridge
Design Engineers approval.
The design moments below ground for extended pile shaft may be determined using
the nonlinear static procedure (pushover analysis) by pushing them laterally to the
displacement demand obtained from an elastic response spectrum analysis. The point
of maximum moment shall be identified based on the moment diagram. The expected
plastic hinge zone shall extend 3D above and below the point of maximum moment.
The plastic hinge zone shall be designated as the no splice zone and the transverse
steel for shear and confinement shall be provided accordingly.
4.2.29 Superstructure Capacity Design for Transverse Direction (Integral Bent Cap)
for SDCsCandD
Guide Specifications Article 8.11 Revise the last paragraph as follows:
For SDCs C and D, the longitudinal flexural bent cap beam reinforcement shall
be continuous. Splicing of cap beam longitudinal flexural reinforcement shall be
accomplished using mechanical couplers that are capable of developing a minimum
tensile strength of 85 ksi. Splices shall be staggered at least 2 ft. Lap splices shall not
be used.
4.2.30 Superstructure Design for Non Integral Bent Caps for SDCs B, C, and D
Guide Specifications Article 8.12 Non integral bent caps shall not be used for
continuous concrete bridgesin SDC B, C, and D except at the expansion joints
between superstructure segments.
4.2.31 Joint Proportioning
Guide Specifications Article 8.13.4.1.1 Revise the last bullet as follows:
Exterior column joints for box girder superstructure and other superstructures if the cap
beam extends the joint far enough to develop the longitudinal cap reinforcement.
4.2.32 Cast-in-Place and Precast Concrete Piles
Guide Specifications Article 8.16.2 Minimum longitudinal reinforcement
of0.75percent ofAg shall be provided for CIP pilesin SDCs B, C,and D.
Longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided for the full length ofpile unless approved
by the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
There are major changes of the seismicity of the bridge site that can increase
seismic hazard levels or reduce seismic performance of the structure since the
initial screening or most recent seismic retrofit.
Change in live load use of the bridge
Major changes in seismicity include, but are not limited to, the following: near
fault effect, significant liquefaction potential, or lateral spreading. If there are
concerns about changes to the Seismic Design Response Spectrum at the bridge
site, about a previous retrofit to the existing bridge, or an unusual imbalance of
mass distribution resulting from the structure widening, the designer should consult
the WSDOT Bridge and StructuresOffice.
4.3.3 Seismic Design Guidance:
The Seismic Design guidance for Bridge Modifications and Widening are as follows:
1. Bridge widening projects classified as Minor Widening projects do not require
either a seismic evaluation or a retrofit of the structure. If the conditions for Minor
Widening project are met, it is anticipated that the widened/modified structure will
not draw enough additional seismic demand to significantly affect the existing sub-
structure elements.
2. If the net superstructure mass increase is between10% to 20% of the original
superstructure mass, and if all the other bulleted criteria listed for Minor Widening
projects are met, then the Do No Harm policy and professional judgment could
be used upon approval of the Bridge Design Engineer. The "Do No Harm" policy
requires the designer to compare the C/D ratios of the existing bridge elements
in the before widening condition to those of the after widening condition. If
the C/D ratios are not decreased, the widening can be designed and constructed
without retrofitting existing deficient bridge elements. Elements of the existing
structure with C/D ratios made worse by the widening/modification work shall
be retrofitted to restore their C/D ratios to before-widening values, at a minimum.
Foundation elements with seismic deficiencies (C/D ratios made worse by the
widening/modification work) shall be deferred to the Seismic Retrofit Program
forrehabilitation.
3. Seismic analysis is required for all Major Modifications and Widening projects
at project scoping level. A complete seismic analysis is required for bridges in
Seismic Design Category (SDC) B, C, and D for major modifications and widening
projects as described below. A project geotechnical report (including any unstable
soil or liquefaction issues) shall be available to the structural engineer for seismic
analysis. Seismic analysis shall be performed for both existing and widened
structures. Capacity/Demand (C/D) ratios are required for existing bridge elements
including foundation.
4. The widening portion of the structure shall be designed for liquefiable soils
condition in accordance to the AASHTO SGS, and WSDOT BDM, unless soils
improvement is provided to eliminate liquefaction.
5. Seismic improvement of existing columns and crossbeams to C/D > 1.0 is required.
The cost of seismic improvement shall be paid for with widening project funding
(not from the Retrofit Program). The seismic retrofit of the existing structure
shall conform to the BDM, while the newly widened portions of the bridge shall
comply with the AASHTO SGS, except for balanced stiffness criteria, which may
be difficult to meet due to the existing bridge configuration. However, the designer
should strive for the best balanced frame stiffness for the entire widened structure
that is attainable in a cost effective manner. Major Widening Projects require
the designer to determine the seismic C/D ratios of the existing bridge elements
in the final widened condition. If the C/D ratios of columns and crossbeam of
existing structure are less than 1.0, the improvement of seismically deficient
elements is mandatory and the widening project shall include the improvement
of existing seismically deficient bridge elements to C/D ratio of above 1.0 as
part of the widening project funding. The C/D ratio of 1.0 is required to prevent
the collapse of the bridge during the seismic event as required for life safety.
Seismic improvement of the existing foundation elements (footings, pile caps,
piles, and shafts to C/D ratios > 1.0) could be deferred to the Bridge Seismic
RetrofitProgram.
Existing Strutted Columns The horizontal strut between existing columns may be
removed. The existing columns shall then be analyzed with the new unbraced length
and retrofitted if necessary.
Non Structural Element Stiffness Median barrier and other potentially stiffening
elements shall be isolated from the columns toavoid any additional stiffness
tothesystem.
Deformation capacities ofexisting bridge members that do not meet current detailing
standards shall be determined using the provisions ofSection7.8 of the Retrofitting
Manual for Highway Structures:Part 1 Bridges, FHWA-HRT-06-032.Deformation
capacities ofexisting bridge members that meet current detailing standards shall be
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
determined using the latest edition of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD
Seismic Bridge Design.
Deformation capacities of existing bridge members that do not meet current detailing standards shall
determined using the provisions of Section 7.8 of the Retrofitting Manual for Highway Structures:
Jointbe
shear capacities ofexisting structures shall be checked using Caltrans Bridge
Part 1 Bridges, FHWA-HRT-06-032. Deformation capacities of existing bridge members that
Design
meetAid,
current14-4 Joint
detailing Shear
standards shallModeling
be determined Guidelines for Existing
using the latest edition Structures.
of the AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design.
In lieu
Jointofspecific data,
shear capacities
BDM Chapter
the structures
of existing
4
reinforcement properties
shall be checked providedin
using Caltrans Bridge
Seismic Design
Design
Table4.3.21
andAid, 14-4
Retrofit
should
beused.
Joint Shear Modeling Guidelines for Existing Structures.
In lieu of specific data, the reinforcement properties provided
ASTM in Table
ASTM 4.3.2-1
A615 should
ASTMbe used.
A615
Property Notation Bar Size
A706 ASTM
Grade 60 ASTM
Grade 40 A615 ASTM A615
Property Notation Bar Size
Specified
Property
ASTM A706
ASTM A615 Grade 60
ASTM A615 Grade 40*
minimum yield Notation
fy #3 -Bar Size
#18 60 A706 60 Grade 60 40 Grade 40
Specified minimum Specified minimum (ksi)
yield stress
stress (ksi) y No.3 - No.18 60 60 40
Expected yield y #3 - #18 60 60 40
Expected yield stress
yield stress (ksi) (ksi)
stress (ksi) f ye
ye
#3 No.3
- #18 - No.18
68 68
68 48 68 48
Expected yieldExpected
Expected tensile strength
stress (ksi) (ksi)
tensile strength ye
f ue
ue #3 No.3 -
#3 - #18
- #18 No.18
95
68 95
95
68
81 95
48 81
Expected yield strain
Expected tensile(ksi) ye No.3 - No.18 95 0.002395 0.0023 0.00166
#3 - #18 81
strength (ksi) Expected yield ue
ye #3 - #18 0.0023 0.0023 0.00166
Expected
strain No.3 - No.8 0.0150 0.0150
ye #3 -#3
#8- #18 0.01500 .0023 0.0150 0 .0023 0 .00166
yield strain
No.9 0.0125 0.0125
#9#3 - #8 0.01250 .0150 0.0125 0 .0150
Onset ofstrain hardening Onset of strain sh No.10
#9 & No.11
0 .0125 0.0115
0 .0125 0.0115 0.0193
sh #10 & #11 0.0115 0.0115 0.0193
Onset of hardening
sh #10 &No.14
#11 0 .0115 0.0075 0 .0115 0.0075
0 .0193
strain hardening #14 0.0075 0.0075
#14 0 .0075 0 .0075
#18 No.18 0.0050 0.0050
0.0050 0.0050
#18 0 .0050 0 .0050
Reduced #4 No.4
- #4 - No.10
#10- #10 0.0900 .060
0.090 0 .090 0.060 0.060
0.090 0 .090 0.090
Reduced ultimateReduced
tensile ultimate
strain
ultimate tensile
tensile strain strain
R
su
#11No.11
- #18- #18- No.18
#11 0.060 0 .060 0.0600 .040
0.040 0.040
0.060 0 .060 0.060
Ultimate #4
#4 No.4
- #10- #10 0.120 0 .120 0.090 0 .090 0.120 0 .120
Ultimate su - No.10 0.120 0.090 0.120
tensile strain tensile strain
Ultimate tensile strain su
su
#11 - #18
#11 - #18 0.090
0 .090
0.060
0 .060
0.090
0 .090
No.11 - No.18 0.090 0.060 0.090
Stress Properties of Reinforcing Steel Bars
Table 4.3.2-1
* ASTM A615 Grade 40 is for existing bridgesTable
in widening projects.
4.3.2-1 Stress Properties of Reinforcing Steel Bars.
Isolation Bearings Isolation bearings may be used for bridge widening projects
to reduce the seismic demand through modification of the dynamic properties of the
bridge. These bearings are a viable alternative to strengthening weak elements or non-
ductile bridge substructure members of the existing bridge. Use of isolation bearings
needs the approval of WSDOT Bridge DesignEngineer. Isolation bearings shall be
designed per the requirements specified in Section 9.3.
4.6 Appendices
Appendix 4-B1 Design Examples of Seismic Retrofits
Appendix 4-B2 SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Calculate the period at the end of constant design spectral acceleration plateau (sec)
S D1
Ts = 0.7 / 1.75 = 0.4 sec
S DS
Calculate the period at beginning of constant design spectral acceleration plateau (sec)
o s
Step 2: Calculate Maximum Allowable Expansion Joint Displacement and compare to the available seat width.
Dr = 1 + 176 * 18 * 12 / 10000 = 4.8 '' > = 4.69 '' NG
W2
T2,
eff 2 = 2 * PI() *( 5000 / ( 386.4 * 127.5) )^0.5 = 2 sec.
gK 2, eff
The effective damping and design spectrum correction factor is:
eff = 0.05 + ( 1 - 0.95 /( 4 ) ^ 0.5 - 0.05 * (4 ) ^ 0.5 ) / PI() = 0.19
cd = 1.5 / ( 40 * 0.19 + 1 ) + 0.5 = 0.68
Determine the frame displacement from Design Spectrum
T1, eff = 1.00 sec. S a (T1, eff )= 0.699
Deq o = ( 4.65 ^2 + 9.3 ^2 - 2 * 0.2 * 4.65 * 9.3 ) ^ 0.5 = 9.52 '' >=2/3 Das = 4.69 ''
Apply the Goal Seek every time you use the spreadsheet and Click OK
A (i2 ) 2 B (i2 ) C 0
22 = (-(-13249.52-((-13249.52)^2-4*167.44*188197.22)^0.5)/(2*167.44) = 18.56
11 Kr
= 193.21 / -80.61 = -2.397
21 K1, eff K r m112
It is customary to describe the normal modes by assigning a unit value to one of the amplitudes.
For the first mode, set 21 = 1.00 then 11 = -2.40
The mode shape for the first mode is
1 11
21
-2.40
1.00
Page 4-30 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.06 June
Page 2016
4-B1-3
July 2011
Chapter 4 Seismic Design and Retrofit
Design Examples of Seismic Retrofits Chapter 4
2 12
22
1.00
2.40
{1}T [ M ]{1}
Calculate the participation factor for mode " 1 " P1 T
({a}T {1})
{1} [ K ]{1}
{1}T [ M ]{1} m111 m2 21 12.94 * -2.4 + 12.94 * 1 = -18.08
{1}T [ K ]{1} ( K1, eff K r )11
2
2 K r 11 21 ( K 2, eff K r ) 221
= ( 510 + 193.21 ) * (-2.4) ^2 - 2* 193.21 * -2.4 * 1 + ( 127.5 + 193.21 ) * ( 1 ) ^2 = 5286.98
{ 2 }T [ M ]{1}
Calculate the participation factor for mode " 2 " P2 T
({a}T { 2 })
{ 2 } [ K ]{ 2 }
{ 2 }T [ M ]{1} m112 m2 22 12.94 * 1 + 12.94 * 2.4 = 43.96
{ 2 }T [ K ]{ 2
1} ( K1, eff K r )12 2 K r 12 22 ( K 2, eff K r ) 222
= ( 510 + 193.21 ) * (1) ^2 - 2* 193.21 * 1 * 2.4 + ( 127.5 + 193.21 ) * ( 2.4 ) ^2 = 1619.53
Deq1 P1cd S a (T1, eff ,0.05) g -0.0116 * 0.68 * 0.867 * 386.4 = -2.64 ''
Deq 2 P c S (T
2 d a 2, eff , 0.05) g
0.0379 * 0.68 * 0.48 * 386.4 = 4.77 ''
Note: By producing this example, the Washington State Department of Transportation does not
warrant that the SAP2000 software does not include errors. The example does not relieve Design
Engineers of their professional responsibility for the softwares accuracy and is not intended to
do so. Design Engineers should verify all computer results with hand calculations.
1. Introduction..............................................................................................................................1
2. Model Setup .............................................................................................................................2
2.1 Overview of Model ....................................................................................................2
2.2 Foundations Modeling ...............................................................................................3
2.3 Materials Modeling....................................................................................................6
2.4 Column Modeling ......................................................................................................15
2.5 Crossbeam Modeling .................................................................................................19
2.6 Superstructure Modeling............................................................................................20
2.7 Gravity Load Patterns ................................................................................................22
3. Displacement Demand Analysis ..............................................................................................23
3.1 Modal Analysis ..........................................................................................................23
3.2 Response-Spectrum Analysis.....................................................................................27
3.3 Displacement Demand ...............................................................................................32
4. Displacement Capacity Analysis .............................................................................................34
4.1 Hinge Definitions and Assignments ..........................................................................34
4.2 Pushover Analysis......................................................................................................41
5. Code Requirements..................................................................................................................66
5.1 P- Capacity Requirement Check .............................................................................66
5.2 Minimum Lateral Strength Check .............................................................................67
5.3 Structure Displacement Demand/Capacity Check.....................................................69
5.4 Member Ductility Requirement Check......................................................................73
5.5 Column Shear Demand/Capacity Check ...................................................................79
5.6 Balanced Stiffness and Frame Geometry Requirement Check..................................83
2. Model Setup
2.1 Overview of Model
This example employs SAP2000. The superstructure is modeled using frame elements for each
of the girders and shell elements for the deck. Shell elements are also used to model the end,
intermediate, and pier diaphragms. Non-prismatic frame sections are used to model the
crossbeams since they have variable depth. The X-axis is along the bridges longitudinal axis and
the Z-axis is vertical. The units used for inputs into SAP2000 throughout this example are kip-in.
The following summarizes the bridge being modeled:
The soil springs were generated using the method for spread footings outlined in Chapter 7 of the
Washington State Department of Transportation Bridge Design Manual. The assumed soil
parameters were G = 1,700 ksf and = 0.35. The spring values used in the model for the spread
footings are shown in Table 2.2.1-1.
Figure 2.2.1-2 shows the spread footing joint spring assignments (Assign menu > Joint >
Springs).
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 4-35
June 2016 Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04
WSDOT Page 4-B2-3
August 2010
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
The springs used in the demand model (response-spectrum model) are the same as the springs
used in the capacity model (pushover model). It is also be acceptable to conservatively use fixed-
base columns for the capacity model.
2.2.2 Abutments
The superstructure is modeled as being free in the longitudinal direction at the abutments in
accordance with the policies outlined in the Washington State Department of Transportation
Bridge Design Manual. The abutments are fixed in the transverse direction in this example for
simplification. However, please note that the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic
Bridge Design require the stiffness of the transverse abutments be modeled. Since there are five
girder lines instead of a spine element, the joints at the ends of the girders at the abutments all
have joint restraints assigned to them. The girder joint restraint assignments at the abutments are
listed in Table 2.2.2-1.
Page 4-36
Page
4-B2-4 WSDOT
WSDOT Bridge
Bridge Design
Design ManualM23-50.04
Manual M 23-50.16
AugustJune 2016
2010
Chapter 4 Seismic Design and Retrofit
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Figure 2.2.2-1 shows the girder joint restraints at the abutments (Assign menu > Joint >
Restraints).
The 5200Psi-Column and A706-Column material definitions are created to define the
expected, nonlinear properties of the column section.
The Material Property Data for the material 4000Psi-Deck is shown in Figure 2.3-1 (Define
menu > Materials > select 4000Psi-Deck > click Modify/Show Material button).
The Material Property Data for the material 4000Psi-Other is shown in Figure 2.3-2 (Define
menu > Materials > select 4000Psi-Other > click Modify/Show Material button).
The Material Property Data for the material 7000Psi-Girder is shown in Figure 2.3-3 (Define
menu > Materials > select 7000Psi-Girder > click Modify/Show Material button).
The Material Property Data for the material 5200Psi-Column is shown Figure 2.3-4 (Define
menu > Materials > select 5200Psi-Column > click Modify/Show Material button).
When the Switch To Advanced Property Display box shown in Figure 2.3-4 is checked , the
window shown in Figure 2.3-5 opens.
By clicking the Modify/Show Material Properties button in Figure 2.3-5, the window shown in
Figure 2.3-6 opens.
By clicking the Nonlinear Material Data button in Figure 2.3-6, the window shown in Figure
2.3-7 opens.
Note that in Figure 2.3-7 the Strain At Unconfined Compressive Strength, fc and the Ultimate
Unconfined Strain Capacity are set to the values required in Section 8.4.4 of the AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design. These unconfined properties are parameters
used in defining the Mander confined concrete stress-strain curve of the column core. It is seen
Page 4-42 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
Page 4-B2-10 June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04
August 2010
Chapter 4 Seismic Design and Retrofit
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
that under the Stress-Strain Definition Options, Mander is selected. By clicking the Show
Stress-Strain Plot button in Figure 2.3-7, a plot similar to that shown Figure 2.3-8 is displayed.
Figure 2.3-8 shows both the confined and unconfined nonlinear stress-strain relationships. The
user should verify that the concrete stress-strain curves are as expected.
The Material Property Data for the material A706-Other is shown in Figure 2.3-9 (Define
menu > Materials > select A706-Other > click Modify/Show Material button).
The Material Property Data for the material A706-Column is shown in Figure 2.3-10
(Define menu > Materials > select A706-Column > click Modify/Show Material button).
When the Switch To Advanced Property Display box in Figure 2.3-10 is checked, the window
shown in Figure 2.3-11 opens.
By clicking the Modify/Show Material Properties button in Figure 2.3-11, the window shown
in Figure 2.3-12 opens.
In Figure 2.3-12, the Minimum Yield Stress, Fy = 68 ksi and the Minimum Tensile Stress,
Fu = 95 ksi as required per Table 8.4.2-1 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic
Bridge Design. SAP2000 uses Fy and Fu instead of Fye and Fue to generate the nonlinear stress-
strain curve. Therefore, the Fye and Fue inputs in SAP2000 do not serve a purpose for this
analysis. By clicking the Nonlinear Material Data button in Figure 2.3-12, the window shown
in Figure 2.3-13 opens.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 4-45
WSDOT
June 2016 Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04 Page 4-B2-13
August 2010
Seismic Design
SAP2000 and Retrofit
Seismic Analysis Example Chapter 4
In Figure 2.3-13, it is seen that under the Stress-Strain Curve Definitions Options, Park is
selected. Also the box for Use Caltrans Default Controlling Strain Values is checked. By
clicking the Show Stress-Strain Plot button in Figure 2.3-13 the plot shown in Figure 2.3-14 is
displayed.
The column elements have rigid end offsets assigned to them at the footings and crossbeams.
The net clear height of the columns is 29-2. The columns are split into three frame elements.
Section 5.4.3 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design requires
that columns be split into a minimum of three elements.
Figure 2.4-1 shows the frame section property definition for the column elements (Define menu
> Section Properties > Frame Sections > select COL > click Modify/Show Property button).
By clicking the Section Designer button in Figure 2.4-1, the window shown in Figure 2.4-2
opens. The COL frame section is defined using a round Caltrans shape in Section Designer as
shown in Figure 2.4-2.
By right-clicking on the section shown in Figure 2.4-2, the window shown in Figure 2.4-3 opens.
Figure 2.4-3 shows the parameter input window for the Caltrans shape is shown in Figure 2.4-2.
By clicking the Show button for the Core Concrete in Figure 2.4-3, the window shown in Figure
2.4-4 opens.
Figure 2.4-4 shows the Mander confined stress-strain concrete model for the core of the column.
The user should verify that the concrete stress-strain curve is as expected.
The girders are assigned insertion points such that they connect to the same joints as the deck
elements but are below the deck. Since the deck is 8 inches thick and the gap between the top of
the girder and the soffit of the deck is 3 inches, the insertion point is 7 inches (8 in./2 +3 in.)
above the top of the girder. Figure 2.6-2 shows the girder frame element insertion point
assignments (Assign menu > Frame > Insertion Point).
Links connect the girders to the crossbeams which models the fixed connection between these
elements. See the screen shot shown in Figure 2.6-3.
The superstructure is broken into five segments per span. Section 5.4.3 of the AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design requires that a minimum of four segments per
span be used.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 4-53
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04 Page 4-B2-21
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
The designer should verify the weight of the structure in the model with hand calculations.
It can be seen in Figure 3.1.2-1 that concrete strain capacity limits the available plastic curvature.
Designers should verify that SAP2000s bilinearization is acceptable. The property modifiers are
then applied to the column frame elements as shown in Figure 3.1.2-2 (Assign menu > Frame >
Property Modifiers).
The torsional constant modifier is 0.2 for columns as required by Section 5.6.5 of the AASHTO
Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design.
Page 4-56 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
Page 4-B2-24 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04
June 2016
August 2010
Chapter 4 Seismic Design and Retrofit
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Figure 3.1.4-1 also shows that the first mode in the X-direction (longitudinal) has a period of
0.95 seconds and the first mode in the Y-direction (transverse) has period of 0.61 seconds. The
designer should verify fundamental periods with hand calculations. The designer should also
visually review the primary mode shapes to verify they represent realistic behavior.
PGA = 0.396 g
Ss = 0.883 g
S1 = 0.294 g
A site class of E is assumed for this example and the site coefficients are:
FPGA = 0.91
Fa = 1.04
Fv = 2.82
As = FPGA*PGA = 0.361 g
SDS = Fa*Ss = 0.919 g
SD1 = Fv*S1 = 0.830 g
Since SD1 is greater than or equal to 0.50, per Table 3.5-1 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications
for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design the Seismic Design Category is D.
When the Convert to User Defined button is clicked, the function appears as shown in Figure
3.2.2-2.
Having the response-spectrum function stored as User Defined is advantageous because the
data is stored within the .SDB file. Therefore, if the .SDB file is transferred to a different
location (different computer), the response-spectrum function will also be moved.
Ts = SD1 / SDS
= 0.830 / 0.919
= 0.903 sec.
T* = 1.25 Ts
= 1.25 * 0.903
= 1.13 sec.
Therefore,
Therefore,
From the axial loads displayed for the DC+DW load case it is determined that the axial force at
the bottom of the column is approximately 1,290 kips and the axial force at the top of the column
is approximately 1,210 kips (see section 3.1.2 of this example for a discussion on the inclusion of
construction sequence effects on column axial loads). It is expected that the difference in axial
load between the tops and bottoms of the columns will not result in a significant difference in the
plastic moment. However, on some bridges the axial loads at the tops and bottoms of the
columns may be substantially different or the column section may vary along its height
producing significantly different plastic moments at each end.
The moment-curvature analysis of the column base is shown in Figure 4.1.1-2 (Define menu >
Section Properties > Frame Sections > select COL > click Modify/Show Property button >
click Section Designer button > Display menu > Show Moment-Curvature Curve).
It is seen in Figure 4.1.1-2 that the plastic moment capacity at the base of the column is 79,186
kip-inches (with only dead load applied).
The moment-curvature analysis of the column top is shown in Figure 4.1.1-3 (Define menu >
Section Properties > Frame Sections > select COL > click Modify/Show Property button >
click Section Designer button > Display menu > Show Moment-Curvature Curve).
It is seen in Figure 4.1.1-3 that the plastic moment capacity at the top of the column is 77,920
kip-inches (with only dead load applied).
L1 = Length from point of maximum moment at base of column to inflection point (in.)
= 350 x Mp_col_base / (Mp_col_base + Mp_col_top)
= 350 x 79186 / (79186 + 77920)
= 176 in.
L2 = Length from point of maximum moment at top of column to inflection point (in.)
= 350 L1
= 350 176
= 174 in.
Where:
L = length of column from point of maximum moment to the point of moment
contraflexure (in.)
= L1 at the base of the columns (L1Long = L1Trans = 176 in.)
= L2 at the top of the columns (L2Long = L2Trans = 174 in.)
fye = expected yield strength of longitudinal column reinforcing steel bars (ksi)
= 68 ksi (ASTM A706 bars).
In this example, the plastic hinge lengths in both directions are the same because the locations of
the inflection points in both directions are the same. This will not always be the case, such as
when there is a single column bent.
Relative Length = [Element Length Xbeam Offset (Hinge Length / 2)] / Element Length
= [146 58 (26.9 / 2)] / 146
= 0.51
The hinges at the bases of the columns are assigned at relative distances as shown in Figure
4.1.3-1 (Assign menu > Frame > Hinges).
By selecting the Auto P-M3 Hinge Property in Figure 4.1.3-1 and clicking the Modify/Show
Auto Hinge Assignment Data button, the window shown in Figure 4.1.3-2 opens. Figure 4.1.3-
2 shows the Auto Hinge Assignment Data form with input parameters for the hinges at the bases
of the columns in the longitudinal direction. Due to the orientation of the frame element local
axes, the P-M3 hinge acts in the longitudinal direction.
By selecting the Auto P-M2 Hinge Property in Figure 4.1.3-1 and clicking the Modify/Show
Hinge Assignment Data button in Figure 4.1.3-1, the window shown in Figure 4.1.3-3 opens.
Figure 4.1.3-3 shows the Auto Hinge Assignment Data form with input parameters for the hinges
at the bases of the columns in the transverse direction. Due to the orientation of the frame
element local axes, the P-M2 hinge acts in the transverse direction.
In Figures 4.1.3-2 and 4.1.3-3 it is seen that the Hinge Length is set to 27.0 inches, the Use
Idealized (Bilinear) Moment-Curvature Curve box is checked, and the Drops Load After
Point E option is selected.
The hinges at the tops of the columns are assigned at relative distances as shown in Figure 4.1.3-
4 (Assign menu > Frame > Hinges).
By selecting the Auto P-M3 Hinge Property in Figure 4.1.3-4 and clicking the Modify/Show
Auto Hinge Assignment Data button, the window shown in Figure 4.1.3-5 opens. Figure 4.1.3-
5 shows the Auto Hinge Assignment Data form with input parameters for the hinges at the tops
of the columns in the longitudinal direction. Due to the orientation of the frame element local
axes, the P-M3 hinge acts in the longitudinal direction.
By selecting the Auto P-M2 Hinge Property in Figure 4.1.3-4 and clicking the Modify/Show
Hinge Assignment Data button, the window shown in Figure 4.1.3-6 opens. Figure 4.1.3-6
shows the Auto Hinge Assignment Data form with input parameters for the hinges at the tops of
the columns in the transverse direction. Due to the orientation of the frame element local axes,
the P-M2 hinge acts in the transverse direction.
In Figures 4.1.3-5 and 4.1.3-6 it is seen that the Hinge Length is set to 26.9 inches, the Use
Idealized (Bilinear) Moment-Curvature Curve box is checked, and the Drops Load After
Point E option is selected.
A special load pattern must be created for the column dead loads since the entire structure is not
in place during the pushover analysis. A new load pattern called Dead-Col_Axial is added as
shown in Figure 4.2.1.2-1 (Define menu > Load Patterns).
The column axial loads are 1,250 kips (average of top and bottom). The column dead load
moments in the transverse direction are small and can be neglected. Figure 4.2.1.2-2 shows the
joint forces assignment window for the Dead-Col_Axial load pattern (Assign menu > Joint
Loads > Forces).
After the forces defined in Figure 4.2.1.2-2 have been assigned, they can be viewed as shown in
Figure 4.2.1.2-3.
To define the transverse pushover analysis lateral load distribution, a new load pattern called
Trans_Push is added as shown in Figure 4.2.1.2-4 (Define menu > Load Patterns).
Since the superstructure is not defined as a spine element, there is no joint in the plane of the
bent located at the centroid of the superstructure. Therefore, the load distribution for the
transverse pushover analysis is an equivalent horizontal load consisting of a point load and a
moment applied at the center crossbeam joint. The centroid of the superstructure is located 58.83
inches above the center joint. As a result, a joint force with a horizontal point load of 100 kips
and a moment of 100*58.83 = 5,883 kip-inches is used. Special care should be taken to ensure
that the shear and moment are applied in the proper directions. The joint forces are assigned to
the crossbeam center joint as shown in Figure 4.2.1.2-5 (Assign menu > Joint Loads > Forces).
After the forces defined in Figure 4.2.1.2-5 have been assigned, they can be viewed as shown in
Figure 4.2.1.2-6.
The Load Case Data form for the LongPushSetup load case is shown in Figure 4.2.2.1-1
(Define menu > Load Cases > select LongPushSetup > click Modify/Show Load Case
button).
It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.1-1 that the Initial Conditions are set to Zero Initial Conditions Start
from Unstressed State, the Load Case Type is Static, the Analysis Type is set to Nonlinear, and
the Geometric Nonlinearity Parameters are set to None.
A new load case is now created called LongPush, which will actually be the pushover analysis
case. The Load Case Data form for the LongPush load case is shown in Figure 4.2.2.1-2
(Define menu > Load Cases > select LongPush > click Modify/Show Load Case button).
It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.1-2 that the Initial Conditions are set to Continue from State at End of
Nonlinear Case LongPushSetup, the Load Case Type is Static, the Analysis Type is
Nonlinear, and the Geometric Nonlinearity Parameters are set to None. Under Loads Applied,
the Load Type is set to Accel in the UX direction with a Scale Factor equal to -1. Applying the
acceleration in the negative X-direction results in a negative base shear and positive X-direction
displacements.
By clicking the Modify/Show button for the Load Application parameters in Figure 4.2.2.1-2,
the window shown in Figure 4.2.2.1-3 opens. It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.1-3 that the Load
Application Control is set to Displacement Control, the Load to a Monitored Displacement
Magnitude of value is set at 11 inches which is greater than the longitudinal displacement
demand of 8.76 inches. Also, the DOF being tracked is U1 at Joint 33.
By clicking the Modify/Show button for the Results Saved in Figure 4.2.2.1-2, the window
shown in Figure 4.2.2.1-4 opens. It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.1-4 that the Results Saved option is set
to Multiple States, the Minimum Number of Saved States is set to 22, which ensures that a step
will occur for at least every half-inch of displacement. Also, the Save positive Displacement
Increments Only box is checked.
To isolate the bent and apply the static loads to the columns, a staged construction load case
called TransPushSetup is created (Define menu > Load Cases > select TransPushSetup >
click Modify/Show Load Case button). The TransPushSetup analysis case has two stages,
one to isolate the bent, and one to apply the column axial loads. Note these two stages could be
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 4-79
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04 Page 4-B2-47
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
combined into one stage without altering the results. Stage 1 of the TransPushSetup load case
definition is shown in Figure 4.2.2.2-2.
It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.2-2 that the only elements added are those in the group Pier2, the
Initial Conditions are set to Zero Initial Conditions Start from Unstressed State, the Load
Case Type is Static, the Analysis Type is set to Nonlinear Staged Construction, and the
Geometric Nonlinearity Parameters are set to None. Stage 2 of the TransPushSetup load case
definition is shown in Figure 4.2.2.2-3.
A new load case is now created called TransPush, which will actually be the pushover analysis
case. The Load Case Data form for the TransPush load case is shown in Figure 4.2.2.2-4
(Define menu > Load Cases > select TransPush > click Modify/Show Load Case button).
It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.2-4 that the Initial Conditions are set to Continue from State at End of
Nonlinear Case TransPushSetup, the Load Case Type is Static, the Analysis Type is
Nonlinear, and the Geometric Nonlinearity Parameters are set to None. Under Loads Applied,
the Load Type is set to Load Pattern with the Load Name set to Trans_Push and the Scale
Factor is equal to 1.
By clicking the Modify/Show button for the Load Application parameters in Figure 4.2.2.2-4,
the window shown in Figure 4.2.2.2-5 opens. It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.2-5 that the Load
Application Control is set to Displacement Control, the Load to a Monitored Displacement
Magnitude of value is set at 10 inches, which is larger than the transverse displacement demand
of 6.07 inches. Also, the DOF being tracked is U2 at Joint 33.
By clicking the Modify/Show button for the Results Saved in Figure 4.2.2.2-4, the window
shown in Figure 4.2.2.2-6 opens. It is seen in Figure 4.2.2.2-6 that the Results Saved option is set
to Multiple States, the Minimum Number of Saved States is set to 20, which ensures that a step
will occur for at least every half-inch of displacement. Also, the Save positive Displacement
Increments Only box is checked.
WSDOT
WSDOT BridgeDesign
Bridge DesignManual
Manual MM23-50.04
23-50.16 Page 4-B2-51
Page 4-83
August
June 2010
2016
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Figures 4.2.3.1-2 through 4.2.3.1-13 show the deformed shape of the structure at various
displacements for the load case LongPush (Display menu > Show Deformed Shape > select
LongPush > click OK button). Note that the plastic hinge color scheme terms such as IO,
LS, and CP are in reference to performance based design of building structures. However,
for Caltrans plastic hinges, the colors are discretized evenly along the plastic deformation.
Therefore, the color scheme still provides a visual representation of the hinge plastic strain
progression that is useful.
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 0.0 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-2
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 2.3 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-3
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 2.8 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-4
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 3.5 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-5
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 4.4 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-6
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 4.9 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-7
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 5.9 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-8
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 6.9 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-9
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 7.9 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-10
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 8.9 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-11
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 9.9 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-12
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case LongPush at UX = 10.7 in.
Figure 4.2.3.1-13
Figures 4.2.3.2-2 through 4.2.3.2-13 show the deformed shape of the structure at various
displacements for the load case TransPush (Display menu > Show Deformed Shape > select
TransPush > click OK button). Note that the plastic hinge color scheme terms such as IO,
LS, and CP are in reference to performance-based design of building structures. However,
for Caltrans plastic hinges, the colors are discretized evenly along the plastic deformation.
Therefore, the color scheme still provides a visual representation of the hinge plastic strain
progression that is useful.
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 0.0 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-2
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 2.0 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-3
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 2.8 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-4
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 3.1 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-5
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 4.6 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-6
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 5.1 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-7
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 6.6 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-8
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 7.1 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-9
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 7.6 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-10
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 8.1 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-11
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 8.6 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-12
View of Deformed Shape for the Load Case TransPush at UY = 9.5 in.
Figure 4.2.3.2-13
5. Code Requirements
5.1 P- Capacity Requirement Check
The requirements of section 4.11.5 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic
Bridge Design must be satisfied or a nonlinear time history analysis that includes P- effects
must be performed. The requirement is as follows:
Pdlr 0.25 Mp
Where:
Pdl = unfactored dead load acting on the column (kip)
= 1,250 kips
r = relative lateral offset between the point of contraflexure and the furthest end of
the plastic hinge (in.)
= LD / 2 (Assumed since the inflection point is located at approximately
mid-height of the column. If the requirements are not met, a more advanced
calculation of r will be performed)
r = LD_Long / 2
= 8.76 / 2
= 4.38 in.
Ptrib = greater of the dead load per column or force associated with the tributary
seismic mass collected at the bent (kip)
Hh = the height from the top of the footing to the top of the column or the equivalent
column height for a pile extension (in.)
= 34.0 * 12 (Top of footing to top of crossbeam)
= 408 in.
= fixity factor (See Section 4.8.1 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD
Seismic Bridge Design)
= 2 for fixed top and bottom
Determine Ptrib:
Since the abutments are being modeled as free in the longitudinal direction, all of the seismic
mass is collected at the bents in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the force associated with
the tributary seismic mass collected at the bent is greater than the dead load per column and is
computed as follows:
Note that a more sophisticated analysis to determine the tributary seismic mass would be
necessary if the bridge were not symmetric and the bents did not have equal stiffness.
Determine Mne:
Section 8.5 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design defines Mne
as the expected nominal moment capacity based on the expected concrete and reinforcing steel
strengths when the concrete strain reaches a magnitude of 0.003. Section Designer in SAP2000
can be used to determine Mne by performing a moment-curvature analysis and displaying the
moment when the concrete reaches a strain of 0.003. The moment-curvature diagram for the
column section is shown in Figure 5.2-1 with values displayed at a concrete strain of 0.002989
(Define menu > Section Properties > Frame Sections > select COL > click Modify/Show
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 4-99
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04 Page 4-B2-67
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Property button > click Section Designer button > Display menu > Show Moment-
Curvature Curve).
Perform Check:
0.1 Ptrib (Hh + 0.5 Ds) / = 0.1 * 1,660 * (408 + 0.5 * 85) / 2
= 37,392 kip-in. < 73,482 kip-in. = Mne => Okay
LD < LC
Where:
LD = displacement demand taken along the local principal axis of the ductile
member (in.)
Determine LC_Long:
The displacement capacity can be determined from the pushover curve as show in Figure 5.3.1-1
(Display menu > Show Static Pushover Curve).
The displacement at which the first hinge ruptures (fails) is the displacement capacity of the
structure and is also the point at which the base shear begins to decrease. It can be seen in Figure
5.3.1-1 that the base shear does not decrease until a displacement of approximately 11 inches.
This suggests the displacement capacity of the bridge in the longitudinal direction is greater than
WSDOT
WSDOT BridgeDesign
Bridge DesignManual
Manual MM23-50.04
23-50.16 Page 4-B2-69
Page 4-101
August
June 2010
2016
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
the displacement demand. To confirm this, the table shown in Figure 5.3.1-2 can be displayed by
clicking File menu > Display Tables in Figure 5.3.1-1.
Figure 5.3.1-2 shows the step, displacement, base force, and hinge state data for the longitudinal
pushover analysis. By definition, hinges fail if they are in the Beyond E hinge state. In Figure
5.3.1-2 it can be seen that step 23 is the first step any hinges reach the Beyond E hinge state.
Therefore, LC_Long = 10.69 inches and the following can be stated:
LC_Long = 10.69 in. > LD_Long = 8.76 in. => Longitudinal Displacement
Demand/Capacity is Okay
Determine LC_Trans:
The displacement capacity can be determined from the pushover curve as show in Figure 5.3.2-1
(Display menu > Show Static Pushover Curve).
As mentioned above, the displacement at which the first plastic hinge ruptures (fails) is the
displacement capacity of the structure and is also the point at which the base shear begins to
decrease. It can be seen in Figure 5.3.2-1 that the base shear does not decrease until a
displacement of approximately 9.5 inches. This suggests the displacement capacity of the bridge
in the transverse direction is greater than the displacement demand. To confirm this, the table
shown in Figure 5.3.2-2 can be displayed by clicking File menu > Display Tables in Figure
5.3.2-1.
Figure 5.3.2-2 shows the step, displacement, base force, and hinge state data for the transverse
pushover analysis. Recall the transverse pushover analysis only includes a single bent. By
definition, hinges fail if they are in the Beyond E hinge state. In Figure 5.3.2-2 it can be seen
that step 21 is the first step any hinges reach the Beyond E hinge state. Therefore, LC_Trans =
9.51 inches and the following can be stated:
LC_Trans = 9.51 in. > LD_Trans = 6.07 in. => Transverse Displacement
Demand/Capacity is Okay
Therefore:
D = 1 + 3 * [pd / (yi * L)] * (1 0.5 * Lp / L)
This example will explicitly show how to compute the ductility demand for the lower hinge of
the trailing column being deflected in the transverse direction. The ductility demands for the
remaining hinges are presented in tabular format.
Determine L:
The locations of the inflection points were approximated previously to determine the hinge
lengths. However, now that the pushover analysis has been performed, the actual inflection
points can be determined.
Figure 5.3.2-2 shows that at step 13 the displacement is 6.11 inches, which is slightly greater
than the displacement demand. Figure 5.4-1 shows the column moment 2-2 diagram at step 13 of
the TransPush load case as displayed in SAP2000 (Display menu > Show Forces/Stresses >
Frames/Cables > select TransPush > select Moment 2-2 > select Step 13 > click OK button).
From this information it is found that the inflection point is 59 inches above the lower joint on
the middle column element and the following is computed:
Determine pd:
Since the displacement of the bent at step 13 is greater than the displacement demand, the plastic
rotation at step 13 is greater than or equal to the plastic rotation demand. The plastic rotation at
each step can be found directly from the hinge results in SAP2000. The name of the lower hinge
on the trailing column is 1H1. Figure 5.4-2 shows the plastic rotation plot of hinge 1H1 at step
13 of the TransPush load case (Display menu > Show Hinge Results > select hinge 1H1 (Auto
P-M2) > select load case TransPush > select step 13 > click OK button).
Hinge 1H1 Plastic Rotation Results for Load Case TransPush at Step 13
Figure 5.4-2
Figure 5.4-2 shows that the plastic rotation for hinge 1H1 is 0.0129 radians. Therefore pd =
0.0129 radians.
Determine yi:
The idealized yield curvature will be found by determining the axial load in the hinge at first
yield and then inputting that load into Section Designer. The axial load at yield can be found by
viewing the hinge results at step 4 (when the hinge first yields). Figure 5.4-3 shows the axial
plastic deformation plot of hinge 1H1 at step 4 of the TransPush load case (Display menu >
Show Hinge Results > select hinge 1H1 (Auto P-M2) > select load case TransPush > select
step 4 > select hinge DOF P > click OK button).
Hinge 1H1 Axial Plastic Deformation Results for Load Case TransPush at
Step 4
Figure 5.4-3
Figure 5.4-3 shows that the axial load in hinge 1H1 at step 4 of the TransPush load case is -432
kips. That load can now be entered into Section Designer to determine the idealized yield
curvature, yi. The moment-curvature diagram for the column section with P = -432 kips is
shown in Figure 5.4-4 (Define menu > Section Properties > Frame Sections > select COL >
click Modify/Show Property button > click Section Designer button > Display menu > Show
Moment-Curvature Curve).
The ductility demand in the transverse direction for the lower hinge in the trailing column can
now be calculated as follows:
yi = 0.00009294 in.-1
pd = 0.0129 rad.
Lp = 27.0 in.
Therefore:
D = 1 + 3 * [0.0129 / (0.00009294 * 175)] * (1 0.5 * 27.0 / 175)
= 3.2 < 6 => okay
The ductility demands and related values for all column hinges are shown in Table 5.4-1.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 4-109
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04 Page 4-B2-77
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Column Axial
Pushover Hinge Yield
and Hinge Load at yi pd Lp L D
Direction Name Step
Location Yield
(Long/Trans) (-) (-) (#) (kips) (1/in.) (rad.) (in.) (in.) (-)
Trailing
Longitudinal 1H2 5 -1222 .0000889 .0207 27.0 175 4.7
Lower
Trailing
Longitudinal 3H2 6 -1135 .00008926 .0204 26.9 175 4.6
Upper
Leading
Longitudinal 7H2 6 -1354 .00008851 .0195 27.0 175 4.5
Lower
Leading
Longitudinal 9H2 8 -1277 .0000887 .0168 26.9 175 4.0
Upper
Trailing
Transverse 1H1 4 -432 .00009294 .0129 27.0 175 3.2
Lower
Trailing
Transverse 3H1 5 -305 .00009292 .0118 26.9 175 3.0
Upper
Leading
Transverse 4H1 6 -2226 .00009185 .0104 27.0 175 2.8
Lower
Leading
Transverse 6H1 7 -2253 .00009186 .00902 26.9 175 2.6
Upper
Table 5.4-1 shows that all hinge ductility demands are less than 6.
sVn Vu
Where:
s = 0.9
Vn = nominal shear capacity (kips)
= Vc + Vs
vc if Pu is compressive:
vc = 0.032 [1 + Pu / (2 Ag)] fc1/2 min ( 0.11 fc1/2 , 0.047 fc1/2)
vc otherwise:
vc =0
Where:
Pu = ultimate compressive force acting on section (kips)
Asp = area of spiral (in.2)
s = pitch of spiral (in.)
D = diameter of spiral (in.)
fyh = nominal yield stress of spiral (ksi)
fc = nominal concrete strength (ksi)
D = maximum local ductility demand of member
This example will explicitly show how to perform the shear demand/capacity check for the
trailing column being deflected in the transverse direction. The shear demand/capacity checks for
the remaining columns are presented in tabular format.
Determine Vu:
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 4-111
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M23-50.04 Page 4-B2-79
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
Figure 5.5-1 shows the column shear diagram for the TransPush load case as displayed in
SAP2000 (Display menu > Show Forces/Stresses > Frames/Cables > select TransPush >
select Shear 3-3 > select Step 13 > click OK button).
From Figure 5.5-1 it is determined that the plastic shear in the trailing column is 389 kips.
Section 8.6.1 states that Vu shall be determined on the basis of Vpo, which is the shear associated
with the overstrength moment, Mpo, defined in Section 8.5 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications
for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design. For ASTM A 706 reinforcement the overstrength magnifier is
1.2, and so the shear for the SAP2000 model must be multiplied by this factor.
Therefore:
Vu = mo Vp
Where:
po = 1.2
Vp = 389 kips
and
Vu = 1.2 * 389
= 467 kips
Determine Vc:
Figure 5.5-2 shows the column axial load diagram for the TransPush load case as displayed in
SAP2000 (Display menu > Show Forces/Stresses > Frames/Cables > select TransPush >
select Axial Force > select Step 13 > click OK button).
Page
Page 4-B2-80
4-112 WSDOT BridgeBridge
WSDOT DesignDesign
ManualManual
M23-50.04
M 23-50.16
August 2010
June 2016
Chapter 4 Seismic Design and Retrofit
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
From Figure 5.5-2 it is determined that the axial force in the trailing column is -247 kips.
Therefore:
Pu = 247 kips
Ag = * 602 / 4
= 2827.4 in.2
Ae = 0.8 Ag
= 0.8 * 2827.4
= 2262 in.2
fyh = 60 ksi
fc = 4 ksi
s = (4 Asp) / (s D)
= (4 * 0.44) / ( 3.5 * 56.25)
= 0.0089
fs = sfyh 0.35
= 0.0089 * 60 0.35
= 0.54 0.35
= 0.35 ksi
WSDOT
WSDOT BridgeDesign
Bridge DesignManual
Manual MM23-50.04
23-50.16 Page 4-B2-81
Page 4-113
August
June 2010
2016
Seismic Design and Retrofit Chapter 4
SAP2000 Seismic Analysis Example
= 2.8
Vc = vcAe
= 0.187 * 2262
= 423 kips
Determine Vs:
Vs = ( / 2) (Asp fyh D) / s
= ( / 2) (0.44 * 60 * 56.25) / 3.5
= 666 kips
Determine sVn:
The shear demands and capacities and related values for all columns are shown in Table 5.5-1.
Pushover
Column Vp Vu Pu D ' vc Vc Vs sVn
Direction
(Long/Trans) (-) (kips) (kips) (kips) (-) (-) (ksi) (kips) (kips) (kips)
Longitudinal Trailing 484 581 1175 4.7 1.3 0.10 228 666 804
Longitudinal Leading 497 596 1320 4.5 1.5 0.12 268 666 841
Transverse Trailing 389 467 247 3.2 2.8 0.19 423 666 980
Transverse Leading 580 696 2253 2.8 3.0 0.22 498 666 1047
Table 5.5-1 shows that the shear capacities are greater than the shear demands for all columns.
4.99 References
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 6th Edition, 2012
AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design, 2nd Edition, 2011
AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design, 3rd Edition, 2010
Caltrans Bridge Design Aids 14 4 Joint Shear Modeling Guidelines for Existing
Structures, California Department of Transportation, August 2008
FHWA Seismic Retrofitting Manual for Highway Structures: Part 1 Bridges,
Publication No. FHWA-HRT-06-032, January 2006
McLean, D.I. and Smith, C.L., Noncontact Lap Splices in Bridge Column-Shaft
Connections, Report Number WA-RD 417.1, Washington State University
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03, Environmental and Engineering
Program, Geotechnical Services, Washington State Department of Transportation
5.0 General
The provisions in this section apply to the design of cast-in-place (CIP) and precast
concrete structures.
Design of concrete structures shall be based on the requirements and guidance cited
herein and in thecurrent AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, AASHTO
Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design, Special Provisions and the
Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction M41-10.
5.1 Materials
5.1.1 Concrete
A. Strength of Concrete
Pacific NW aggregates have consistently resulted in concrete strengths, which may
exceed 10,000 psi in 28 days. Specified concrete strengths should be rounded tothe
next highest 100 psi.
1. CIP Concrete Bridges
Since conditions for placing and curing concrete for CIP components are not
as controlled as they are for precast bridge components, Class 4000 concrete
is typically used. Where significant economy can be gained or structural
requirements dictate, Class 5000 concrete may be used with the approvals of
the Bridge Design Engineer, Bridge Construction Office, and MaterialsLab.
2. Prestressed Concrete Girders
Nominal 28-day concrete strength ('c) for prestressed concrete girders is 7.0
ksi. Where higher strengths would eliminate a line of girders, a maximum of
10.0 ksi canbe specified.
The minimum concrete compressive strength at release ('ci) for each prestressed
concrete girder shall be shown in the plans. For high strength concrete, the
compressive strength at release shall belimited to7.5ksi. Release strengths of up
to8.5 ksi can be achieved with extended curingfor special circumstances.
B. Classes of Concrete
1. Class 3000
Used in large sections with light to nominal reinforcement, mass pours,
sidewalks, curbs, gutters, and nonstructural concrete guardrail anchors,
luminaire bases.
2. Class 4000
Used in CIP post-tensioned or conventionally reinforced concrete box girders,
slabs, traffic and pedestrian barriers, approach slabs, footings, box culverts,
wing walls, curtain walls, retaining walls, columns, andcrossbeams.
3. Class 4000A
Used for bridge approach slabs.
4. Class 4000D
Used for CIP bridge decks.
5. Class 4000P
Used for CIP pile and shaft.
6. Class 4000W
Used underwater in seals.
Let x = relative strength to determine the age at which the concrete will reach
the design strength
100
110 (5.1.1-1)
70 64
D. Modulus of Elasticity
The modulus of elasticity shall be determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD
Section 5.4.2.4. For calculation of the modulus of elasticity, the unit weight of plain
concrete (wc) shallbe taken as 0.155 kcf for prestressed concrete girders and 0.150
kcf fornormal-weight concrete. Thecorrection factor (K1) shall normally be taken
as 1.0.
E. Shrinkage and Creep
Shrinkage and creep shall be calculated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Section 5.4.2.3. The relative humidity, H, may be taken as 75 percent for standard
conditions. The maturity of concrete, t, may be taken as 2,000 days for standard
conditions. The volume-to-surface ratio, V/S, is given in Table5.6.11 for standard
WSDOT prestressed concretegirders.
In determining the maturity of concrete at initial loading, ti, one day of
accelerated curing by steam orradiant heat may be taken as equal to seven days of
normalcuring.
5.1.12 1 (5.1.1-2)
Figure 5.1.1-1 provides creep coefficients for a range of typical initial concrete
5.1.31 12 .
strength values, ci, as a function of time from initial seven day steam cure
V/S, ratio of 3.3 as an average for
(ti=7days). The figure uses a volume-to-surface,
5.1.32humidity,
girders and relative
H,equal
to 75 percent.
(H=75%,
V/S=3.3, ti = 7 days)
1.25 5 .1 .3-3
For girders within the effective width
5 .1 .3-4
For girders outside the effective width
( t , 7day , 5ksi)
( t , 7day , 6ksi) 1 5.1.35 If then
( t , 7day , 7ksi)
5.1.36 If then
( t , 7day , 8ksi)
0.75
( t , 7day , 9ksi) 5.1.37
( t , 7day , 10ksi)
5.1.41:
( t , 7day , 11ksi)
0.5
( t , 7day , 12ksi)
5.1.42:
0.25
5.1.43: 1
3 3 3
500 110 1.5 10 2 10
where: t
V 2 (days)
L
Creep Coefficient for Standard Conditions as Function of Initial Concrete
S Strength
CreepCoefficientPlot.xmcd p. 1 / 1
Figure 5.1.1-1 H JLBeaver/BSA
7/16/2010 2:50 PM R
F. Shrinkage
5.1.44:fpT fpRO fpES fpED fpLT
Concrete shrinkage strain, sh, shall be calculated in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD. 5.1.45:
.55
G. Grout
Grout is usually a prepackaged
5.1.46: cement
based
grout or non-shrink
grout
that
is
mixed, placed, and cured as recommended by the manufacturer. It is used under
steel base plates for both
5.1.47: bridge
bearings and luminaries or sign bridge bases.
Should the grout pad thickness exceed 4, steel reinforcement shall be used. For
design purposes, the strength of
5.1.47where:3
the
grout, if properly cured, can be assumed to be
3 .
equal to or greater than that of the adjacent concrete but not greater than 4000psi.
H. Mass Concrete
Mass concrete is any volume of concrete with dimensions large enough to require
that measures be taken to cope with the generation of heat from hydration of the
cement and attendant volume change to minimize cracking. Temperature-related
cracking may be experienced in thick-section concrete structures, including spread
footings, pile caps, bridge piers, crossbeams, thick walls, and other structures as
applicable.
Concrete placements with least dimension greater than 6feet should be considered
mass concrete, although smaller placements with least dimension greater than
3feet may also have problems with heat generation effects. Shafts need not be
considered mass concrete.
The temperature of mass concrete shall not exceed 160F. The temperature
difference between the geometric center of the concrete and the center of nearby
exterior surfaces shall not exceed 35F.
Designers could mitigate heat generation effects by specifying construction joints
and placement intervals. Designers should consider requiring the Contractor
tosubmit a thermal control plan, which may include such things as:
1. Temperature monitors and equipment.
2. Insulation.
3. Concrete cooling before placement.
4. Concrete cooling after placement, such as by means of internal cooling pipes.
5. Use of smaller, less frequent placements.
6. Other methods proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer
ofRecord.
Concrete mix design optimization, such as using low-heat cement, fly ash orslag
cement, low-water/cement ratio, low cementitious materials content, larger
aggregate, etc. is acceptable as long as the concrete mix meets the requirements
ofthe Standard Specifications for the specified concrete class.
The ACI Manual of Concrete Practice Publication 207 and specifications used for
the Tacoma Narrows Bridge Project suspension cable anchorages (2003-2006) can
be used as references.
I. Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC)
Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) may be used in structural members such as
precast noise wall panels, barriers, three-sided structures, etc. as described in
Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(27).
SCC may be used in prestressed concrete girders.
SCC may be specified for cast-in-place applications where the use of conventional
concrete could be challenging and problematic. Examples are where new concrete
is being cast up against an existing soffit, or in members with very dense/
congested reinforcing steel. Use of SCC for primary structural components such
as columns, crossbeams, slabs, etc. requires the approval of the WSDOT Bridge
DesignEngineer.
J. Shotcrete
Shotcrete could be used as specified in WSDOT Standard Plans. Shotcrete may
not be suitable for some critical applications unless approved by the Engineer of
Record.
Substitution of CIP conventional concrete in the contract document with shotcrete
requires the approval of the Engineer of Record.
Some potential shortfalls of shotcrete as compared to conventional CIP concrete
include:
Durability Conventional concrete is placed in forms and vibrated for
consolidation. Shotcrete, whether placed by wet or dry material feed, is
pneumatically applied to the surface and is not consolidated as conventional
concrete. Due to the difference in consolidation, permeability can be affected.
Ifthe permeability is not low enough, the service life of the shotcrete
will be affected and may not meet the minimum of 75 years specified for
conventionalconcretes.
Observation of some projects indicates the inadequate performance of shotcrete
to properly hold back water. This results in leaking and potential freezing,
seemingly at a higher rate than conventional concrete. Due to the method of
placement of shotcrete, air entrainment is difficult tocontrol. This leads to less
resistance of freeze/thaw cycles.
Cracking There is more cracking observed in shotcrete surfaces compared
to conventional concrete. Excessive cracking in shotcrete could be attributed
to its higher shrinkage, method of curing, andlesser resistance to freeze/thaw
cycles. The shotcrete cracking is more evident when structure is subjected to
differential shrinkage.
Corrosion Protection The higher permeability of shotcrete places the
steel reinforcement (whether mesh or bars) ata higher risk of corrosion than
conventional concrete applications. Consideration for corrosion protection may
be necessary for some critical shotcrete applications.
Safety Carved shotcrete and shotcrete that needs a high degree of relief to
accent architectural features lead to areas of 4-6 of unreinforced shotcrete.
These areas can be prone to an accelerated rate ofdeterioration. This, in
turn, places pedestrians, bicyclists, and traffic next to the wall at risk of
fallingdebris.
Visual Quality and Corridor Continuity As shotcrete is finished byhand,
standard architectural design, as defined in the Design Manual M 22-01,
typically cannot be met. This can create conflicts with the architectural
guidelines developed for the corridor. Many times the guidelines are developed
with public input. If the guidelines are not met, the public develops a distrust of
the process. In other cases, the use of faux rock finishes, more commonly used
by the private sector, can create the perception of the misuse of public funds.
B. Sizes
Reinforcing bars are referred to in the contract plans and specifications by number
and vary in size from #3 to #18. For bars up to and including #8, the number of
the bar coincides with the bar diameter in eighths of an inch. The #9, #10, and #11
bars have diameters that provide areas equal to 1 1 square bars, 1 1
square bars and 1 1 square bars respectively. Similarly, the #14 and #18
bars correspond to 1 1 and 2 2 square bars, respectively. Appendix5.1-
A3 shows the sizes, number, and various properties ofthe types of bars used in
Washington State.
C. Development
1. Tension Development Length
Development length or anchorage of reinforcement is required on both sides
of a point of maximum stress at any section of a reinforced concrete member.
Development of reinforcement in tension shall be in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Section 5.11.2.1.
Appendix 5.1-A4 shows the tension development length for both uncoated and
epoxy coated Grade 60 bars for normal weight concrete with specified strengths
of 4.0 to 6.0 ksi.
2. Compression Development Length
Development of reinforcement in compression shall be in accordance with
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.11.2.2. The basic development lengths for deformed
bars in compression are shown in Appendix 5.1-A5. These values may be
modified as described in AASHTO. However, the minimum development
length shall be 1-0.
3. Tension Development Length of Standard Hooks
Standard hooks are used to develop bars in tension where space limitations
restrict the use of straight bars. Development of standard hooks in tension shall
be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.11.2.4. Tension development
lengths of90& 180 standard hooks are shown in Appendix5.1-A6.
D. Splices
The Contract Plans shall clearly show the locations and lengths of splices. Splices
shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.11.5.
Lap splices, for either tension or compression bars, shall not be less than 2-0.
1. Tension Lap Splices
Many of the same factors which affect development length affect splices.
Consequently, tension lap splices are a function of the bars development
length, ld. There are two classes of tension lap splices: Class A and B. Designers
are encouraged to splice bars atpoints of minimum stress and to stagger lap
splices along the length of the bars.
Appendix 5.1-A7 shows tension lap splices for both uncoated and epoxy coated
Grade 60 bars fornormal weight concrete with specified strengths of 4.0 to
6.0ksi.
NormalRight
Normal RightCorner
Corner Right
Rightor
orObtuse
ObtuseAngle
AngleCorner
T-Joint Reinforcing Details ReinforcingDetails
Reinforcing Details CornerReinforcingDetails
Reinforcing Details
Figure 5.1.2-1
Figure 5.1.2-1 Figure
Figure 5.1.2-2
5.1.2-2 Figure
Figure 5.1.2-3
5.1.2-3
2. Harped Strands
The harped strands are bundled between the harping points (the 0.4 and
0.6 points of the girder length). The girder fabricator shall select abundle
configuration that meets plan centroid requirements.
There are practical limitations to how close the centroid of harped strands
can be to the bottom of a girder. The minimum design value for this shall be
determined using the following guide: Up to 12 harped strands are placed in a
single bundle with the centroid 4 above the bottom of the girder. Additional
strands are placed in twelve-strand bundles with centroids at 3 spacing
vertically upwards.
At the girder ends, the strands are splayed to a normal pattern. The centroid of
strands at both the girder end and the harping point may be varied to suit girder
stress requirements.
The slope of any individual harped strands shall not be steeper than 8 horizontal
to 1 vertical for 0.6 diameter strands, and 6 horizontal to 1 vertical for 0.5
diameter strands.
The harped strand exit location at the girder ends shall be held as low as
possible while maintaining the concrete stresses within allowable limits.
3. Temporary Strands
Temporary strands in the top flanges of prestressed concrete girders may be
required for shipping (see Section 5.6.3). These strands may be pre-tensioned
and bonded only for the end 10feet of the girder, or may be post-tensioned
prior to lifting the girder from the form. These strands can be considered in
design to reduce the required transfer strength, to provide stability during
shipping, and to reduce the A dimension. These strands must be cut before
the CIP intermediate diaphragms areplaced.
D. Development of Prestressing Strand
1. General
Development of prestressing strand shall be as described in AASHTO LRFD
Section 5.11.4.
The development length of bonded uncoated & coated prestressing strands are
shown in Appendix5.1-A8.
2. Partially Debonded Strands
Where it is necessary to prevent a strand from actively supplying prestress
force near the end of a girder, it shall be debonded. This can be accomplished
by taping a close fitting PVC tube to the stressed strand from the end of the
girder to some point where the strand can be allowed to develop its load. Since
this is not a common procedure, it shall be carefully detailed on the plans. It is
important when this method is used in construction that the taping of the tube
is done in such a manner that concrete cannot leak into the tube and provide an
undesirable bond of thestrand.
Partially debonded strands shall meet the requirements of AASHTO LRFD
Section5.11.4.3.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 5-13
June 2016
Concrete Structures Chapter 5
5.1.35 If then
5.1.35
If column
do notoverlap,
then
two-thirds of the plastic hinging moment at the c.g. of
5.1.36 the
If superstructure
shall
then
be
resisted
by girders within the effective width. The
5.1.36 If then
remaining one-third shall be resisted by girders outside the effective width. The
plastic
hinging moment per girder is calculated using the following:
5.1.37
5.1.37
5.1.41:
5.1.41:
5.1.42:
Page 5-14 5.1.42:
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
5.1.43: 1 June 2016
5.1.43: 1
70 64 The
width.5.1.31 12
one-third
outside
12
be
5.1.31
5.1.31 remaining
12
shall resisted by girders the effective width. The plastic
12total elastic 1 t, ti
hinging moment per girder is calculated using the .
.
. .
following:
1 t, ti
total elasticChapter 5
For
girders
within
Concrete Structures
5.1.32 5.1.32
the
effective
width
31 12 5.1.32
.
(5 .1 .3-3)
12
.
5 .1 .3-35.1.33 For Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth
32
5.1.33
5 .1 .3-3
For For girders
withinthe
girderswithin
girders outside theeffective
the effective
Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth
effective width
width
width (5.1.3-3)
(5 .1 .3-4)
5 .1 .3-4
For girders outside theeffective
effectivewidth width
33 5 .1 .3-4 5.1.34
Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth
5.1.34
For
outside
girders Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth
the (5.1.3-4)
Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth
Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth If then
(5 .1 .3-5)
5.1.355.1.35
5.1.35
5.1.35 If
If
If
If
then
then
then
then
(5.1.3-5)
34 Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth
Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth If then
5.1.36
5.1.36
5.1.36
If
5.1.36 If
If
If
then
then
then
then
(5.1.3-6)
(5 .1 .3-6)
35 If then
If then
Where:
Where:
36 If then
= Number of girders encompassed by the effective width
If then
= = NumberNumber of girders encompassed
of girders outside by the
theeffective
effective width
width
= Number of girders outside the effective width
For prestressed
For concrete girders with cast-in-place deck slabs, where all girders
precast, prestressed girders with cast-in-place deck slabs, where all girders are within the
areeffective
withinwidth the effective width
or theeffective widths or for
theeach
effective widthsthefor
column overlap, eachhinging
plastic column overlap,
moment at the
the plastic
5.1.41:
c.g.
5.1.41:
5.1.41: of thehinging
moment
superstructure
5.1.41:
shall
be at the
resisted
c.g.
by of
all the
girders superstructure
within the effectiveshall be
width. resisted
The plastic by
is
all girders within
hinging moment per the effective
girder
width. The plastic hinging moment per girder is
calculated
using
the following:
Continuity of extended strands is essential for all prestressed concrete girder bridges
with fixed diaphragms at intermediate piers. Strand continuity may be achieved by
directly overlapping extended strands as shown in Figure 5.1.3-4, by use of strand
ties as shown in Figure 5.1.3-5, by the use of the crossbeam ties as shown in Figure
5.1.3-6 along with strand ties, or by a combination of all three methods. The following
methods in order of hierarchy shall be used for all prestressed concrete girders for
creating continuity of extended strands:
Method 1 Direct extended strands overlapping shall be used at intermediate piers
without any angle point due to horizontal curvature and for any crossbeam width.
This is the preferred method of achieving extended strand continuity. Congestion
of reinforcement and girder setting constructability shall be considered when large
numbers of extended strands are required. In these cases, strand ties may be used in
conjunction with extended strands.
Page 5-16 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
methods. The following methods in order of hierarchy shall be used for all precast girders for
creating continuity of extended strands:
Method 1:
Method 2 Strand ties shall be used at intermediate piers with a girder angle point
Direct extended strands overlapping shall be used at intermediate piers without any angle poin
due to horizontal curvature where extended strands are not parallel and would cross
to horizontal curvature and for any crossbeam width. This is the preferred method of achievin
during girder placement. Crossbeam
extended strandwidths shall
continuity. be greater
Congestion than or equal
of reinforcement to 6setting
and girder feet constructability sha
measured along the skew.considered
It is preferable
when largethat strand
numbers ties be strands
of extended used for all extended
are required. In these cases, strand ties m
used inbecomes
strands, however if the region conjunctiontoowithcongested
extended strands.
for rebar placement and
concrete consolidation, additional
Method 2: forces may be carried by crossbeam ties up to a
maximum limit as specified in equation
Strand ties shall be 5.1.3-8.
used at intermediate piers with a girder angle point due to horizontal curv
where extended strands are not parallel and would cross during girder placement. Crossbeam
Method 3 For crossbeams widthswith
shallwidths less
be greater thanthan 6 and
or equal to 6 ftameasured
girder angle
along thepoint
skew.due
It is preferable that stran
to horizontal curvature, strand
be usedties shall
for all be used
extended if ahowever
strands, minimum of 8becomes
if the region of lap too
cancongested
be for rebar place
and concrete consolidation, additional forces may be carried by crossbeam ties up to a maxim
provided between the extended strand and strand tie. In this case the strand ties
limit as specified in equation 5.1.3-8.
shall be considered fully effective. For cases where less than 8 of lap is provided,
Method 3:
the effectiveness of the strand tie shall be reduced proportional to the reduction in
For crossbeams with widths less than 6 and a girder angle point due to horizontal curvature, s
lap. All additional forces not taken by strand ties must be carried by crossbeam ties
ties shall be used if a minimum of 8 of lap can be provided between the extended strand and s
up to the maximum limit as tie. specified in strand
In this case the equation 5.1.3-8.
ties shall If thisfully
be considered limit is exceeded,
effective. For cases where less than 8 o
the geometry of the widthisofprovided,
the crossbeam shallofbe
the effectiveness theincreased to be
strand tie shall provide
reduced sufficient
proportional to the reduction in
lap for the strand ties. All additional forces not taken by strand ties must be carried by crossbeam ties up to the maxi
limit as specified in equation 5.1.3-8. If this limit is exceeded, the geometry of the width of th
The area of transverse tiescrossbeam
consideredshall be increasedfor
effective strandsufficient
to provide ties development inties.
lap for the strand the
lower crossbeam (As) shallThe
not exceed:
area of transverse ties considered effective for strand ties development in the lower crossb
(As) shall not exceed:
1
=
2
(5.1.3-9) (5.1.3-9)
Where: Where:
Aps = Area of strand A
ties,
ps =in
2
Area of strand ties, in2
fpy = Yield strength of extended
fpy = strands,
Yield strength ksi strands, ksi
of extended
ns = Number of extended strands that are spliced with strand and crossbeam ties
fye = Expected yieldnstrength
s = Number of extended strands that are spliced with strand and crossbeam ties
of transverse tie reinforcement, ksi
fye = Expected yield strength of transverse tie reinforcement, ksi
Two-thirds of As shall be placed directly below the girder and the remainder of As
Two-thirds of As shall be placed directly below the girder and the remainder of As shall be pla
shall be placed outside theoutside
bottom flangeflange
the bottom width as as
width shown
shown in Figure
in Figure 5.1.3-6.
5.1.3-6.
The size of strand ties shall
Thebe the
size of same as shall
strand ties be the same strands,
the extended and strands,
as the extended shall beandplaced
shall be placed at the sam
level andof
at the same level and proximity proximity of the extended
the extended strands.
strands.
Overlapping
Overlapping Extended Strand
Extended Strand
Figure
Figure5.1.3-4
5.1.3-4
Strand Ties
Figure 5.1.3-5
Lower Crossbeam
Lower Ties
Crossbeam Ties
Figure 5.1.3-6
Figure 5.1.3-6
5.1.41:
5.1.41: (5.1.4-1)
5.1.42:
5.1.42:
(5.1.4-2)
5.1.43:
5.1.43:
11
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 5-19
June 2016
where:
where:
Concrete Structures Chapter 5
5.1.11 11
5.1.12 1
5.1.31 12
.
5.1.32
5 .1 .3-3
`Anchorage
Set Loss
For girders within the effective width
Figure
5.1.4-1
3. Friction Losses
5 .1 .3-4
For girders outside the effective width
Friction losses occurring during jacking and prior to anchoring depend on the
system and5.1.35
materials If
used.For
arigid
spiral galvanized
then ferrous metal duct
system, shall be 0.20 and K=0.0002. For plastic ducts, the designer shall use
the values shown
5.1.36in AASHTO
LRFD
If Table5.9.5.2.2b.
then
To avoid the substantial friction loss caused by sharp tendon curvature in the
where the
end regions5.1.37 flare
tendons out from a stacked arrangement towards
the bearing plates, use 0.10 times the span length or 20feet as the minimum
flare zone length.
5.1.41:Therecommended
minimum
radius (horizontal or vertical) of
flared tendons is 200feet. In the special cases where sharp curvature cannot be
avoided, extra horizontal and vertical ties shall be added along the concave side
of the curve5.1.42:
to resist the
tendency tobreak
through the web.
5.1.43: 1 (5.1.4-3)
5.1.47:
5.1.47where:3 3 .
The total
tTheprestress loss
total prestress lossmay
may be estimated
be estimated as: as:
tThe total prestress loss may be estimated as:
tThe total prestress loss may
be = as:
estimated +
= + (5 .1 .4-5)
(5.1.4-5)
= + (5 .1 .4-5)
(5 .1 .4-5)
Initial relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
transfer may
The first be
termestimatedas:
relates to iInitial relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
The first term relates to iInitial relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
transfer may be estimated as:.
The firstmay
transfer termbe
relates to iInitial
estimated as:. relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
transfer may be estimated as:.
(5.1.4-6)
(5 .1 .4-56)
(5 .1 .4-56)
(5 .1 .4-56)
Where:
Where:
t = Duration of time between strand stressing and prestress transfer,
Where:t = Duration of time between strand stressing and prestress transfer, typically 1 day.
typically
Where:
tfpj == Duration 1ofday.
time between strand stressing and prestress transfer, typically 1 day.
Jacking stress
tfpj =
fpj = = Jacking
Duration of time between strand stressing and prestress transfer, typically 1 day.
stress
fpy = Jacking stress
Yield strength of the strand
ffpy
fpy =
pj == Yield
Jacking
Yield stress ofofthe
strength
strength the strand
strand
fpy = Yield strength of the strand
Long term time dependent losses, fpLT, are computed in accordance with the refined estimates of
Long term LRFD
AASHTO time dependent
5.9.5.4 orlosses, fpLTtime-step
a detailed , are computed in Elastic
method. accordance
gain with
due tothedeck
refined estimates
shrinkage shallofbe
Long termLRFD
AASHTO time dependent
5.9.5.4 or losses,
a fpLT
detailed , are computed
time-step inElastic
method. accordance
gain withtothe
due deckrefined estimates
shrinkage shallofbe
considered separately.
AASHTO LRFD
considered 5.9.5.4 or a detailed time-step method. Elastic gain due to deck shrinkage shall be
separately.
considered separately.
Elastic shortening, The second term, fpES,, accounts for elastic shortening and is computed in
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual Mshortening,
Elastic 23-50.16
accordance The second
with AASHTO term,
LRFD fpES,, accounts for elastic shortening and is computedPage
5.9.5.2.3a. in 5-21
June 2016 Elastic shortening,
accordance The second
with AASHTO LRFDterm, fpES,, accounts for elastic shortening and is computed in
5.9.5.2.3a.
accordance
The elastic with
gain AASHTO
due to deckLRFD 5.9.5.2.3a.
placement, and superimposed dead loads and live loads is taken to be:
The elastic gain due to deck placement, and superimposed dead loads and live loads is taken to be:
Concrete Structures Chapter 5
Long term time dependent losses, fpLT, are computed in accordance with the
refined estimates of AASHTO LRFD Section 5.9.5.4 or a detailed time-step
method. Elastic gain due to deck shrinkage shall be considered separately.
Elastic shortening, fpES, is computed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Section5.9.5.2.3a.
The elastic gain due to deck placement, superimposed dead loads and live loads is
taken to be:
+ ( + + ) +
= (5.1.4-7)
(5 .1 .4-7)
Where:
Ep = Modulus of elasticity of the prestressing strand
Where: Ec = Modulus of elasticity of the concrete at the time of loading
Ep Mslab= Modulus
= Momentof elasticity
caused byofdeck the prestressing strand
slab placement
Ec diaphragms
M = Moment caused by diaphragms and
= Modulus of elasticity of the concrete at the time other external loads applied to the
of loading
non-composite girder
Mslab = Moment caused by deck slab placement section
Msidl =
Mdiaphragms = Moment
Momentcaused
caused byby all superimposed
diaphragms deadexternal
and other loads including traffic to
loads applied barriers
the
and overlays
non-composite girder section
MsidlMLL+=IM = Moment caused by live load and dynamic load allowance
Moment caused by all superimposed dead loads including traffic barriers
LL = Live load factor (1.0 for Service I and 0.8 for Service III)
and overlays
eps = Eccentricity of the prestressing strand
MLL+IM
Ig = = Moment
Momentcaused by live
of inertia of load and dynamic load
the non-composite allowance
girder
LL I = = LiveMoment
load factor (1.0 for Service I and 0.8
of inertia of the composite girder for Service III)
c
eps Y = = Eccentricity
Location of the centroid
of the prestressing strand
of the non-composite girder measured from
bg
Ig = Moment of inertia
the bottom of girder
of the the non-composite girder
Ic Ybc = = Moment of inertia
Location of the of the composite
centroid girder girder measured from
of the composite
Ybg = Location of theofcentroid
the bottom the girderof the non-composite girder measured from the bottom
of the girder
The elastic gain due to slab shrinkage, fpSS, shall be computed in accordance
Ybc = Location of the centroid of the composite girder measured from the bottom
with AASHTO LRFD
of the girderSection 5.9.5.4.3d. Deck shrinkage shall be considered as
an external force applied to the composite section for the Service I, Service III,
and Fatigue I limit states. This force is applied at the center of the deck with an
eccentricity from
The elastic gain the
due to center of the deck
slab shrinkage, fpSSto the center
, shall of gravity
be computed of the composite
in accordance with AASHTO
section. This forceDeck
LRFD 5.9.5.4.3d. causes compression
shrinkage shall be in the top of
considered as the girder, tension
an external in theto the composite
force applied
bottom of the
section for the girder,
Service and an increase
I, Service III, andinFatigue
the effective prestress
I limit states. Thisforce (anapplied
force is elasticat the center of the
gain). Thean
deck with deck shrinkage
eccentricity strain
from shall be
the center of computed
the deck to asthe50 percent
center of theofstrain
of gravity the composite section.
determined by AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.4.2.3.3-1.
This force causes compression in the top of the girder, tension in the bottom of the girder, and an
increase in the effective prestress force (an elastic gain). The deck shrinkage strain shall be computed as
E. Temporary Losses
50% of the strain determined by AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.4.2.3.3-1.
For checking stresses during release, lifting, transportation, and erection of
E. Temporary Losses For checking stresses during release, lifting, transportation, and erection of
prestressed concrete
prestressed girders, thegirders, the time-dependent
elastic and elastic and time-dependent
losses may be losses maybased
computed be on the following
computed based
assumptions. on the followingassumptions.
1. Lifting
1. of Girders
Lifting of GirdersFrom
FromCasting
Casting Beds
Beds For normal construction, forms are stripped and girders
are lifted from the casting bed within one
For normal construction, forms are stripped day. and girders are lifted from the
2. casting bed within
Transportation oneday.
Girders are most difficult to transport at a young age. The hauling configuration
causes reduced dead load moments in the girder and the potential for overstress between the
2. Transportation
harping points. Overstress may also occur at the support points depending on the prestressing and
Girders are most
the trucking difficult This
configuration. to transport at a young
is compounded age.
by the The hauling
magnitude of theconfiguration
prestress force not having
been reduced
causes reducedby dead
losses.load
For moments
an aggressive construction
in the girder andschedule girders for
the potential are typically transported to
the job site around day 10.
When losses are estimated by the Approximate Estimate of AASHTO LRFD 5.9.5.3, the losses
Page 5-22 at the time of hauling may be estimated by: WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
(5 .1 .4-7)
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
overstress between the harping points. Overstress may also occur at the
support points depending on the prestressing and the trucking configuration.
This is compounded by the magnitude of the prestress force not having been
reduced by losses. For an aggressive construction schedule girders are typically
transported to the job site around day10.
When losses are estimated by the Approximate Estimate of AASHTO LRFD
Section 5.9.5.3, the losses atthe time of hauling may be estimated by:
(5 .1 .4-8) (5.1.4-8)
(5 .1 .4-8)
Where:
fpTH = total loss at hauling
Where: fpH = time dependent loss at time of hauling =
otal loss at hauling fpTH = total loss at hauling
me dependent loss at time of hauling = fpH = time dependent loss at time of hauling =
3. Erection
During construction the non-composite girders must carry the full weight of the
deck slab and interior diaphragms. This loading typically occurs around 120
days for a normal constructionschedule.
4. Final Configuration
The composite slab and girder section must carry all conceivable loads
including superimposed dead loads such as traffic barriers, overlays, and live
loads. It is assumed that superimposed dead loads are placed at 120 days and
final losses occur at 2,000days.
5.1.5 Prestressing Anchorage Systems
There are numerous prestressing systems. Most systems combine a method of
prestressing the strands with amethod of anchoring it to concrete.
WSDOT requires approval of all multi-strand and/or bar anchorages used
in prestressed concrete bridges asdescribed in Standard Specifications
Section6-02.3(26).
5.1.6 Post-Tensioning Ducts
Post-tensioning ducts shall meet the requirements of Standard Specifications
Section6-02.3(26)E.
Ducts for longitudinal post-tensioning tendons in spliced prestressed concrete I-girders
shall be made of rigid galvanized spiral ferrous metal to maintain standard girder
concrete cover requirements.
0.40composite
0.60
0.24 ()
Thetypical section for0.75
5.2.2-1: computation
= 0.583of prestressed+ 0.25 concrete
1 1.0 girder
section properties is shown in Figure 5.6.2-1. 0.40
5.2.2-1: 0.75
0.19 = 0.583+ 0.25
() 1 1.0
1. Flexural Design of0.75
5.2.2-2: = 0.650 +Singly-Reinforced
Nonprestressed 0.15 1 0.9
Rectangular Beams
5.2.2-1: 0.75 = 0.65
0.583 + 0.25 1 1.0
For design purposes,
5.2.2-2: the area0.75
of reinforcement
= 0.650 +for a nonprestressed
0.15 1 0.9 singly-
5.2.2-3:rectangular
reinforced 0.75beam
=
or0.616 + 0.20 1 0.95
5.2.2-2: 0.0slab can bedetermined
0.75 = 0.650 + 0.15 1 0.9
by letting:
5.2.2-3: 0.75 = 0.616 + 0.20 1 0.95
0.45
5.2.2-1: = = (5.2.2-1)
2
5.2.2-3: 0.75 = 0.616 + 0.20 1 0.95
However, if: 5.2.2-1: = =
0.60 2
5.2.2-2: =
5.2.2-1: = 1
=
0.40
2
5.2.2-2: = (5.2.2-2)
1 1 2 2
5.2.2-1: 0.755.2.2-2:5.2.2-3:
= 0.583 +0.25 =
= 1 1.0
1
Equation (2) can be substituted 1 into equation
1 (1) and solved 2 for A :
5.2.2-3: = 2 s
1
5.2.2-2: 0.75 5.2.2-4:
= 0.650 + 0.15 =
0.003 1 0.9
2
0.005 2
5.2.2-3: = 1 (5.2.2-3)
1
5.2.2-4: = 0.003 = 0.005
5.2.2-3: 0.75Where: = 0.616 + 0.20 10.95 1 1
5.2.2-4:
As = Areaof = 0.003
tension
reinforcement
0.005 (in ) 2
=
Mu = Factored moment (kip-in) 1 1
5.2.2-1: = =
c = Specified compressive strength of concrete = (ksi)
2
= Specified minimum yield strength of tension 1 reinforcement
1 (ksi)
y
5.2.2-2: = b = Width of the compression face (in)
1
d = Distance from compression face to centroid of tension reinf. (in)
= 0.9
From AASHTO 2
5.2.2-3: = 1 = 2 LRFD
Section 5.7.2.2
1
The resistance factor should be assumed to be 0.9 for a tension-controlled
initial determination of A . This assumption must then be
5.2.2-4: section
= 0.003for the 0.005 s
verified by checking
that the tensile strain in the extreme tension steel is equal
to or greater than 0.005. This = will also assure that the tension reinforcement has
yielded as assumed. 1 1
B. Shear
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8 addresses shear design of concrete members.
1. The shear design of prestressed members shall be based on the general
procedure of AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2.
2. The shear design of all non-prestressed members shall be based on either
the general procedure, or the simplified procedure of AASHTO LRFD
Section5.8.3.4.1.
3. The strut-and-tie model shall be employed as required by AASHTO LRFD
Sections 5.8.1.1 and 2 for regions adjacent to abrupt changes in cross-section,
openings, draped ends, deep beams, corbels, integral bent caps, c-bent caps,
outrigger bents, deep footings, pile caps, etc.
4. AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.3 "Simplified Procedure for Prestressed and
Nonprestressed Sections" shall not be used.
5. The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement is limited to 18 inches.
For prestressed concrete girders, shear for the critical section at dv from the internal
face of the support and at the harping point are of particular interest.
C. Interface Shear
Interface shear transfer (shear friction) design is to be performed in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD Section5.8.4.
If a roughened surface is required for shear transfer at construction joints in new
construction, they shall be identified in the plans. See Standard Specifications
Section6-02.3(12)A.
When designing for shear transfer between new and existing concrete, the designer
shall consider the high construction cost associated with roughening existing
concrete surfaces. Whenever practical, the design for placing new concrete against
existing concrete shall be completed such that roughening of the existing concrete
surfaces is not required (i.e. use cohesion and friction factors for a surface that is
not intentionally roughened).
When the additional capacity provided by a roughened surface is required, the
surface roughening shall meet the requirements specified in AASHTO LRFD
Section 5.8.4.3 (i.e. uniform minimum amplitude). See Standard Specifications
Section6-02.3(12)B and applicable WSDOT special provisions for concrete
removal forreference.
The spall pattern roughening detail shown in Figure 5.2.2-1 may be included
onplans as an alternative to the default uniform amplitude roughening.
SURFACE SPALL DEPTH
" MIN. TO " MAX. (TYP.)
SPALL
SPALL
A 6" 3" "
(TYP.)
SPALL
SPALL
3"
ORIGINAL CONCRETE
3" (TYP.)
SURFACE PRIOR TO
ROUGHENING
SURFACE SPALL
4" MIN.
ELEVATION
SECTION A
PIER
PRESTRESSED GIRDER
G4 BARS (WF SHOWN, OTHERS
SIMILAR)
G8 BARS
G5 BARS
EXTENDED
CAST IN PLACE
STRANDS
CONCRETE
STRAND CHUCK AND ANCHOR
PLATE OR 2" x 1" STEEL
STRAND ANCHOR
End Connection for Continuous Span Girder
Figure 5.2.2-2
PGSuper calculates estimated cambers at 40 days (D40) and 120 days (D120). Due
to variations in observed camber, these estimated cambers are generally considered
to be upper bounds at their respective times. This is based on measured girder
cambers of prestressed concrete girders compared with the estimated cambers from
PGSuper.
D @ 120 Days is the upper bound of expected camber range at a girder age of 120
days after the release of prestress and is primarily intended to mitigate interference
between the top of the cambered girder and the placement of concrete deck
reinforcement. It is also used to calculate the Adimension at the girder ends. The
age of 120 days was chosen because data has shown that additional camber growth
after this age is negligible. D @ 120 Days may be taken as D120, the estimated
camber at 120 days reported by PGSuper.
D @ 40 Days is the lower bound of expected camber range at a girder age of 40
days (30 days after the earliest allowable girder shipping age of 10 days). To match
the profile grade, girders with too little camber require an increased volume of
haunch concrete along the girder length. For girders with large flange widths, such
as the WF series, this can add up to significant quantities of additional concrete for
a large deck placement. Thus, the lower bound of camber allows the contractor to
assess the risk of increased concrete quantities and mitigates claims for additional
material. D @ 40 Days shall be taken as 50 percent of D40, the estimated camber
at 40 days reported by PGSuper.
Figure 5.2.4-1 shows a typical pattern of girder deflection with time at centerline
span. Portions of this characteristic curve are described below. The subparagraph
numbers correspond to circled numbers on the curve.
1. Elastic Deflection Due to Release of Prestress
The prestress force produces moments in the girder tending to bow the girder
upward. Resisting these moments are girder section dead load moments. The
result is a net upwarddeflection.
2. Creep Deflection Before Cutting Temporary Strands
The girder continues to deflect upward due to the effect of creep. This effect is
computed using the equation stated in Section 5.1.1E.
3. Deflection Due to Cutting of Temporary Strands
Cutting of temporary strands results in an elastic upward deflection. The
defaulttime interval for creep calculations for release of top temporary strands
is 90 days after the release of prestress during girder fabrication for D120
(10days for D40).
4. Diaphragm Load Deflection
The load of diaphragm is applied to the girder section resulting in an elastic
downward deflection. The default time interval for creep calculations
forplacing diaphragms is 90 days after the release of prestress during girder
fabrication for D120(10daysforD40).
diaphragm
SCREED CAMBER (TO ACCOUNT FOR
DEFLECTION DUE TO DECK SLAB PLACEMENT
AND SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOADS)
tps 3 4 5
creep2
slab
2 6
TO DECK PLACEMENT)
(IMMEDIATELY PRIOR
creep1
C
GIRDER CAMBER
7 tb + ov
D
8 excess
1 ps +girder
(Final Camber)
Time
Cast of Girder
Release Prestress
Access doors shall have a minimum 2-6 diameter or 2-6 square clear opening.
Lock box latches shall be installed on all access doors accessible from ground
level. Access hatches shall swing into the box girders and shall be placed at
locations that do not impact traffic. Lighting and receptacle requirements shall
conform to Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 1040. Air vents shall conform to
Figures 5.2.6-1 and 5.2.6-2.
Box girder penetrations greater than one inch in diameter through the exterior shall
be covered with galvanized wire mesh screen to prevent vermin and birds from
accessing the penetration and the interior of the box girder. The wires shall have
amaximum spacing of 1 inch in both directions.
5.3.22
WSDOT Bridge Design
Manual
5.3.22
M 23-50.16 Page 5-37
June 2016
5.3.31
Concrete Structures Chapter 5
D. Load Distribution
1. Unit Design
According to the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, the entire slab
width shall be assumed effective for compression. It is both economical and
desirable to design the entire superstructure as a unit rather than as individual
girders. When a reinforced box girder bridge is designed as an individual girder
with a deck overhang, the positive reinforcement is congested in the exterior
cells. The unit design method permits distributing allgirder reinforcement
uniformly throughout the width of the structure.
2. Dead Loads
Include additional D.L. for top deck forms:
5 pounds per square foot of the area.
10 pounds per square foot if web spacing > 10-0.
3. Live Load
See Section 3.9.4 for live load distribution to superstructure and substructure.
5.3.2 Reinforcement
This section discusses flexural and shear reinforcement for top slab, bottom slab, webs,
and intermediate diaphragms in box girders.
A. Top Slab Reinforcement
1. Near Center of Span
Figure 5.3.2-1 shows the reinforcement required near the center of the span and
Figure 5.3.2-2 shows the overhang reinforcement.
a. Transverse reinforcing in the top and bottom layers to transfer the load to
the main girder stems.
b. Bottom longitudinal distribution reinforcement in the middle half of the
deck span in Seff is provided to aid distributing the wheel loads.
c. Top longitudinal temperature and shrinkage reinforcement.
2. Near Intermediate Piers
Figure 5.3.2-3 illustrates the reinforcement requirement near intermediate piers.
a. Transverse reinforcing same as center of span.
b. Longitudinal reinforcement to resist negative moment (see Figure 5.3.2-3).
c. Distribution of flexure reinforcement to limit cracking shall satisfy
the requirement of AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.3.4 for class 2
exposurecondition.
3. Bar Patterns
i. Transverse Reinforcement
It is preferable to place the transverse reinforcement normal to bridge
center line and the areas near the expansion joint and bridge ends are
reinforcement by partial length bars.
ii. Longitudinal Reinforcement
Partial Section Near Center of Span
Figure 5.3.2-1
Page 5-42 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
Overhang Detail
Figure 5.3.2-2
Web Reinforcement
Figure 5.3.2-7
Notes:
1. The diagonal brace supports web forms during web pour. After cure, the web is stiffer than the brace,
andthe web attracts load from subsequent concrete placements.
2. The tributary load includes half the overhang because the outer web form remains tied to and transfers
load to the web which is considerably stiffer than the formwork.
3. Increase web reinforcement for locked-in construction load due to top slab forming for sloped web
boxgirders.
5.3.3 Crossbeam
A. General
Crossbeam shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of strength limit
state design of AASHTO LRFD Specifications and shall satisfy the serviceability
requirements for crack control.
B. Basic Geometry
For aesthetic purposes, it is preferable to keep the crossbeam within the
superstructure so that the bottom slab of the entire bridge is a continuous plane
surface interrupted only by the columns. Although the depth of the crossbeam
may be limited, the width can be made as wide as necessary to satisfy design
requirements. Normally, it varies from 3feet to the depth of box but is not less
than thecolumn size plus 1-0 to allow placement of the column reinforcement as
shown in see Figures 5.3.3-1 and 5.3.3-2.
Crossbeams on box girder type of construction shall be designed as a T beam
utilizing the flange in compression, assuming the deck slab acts as a flange for
positive moment and bottom slab a flange for negative moment. The effective
overhang of the flange on a cantilever beam shall be limited to six times the
flangethickness.
The bottom slab thickness is frequently increased near the crossbeam in order to
keep the main box girder compressive stresses to a desirable level for negative
girder moments as shown in Figures 5.3.3-1 and 5.3.3-2. This bottom slab flare also
helps resist negative crossbeam moments. Consideration should be given to flaring
the bottom slab at the crossbeam for designing the cap even if it is not required for
resisting main girder moments.
C. Loads
For concrete box girders the superstructure dead load shall be considered as
uniformly distributed over the crossbeam. For concrete box girders the live load
shall be considered as the truck load directly to the crossbeam from the wheel
axles. Truck axles shall be moved transversely over the crossbeam to obtain the
maximum design forces for the crossbeam and supporting columns.
D. Reinforcement Design and Details
The crossbeam section consists of rectangular section with overhanging deck and
bottom slab if applicable. The effective width of the crossbeam flange overhang
shall be taken as the lesser of:
6 times slab thickness,
1/10 of column spacing, or
1/20 of crossbeam cantilever as shown in Figure 5.3.3-3.
The crossbeam shall have a minimum width of column dimension plus 6.
Crossbeam is usually cast to the fillet below the top slab. To avoid cracking of
concrete on top of the crossbeam, construction reinforcement shall be provided at
approximately 3 below the construction joint. The design moment for construction
reinforcement shall be the factored negative dead load moment due to the weight
of crossbeam and adjacent 10 of superstructure each side. The total amount of
construction reinforcement shall be adequate to develop an ultimate moment at the
critical section at least 1.2times the cracking moment Mcr.
total width
spacing spacing
slab
6xt slab or
t bot.
Special attention should be given to the details to ensure that the column and
crossbeam reinforcement will not interfere with each other. This can be a problem
especially when round columns with a great number of vertical bars must be
meshed with a considerable amount of positive crossbeam reinforcement passing
over the columns.
1. Top Reinforcement
The negative moment critical section shall be at the point of the square or
equivalent square columns.
i. When Skew Angle 25
If the bridge is tangent or slightly skewed deck transverse reinforcement is
normal or radial to centerline bridge, the negative cap reinforcement can be
placed either in contact with top deck negative reinforcement (see Figure
5.3.3-1) or directly under the main deckreinforcement.
ii. When Skew Angle > 25
When the structure is on a greater skew and the deck steel is normal
or radial to the longitudinal centerline of the bridge, the negative cap
reinforcement should be lowered to below the main deck reinforcement
(seeFigure 5.3.3-2).
iii. To avoid cracking of concrete
Interim reinforcement is required below the construction joint in
crossbeams.
2. Skin Reinforcement
Longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be provided inaccordance with
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.3.4.
5.3.4 End Diaphragm
A. Basic Geometry
Bearings at the end diaphragms are usually located under the girder stems to
transfer loads directly to the pier as shown in Figure 5.3.4-1. In this case, the
diaphragm width shall be equal to or greater than bearing grout pads as shown
Figure 5.3.4-2.
Designer shall provide access space for maintenance and inspection of bearings.
Allowance shall be provided to remove and replace the bearings. Lift point
locations, jack capacity, number of jacks, and maximum permitted lift shall be
shown in the plan details.
The most commonly used type of end diaphragm is shown in Figure 5.3.4-3. The
dimensions shown here are used as a guideline and should be modified if necessary.
This end diaphragm is used with a stub abutment and overhangs the stub abutment.
It is used on bridges with an overall length less than 400feet. If the overall length
exceeds 400feet, an L-shape abutment should be used.
In addition to dead load deflection, forms and falsework tend to settle and compress
under the weight offreshly placed concrete. The amount of this take-up is dependent
upon the type and design of the falsework, workmanship, type and quality of materials
and support conditions. The camber shall be modified to account for anticipated take-
up in the falsework.
5.3.6 Thermal Effects
Concrete box girder bridges are subjected to stresses and/or movements resulting
from temperature variation. Temperature effects result from time-dependent variations
in the effective bridge temperature and from temperature differentials within the
bridgesuperstructure.
A. Effective Bridge Temperature and Movement
Proper temperature expansion provisions are essential in order to ensure that the
structure will not be damaged by thermal movements. These movements, in turn,
induce stresses in supporting elements such as columns or piers, and result in
horizontal movement of the expansion joints and bearings. Formore details see
Chapter8.
B. Differential Temperature
Although time-dependent variations in the effective temperature have caused
problems in both reinforced and prestressed concrete bridges, detrimental effects
caused by temperature differential within the superstructure have occurred
only in prestressed bridges. Therefore, computation of stresses and movements
resulting from the vertical temperature gradients is not included in this chapter.
For more details, see AASHTO Guide Specifications, Thermal Effects on Concrete
BridgeSuperstructures dated 1989.
5.3.7 Hinges
Hinges are one of the weakest links of box girder bridges subject to earthquake forces
and it is desirable to eliminate hinges or reduce the number of hinges. For more details
on the design of hinges, see Section5.4.
Designer shall provide access space or pockets for maintenance and inspection
ofbearings.
Allowance shall be provided to remove and replace the bearings. Lift point locations,
maximum lift permitted, jack capacity, and number of jacks shall be shown in the
hinge plan details.
5.3.8 Drain Holes
Drain holes shall be placed in the bottom slab at the low point of each cell to drain
curing water during construction and any rain water that leaks through the deck slab.
Additional drains shall be provided as a safeguard against water accumulation in the
cell (especially when waterlines are carried by the bridge). In some instances, drainage
through the bottom slab is difficult and other means shall be provided (i.e., cells
over large piers and where a sloping exterior web intersects a vertical web). Inthis
case, a horizontal drain shall be provided through the vertical web. Figure 5.3.8-1
shows drainage details for the bottom slab of concrete box girder bridges with steel
wirescreen.
In-Span Hinge
Figure 5.4-2
D. Final Records
For major widening/renovation projects, the Final Records should be reviewed
particularly for information about the existing foundations and piles. Sometimes
the piles indicated on the original plans were omitted, revised, or required
preboring. Final Records are available from Records Control or Bridge Records
(Final Records on some older bridges may be in storage at the MaterialsLab).
5.5.2 Analysis and Design Criteria
A. General
Each widening represents a unique situation and construction operations may vary
between widening projects. The guidelines in this section are based on years of
WSDOT design experience with bridge widenings.
1. Appearance
The widening of a structure should be accomplished in such a manner that
the existing structure does not look added on to. When this is not possible,
consideration should be given to enclosure walls, cover panels, paint, or other
aesthetic treatments. Where possible and appropriate, the structures appearance
should be improved by the widening.
2. Materials
Preferably, materials used in the construction of the widening shall have the
same thermal and elastic properties as the materials in the originalstructure.
3. Load Distribution and Construction Sequence
The members of the widening should be proportioned to provide similar
longitudinal and transverse load distribution characteristics as the existing
structure. Normally this can be achieved by using the same cross sections and
member lengths that were used in the existing structure.
The construction sequence and degree of interaction between the widening and
the existing structure, after completion, shall be fully considered in determining
the distribution of the dead load for design of the widening and stress checks
for the existing structure.
A suggested construction sequence or stage construction shall be clearly shown
in the plans toavoid confusion and misinterpretation during construction.
Atypical construction sequence may involve placing the deck concrete,
removing the falsework, placing the concrete for the closure strip, and placing
the concrete for the traffic barrier.
4. Specifications
The design of the widening shall conform to the current AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications and the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge,
and Municipal Construction.
5. Geometrical Constraints
The overall appearance and geometrical dimensions of the superstructure and
columns of the widening should be the same or as close as possible to those of
the existing structure. Thisistoensure that the widening will have the same
appearance and similar structural stiffness as the original structure.
6. Overlay
It should be established at the preliminary plan stage if an overlay is required as
part of the widening.
7. Strength of the Existing Structure
A review of the strength of the main members of the existing structure shall be
made for construction conditions utilizing AASHTO LRFD Specifications.
A check of the existing main members after attachment of the widening shall be
made for the final design loading condition.
If the existing structural elements do not have adequate strength, consult your
Design Unit Manager or in the case of consultants, contact the Consultant
Liaison Engineer for appropriate guidance.
If significant demolition is required on the existing bridge, consideration should
be given torequesting concrete strength testing for the existing bridge and
including this information inthecontract documents.
8. Special Considerations
i. For structures that were originally designed for HS-20 loading, HL-93 shall
be used to design the widening. For structures that were originally designed
for less than HS-20, consideration should be given to replacing the structure
instead of widening it.
ii. Longitudinal joints are not permitted in order to eliminate potentially
hazardous vehicle control problems.
iii. The Standard Specifications do not permit falsework to be supported from
the existing structure unless the Plans and Specifications state otherwise.
This requirement eliminates the transmission of vibration from the existing
structure to the widening during construction. The existing structure may
still be in service.
iv. For narrow widenings where the Plans and Specifications require that
the falsework be supported from the original structure (e.g., there are no
additional girders, columns, crossbeams, or closure strips), there shall be
no external rigid supports such as posts orfalsework from the ground.
Supports from the ground do not permit the widening to deflect with the
existing structure when traffic is on the existing structure. This causes
the uncured concrete of the widening to crack where it joins the existing
structure. Differential dead load deflection during construction shall be
given consideration.
2. Closure Strip
Except for narrow deck slab widenings a closure strip is required for all
widenings. Thewidth shall be the minimum required to accommodate the
necessary reinforcement and forform removal. Reinforcement which extends
through the closure strip shall be investigated. Shear shall be transferred across
the closure strip by shear friction and/or shearkeys.
All falsework supporting the widening shall be released and formwork
supporting the closure strip shall be supported from the existing and newly
widened structures prior to placing concrete in the closure strip. Because of
deck slab cracking experienced in widened concrete decks, closure strips are
required unless the mid-span dead load camber is orless.
In prestressed concrete girder bridge widenings, the closure shall extend
through the intermediate and end diaphragms. The diaphragms shall be made
continuous with existing diaphragms.
3. Stress Levels and Deflections in Existing Structures
Caution is necessary in determining the cumulative stress levels, deflections,
and the need for shoring in existing structural members during rehabilitation
projects.
The designer shall investigate the adequacy of the existing structure adjacent
to the widening for any additional loads, taking into account the loss of
removedcomponents.
For example, a T-beam bridge was originally constructed on falsework and the
falsework was released after the deck slab concrete gained strength. As part
of a major rehabilitation project, the bridge was closed to traffic and the entire
deck slab was removed and replaced without shoring. Without the deck slab,
the stems behave as rectangular sections with a reduced depth and width. The
existing stem reinforcement was not originally designed to support the weight
ofthe deck slab without shoring. After the new deck slab was placed, wide
cracks from the bottom ofthe stem opened, indicating that the reinforcement
was overstressed. This overstress resulted inalower load rating for the newly
rehabilitated bridge. This example shows the need to shore upthe remaining
T-beam stems prior to placing the new deck slab so that excessive deflections
donot occur and overstress in the existing reinforcing steel is prevented.
It is necessary to understand how the original structure was constructed,
how the rehabilitated structure is to be constructed, and the cumulative stress
levels and deflections in the structure from the time of original construction
throughrehabilitation.
E. Stability of Widening
For relatively narrow box girder and T-beam widenings, symmetry about the
vertical axis should bemaintained because lateral loads are critical during
construction. When symmetry is not possible, use pile cap connections, lateral
connections, or special falsework. A minimum of two webs isgenerally
recommended for box girder widenings. For T-beam widenings that require only
one additional web, the web should be centered at the axis of symmetry of the deck
slab. Often the width of the closure strip can be adjusted to accomplish this.
Page 5-66 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
c. The embedments shown in Table 5.5.4-1 and Table 5.5.4-2 are based on
dowels embedded inconcrete with c=4,000 psi.
Allowable Tensile Load for Dowels Set With Epoxy Resin c = 4,000
psi, Grade 60 Reinforcing Bars, Edge Clearance 3, and Spacing 6
Table 5.5.4-1
Allowable Tensile Load for Dowels Set With Epoxy Resin, c=4,000
psi, Grade 60 Reinforcing Bars, Edge Clearance 3, and Spacing < 6
Table 5.5.4-2
B. Connection Details
The details on the following sheets are samples of details which have been used
for widening bridges. They are informational and are not intended to restrict the
designers judgment.
1. Box Girder Bridges
Figures 5.5.4-1 through 5.5.4-6 show typical details for widening box girder
bridges.
Welding or mechanical butt splice are preferred over dowelling for the main
reinforcement incrossbeams and columns when it can be done in the horizontal
or flat position. It shall beallowed only when the bars to be welded are free
from restraint at one end during the weldingprocess.
3. T-Beam Bridges
Use details similar to those for box girder bridges for crossbeam connections.
See Figure 5.5.4-8 for slab connection detail.
T-BeamSection in Span
Figure 5.5.4-8
"
USE " EDGER
COMPRESSION SEAL
"
(TYP.)
2" CLR.
2"
4" MIN. (REMOVE TO
SOUND CONCRETE)
N.
MI
3"
VARIES 60
SIDE OF NEW
DIAPHRAGM
4"
90
1
EXISTING OPENING
Deck Bulb Tee Girders This type of girder has a top flange designed to support
traffic loads and are mechanically connected at the flange edges to adjacent girders.
They include Series W35DG, W41DG, W53DG and W65DG.
Prestressed Concrete Slab Girders Prestressed concrete slab girders are available
in heights ranging from 12 inches to 30 inches.
Prestressed Concrete Tub Girders In 2004 prestressed concrete tub girders were
added as standard girders.
All WSDOT prestressed concrete girders are high performance high strength concrete
girders. Theygenerally rely on high strength concrete to be effective for the spans
expected as a single piece. Theapproximate ranges of maximum span lengths are
asshown in Table5.6.1-1 and Appendix 5.6-A1-1.
Standard drawings for WSDOT prestressed concrete girders are shown in
Appendix5.6-A1-1 and 5.6-A1-9.
A. Support Conditions
The prestressed concrete girders are assumed to be supported on rigid permanent
simple supports. Thesesupports can be either bearing seats or elastomeric pads.
The design span length is the distance center to center of bearings for simple
spans. For continuous spans erected on falsework (raised crossbeam), the effective
point of support for girder design is assumed to be the face of the crossbeam. For
continuous spans on crossbeams (dropped or semi-dropped crossbeam), the design
span length is usually the distance center to center of temporary bearings.
B. Composite Action
1. General
The sequence of construction and loading is extremely important in the design
of prestressed concrete girders. The composite section has a much larger
capacity than the basic girder section but it cannot take loads until the deck
slab has obtained adequate strength. Assumptions used incomputing composite
section properties are shown in Figure 5.6.2-1.
2. Load Application
The following sequence and method of applying loads istypically used in
girder analysis:
a. Girder dead load is applied to the girder section.
b. Diaphragm dead load is applied to the girder section.
c. Deck slab dead load is applied to the girder section.
d. Superimposed dead loads (such as barriers, sidewalks and overlays) and
live loads are applied to the composite section.
The dead load of one traffic barrier or sidewalk may be divided among
amaximum of three girder webs.
3. Composite Section Properties
A CIP concrete bridge deck forms the top flange of the composite girder in
prestressed concrete girder bridge construction.
i. Effective and Transformed Flange Width
The effective flange width of a concrete bridge deck for computing
composite section properties shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Section 4.6.2.6. The effective flange width shall bereduced by the ratio
Eslab/Egirder to obtain the transformed flange width. The effective modulus of
the composite section with the transformed flange width is then Egirder.
ii. Effective Flange Thickness
The effective flange thickness of a concrete bridge deck for computing
composite section properties shall be the deck thicknessreduced by to
account for wearing. Where a bridge will have an overlay applied prior to
traffic being allowed on the bridge, the full deck thickness may be used as
effective flange thickness.
"A" AT BRG.
T (7" MIN.)
" FILLET
(TYP.)
SECTION AS DETAILED
WEF
(EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTH) ESLAB
WT = WEF
WT EGIRDER
" WEARING
SURFACE CIP DECK SLAB.
ASSUMED TO BE
HORIZONTAL.
EFFECTIVE FLANGE
THICKNESS PAD = A-T FOR DEAD LOAD AND
t = T - " FOR COMPOSITE SECTION
FOR NEGATIVE MOMENT.
= 0.0 FOR COMPOSITE SECTION
FOR POSITIVE MOMENT.
BACK OF BEARING
PAVEMENT SEAT
1'-1"
3" FILLET
END OF
PRECAST
GIRDER
1'-0"
3"
MIN. VARIES
2'-2"
1"
MIN.
End
End Type
Type AA (End
(End Diaphragm
Diaphragm onon Girder)
Girder)
Figure
Figure 5.6.2-3
5.6.2-4
2. End Type B
End Type B as shown in Figure 5.6.2-4 is for L type abutments. End Type
B also has a recess at the bottom of the girder for an elastomeric bearing pad.
Notes regarding the bearing recess on End Type A also apply to End Type B.
End Type B typically does not have reinforcing or strand projecting from the
girder end.
The centerline of the diaphragm is normal to the roadway surface. The
centerline of the bearing iscoincident with the centerline of the diaphragm at
the top of the elastomeric pad.
DIAPHRAGM
JOINT
90
6"
MIN. 3" FILLET
6" MIN.
6"
END OF
1'-0"
P.C. GIRDER
INTERSECTION OF
DIAPHRAGM &
BEARING
BRG.
3. End Type C
End Type C as shown in Figure 5.6.2-5 is for continuous spans and an
intermediate hinge diaphragm at an intermediate pier. There is no bearing
recess and the girder is temporarily supported on oak blocks. Inthe past, this
detail was used in low seismic areas such as east ofthe Cascade Mountains.
This end type shall not be used on new structures and is restricted to the
widening of existing bridges with hinge diaphragms at intermediate piers.
The designer shall check the edge distance and provide a dimension that
prevents edge failure, or spalling, at the top corner of the supporting cross beam
for load from the oak block including dead loads from girder, deck slab, and
construction loads.
For prestressed concrete girders with intermediate hinge diaphragms, designers
shall:
a. Check size and minimum embedment in crossbeam and diaphragm for
hinge bars.
b. Check interface shear friction at girder end (see Section 5.2.2.C.2).
HINGE
DIMENSION "A" AT BEARING
1" EMBEDMENT (OAK BLOCK) SEE "GIRDER
(TYP.) SCHEDULE"
TOP OF P.C.
GIRDER
45 FILLET (TYP.)
3"
4. End Type D
End Type D as shown in Figure 5.6.2-6 is for continuous spans fully fixed
to columns atintermediate piers. There is no bearing recess and the girder is
temporarily supported onoakblocks.
The designer shall check the edge distance and provide a dimension that
prevents edge failure, or spalling, at the top corner of the supporting cross
beam for load from the oak block including dead loads from girder, deck slab,
and construction loads. The designer shall check interface shear friction at the
girder end (see Section 5.2.2.C.2).
PIER
3"
DIMENSION "A" AT BEARING
MIN.
(OAK BLOCK) SEE "GIRDER
SCHEDULE"
TOP OF
GIRDER
45 FILLET (TYP.)
END OF PRECAST
GIRDER
End Type D
Figure 5.6.2-6
3. Numbers of Strands
Since the prestressing beds used by the girder fabricators can carry several
girders in a line, itis desirable that girders have the same number of strands
where practical. This allows several girders to be set up and cast at one time.
For pre-tensioned concrete girders, the number of permanent prestressing
strands (straight and harped) shall be limited to 100 total 0.6f strands.
C. Handling of Prestressed Concrete Girders
1. In-Plant Handling
Themaximum weight that can be handled by precasting plants in the Pacific
Northwest is 252 kips. Pre-tensioning lines are normally long enough so that
the weight of a girder governs capacity, rather than its length. Headroom is also
not generally a concern for the deepersections.
2. Lateral Stability During Handling
The designer shall specify the lifting embedment locations (3 minimum from
ends - see Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(25)L) and the corresponding
concrete strength at release that provides an adequate factor of safety for lateral
stability. The calculations shall conform to methods as described in references
2,11, 12, 13. Recommended factors of safety of 1.0 against cracking, and 1.5
Where:
N = required number of axles = Wg/Wa, rounded up to the nearest
Where: integer (but not to exceed 14 axles)
Wg = total girder weight (kip)
N = required number of axles = Wg / Wa, rounded up to the nearest integer
Wa = 18 (kip/axle)
Wg = total girder
Forweight (kip)girders K shall be taken as the least of 60,000, 70,000, or
all other
Wa = 80,000 kip-in/rad that result in adequate factors of safety. The objective is
18 (kip/axle)
to design the girder for transportation with the least stiff support system as
possible while achieving the minimum recommended factors of safety.
b. Height of girder
b. Height bottombottom
of girder above roadway = 72 = 72
above roadway
c. Height of truck
c. Height ofroll center
truck roll above
centerroad = 24
above road = 24
d. Center to center distancedistance
d. Center-to-center betweenbetween
truck tiresaxle
= 72
tires = 72 inches for girders
weighing
e. Maximum less roadway
expected than 200superelevation
kips and 96 inches
= 0.06 for all other girders
f. e. Maximum
Maximum girder expected roadway
sweep tolerance superelevation
at midspan = 0.06
= 0.001042 in/in of total girder length
g. Support placementgirder
f. Maximum lateralsweep
tolerance = 1 at midspan = 0.001042 in/in of total
tolerance
girder
h. Increase length
girder C.G. height over roadway by 2% for camber
E. Erection g. Support placement lateral tolerance = 1
A variety h. Increaseare
of methods girder
used C.G. height
to erect over
precast roadway
concrete by 2depending
girders, percent for on camber
the weight, length,
available crane capacity, and site access. Lifting girders during erection is not as critical as when they
E. Erection
are stripped from the forms, particularly when the same lifting devices are used for both. However, if
a separate
A variety
set of of methods
erection are used
devices to erect
are used, prestressed
the girder shall beconcrete
checked girders, depending
for stresses onstability.
and lateral
In addition,
the weight, length, available crane capacity, and site access. Lifting girders duringWind
once the girder is set in place, the free span between supports is usually increased.
can also pose aisproblem.
erection Consequently,
not as critical aswhen when
theygirders are erected,
are stripped fromthey
the shall
forms,immediately be braced.
particularly
The temporary bracing of the girders is the contractors responsibility.
when the same lifting devices are used for both. However, if a separate set of
erectionSequence
F. Construction devices for
are Multi-Span
used, the girder shall Girder
Prestressed be checked for stresses and lateral
Bridges
stability. In addition, once the girder is set in place, the free span between supports
For multi-span prestressed girder bridges, the sequence and timing of the superstructure construction
has a is usually increased.
significant Wind
impact on the can also pose
performance a problem.
and durability Consequently,
of the when
bridge. In order girders are
to maximize the
erected, they shall immediately be braced. The temporary bracing of the girders
performance and durability, the construction sequence details shown in Appendix 5.6-A2 shall is
the contractors responsibility.
F. Construction Sequence for Multi-Span Prestressed Concrete Girder Bridges
For multi-span prestressed concrete girder bridges, the sequence and timing of
the superstructure construction has a significant impact on the performance and
durability of the bridge. In order to maximize the performance and durability, the
construction sequence details shown in Appendix 5.6-A1-2 shall befollowed for
all new WSDOT multi-span prestressed concrete girder bridges. Particular attention
shall bepaid to the timing of casting the lower portion of the pier diaphragms/
crossbeams (30 days minimum after girder fabrication) and the upper portion of
the diaphragms/crossbeams (10 days minimum after placement of the deck slab).
Therequirements apply to multi-span prestressed concrete girder bridges with
monolithic and hinge diaphragms/crossbeams.
5.6.4 Superstructure Optimization
A. Girder Selection
Cost of the girders is a major portion of the cost of prestressed concrete girder
bridges. Much care is therefore warranted in the selection of girders and in
optimizing their position within thestructure. Thefollowing general guidelines
should be considered.
1. Girder Series Selection
All girders in a bridge shall be of the same series unless approved otherwise by
the Bridge and Structures Engineer. If vertical clearance is no problem, a larger
girder series, utilizing fewer girder lines, may be a desirable solution.
Fewer girder lines may result in extra reinforcement and concrete but less
forming cost. Theseitems must also be considered.
2. Girder Concrete Strength
Higher girder concrete strengths should be specified where that strength can
be effectively used to reduce the number of girder lines, see Section 5.1.1.A.2.
When the bridge consists of a large number of spans, consideration should
be given to using a more exact analysis than the usual design program in an
attempt to reduce the number of girder lines. This analysis shall take into
account actual live load, creep, and shrinkage stresses in the girders.
3. Girder Spacing
Consideration must be given to the deck slab cantilever length to determine the
most economical girder spacing. This matter is discussed in Section 5.6.4.B.
The deck slab cantilever length should be made a maximum if a line of girders
can be saved. It is recommended that the overhang length, from edge of slab
to center line of exterior girder, be less than 40percent of girder spacing;
then the exterior girder can use the same design as that of the interior girder.
Thefollowing guidance issuggested.
i. Tapered Spans
On tapered roadways, the minimum number of girder lines should be
determined asifallgirder spaces were to be equally flared. As many girders
as possible, within the limitations of girder capacity should be placed.
Deck slab thickness may have to beincreased in some locations in order
toaccomplish this.
ii. Curved Spans
On curved roadways, normally all girders will be parallel to each other.
Itiscritical that the exterior girders are positioned properly in this case,
asdescribed in Section 5.6.4.B.
than 1-0 from the bridge deck edge. Where curvature is extreme, other types
of bridges should beconsidered. Straight girder bridges on highly curved
alignments have a poor appearance and also tend to become structurally
lessefficient.
C. Diaphragm Requirements
1. General
Diaphragms used with prestressed concrete girder bridges serve multiple
purposes. During the construction stage, the diaphragms help to provide girder
stability for the bridge deck placement. During the life ofthe bridge, the
diaphragms act as load distributing elements, and are particularly advantageous
for distribution of large overloads. Diaphragms also improve the bridge
resistance to over-height impact loads.
Diaphragms for prestressed concrete girder bridges shall be cast-in-place
concrete. Standard diaphragms and diaphragm spacings are given in the office
standards for prestressed concrete girder bridges. For large girder spacings or
other unusual conditions, special diaphragm designs shall beperformed.
Inserts may be used to accommodate the construction of intermediate
diaphragms for connections between the diaphragm and the web of prestressed
concrete girders. The designer shall investigate the adequacy of the insert and
the connection to develop the tensile capacity of diaphragm reinforcement. The
designer shall also investigate the interface shear capacity of the diaphragm-to-
web connections for construction and deck placement loads.
Open holes should be provided for interior webs so reinforcement can be
placed through.
2. Design
Diaphragms shall be designed as transverse beam elements carrying both dead
load and live load. Wheel loads for design shall be placed in positions so as to
develop maximum moments and maximum shears.
3. Geometry
Diaphragms shall normally be oriented parallel to skew (as opposed to normal
to girder centerlines). This procedure has the followingadvantages:
a. The build-up of higher stresses at the obtuse corners of a skewed span
isminimized. Thisbuild-up has often been ignored in design.
b. Skewed diaphragms are connected at points of approximately equal girder
deflections and thus tend to distribute load to the girders in a manner that
more closely meets designassumptions.
c. The diaphragms have more capacity as tension ties and compression
struts are continuous. Relatively weak inserts are only required at the
exteriorgirder.
On curved bridges, diaphragms shall normally be placed on radial lines.
GIRDER
GIRDER
(2) #6 x 8'-0"
3 SPA.@
2" = 6"
DEBOND STRANDS
AT SKEW
(4) #5 x 6'-0
7 SPA @ 2" 4" 7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2" = 1'-2"
SECTION A
GIRDER
CLEARANCE DETERMINED BY
DECK PROTECTION SYSTEM
DECK REINFORCEMENT
GIRDER REINFORCEMENT
repair has been completed. If the strand loss is so great that AASHTO
prestress requirements cannot be met with the remaining strands,
consideration should begiven to replacing the girder.
ii. Restore Prestress If Needed
Prestress in damaged/severed strands can sometimes be restored with
mechanical strand couplers. Damaged girders with broken 0.6 diameter
strands may need to be repaired with 0.5 diameter strands and additional
post-tensioning as needed. Current commercially-available couplers are
capable of restoring full prestressing force in strands of up to diameter.
Verify that the restoration of full prestress force will not cause overstress
inthe damaged girder section.
iii. Prepare a Repair Plan
Draw a sketch to show the area of concrete removal required for
replacement of damaged concrete, and for installation of any mechanical
strand couplers required. The damaged area is to be thoroughly prepared,
coated with epoxy, and repaired with grout equal in strength tothe
originalconcrete.
3. Severe Damage
Where the damage to the girder is considered to be irreparable due to loss
of many strands, extreme cracking, etc., the girder shall be replaced. This
has been done several times, butinvolves some care in determining a proper
replacementsequence.
In general, the procedure consists of cutting through the existing deck slab and
diaphragms and removing the damaged girder. Adequate exposed reinforcement
steel must remain to allow splicing of the new bars. The new girder and new
reinforcement is placed and previously cut concrete surfaces are cleaned and
coated with epoxy. New deck slab and diaphragm portions are then poured.
It is important that the camber of the new girder be matched with that in the
old girders. Excessive camber in the new girder can result in inadequate deck
slab thickness. Girder camber can be controlled by prestress, curing time, or
dimensional changes.
Casting the new bridge deck and diaphragms simultaneously in order to avoid
overloading the existing girders in the structure should be considered. Extra
bracing of the girder at the time of casting the bridge deck will be required.
Methods of construction shall be specified in the plans that will minimize
inconvenience and dangers to the public while achieving a satisfactory
structural result. High early strength grouts and concretes should be considered.
In case of replacement of a damaged girder, the intermediate diaphragms
adjacent to the damaged girder shall be replaced with full depth diaphragms
asshown in Figure 5.6.6-1.
In case of replacement of a damaged girder, the replacement girder should be
ofthe same type or the same depth as the original damaged girder.
#4 STIRRUP
GIRDER
@ 1'-0" MAX.
2 ~ #7 FULL LENGTH
#7
2 ~ #4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS SPACED
AT 1'-0" MAX.(TYP.)
#7 FULL LENGTH
FACE OF WEB
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD 1" BOLT (TYP.)
1'-6"
ANCHOR DETAIL
ASTM A-307
There are other situations as listed below which do not automatically trigger
replacement, butrequire further consideration and analysis.
Significant Concrete Loss from the Bottom Flange For girder damage
involving significant loss of concrete from the bottom flange, consideration
should be given to verifying the level of stress remaining in the exposed
prestressing strands. Residual strand stress values will be required for any
subsequent repairprocedures.
Adjacent Girders Capacity of adjacent undamaged girders.
Consideration must be given as to whether dead load from the damaged
girder has been shed to the adjacent girders and whether the adjacent
girders can accommodate the additional load.
Previously Damaged Girders Damage to a previously damaged girder.
An impact toagirder that has been previously repaired may not be able to
be restored to sufficientcapacity.
Cost Cost of repair versus replacement. Replacement may be warranted
ifthe cost of repair reaches 70percent of the replacement project cost.
Continuous Girders Continuous girders with or without raised
crossbeam that requires supporting falsework in the adjacent spans.
Superstructure Replacement Superstructure replacement shall
beconsidered if more that 50% of all girders in the span are damaged
orifthere is a high risk of future impacts from over-height loads.
C. Miscellaneous References
The girder replacement contracts and similar jobs listed inTable5.6.6-1 should
be used for guidance:
Bridge Total Bridge Year work
Contract Project Name Number Length (ft) planned Work Description
7646 I-5 SR 11 Interchange Chuckanut 11/1 287 2009 Replace damaged PCG
Overcrossing Bridge
8133 US 395 Court Street Bridge 395/103 114 2011 Replace damaged PCG
Replace / Repair Girders
8251 I-5 113th Ave SW Bridge Special 5/309 204 2012 Replace damaged PCG
Repair
8220 SR 16 Olympic Drive NW Bridge 16/120 207 2012 Replace damaged PCG
Special Repair
8218 SR 167 24th St. E Bridge Special 167/38 382 2012 Replace damaged PCG
Repair
8489 I-5 Chamber Way Bridge Special 5/227 185 2014 Replace damaged PCG
Repair
8598 SR 16 Olympic Drive NW Bridge 16/120 207 2014 Replace damaged PCG
Special Repair
8801 I-5 NBCD Over 41st Division Dr. 5/411NCD 172 2015 Replace damaged PCG
Special Repair
8810 I-5 Birch Bay Lynden Rd Bridge 5/834 272 2015 Replace damaged PCG
Bridge Repair
8813 I-90, Front St Bridge 90/66S 90/66S 231 2015 Replace damaged PCG
Girder Replacement
8828 I-90 Stampede Pass Interchange 90/113 151 2016 Replace damaged PCG
Bridge Repair span
A minimum 5 composite CIP bridge deck shall be placed over slab girders. The
CIP concrete deck shall at a minimum be Class 4000D concrete with one layer of
#5 epoxy coated reinforcement in both the transverse and longitudinal directions.
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be spaced at 12 inches maximum and the
transverse reinforcement shall be spaced at 6 inches maximum.
The AASHTO LRFD Section 2.5.2.6.2 deflection criteria shall be satisfied for
slabgirders.
A minimum of two permanent top strands shall be provided for slab girders, one
adjacent to each edge. Additional permanent top strands can be used if required to
control girder end tensile stresses as well as concrete stresses due to plant handling,
shipping and erection.
In some cases it may be necessary to use temporary top strands to control girder
end tensile stresses as well as concrete stresses due to plant handling, shipping
and erection. Thesestrands shall be bonded for 10 at both ends of the girder, and
unbonded for the remainder of the girder length. Temporary strands shall be cut
prior to equalizing girders and placing the CIP bridge deck. Designers may also
consider other methods to control girder stresses including debonding permanent
strands at girder ends and adding mild steelreinforcement.
The specified design compressive strength (c) of slab girders should be kept less
than or equal to8ksi to allow more fabricators to bid.
Girder equalization, shear keys and weld ties are not required when a minimum
5 composite CIP bridge deck is placed over slab girders. Differential camber is
expected to be small but the designer should ensure it can be accommodated by the
CIP deck.
Designers should ensure that the cross slope of girder supports are the same at both
ends of each girder in order to prevent girder torsion, point loads, and gaps between
the girder and the bearings.
Lateral restraint of slab girder superstructures with end type A at abutments shall be
provided by external girder stops, one on each side of the bridge.
C. Double-Tee and Ribbed Deck Girders
Double-tee and ribbed deck girders shall be limited to widening existing similar
structures. An hot mix asphalt (HMA) overlay with membrane shall be specified.
These sections are capable of spanning up to 60.
D. Deck Bulb-Tee Girders
Deck bulb-tee girders have standard girder depths of 35, 41, 53, and 65inches.
The top flange/deck may vary from 4-feet 1-inch to 6-feet wide. They are capable
of spanning up to 155feet. Deck bulb-tee girders shall be limited to pedestrian
bridges, temporary bridges and to widening existing similarstructures.
Deck bulb-tee girders shall have an HMA or concrete overlay. A waterproofing
membrane shall be provided with an HMA overlay.
Deck bulb-tee girders shall be installed with girder webs plumb. Bridge deck
superelevation shall be accommodated by varying the top flange thickness.
Depths for Bridge Deck Design at Overhang
Figure 5.7.1-2
C. Computation of A Dimension
The distance from the top of the bridge deck to the top of the girder at centerline
bearing at centerline of girder is represented bythe A Dimension. It is calculated
in accordance with the guidance of Appendix 5-B1. This ensures that adequate
allowance will be made for excess camber, transverse deck slopes, vertical and
horizontal curvatures. Where temporary prestress strands at top of girder are used
to control the girder stresses due to shipping and handling, the A dimension must
be adjusted accordingly.
The note in the left margin of the layout sheet shall read: A Dimension = X (not
for design).
5.7.2 Bridge Deck Reinforcement
A. Transverse Reinforcement
The size and spacing of transverse reinforcement may be governed by interior
bridge deck span design and cantilever design. Where cantilever design
governs, short hooked bars may be added at the bridge deck edge to increase
the reinforcement available in that area. Top transverse reinforcement is always
hooked at the bridge deck edge unless a traffic barrier is not used. Top transverse
reinforcement is preferably spliced at some point between girders inorder toallow
the clearance of the hooks to the bridge deck edge forms to be properly adjusted in
the field. Usually,the bridge deck edge hooks will need to be tilted in order to place
them. On larger bars, theclearance for the longitudinal bar through the hooks shall
be checked. Appendices5.3A5 through 5.3-A8 can be used to aid in selection of
bar size and spacing.
For skewed spans, the transverse bars are placed normal to bridge centerline
and the areas near the expansion joints and bridge ends are reinforced by partial
length bars. For raised crossbeam bridges, the bottom transverse bridge deck
reinforcement is discontinued at the crossbeam.
The spacing of bars over the crossbeam must be detailed to be large enough to
allow concrete tobepoured into the crossbeam. For typical requirements, see
Section 5.3.3.D.
For bridge decks with a crowned roadway, the bottom surface and rebar shall be
flat, as shown inFigure5.7.2-1.
B. Longitudinal Reinforcement
This section discusses reinforcement requirements for resistance of longitudinal
moments incontinuous multi-span prestressed concrete girder bridges and is
limited to reinforcement in the bridge deck since capacity for resisting positive
moment is provided by the girder reinforcement.
1. Simple Spans
For simple span bridges, longitudinal bridge deck reinforcement is not required
to resist negative moments and therefore the reinforcement requirements are
nominal. Figure 5.7.2-2 defines longitudinal reinforcement requirements for
these decks. The bottom longitudinal reinforcement is defined by AASHTO
LRFD Section 9.7.3.2 requirements for distribution reinforcement. The top
longitudinal reinforcement is based on current office practice.
Nominal Longitudinal Bridge Deck Reinforcement
Figure 5.7.2-2
Page 5-118 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
2. Continuous Spans
Continuity reinforcement shall be provided at supports for loads applied
after establishing continuity. The longitudinal reinforcement in the bridge
deck at intermediate piers is dominated bythe negative moment requirement.
Where these bars are cut off, they are lapped by the nominal top longitudinal
reinforcement described in Section 5.7.2.D. The required bridge deck thickness
for various bar combinations is shown in Table 5.7.2-1.
C. Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement
The provision of AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.3.4 for class 2 exposure condition
shall be satisfied for both the top and bottom faces of the bridge deck.
Minimum Bridge Deck Thickness (Inches) Transverse Bar
Longitudinal Bar #5 #6 #7
#4 7 -- --
#5 7 7 7
#6 7 7 8
#7 7 8 8
#8 8 8 8
#9 8 8 9
#10 8 -- --
Note:
Deduct from minimum bridge deck thickness shown in table when an overlay is used.
D. Bar Patterns
Figure 5.7.2-3 shows two typical top longitudinal reinforcing bar patterns. Care
must be taken that bar lengths conform to the requirements of Section 5.1.2.
The symmetrical bar pattern shown should normally not be used when required
bar lengths exceed 60feet. If the staggered bar pattern will not result in bar lengths
within the limits specified inSection5.1.2, the method shown in Figure 5.7.2-4
may be used to provide an adequate splice. Allbars shall be extended by their
development length beyond the point where the bar is required.
Normally, no more than 33percent of the total area of main reinforcing bars at a
support (negative moment) or at midspan (positive moment) shall be cut off at one
point. Where limiting this value to33percent leads to severe restrictions on the
reinforcement pattern, an increase in figure may beconsidered. Two reinforcement
bars shall be used as stirrup hangers.
Allow the Contractor the option of either a roughened surface or a shear key
atthe intermediate pier diaphragm construction joint.
Both, top and bottom layer reinforcement shall be considered when designing
for negative moment at the intermediate piers.
Reduce lap splices if possible. Use staggered lap splices for both top and
bottom in longitudinal and transverse directions.
5.7.3 Stay-in-place Deck Panels
A. General
The use of precast, prestressed stay-in-place (SIP) deck panels for bridge decks
may be investigated at the preliminary design stage. The acceptance evaluation
will consider such items as extra weight for seismic design and the resulting
substructure impacts.
The composite deck system consisting of precast prestressed concrete deck panels
with a CIP topping has advantages in minimizing traffic disruption, speeding up
construction and solving constructability issues on certain projects. Contractors,
in most cases, prefer this composite deck panel system for bridge decks in traffic
congested areas and other specific cases.
SIP deck panels may be used on WSDOT bridges with WSDOT Bridge
and Structures Office approval. Details for SIP deck panels are shown in
Appendix5.6-A10-1.
Steel deck forms are not permitted in order to allow inspection of deck soffits and
to avoid maintenance of a corrosion protection system.
B. Design Criteria
The design of SIP deck panels follows the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications and the PCI Bridge Design Manual. The design philosophy of SIP
deck panels is identical to simple span prestressed concrete girders. They are
designed for Service Limit State and checked for Strength Limit State. The precast
panels support the dead load of deck panels and CIP topping, and the composite
SIP deck panel and CIP cross-section resists the live load and superimposed dead
loads. The tensile stress at the bottom of the panel is limited to zero per WSDOT
design practice.
C. Limitations on SIP Deck Panels
The conventional full-depth CIP bridge deck shall be used for most applications.
However, the WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office may allow the use of SIP deck
panels with the following limitations:
1. SIP deck panels shall not be used in negative moment regions of continuous
conventionally reinforced bridges. SIP deck panels may be used in post-
tensioned continuous bridges.
2. Bridge widening. SIP deck panels are not allowed in the bay adjacent to the
existing structure because it is difficult to set the panels properly on the existing
structure, and the requirement for a CIP closure. SIP deck panels can be used
on the other girders when the widening involves multiple girders.
3. Phased construction. SIP deck panels are not allowed in the bay adjacent to the
previously placed deck because of the requirement for a CIP closure.
4. Prestressed concrete girders with narrow flanges. Placement of SIP deck panels
on girders with flanges less than 12 wide is difficult.
5. A minimum bridge deck thickness of 8.5, including 3.5 precast deck panel
and 5 CIP concrete topping shall be specified.
6. SIP deck panels are not allowed for steel girder bridges.
5.7.4 Bridge Deck Protection
All bridge decks, precast or cast-in-place slabs, or deck girder structures shall use
a deck protection system as described in this section to reduce the deterioration of
the bridge deck and superstructure. The WSDOT Bridge Management Unit shall
determine the type of protection system during the preliminary plan or Request For
Proposal (RFP) stage for structures not described in this section. Special conditions
(i.e. a widening) where it may be desirable to deviate from the standard deck protection
systems require approval of the WSDOT Bridge Management Unit.
Preliminary plans shall indicate the protection system in the left margin in accordance
with Section2.3.8.
Saw cutting or grinding pavement items are not allowed on the bridge decks.
Rumble strips and recessed pavement markers shall not be placed on bridge decks,
orapproach slab surfaces whether they are concrete or asphalted as stated in Standard
Specifications Section 8-08 and 8-09, respectively.
Traffic detection loops shall not be located in an existing bridge surface. They may be
installed during the construction of bridge decks prior to placing the deck concrete in
accordance with Standard Plan J-50.16.
A. Deck Protection Systems
The following paragraphs describe five WSDOT protective systems used to protect
a concrete bridge deck design.
1. Type 1 Protection System
This is the minimum default protection system for cases where a protection
system has not been specified on a structure. Type 1 protection system shall
be used for cast-in-place bridge decks with two layers of reinforcement, see
Figure 5.7.4-1. This also applies to CIP slab bridges, deck replacements and the
widening of existing decks. System 1 consists of the following:
i. A minimum 2 of concrete cover over top bar of deck reinforcing. The
cover includes a wearing surface and tolerance for the placement of
the reinforcing steel.
ii. Both the top and bottom mat of deck reinforcing shall be epoxy-coated.
iii. Girder stirrups and horizontal shear reinforcement do not require
epoxy-coating.
Type 2 Protection System
Figure 5.7.4-2
3. Type 3 Protection System
This protection system consists of a Hot Mixed Asphalt (HMA) overlay
wearing surface and requires the use of a waterproofing membrane, see Figure
5.7.4-3. HMA overlays provide a lower level of deck protection and introduce
the risk of damage by planing equipment during resurfacing. Asphalt overlays
with a membrane were first used on a WSDOT bridges in 1971 and about of
WSDOT structures have HMA. The bridge HMA has an expected life equal to
the roadway HMA when properlyconstructed.
Waterproof membranes are required with the HMA overlay. Unlike roadway
surfaces, the HMA material collects and traps water carrying salts and oxygen
at the concrete surface deck. This is additional stress to an epoxy protection
system or a bare deck and requires a membrane to mitigate the penetration of
salts and oxygen to the structural reinforcement and cement paste. See Standard
Specifications for more information on waterproof membranes.
HMA overlays may be used in addition to the Type 1 Protection System
for new bridges where it is desired to match roadway pavement materials.
New bridge designs using HMA shall have a depth of overlay between 0.15
(1.8) and 0.25 (3). Designers should consider designing for a maximum
depth of 0.25 to allow future overlays to remove and replace 0.15 HMA
without damaging the concrete cover or the waterproof membrane. Plan sheet
references to the depth of HMA shall be infeet, since this is customary for the
paving industry. WSDOT roadway resurfacing operations will normally plane
and pave 0.15 of HMA which encourages the following design criteria.
Existing structures may apply an HMA overlay in accordance with the Bridge
Paving Policies, Section5.7.5.
Standard Plan A-40.20.00, Bridge Transverse Joints Seals for HMA provides
some standard details for saw cutting small relief joints in HMA paving. Saw
cut joints can have a longer life, better ride, and help seal the joint at a location
known to crack and may be used for small bridge expansion joints less than
1inch.
WSDOT prohibits the use of a Type 3 Protection System for prestressed
concrete slab girder or deck girder bridges managed by WSDOT except for
pedestrian bridges or for widening existing similar structures with an HMA
overlay. The HMA with membrane provides some protection to the connections
between girders, but can be prone to reflective cracking at the joints. It is not
uncommon for voided slabs to fill with water and aggressively corrode the
reinforcement. Prestressed concrete members with a Type3 Protection System
shall have a minimum cover of 2 over an epoxy coated topmat.
Type 4 Protection System
Figure 5.7.4-4
5. Type 5 System
This system requires a layered, 3 concrete cover for double protection, see
Figure 5.7.4-5. All segmentally constructed bridges shall use this system
to protect construction joints and provide minor grade adjustments during
construction. Bridge decks with transverse or longitudinal post-tensioning
in the deck shall use this system since deck rehabilitation due to premature
deterioration is very costly. The 3 cover consists of the following:
i. The deck is constructed with a 1 concrete cover.
ii. Both the top and bottom mat of deck reinforcing are epoxy-coated.
Girder/web stirrups and horizontal shear reinforcement does not require
epoxy-coating.
iii. The deck is then scarified prior to the placement of a modified concrete
overlay. Scarification shall be diamond grinding to preserve the integrity of
the segmental deck andjoints.
iv. A Type 2a, 1 Modified Concrete Overlay is placed as a wearing surface.
Type 5 Protection System
Figure 5.7.4-5
3. Concrete Overlays
It is preferred to place a concrete overlay from curb to curb. If this is
problematic for traffic control, then Plans shall provide at least a 6 offset lap
where the overlay construction joint will not match the deck construction joint.
4. HMA Overlays
The depth of existing asphalt must be field measured and shown on the
bridge plans. This mitigates damage of the existing structure due to removal
operations and reveals other design problems such as: improper joint height,
buried construction problems, excessive weight, or roadway grade transitions
adjustments due to drainage.
The new deck must meet the rebar and cover criteria stated above for Concrete
Decks and deck tinning is not required. Type 3 Protection system shall be used
and HMA shall be placed to provide a minimum 0.15 or the optimum 0.25.
5. Small Width Widening
With approval of the WSDOT Bridge Management Unit, smaller width
widening design that has traffic on the new construction can match existing
1 concrete cover for the widened portion, if the existing deck deterioration is
greater than 1percent of the deckarea.
6. Expansion Joints
All joints shall be in good condition and water tight for the existing bridge and
the newly constructed widened portion. The following joint criteria applies:
i. The existing expansion joint shall be replaced if:
More than 10percent of the length of a joint has repairs within 1-0 of
the joint.
Part of a joint is missing.
The joint is a non-standard joint system placed by maintenance.
ii. All existing joint seals shall be replaced.
iii. When existing steel joints are not replaced in the project, the new joint shall
be the same type and manufacturer as the existing steel joint.
iv. Steel joints shall have no more than one splice and the splice shall be at a
lane line. Modular joints shall not have any splices.
4. Full Removal
Full depth removal and replacement of the HMA is always an alternate resurfacing
design option. Full depth removal may be required by the Region Pavement
Manager or the Bridge Office due to poor condition of the HMA or bridge deck.
Bridge Deck Repair and Membrane Waterproofing (Deck Seal) standard pay
items are required for this option and the Bridge Office will provide engineering
estimates of the quantity (SF) and cost for both.
a. Bridge Deck Repair will be required when the HMA is removed and the
concrete is exposed for deck inspection. Chain Drag Testing is completed
and based on the results, the contractor is directed to fix the quantity of deck
repairs. The Chain Drag results are sent to the Bridge Asset Manager and
used by the Bridge Office to monitor the condition of the concrete deck and
determine when the deck needs rehabilitation or replacement.
b. Membrane Waterproofing (Deck Seal) is Standard Item 4455 and will be
required for all HMA bridge decks, except when the following conditions
aremet.
i. HMA placed on a deck that has a Modified Concrete Overlay which acts
like a membrane.
ii. The bridge is on the P2 replacement list or deck rehabilitation scheduled
within the next 4years or two bienniums.
5. Bare Deck HMA
Paving projects may place HMA on a bare concrete deck, with concurrence of the
WSDOT Bridge Asset Manager, if the bridge is on an HMA route and one of the
following conditionsapply.
a. Rutting on the concrete deck is or more.
b. The Region prefers to simplify paving construction or improve the smoothness
at the bridge.
When the concrete bridge deck does not have asphalt on the surface, Region
Design should contact the Region Materials lab and have a Chain Drag Report
completed and forwarded to the Bridge Asset Manager during design to establish
the Bridge Deck Repair quantities for the project. Pavement Design should
then contact Region Bridge Maintenance to request the repairs be completed
prior to contract; or the repairs may be included in the paving contract. Small
amounts of Bridge Deck Repair have an expensive unit cost by contract during
pavingoperations.
1. Slab Bridge
Structure depth can be quite shallow in the positive moment region when
post-tensioning is combined with haunching in the negative moment region.
However, post-tensioned CIP slabs are usually more expensive than when
reinforced conventionally. Designers should proceed with caution when
considering post-tensioned slab bridges because severe cracking in the decks
ofbridges of this type has occurred 21, 22, 23.
The Olalla Bridge (Contract 9202) could be reviewed as an example. This
bridge has spans of41.55041.5, a midspan structure depth of 15 inches, and
some haunching at thepiers.
2. T-Beam Bridge
This type of bridge, combined with tapered columns, can be structurally
efficient and aesthetically pleasing, particularly when the spacing of the beams
and the columns are the same. AT-Beam bridge can also be a good choice for a
single-span simply-supported structure.
When equally spaced beams and columns are used in the design, the width of
beam webs should generally be equal to the width of the supporting columns.
See SR 16, Union Avenue OXings, for an example. Since longitudinal
structural frame action predominates in this type of design, crossbeams at
intermediate piers can be relatively small and the post-tensioning tendons can
be placed side-by-side in the webs, resulting in an efficient center of gravity
of steel line throughout. For other types of T-Beam bridges, the preferred
solution may be smaller, more closely spaced beams and fewer, but larger
pier elements. If this type of construction is used in a multispan, continuous
bridge, the beam cross-section properties in the negative moment regions need
to be considerably larger than the properties in the positive moment regions to
resistcompression.
Larger section properties can be obtained by gradually increasing the web
thickness in the vicinity of intermediate piers or, if possible, by adding a fillet
or haunch. The deck slab overhang over exterior webs should be roughly half
the web spacing.
3. Box Girder Bridge
This type of bridge has been a popular choice in this state. The cost of a
prestressed box girder bridge is practically the same as a conventionally-
reinforced box girder bridge, however, longer spans and shallower depths are
possible with prestressing.
The superstructure of multi-cell box girders shall be designed as a unit. The
entire superstructure section (traffic barrier excluded) shall be considered when
computing the section properties.
For criteria on distribution of live loads, see Section 3.9.4. All slender members
subjected to compression must satisfy buckling criteria.
Web spacing should normally be 8 to 11feet and the top slab overhang
over exterior girders should be approximately half the girder spacing unless
transverse post-tensioning is used. The apparent visual depth of box girder
bridges can be reduced by sloping all or the lower portion of the exterior web.
If the latter is done, the overall structure depth may have to be increased. Web
thickness should be 12 inches minimum, but not less than required for shear,
horizontal and vertical reinforcing, duct placement, and for concrete placing
clearance. Providing 2 of clear cover expedites concrete placement and
consolidation in the heavily congested regions adjacent to the post-tensioning
ducts. Webs should be flared at anchorages. Top and bottom slab thickness
should normally meet the requirements of Section 5.3.1.B, but not less than
required by stress and specifications. Generally, the bottom slab would require
thickening at the interior piers of continuous spans. This thickening should be
accomplished by raising the top surface of the bottom slab at the maximum rate
of per foot.
C. Strand and Tendon Arrangements
The total number of strands selected should be the minimum required to meet
the strength and service limit state requirements at all points. Duct sizes and the
number of strands they contain vary slightly, depending on the supplier. Chapter2
of the PTI Post-tensioned Box Girder Bridge Manual, and shop drawings of the
recent post-tensioned bridges kept on file in the Construction Plans Section offer
guidance to strand selection. In general, a supplier will offer several duct sizes and
associated end anchors, each of which will accommodate a range of strand numbers
up to a maximum in the range. Present WSDOT practice is to indicate only the
design force and cable path on the contract plans and allow the post-tensioning
supplier to satisfy these requirements with tendons and anchors. The most
economical tendon selection will generally be the maximum size within the range.
Commonly-stocked anchorages for diameter strands include 9, 12, 19, 27, 31,
and 37 strands. Commonly-stocked anchorages for 0.6 diameter strands include 4,
7, 12, 19, 22, and 27 strands. The design should utilize commonly-stocked items.
For example, a design requiring 72 strands per web would be most economically
satisfied by two standard 37-strand tendons. A less economical choice would be
three standard 27-strand tendons containing 24strands each. Tendons shall not
be larger than (37) strand units or (27) 0.6 strand units, unless specifically
approved by the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer. The duct area shall be at
least 2.5 times the net area of the prestressing steel. In the regions away from the
endanchorages, the duct placement patterns indicated in Figures 5.8.1-1 through
5.8.1-3 shall be used.
Although post-tensioning steel normally takes precedence in a member, sufficient
room must be provided for other essential mild steel and placement of concrete,
inparticular near diaphragms and cross-beams.
TYPICAL SECTION
* 2" MIN. CLR. TO ANY REINF.
(TO PERMIT POURING OF CONCRETE)
A SINGLE TIER OF TENDONS CENTERED
IN THE WEB WILL GENERALLY PERMIT
THE USE OF THINNER WEBS THAN
USING DOUBLE TIERS.
C
RE HEC
IS IN K
IN N FO TO
R R
-P EE RC S
DE RIO LA D E E
NE ED ME E
IR E
G XT
I
FO FO NT F
E
RC R
EXTERIOR FACE ES
OF GIRDER
SE
E
Lm LE
P.T.
TA
in 5.
R.
B
CL
.
CURTAIN WALL CAST AFTER
IN
8.
M
1-
POST-TENSIONING
1
2"
1'-0" MIN
(M 20 Z.
IN ' 0
UPPER BRG.
ELEMENT
LOWER BRG.
ELEMENT
E. Superstructure Shortening
Whenever members such as columns, crossbeams, and diaphragms are appreciably
affected by post-tensioning of the main girders, those effects shall be included in
the design. This will generally be true in structures containing rigid frame elements.
For further discussion, see Section2.6 of reference17.
Past practice in the state of Washington regarding control of superstructure
shortening in post-tensioned bridges with rigid piers can be illustrated by a few
examples. Single-span bridges have been provided with a hinge at one pier and
longitudinal slide bearings at the other pier. Two-span bridges have been detailed
with longitudinal slide bearings at the end piers and a monolithic middle pier. On
the six-span Evergreen Parkway Undercrossing (Bridge Number 101/510), the
center pier (pier 4) was built monolithic with the superstructure, and all the other
piers were constructed with slide bearings. After post-tensioning, the bearings at
piers 3 and 5 were converted into fixed bearings to help resist large horizontal loads
such asearthquakes.
Superstructures which are allowed to move longitudinally at certain piers are
typically restrained against motion in the transverse direction at those piers. This
can be accomplished with suitable transverse shear corbels or bearings allowing
motion parallel to the bridge only. The casting length for box girder bridges shall
be slightly longer than the actual bridge layout length to account for the elastic
shortening of the concrete due to prestress.
F. Effects of Curved Tendons
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.10.4.3 shall be used to consider the effects of curved
tendons. In addition, confinement reinforcement shall be provided to confine the
PT tendons when Rin isless than 800 feet or the effect of in-plane plus out-of-plane
forces is greater than or equal to 10k/ft:
(5.8.1-1)
Where:
Pu = Factored tendon force = 1.2 Pjack (kips)
Rin = Radius of curvature of the tendon at the considered location causing
in-plane force effects (typically horizontal) (ft)
Rout = Radius of curvature of the tendon at the considered location causing
out-of-plane force effects (typically vertical) (ft)
Y X
PT1 #4
and Design of Reinforced Concrete Bridge Structures. The refined estimate for
computing time-dependent losses in steel stress given in the code shall be used.
To minimize concrete cracking and protect reinforcing steel against corrosion for
bridges, the allowable concrete stress under final conditions in the precompressed
tensile zone shall be limited to zero in the top and bottom fibers as shown in
Figure5.8.2-1.
In all cases where tension is allowed in the concrete under initial or final
conditions, extra mild steel (auxiliary reinforcement) shall be added to carry the
total tension present. This steel can be computed as described in Section 9-5 of
Reference18.
In case of overstress, try one or more of the following remedies: adjust tendon
profiles, add or subtract prestress steel, thicken slabs, revise strength of concrete of
top slab, add more short tendons locally, etc.
D. Camber
The camber to be shown on the plans shall include the effect of both dead load and
finalprestress.
E. Expansion Bearing Offsets
Figure 5.8.1-4 indicates expansion bearing offsets for the partial effects ofelastic
shortening, creep, and shrinkage. The initial offset shown is intended to result
in minimal bearing eccentricity for the majority of the life of the structure.
The bearing shall be designed for the full range ofanticipated movements:
ES+CR+SH+TEMP including load factors specified in AASHTO for deflections.
5.8.3 Post-tensioning
A. Tendon Layout
After a preliminary estimate has been made of the concrete section and the amount
of prestressing needed at points of maximum applied load, it may be advantageous
in multispan bridges to draw a tendon profile to a convenient scale superimposed
on a plot of the center of gravity of concrete (c.g.c.) line. The most efficient
tendon profile from the standpoint of steel stress loss will normally be a series of
rather long interconnected parabolas, but other configurations are possible. For
continuous bridges with unequal span lengths, the tendon profile (eccentricity)
shall be based on the span requirement. This results in an efficient post-tensioning
design. The tendon profile and c.g.c. line plot is strongly recommended for
superstructures of variable cross-section and/or multiple unsymmetrical span
arrangements, but is not necessary for superstructures having constant cross-
section and symmetrical spans. The main advantages of the tendon profile and
c.g.c. plot are:
1. The primary prestress moment curves (prestress force times distance from
c.g.c. line to center of gravity of steel (c.g.s.) lines) at all points throughout
all spans are quickly obtained from this plot and will be used to develop the
secondary moment curves (if present) and, ultimately, to develop the resultant
total prestress moment curve.
2. Possible conflicts between prestressing steel and mild steel near end regions,
crossbeams, and diaphragms may become apparent.
3. Possible design revisions may be indicated. For example, camber in bridges
with unequal spans can be balanced by adjusting tendon profiles.
The tendon profile and c.g.c. line diagram shall also contain a sketch of how
the end bearing plates or anchors are to be arranged at the ends of the bridge.
Such a sketch can be useful in determining how large the end block in a girder
bridge will have to be and how much space will be required for mild steel in the
end region. In general, the arrangement of anchor plates should be the same as
the arrangement of the ducts to which they belong to avoid problems with duct
cross-overs and to keep end blocks of reasonable width.
B. Prestress Losses
Prestress losses shall be as indicated in Section 5.1.4.
C. Jacking End
Effective prestressing force in design of post-tensioned bridges depends on the
accumulation of friction losses due to the horizontal and vertical curvature of the
tendons as well as the curvature of the bridge. Although jacking ends of post-
tensioned bridges is important to achieve more effective design, consideration shall
be given to the practicality of jacking during construction. The following general
stressing guidelines shall be considered in specifying jacking end of post-tensioned
bridges.
All simple or multiple span CIP or precast concrete bridges with total length of
less than 350 shall be stressed from one end only.
All CIP or precast concrete post tensioned bridges with total length between
350 to 600. may be stressed from one end or both ends if greater friction
losses due to vertical or horizontal curvature are justified by the designer.
All CIP or precast concrete bridges with total length of greater than 600 shall
be stressed from both ends.
When stressing tendons from both ends or when alternating a single pull from both
ends (half tendons pulled from one end with the other half pulled from the other
end), all tendons shall be stressed on one end before all tendons are stressed on the
opposite end.
Stressing at both ends shall preferably be done on alternate tendons, and need not
be done simultaneously on the same tendon. In rare cases, tendons can be stressed
from both ends to reduce large tendon losses but is undesirable due to worker
safety issues and a reduction in stressing redundancy.
D. Steel Stress Curve
Steel stresses may be plotted either as the actual values or as a percentage of the
jacking stresses. A steel stress diagram for a typical two-span bridge is shown in
Figure 5.8.3-1. Spans are symmetrical about pier 2 and the bridge is jacked from
both ends.
FINA
JACKED END L DES JACKED END
IGN ESS
STR
Accurate plotting of steel stress variation due to local curvature is normally not
necessary, and straight lines between intersection points on the diagram as shown
in Figure 5.8.3-1 are usually sufficient. When tendons are continuous through the
length of the bridge, the stress for design purposes at the jacked end should be
limited to 0.79pu or 213 ksi for 270 ksi low relaxation strands. This would permit
the post-tensioning contractor to jack to the slightly higher value of 0.81pu for low
relaxation strands as allowed by the AASHTO LRFD Specifications in case friction
Stress Diagram
values encountered forturn
in the field a 2-span PT Bridge
out somewhat greater than the standard values
Figure 5.8.3-1
used in design. Stress loss at jacked end shall be calculated from the assumed
anchor set of , the normal slippage during anchoring in most systems. At the
high points on the initial stress curve, the stress shall not exceed 0.74pu for low
relaxation strands after seating of the anchorage. If these values are exceeded, the
jacking stress can be lowered or alternately the specified amount of anchor set can
be increased.
When the total tendon length (L) is less than the length of cable influenced by
anchor set (x) and the friction loss is small, as in short straight tendons, the 0.70pu
value at the anchorage immediately after anchor set governs. In these cases, the
allowable jacking stress value at the anchorage cannot be used and a slightly lower
value shall be specified.
In single-span, simply supported superstructures friction losses are so small that
jacking from both ends is normally not warranted. In the longer multispan bridges
where the tendons experience greater friction losses, jacking from both ends will
usually be necessary. Jacking at both ends need not be done simultaneously, since
final results are virtually the same whether or not the jacking is simultaneous. If
unsymmetrical two-span structures are to be jacked from one end only, the jacking
must be done from the end of the longest span.
In the absence of experimental data, the friction coefficient for post-tensioning
tendons in rigid and semi-rigid galvanized metal sheathing shall be taken as
shown in Table 5.8.3-1. For tendon lengths greater than 1,000feet, investigation is
warranted on current field data of similar length bridges for appropriate values of
. In the absence of experimental data, the friction coefficient for post-tensioning
tendons in polyethylene ducts shall be taken as shown in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge DesignSpecifications.
Tendon Length
500 ft or less 0.15
Over 500 ft to 750 ft 0.20
Over 750 ft to 1,000 ft 0.25
3. If mild reinforcement is added, the resistance factor for flexural design shall be
adjusted in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.5.4.2.1 to account for
the effect of partial prestressing. The section will still be considered uncracked
and requirements for crack control, and side skin reinforcement do not apply.
5.8.4 Shear and Anchorages
A. Shear Capacity
Concrete box girder and T-beam bridges with horizontal construction joints (which
result from webs and slabs being cast at different times) shall be checked for both
vertical and horizontal shear capacity. Generally, horizontal shear requirements will
control the stirrup design.
Vertical concrete shear capacity for prestressed or post-tensioned structural
members is calculated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.
Minimum stirrup area and maximum stirrup spacing are subject to the limitations
presented in AASHTO LRFD Sections 5.8.2.5 and 5.8.2.7. For further explanation,
refer to Section 11.4 of the ACI 318-02 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete and Commentary. Chapter 27 of Notes on ACI 318-02 Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete with Design Applications presents two
excellent example problems for vertical shear design.
B. Horizontal Shear
Horizontal shear stress acts over the contact area between two interconnected
surfaces of a composite structural member. AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.4 shall be
used for shear-friction design.
C. End Block Stresses
The highly concentrated forces at the end anchorages cause bursting and spalling
stresses in the concrete which must be resisted by reinforcement. For a better
understanding of this subject, see Chapter 7 of Reference18 and 19, and Section 2.82
of Reference17.
Note that the procedures for computing horizontal bursting and spalling steel in
the slabs of box girders and T-beams are similar to those required for computing
vertical steel in girder webs, except that the slab steel is figured in a horizontal
instead of a vertical plane. In box girders, this slab steel should be placed half in
the top slab and half in the bottom slab. The anchorage zones of slab bridges will
require vertical stirrups as well as additional horizontal transverse bars extending
across the width of the bridge. The horizontal spalling and bursting steel in slab
bridges shall be placed half in a top layer and half in a bottom layer.
D. Anchorage Stresses
The average bearing stress on the concrete behind the anchor plate and the
bending stress in the plate material shall satisfy the requirements of the AASHTO
LRFD Specification. In all sizes up to the 31-strand tendons, the square anchor
plates used by three suppliers (DSI, VSL, AVAR, Stronghold) meet the AASHTO
requirements, and detailing end blocks to accommodate these plates is the
recommended procedure. In the cases where nonstandard (rectangular) anchor
plates must be specified because of space limitations, assume that the trumpet
associated with the equivalent size square plate will be used. In order to calculate
the net bearing plate area pressing on the concrete behind it, the trumpet size can be
scaled from photos in supplier brochures. Assume for simplicity that the concrete
bearing stress is uniform. Bending stress in the steel should be checked assuming
bending can occur across a corner of the plate or across a line parallelto its narrow
edge. See Appendix 5-B2 for preapproved anchorages for post-tensioning.
E. Anchorage Plate Design
The design and detailing of the anchorage block in CIP post-tensioned box
girders should be based on Normal Anchorage Devices as defined in Standard
Specifications Section6-02.3(26)C. Special Anchorage Devices as defined in
Standard Specifications Section6-02.3(26)D could be used ifstacking of Normal
Anchorage Devices within the depth of girder is geometrically not possible.
Anchorage plates shall not extend to top and bottom slab of box girders. If Special
Anchorage Devices are used, they shall be specified in the contract plans and
bridge specialprovisions.
5.8.5 Temperature Effects
Most specifications for massive bridges call for a verification of stresses under uniform
temperature changes of the total bridge superstructure. Stresses due to temperature
unevenly distributed within the cross-section are not generally verified. In reality,
however, considerable temperature gradients are set up within the cross-section of
superstructures. Such temperature differences are mostly of a very complex nature,
depending on the type of cross-section and direction of solar radiation 20.
Solar radiation produces uniform heating of the upper surface of a bridge
superstructure which is greater than that of the lower surface. An inverse temperature
gradient with higher temperatures at the lower surface occurs rarely and involves much
smaller temperature differences. In statically indeterminate continuous bridge beams, a
temperature rise at the upper surface produces positive flexural moments which cause
tensile stresses in the bottom fibers. When the temperature gradient is constant over
the entire length of a continuous beam superstructure, positive flexural moments are
induced in all spans. These moments are of equal constant magnitude in the interior
spans and decrease linearly to zero in the end spans. The most critical zones are
those which have the lowest compressive stress reserve in the bottom fibers under
prestress plus dead load. Normally, these are the zones near the interior supports where
additional tensile stresses develop in the bottom fibers dueto
A concentrated support reaction, and
Insufficient curvature of prestressed reinforcement.
Studies have shown that temperature is the most important tension-producing factor,
especially in two-span continuous beams in the vicinity of intermediate supports,
even when the temperature difference is only 10C between the deck and bottom of
the beam. In practice, a box girder can exhibit a T=30C. The zone at a distance of
about 0.3 to 2.0d on either side of the intermediate support proved to be particularly
crack-prone.
Computation of stresses induced by vertical temperature gradients within prestressed
concrete bridges can become quite complex and are ignored in typical designs done by
WSDOT. It is assumed that movements at the expansion devices will generally relieve
any induced stresses. However, such stresses can be substantial in massive, deep
bridge members in localities with large temperature fluctuations. If the structure being
designed falls within this category, a thermal stress investigation shall be considered.
See Reference17 and the following temperature criteria for further guidance.
1. A mean temperature 50F with rise 45F and fall 45F for longitudinal analysis
using one-half of the modulus of elasticity. (Maximum Seasonal Variation.)
2. The superstructure box girder shall be designed transversely for a temperature
differential between inside and outside surfaces of 15F with no reduction in
modulus of elasticity (Maximum Daily Variation).
3. The superstructure box girder shall be designed longitudinally for a top slab
temperature increase of 20F with no reduction in modulus of elasticity. (In
accordance with Post-tensioning Institute Manual, Precast Segmental Box Girder
Bridge Manual Section 3.3.4.)
5.8.6 Construction
A. General
Construction plans for conventional post-tensioned box girder bridges include
two different sets of drawings. The first set (contract plans) is prepared by the
design engineer and the second set (shop plans) is prepared by the post-tensioning
materials supplier (contractor).
B. Contract Plans
The contract plans shall be prepared to accommodate several post-tensioning
systems, so only prestressing forces and eccentricity should be detailed. The
concrete sections shall be detailed so that available systems can be installed.
Design the thickness of webs and flanges to facilitate concrete placement.
Generally, web thickness for post-tensioned bridges shall be as described in
Section5.8.1.B. See Section 5.8.7 for design information to be included in the
contract plan post-tensioning notes.
C. Shop Plans
The shop plans are used to detail, install, and stress the post-tensioning system
selected by the Contractor. These plans must contain sufficient information to allow
the engineer to check their compliance with the contract plans. These plans must
also contain the location of anchorages, stressing data, and arrangement of tendons.
14. Vent points shall be provided at all high points along tendon in accordance with
Standard Specifications Section6-02.3(26)E4.
15. Drain holes shall be provided at all low points along tendon in accordance with
Standard Specifications Section6-02.3(26) E4.
16. The concrete strength at the time of post-tensioning, ci shall not be less than
4,000 psi or the strength specified in the plans in accordance with Standard
Specifications Section6-02.3(26)G. Different concrete strength may be used if
specified in the contract plans.
17. Concrete stresses at the anchorage shall be checked in accordance with
Standard Specifications Section6-02.3(26)C for normal anchorage devices.
For special anchorage devices, if not covered in the Appendix 5-B2 for pre-
approved list of post-tensioning system, testing in accordance with Standard
Specifications Section6-02.3(26)D isrequired.
E. During Construction
1. If the measured elongation of each strand tendon is within 7percent of the
approved calculated elongation, the stressed tendon is acceptable.
2. If the measured elongation is greater than 7percent, force verification after
seating (lift-off force) is required. The lift-off force shall not be less than
99percent of the approved calculated force nor more than 70% pu As.
3. If the measured elongation is less than 7percent, the bridge construction office
will instruct the force verification.
4. One broken strand per tendon is usually acceptable. (Post-tensioning design
shall preferably allow one broken strand). If more than one strand per
tendon is broken, the group of tendon per web should be considered. If the
group of tendons in a web is under-stressed, then the adequacy of the entire
structure shall be investigated by the designer and consulted with the Bridge
Construction Office.
5. Failed anchorage is usually taken care of by the Bridge Construction Office.
6. Over or under elongation is usually taken care of by the Bridge
ConstructionOffice.
7. In case of low concrete strength the design engineer shall investigate the
adequacy of design with lower strength.
8. Other problems such as unbalanced and out of sequence post-tensioning,
strands surface condition, strand subjected to corrosion and exposure, delayed
post-tensioning due to mechanical problems, jack calibration, etc. should
be evaluated on a case-by-case basis and are usually taken care by Bridge
Construction Office.
Stresses due to changes in the structural system, in particular the effects of the
application of load to one structural system and its removal from a different structural
system, shall be accounted for. Redistribution of such stresses by creep shall be taken
into account and allowance shall be made for possible variations in the creep rate
andmagnitude.
Prestress losses in spliced prestressed concrete girder bridges shall be estimated using
the provisions of Section5.1.4. The effects of combined pretensioning and post-
tensioning and staged post-tensioning shall beconsidered. When required, the effects
of creep and shrinkage in spliced prestressed concrete girder bridges shall beestimated
using the provisions of Section 5.1.1.
5.9.2 WSDOT Criteria for Use of Spliced Girders
See Section 5.6.3.D.3 for criteria on providing an alternate spliced-girder design for
long span one-piece pre-tensioned girders.
5.9.3 Girder Segment Design
A. Design Considerations
Stress limits for temporary concrete stresses in girder segments before losses and
stress limits for concrete stresses in girder segments at the service limit state after
losses specified in Section 5.2.1.C shall apply at each stage of pretensioning or
post-tensioning with due consideration for all applicable loads during construction.
The concrete strength at the time the stage of prestressing isapplied shall be
substituted for ci in the stress limits.
The designer shall consider requirements for bracing of the girder segments once
they have been erected on the substructure. Any requirements for temporary
or permanent bracing during subsequent stages of construction, along with the
contractors responsibilities for designing and placing them, shall be specified in
the contract documents.
Effects of curved tendons shall be considered in accordance with Section 5.8.1.F.
B. Post-tensioning
Post-tensioning may be applied either before and/or after placement of bridge deck
concrete. Part of the posttensioning may be applied prior to placement of the deck
concrete, with the remainder placed after deck concrete placement. In the case
of multi-stage post-tensioning, ducts for tendons to betensioned before the deck
concrete shall not be located in the deck.
All post-tensioning tendons shall be fully grouted after stressing. Prior to grouting
of post-tensioning ducts, gross cross-section properties shall be reduced by
deducting the area of ducts and void areas around tendoncouplers.
Where some or all post-tensioning is applied after the bridge deck concrete is
placed, fewer post-tensioning tendons and a lower concrete strength in the closure
joint may be required. However, deck replacement, if necessary, is difficult to
accommodate with this construction sequence. Where all ofthe post-tensioning
is applied before the deck concrete is placed, a greater number ofposttensioning
tendons and a higher concrete strength in the closure joint may be required.
However, in this case, the deck can be replaced if necessary.
On the construction sequence sheet indicate that the side forms at the CIP closures
and intermediate pier diaphragms shall be removed to inspect for concrete
consolidation prior to post-tensioning andgrouting.
Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) may be used for CIP closures.
D. Joint Design
Stress limits for temporary concrete stresses in joints before losses specified in
Section 5.2.1.C shall apply at each stage of post-tensioning. The concrete strength
at the time the stage of post-tensioning isapplied shall be substituted for ci in the
stress limits.
Stress limits for concrete stresses in joints at the service limit state after losses
specified in Section 5.2.1.C shall apply. These stress limits shall also apply
for intermediate load stages, with the concrete strength at the time of loading
substituted for c in the stress limits. The compressive strength of the closure joint
concrete at a specified age shall be compatible with designstresslimitations.
PIER
FACE OF
DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM
REINFORCING
POST-TENSIONING
DUCT (TYP.)
INTERIOR WEB
2'-0"
CLOSURE
2" #5 2"
5 SPA. @
1" CLR. 4" =1'-8" EXTERIOR WEB
(TYP.)
PRECAST TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
POST-TENSIONING
DUCT (TYP.)
INTERIOR WEB
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM
2'-0"
CLOSURE
POST-TENSIONING
2" #5 2" DUCT (TYP.)
5 SPA. @
4" =1'-8" EXTERIOR WEB
PRECAST TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
45 FILLET (TYP.)
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
DIAPHRAGM
REINFORCING
2" CLR.
(TYP.) INTERIOR WEB
22. The curvature friction coefficient and wobble friction coefficient. The curvature
friction coefficient of = 0.15 for bridges less than 400feet, = 0.2 for bridges
between 400feet and 800feet, and = 0.25 for bridges longer than 800feet. The
wobble friction coefficient of k = 0.0002/ft is often used. These coefficients may
be revised by the post-tensioning supplier if approved by the design engineer and
conform to the Standard Specifications Section 6.02.3(26)G.
23. Post-tensioning stressing sequence.
24. Tendon stresses shall not exceed the following limits for low relaxation strands as
specified in Section5.8.3.D:
0.81pu at anchor ends immediately before seating.
0.70pu at anchor ends immediately after seating.
0.74pu at the end point of length influenced by anchor set.
25. Elongation calculations for each jacking operation shall be verified. If the
difference in tendon elongation exceeds 2percent, the elongation calculations
shall be separated for each tendon in accordance with Standard Specifications
Section6-02.3(26)A.
26. Vent points shall be provided at all high points along tendon.
27. Drain holes shall be provided at all low points along tendon.
28. The concrete strength at the time of post-tensioning, ci shall not be less than
4,000psi in accordance with Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(26)G.
Different concrete strength may be used if specified in the contract plans.
29. Concrete stresses at the anchorage shall be checked in accordance with Standard
Specifications Section6-02.3(26)C for bearing type anchorage. For other type of
anchorage assemblies, ifnot covered in the Appendix 5-B2 for pre-approved list of
post-tensioning system, testing in accordance with Standard Specifications Section
6-02.3(26)D isrequired.
30. Concrete stresses at CIP closures shall conform to allowable stresses of
Table5.2.1-1.
5.9.6 Post-tensioning Notes Spliced Prestressed Concrete Girders
1. The CIP concrete in the bridge deck shall be Class 4000D. The minimum
compressive strength of the CIP concrete at the wet joint at the time of post-
tensioning shall be xxx ksi.
2. The minimum prestressing load after seating and the minimum number of
prestressing strands for each girder shall be as shown in post-tensioning table.
3. The design is based on xxx inch diameter low relaxation strands with a jacking load
for each girder as shown in post-tensioning table, an anchor set of acurvature
friction coefficient, = 0.20 and a wobble friction coefficient,k = 0.0002/feet. The
actual anchor set used by the contractor shall be specified in the shop plans and
included in the transfer force calculations.
4. The design is based on the estimated prestress loss of post-tensioned prestressing
strands as shown inpost-tensioning table due to steel relaxation, elastic shortening,
creep and shrinkage of concrete.
5. The contractor shall submit the stressing sequence and elongation calculations to
the engineer for approval. All losses due to tendon vertical and horizontal curvature
must be included in elongation calculations. The stressing sequence shall meet the
following criteria:
A. The prestressing force shall be distributed with an approximately equal
amount in each web and shall be placed symmetrically about the centerline
ofthebridge.
B. No more than one-half of the prestressing force in any web may be stressed
before an equal force is stressed in the adjacent webs. At no time during
stressing operation will more than one-sixth of the total prestressing force
isapplied eccentrically about the centerline of bridge.
6. The maximum outside diameter of the duct shall be xxx inches. The area of the
duct shall be at least 2.5 times the net area of the prestressing steel in the duct.
7. All tendons shall be stressed from pier number xxx
Tub Girders
5.6-A9-1 Tub Girder Schedule and Notes
5.6-A9-2 Tub Girder Details 1 of 3
5.6-A9-3 Tub Girder Details 2 of 3
5.6-A9-4 Tub Girder Details 3 of 3
5.6-A9-5 Tub Girder End Diaphragm on Girder Details
5.6-A9-6 Tub Girder Raised Crossbeam Details
5.6-A9-7 Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Girder End Diaphragm on Girder Details
5.6-A9-8 Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Girder Raised Crossbeam Details
5.6-A9-9 Tub Girder Bearing Details
Stay-In-Place Deck Panel
5.6-A10-1 Stay-In-Place (SIP) Deck Panel Details
Post Tensioned Spliced Girders
5.9-A1-1 WF74PTG Spliced Girder Details 1 of 5
5.9-A1-2 WF74PTG Spliced Girder Details 2 of 5
5.9-A1-3 Spliced Girder Details 3 of 5
5.9-A1-4 WF74PTG Girder Details 4 of 5
5.9-A1-5 Spliced Girder Details 5 of 5
5.9-A2-1 WF83PTG Spliced Girder Details 1 of 5
5.9-A2-2 WF83PTG Spliced Girder Details 2 of 5
5.9-A2-4 WF83PTG Spliced Girder Details 4 of 5
5.9-A3-1 WF95PTG Spliced Girder Details 1 of 5
5.9-A3-2 WF95PTG Spliced Girder Details 2 of 5
5.9-A3-4 WF95PTG Spliced Girder Details 4 of 5
5.9-A4-1 Trapezoidal Tub Girder Bearing Details
5.9-A4-2 Tub Spliced Girder Details 1 of 5
5.9-A4-3 Tub Spliced Girder Details 2 of 5
5.9-A4-4 Tub Spliced Girder Details 3 of 5
5.9-A4-5 Tub Spliced Girder Details 4 of 5
5.9-A4-6 Tub Spliced Girder Details 5 of 5
5.9-A4-7 Tub Spliced Girder End Diaphragm on Girder Details
5.9-A4-8 Tub Spliced Girder Raised Crossbeam Details
5.9-A5-1 P.T. Trapezoidal Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Spliced Girder Details 1 of 5
5.9-A5-2 P.T. Trapezoidal Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Spliced Girder Details 2 of 5
5.9-A5-3 P.T. Trapezoidal Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Spliced Girder Details 3 of 5
5.9-A5-4 P.T. Trapezoidal Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Spliced Girder Details 4 of 5
5.9-A5-5 P.T. Trapezoidal Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Spliced Girder Details 5 of 5
5.9-A5-6 Trapezoidal Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Girder End Diaphragm on
GirderDetails
5.9-A5-7 Trapezoidal Tub S-I-P Deck Panel Girder Raised Crossbeam Details
5.11 Appendices
Appendix 5.1-A1 Standard Hooks
Appendix 5.1-A2 Minimum Reinforcement Clearance and Spacing for Beams
andColumns
Appendix 5.1-A3 Reinforcing Bar Properties
Appendix 5.1-A4 Tension Development Length of Deformed Bars
Appendix 5.1-A5 Compression Development Length and Minimum Lap Splice of
Grade 60 Bars
Appendix 5.1-A6 Tension Development Length of 90 and 180 Standard Hooks
Appendix 5.1-A7 Tension Lap Splice Lengths of Grade 60 Bars Class B
Appendix 5.1-A8 Prestressing Strand Properties and Development Length
Appendix 5.2-A1 Working Stress Design
Appendix 5.2-A2 Working Stress Design
Appendix 5.2-A3 Working Stress Design
Appendix 5.3-A1 Positive Moment Reinforcement
Appendix 5.3-A2 Negative Moment Reinforcement
Appendix 5.3-A3 Adjusted Negative Moment Case I (Design for M at Face of
Support)
Appendix 5.3-A4 Adjusted Negative Moment Case II (Design for M at 1/4 Point)
Appendix 5.3-A5 Cast-In-Place Deck Slab Design for Positive Moment Regions
c = 4.0 ksi
Appendix 5.3-A6 Cast-In-Place Deck Slab Design for Negative Moment Regions
c = 4.0 ksi
Appendix 5.3-A7 Slab Overhang Design-Interior Barrier Segment
Appendix 5.3-A8 Slab Overhang Design-End Barrier Segment
Appendix 5.6-A1-1 Span Capability of W Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-2 Span Capability of WF Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-3 Span Capability of Deck Bulb Tee Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-4 Span Capability of WF Thin Deck Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-5 Span Capability of WF Deck Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-6 Span Capability of Trapezoidal Tub Girders without Top Flange
Appendix 5.6-A1-7 Span Capability of Trapezoidal Tub Girders with Top Flange
Appendix 5.6-A1-8 Span Capability of Post-tensioned Spliced I-Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-9 Span Capability of Post-tensioned Spliced Tub Girders
Notes:
1 . Values based on use of normal weight concrete .
2 . Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement .
3 . Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement .
4 . The minimum tension development length = 12 .
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
Notes:
1 . Values based on use of normal weight concrete .
2 . Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement .
3 . Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement .
4 . The minimum tension development length = 12 .
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
Notes:
1 . Values based on use of normal weight concrete .
2 . Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement .
3 . Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement .
4 . The minimum tension development length = 12 .
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
6 . Where the splice is confined by spirals, the compression lap splice may be multiplied by 0 .75 .
7 . The minimum compression lap splice length is 24 inches .
Notes:
1 . Values based on use of normal weight concrete .
2 . Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement .
3 . The basic development length lhb shall be multiplied by 1 .2 for epoxy coated reinforcement .
4 . The basic development length lhb may be reduced by the ratio of required area to provided area where
excess bar area is provided .
5 . The basic development length lhb may be multiplied by 0 .8 for #11 and smaller bars for hooks with side
cover normal to plane of the hook not less than 2 .5 inches, and for 90 degree hook with cover on the bar
extension beyond hook not less than 2 .0 inches .
6 . The basic development length lhb may be multiplied by 0 .8 for 90 degree hooks of #11 and smaller bars that
are either enclosed within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not greater than
3db along the development length, ldh, of the hook; or enclosed within ties or stirrups parallel to the bar being
developed spaced not greater than 3db along the length of the tail extension of the hook plus bend, and in both
cases the first tie or stirrup enclosing the bent portion of the hook is within 2db of the outside of the bend .
7 . The basic development length lhb may be multiplied by 0 .8 for 180 degree hooks of #11 and smaller bars
that are enclosed within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not greater than 3db
along the development length, ldh, of the hook, and the first tie or stirrup enclosing the bent portion of the hook
is within 2db of the outside of the bend .
8 . Minimum tension development length is the larger of 8db and 6 inches .
Notes:
1 . Values based on use of normal weight concrete .
2 . Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement .
3 . Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement .
4 . The minimum tension lap splice length = 24 .
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
6 . Class A tension lap splices may be used where the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that
required by analysis over the entire length of the lap splice and one-half or less of the total reinforcement is
spliced within the required lap splice length . The Class A modification factor is 0 .77 .
Class B Tension Lap Splice Length of Epoxy Coated Deformed Bars (in)
(cover less than 3db or clear spacing between bars less than 6db)
cf = 1.5
Bar c rc = 0.4 rc = 0.6 rc = 0.8 rc = 1.0
(#) (ksi) Top Bars Others Top Bars Others Top Bars Others Top Bars Others
4 .0 24 .00 24 .00 35 .80 31 .59 47 .74 42 .12 59 .67 52 .65
3 5 .0 24 .00 24 .00 32 .02 28 .25 42 .70 37 .67 53 .37 47 .09
6 .0 24 .00 24 .00 29 .23 25 .79 38 .98 34 .39 48 .72 42 .99
4 .0 31 .82 28 .08 47 .74 42 .12 63 .65 56 .16 79 .56 70 .20
4 5 .0 28 .46 25 .12 42 .70 37 .67 56 .93 50 .23 71 .16 62 .79
6 .0 25 .98 24 .00 38 .98 34 .39 51 .97 45 .85 64 .96 57 .32
4 .0 39 .78 35 .10 59 .67 52 .65 79 .56 70 .20 99 .45 87 .75
5 5 .0 35 .58 31 .39 53 .37 47 .09 71 .16 62 .79 88 .95 78 .49
6 .0 32 .48 28 .66 48 .72 42 .99 64 .96 57 .32 81 .20 71 .65
4 .0 47 .74 42 .12 71 .60 63 .18 95 .47 84 .24 119 .34 105 .30
6 5 .0 42 .70 37 .67 64 .04 56 .51 85 .39 75 .35 106 .74 94 .18
6 .0 38 .98 34 .39 58 .46 51 .59 77 .95 68 .78 97 .44 85 .98
4 .0 55 .69 49 .14 83 .54 73 .71 111 .38 98 .28 139 .23 122 .85
7 5 .0 49 .81 43 .95 74 .72 65 .93 99 .62 87 .90 124 .53 109 .88
6 .0 45 .47 40 .12 68 .21 60 .18 90 .94 80 .25 113 .68 100 .31
4 .0 63 .65 56 .16 95 .47 84 .24 127 .30 112 .32 159 .12 140 .40
8 5 .0 56 .93 50 .23 85 .39 75 .35 113 .86 100 .46 142 .32 125 .58
6 .0 51 .97 45 .85 77 .95 68 .78 103 .94 91 .71 129 .92 114 .64
4 .0 71 .79 63 .35 107 .69 95 .02 143 .59 126 .70 179 .49 158 .37
9 5 .0 64 .22 56 .66 96 .32 84 .99 128 .43 113 .32 160 .54 141 .65
6 .0 58 .62 51 .72 87 .93 77 .59 117 .24 103 .45 146 .55 129 .31
4 .0 80 .83 71 .32 121 .25 106 .98 161 .67 142 .65 202 .08 178 .31
10 5 .0 72 .30 63 .79 108 .45 95 .69 144 .60 127 .59 180 .75 159 .48
6 .0 66 .00 58 .24 99 .00 87 .35 132 .00 116 .47 165 .00 145 .59
4 .0 89 .74 79 .19 134 .62 118 .78 179 .49 158 .37 224 .36 197 .96
11 5 .0 80 .27 70 .83 120 .40 106 .24 160 .54 141 .65 200 .67 177 .06
6 .0 73 .28 64 .65 109 .91 96 .98 146 .55 129 .31 183 .19 161 .64
14 Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed
18 Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed
Notes:
1 . Values based on use of normal weight concrete .
2 . Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement .
3 . Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement .
4 . The minimum tension lap splice length = 24 .
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
6 . Class A tension lap splices may be used where the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that
required by analysis over the entire length of the lap splice and one-half or less of the total reinforcement is
spliced within the required lap splice length . The Class A modification factor is 0 .77 .
Class B Tension Lap Splice Length of Epoxy Coated Deformed Bars (in)
(cover not less than 3db and clear spacing between bars not less than 6db)
cf = 1.2
Bar c rc = 0.4 rc = 0.6 rc = 0.8 rc = 1.0
(#) (ksi) Top Bars Others Top Bars Others Top Bars Others Top Bars Others
4 .0 24 .00 24 .00 32 .85 25 .27 43 .80 33 .70 54 .76 42 .12
3 5 .0 24 .00 24 .00 29 .39 24 .00 39 .18 30 .14 48 .98 37 .67
6 .0 24 .00 24 .00 26 .82 24 .00 35 .77 27 .51 44 .71 34 .39
4 .0 29 .20 24 .00 43 .80 33 .70 58 .41 44 .93 73 .01 56 .16
4 5 .0 26 .12 24 .00 39 .18 30 .14 52 .24 40 .18 65 .30 50 .23
6 .0 24 .00 24 .00 35 .77 27 .51 47 .69 36 .68 59 .61 45 .85
4 .0 36 .50 28 .08 54 .76 42 .12 73 .01 56 .16 91 .26 70 .20
5 5 .0 32 .65 25 .12 48 .98 37 .67 65 .30 50 .23 81 .63 62 .79
6 .0 29 .81 24 .00 44 .71 34 .39 59 .61 45 .85 74 .51 57 .32
4 .0 43 .80 33 .70 65 .71 50 .54 87 .61 67 .39 109 .51 84 .24
6 5 .0 39 .18 30 .14 58 .77 45 .21 78 .36 60 .28 97 .95 75 .35
6 .0 35 .77 27 .51 53 .65 41 .27 71 .53 55 .03 89 .42 68 .78
4 .0 51 .11 39 .31 76 .66 58 .97 102 .21 78 .62 127 .76 98 .28
7 5 .0 45 .71 35 .16 68 .57 52 .74 91 .42 70 .32 114 .28 87 .90
6 .0 41 .73 32 .10 62 .59 48 .15 83 .46 64 .20 104 .32 80 .25
4 .0 58 .41 44 .93 87 .61 67 .39 116 .81 89 .86 146 .02 112 .32
8 5 .0 52 .24 40 .18 78 .36 60 .28 104 .48 80 .37 130 .60 100 .46
6 .0 47 .69 36 .68 71 .53 55 .03 95 .38 73 .37 119 .22 91 .71
4 .0 65 .88 50 .68 98 .82 76 .02 131 .76 101 .36 164 .71 126 .70
9 5 .0 58 .93 45 .33 88 .39 67 .99 117 .85 90 .66 147 .32 113 .32
6 .0 53 .79 41 .38 80 .69 62 .07 107 .59 82 .76 134 .48 103 .45
4 .0 74 .18 57 .06 111 .26 85 .59 148 .35 114 .12 185 .44 142 .65
10 5 .0 66 .35 51 .03 99 .52 76 .55 132 .69 102 .07 165 .86 127 .59
6 .0 60 .56 46 .59 90 .85 69 .88 121 .13 93 .18 151 .41 116 .47
4 .0 82 .35 63 .35 123 .53 95 .02 164 .71 126 .70 205 .88 158 .37
11 5 .0 73 .66 56 .66 110 .49 84 .99 147 .32 113 .32 184 .15 141 .65
6 .0 67 .24 51 .72 100 .86 77 .59 134 .48 103 .45 168 .10 129 .31
14 Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed
18 Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed
Notes:
1 . Values based on use of normal weight concrete .
2 . Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement .
3 . Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement .
4 . The minimum tension lap splice length = 24 .
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
6 . Class A tension lap splices may be used where the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that
required by analysis over the entire length of the lap splice and one-half or less of the total reinforcement is
spliced within the required lap splice length . The Class A modification factor is 0 .77 .
Page 5-188
Bridge Design Manual M 23-50 WSDOT Bridge DesignPage
Manual M 23-50.16
5.2-A3-1
June 2006 June 2016
Appendix 5.3-A1 Positive Moment Reinforcement
June 2016
Required Bar Spacing for Girder Spacings and Slab Thicknesses for the Positive Moment Region
14
7.5" Slab
13 8.0" Slab
8.5" Slab
Appendix 5.3-A5
12
11
10 #5 Bars
6
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0
Girder Spacing in Feet
Page 1
Page 5-193
Positive Moment Regions c = 4.0 ksi
Cast-In-Place Deck Slab Design for
Slab Design Charts
Page 5-194
Required Bar Spacing for Girder Spacings and Slab Thicknesses for the Negative Moment Region
14
7.5" Slab
13
8.0" Slab
Maximum Bar Spacing = 12"
8.5" Slab
Appendix 5.3-A6
12 9.0" Slab
#6 Bars
11
10
9 #5 Bars
6
Note: Control of cracking by distribution of Reinforcement is not checked.
5
4
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0
Girder Spacing in Feet
Page 1
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
Negative Moment Regions c = 4.0 ksi
Cast-In-Place Deck Slab Design for
Slab Overhang Design-
Appendix 5.3-A7 Interior Barrier Segment
Slab Overhang Required Reinforcement for Vehicle Impact -
Interior Barrier Segment - LRFD A13.4.1 Design Case 1
2.8
32in F Shape &
2.6 34in Single Slope
42in F Shape &
2.4 42in Single Slope
2.2
Top Mat Steel As (in2/ft)
2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
3.5 3.75 4 4.25 4.5 4.75 5 5.25 5.5 5.75 6 6.25 6.5
d (in)
Notes:
1. Top and bottom mats each carry one-half the tension impact load.
2. Only Design Case 1 of LRFD A13.4.1 is considered. Designer must also check Design Cases 2 and3.
3. Section considered is a vertical section through the slab overhang at the toe of the barrier.
2.4
2.2
2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
3.5 3.75 4 4.25 4.5 4.75 5 5.25 5.5 5.75 6 6.25 6.5
d (in)
Notes:
1. Top and bottom mats each carry one-half the tension impact load.
2. Only Design Case 1 of LRFD A13.4.1 is considered. Designer must also check Design Cases 2 and3.
3. Section considered is a vertical section through the slab overhang at the toe of the barrier.
Design
Design Parameters:
Parameters:
- PGSuper
PGSuper Version
version 2.2.3.02 .2 .3 .0
- Girder cif'ci = 7 .5 ksi,
Girder = 7.5 ksi, c = f'c
9.0 =
ksi9 .0 ksi
- Slab
Slabf'c
c ==4.04 .0
ksi ksi .
- No vertical orvertical
No horizontal or horizontal
curve curve
- 2percent
2% roadway roadway crown
crownslope
slope
- Standard WSDOT "F" shape
Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier barrier
- 6percent
6% roadway roadway superelevation
superelevation for forshipping
shipping check
check
- Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- Includes
Includes 2 2" future
future HMAHMA overlayoverlay withofdensity
with density 140 pcf of 140 pcf
Design Parameters:
- PGSuper Version 2 .2 .3 .0
- Girder f'ci = 7 .5 ksi, f'c = 9 .0 ksi
- Slab f'c = 4 .0 ksi .
- No vertical or horizontal curve
- 2% roadway crown slope
- Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
- 6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
- Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- Includes 2" future HMA overlay with density of 140 pcf
Design Parameters:
PGSuper version 2.2.3.0
Girder ci = 7.5 ksi, c = 9 .0 ksi
Slab c = 4 .0 ksi
No horizontal or vertical curve
2% roadway crown slope
Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
Includes 2 future HMA overlay with density of 140 pcf
WSDOT
Page 5-200 Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.06 Page 5.6-A1-4-1
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
July 2011 June 2016
Span Capability of
Appendix 5.6-A1-4
Appendix 5.6-A1-4: Span CapabilityWF
of WFThin Deck
Thin Deck GirdersGirders
Design Parameters:
- PGSuper Version 2.8.0
- Girder f'ci = 7.5 ksi, f'c = 9.0 ksi
- 1/2 D40 C
- Shipping weight < 270 kip
- Slab f'c = 4.0 ksi.
- No vertical or horizontal curve
- 2% roadway crown slope
- Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
- 6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
- Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- Includes 2" future HMA overlay with density of 140 pcf
Design Parameters:
- PGSuper Version 2.8.0
- Girder f'ci = 7.5 ksi, f'c = 9.0 ksi
- 1/2 D40 C
- Shipping weight < 270 kip
- No vertical or horizontal curve
- 2% roadway crown slope
- Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
- 6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
- Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- 1 concrete overlay
Design Parameters:
- PGSuper Version 2 .2 .3 .0
- Girder f'ci = 7 .5 ksi, f'c = 9 .0 ksi
- Slab f'c = 4 .0 ksi .
- No vertical or horizontal curve
- 2% roadway crown slope
- Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
- 6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
- Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- Includes 2" future HMA overlay with density of 140 pcf
Design
Design Parameters:
Parameters:
- PGSuper
PGSuper Version
version 2 .2 .3 .0
2.2.3.0
- Girder
Girder f'ci = 7 .5 ksi, f'c = 9 .0 ksi
ci = 7.5 ksi, c = 9.0 ksi
- CIP
CIPslab
Slabc f'c = ksi
= 4.0 4 .0 ksi .
- No
Nohorizontal
vertical or orvertical
horizontal
curve curve
- 2percent
2% roadway roadway crown
crownslope
slope
- Standard
Standard WSDOT "F" shapeshape
WSDOT "F" barrier barrier
- 6percent
6% roadway roadway superelevation
superelevation forforshipping
shipping check
check
- Standard
Standard WSDOT Abutment
WSDOT Abutment End Type A End Type A
- Includes
Includes 2 2" future
future HMAHMAoverlayoverlay withofdensity
with density 140 pcf of 140 pcf
- Deck
Deckincludes
includes a 3.5 SIP panel with a 5 CIP slab with a 5" CIP Slab
a 3 .5" Stay-In-Place Panel
Span Capability of
Span Capability of
Appendix 5.6-A1-12 Post-Tensioned Spliced I-Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-8 Post-tensioned Spliced I-Girders
f'ci = 6.0 ksi, f'c = 9 ksi Strand diameter = 0.6" Grade 270 ksi low relaxation
Cast-in- PT Ducts - Tendon
Girder Span place Strands/Duct Jacking Tendson
Force after E1 E3
Girder Type Spacing Length Closures (Duct#4 @ Bottom) Force** Loss*
Seating** (in) (in)
(ft) (ft) (kips) (kips)
Length (ft) 1 2 3 4 (kips)
6 170 2 - 22 22 22 2970 2680 730 36.4 12.7
WF74PTG 8 155 2 - 22 22 22 2970 2670 740 36.4 12.7
Post-tensioned
10 140 2 - 22 22 22 2970 2650 760 36.4 12.7
Before Slab
Casting 12 120 2 - 22 22 22 2970 2630 780 36.4 12.7
14 100 2 - 22 22 22 2970 2590 815 36.4 12.7
6 195 2 - 22 22 22 2960 2690 680 36.4 12.7
WF74PTG 8 185 2 - 22 22 22 2960 2710 680 36.4 12.7
Post-tensioned
10 175 2 - 22 22 22 2960 2690 690 36.4 12.7
After Slab
Casting 12 165 2 - 22 22 22 2990 2720 700 36.4 12.7
14 155 2 - 22 22 22 3020 2750 710 36.4 12.7
6 185 2 11 22 22 22 3500 3160 850 33.8 14.5
WF83PTG 8 165 2 - 22 22 22 2985 2710 720 36.4 12.7
Post-tensioned
10 155 2 - 22 22 22 2985 2700 730 36.4 12.7
Before Slab
Casting 12 135 2 - 22 22 22 2985 2680 740 36.4 12.7
14 115 2 - 22 22 22 2985 2620 810 33.8 12.7
6 *205 2 11 22 22 22 3500 3200 810 33.8 14.5
WF83PTG 8 200 2 11 22 22 22 3500 3210 800 37.6 14.5
Post-tensioned
10 195 2 22 22 22 22 4000 3640 940 37.6 15.7
After Slab
Casting 12 185 2 22 22 22 22 4000 3640 940 37.6 15.7
14 175 2 22 22 22 22 4000 3640 940 37.6 15.7
6 200 2 11 22 22 22 3500 3150 860 46.1 14.5
WF95PTG 8 185 2 11 22 22 22 3500 3110 980 46.1 14.5
Post-tensioned
10 175 2 11 22 22 22 3500 3130 880 46.1 14.5
Before Slab
Casting 12 155 2 8 22 22 22 3360 2990 860 44.9 14.1
14 135 2 - 22 22 22 3000 2630 810 59.0 12.7
6 235 2 11 22 22 22 3500 3210 800 46.1 14.5
WF95PTG 8 230 2 22 22 22 22 4000 3650 930 37.6 15.7
Post-tensioned
10 215 2 22 22 22 22 4000 3640 940 37.6 15.7
After Slab
Casting 12 205 2 22 22 22 22 4000 3640 950 37.6 15.7
14 190 2 22 22 22 22 4000 3630 960 37.6 15.7
Design Parameters:
PGSplice V. 0.3
WSDOT BDM LRFD design criteria
No vertical or horizontal curve
2.0percent roadway crown slope
Interior girder with barrier load (6 girder bridge)
Only flexural service and strength checked; lifting and hauling checks not necessarily satisfed
Simple girder span lengths are CL bearing to CL bearing
Slab c = 4.0 ksi
Standard WSDOT F shape barrier
Under normal exposure condition and 75percent relative humidity
Spans reported in 5-0 increments
Designs based on normally reinforced sections (c/de < 0.42 LRFD 5.7.3.3)
Designs based on 22 strands/duct
For 6-10 girder spacing -- 7.5 slab
For 12 girder spacing -- 8.0 slab
For 14 girder spacing -- 8.75 slab
Girders post-tensioned before slab pour are assumed to be post-tensioned adjacent to structure.
All spec checks at wet joints have been ignored. It isassumed that the designer can modify the wet joints to reach the
required span as shown in the table. These modifcations are outside the scope of this table.
Appendix
End Segments Middle Segment Spliced Post-tensioned Girder
Girder Span
Girder PT Ducts ~ Jacking Tendon Force
June 2016
Spacing Length Tendon E1 E3
Type No. of Straight No. of Straight Strands/Duct Force* after Seating*
(ft) (ft) Loss* (kips) (in) (in)
Strands Strands (Duct #4 @ Bottom) (kips) (kips)
1 2 3 4
U54PTG4
14 150 4 14 - 2 22 22 4048 3708 760 31.5 10.1
9 135 4 8 - - 12 22 2992 2764 578 19.7 9.0
U54PTG5
15 150 4 14 - 6 22 22 4400 4032 826 29.8 10.9
10 135 4 6 - - 18 22 3520 3200 684 18.3 9.5
U54PTG6
Appendix 5.6-A1-9
Page 5.6-A1-13-1
Concrete Structures
Girders
Post-
Page 5-209
Spliced Tub Girders
Post-tensioned
Concrete Structures Chapter 5
Design Parameters:
PGSplice V. 0.3
WSDOT BDM LRFD design criteria
No vertical or horizontal curve
2.0percent roadway crown slope
Interior girder with barrier load (6 girder bridge)
Only exural service and strength checked; lifting and hauling checks not necessarily satised
Simple girder span lengths are CL bearing to CL bearing
Standard WSDOT F shape barrier
Under normal exposure condition and 75percent humidity
Spans reported in 5-0 increments
A dimension = deck thickness + 2
Closure pour for spliced girders is 2, ci = 6.0 ksi, c = 9 ksi
Girder ci = 6.0 ksi, c = 9.0 ksi, slab c = 4.0 ksi
Girders are spliced in-place after slab is cast
Prestressing and post-tensioning steel is 0.6 diameter, Grade 270
End segments are 25percent of total length; center segment is 50percent of total length
Range of applicability requirements in LRFD ignored; span lengths may be longer than allowed by LRFD
Designs are based on a 22 diameter strand limit per 4 duct for high pressure grout
All spec checks at wet joints have been ignored. It is assumed that the designer can modify the wet joints to reach the
required span as shown in the table. These modications are outside the scope of this table.
Introduction
The slab haunch is the distance between the top of a girder and the bottom of
the roadway slab. Thehaunch varies in depth along the length of the girder
accommodating the girder camber and geometric effects of the roadway surface
including super elevations, vertical curves and horizontal curves.
The basic concept in determining the required A dimension is to provide a haunch
over the girder such that the top of the girder is not less than the fillet depth (typically
) below the bottom of the slab at the center of the span. This provides that the actual
girder camber could exceed the calculated value by 1 before the top of the girder
would interfere with the bottom mat of slab reinforcement.
It is desirable to have points of horizontal and vertical curvature and super elevation
transitions off the bridge structure as this greatly simplifies the geometric requirements
on the slab haunch. However, as new bridges are squeezed into the existing
infrastructure it is becoming more common to have geometric transitions on the
bridgestructure.
Each geometric effect is considered independently of the others. The total geometric
effect is the algebraic sum of each individual effect.
Fillet Effect
The distance between the top of the girder and the top of the roadway surface, must be
at least the thickness of the roadway slab plus the fillet depth.
Profile Effect
Profile Effect
The
Theprofile
profileeffect
effectaccounts
accountsforforchanges
changesininthe
theroadway
roadwayprofile
profilealong
alongthe
thelength
lengthofofthe
girder. Profile
the girder. changes
Profile include
changes gradegrade
include changes, vertical
changes, curvecurve
vertical effects, and offset
effects, deviations
and offset
between the centerline of girder and the alignment caused by flared girders and/or
deviations between the centerline of girder and the alignment caused by flared girders
curvature in the alignment.
and/or curvature in the alignment.
Whenallallofofthe
When thegirders
girdersinina aspan
spanare
areparallel
paralleland
andthe
thespan
spanisiscontained
containedentirely
entirelywithin
withinthe
the limits
limits of a vertical
of a vertical and/or
and/or horizontal
horizontal curve,
curve, the profile
the profile effecteffect is simply
is simply the sum
the sum of theof
the Vertical Curve Effect and the Horizontal
Vertical Curve Effect and the Horizontal Curve Effect. Curve Effect.
5-B1.1 (5-B1.1)
5-B1.1
The horizontal curve effect is, assuming a constant super elevation rate along the
length of the span,
5-B1.2
5-B1.2 (5-B1.2)
Where:
S = The length of curve infeet
5-B1.3
R = The radius of the curve infeet
5-B1.3
m = The crown slope
The horizontal curve effect is in inches.
5-B1.4
5-B1.4
5-B1.5
5-B1.5 4
4
5-B1.6
5-B1.6
2
5-B1.7 2
5-B1.7
Page 5-212 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
5-B1.8
2 2 2 4
1.5S 2 m
of the span, horizontal curve effect =where S is the length of curve in feet, R is the
Chapter 5
R Concrete Structures
radius of the curve in feet, and m is the crown slope. The horizontal curve effect is in
inches.
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
13
2
31
2
3
24
3
42
3
4
35
4 4
53 4 (5-B1.3)
4
5
4
46
(5-B1.4)
5
64
4
5
6
(5-B1.5)
4
2
57
6 4
2
(5-B1.6)
75
6 42
7 (5-B1.7)
68 2
7 2 2 2 4
86 (5-B1.8)
2
2
22 4
2
7
8
2 4
2 2
79 2 (5-B1.9)
8 2
97 2 2 2 2 4
2
8
2 2
9
2 4
8
10
9 2 2 2
00
2 4
10
8
2 2 00
2 4
9
10
2
00
90a
2
10
0a WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
00
2
Page 5-213
9
10 June 2016
0a
00
2 2 2 4
5-B1.6 tan
2H
Concrete Structures
tan5-B1.9
2 Chapter 5
S 2
2
5-B1.9
5-B1.7
2 2
2 2 2 S 4 S S S S
5-B1.7
H =verticaltan curve
effect= is =
The
2
5-B1.10
2 2 4 R 8 R
S2 1.5S2 00
2 m12
= m (
ft = inches ) (5-B1.10)
5-B1.10 in
5-B1.8
curve effect
horizontal
R 2 00
8R 2 2 4
5-B1.8
Where: 2 2 2 4
G = The algebraic difference inprofile1tangent
5-B1.10a
.5GL2g grades (%)
= The girder length infeet
The vertical
curve effect is vertical curve
effect
= where G is the algebraic difference
5-B1.10a
L = 2100
5-B1.9
L
The vertical
curve
length infeet
00
5-B1.9
in profile tangent
grades
(G = g2-
g1) (%), Lgis
2 the girder length
(feet), and L is the
for sag curves and negative for
The vertical
vertical curve curve
length effect is The
(feet). in inches
vertical and is positive
curve effect is in inches and
5-B1.10b is positive for sag
crown curves.
curves and negative for crown curves.
5-B1.10b
5-B1.10
5-B1.10
00
00 00
5-B1.11
00 2
5-B1.11
5-B1.10a
2
5-B1.10a
5-B1.12 2 2
00 40,000 2 400 00
2
2
5-B1.12
5-B1.10b 40,000 2 400 00
5-B1.10b 2
00
2K=100G
5-B1.11
2 00
5-B1.11 40,000 2
2 L 400 00 2 (5-B1.11)
2 2 2 2
Lg G Lg 1.5GL g
vertical curve effect = K 12 inft = 12 =
40,000 2 L 400 L
100
5-B1.12 2 2 (5-B1.12)
If one
or more of the 40,000
following
roadway 2
geometry
transitions
400
occur00
along
the span, then a
2 2
5-B1.12
Ifmore
one detailed
or moremethod 40,000
of computation
of the following 2 400
is required:
roadway geometry 00along the span,
transitions occur
thena more change in the super
detailed methodelevation rate
of computation is required:
gradeinbreak
Change the super elevation rate
point of horizontal curvature
Grade break
point of vertical curvature
Point
flared of horizontal
girders curvature
Point of vertical curvature
Flared girders
The exact value of the profile effect may be determined by solving a complex
optimization problem.
The exact value of theHowever it is much
profile effect easier
may be and sufficiently
determined accurate
by solving to use a
a complex
numerical approach.
optimization problem. However it is much easier and sufficiently accurate to use a
numerical approach.
The figure below, while highly exaggerated, illustrates that the profile effect is the
The figure
distance below,must
the girder whilebehighly
placedexaggerated, illustrates
below the profile gradethat
so the
thatprofile effectignoring
the girder, is the all
distance the girder must be placed below the profile grade so that the girder,
other geometric effects, just touches the lowest profile point between the bearings. ignoring
all other geometric effects, just touches the lowest profile point between the bearings.
In the case of a crown curve the haunch depth may reduced. In the case of a sag curve
Inthe
thehaunch
case ofmust
a crown curve the at
be thickened haunch depth
the ends maygirder.
of the reduced. In the case of a sag curve the
haunch must be thickened at the ends of the girder.
To compute the profile effect:
To1. compute
Create the a chord profile
lineeffect:
parallel to the top of the girder (ignoring camber) connecting
1.theCreate
centerlines a chord ofline parallel
bearing. Thetoequation
the top of ofthe
thisgirder
line is(ignoring camber) connecting
the centerlines of bearing. The equation of this line is
, ,
5-B1.13 , ya
yc (xi ) = ya ( xs , z s ) + ( xi xs )
( xe,ze) ya ( xs, z s) (5-B1.13)
xe xs
Where:
where
xi = Station where the elevation of the chord line is being computed
5-B1.14 xs xi == Station
Stationatwhere
the start theofelevation
the girderof the chord line is being computed
xe = Station at the end
xs = Station at the start of the of the girder
girder
zs = Normal offset from alignment to centerline of the girder at the start
xe = Station at the end of the girder
of the girder atstationxs
ze zs == Normal
Normaloffset
offset fromfrom thealignment
alignment to to the
centerline
of ofthe
centerline
thegirder
girderatatthe
5-B1.15 start
of the
the end of the girder atstation xse
girder at station
x
2
ya(xs, zzse) == Elevation
Normal offset
of the fromroadway theprofile
alignment to the
at station xs centerline
and offset zof s
the girder
ya(xe, ze) = Elevation at the endofof thethe girder
roadway
at station
profile x
at station
e xe and offset ze
yyca(x(xi) s,zs) == Elevation
Elevation
of ofthe , chord
the
roadway at
line profile
,
station xi station xs and offset zs
at
5-B1.16 ,
5-B1.16a
5-B1.17
5-B1.16c ,
5-B1.18
5-B1.16d ,
If there
there is
is aa change
changeininsuper
superelevation
elevationrate
rateand/or
and/orthe
theY-axis
Y-axisofofthe
thegirder
girderis isnot
not plumb,
plumb,
then once
then once again
againaamore
morecomplex
complexcomputation
computationisisrequired.
required.
5-B1.19
5-B1.17
5-B1.21
5-B1.18
5-B1.ADimWkSht1
5-B1.19
Page
5-B1.ADimWkSht2 5-216 WSDOT
Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
5-B1.21
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
, ,
,
, ,
,
, , , ,
,
5-B1.13 ,
,
, ,
,
,
,
5-B1.13
, ,
,
5-B1.14
2
,
ToTo compute
compute the
the girder
girder
5-B1.13 , effect
orientation
orientation effect at each 10th point along
the
the girder,
, when
the
2 at each along girder:
girder 1. isDetermine
not
,plumb:
the cross , slope,
m, of the roadway surface at station xi. If there is a
,
5-B1.14
girder cross slope is taken
,
5-B1.15
1. Determinecrown point
over
the cross slope,
the the
m, of the roadway surface at station
2
as xi. If there is a
( ) ( )
2
, y x,z, left y x , z right
crown point
(x over the girder the cross slope is taken as
i ) =
, ,
m i,z
a i i a i i
5-B1.14
right
left 2
, 5-B1.15 z i z i
,
, ,
, where
5-B1.16 ,
(5-B1.16)
, ,
, Where: x is being
i = The station where the cross slope computed
5-B1.15
of
xi z i = = Normal
The offset
station from
where the
the alignment
cross slope to
is the
being centerline
computed , girder
the ,
5-B1.16 ,
5-B1.16a zi = atNormal
the endoffset
ofthefrom the alignment
girder at station toxi the centerline of the girder
at zi left
= Offset thefrom
end of thethealignment
girder at station
to the xtop
i left edge of the , ,
girder
,
right = = Offset 5-B1.16 Offset from the alignment to the top left edge of the girder
zi from the alignment to the top right edge of the girder
left left
ya
(xi ,,z i) 5-B1.16a
= = Roadway surface
Offset from
elevation at station xi and
the alignment to the top right
normal offset
edge of the girder iright
z
5-B1.16b right
ya(xi,zi ) = Roadway surface elevation at station xi and normal offset zi
, 5-B1.16a
= Roadway surface elevation at station xi and normal offset
5-B1.16b
,
, = Roadway surface elevation at station xi and normal offset
5-B1.16c ,
,
, 5-B1.16b
WSDOT Bridge Design ManualM 23-50.16
Page 5-217
,
5-B1.16c
5-B1.16d June 2016
,
,
5-B1.16b
5-B1.16c ,
Concrete Structures Chapter 5
5-B1.16d ,
5-B1.16c
2. Determine the girder ,
orientation station
5-B1.16d ,effect
at
5-B1.17
(5-B1.17)
5-B1.16d ,
5-B1.17
A Dimension
5-B1.18
5-B1.17 The A dimension
is the sum
of all
these
effects.
5-B1.18 (5-B1.18)
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
5-B1.ADimWkSht1
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
Limitations
These computations are for a single girder line. The required haunch should be
determined for each girder line in the structure. Use the greatest A dimension.
These computations are also limited to a single span. A different haunch may be
needed for each span or each pier. For example, if there is a long span adjacent to a
short span, the long span may have considerably more camber and will require a larger
haunch. There is no need to have the shorter spans carry all the extra concrete needed
to match the longer span haunch requirements. With the WF series girders, the volume
of concrete in the haunches can add up quickly. The shorter span could have a different
haunch at each end as illustrated below.
Stirrup lengths are described as a function of A on the standard girder sheets. For
example, the G1 and G2 bars of a WF74G girder are 6-5+ A in length. For this
reason, the stirrups are always long enough at the ends of the girders. Problems occur
when the haunch depth increases along the length of the girder to accommodate crown
vertical curves and super elevation transitions.
If the haunch depth along the girder exceeds A by more than 2 inches, an adjustment
must be made. The haunch depth at any section can be compute
as A profile effect excess camber .
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 5-219
June 2016
Concrete Structures , Chapter 5
5-B1.16d
,
,
.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
= ______ in
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
0 for U-beams inclined parallel to the slab
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht6 Girder Orientation Effect 0for
U-beams inclined parallel to the slab
0for slab
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
mWkSht6 Girder
must be U-beams
plumb. parallel
inclined to the
.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
0for U-beams
0 for U-beamsinclined parallel
inclined to the
parallel to slabslab
the
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
0 for U-beams inclined parallel to the slab
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
0
for U-beams
inclined
parallel to2the slab
2
mWkSht7 = ______ in
2
A Dimension
2
.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
2 2
5-B1.ADimWkSht8 = ______ in
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
mWkSht8
2
.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
Round
to nearest
= ______ in
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
Minimum A Dimension,
= ______ in
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
mWkSht9
A
Dimension
= ______
in
.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.Example1Page 5-220 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
xample1 June 2016
1.5
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
1.5
100
5-B1.ADimWkSht4
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
100
Chapter 5
100
Concrete
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
Structures
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
0 for
U-beams
inclined parallel to the slab
Example 5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
0 for U-beams
inclined parallel
to the
slab
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
for U-beams= inclined
0 Thickness 0 for U-beams inclined parallel to the slab
parallel to the slab
Slab: 7.5, Fillet = 0.75
5-B1.ADimWkSht6 0 for U-beams inclined parallel to the slab
WF74G
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht7 0 Girder:
for U-beams = 49
Wtopinclined
parallel to the slab
to the slab
0 for U-beams
2 parallel
inclined
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
Span Length = 144.4 ft
2
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
2
Crown Slope = 0.04ft/ft 2
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
2
Camber:
D = 7.55, C =
2.57
2
5-B1.ADimWkSht8 2
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
Horizontal
Curve
Radius
=
9500
ft through
centerline
of bridge
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
Vertical Curve Data: g1 = 2.4%, g2 = -3.2%, L = 800 ft
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
Fillet
5-B1.ADimWkSht9 Effect
Slab Thickness (tslab) =
5-B1.ADimWkSht9 7.5
Size
Fillet
(tfillet) =
0.75
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.Example1
= 8.25
Excess5-B1.Example1
Camber Effect
5-B1.Example2
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.Example2 D Dimension from Girder Schedule (120
days)
= 7.55
5-B1.Example2
C Dimension from Girder Schedule = 2.57
5-B1.Example2
5-B1.Example3
5-B1.Example2
=
144.4 2 144.4
29500
0.87 4.98
5-B1.Example3 144.4 2
144.4 29500 0.87
0.87
Profile
5-B1.Example3
Effect
144.4 2 144.4 29500 0.87 144.4 2
144.4 29500
Horizontal
5-B1.Example3
Curve Effect 144.4 2
144.4 29500
0.87
144.4
5-B1.Example4 2 Chord 144.4
29500
Length 95000.87
0.87
144.4
2 180 144.4
29500 0.87
144.4
5-B1.Example3
5-B1.Example4 180 95000.87
144.4
5-B1.Example4 180 95000.87 180 144.4
95000.87 144.4 180 180
180 180
5-B1.Example4
Curve Length
1.5
1.5144.495000.87
0.04 180 144.4
180
5-B1.Example4
95000.87 144.4
95000.87
5-B1.Example5 0.1
5-B1.Example5 180 180 1.5
1.5144.4
9500 0.04
144.4
180
1.5 180
1.5144.4 0.04 0.1
5-B1.Example5
1.5 1.5144.4 0.04
9500 0.1
0.1 9500
9500 1.5 1.5144.4 0.04
5-B1.Example5
1.5
1.5144.4 0.04 1.5
1.55.144.4
0.1
5-B1.Example6
1.5 1.5
1.5144.4
1.55.144.4 2.19 9500
0.04
5-B1.Example5
5-B1.Example6 Vertical
100
0.1
100800
0.1
Curve Effect
9500
1.5 1.55.144.4 9500 2.19
5-B1.Example6 1.5 1.55.144.4
100 100800 2.19
(+ forsag, for
100 crown)
100800
2.19 100 1.5100800
1.55.144.4
1.55.144.4 2.19
5-B1.Example6
1.5 1.5 100
1.55.144.4
100800
5-B1.Example7
5-B1.Example6
2.19
0.1 2.19 2.0
2.19
5-B1.Example7 100 100800
100 0.1 2.19
100800
2.0
Girder
5-B1.Example7 Orientation Effect
0.1 2.0 49
2.19
5-B1.Example8
0.1 2.19 2.0
49 4
49 2 2
5-B1.Example8
5-B1.Example8 5-B1.Example7
49
4
4 0.1
9 2.19
9
5-B1.Example8 4 29 2 2 2
0.1 2.19 2 2.0 2
5-B1.Example7
A Dimension
0.1 2.19 2.0
5-B1.Example9 2 49
2 49
22
99
2 49 2
5-B1.Example9
5-B1.Example9
5-B1.Example9
2
49
2 9 2
Round 5-B1.Example10
to nearest = 12.25 2 9 92
5-B1.Example10
Minimum
5-B1.Example10
5-B1.Example10
A
Dimension,
2
9 22
92 99 92
92
A Dimension = 12
Design Outline
1. Material Properties
1.1 Concrete - Prestressed Girder
f'ci := 7.5 ksi
f'c := 8.5 ksi
wc := 0.165kcf
wcE := 0.155kcf
K1 := 1.0
1.5
wcE f'c
Ec := 33000 K1 ksi if f' c 15ksi = 5871 ksi
kcf ksi
"error" otherwise
1.5
wcE f'ci
Eci := 33000 K1 ksi = 5515 ksi
kcf ksi
f'c
fr := 0.24 ksi = 0.700 ksi
ksi
f' ci
frL := 0.24 ksi = 0.657 ksi
ksi
f'c
fr.Mcr.min := 0.37 ksi = 1.079 ksi
ksi
f'cs 4ksi
0.85 0.05 otherwise
1ksi
2
dia( bar) := 0.375 in if bar = 3 area( bar ) := 0.110 in if bar = 3
0.500 in if bar = 4 2
0.197 in if bar = 4
0.625 in if bar = 5
2
0.750 in if bar = 6 0.309 in if bar = 5
2
0.875in if bar = 7 0.445 in if bar = 6
1.000in if bar = 8 2
0.600 in if bar = 7
1.128in if bar = 9
2
1.270in if bar = 10 0.786 in if bar = 8
1.410in if bar = 11 2
1.003 in if bar = 9
1.693in if bar = 14 2
1.270 in if bar = 10
2.257in if bar = 18
2
"ERROR" otherwise 1.561 in if bar = 11
2
2.251 in if bar = 14
2
3.998 in if bar = 18
"ERROR" otherwise
fy := 60 ksi
Es := 29000 ksi
Ep := 28500 ksi
db := 0.6 in
2 2
Ap := 0.153in if d b = 0.5in = 0.217 in
2
0.217in if d b = 0.6in
lt := 60 db = 36.0 in
2. Structure Definition
BW Nb 1 S
( )
overhang := + cw = 3.625 ft
2
oe := 7in
of := 12in
tdia := 8in
hdia := 48in
2.4 Prestressing
Nh := 12
Ns := 26
Nt := 6
xh := 0.4 GL = 53.58 ft
sbottom := 2in
girdertype := "WF74G"
bw := 6.125in
bf := 49in
bf.bot := 38.375in
4
Iy := 72018.4in
L1 := 5ft
LL := 10ft
LT := 10ft
Ytg := d g Ybg = 38.340 in
3
Stg := Ig Ytg = 19153.8 in
3
Sbg := Ig Ybg = 20593.3 in
barv := 5
VR := 1.5in VR := VR
1, 1 11 , 1 1, 1
VR := VR VR := VR
1, 2 1, 1 11 , 2 1, 2
VR := 20in VR := VR
2, 1 10 , 1 2, 1
VR := 2.5in VR := VR
2, 2 10 , 2 2, 2
VR := 72in VR := VR
3, 1 9, 1 3, 1
VR := 6in VR := VR
3, 2 9, 2 3, 2
VR := 120in VR := VR
4, 1 8, 1 4, 1
VR := 12in VR := VR
4, 2 8, 2 4, 2
VR := 120in VR := VR
5, 1 7, 1 5, 1
VR := 12in VR := VR
5, 2 7, 2 5, 2
5 11
VR
6, 1
:= GL
VR
i, 1
VR
i, 1
i=1 i=7
VR := 18in
6, 2
VR = in
rows( VR)
VR = GL , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
chk
3, 1
:= if
i, 1
i=1
AEx := 2.5in
Super := 0.02
SH := 0ft
RH := 0ft
LVC := 1000ft
g1 := 0
g2 := 0
( )2
1.5 SH ft Super
AHC := in = 0.000 in
RH ft
2
1.5 g2 g1
GL
( )
AVC :=
ft in = 0.000 in
LVC
100
ft
bf
AOrient := Super = 0.490 in
2
bi := S = 78.00 in
b ex if girder = "exterior"
Ecs
n := = 0.65
Ec
be.trans := be n = 50.94 in
3 4
Islab := be.trans ts 12 = 1456.0 in
2
Aslab := b e.trans t s = 356.6 in
Aslab Ybs + Ag Ybg
Yb := = 47.31 in
Aslab + Ag
Yt := dg Yb = 26.69 in
Yts := ts + Yt = 33.69 in
2 4
Islabc := Aslab Yts 0.5ts
( ) + Islab = 326347 in
2 4
Igc := Ag Yb Ybg
( ) + Ig = 859801 in
4
Ic := Islabc + Igc = 1186148 in
3
Sb := Ic Yb = 25069 in
3
St := Ic Yt = 44450 in
Ic 1
= 53919 in3
Sts :=
Yts n
axlewidth := 6ft
wlane := 0.64 kip ft
floor
BW
NL := if BW > 24 ft = 3.0
12 ft
2 if 24 ft BW 20 ft
1 otherwise
return 1.00 if NL = 2
return 0.85 if NL = 3
1.0 (DC + DW) + 1.0 (LL+IM)
1.0 (DC + DW) + 0.8 (LL+IM)
LLserIII := 0.8
f := 1.0
dt
pTrans d t , c := 0.583 + 0.25
( ) 1
c
c := 0.75
DC := 1.25
DW := 1.5
LL := 1.75
D := 1.00
R := 1.00
I := 1.00
LLfat := 1.5
0ft 0.000
P2 + 0.1L 14.973
P2 + 0.2L 27.973
P2 + 0.3L 40.973
P2 + 0.4L 53.973
SE := P2 + 0.5L SE = 66.973 ft
P2 + 0.6L 79.973
P2 + 0.7L 92.973
P2 + 0.8L 105.973
P2 + 0.9L 118.973
GL 133.946
SE := Sections SE
ADD P2 GL P2 0.4GL 0.6GL P2 + d est GL P2 d est lt GL lt L1 GL L1 LL GL LT
( )
for j 1 .. cols( ADD)
Match 0
for i 1 .. rows( Sections)
Match 1 if Sections = ADD
i 1, j
Sections stack Sections , ADD
( 1, j ) if Match
return Sections
SE := sort ( SE)
rsL := match( P2 , SE) = 2.0
1
rsR := match( GL P2 , SE) = 22.0
1
rp := match l t , SE 1 = 3.0
( )
SE = ft
rc := match( P2 + d est , SE) 1 = 5.0
rh := match( 0.4GL , SE) = 10.0
1
rm := match( P2 + 0.5L , SE) = 12.0
1
rl1 := match L1 , SE 1 = 4.0
( )
rl2 := match( GL L1 , SE) 1 = 20.0
rbL := match( LL , SE) 1 = 6.0
rbR := match( GL LT , SE) 1 = 18.0
i := 1 .. rows( SE)
Mom M uniform wg , L , SE P2
( )
i i
Mom
11
M := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
Mom M uniform wg, GL , SE ( )
i i
Mom
1
V := for i rsL .. rsR
v Vuniform wg , L , SE P2
( )
i i
v
L
DiaSpacing := = 32.5 ft
n dia + 1
S bw
DiaL := = 82.99 in
cos sk
( )
DiaWt := wcs DiaL tdia h dia if girder = "interior"
2
M := for i rsL .. rsR
a 0ft
Mom 0kip ft
i
for j 1 .. n dia
a a + DiaSpacing
Mom Mom + M point DiaWt , a , L , SE P2
( )
i i i
Mom
2
V := for i rsL .. rsR
a 0ft
v 0kip
i
for j 1 .. n dia
a a + DiaSpacing
v v + Vpoint DiaWt , a , L , SE P2
( )
i i i
v
tpu := A t s2 = 3.75 in
kip
wpu := t pu b f wcs = 0.198
ft
3
M := for i rsL .. rsR
v Vuniform wpu , L , SE P2
( )
i i
v
5.4 Dead Load - Slab
kip
ws := ts2 S wcs if girder = "interior" = 0.630
ft
S bf oe + o f bf
ts2 + + overhang wcs if girder = "exterior"
2 2 2 2
4
M := for i rsL .. rsR
Mom M uniform ws , L , SE P2
( )
i i
Mom
4
V := for i rsL .. rsR
v Vuniform ws , L , SE P2
( )
i i
v
tb := 0.460 kip ft
2 tb kip
wb := if Nb < 6 = 0.153
Nb ft
tb
otherwise
3
5
M := for i rsL .. rsR
Mom M uniform wb , L , SE P2
( )
i i
Mom
5
V := for i rsL .. rsR
v Vuniform wb , L , SE P2
( )
i i
v
5.6 Dead Load - Future Overlay
kip
wo := 2in S 0.140kcf if girder = "interior" = 0.152
ft
2in + overhang cw 0.140kcf if girder = "exterior"
S
2
6
M := for i rsL .. rsR
Mom M uniform wo , L , SE P2
( )
i i
Mom
6
V := for i rsL .. rsR
v Vuniform wo , L , SE P2
( )
i i
v
8kip
HL93TruckM( x , L) := Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Locations 14ft
28ft
rows rows( Locations )
Loc Locations
Moment 0kip ft
while Loc L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Loc , L , x
( )
i i i
Loc Loc + 0.01ft
i i
Moment max
M , Moment
Loc Locations
xLx
while Loc L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Loc , L , x
( )
i i i
Loc Loc + 0.01ft
i i
Moment max
M , Moment
Moment
z := 0ft , 10ft .. L
2000
HL93TruckM( z , L)
kip ft
1000
0
0 50 100
z
Distance Along Span (ft)
7
M := for i rsL .. rsR
Mom HL93TruckM SE P2 , L
( )
i i
Mom
8kip
HL93TruckVP( x , L) := Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Loc 14ft
28ft
rows rows( Loc)
Shear 0kip
while Loc L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Loc , L , x
( )
i i i
Loc Loc + 0.01ft
i i
32kip
HL93TruckVN( x , L) := Axles 32kip
8kip
0ft
Loc 14ft
28ft
rows rows( Loc)
Shear 0kip
while Loc L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Loc , L , x
( )
i i i
Loc Loc + 0.01ft
i i
Shear min
V, Shear
Shear
HL93TruckVP( z , L) 50
kip
0
HL93TruckVN( z , L)
kip
50
100
0 50 100
z
Distance Along Span (ft)
7
V := for i rsL .. rsR
v if SE )
GL
, HL93TruckVP SE P2 , L , HL93TruckVN SE P2 , L
( ) (
i i 2 i i
25kip
HL93TandemM( x , L) := Axles
25kip
0ft
Locations
4 ft
rows rows( Locations )
Moment 0kip ft
while Locations L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Locations , L , x
( )
i i i
Locations Locations + 0.01ft
i i
1500
HL93TandemM ( z , L)
1000
kip ft
500
0
0 50 100
z
Distance Along Span (ft)
8
M := for i rsL .. rsR
Mom HL93TandemM SE P2 , L
( )
i i
Mom
25kip
HL93TandemVP ( x , L) := Axles
25kip
0ft
Locations
4 ft
rows rows( Locations )
Shear 0kip
while Locations L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Locations , L , x
( )
i i i
Locations Locations + 0.01ft
i i
Shear max
V , Shear
Shear
25kip
HL93TandemVN( x , L) := Axles
25kip
0ft
Locations
4 ft
rows rows( Locations )
Shear 0kip
while Locations L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Locations , L , x
( )
i i i
Locations Locations + 0.01ft
i i
Shear min
V , Shear
Shear
40
Maximum Shear (kip)
HL93TandemVP ( z , L)
20
kip
0
HL93TandemVN( z , L)
kip 20
40
60
0 50 100
z
Distance Along Span (ft)
8
V := for i rsL .. rsR
v if SE )
GL
, HL93TandemVP SE P2 , L , HL93TandemVN SE P2 , L
( ) (
i
i 2 i i
9
V := for i rsL .. rsR
2
wlane ( SE P2)
2
GL lane
w L ( SE P2)
i i
v if SE , ,
i
i 2 2 L 2 L
v
5.10 Maximum Live Load including Dynamic Load Allowance, per lane
IM := 33 %
10
M := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
Mom max M ( ,M ) (1 + IM) + Mi, 9
i i, 7 i, 8
Mom
10
V := for i 1 .. rows( SE) 1
V := 0kip
rows( SE) , 1
8kip
HL93TruckMFat( x , L) := Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Locations 14ft
44ft
rows rows( Locations )
Loc Locations
Moment 0kip ft
while Loc L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Loc , L , x
( )
i i i
Loc Loc + 0.01ft
i i
i point ( i i )
Loc Loc + 0.01ft
i i
Moment max
M , Moment
Moment
1500
HL93TruckMFat ( z , L)
1000
kip ft
500
0
0 50 100
z
Distance Along Span (ft)
IMFAT := 15 %
rsL = 2.0
rsR = 22.0
rp = 3.0
rc = 5.0
rh = 10.0
rm = 12.0
rl1 = 4.0
rl2 = 20.0
rbL = 6.0
rbR = 18.0
M= kip ft
V= kip
dbar := overhang cw = 2.75 ft
chk := if d bar 3ft , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
( )
5, 1
curbmin.sp := 2ft
x S + d bar curbmin.sp
Numerator 0ft
UseAxleWidth 1
while x > 0ft
Numerator Numerator + x
if UseAxleWidth
x x axlewidth
UseAxleWidth 0
otherwise
x x ( 12 ft axlewidth)
UseAxleWidth 1
Numerator
DFlever := = 0.654
2 S
0.25
Kg 0.5
S
0.25 otherwise
L t 3 L
s
0.1
S g
0.4 0.3 K
0.06 +
S
L 3
14 ft L t
DFiFAT :=
s = 0.352
1.2
2.0
S S S
DFvi := max0.36 + , 0.2 + = 0.707
25 ft 12 ft ft
35
rsL = 2.0
rsR = 22.0
rp = 3.0
rc = 5.0
rh = 10.0
rm = 12.0
rl1 = 4.0
rl2 = 20.0
rbL = 6.0
rbR = 18.0
3
Sts = 53919 in
3 3
Stg = 19154 in St = 44450 in
3 3
Sbg = 20593 in Sb = 25069 in
Stress Stress
ST = ksi
SB = ksi
SS = ksi
fc.TL.lim := 0.65 f'ci = 4.875 ksi
fc.SH.lim := 0.65 f' c = 5.525 ksi
fc.PP.lim := 0.45 f'c = 3.825 ksi
fc.PPT.lim := 0.60 f' c = 5.100 ksi
fc.FA.lim := 0.40 f' c = 3.400 ksi
4 2 in + Ns 4 4 in
( )
if 7 Ns 8
Ns
4 4 in + Ns 4 2 in
( )
if 9 Ns 20
Ns
16 2in + Ns 16 4 in
( )
if 21 Ns 32
Ns
16 2in + 16 4 in + Ns 32 6 in
( )
if 33 Ns 42
Ns
16 2in + 16 4 in + 10 6in + Ns 42 8 in
( )
if 43 Ns 46
Ns
"error" otherwise
E = 2.769 in
es := Ybg E = 32.891 in
FCL := 4in
FCL.lim := 4in if 1 Nh 12
12 4in + Nh 12 6 in
( )
if 13 Nh 24
Nh
12 4in + 12 6 in + Nh 24 8 in
( )
if 25 Nh 36
Nh
"error" otherwise
FCL.lim = 4.000 in
Fo := 9in
Fo.lim := increment 1 = 9.000 in
e 2in
for i 1 .. Nh
if increment
increment 0
e e + 2in
increment 1 otherwise
Product Product + e
Product
return
Nh
dg Fo FCL
slopeh := = 0.094877
xh
d g Fo FCL + Fo.lim 4in
( )
maxslopeh := = 0.1027
xh
1
slopelim := if d b = 0.5in = 0.1250
6
1
if d b = 0.6in
8
"error" otherwise
EC Np + etemp Nt
i, 2
EC
i, 3 Np + Nt
EC
EC = in
to := 1day
24.0 to
log
day fpj 0.55 f
fpR0 := f pj
40
py
x1 := fpbt 0.7 fpu = 11.5 ksi
( )
x2 := fpbt 0.7 fpu = 11.5 ksi
( )
P := Aps fpbt + x1 + Atemp fpbt + x2 = 1804.6 kip
( ) ( )
Given
Pps
fpES := Find( P , x1 , x2)
f
pEST
Ep M rm , 5 Yb Ybg + ECrm , 2
( ) = 0.702 ksi
fpED2 :=
Ec
Ic
fpbt Aps
fpLT := 10.0 h st + 12.0 h st + 2.4 ksi = 19.111 ksi
ksi Ag
Ep
fptr := f = 0.626 ksi
Ec ptr
PS1 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
Pp fpeP1 TRAN Aps
i
Pt fpeT1 TRAN Atemp
i
Pp Pp ECi , 2 Pt Pt etemp
PS +
i, 1 Ag Stg Ag Stg
Pp Pp ECi , 2 Pt Pt etemp
PS + + + PS1 = ksi
i, 2 Ag Sbg Ag Sbg
PS
STRESS1 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
STR PS1 + ST
i, 1 i, 1 i , 11
STR PS1 + SB
i, 2 i, 2 i , 11
STR
STRESS1 = ksi
PS2 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
Pp fpeP2 TRAN Aps
i
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
i, 1 Ag Stg
Pp P EC
p i, 2
PS +
i, 2 Ag Sbg
PS2 = ksi
PS
PS3 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
Pp fpeP3 TRAN Aps
i
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
i, 1 Ag Stg
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS +
i, 2 Ag Sbg
PS3 = ksi
PS
STRESS3 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
4
STR
i, 1
PS3
i, 1
+
ST
i, j
j =1
4
STR
i, 2
PS3
i, 2
+
SB
i, j STRESS3 = ksi
j =1
STR
fpeP4 := fpj + fpR0 + fpES + fpLT + fptr + fpED1 + fpED2 = 173.4 ksi
5
STR
i, 1
PS4
i, 1
+
ST
i, j
j =1
5
STRESS4 = ksi
STR PS4 + SB
i, 2 i, 2 i, j
j =1
5
STR
i, 3
SS
i, j
j =1
STR
( )
1 2
:= if min STRESS4 , STRESS4
( fc.PP.lim , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
)
chk
8, 7
1 2
:= if max STRESS4 , STRESS4
( ft.PCT.lim , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
)
chk
8, 8
8.5 Service I for Final with Live Load - Bridge Site 3 - Compressive Stresses
STRESS5 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
6
STR
i, 1
PS5
i, 1
+
ST
i, j
+ ST
i , 10 STRESS5 = ksi
j =1
6
STR
i, 2
PS5
i, 2
+
SB
i, j
j =1
6
STR
i, 3
SS
i, j
+ SS
i , 10
j =1
STR
SFATLL := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
LLfat M FAT DFFAT 1 + IMFAT ( )
i
Stress
i, 1 St
STRESS6 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
6
PS5
i, 1
+
ST
i, j
STRESS6 = ksi
j =1
STR + SFATLL
i, 1 2 i, 1
6
PS5
i, 2
+
SB
i, j
STR
j =1
i, 2 2
STR
8.7 Service III for Final with Live Load - Bridge Site 3 - Tensile Stresses
STRESS7 := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
6
STR
i, 1
PS5
i, 1
+
ST
i, j
+ LLserIII ST
i , 10
j =1 STRESS7 = ksi
6
STR
i, 2
PS5
i, 2
+
SB
i, j
+ LLserIII SB
i , 10
j =1
STR
1 2
:= if max STRESS7 , STRESS7
( ft.PCT.lim , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
)
chk
8 , 11
dp := hf + Ytg + EC
i, 2
i
Aps fpu 0.85 f'cs b e b w h f
( )
cfI :=
i fpu
0.85 f'cs 1 b w + k Aps
dp
i
Aps fpu
crI :=
i fpu
0.85 f'cs 1 b e + k Aps
dp
i
cI := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
c crI if 1 crI h f
i i i
c cfI otherwise
i i
c
dp = in cfI = in crI = in cI = in
cI
fpsI := fpu 1 k
i
i dp
i
fpsI = ksi
fpsIrm 2 f
ld :=
pe
d = 129.51 in
ksi 3 ksi b
fps := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
FPS fpe TRAN if SE l t
i i i
SE l t
i
FPS fpe + f f if lt < SE ld
i l d lt psIi pe i
FPS fpsI if ld < SE < GL ld
i i
i
GL lt SE
i
FPS fpe + fpsI fpe if GL ld SE < GL lt
i ld lt i i
fps = ksi
FPS fpe TRAN if SE GL lt
i i i
FPS
( )
Aps fps
i
cr :=
i 0.85 f'cs 1 b e
a := 1 c
i i
cf = in cr = in c= in a= in
M n := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
a
i ai h
MN Aps fps dp + 0.85 f'cs ( b e b w) h f f if h f < ai
i i i 2 2 2
a
i
MN Aps fps dp otherwise
i i i 2
MN
dt := h f + d g sbottom = 79.000 in
:= if c > 0 , p dt , c , 1.0
( ( ) )
i i i
M r := M n
i i i
Mn = kip ft = Mr = kip ft
Mu
Moment (kip ft)
i
10000
kip ft
Mr
i
5000
kip ft
0
0 50 100
SEi
Distance Along Girder (ft)
fcpe := PS5
i, 2
i
4
M dnc :=
i M
i, j
j =1
3
Sc := Sb = 25069 in
3
Snc := Sbg = 20593 in
1 := 1.56
2 := 1.1
3 := 1.0
Sc
M cr.mod := 3 1 fr.Mcr.min + 2 fcpe Sc M dnc 1
i
i
i Snc
M dnc = kip ft M cr.mod = kip ft Mr = kip ft
de := d p
i i
h := d g + t s = 81.0 in
de = in dvI = in dv = in
dc := dv = 4.8600 ft
rs
L
chk := if d est = d c , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
( )
10 , 2
Nu := 0.0 kip
Ph = kip Vp = kip
Apsv := if ts + Ytg + EC , Np Ap , Ns Ap
h
i i , 1 2
fps
i
RF :=
i fpsI
i
2
As := 0.0 in
M uv := max M u , Vu Vp d v
i i i i i
Muvi
+ 0.5 Nu + Vu Vp Apsv RF fpo TRAN
dv i i i i i
, 0 , .006
i
s := min max
i Es As + Ep Apsv RF
i i
s := s if SE SE
i rc i rc
s if SE SE
rows( SE) rc+ 1 i rows( SE) rc+ 1
s otherwise
i
2
Apsv = in RF = M uv = kip ft s =
:= 29 + 3500 s deg
i
i
4.8
:=
i 1 + 750 s
i
= deg =
bv := bw = 6.125 in
2
Av := 2 area barv = 0.618 in
( )
s := return VR if SE VR s= in
i 2, 2 i 1, 1
return VR if SE GL VR
rows( VR) 1 , 2 i rows( VR) , 1
for k 1 .. rows( VR)
k
return VR
k, 2
if SE
i VR
j, 1
j =1
f'c
Vc := 0.0316 ksi b v dv
i
i ksi i
Av fy d v cot
( )
i i
Vs :=
i s
i
Vc + Vs + Vp
Vn := min
i i i
i 0.25 f'c b v d v + Vp
i i
Vc = kip Vs = kip Vn = kip v Vn = kip
Vu
i 600
Shear (kip)
kip
400
v Vn
i
kip 200
0
0 50 100
SEi
Distance Along Girder (ft)
f' c b v s
i
Av.min := 0.0316 ksi
i ksi fy
chk := CH "OK" = "OK"
10 , 4
for i 1 .. rows( SE)
CH "NG" if Av < Av.min
2
i Av.min = in
CH
Vu v Vp
i i
vu :=
i v bv d v
i
smax := min 0.8 dv , 18in if vu < 0.125 f'c
i i i
min 0.4 dv , 12in otherwise
i
chk := CH "OK" = "OK"
10 , 5
for i 1 .. rows( SE)
CH "NG" if smax < s
i
i
vu = ksi smax = in
CH
cN := c = 0.75
2
Aps.req := a 0in if SE = 0ft SE = GL
i i i
Mui V V
a + 0.5
Nu u i V 0.5 min V , u i cot 1 if SE SE GL SE
cN v si ( i) fps
+
dv i
pi
v
rc i rc
i i
V V
a
u i 0.5 min V , u i V cot 1 otherwise
si p i ( i) fps
v v i
a
chk := CH "OK" = "OK"
10 , 6
for i 1 .. rows( SE)
CH "NG" if Apsv < Aps.req
i i
CH
2
Aps.req = in
cvi := 0.28ksi
:= 1.0
K1vi := 0.3
K2 := 1.8ksi
Vni := mincvi b f + avf fy + Pc , K1vi f'cs bf , K2 b f
i i
Vri := v Vni
i i
2 Vui
in i
avf.min := return 0 if < 0.210ksi
i ft bf
2 2
kip kip in in
Vui = Vri = avf = avf.min =
ft ft ft ft
dg
lsplit := = 18.50 in
4
2
As.burst := for i 1 .. rows( VR) = 4.326 in
i
x i if lsplit >
VR
j,1
j =1
for i 1 .. x + 1
VRi , 1
AV AV + Av ceil if i x
VR
i, 2
i 1
l
split
VR
j,1
AV AV + Av floor otherwise
j = 1
VR
i, 2
AV
fs := 20ksi
lconfine := 1.5 d g = 9.250 ft
Harp P , e1 , e2 , E , I , x , L , b :=
( ) return 0 if x < 0in x > L
e e2 e1
( )
P e x P e2
return
6 E I b
(2 2
x + 3 b 3 b L + ) 2 E I
x ( x L) if x b
P e 2 2 P e2
return
6 E I
(
3x + b 3 L x + ) 2 E I
x ( x L) if b < x < L b
P e2
( L x) + 3 b 3 b L +
P e ( L x) 2 2
return x ( x L) if L b x
6 E I b 2 E I
S = in T = in TR = in H = in
POINT( P , a , x , L , E , I) := return 0 if x < 0in x > L
return 0 if a < 0in a > L
L ( L a) x if x < a
P ( L a) x 2 2 2
return
6 E I L
2 2
P a ( L a)
return if x = a
3 E I L
L a ( L x)
P a ( L x) 2 2 2
return otherwise
6 E I L
G := UNIFORM wg , SE P2 , L , Eci , Ig
( )
i i
SL := UNIFORM wpu + ws , SE P2 , L , Ec , Ig
( )
i i
BAR := UNIFORM wb , SE P2 , L , Ec , Ic
( )
i i
a 0ft
0in
i
for j 1 .. n dia
a a + DiaSpacing
POINT DiaWt , a , SE P2 , L , Ec , Ig
( )
i i i
0in
rows( SE)
G = in SL = in BAR = in DIA = in
VSr
ks := max 1.45 0.13 , 1.0 = 1.035
in
khc := 1.56 0.008 = 0.960
H
%
5
kf ( f ) :=
f
1+
ksi
t
day
ktd( t , f ) :=
61 4
f t
+ day
ksi
0.118
ti
cr( t , ti , f ) := 1.9 ks khc kf ( f ) ktd( t , f )
day
CR1min := 10.7 S + H + T + G
( )
i i i i i
CR1max := 90.7 S + H + T + G
( )
i i i i i
CR2min := 40.7 10.7 S + H + T + G + 30.10 DIA + TR
( )( ) ( )
i i i i i i i
CR2max := 120.7 90.7 S + H + T + G + 30.90 DIA + TR
( )( ) ( )
i i i i i i i
CR1min = in CR1max = in CR2min = inCR2max = in
D40 := S + T + H + G + CR1min + TR + DIA + CR2min
i i i i i i i i i
D120 := S + T + H + G + CR1max + TR + DIA + CR2max
i i i i i i i i i
C := SL + BAR
( )
i i i
EXCESS120 := D120 C
i i i
D40 = in D120 = in C= in EXCESS120 = in
D120 = 2.282 in
rm
C = 1.375 in
rm
bslab.trans := ( BW + 2 cw) n = 311.51 in
3 4
Islab2 := b slab.trans ts 12 = 8904.1 in
2
Aslab2 := bslab.trans t s = 2180.6 in
Ybs = 77.500 in
8kip
HL93Truck( x , L) := Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Locations 14ft
28ft
rows rows( Locations )
Loc Locations
Deflection 0in
while Loc L
rows
for i 1 .. rows
POINT Axles , Loc , x, L , Ec , Ic2
( )
i i i
Loc Loc + 0.01ft
i i
Deflection max
, Deflection
Deflection
Deflection
TRUCK := HL93Truck SE P2 , L ( )
i i
TRUCK = in LANE = in SUPER = in
M Lift
i
STLift :=
i Stg
M Lift
i
SBLift :=
i Sbg
M Lift = kip ft STLift = ksi SBLift = ksi
STRESSLift := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
STR PS Lift + STLift
i, 1 i, 1 i
STR PS Lift + SBLift
i, 2 i, 2 i
STR
STRESSLift = ksi
elift := 0.25in
0.125in
esweep := GL = 0.837 in
10ft 2
2
LLift 1
FoL := = 0.523
GL 3
ei := elift + esweep FoL = 0.688 in
2 2
wg L1 LLift
self := UNIFORM wg , SE L1 , LLift , Eci , Ig +
( ) = 1.377 in
rm 16 Eci Ig
ps := Straight fpeP1 Ns Ap , es , Eci , Ig, SE , GL ...
( ) = 2.769 in
rm
+ Straight fpeT1 Nt Ap , etemp , Eci , Ig , SE , GL ...
( )
rm
+ Harp fpeP1 Nh Ap , EC
( , EC , Eci , Ig , SE , GL , xh )
rm , 1 1, 1 rm
2Iy 2Iy
M lat := min frL STRESSLift , frL STRESSLift
i
i , 1 b f i , 2 b f.bot
Mlatrl
max := return min 1
,
if SE SE
i MLift rl 2 i rl1
1
Mlati
return min , if SE < SE < SE
MLift 2 rl1 i rl2
i
Mlatrl
return min 2
, if SE SE
MLift rl 2 i rl2
2
1
zo i
FScr.l := +
i yr maxi
M lat = kip ft max = rad FScr.l =
ei
'max := = 0.1827 rad
2.5 zo
chk := if FSf 1.5 , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
( )
12 , 4
Wg := wg GL = 141.7 kip
LS := GL LL LT = 113.95 ft
M Ship := M cant wg , LL , LT , LS , SE
( )
i i
M Ship
i
STShip :=
i Stg
M Ship
i
SBShip :=
i Sbg
M Ship = kip ft STShip = ksi SBShip = ksi
PSShip := for i 1 .. rows( SE)
Pp fpeP.Ship TRAN Aps
i
Pt fpeT.Ship TRAN Atemp
i
Pp Pp EC Pt Pt etemp
i, 2
PS +
i, 1 Ag Stg Ag
Stg
Pp Pp ECi , 2 Pt Pt etemp
PS + + + PSShip = ksi
i, 2 Ag Sbg Ag Sbg
PS
IMSH := 20%
se := 6%
= 3.434 deg
kip in kip in Wg kip in
K := max 28000 , 4000 ceil = 32000
rad rad 18kip rad
K
r := = 225.77 in
Wg
eship := 1in
0.125in
es.ship := GL = 1.674 in
10ft
2
LS 1
FoLship := = 0.390
GL 3
ei.ship := eship + es.ship FoLship = 1.654 in
hr := 24in
72in
zmax := = 36.0 in
2
6 LL 6 LT
5 5 5
wg 4 2 3 2 2 3 2
LS 4
zo.ship := 2LL LS + LL LS 2 LL LS LT + LS LT 2 LS LT
24 Ec Iy GL 5 5 5
zo.ship = 4.779 in
r + ei.ship
eq := = 0.1119 rad
r y zo.ship
M latINCL := M Ship eq
i i
bf
STR PS Ship + STShip + M latINCL
i, 2 i, 1 i i 2Iy
b f.bot
STR PS Ship + SBShip M latINCL
i, 3 i, 2 i i 2Iy
b f.bot
STR PS Ship + SBShip + M latINCL
i, 4 i, 2 i i 2Iy
STR
M latINCL = kip ft STRESSShip2 = ksi
MlatShrb
maxSh := return min L
, if SE SE
i MShiprb 2 i rbL
L
MlatShi
return min , if SE < SE < SE
MShip 2 rbL i rbR
i
MlatShrb
return min R
, if SE SE
MShiprb 2 i rbR
R
r maxSh
FScr.2 :=
i
i zo.ship maxSh + ei.ship + y maxSh
i i
M latSh = kip ft maxSh = rad FScr.2 =
r 'maxS
( )
FSfS := = 1.616
z'oS 'maxS + ei.ship + y 'maxS
chk =
BW ( Nb 1 ) S
Deck overhang (centerline of overhang := + cw overhang = 4.375 ft
exterior girder to end of deck) 2
kip
Future overlay (2" HMA), whma := 0.140kcf 2in whma = 0.023
2
ft
2 Criteria and assumptions
2.1 Design Live Load for Decks
(3.6.1.3.3, not for empirical design method) Where deck is designed using the
approximate strip method, specified in 4.6.2.1, the live load shall be taken as the wheel
load of the 32.0 kip axle of the design truck, without lane load, where the strips are
transverse.
if ( S 15 ft , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK" (3.6.1.3.3)
The design truck or tandem shall be positioned transversely such that the center of any
wheel load is not closer than (3.6.1.3.1)
for the design of the deck overhang - 1 ft from the face of the curb or railing , and
for the design of all other components - 2 ft from the edge of the design lane.
(3.6.1.3.4) For deck overhang design with a cantilever, not exceeding 6.0 ft from the
centerline of the exterior girder to the face of a continuous concrete railing, the wheel loads
may be replaced with a uniformly distributed line load of 1.0 klf intensity, located 1 ft from
the face of the railing.
if ( overhang cw 6 ft , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
Horizontal loads on the overhang resulting from vehicle collision with barriers shall be considered
in accordance with the yield line analysis.
2.2 Dynamic Load Allowance (impact)
IM := 0.33 (3.6.2.1)
top concrete cover = 1.5 in. (up to #11 bar) (5.12.4 & Table 5.12.3-1)
use 2.5 in. (Office Practice)
bottom concrete cover = 1 in. (up to #11 bar)
sacrificial thickness = 0.5 in. (2.5.2.4)
The primary reinforcement shall be placed perpendicular to the main supporting components.
3 Material Properties
3.1 Concrete
f'c := 4 ksi Use CLASS 4000D for bridge concrete deck (BDM 5.1.1)
f'c
fr2 := 0.37 ksi fr2 = 0.74 ksi (5.4.2.6) for use in 5.7.3.3.2
ksi
wc := 0.160 kcf
1.5
wc f'c
Ec := 33000 ksi Ec = 4224.0 ksi (5.4.2.4)
kcf ksi
4 Methods of Analysis
Concrete deck slabs may be analyzed by using
Per office practice, concrete deck slab shall be designed and detailed for both empirical and
traditional design methods.
For the purpose of empirical design method, the effective length S eff shall be taken as (9.7.2.3),
bf b w
Seff := S bf + Seff = 6.7 ft
2
The design depth of the slab shall exclude the loss that is expected to occur as a result of grinding,
grooving, or wear.
Seff Seff
if 18.0 6.0 , "OK" , "NG" = "OK" = 11.491
ts1 ts1
5.3 Optional deflection criteria for span-to-depth ratio (LRFD Table 2.5.2.6.3.1)
For slabs with main reinforcement parallel to traffic (however, the criteria is used per Office Practice)
2 1 ft 2
#4 @ 12 in. for top longitudinal and transverse. 0.2 in = 0.2 in per ft
12 in
if ( 25 deg , "OK" , "NG" ) = "NG" if OK, double the specified reinforcement in the end
zones, taken as a longitudinal distance equal to Seff.
6 Traditional Design
6.1 Design Assumptions for Approx. Method of Analysis (4.6.2)
Deck shall be subdivided into strips perpendicular to the supporting components (4.6.2.1.1).
Continuous beam with span length as center to center of supporting elements (4.6.2.1.6).
Wheel load may be modeled as concentrated load or load based on tire contact area.
Strips should be analyzed by classical beam theory.
6.2 Width of Equivalent Interior Strip (4.6.2.1.3)
Strip width calculations are not needed since live load moments from Table A4-1 are used.
Ld Ld
Since if 1.50 , "OK" , "NG" = "OK" , where = 3.33 (4.6.2.1.5)
S S
Therefore, all the wheel load shall be applied to primary strip. Otherwise, the wheels shall
be distributed between intersecting strips based on the stiffness ratio of the strip to sum of
the strip stiffnesses of intersecting strips.
Load Modifier
D R I
:= max =1 (1.3.2)
0.95
Strength I load combination - normal vehicular load without wind (3.4.1)
The design section for negative moments and shear forces may be taken as follows:
Prestressed girder - shall be at 1/3 of flange width < 15 in.
Steel girder - 1/4 of flange width from the centerline of support.
Concrete box beams - at the face of the web.
Design critical section for negative moment and shear shall be at dc, (4.6.2.1.6)
bf
dc := min 15 in dc = 15 in from CL of girder (may be too
3 conservative, see training notes)
Maximum factored moments per unit width based on Table A4-1: for S = 9 ft
(include multiple presence factors and the dynamic load allowance)
kip ft
M LLp := 6.29
ft
kip ft
M LLn := 3.51 (max. -M at dc from CL of girder)
ft
Dead load moments
2
ts2 wc S kip ft
M DCp := M DCp = 0.81 (max. +M DC)
10 ft
2
whma S kip ft
M DWp := M DWp = 0.189 (max. +M Dw)
10 ft
kip ft
M DCn := M DCp M DCn = 0.81 (max. -M DC at dc at interior girder)
ft
Normal flexural resistance of a rectangular section may be determined by using equations for
a flanged section in which case bw shall be taken as b (5.7.3.2.3).
dia( barp)
dp := ts1 1 in dp = 5.7 in
2
0.85 f'c ft 2 2 M up ft 2
As := dp dp As = 0.52 in per ft
fy 0.85 f f'c ft
2
Ab( bar ) := 0.20 in if bar = 4
2
0.31 in if bar = 5
2
0.44 in if bar = 6
1 ft 2
Asp := Ab( barp) Asp = 0.5 in per ft
sp
1 2
M cr := fr2 12 in ts2 1.2 M cr = 8.325 kip ft M up ft = 12.30 kip ft
6
dia( bar n)
dn := ts1 2.0 in dn = 4.69 in
2
0.85 f'c ft 2 2 M un ft 2
As := dn dn As = 0.37 in per ft
fy 0.85 f f'c ft
use (top-transverse) bar # barn = 5 sn := 7.5 in (max. spa. 12 in. per BDM
memo)
1 ft 2
Asn := Ab( barn) Asn = 0.5 in per ft
sn
Asp Asn
p := n :=
d p 12 in d n 12 in
Es
n := n = 6.866 n := max[ [ ceil( ( n 0.495) ) 6 ] ]
Ec
k( ) := ( n)2 + 2 n n ( )
k p = 0.272
k( )
j( ) := 1 ( )
j p = 0.909
3
M sp ft
fsa := fsa = 34.1 ksi
( )
Asp j p d p
dia( barp)
dc := ( 1 in) + dc = 1.3 in (the actual concrete cover is to be used
2 to compute dc)
dc
s := 1 + s = 1.33
0.7( h d c)
700 ep in 700 ep in
if sp 2 d c , "OK" , "NG" = "OK" where sp = 7.5 in 2 dc = 9.0 in
fsa fsa
s s
ksi ksi
( )
k n = 0.295 ( )
j n = 0.902
M sn ft
fsa := fsa = 25.8 ksi
( )
Asn j n d n
dia( barn)
dc := 2in + dc = 2.31 in (the actual concrete cover is to be used to
2 compute dc)
dc
s := 1 + s = 1.705
0.7( h d c)
700 en in 700 en in
if sn 2 d c , "OK" , "NG" = "NG" where sn = 7.5 in 2 dc = 7.3 in
fsa fsa
s s
ksi say OK ksi
where Ag := ts2 1 ft
Ag ksi 2
Atem := 0.11 Atem = 0.17 in per ft
fy
The spacing of this reinforcement shall not exceed 3 ts1 = 21 in or 18 in (per BDM memo 12 in.)
1 ft 2
top longitudinal - bar := 4 s := 12 in As := Ab( bar ) As = 0.2 in per ft OK
s
Seff = 6.70 ft
percent := min 67
220
S percent = 67
eff
ft
Bottom longitudinal reinforcement (per BDM memo < slab thickness): ts2 = 7.5 in
percent 2
As := Asp As = 0.33 in per ft
100
1 ft 2
use bar # bar := 4 s := 7.5 in As := Ab( bar ) As = 0.32 in per ft OK
s
(3.6.1.3.4) Horizontal loads resulting from vehicular collision with barrier shall be considered in
accordance with the provisions of LRFD Section 13.
(13.7.3.1.2) Unless a lesser thickness can be proven satisfactory during the crash testing
procedure, the min. edge thickness for concrete deck overhangs shall be taken as 8 in. for concrete
deck overhangs supporting concrete parapets or barriers.
Extreme event limit state shall apply for the force effect transmitted from the bridge railing to
bridge deck (13.6.2).
D R I
:= max =1 (1.3.2)
0.95
Load factors (LRFD Table 3.4.1-1):
dc := 1.25 for component and attachments
dw := 1.50 for wearing surface and utilities (max.)
L := 1.75 for LL
Extreme event limit state shall apply for the force effect transmitted from the vehicular
collision force.
Load Modifier
D := 1.00 (1.3.3)
R := 1.00 (1.3.4)
I := 1.00 (1.3.5)
D R I
e := max e = 1 (1.3.2)
0.95
Load factors (LRFD Table 3.4.1-1):
dc := 1.25 for component and attachments
dw := 1.50 for wearing surface and utilities (max.)
CT := 1.00 for collision force
Railing test level TL-4 applies for high-speed highways, freeways, and interstate highways with
a mixture of trucks and heavy vehicles.
The transverse and longitudinal loads need not be applied in conjunction with vertical loads (A13.2).
Design forces for railing test level TL-4 (LRFD Table A13.2-1),
transverse Ft := 54 kip
longitudinal FL := 18 kip
Effective Distances:
transverse Lt := 3.50 ft
longitudinal LL := 3.50 ft
vertical Lv := 18 ft
M b := 10.27 kip ft
2
Lt Lt 8 H ( M b + M w)
Lc := + + Lc = 9.1 ft
2 2 Mc
For impact within a barrier segment, the total transverse resistance of the railing may be taken as:
M c Lc
2
8 Mb + 8 Mw + H
2
Rw := Rw = 131.11 kip
2 Lc Lt
Case 1
Transverse and longitudinal forces at extreme event limit state.
Resistance factor (A13.4.3.2) := 1.0
(C13.7.3.1.2) Presently, in adequately designed bridge deck overhangs, the major
crash-related damage occurs in short sections of slab areas where the barriers is hit.
min( ( Rw 1.2 Ft ) ) H
M s := moment capacity of the base of the parapet (see memo),
Lc + 2 H
kip ft
M s = 11.97
ft
kip ft
M DCa := 0.45 DL M- at edge of curb (see cw = 0.875 ft
ft deck.gts STRUDL output),
design moment
kip ft
(
M u := e dc M DCa + CT M s ) M u = 12.5
ft
ds := 7 in + cw 2.5 in
A 7 in dia( baro)
ds = 4.7 in
overhang 0.5 b f 2
0.85 f'c ft 2 2 M u ft T 2
As := d s ds + As = 0.67 in per ft (1)
fy 0.85 f'c ft fy
The max. amount of prestressed and non-prestressed reinforcement shall be such that
where de de := d s de = 4.7 in
As fy T
c := c = 1 in
0.85 1 f'c 1 ft
Design critical section for negative moment and shear shall be at dc, (4.6.2.1.6)
bf
dc := min 15 in dc = 15 in from CL of girder (may be too
3 conservative, see training notes)
At the inside face of the parapet, the collision forces are distributed over a distance Lc
for the moment and Lc + 2H for the axial force. Similarly, assume the distribution
length is increased in a 30 degree angle from the base of the parapet,
M s Lc kip ft
M se := M se = 9.31
Lc + 2 0.577 ( overhang cw d c) ft
dead load moment @ dc from CL of exterior girder (see deck.gts STRUDL output)
overhang d c = 3.125 ft from edge of deck
kip ft kip ft
M DCb := 1.96 M DWb := 0.06
ft ft
design moment
kip ft
(
M u := e dc M DCb + dw M DWb + CT M se ) M u = 11.85
ft
min( ( Rw 1.2 Ft ) ) ft
T := T = 3.81 kip per ft
Lc + 2 H + 2 0.577 ( overhang cw d c)
dia( baro)
ds := A 2.5 in ds = 5.4 in
2
0.85 f'c ft 2 2 M u ft T 2
d s ds + = 0.53 in per ft (doesn't control) (2)
fy 0.85 f'c ft fy
Collision moment at at dc from the exterior girder, (see deck.gts output, barrierM factor for 1 kip-ft of Ms),
kip ft
M si := M s 0.824 M si = 9.87
ft
M si Lc kip ft
M si := M si = 6.16
Lc + 2 0.577 ( overhang cw + d c) ft
kip ft kip ft
M DCi := 2.11 M DWi := 0.03
ft ft
design moment
kip ft
(
M u := e dc M DCi + dw M DWi + CT M si ) M u = 8.84
ft
0.85 f'c ft 2 2 M u ft 2
d s ds = 0.4 in per ft (doesn't control) (3)
fy 0.85 f'c ft
Case 3 Check DL + LL
For deck overhangs, where applicable, the 3.6.1.3.4 may be used in lieu of the equivalent strip
method (4.6.2.1.3).
factored moment
kip ft
M u := dc M DCb + dw M DWb + L M LL ( 1.0 + IM) M u = 6.03
ft
dia( baro)
ds := A 2.5 in ds = 5.44 in
2
0.85 f'c ft 2 2 M u ft 2
d s ds = 0.26 in per ft (doesn't control) (4)
fy 0.85 f f'c ft
kip ft
factored moment M u = 6.03
ft
dia( baro)
ds := ts1 2.0 in ds = 4.7 in
2
0.85 f'c ft 2 2 M u ft 2
d s ds = 0.3 in (doesn't control) (5)
fy 0.85 f f'c ft
use bar # baro = 5 @ s := 22.5 in (top transverse) at edge of curb, put 1 #5 between
every other top bar in the deck overhang region
barn = 5 sn = 7.5 in
1 ft 1 ft 2
As := Ab( bar o) + Ab( barn) As = 0.66 in say OK
s sn
Determine the point in the first bay of the deck where the additional bars are no longer needed,
1 ft 2
As := Ab( bar n) As = 0.5 in
sn
As fy
c := c = 0.9 in
0.85 1 f'c 1 ft
dia( barn)
de := ts1 2.0 in de = 4.7 in
2
a := 1 c a = 0.7 in
M cap := f As fy d e
a
M cap = 9.65 kip ft per ft
2
M cap := As fy d e
a
M cap = 10.72 kip ft per ft
2
By inspection of (1) to (5), no additional bar is required beyond design section of the first bay.
Cut off length requirement (5.11.1.2)
15 dia( baro) = 0.781 ft (controls by inspection)
8 Reinforcing Details
8.1 Development of Reinforcement (5.11.2.1.1)
1.0 ft
1.25 Ab fy ksi
Ldb( d b , Ab) := max in ksi f'c
fy
0.4 d b ksi
2
For #5 bars, (
Ldb 0.625 in , 0.31 in) = 15 in
For #6 bars, Ldb (0.75in , 0.44in2) = 18 in
For epoxy coated bars (5.11.2.1.2),
with cover less than 3db or with clear spacing less than 6db ..........times 1.5
not covered above ......times 1.2
bars spaced laterally not less than 6 in. center-to-center, with not less than 3. in clear
cover measured in the direction of spacing.
No more than 50% of the reinforcement shall be terminated at any section, and adjacent bars
shall not be terminated in the same section.
Concrete:
SIP Panel, f'ci := 4.0 ksi
f'c := 5.0 ksi (f'ci + 1 ksi)
Prestressing Steel:
AASHTO M-203, uncoated 7 wire, low-relaxation strands (5.4.4.1)
2
Nominal strand diameter, db := 0.375 in Ap := 0.085 in
(Trends now are toward the use of 3/8 in. diameter strand, per PCI J., 33(2), pp.67-109)
fpe := 0.80 fpy fpe = 194.4 ksi @ service limit state after all losses
(LRFD Table 5.9.3-1)
Ep := 28500 ksi
Mechanical shear ties on the top of panels are not required per PCI, special report, PCI J., 32(2), pp.
26-45.
Structure
Design span L := 89.07 ft
Roadway width BW := 53.0 ft barrier face to barrier face
Girder spacing S := 6.75 ft
Skew angle := 14.65 deg
no. of girder Nb := 8
curb width on deck, cw := 10.5 in
BW ( Nb 1 ) S
Deck overhang (CL. of exterior overhang := + cw overhang = 3.75 ft
girder to end of deck) 2
CIP composite slab: tcs1 := ts1 tsip tcs1 = 4.5 in (used for structural design)
wc := 0.160 kcf
kip
Future overlay (2" HMA), wdw := 0.140kcf 2 in wdw = 0.023
2
ft
Min. SIP thickness if ( 0.55 ts2 > tsip 3.5 in , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
top cover for epoxy-coated main reinforcing steel = 1.5 in. (up to #11 bar)
= 2.0 in. (#14 & #18 bars) (5.12.4 & Table 5.12.3-1)
bottom concrete cover (unprotected main reinforcing) = 1 in. (up to #11 bar)
= 2 in. (#14 & #18 bars)
sacrificial thickness = 0.5 in. (2.5.2.4)
Optional deflection criteria for span-to-depth ratio (LRFD Table 2.5.2.6.3-1)
Min. Depth (continuous span) where S = 6.75 ft (slab span length):
S + 10 ft S + 10 ft
if max 30 t , "OK" , "NG" = "OK" max
30 = 6.7 in
s1
0.54 ft 0.54 ft
Skew Deck (9.7.1.3)
25 deg = 1 it true, the primary reinforcement may be placed in the direction of the skew;
otherwise, it shall be placed perpendicular to the main supporting components.
Loads The precast SIP panels support their own weight, any construction loads, and the weight of the
CIP slabs. For superimposed dead and live loads, the precast panels are analyzed assuming that
they act compositely with the CIP concrete.
kip
Weight of one traffic barrier is tb := 0.52
ft
kip
Weight of one sidewalk is tside := 0.52
ft
kip
future wearing surface wdw = 0.023
2
ft
kip
construction load wcon := 0.050 (9.7.4.1)
(applied to deck panel only) ft
Live loads
(3.6.1.3.3, not for empirical design method) Where deck is designed using the approximate strip
method, specified in 4.6.2.1, the live load shall be taken as the wheel load of the 32.0 kip axle of the
design truck, without lane load, where the strips are transverse.
Maximum factored moments per unit width based on Table A4-1: for S = 6.75 ft
(include the effect of multiple presence factors and the dynamic load allowance)
kip ft
M LLp := 5.10
ft
(3.6.1.3.4) For deck overhang design with a cantilever, not exceeding 6.0 ft from the
centerline of the exterior girder to the face of a continuous concrete railing, the wheel loads
may be replaced with a uniformly distributed line load of 1.0 KLF intensity, located 1 ft from
the face of the railing.
if ( overhang cw 6 ft , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
Load combination
Where traditional design based on flexure is used, the requirements for strength and service
limit states shall be satisfied.
Extreme event limit state shall apply for the force effect transmitted from the bridge railing to
bridge deck (13.6.2).
Fatigue need not be investigated for concrete deck slabs in multi-girder applications (5.5.3.1).
Load Modifier
D := 1.00 for conventional design (1.3.3)
D R I
:= max =1 (1.3.2)
0.95
Strength I load combination - normal vehicular load without wind (3.4.1)
dw := 1.50 for DW
L := 1.75 for LL
Section Properties
3
12 in tsip 4
Isip := Isip = 42.875 in
12
tsip
Ybp := Ybp = 1.75 in
2
Isip Isip
Ytp := tsip Ybp Stp := Sbp :=
Ytp Ybp
3 3
Ytp = 1.75 in Stp = 24.5 in Sbp = 24.5 in
1.5
wc f'c
Ec := 33000 ksi Ec = 4722.6 ksi (5.4.2.4)
kcf ksi
1.5
wc f'ci
Eci := 33000 ksi Eci = 4224.0 ksi
kcf ksi
f'c
modular ratio, n := n = 1.118
f'cs
b := 12 in
b tcs1
Aslab := tcs1 Ybs := tsip + AYbs := Aslab Ybs
n 2
Area Yb A Yb
2 3
CIP slab Aslab = 48.3 in Ybs = 5.75 in Aslab Ybs = 277.7 in
2 3
SIP panel Asip = 42 in Ybp = 1.75 in Asip Ybp = 73.5 in
b t 3
cs1
tcs1
2
Islabc := Aslab Yts
n 4
+ Islabc = 248.7 in
2 12
2 4
Ipc := Asip ( Yb Ybp) + Isip Ipc = 235.1 in
4
Ic := Islabc + Ipc Ic = 483.8 in
Ic 3
Sts := n Sts = 131.6 in @ top of slab
Yts
Required Prestress
Assume the span length conservatively as the panel length, Lsip = 6.34 ft
2
wsip Lsip ft kip
M sip := M sip = 0.234
8 ft
2
wcs Lsip ft kip
M cip := M cip = 0.335
8 ft
For the superimposed dead and live loads, the force effects should be calculated based on analyzing the strip as a
continuous beam supported by infinitely rigid supports (4.6.2.1.6)
ft kip
M DW := 0.10
ft
kip ft
M b := 0.19 (see Strudl s-dl output)
ft
f'c
0.190 ksi = 0.42 ksi (5.9.4.2.2)
ksi
If P se is the total effective prestress force after all losses, and the center of gravity of stands is concentric with the
center of gravity of the SIP panel:
Pse
The required number of strands, Nreq := Nreq = 18.35 Np := ceil( Nreq)
p se Ap
Try Np := 19
Prestress Losses
Loss of Prestress (5.9.5)
f pT = f pES + fpLT
where, fpLT = long-term prestress loss due to creep of concrete, shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of
steel.
Curing time for concrete to attain f'ci is approximately 12 hours: set t := 0.75 day
fpj := 0.75 fpu fpj = 202.5 ksi immediately prior to transfer+steel relax.
(LRFD Table 5.9.3-1)
log( 24.0 t) fpj
fpR0 := 0.55 fpj
40.0 fpy
2
Given: Ap = 0.085 in
2
Aps := Ap Np Aps = 1.615 in per panel
ft 2
Apsip := Aps Apsip = 0.202 in per ft
Wsip
fcgp: concrete stress at c.g. of prestressing tendons due to the prestressing force
immediately after transfer and the self-weight of the member at the sections of
maximum moment.
Guess values: psi := 194.4 ksi prestress tendon stress at transfer (LRFD Table 5.9.3-1)
E ( p si Apsip)
Given (fpj fpR0 psi) Eci = Asip (note: used only when ep = 0 in)
p
psi ( Apsip)
fcgp := fcgp = 0.93 ksi
Asip
5
st := st = 1
f'ci
1+
ksi
Then,
fpi Apsip
fpLT := 10.0 h st + ( 12.0ksi) h st + fpR fpLT = 23.1 ksi
Asip
Np Ap fpe kip
Pe := Pe = 34.57 per foot
Wsip ft
Tension: Allowable tension with bonded reinforcement which is sufficient to resist 120% of the tension
force in the cracked concrete computed on the basis of an uncracked section (5.9.4.1.2).
f'ci
0.24 ksi = 0.48 ksi
ksi
f'ci
min 0.0948
ksi
ksi
= 0.19 ksi (Controls)
0.200 ksi
Because the strand group is concentric with the precast concrete panel, the midspan section is the
critical section that should be checked.
Stress at Midspan
Effective stress after transfer,
Np Ap p si kip
Psi := Psi = 39.244
Wsip ft
kip ft
M sip = 0.234
ft
Msip ft Psi ft
S = 1.05 ksi < allowable 0.60 f'ci = 2.4 ksi OK
tp Asip
Msip ft Psi ft
S = 0.82 ksi < allowable 0.60 f'ci = 2.4 ksi OK
bp Asip
kip
Pe = 34.57
ft
f'c
fr := 0.24 ksi fr = 0.54 ksi
ksi
ft kip
M cip = 0.33
ft
2
kip Lsip ft kip
M const := 0.050 M const = 0.25
2 8 ft
ft
Deformation due to
Lsip
if min 0.25 in if Lsip 10 ft , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
180
sip
L
min 0.75 in otherwise
240
Tension:
f'c
0.0948 ksi = 0.21 ksi (5.9.4.2.2)
ksi
Pe ft ( Msip + Mcip) ft (MDW + Mb) ft < allowable 0.45 f'c = 2.25 ksi OK
= 1.1 ksi
Asip Stp St
Stresses due to live load + one-half the sum of effective prestress and permanent loads,
fpy
k := 2 1.04 k = 0.28 (LRFD Eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)
fpu
2
As := 0 in
2
A's := 0 in (conservatively)
dp, distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the prestressing tendons,
dp := ts1 0.5 tsip dp = 6.25 in
Aps fpu
c := c = 1.47 in
fpu
0.85 f'cs 1 Wsip + k Aps
dp
fps := fpu 1 k
c
fps = 252.24 ksi
dp
ld 2
fpsld := ksi + fpe fpsld = 177.57 ksi (may be too conservative)
1.6 d b 3
M n := Aps fps d p
a
2
M n = 134.4 kip ft
Mr kip ft
M r := M r = 16.81 per ft
Wsip ft
kip ft
Mu Mr = 1 OK where M u = 10.02
ft
Limits of Reinforcement
Minimum Reinforcement (5.7.3.3.2)
Compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force (after all losses) at midspan
Pe ft
fpeA := fpeA = 0.82 ksi (compression)
Asip
kip ft
M dnc := M cip + M sip M dnc = 0.57
ft
Sb Sb kip ft
M cr := ( fr + fpeA) M dnc 1 1.2 M cr = 14.13
ft Sbp ft
kip ft
M r 1.2 M cr = 1 OK where M r = 16.81
ft
Deck shall be subdivided into strips perpendicular to the supporting components (4.6.2.1.1).
Continuous beam with span length as center to center of supporting elements (4.6.2.1.6).
Wheel load may be modeled as concentrated load or load based on tire contact area.
Strips should be analyzed by classical beam theory.
Ld Ld
Since 1.50 = 1 , where = 13.2 (4.6.2.1.5)
S S
therefore, all the wheel load shall be applied to primary strip. Otherwise, the wheels shall
be distributed between intersecting strips based on the stiffness ratio of the strip to sum of
the strip stiffnesses of intersecting strips.
Critical Section
The design section for negative moments and shear forces may be taken as follows:
Design critical section for negative moment and shear shall be at d c, (4.6.2.1.6)
dc := min bf 15 in
1
dc = 5 in from CL of girder (may be too
3 conservative, see training notes)
Maximum factored moments per unit width based on Table A4-1: for S = 6.75 ft
(include multiple presence factors and the dynamic load allowance)
kip ft
M LLn := 4.00 (max. -M at d c from CL of girder)
ft
kip ft dc
M DCn := 0.18 (dead load from deck overhang and sidl = 0.062
ft only, max. -M at dc at interior girder, S
conservative)
kip ft
M DWn := 0.10
ft
Design of Section
Normal flexural resistance of a rectangular section may be determined by using equations for
a flanged section in which case b w shall be taken as b (5.7.3.2.3).
0.85 f'cs ft 2 2 M un ft 2
As := dn dn As = 0.3 in per ft
fy 0.85 f f'cs ft
2
Ab( bar ) := 0.20 in if bar = 4
2
0.31 in if bar = 5
2
0.44 in if bar = 6
2
0.60 in if bar = 7
1 ft 2
Asn := Ab( barn) Asn = 0.41 in per ft
sn
where de := d n
Asn fy
c := c = 0.72 in
0.85 1 f'cs 1 ft
f'cs
frs := 0.24 ksi frs = 0.48 ksi use SIP panel concrete strength
ksi
Es
n := n = 6.866 n := max[ [ ceil( ( n 0.495) ) 6 ] ]
Ecs
2
( n 1 )Asn = 2.48 in
2
Agc := ts2 ft Agc = 102 in
3
ft ts2 2 2 4
Icg := + Agc ( 0.5 ts2 Yts) + ( n 1)Asn ( Yts d s) Icg = 615.49 in
12
frs Icg
M cr := M cr = 5.817 kip ft 1.2 M cr = 6.98 kip ft
Yts
h := ts1 h = 8 in
dc
s := 1 + s = 1.581
0.7( h d c)
kip ft
M sn = 4.28
ft
Es
n := n = 6.866 n := ceil( ( n 0.495) ) use slab concrete strength
Ecs
Asn 3
:= = 6.056 10
ft d n
k( ) := ( n)2 + 2 n n k( ) = 0.252
k( )
j( ) := 1 j( ) = 0.916
3
M sn ft
fsa :=
Asn j( ) d n fsa = 23.85 ksi
700 e in 700 e in
if sn 2 dc , "OK" , "NG" = "OK" where sn = 9 in 2 d c = 9.3 in
fsa fsa
s s
ksi ksi
where Ag := ts2 1 ft
Ag ksi 2
Atem := 0.11 Atem = 0.19 in per ft
fy
web thickness bw := 7 in
bf b w
Seff := S bf + Seff = 5.83 ft
2
percent := min 67
220
S percent = 67
eff
ft
Bottom longitudinal reinforcement (convert to equivalent mild reinforcement area):
2
percent Aps fpy in
As := As = 0.55 per ft
100 Wsip fy ft
1 ft 2
use bar # bar := 5 s := 6.0 in As := Ab( bar ) As = 0.62 in per ft OK
s
Precast Concrete
:= :=
:= :=
:= =
:= =
Rupture Modulus
:= =
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:= :=
Section depth
:=
:=
Section Properties
:=
:=
:=
:=
:= =
:= =
( )
:= =
:= =
:= =
HL-93 loading is travelling in 2 traffic lanes; for the maximum force effect taken at midspan:
:= + =
this includes a 33% dynamic load allowance and a multiple presence factor of 1.0
Number of lanes
:=
:= =
:= +
=
:= + =
:= =
:= + =
:= + =
:= (at 0.4L point) =
:= =
:= =
Conservatively, the design moment will be the maximum dead and live load moments at midspan
Service I
:= + + =
Service III
:= + + =
Strength I
:= + + =
:=
:=
:=
:=
+ ( )
>
=
:=
( ) <
( ) <
( ) <
(
)
< =
Distance to the prestressing steel C.G. measured from the bottom of the girder at midspan:
:=
:=
:= +
:= + =
+
:= =
:= =
Transfer Length
:= =
( )
:= =
:= =
:=
( ) =
+
:= =
:= =
Jacking PS force:
:=
:= =
:= =
+
:= =
:= =
:= =
:= + =
Release PS force
:=
( ) =
( )
:= + =
Total prestress loss
:= + =
Effective PS force
:=
( ) =
Allowable stresses:
Compression:
Tension:
, =
( )
Stress at transfer point:
:= + = OK
:= + = OK
:= + = OK
:= + = OK
+ +
:= =
OK
+ + +
:= = OK
+
:= =
OK
:= + = OK
( + + )
:= =
:= + = OK
:= :=
( )
:= =
+
( )
:= =
+
( )
:=
:=
:= =
( )
:=
:=
=
+ OK
Maximum RF
= 0.42 maxmimum (LRFD 5.7.3.3.1-1) OK
( )
Mimumum RF
+
:= =
:= +
( ) =
Mn must be greater than the lesser of 1.2 Mcr and 1.33 Mu (LRFD 5.7.3.3.2)
= OK
Self-Weight Effect:
:= =
Prestress Effect:
:=
+
:=
( )
:= =
Superimposed Loads
+
( )
:= =
Camber at Transfer
:= + =
:= + =
:= =
Final Camber
:= + =
Reference
Reinforcing Steel - deformed bars LRFD 5.4.3
Yield strength f'y = 60.00 ksi BDM 5.1.2
Elastic modulus Es = 29000.00 ksi LRFD 5.4.3.2
Prestressing Input
Strand diam. db = 0.60 in Area = 0.217 in2 BDM 5.1.3-A
Ultimate Strength fpu = 270.00 ksi LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
Table of Contents
Content
1 Structure:
Single Span Bridge
2 Live load
HL-93
3 Material Properties
Concrete
4 Allowable Concrete Stresses at Service Limit State
Tensile stress limit
Compressive stress limits after all losses
5 Computation of Section Properties
Girder and Composite Section Properties (Table 5-1)
Transformed Section Properties (Table 5-2)
6 Limit State
Service limit state
Load combinations and load factors
7 Vehicular Live Load
Design vehicular live load
Maximum live load force effect
Dynamic load allowance (Impact, IM)
Distribution of Live Load, Dfi (Beam Slab Bridges)
Shear Distribution Factor
Table 7-2: Summary of Live Load Distribution Factors:
Table 7-3: Distributed Live Loads
8 Computation of Stresses
Stresses Due to Weight of Girder (Table 8-1 thru 8-5)
Concrete Stresses Due to Traffic Barrier (Table 8-6 thru 8-8)
Concrete Stresses Due to Concrete Deck and Legs (Table 8-9 thru 8-11)
Concrete Stresses Due to LL+IM (Composite Section) (Table 8-12)
Summary of Stresses at dv (Table 8-13)
Summary of Stresses at Mid-Span (Table 8-14)
9 Approximate Evaluation of Pre-Stress Losses
Time Dependent Losses
Loss due to Strand Relaxation
Loss due to elastic shortening
10 Stresses at Service Limit State
Stresses After Elastic Shortening and Relaxation (Table 10-1)
Stresses After Losses (Noncomposite) (Table 10-2)
Summary of Stresses at Service Limit State (Table 10-3)
Tensile Stress Limit in Areas Without Bonded Reinforcement (at dv)
Compressive Stress Limit at Service - I Load Combination
Tensile Stress Limit at Service - III Load Combination
Stresses at transfer
Vehicular live load designated as " HL-93 " shall consist of a combination of : LRFD 3.6.1.2.1
Design truck or design tandem, plus
Design lane load
Design truck is equivalent to AASHTO HS20-44 truck. LRFD 3.6.1.2.2
The design lane shall consist of a 0.64 klf, uniformly distributed in the longitudinal LRFD 3.6.1.2.4
direction. Design lane load shall be assumed to be uniformly distributed over 10 ft width
in the transverse direction.
Design tandem shall consist of a pair of 25.0 kip axles spaced at 4'-0" apart LRFD 3.6.1.2.3
3 Material Properties
Concrete
LRFD Specifications allows a concrete compressive strength with a range of LRFD 5.4.2.1
2.4 to 10.0 ksi at 28 days. Compressive strength for prestressed concrete
and decks shall not be less than 4.0 ksi.
Ig
Section Modulus: (Bottom) Sb = = 2446.8 in3
y bg
Girder
Ig
(Top) St = = 2446.8 in3
y tg
Composite (Bottom) I comp 3819.5 in3
Sb = =
ybc
(Top girder) I comp 7682.1 in3
St = =
y tgc
(Top slab) I comp 4183.06 in3
St = =
y tsc
Where:
for loads&
Load Modifier for Ductility, Redundancy, which a max. value
Operational of gi is appropriate
Importance
hi = 0 .95
i R I LRFD 1.3.2.1-2
1
hi = 1 .00 for loads which a min. value of gi is appropriate LRFD 1.3.2.1-3
D R I
hD = Ductility factor LRFD 1.3.3
hR = Redundancy factor LRFD 1.3.4
hI = Operational Importance factor LRFD 1.3.5
hi = 1.00 for any ordinary structure
i Qi Rn = Rr
Where:
gi = Load Factor, statistically based multiplier applied to force effects LRFD 1.3.2.1
Qi = Force Effect (Moment or Shear) "
f= Resistance Factor "
Rn = Nominal Resistance "
Rr = Factored Resistance "
LFRD 3.4.1-1
Q = iQ i
Where:
gi = Load Factors specified in Tables 1 & 2
Qi = Force Effects from loads specified in LRFD
Strength-I load combination relating to the normal vehicle use of the bridge without LRFD 3.4.1
wind. "
Service-I load combination relating to the normal operational use of the bridge. "
Service-III load combination relating only to tension in prestressed concrete "
structures with the objective of crack control.
Q Strength I = DC DC + DW DW + 1 .75( LL + IM ) LRFD Tables 3.4.1-1 & 2
Max Moment, Mmax, occurs near midspan (CL) underneath the nearest concentrated
load (P1) when that load is the same distance to midspan as the center of gravity (+ CG)
is to midspan. Use the Truck or Tandem (Near Midspan) and the Lane (At Midspan)
maximum moments together to be conservative.
The multiple presence factor shall not be applied in conjunction with approximate LRFD 3.6.1.1.2
load distribution except for exterior beams.
The typical x-section g applies to voided and solid slabs w P.T. LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.1-1
the composite deck makes the section significantly connected to act as a unit.
DFMExt = e x DFMInt
Where Skew Reduction Factor is included in DFMInt and Correction Factor LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1
de "
e = 1.04 + 1 .0
25
barrier footprint = 18.50 in LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d
de = 2.00 ft
e= 1.12
130 L J
Two or more Lanes Loaded:
0.4 0.1 0.05
b b Ic b
DFVInt = = 0.456 "
156 12 .0 L J 48
12 .0 L
RF = 1 .0 + tan = 1.000 "
90 d
Shear Distribution Factor for Skewed Interior Girder,
DFVInt = 0.456
de
e = 1 . 25 + 1 .0 = 1.06 "
20
DFVExt = e x DFVInt "
0 .5
d + b / 12 2
e =1+ e 1 . 0 = 1.32 "
40
Table 8-10
x (ft) MSIDL (ft-kips)
dv = 1.38 11.46
3.00 24.20
w x 45.76
M D+L = D + L (L x ) = 6.00
2 64.68
9.00
mid-span = 29.00 123.35
Summary of stresses at dv
Table 8-13:
Top of Bottom of Top of Top of Bottom of
Stresses, ksi
girder girder slab girder girder
Weight of Girder -0.139 0.139
Weight Traffic Barrier -- -- -0.019 -0.010 0.020
Weight of Deck -0.056 0.056
Live Load plus Impact Service - I -- -- -0.131 -0.071 0.143
Live Load plus Impact Service - III -- -- -0.104 -0.057 0.114
FpiAps
f pLT = 10 hst +12h st + fpR = 19.53 ksi LRFD 5.9.5.3-1
Ag
h = 1.7-.01H = 0.9 LRFD 5.9.5.3-2
st = 5/(1+fci)= 0.625 LRFD 5.9.5.3-3
Losses due to elastic shortening should be added to time-dependent losses to
determine the total losses.
Pi Pi e 2
f ps = = -2.86 ksi
Ag I g
M ge
fg = = 0.78 ksi
Ig
fcgp = fg + fps = -2.08 ksi BDM 5.1.4-3
Elastic shortening loss,
E
f pES = p f cgp = 11.14 ksi LRFD 5.9.5.2.3a-1
E ci
fpT = fpES + fpLT = 30.67 ksi LRFD 5.9.5.1-1
Above relaxation losses not added to Time Dependent Losses, but will be used for
Service Limit State Total Transfer PS Losses, Section 10.
Ac Sb
Summary of Stresses at Service Limit States
Table 10-3:
dv 3' 6' 9' mid-span
Prestressing stress + self wt of girder (using full length of girder) girder + ps
fg(topDL+PS) (ksi) = 0.10 -0.02 -0.28 -0.40 -1.03
fg(botDL+PS) (ksi) = -3.02 -2.91 -2.64 -2.76 -2.38
Construction stress at top & bottom of girder (noncomposite) gir + ps + deck
fg(topDL+PS) = 0.06 -0.16 -0.52 -0.74 -1.64
fg(botDL+PS) = -2.72 -2.50 -2.14 -2.14 -1.46
Stresses due to all loads plus prestressing : gir+ps+deck+barr+(LL+im)
fg(topDL+LL+PS) = -0.02 -0.32 -0.84 -1.19 -2.43
fg(botDL+LL+PS) = -2.56 -2.16 -1.50 -1.25 0.13
Stresses due to Transient loads and one-half of permanent loads plus prestressing:
.5(gir+ps+deck+barr)+(LL+im)
fg[topLL+(1/2DL+PS)] = -0.05 -0.24 -0.56 -0.78 -1.56
fg[botLL+(1/2(DL+PS))] = -1.21 -0.93 -0.47 -0.24 0.75
Stresses due at service III load combination: gir+ps+deck+barr+.8(LL+im)
fg[bot.8*LL+(DL+PS)] = -2.58 -2.22 -1.61 -1.40 -0.15
Stresses at transfer
The prestressing force may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at free end to a
maximum at transfer length, lt.
lt = 60 x dstrand/12 = 3.00 ft = 36.00 in. LRFD 5.5.4.1
Flexural forces
Strength - I load combination is to be considered for normal vehicular load LRFD 3.4.1
without wind.
Load factors :
DC = 1.25 Components and attachments (Girder + TB + Deck) LRFD TABLE 3.4.1-1
The average stress in prestressing strands, fps, may be taken as: LRFD 5.7.3
c
f ps = f pu 1 k LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1
d p
f py 0.28
k = 2 1 . 04 = LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-2
f pu
Location of neutral axis of composite transformed section :
For rectangular section without mild reinforcement :
c= 9.156 in
a = 1 c = 5.95 in < tf = 9.50 in. LRFD 5.7.3.2.2
a
Rectangular: M n = A ps f ps d p = 1857 ft.-kips LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1
2
T-shaped: a
Mn = Aps f ps d p + 0.85f `c (b bw )hf (a / 2 hf / 2) = "
2
1583 ft.-kips
Mn = 1857 ft.-kips
Flexural resistance,
S
M cr* = Sc ( f r + f pe ) M d / nc c 1 Sc fr = 222.71 ft-kips LRFD 5.7.3.3.2-1
Sb
fpe = -3.56 Stress at extreme fiber due to prestressing LRFD 5.4.2.6
Mcr = 511 ft.-kips
Mr = 1857 >1.2 Mcr = 613.4 ft.-kips LRFD 5.7.3.3.2
2
l d K f ps f pe d b K= 1.0 LRFD 5.11.4.2-1
3
fps = 233.01 ksi
fpe = 171.83 ksi
db = 0.60 in.
ld 5.92 ft
12 Shear Design
Design procedure
The shear design of prestressed members shall be based on the general procedure of WSDOT Design
Memo LRFD
AASHTO - LRFD Bridge Design Specifications article 5.8.3.4.2 using the Modified Shear Design,
Compression Field Theory. 3/19/02
Shear design for prestressed girder will follow the (replacement) flow chart for LRFD WSDOT Design
Figure C.5.8.3.4.2-5. This procedure eliminates the need for q angle and b factor Memo, Shear
iterations. Design 6/18/01
Effective Web Width, bv, and Effective Shear Depth, dv LRFD 5.8.2.9
"
Effective web width shall be taken as the minimum web width, measured parallel to the
neutral axis, between the resultants of the compressive and tensile forces due to flexure
calculate the effective value of fpo, the parameter taken as modulus of elasticity of
prestressing tendons multiplied by the locked in difference in strain between the
prestressing tendons and the surrounding concrete.
fpo = 0.70fpu LRFD 5.8.3.4.2
Where the distance between the edge of girder (or beginning of prestress) and the CL of
Bearing (BRG)
x = 5.00 in.
accounting for bridge skew gives a long. distance from the face of girder as,
x = 5.00 in.
fpo = 114.68 ksi
Factored Moment
Where: Factored moment is not to be taken less than Vudv LRFD 5.8.3.4.2
Mu = ( i i Mi ) LRFD 1.3.2.1-1
Ultimate moment at dv from support, Mu
Girder, Mg = 28.8 ft-kips
Traffic Barrier, Mtb = 6.6 ft-kips
Deck + Legs, MD+L = 11.7 ft-kips
MDC = 47.0 ft-kips
MLL+IM x DFMExt = 45.5 ft-kips
Moment Force Effect,
Mu = 1.00(1.25MDC + 1.50MDW + 1.75MLL+IM) LRFD TABLE 3.4.1-1
Mu
+ 0 .5 N u + V u V p A ps f po
x =
dv 0 .002
2 ( E s As + E p A ps )
Applied Factored Axial forces,
Nu = 0.00 kips
Factored Shear,
Vu = 141.36 kips
Vertical Component of Prestress Forces,
Vp = 0.00
Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member,
Aps(T) = Nbb x Aps = 4.34 in.2
Prestress/Concrete Modulus of Elasticity Parameter
fpo = 114.68 ksi
Modulus of Elasticity of Mild Reinforcement,
Es = 29000 ksi
Area of Mild Reinforcement in flexural tension side of the member,
As(bottom) = ns(bottom)As
Where there are 4 No. 4 bars BDM fig. 5-A-XX
As(bottom) = 0.80 in.2
Modulus of Elasticity of Prestress Strands,
Ep = 28500 ksi
Substitution gives,
x = -0.0007317 < 0, so use the following Equation 3: LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-1
If the value of ex from LRFD Equations 5.8.3.4.2-1 or 2 is negative, the strain shall be
taken as:
M u WSDOT Design
+ 0 . 5 N u + (V u V p ) A ps f po Memo Shear
x = v
d Design, 6/18/2001
2 ( E c A c + E s A s + E p A ps ) & LRFD Eqn.
5.8.3.4.2-3
Where: Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete,
Ec = 5871.1 ksi
Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member,
Ac = 216.00 in.2
Substitution gives,
ex = -0.0000760 Equation 3 Governs
ex = -0.0000760
Determination of and
Shear Stress Ratio of: 0.052 Is a value just 0.075
1000 x the Long. Strain: -0.076 Is a value just -0.05
LRFD Table
From Table 1: = 21.00 deg. 5.8.3.4.2-1 & See
= 4.10 Theta and Beta
Worksheet
bv s go v
Av ( provided) 0 .0316 f c' Use Spacing: 12.00 in 13.0 in LRFD 5.8.2.5-1
fy OK
where :
s= 12.0 in.
Required Area of Steel,
b v s gov
0 . 0316 f c' = 0.39 in.2
fy
0.40 > 0.39 in.2 OK for Min. Transverse Reinf.
d M 0.5Nu Vu
As f y + Ap s f p s v T = u + + 0.5Vs Vp cot LRFD 5.8.3.5-1
lt d v
As = 0.80 in2 BDM fig. 5-A-XX
fy = 60.00 ksi
Aps = 4.34 in2 Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of
the member (w/o unbonded)
fps = 233.01 ksi fps multiplied by dv/lt ratio to account for lack of
prestress development
dv = 16.84 in.
lt = 3.00 ft = 36.00 in
Mu = 198.4 ft-kips
f= 1.00 Flexural in prestressed concrete LRFD 5.5.4.2
f= 0.90 Shear "
f= 0.75 Axial Compression "
Nu = 0.00
Vu = 141.36 kips
Vs = 81.00 kips
Vp = 0.00 kips
q= 21.00 degree
by substitution:
521.135 445.0 kips OK for Longitudinal Reinforcement
ps bot. = ps bb + ps db
L2
ps bb + ps db = (Pbb e bb + k db Pdb e db )
8 E ci I c
Force and eccentricity due to the bonded bottom prestress strands are:
L 2 l db
k db = = 0.847
L
The average sleeved length of the debonded strands,
ldb = 4.5 ft = 54.0 in
Force and eccentricity due to the debonded bottom prestress strands are:
Pt e t L2
ps top =
8 E ci I c
Prestressing force and eccentricity of top strands.
Pt = 163.9 kips et = -6.00 in.
pstop = 0.522 in. downward
Creep Coefficients
CF = -[(ps+g)((t,ti)+1)]
Creep Coefficient :
khc = 1.56 -.008H H= 80.00 average humidity (AASHTO fig. 5.4.2.3.3-1) LRFD 5.4.2.3.2-3
V/S = 4.03 in Void end from end of girder = 15 in. LRFD 5.4.2.3.2
Table 13-1:
ti t kvs khc kf ktd (t,ti)
(7,30) 7.00 30.00 1.00 0.92 0.63 0.48 0.41
(30,40) 30.00 40.00 1.00 0.92 0.63 0.55 0.40
(7,40) 7.00 40.00 1.00 0.92 0.63 0.55 0.48
(7,90) 7.00 90.00 1.00 0.92 0.63 0.73 0.64
(90,120) 90.00 120.00 1.00 0.92 0.63 0.78 0.50
(7,120) 7.00 120.00 1.00 0.92 0.63 0.78 0.68
Assume 1 Day of accelerated cure by radiant heat or steam. 1 Day accelerated cure = 7 LRFD 5.4.2.3.2
normal Days of cure. Age of Concrete when load is initially applied,
C=sidl+tb = 0.76 in
Time period to display (40, 120) = 40.00 Deck thickness at Piers = 5.13 in.
1.00
0.90
0.80
in. 0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
0.00
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Time (days)
Design Specifications
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 4th Edition dated 2007 and interims
through 2008.
It has been suggested that for concrete bridges, with the exception of box girders and
solid superstructure, this effective width should be calculated as follows:
Beff = Dc + Ds
Where:
Dc = diameter of column
Ds = depth of superstructure including cap beam
Int Int
if
Int
MIntsei if M sei Ext Int
M sei M sei M sei = M sei
Ext
M sei = M sei
Int
M sei M sei Ext
M ifsei = MIntsei if Ext Int Ext M CG M CG
M sei < M seiM sei < M seiM sei =
po
M CGext= int CGext
po
M sei Ext
Mwhere:
sei = M sei
Int
if where:
MMsei Int
CG < M M
if Ext Int < M Ext N g + Npog N g +MNpog
int Msei
sei sei seiM sei = M sei ext= int
Int
M sei Ext
< M sei NMgint where:
where:sei
= = Npo
where:
Numberint
g = of girder encompassed
Number of girder by N
the
int
+ N gbywidth.
effective
encompassed
g the + N gextwidth.
N geffective
int ext
Ext N gintM
CG N +Number
= =po g Number N Nintg Number
=
ext g = =of of
girder of girder encompassed by the effective width.
girder
Number
encompassed
ofof
outside
Number thegirder by
encompassed
effective
girder the
outside effective
width.
the bywidth.
effectivethewidth.
effective width.
M sei M = N g
ext
N g
Number of girderNumber
encompassed
sei
N int by the
ofgextended
ext effective width.
+= N g straight
Number =strands
of girder
Number
outside
needed toof girder
theneeded
develop effective
outside width.
the effective
theeffective
required moment width.
capacity at thecapacity
end of at the end of
N ext Number of= ext
N extended
Number straight
of strands
girder outside the to develop the required
width. moment
Number of girdergirder is the
outside
Number
based
g
on theiswidth.
girder
ofeffective
extended
Number
yield
based
g
strength
on the of
straight
of extended
strands
thestrength
yield strands. of the strands.
straight
needed strands
to develop
needed
the
er of girder encompassed by the effective
Number ofwidth.
extended straight strands needed totorequired
developmoment
develop the required
the capacity
required moment
at thecapacity
moment end of at the end of
capacity
girder
ed straight strands needed toisdevelop
based
at thegirder
on
thethe
end isyield
basedstrength
required
of girder on
is the
moment yield
ofcapacity
based the
onstrength
strands.
theatyieldofend
the the strands.
of
strength
er of girder outside the effective width. 1of the strands. 1
the yield strength of the strands. N = 12 M N [
=K12 M
M
ht strands needed to develop the required moment capacity at the end of 0 .9A 1f 0
[
K M SIDL ] ]
d.91A ps1f py d
ps sei
ps sei
SIDL
d strength of the strands. N ps =112 M N sei =[ Nps=M
K
12 M [
12[MseiK KM
M SIDL]
ps ]py0.9A
psfpyd
]
ps = 12 [M sei K ] ps sei
SIDL SIDL
M Where:
where: SIDL where:
0 .9A ps f py0d.9A ps f py d
0 . 9 A
1ps = area f d
2 [M sei K M SIDL ]A ps = Afwhere: ps ofpyeach extended strand, in^2
where: = A psyield
area of=each extended
area of
strength strand,
of each in^2 steel
extended
prestressing strand, in^2 in LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
specified
0 . 9 Apy f d
f A = =d ps = fpy
yield Adistance
area =of= eachfrom
strength of
yield top
of of
extended
area slab
each
strand,
prestressing
strength to c.g.
extended
in^2
steel
of of extended
strand,
specified
prestressing inin^2
LRFD
steel strands, in. Table 5.4.4.1-1
Tablein5.4.4.1-1
specified LRFD
py ps py ps
area of each extended strand, =MSIDL
f =in^2
d
=
f = moment
yield
distance
py strength
=from top
d ofdue
yield tofrom
slab
distance
py
SIDL
ofprestressing
strength
to c.g. (traffic
topof
steel
of barrier,
ofprestressing
specified
extended
slab insidewalk,
steel
LRFD
strands,
to c.g. of etc.)
specified
in. Table
extended perin.girder
in5.4.4.1-1
LRFD
strands, Table 5.4.4.1-1
yield strength of prestressing = steelK specified
= span moment
in LRFD distribution
Table 5.4.4.1-1 factor use maximum of (K1 and K2)
f each extended strand, in^2M SIDLd = = distance
moment
M d = =duefrom
flexural
SIDL
distance
top of(traffic
tomoment
SIDL
resistance slab
duefrom
tobarrier,
to
factor c.g.
top of(traffic
SIDL slab
extended
tobarrier,
sidewalk,c.g.strands,
of extended
etc.) perin.
girderstrands,
sidewalk, etc.) perin.girder
distance from top of slabKto c.g.= =of extended
KM
moment=strands, in.
= duedistribution
tomoment
SIDL (traffic
due to barrier,
SIDL (traffic
sidewalk,
factorbarrier,
of etc.)
sidewalk,
per girder
K2)ofetc.)
(K1 per
andgirder
strength of prestressing steelMspecified
SIDL
inspan
LRFD moment
SIDL
Table span moment
5.4.4.1-1 factor use maximum
distribution use (K1 and
maximum K2)
moment due to SIDL (traffic barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder
K
ce from top of slab to c.g. of = = strands,
extended span
K =in.
flexural moment
=resistance distribution
span moment
factor
flexural factor
resistancedistribution
use maximum
factor factor useof (K1
maximum
and K2) of (K1 and K2)
span moment distribution factor=use maximum of (K1 and K2)
sidewalk, etc.)
nt due to SIDL (traffic barrier, per
flexural = girder
resistance
flexural
factor
resistance factor
flexural resistance factor EI is constant
moment distributionAssume Assumeofand
factor use maximum EI(K1isGirders
constant
and K2)haveandfixed-fixed
Girders have supports for both
fixed-fixed spans.for both spans.
supports
al resistance factor Assume EI is constant
Assume EIandisGirders
constanthave
andfixed-fixed
Girders have
supports
fixed-fixed
for both
supports
spans.for both spans.
tant and Girders have fixed-fixed supports for
K both spans.
K K K
Page 5-394 1 2 1 2 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
L1 L1 L2 L2
Girders have fixed-fixed K1
supports for both spans. K2 K1 K2 K1 = K = 1 K2 = K2 =
June 2016
K K L L L L L1 + L12 L1 + LL12 + L2 L +LL2
strands needed to develop the required
moment capacity at the end of girder i
Assume EI is constant and Girders have fixed-fixed supports for both spans. based on the yield strength of the stran
<sp>
Chapter 5 Concrete Structures
Deleted: Nu
strands needed
1 K 2 K <sp>where:
moment capac
L L
Assume EI is constant and Girders have fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
<sp>= area of each extended strand,
based on the y
K =
Assume EI is constant and Girders have fixed-fixed 1 K = for both spans.
supports 1
2
2 in^2
<sp>
L1 L2 L +L 1 L +L2 1 2
= yield strength of prestressing steel
specified in LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
<sp>= distance from top of slab to c.
1 K 2 K of extended strands, in.
<sp>where:
L <sp><sp>= L moment
<sp>= area o
due to SIDL
1 K =
1
2
2
K =
(traffic barrier,
in^2
sidewalk, etc.) per gird
L1 c.g. of ext. Str. L2 c.g. of Superst 1 2L +L 1 L +L = yield stren
= span moment distribution factor u
2 specified in L
maximum of (K1 and K2)
<sp>= distan
<sp>= flexural resistance factor
of extended st
<sp><sp>=
d (traffic barrier
c.g. of ext. Str. c.g. of Superst = span mom
maximum of (
h <sp>= flexu
References:
References:
Holombo, J., M.J.N. Priestley, and F. Seible, "Continuity of Precast Prestressed Spliced-Girder
Holombo, J., M.J.N. Priestley, and F. Seible, "Continuity of Precast
Bridge Under Seismic Loads", PCI Journal, 45(2), 40-63, March-April, 2000.
Prestressed
Spliced-Girder Bridge Under Seismic Loads", PCI Journal, 45(2), 40-63, March-April,
References:
2000.
Given: Holombo, J., M.J.N. Priestley, and F. Seible, "Continuity of Precast Prestressed Spliced-Girder
DGiven:
c = Bridge
5.00 Under Seismic Loads",
ft. diameter PCI Journal, 45(2), 40-63, March-April, 2000.
of column
Ds c =
D = 12.93 5.00 ft. diameter
ft. depth of column
of superstructure including cap beam
D s Given: B
= eff 12.93
= ft.5 +depth
12.93 of superstructure
= 17.93 ft. including cap beam
B ' = = 4.00 Dksi,
f ceff
c5 += 12.93 =
5.00 17.93
ft. ft.
diameter of column
specified compressive strength of deck concrete, Class 4000D.
f'dc = = 0.6 ''D s4.00 = ksi,strand
nominal specified
12.93 compressive
ft. depth
diameter in^2 strength
of superstructure
=0.217 includingof cap
deck concrete, Class 4000D.
beam
dfb = = 270 ksi0.6''
b
nominal B eff strand
= diameter
5 + 12.93 ==0.217
17.93 in^2
ft.
specified tensile strength of prestressing strands.
fpu
pu
= 270'= ksi specified tensilecompressive
4.00 ksi, specified strength of prestressing
strength strands.
of deck concrete, ClassLRFD
4000D.
LRFDf Table 5.4.4.1-1
Table 5.4.4.1-1
c
f = for low0.6
d b ksi '' nominal strand diameter =0.217 in^2
fpy = = 243 ksif243 ksi ksi relaxation
for low strand
relaxation strand
py
Lc = 25.00 ft. column clear height used to determine overstrength shear associated
with the overstrength
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 moments, ft. Page 5-395
June 2016 top = 16000.0plastic overstrength moment at top of column, kip-ft
M po
Base
L L2 Pin Pin Far End 1.33 1.33
Condition
L L1 L2 Pin 1.33
LL1 1 1 1 LL2 2 22 Pin
Pin
1.33
1.33
L1 L2 Fixed 1.00
Concrete Structures L1 L2 Fixed
Fixed Pin 1.00 1.33
1.00 Chapter 5
L1 L2 Fixed 1.00
Fixed 1.00
Fixed 1.00
L c = 25.00 ft. column
L clearclear heightusedused to determine overstrength shear associated
Lc Lc c ==Lc = = 25.00 25.00
25.00
withwith
25.00
the
ft.ft. column
column
theft.
ft. column
clear
overstrength
column
overstrength
height
clear
height
moments,
clear
moments,
used
height ft.
totodetermine
height
used
determine
ft. toused determine
overstrength
to determine
overstrength shear
shear associated
overstrengthoverstrength
shear associatedshear
associated
Lc = with the overstrength
25.00 ft. column moments,
clear height ft. used to determine overstrength shear associated
L c =
top = 16000.0associated
with
25.00the
16000.0
with theft.
plastic with
overstrength
column the
moments,
clear
overstrength
overstrength
overstrength
height
moments,
ft. to
used
moment
ft.
moments,
determine
at of
top ft. shear associated
overstrength
of column, kip-ft
topM = plastic overstrength moment attop
top column, kip-ft
MMpopo top= =
top = po 16000.0
with plastic
16000.0
16000.0 the overstrength
plastic
overstrength
plastic
moment
overstrength
moments,
overstrength
at
ft.
moment at at
of column,
moment
top ofofcolumn,
kip-ft
at topkip-ft
of column, kip-ft
M MBase po = 16500.0
16000.0 plastic overstrength moment base
top column,
of column, kip-ft.
kip-ft
MMpo
Base
Base M =po=top
po =
top = 16500.0
16500.0
16000.0plastic
plastic
16500.0 overstrength
overstrength
plastic
plastic moment
moment
overstrength
overstrength atatbase
moment base ofofcolumn,
moment
at top column,
of at
column, kip-ft.
kip-ft.
base of column, kip-ft.
kip-ft
po M
MM po =
Base 16500.0 plastic overstrength moment at base of column,etc.)kip-ft.
Base = 517.0
16500.0 moment
plastic due to SIDL
overstrength (traffic
moment barrier,
at base sidewalk,
of column, kip-ft.per girder,
MM MSIDL
SIDLM = = ==
po
SIDL
= 517.0
517.0 517.0 moment
moment
16500.0 moment
plastic due
due to
to SIDL
due
SIDL
overstrength (traffic
to moment
SIDL
(traffic barrier,
(traffic
barrier,
at sidewalk,
sidewalk,
base of etc.)
barrier,
etc.) per
per
column,etc.) girder,
sidewalk,
girder,
kip-ft. etc.) per girder,
MMSIDL
SIDL Base
po
517.0 moment due to SIDL (traffic barrier, sidewalk, per girder,
M SIDL = kip-ft
po kip-ft
517.0
kip-ft
kip-ft (see
(see
(see
moment
(see QconBridge
QconBridge
QconBridge due
QconBridge
Output)
Output)
Output)
to SIDL (traffic
Output) barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
M SIDL = 517.0 (see moment due to SIDL (traffic barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
p = kip-ft QconBridge Output)
P =
p p ==
p = 0.90
0.90
0.900.90
kip-ft (see QconBridge Output)
kip-ft
Design Steps: 0.90 (see QconBridge Output)
Design Steps: p = 0.90
Design Design
Steps:
Design Steps: p Steps: 0.90
=
Design Step
StepSteps: 1: Calculate the design moment at center
the centergravityof gravity of superstructure
Step
Design 1:1:
Steps: Calculate
Calculate thedesign
the design moment
moment atatthe
the center ofofgravity ofofsuperstructure
superstructure
Step Step1:1:
Step 1: Calculate the design moment at the center of
Calculate the design moment at the center of gravity of superstructure
gravity of superstructure
StepCG 1: Calculate the design moment at the center of gravity of superstructure
MMCG M po =
Calculate the ++design +moment at25)*the center 12of
CG
16000 + ( 16000 + 16500 /*25 * 116.64 / =12gravity
= 28636 ofkip-ft
superstructure
popo == 16000
16000 ( (16000
16000 +16500
16500 ) )/ /25 116.64
116.64 / /12 = 2863628636 kip-ft
kip-ft
M CG CG = 16000 + ( 16000 + 16500 ) / 25 * 116.64 / 12 = 28636 kip-ft
M CG po
M popo == = 16000 16000 ++( (16000 16000 + 16500
16000 + ( 16000 + 16500 + 16500) ) / 25 */ 116.64 / 12 = 28636
25 * 116.64
) / 25 * 116.64 / 12 = 28636 / 12 kip-ft
= 28636 kip-ft
kip-ft
Step
Step2:2: 2: Calculate
Calculatethe the
thedesign design
designmoment moment
moment per per
pergirder. girder.
girder.
Step
Step Calculate
Step2:2: Calculate the design moment per girder.
Step 2: Calculate the design moment per girder.
Step 2:
Int Calculate the design moment per girder.
MM seiCalculate
Int M
Int
sei = the28636
2/3**2/3
design
* 28636moment / 6363.56
3 = 6363.56 perkip-ftgirder.
sei ==Int 2/3 28636 / /33==6363.56 kip-ft
kip-ft
M sei Int = 2/3 * 28636 / 3 = 6363.56 kip-ft
M sei
M seiInt = = 2/3
Ext =
2/3** 28636
2/3 * 28636 / 3/ =
28636 / 3 = 3 6363.56
= 6363.56
6363.56
kip-ft kip-ft
kip-ft
Ext M
Ext
Mseisei =sei = 1/3 *1/3 * 28636 / 4772.67
2 = 4772.67 kip-ft
M
M seiExt = = 1/3 28636
**28636 / 2 = / =2 4772.67kip-ft
= 4772.67 kip-ft kip-ft
= Ext 1/3 * 28636 / 2 = 4772.67 kip-ft
M sei Ext =
1/3 28636 / 2
M sei 1/3 * 28636 / 2 = 4772.67 kip-ft
Avg = 1/3 * 28636
MMAvgAvgM sei = = 28636 28636 / (3+ +2/ 2)= = 4772.67
2)= 5727.2 kip-ft
kip-ft = 6363.56
6363.56kip-ft. kip-ft.
sei =Avg
sei
M=sei 28636
28636 / /(3(3+/+2(3 2)=)=5727.2 5727.2
5727.2 kip-ft
kip-ft
kip-ft
==
= 6363.56
6363.56 kip-ft. kip-ft.
Avg = 28636 / (3 + 2 )= 5727.2 kip-ft = 6363.56 kip-ft.
L M sei Avg = = 234.9228636 / ft. 2 )= 5727.2 kip-ft =K 6363.56
(3 +(Modified) = 180 / (234.92 + 180) = 0.434
kip-ft.
M1sei = 28636 / (3 + 2 )= 5727.2 kip-ft = 1 6363.56 kip-ft.
= 234.92 ft. (Modified) = 180 / (234.92
LL1 L 1 = 2L
L
= 1 = 234.92 180.00
234.92 ft.ft. ft. (Modified)
(Modified)
(Modified)
KK1K =K
1 2
= 180
1180= 234.92
/ /(234.92
(234.92 ++180 /+)(234.92
180 180 ) = 0.434
)==0.434
0.434 + 180) = 0.566
= 234.92 ft. (Modified) K = 180 / (234.92 + 180 ) = 0.434
L11 = 234.92 ft. (Modified) K 1 = 180 / (234.92 + 180 ) = 0.434
K L1 = = 0.566 234.92 ft. (Modified)
1 K 1 = 180 / (234.92 + 180 ) = 0.434
Design Moment per girder
Mdes = 0.566 * 6363.560.9 * 517 = 3137.61 ft-kips per girder
Step 3:
Calculate the number of extended strand required
cs = 3.00'' c.g. of extended strands to bottom of girder
d = 9.50.5 + 82.6253 = 88.625 ''
assumefpy = 243 ksi
Number of extended strand required =
12 * 3137.61/(0.9 * 1 * 0.217 * 243 * 88.625) = 9 strands
Use = Nps 10 extend strandsUse even number of strands
Step 4:
Check moment capacity of extended strands
cs = 3.00'' c.g. of extended strands to bottom of girder
Per LRFD 5.7.3.2 The factored flexural resistance
a
Mr = MnMn = Aps fpy (dp 2 )
where:
Aps = area of prestressing steel, in^2. =10 * 0.217 = 2.17 in^2
dp = distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of prestressing
tendons (in.)
dp = 9.50.5 + 82.6253 = 88.625''
Assume
Assume rectangular
rectangular behavior:
behavior:
Aps f py
c=
0.85 f ce' 1b
1 = 0.85 for
f ce' 4000 psi
1 = 0.85 0.05
f ce' - 4000
0.65 for
f ce' > 4000 psi
1000
fc = = 4.00
' 4.00ksi
ksi
f ce' ksi
= 1.3 * 4= = 5.2 1.3 =* 0.79
4 = 5.2 ksi = 0.79
fc 1
c = = 2.17
2.17 * 243 / 0.85 * 5.2 * 0.79 *81
* 243/0.85 * 5.2 * 0.79 * 81==1.864
1.864''''
c
aa = = 0.79
0.79**1.864
1.864 = 1.473'''' depth
= 1.473 of of
depth thethe
equivalent
equivalentstress
stressblock
block (in.)
(in.)
MMn
=n = 2.17
2.17**243
243 ** (88.6251.473/2)/12
( 88.625 - 1.473 / 2 )/12= =
3862.04
3862.04kip-ft.
kip-ft.
M M=r = 11**3862.04
r
3862.04 = 3862.04 kip-ft. > = 3137.61
3862.04 kip-ft. > = ft-kips
3137.61OK ft-kips OK
AASHTO LRFD Specifications Extreme Event-II Limit State (Test Level TL-4)
S := 2ft Traffic surcharge (given in height of soil above road). See LRFD Tables
3.11.6.4-1 and 3.11.6.4-2.
GroundSlope := 2 to 1
lbf
W := 45 Lateral Earth Pressure (equilivant fluid pressure per foot)
2
ft ft
Ft := 54kip Transverse Collision Load Table A13.2-1 LRFD AASHTO
LS := 0.5 Live Load Surcharge Load Factor Table 3.4.1-2 LRFD AASHTO
for Extreme Event II
Transverse Collision Force Moment Arm
Lt
MomentArm := L MomentArm = 13.25 ft
2
L
H := h + GroundSlope H = 10.00 ft
W L 2 LS
( H + 2 h )
2
FlexuralMoment := CT Ft MomentArm + EH 3 h + H + 4 S
24 EH
FlexuralMoment = 836.92 kip ft
FlexuralMoment kip ft
M u := M u = 83.69
H ft
Problem Description: A wingwall with traffic barrier is to be checked for moment capacity at a
vertical section at the abutment for a vehicular impact.
AASHTO LRFD Specifications Extreme Event-II Limit State (Test Level TL-4)
S := 2ft Traffic surcharge (given in height of soil above road). See LRFD Tables
3.11.6.4-1 and 3.11.6.4-2.
GroundSlope := 2 to 1
lbf
W := 45 Lateral Earth Pressure (equilivant fluid pressure per foot)
2
ft ft
Ft := 54kip Transverse Collision Load Table A13.2-1 LRFD AASHTO
LS := 0.5 Live Load Surcharge Load Factor Table 3.4.1-2 LRFD AASHTO
for Extreme Event II
Transverse Collision Force Moment Arm
Lt
MomentArm := L MomentArm = 13.25 ft
2
L
H := h + GroundSlope H = 10.00 ft
W L 2 LS
( H + 2 h )
2
FlexuralMoment := CT Ft MomentArm + EH 3 h + H + 4 S
24 EH
FlexuralMoment = 836.92 kip ft
FlexuralMoment kip ft
M u := M u = 83.69
H ft
3 1
Define Units ksi 1000 psi kip 1000 lbf kcf kip ft klf 1000 lbf ft
6
MPa Pa 10 N 1 newton kN 1000 N
Figure 1
Bare W83G Bridge Girder Data
Depth of girder h = 82.68 in.
Width of girder web bw = 6.10 in.
Area of prestressing steel Aps = 15.19 in.2
Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel fpu = 270.00 ksi
Initial jacking stress fpj = 202.50 ksi
Effective prestress after all losses fpe = 148.00 ksi
Modulus of Elasticity of prestressing steel Ep = 28,600 ksi
f pe
dp
ps = 0.003 1 + = 0.003 85.45 1 + 148.00
c Ep 30.75 28,600
27,613
f si = ps 887 +
(
1 + (112.4 ps )
1
7.36 7.36
)
27,613
= (0.010511)887 +
(
1 + (112.4(0.010511))7.36 ) 1
7.36
F cj (
= 0.85 f c( deck ) h f b + 0.85 f c( girder ) a h f bw )
= 0.85(6)(7 )(72) + 0.85(15)(22.10 7 )(6.10 )
hf ahf ( )
M n = 0.85 f c( deck ) h f b d p
2
( )
+ 0.85 f c( girder) a h f bw d p h f
2
7
= 0.85(6)(7 )(72 ) 85.45 + 0.85(15)(22.1 7 )(6.10 ) 85.45 7
(22.1 7 )
2 2
dt 87.68
d t = H 2 = 89.68 2 = 0.5 + 0.3 1 = 0.5 + 0.3 1
c 30.75
dp f pe
M n = 1.00(293,931) ps = 0.003 1 + = 0.003 85.45 1 + 148.00
c Ep 32.87 28,600
27,613
f si = ps 887 +
( ( ) )
1 + 112.4 ps 7.36
1
7.36
27,613
= (0.009974 )887 +
(
1 + (112.4(0.009974 ))7.36 ) 1
7.36
A F = A f = (15.19)(242.83) a = c = (0.65)(32.87)
si si ps si 1
hf ( ahf )
M n = 0.85 f c( deck ) h f b d p
2
( )
+ 0.85 f c( girder) a h f bw d p h f
2
7
= 0.85(6)(7 )(72) 85.45 + 0.85(15)(21.37 7 )(6.10) 85.45 7
(21.37 7 )
2 2
dt 87.68
d t = H 2 = 89.68 2 = 0.5 + 0.3 1 = 0.5 + 0.3 1
c 32.87
M n = 1.00(290,323)
Flexural Strength Strain Compatibility with Non-Linear Concrete Stress Block
The concrete stress-strain curves for both the deck and girder concrete are taken from
Collins and Mitchell (see BDM 5.1.1).. The power formula of the PCI BDM (se BDM
5.1.3) is used to determine the stress in the prestressing steel for each iteration.
The concrete compression block is divided into (100) slices, (21) equal slices in the
flange and (79) equal slices in the web for this case. The strain at the center of each slice
was used to determine the average stress within that slice, which was multiplied by the
area of the slice to determine the force in each slice.
The product of these forces and the distance to the center of each force from the top of
the deck was used to calculate the resultant forces and eccentricities in the flange and
web. Example calculations for the stresses in the slice at the top of the deck, at the
interface between the deck and girder, and the prestressing steel are as follows:
For the deck concrete,
Ec =
(40,000 f c + 1,000,000 ) = (40,000 6000 + 1,000,000 )
1000 1000
= 4098 ksi
f c 6000
n = 0 .8 + = 0 .8 + = 3.20
2500 2500
f c 6000
k = 0.67 + = 0.67 + = 1.337
9000 9000
f c n 6000 3.2
c 1000 = = = 2.129
E c n 1 4098 3.2 1
7
y= = 0.167 in.
21(2 )
0.003
cf = (c y ) = 0.003 (34.42 0.167 ) = 0.002985
c 34.42
f c = ( f c )
(
n cf c ) = (6 )
3.2(0.002985 0.002129)
(
n 1 + cf c )nk 3.2 1 + (0.002985 0.002129)3.2(1.337 )
0.003
cf = (c y ) = 0.003 (34.42 6.833) = 0.002404
c 34.42
f c = ( f c )
(
n cf c ) = (6 )
3.2(0.002404 0.002129)
(
n 1 + cf c )
nk
3.2 1 + (0.002404 0.002129)3.2(1.337 )
= 5.59 ksi
Ec =
(40,000 f c + 1,000,000 ) = (40,000 15000 + 1,000,000)
1000 1000
= 5899 ksi (40674 MPa)
f c 15000
n = 0 .8 + = 0 .8 + = 6.80
2500 2500
f c 15000
k = 0.67 + = 0.67 + = 2.337
9000 9000
f c n 15000 6.8
c 1000 = = = 2.981
E c n 1 5899 6.8 1
0.003
cf = (c y ) = 0.003 (34.42 7.174) = 0.002375
c 34.42
Since cf c = 0.002375 0.002981 = 0.797 < 1.0, k = 1.0
f c = ( f c )
(
n cf c ) = (15)
6.8(0.002375 0.002981)
(
n 1 + cf c )nk 6.8 1 + (0.002375 0.002981)6.8(1.0 )
= 13.51 ksi
The contribution of this slice to the overall resultant compressive force is
34.42 7.0
C 22 = (13.51ksi )(6.10in ) in = 28.60kip
79
For the prestressing steel:
dp f pe
ps = 0.003 1 + = 0.003 85.45 1 + 148 = 0.00964
c Ep 34.42 28500
27,613 270 ksi
f ps = ps 887 +
(
1 + (112.4 ps ) )
7.36 7.36
1
27,613
f ps = (0.00964 ) 887 +
= 239.93ksi
(
1 + (112.4 0.00964 ) ) 1
7.36 7.36
The resultant force in the prestressing steel is
( )
T = (239.93ksi ) 15.19in 2 = 3644.6kip
The overall depth to the neutral axis, c, was varied until the sum of the compressive
force in all the concrete slices equaled the tension force in the prestressing steel.
Equilibrium was achieved at a compressive force in the slab of 2473 kip, 3.68 below the
top of slab and a compressive force in the girder of 1169kip, 16.20 below the top of slab.
Summing moments about the centroid of the prestressing steel,
M n = 2473(85.45 3.68) + 1169(85.45 7 9.20) = 283,170 kip-in.
To calculate ,
Assume the lowest row of prestressing strands is located 2 from the bottom of the
girder. The depth to the extreme strands is
d t = H 2 = 89.68 2 = 87.68 in.
dt 87.68
= 0.5 + 0.3 1 = 0.5 + 0.3 1 = 0.96
c 34.42
M n = 0.96(283,170) = 273,034 kip-in.
Concrete Properties:
f'c := 4 ksi
Reinforcement Properties:
1.000in if bar = 8 2
0.60 in if bar = 7
1.128in if bar = 9 2
0.79 in if bar = 8
1.270in if bar = 10
2
1.410in if bar = 11 1.00 in if bar = 9
2
1.693in if bar = 14 1.27 in if bar = 10
2.257in if bar = 18 2
1.56 in if bar = 11
2
2.25 in if bar = 14
fy := 40 ksi
2
4.00 in if bar = 18
E s := 29000ksi LRFD 5.4.3.2
barT := 6 Transverse
( )
dLT := dia barLT dLT = 2.257 in ( )
A LT := Ab barLT A LT = 4 in
2
bottomcover := 1.625 in
sidecover := 1.625 in
topcover := 1.625 in
Factored Loads:
V u := 450 kip
Tu := 500 kip ft
Mu := 0 kip ft
Nu := 0 kip
pc := ( b + h) 2 pc = 254 in
fpc := 0 ksi
2
A
cp fpc
2
f'c in ksi
Tcr := 0.125 1+ kip in Tcr = 10914 kip in
ksi pc f'c
0.125
Tcr = 909.5 kip ft
in ksi
bv := b bv = 37 in LRFD 5.8.2.9
2
A v := 2AT A v = 0.88 in LRFD 5.8.3.3
f'c bv s
2
A vmin := 0.0316 ksi A vmin = 0.29 in
ksi fy
A v Avmin = 1 OK
dT
ph := 2 b 2 sidecover +
2
(
+ h topcover bottomcover dT
)
ph = 238 in
dT
A oh := b 2 sidecover + ( h topcover bottomcover dT)
2
2
A oh = 2838 in
2
A o := 0.85 Aoh A o = 2412.3 in LRFD C5.8.2.1
2
0.9 ph Tu
Vu +
2
V ust := V ust = 522.9 kip LRFD 5.8.2.1-6
2 Ao
dLB
de := h bottomcover dT de = 86.5 in LRFD 5.8.2.9
2
(
dv := max 0.9 de , 0.72 h ) dv = 77.85 in LRFD 5.8.2.9
fpo := 0 ksi
x 1000 = 0.478
Vust Vp
v u := v u = 0.202 ksi LRFD 5.8.2.9-1
bv dv
vu
= 0.05
f'c
:= 2.59
Torsional Resistance:
Tr = Tn
2
A t := A T A t = 0.44 in LRFD 5.8.3.6.2
2 A o At fy cot ( )
Tn := Tn = 28831 kip in LRFD 5.8.3.6.2-1
s
Tn = 2403 kip ft
Tr Tu = 1 OK
Shear Resistance:
V r = Vn LRFD 5.8.2.1
f'c
V c := 0.0316 bv dv ksi V c = 471.5 kip LRFD 5.8.3.3
ksi
:= 90 deg
(
V n := min Vc + Vs + Vp , 0.25 f'c bv dv + Vp ) V n = 1402 kip
V r := Vn V r = 1262 kip
Vr Vu = 1 OK
fps := 0 ksi
2 2
Mu 0.5 Nu Vu
0.45 ph Tu
X2 := + + cot ( ) Vp 0.5 Vs +
dv 2 Ao
X2 = 258 kip
X1 X2 = 1 OK
v u = 0.202 ksi
( ( ) (
s max := if v u < 0.125 f'c , min 0.8 dv , 24in , min 0.4 dv , 12in ))
s max = 24 in
(
if s s max , "OK" , "NG" = "OK" )
Concrete Properties:
wc := 160 pcf BDM 4.1.1
Reinforcement Properties:
2
Diameters: dia ( bar) := 0.375 in if bar = 3 Areas: Ab ( bar) := 0.11 in if bar = 3
0.500 in if bar = 4 2
0.20 in if bar = 4
0.625 in if bar = 5 2
0.31 in if bar = 5
0.750 in if bar = 6
2
0.875 in if bar = 7 0.44 in if bar = 6
1.000 in if bar = 8 2
0.60 in if bar = 7
1.128 in if bar = 9 2
0.79 in if bar = 8
1.270 in if bar = 10
2
1.410 in if bar = 11 1.00 in if bar = 9
2
1.693 in if bar = 14 1.27 in if bar = 10
2.257 in if bar = 18 2
1.56 in if bar = 11
fy := 60000 psi 2
2.25 in if bar = 14
Es := 29000000 psi Std. Spec. 8.7.2 2
4.00 in if bar = 18
Wall Geometry:
Wall Height: H := 24 ft H should be <= 28 ft
Half of Wall Height: h := H 0.5 h = 12 ft
Shaft Diameter: b := 2.50 ft
Shaft Spacing: L := 12 ft
Iso := min 3.0 , 0.08
L Factor used to amplify the
Isolation Factor for Shafts: ,
deg b passive resistance based on
soil wedge behavior resulting
Iso = 3.00
from shaft spacing - Caltrans
pg 10-2.
Factor of Safety: FS := 1.00
2
Angle of Wall Friction: := = 25.333 deg Guide Spec. App. C pg. 33
3
Correction Factor for
HC := cos ( ) HC = 0.904
Horizontal Component of
Earth Pressure:
Foundation Strength fa := 1.00 ( Active ) Guide Spec. 1-2.2.3
Reduction Factors:
fp := 0.90 ( Passive) Guide Spec. 1-2.2.3
Side 1:
1 s1
Backfill Slope Angle: s1 := atan s1 = 26.5651 deg = 0.70
2
Using the USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual, Figure 5(a):
For = 38 deg and s = -26.5651 deg: For = 32 deg and s = -26.5651 deg:
Ka = 0.190, Kp = 3.060, Rp = 0.773 Ka = 0.230, Kp = 1.82, Rp = 0.8366
Active Pressure:
psf
P a1 := Ka1 HC fa P a1 = 21
ft
Passive Pressure:
Side 2:
1 s2
Backfill Slope Angle: s2 := atan s2 = 26.5651 deg = 0.70
2
Active Pressure:
psf
P a2 := Ka2 HC fa P a2 = 21
ft
Passive Pressure:
The function "ShaftD" finds the required shaft depth "d" by increasing the shaft depth until the
sum of the moments about the base of the shaft "Msum" is nearly zero. See Figure A for a
definition of terms.
ShaftD do , P , R1 , R2 , b , h , y :=
( ) d 0 ft
Msum 100 lbf ft
d d + 0.00001 ft
2 2
2 R2 d R2 do P
z
d ( R1 + R2) 2 2 b
R2 z ( d z)
x
R1 d + R2 ( d z)
P1 R2 do d do z
( )( )
2 1
P2 R2 d do z
( )
2
1
P3 R2 ( d z) x
2
1
P4 R1 d ( z x )
2
z + d do
X1
2
2 z + d do
X2
3
x
X3 z
3
1
X4 ( z x)
3
Msum P ( h + y + d) + b ( P1 X1 P2 X2 P3 X3 + P4 X4)
Check for 2 load cases. Case 1 has load P acting as shown on Figure A. Case 2 has load
P acting in the opposite direction.
Case 1:
dc1 := ShaftD do , P , R1 , R2 , b , h , y
( ) dc1 = 11.18 ft
2 2
R2 dc1
2 R2 do P
zc1 := zc1 = 5.102 ft
dc1 ( R1 + R2) 2 2 b
(
R2 zc1 dc1 zc1 )
xc1 := xc1 = 1.797 ft
R1 dc1 + R2 dc1 zc1 ( )
1 2 psf
P4c1 := R1 dc1 zc1 xc1 ( ) P4c1 = 12935 ft
2 ft
Case 2:
dc2 := ShaftD do , P , R2 , R1 , b , h , y
( ) dc2 = 11.18 ft
2 2
R1 dc2
2 R1 do P
zc2 := zc2 = 5.102 ft
dc2 ( R1 + R2) 2 2 b
xc2 :=
(
R1 zc2 dc2 zc2 ) xc2 = 1.797 ft
R2 dc2 + R1 dc2 zc2 ( )
1 2 psf
P4c2 := R2 dc2 zc2 xc2 ( ) P4c2 = 12935 ft
2 ft
Determine Shaft Lateral Pressures and Moment Arms for Controlling Case:
lbf z + d do
P1 := Ra do d do z
( )( ) P1 = 1953 X1 := X1 = 7.892 ft
ft 2
2 z + d do
2 1 lbf
P2 := Ra d do z
( ) P2 = 10901 X2 := X2 = 6.962 ft
2 ft 3
1 lbf x
P3 := Ra ( d z) x P3 = 3825 X3 := z X3 = 4.503 ft
2 ft 3
1 lbf 1
P4 := Rb d ( z x ) P4 = 12935 X4 := ( z x) X4 = 1.102 ft
2 ft 3
Msum := P ( h + y + d) + b ( P1 X1 P2 X2 P3 X3 + P4 X4) Msum = 0.13163 lbf ft
The Maximum Shear will occur at the bolts or at the top of area 4 on Figure A:
The Maximum Moment in the shaft will occur where the shear = 0.
Assume that the point where shear = 0 occurs in areas 1 and 2 on Figure A.
2 2P
sc1 := do + do + sc1 = 2.808 ft
R2 b
2 1 3 1
Mshaftc1 := P h + y + do + s c1 R2 do b s c1 R2 b s c1
( ) Mshaftc1 = 152094 lbf ft
2 6
Check that the point where shear = 0 occurs in areas 1 and 2 on Figure A:
2 2P
sc2 := do + do + sc2 = 2.808 ft
R1 b
2 1 3 1
Mshaftc2 := P h + y + do + s c2 R1 do b s c2 R1 b s c2
( ) Mshaftc2 = 152094 lbf ft
2 6
Check that the point where shear = 0 occurs in areas 1 and 2 on Figure A:
Find Design Moment for a 1 ft wide strip of wall (between panel posts) for the panel flexure design
2
wpanel L lbf ft
Mpanel := 1.3 Mpanel = 585
8 ft
dia barA
( )
dpa := hpa Clpa dia ( 3) dpa = 14.99 in Effective depth
2
2
As := 2 A b barA
( ) As = 2.54 in
As fy
a := a = 4.482 in
0.85 f'c bpa
a
Mn := As fy dpa Mn = 161910 lbf ft
2
f Mn = 145719 lbf ft
0.85 1 f'c
87000 psi
b := b = 0.029
fy
87000 psi + fy
As
:= = 0.01694
bpa dpa
Check Shear (Std. Spec. 8.16.6) - Note: Shear Capacity of stirrups neglected:
f'c
Vca := 2 psi bpa dpa Vca = 18961 lbf
psi
2
As := 2 A b barB
( ) As = 2 in
As fy
a := a = 3.922 in
0.85 f'c bpb
a
Mn := As fy dpb Mn = 147892 lbf ft
2
f Mn = 133103 lbf ft
0.85 1 f'c
87000 psi
b :=
fy
b = 0.029
87000 psi + fy
As
:= = 0.01327
bpb dpb
Check Shear (Std. Spec. 8.16.6) - Note: Shear Capacity of stirrups neglected:
f'c
Vcb := 2 psi bpb dpb Vcb = 19069 lbf
psi
0.04 Ab ( bar) fy fy
lbasic ( bar) := max , 0.0004 dia ( bar) if bar 11
f'c psi
psi in
psi
0.085 f y
in if bar = 14
f'c
psi
psi
0.11 f y
in if bar = 18
f'c
psi
psi
"error" otherwise
For top reinforcement placed with more than 12 inches of concrete cast below (Std. Spec.
8.25.2.1):
ldA := lbasicA 1.4 ldA = 5.623 ft
The required lapsplice Y is the maximum of the required lap splice length of bar A (using a
Class C splice), the development length of bar B, or 2'-0" per BDM 5.1.2.D.
Note: Lap Splices are not allowed for bar sizes greater than 11 per AASHTO Std. Spec. 8.32.1.1.
2
dbolt
2
Abolt := Abolt = 0.785 in
4
PanelAxialLoad := 4in
L
+ 13in 10in ( 2 h + y 3in) wc PanelAxialLoad = 11.959 kip
2
PanelAxialLoad
fa := fa = 3.807 ksi Axial Compressive
4 Abolt Stress
Vbolt
fv := fv = 2.98 ksi Shear Stress
4 Abolt
Mbolt 1
ft := fa ft = 70.35 ksi Tensile Stress
13.5in 2 Abolt
2
fv fv
Ft1 := if
Fv
0.33 , Ft , Ft 1 Ft1 = 30 ksi Std. Spec. 10.56.1.3.3
Fv
Design Summary:
Wall Height: H = 24 ft
Required Shaft Depth: d = 11.18 ft
Maximum Shaft Shear: Vshaft = 32339 lbf
Maximum Shaft Moment: Mshaft = 152094 lbf ft
Maximum Shaft Moment Accuracy Check (Case 1): Check1 = "OK"
Maximum Shaft Moment Accuracy Check (Case 2): Check2 = "OK"
Bar A: barA = 10
Post Flexural Resistance (Bar A): Check3 = "OK"
Maximum Reinforcement Check (Bar A): Check4 = "OK"
Minimum Reinforcement Check (Bar A): Check5 = "OK"
Post Shear Check (Bar A): Check6 = "OK"
Bar B: barB = 9
Post Flexural Resistance (Bar B): Check7 = "OK"
Maximum Reinforcement Check (Bar B): Check8 = "OK"
Minimum Reinforcement Check (Bar B): Check9 = "OK"
Post Shear Check (Bar B): Check10 = "OK"
5.99 References
1. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications, Current Edition, AASHTO,
Washington, D.C.
2. Seguirant, S.J., New Deep WSDOT Standard Sections Extend Spans of
Prestressed Concrete Girders, PCI JOURNAL, V. 43, No. 4, July-August 1998,
pp. 92-119.
3. PCI Bridge Design Manual, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute,
Chicago,IL,1997.
4. ACI 318-02, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
Commentary, American Concrete Institute, 1989, pp.353.
5. Hsu, T. T. C., Torsion of Reinforced Concrete, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,
NewYork, 1st Ed., 1984, 516pp.
6. Collins, M. P. and Mitchell, D., Shear and Torsion Design of Prestressed and Non-
Prestressed Concrete Beams, PCI Journal, September-October, 1980, pp.32-100.
7. Mirza, S.A., and Furlong, R.W., Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete
Inverted T Beams for Bridge Structures, PCI Journal, Vol. 30, No. 4, July-August
1985, pp. 112-136.
8. Rabbat, B.G., Reader Comments Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete
inverted T Beams for Bridge Structures, PCI Journal, Vol. 31, No. 3, May-June
1986, pp. 157-163.
9. ACI Committee 345, Guide for Widening Highway Bridges, ACI Structural
Journal, July/August, 1992, pp.451-466.
10. PCI Design Handbook, Precast and Prestressed Concrete, Sixth Edition, Precast/
Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago, IL, 2004.
11. Mast, R.F., Lateral Stability of Long Prestressed Concrete Beams, Part 1,
PCIJOURNAL, V. 34, No. 1, January-February 1989, pp. 34-53.
12. Mast, R.F., Lateral Stability of Long Prestressed Concrete Beams, Part 2,
PCIJOURNAL, V. 38, No. 1, January-February 1993, pp. 70-88.
13. Imper, R.R., and Laszlo, G., Handling and Shipping of Long Span Bridge
Beams, PCI JOURNAL, V. 32, No. 6, November-December 1987, pp. 86-101.
14. Manual for the Evaluation and Repair of Precast, Prestressed Concrete Bridge
Products, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago, IL, 2006.
15. Transportation Research Board Report No. 226 titled, Damage Evaluation and
Repair Methods for Prestressed Concrete Bridge Members.
16. Transportation Research Board Report No. 280 titled, Guidelines for Evaluation
and Repair of Prestressed Concrete Bridge Members.
17. Post-tensioned Box Girder Bridge Manual, Post-tensioning Institute,
301WestOsborn, Phoenix, Arizona.
18. Prestressed Concrete Structures T. Y. Lin, Wiley.
19. Prestressed Concrete Vol. I and II, Guyon, Wiley
20. Design of Concrete Bridges for Temperature Gradients, ACI Journal, May 1978.
21. Mast, R. F., Unified Design Provisions for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete
Flexural and Compression Members, ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 2, March-
April 1992, pp. 185-199. See also discussions by R.K. Devalapura and M.K.
Tadros, C.W. Dolan and J.V. Loscheider and closure to discussions in V. 89, No.5,
September-October 1992, pp. 591-593.
22. Weigel, J.A., Seguirant, S.J., Brice, R., and Khaleghi, B., High Performance
Precast, Prestressed Concrete Girder Bridges in Washington State, PCI
JOURNAL, V. 48, No. 2, March-April 2003, pp.28-52.
23. Seguirant, S. J., Brice, R., and Khaleghi, B., Flexural Strength of
ReinforcedandPrestressed Concrete T-Beams, PCI JOURNAL, V. 50, No. 1,
January-February 2005, pp 44-73.
24. TRAC Report WA-RD 696.1, "Effect of Intermediate Diaphragms to Prestressed
Concrete Bridge Girders in Over-Height Truck Impacts completed on April 2008
by the Washington State University.
25. NCHRP Report 628, Self-Consolidating Concrete for Precast, Prestressed
Concrete Bridge Elements, NCHRP Project 18-12, Transportation Research
Board, 2009.
26. PCI Publication CB-02-16-E, Recommended Practice for Lateral Stability of
Precast, Prestressed Concrete Bridge Girders, First Edition, Precast/Prestressed
Concrete Institute, February 2016.
For moderate to long spans, partially stiffened web design is the most economical.
This method is a compromise between slender webs requiring transverse stiffening
throughout and thicker, unstiffened webs. Stiffeners used to connect cross frames
shall be welded to top and bottom flanges. Jacking stiffeners shall be used adjacent
to bearing stiffeners, on girder or diaphragm webs, in order to accommodate future
bearing replacement. Coordinate jack placement in substructure and girderdetails.
Steel framing shall consist of main girders and cross frames. Bottom lateral systems
shall only be used when temporary bracing is not practical. Where lateral systems are
needed, they shall be detailed carefully for adequate fatigue life.
Standard corrosion protection for steel bridges is the Standard Specifications four-
coat paint system west of the Cascades and where paint is required for appearance.
Unpainted weathering steel shall only be used east of the Cascades. WSDOT does not
allow the use of steel stay-in-place deck forms.
6.1.3 Preliminary Girder Proportioning
The superstructure depth is initially determined during preliminary plan development
and is based upon thespan/depth ratios provided in Chapter 2. The depth may be
reduced to gain vertical clearance, but the designer should verify live load deflection
requirements are met. See AASHTO LRFD Table 2.5.2.6.3-1. Live load deflections
shall be limited in accordance with the optional criteria of AASHTO LRFD Articles
2.5.2.6.2 and 3.6.1.3.2.
The superstructure depth is typically shown as the distance from the top of the
bridge deck to the bottom of the web. Web depths are generally detailed in multiples
of6inches.
On straight bridges, interior and exterior girders shall be detailed as identical. Spacing
should be such that the distribution of wheel loads on the exterior girder is close to
that of the interior girder. The number of girder lines should be minimized, with a
maximum spacing of 1416feet. Steel bridges shall be redundant, with three or more
girders lines for I-girders and two or more boxes for box girders, except as otherwise
approved by the Steel Specialist and Bridge Design Engineer.
6.1.4 Estimating Structural Steel Weights
For the preliminary quantities or preliminary girder design, an estimate of steel weights
for built-up plate composite I-girders can be obtained from Figure 6.1.4-1. This figure
is based upon previous designs with AASHTO HS-20 live loads with no distinction
between service load designs and load factor designs. Thischart also provides a good
double check on final quantities.
The weights shown include webs, flanges, and all secondary members (web stiffeners,
diaphragms, cross frame, lateral systems, and gusset plates) plus a small allowance for
weld metal, bolts, and shear connectors.
Both straight and curved box girder quantities may be estimated with the chart, using
a10 to 20 percentincrease.
The chart should only be used for a lower bound estimate of curved I-girder weight.
Roadway width and curvature greatly influence girder weight, including cross frames.
An additional resource for estimating structural steel weights is the NSBA Steel Span
Weight Curves published in 2016, which can be obtained off of their website.
Page 6-4 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 6 Structural Steel
A 992 or 50S steel is most commonly available in W shapes but is also available in
other rolled sections including beams (S and M shapes), H-piles, tees, channels, and
angles. All the materials in the table are prequalified under the Bridge Welding Code.
All main load-carrying members or components subject to tensile stress shall be
identified in the plans and shall meet the minimum Charpy V-notch (CVN) fracture
toughness values as specified in AASHTO LRFD Table 6.6.2-2, temperature zone 2.
Fracture critical members or components shall also be designated in the plans.
Availability of weathering steel can be a problem for some sections. For example,
steel suppliers do not stock angles or channels in weathering steel. Weathering steel
wide flange and tee sections are difficult tolocate or require a mill order. A mill order
is roughly 10,000 pounds. ASTM A 709 and AASHTO M 270 bridge steels are not
stocked by local service centers. The use of bridge steel should be restricted to large
quantities such as found in typical plate or box girder projects. The older ASTM
specification steels, such as A 36 or A 572, should be specified when a fabricator would
be expected to purchase from local service centers.
Structural tubes and pipes are covered by other specifications. See the latest edition of
the AISC Manual of Steel Construction for selection and availability. These materials
are not considered prequalified under the Bridge Welding Code. They are covered
under the Structural Welding Code AWS D1.1. Structural tubingASTM A 500 shall
not be used for dynamic loading applications. ASTM A 1085 is a newer cold formed
and welded HSS section specification that is a Gr 50 steel. Supplements for heat
treating and CVNs are included and may also be specified. CVN tests are typically
performed in the flats of the HSS square or rectangular tube sections. CVN values in
the bend radius of the tubes are lower than values obtained in the flats. Heat treating of
the sections can improve the values, but no data is currently available. ASTM A 1085
should also not be specified for dynamic loading applications.
6.1.6 Plate Sizes
Readily available lengths and thicknesses of steel plates should be used to minimize
costs. Tables of standard plate sizes have been published by various steel mills and
should be used for guidance. Thesetables are available through the Steel Specialist
oronline.
In general, an individual plate should not exceed 12-6feet in width, including camber
requirements, or a length of about 60feet. If either or both of these dimensions are
exceeded, a butt splice is required and should be shown or specified on the plans.
Some plates may be available in lengths over 90feet, so web splice locations should
be considered optional. Quenched and tempered plates are limited to 50feet, based on
ovensize.
Plate thicknesses of less than 5/16inches shall not be used for bridge applications.
Preferred plate thicknesses, English units, are as follows:
5/16 to in 1/16 increments
to 1 in increments
1 to 4 in increments
6.1.7 Girder Segment Sizes
Locate bolted field splices so that individual girder segments can be handled,
shipped, and erected withoutimposing unreasonable requirements on the contractor.
Crane limitations need to be considered incongested areas near traffic or buildings.
Transportation route options between the girder fabricator andthe bridge site can affect
the size and weight of girder sections allowed. Underpasses with restricted vertical
clearance in sag vertical curves can be obstructions to long, tall segments shipped
upright. TheRegion Project Office should help determine the possible routes, and the
restrictions they impose, during preliminaryplanning or early in thedesign phase.
Segment lengths should be limited to 150feet, depending upon cross section. Long,
slender segments can be difficult to handle and ship due to their flexibility. Horizontal
curvature of girder segments may increase handling and shipping concerns. Out-to-out
width of curved segments, especially box girders, should not exceed 14feet without
additional travel permits and requirements. Weight is seldom a controlling factor for
I-girders. However, 40 tons is a practical limit for some fabricators. Limit weight toa
maximum of 100 tons if delivery by truck is anticipated.
Consider the structures span length and the above factors when determining girder
segment lengths. In general, field splices should be located at dead load inflection
points. When spans are short enough, some field splices can be designated optional if
resulting segment lengths and weights meet the shippingcriteria.
which limits the number of lanes loading each box. Wide box girder spacing, outside
this range, will require additional live load analysis. Consideration must be given to
differential deflection between boxes when designing the bridge deck. Generally, use
of cross frames between boxes is limited to long spans with curvature.
Box girders shall have a single bearing per box for bridges with multiple box girders,
not bearings under each web. If bearings are located under each web, distribution of
loads is uncertain. For single box girder bridges, two bearings per box shall be used.
Generally, plate diaphragms with access holes are used in place of pier cross frames.
With the exception of effects from inclined webs, top flanges and webs are designed as
if they were part of individual I-girders.
The combined bottom flange is unique to box girders. In order to maximize web
spacing while minimizing bottom flange width, place webs out of plumb on a slope
of 1in4. Wide plates present two difficulties: excessive material between shop
splices and buckling behavior in compression zones (interior piers). To keep weight
and plate thickness within reason, it is often necessary to stiffen the bottom flange
in compression with longitudinal stiffeners. Office practice is to use tee sections
for longitudinal stiffeners and channel bracing at cross frame locations (transverse
stiffeners). If possible, bottom flange stiffeners are terminated at field splices.
Otherwise, carefully ground weld terminations are needed in tension regions with high
stress range. Due to the transverse flexibility of thin wide plates, stiffener plates are
welded across the bottom flange at cross frame locations, combined with web vertical
stiffeners. For the design of the bottom flange in compression, see AASHTO LRFD
Articles 6.11.8.2 and 6.11.11.2.
6.2.4 Fracture Critical Superstructures
Non-redundant, fracture critical single tub superstructures, and twin I-girder systems,
may sometimes be justified. In which case, approval for this bridge type must be
obtained from the Bridge Design Engineer. Conditions that favor this option are narrow
one lane ramps, especially with tightly curved alignments, at locations within existing
mainline interchanges. Flyover ramps often fall into these constraints. The box section
allows in-depth inspection access without significant disruption to mainline traffic.
UBIT access over urban interstate lanes is becoming increasingly difficult to obtain.
Where curvature is significant, the box section is a stiffer, more efficient load carrying
system than a twin I-girder system. If a twin I-girder system is to be used, approval
must also be secured. Some form of permanent false decking or other inspection access
needs to be included over mainline lanes that will be difficult to close for UBIT access.
This access needs to be appropriate for fracture critical inspections. If curvature is not
severe, the twin I-girder system may prove to be more economical than a single box.
The maximum roadway width for either a single box or twin I-girder superstructure
is about 27feet. Where roadway width exceeds this, additional girders shall be used.
Mainline structures, usually exceeding 38feet in width, will require a minimum of
three webs, with four webs being the preferredminimum.
Increased vertical clearance from mainline traffic should be obtained for either of
these bridge types. The desired minimum is 20feet. Box sections tend to offer greater
stiffness than equal depth I-girders, especially on curved alignment. The web depth
may be reduced below AASHTO LRFD Table 2.5.2.6.3-1 minimums provided live
load deflection criteria are met. However, avoid web depth less than 5-0 so that
inspection access is within reason. The desirable minimum web depth for boxes is
6-6. Box sections with web depth of 6-6 should be capable of interior spans up
to 250feet. Main spans of 150feet should be considered the low end of this girder
types economical range. Because of the proximity of flyover ramps to high numbers
of observers, attempt to streamline their superstructure depths where economical and
deflection criteria can be achieved.
Consider use of high performance steels, AASHTO M270 grades HPS50W or
HPS70W for these girder types. Grades of steel with equal CVN toughness may be
considered, however the improved through-thickness properties of the HPS grades
should also be considered. If practical, maintain a maximum flange thickness of 2
when using HPS for better properties and plate availability. The improved toughness of
HPS will lower the chance of sudden crack propagation if a crack does become visible
to casual observation. HPS50W is not commonly used and the Steel Specialist should
be consulted before specifying this grade of steel in a structure.
The limit state load modifier relating to redundancy, r = 1.05, as specified in AASHTO
LRFD Article 1.3.4 shall be used in the design of non-redundant steel structures.
However, for load rating non-redundant structures, a system factor of 0.85 is currently
required in the AASHTO Manual for Bridge Evaluation (MBE) on the capacity of the
girders, which is not consistent with the redundancy load modifier used in design. The
designer shall design some reserve capacity in the girders so the load rating value for
HL93 Inventory is greater than or equal to 1.0.
The AASHTO LRFD approximate live load distribution factors are not applicable to
these girder types. Thelevel rule or the preferred refined analysis shall be used. Where
highly curved, only a refined analysis shallbe used.
6.3.3 Flanges
Flange thickness is limited to 4 maximum in typical bridge plate, but the desirable
maximum is 3. Structural Steel Notes on contract plans shall require all plates for
flange material to be purchased such that the ratio of reduction of thickness from a
slab to plate shall be at least 3.0:1. This requirement helps ensure the plate material
has limited inclusions and micro-porosity that can create problems during cutting
andwelding.
As an alternative, plates for flange material greater than 2 thick not meeting the
3.0:1 ratio of reduction may be supplied based on acceptable ultrasonic testing (UT)
inspection in accordance with ASTM A 578. UT scanning and acceptance shall be
asfollows:
The entire plate shall be scanned in accordance with ASTM A 578 and shall meet
Acceptance Standard C, and
Plate material within 12-inches of flange complete joint penetration splice welds
shall be scanned in accordance with ASTM A 578 Supplementary S1 and shall
meet Acceptance Standard C
The number of plate thicknesses used for a given project should be kept to a minimum.
Generally, the bottom flange should be wider than the top flange. Flange width changes
should be made at bolted field splices. Thickness transitions are best done at welded
splices. AASHTO LRFD Article 6.13.6.1.5 requires fill plates at bolted splices to be
developed, if thicker than . Since this requires a significant increase in the number
of bolts for thick fill plates, keeping the thickness transition or less by widening
pier segment flanges can be a better solution. Between field splices, flange width
should be keptconstant.
6.3.4 Webs
Maintain constant web thickness throughout the structure. If different web thickness
is needed, the transition shall be at a welded splice. Horizontal web splices are not
needed unless web height exceeds 12-6. Vertical web splices for girders should be
shown on the plans in an elevation view with additional splices made optional to the
fabricator. All welded web splices on exterior faces of exterior girders and in tension
zones elsewhere shall be ground smooth. Web splices of interior girders need not be
ground in compression zones.
6.3.5 Transverse Stiffeners
Transverse stiffeners shall be used in pairs at cross frame locations on interior girders
and on the inside of webs of exterior girders. They shall be welded to the top flange,
bottom flange and web at these locations. This detail is considered fatigue category
C for longitudinal flange stress. Stiffeners used between cross frames shall be located
on one side of the web, welded to the compression flange, and cut short of the tension
flange. Stiffeners located between cross frames in regions of stress reversal shall be
welded to one side of the web and cut short of both flanges. Alternatively, they may be
welded to both flanges if fatigue Category C is checked. Transverse stiffeners may be
dropped when not needed for strength. If cross frame spacing is less than 3 times the
web depth, additional stiffeners may only be necessary near piers.
Stiffened webs require end panels to anchor the first tension field. The jacking stiffener
to bearing stiffeners space shall not be used as the anchor panel. The first transverse
stiffener is to be placed at no greater spacing than 1.5 times the web depth from the
bearing or jacking stiffener.
Transverse stiffeners shall be designed and detailed to meet AASHTO LRFD Article
6.10.11.1. Where they are used to connect cross frames, they should be a minimum
width of 8 to accommodate two boltrows.
6.3.6 Longitudinal Stiffeners
On long spans where web depths exceed 10feet, comparative cost evaluations shall
be made to determine whether the use of longitudinal stiffeners will be economical.
The use of longitudinal stiffeners may be economical on webs 10feet deep or greater.
Weld terminations for longitudinal stiffeners are fatigue prone details. Longitudinal
stiffener plates shall be continuous, splices being made with full penetration welds
before being attached to webs. Transverse stiffeners should be pieced to allow passage
of longitudinal stiffeners.
Design of longitudinal stiffeners is covered by AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.11.3.
6.3.7 Bearing Stiffeners
Stiffeners are required at all bearings to enable the reaction to be transmitted from
the web to the bearing. These stiffeners are designated as columns, therefore, must
be vertical under total dead load. The connection of the bearing stiffener to flanges
consists of partial penetration groove welds, of sufficient size to transmit designloads.
Pier cross frames may transfer large seismic lateral loads through top and bottom
connections. Weld size must be designed to ensure adequate load path from deck and
cross frames into bearings.
Design of bearing stiffeners is covered by AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.11.2.
6.3.8 Cross Frames
The primary function of intermediate cross frames is to provide stability to individual
girders or flanges. Cross frames or diaphragms are required at each support to brace
girders; they should be as near to full-depth as practical. Cross frames share live
load distribution between girders with the concrete deck. The approximate AASHTO
LRFD live load distribution factors were based on the absence of intermediate cross
frames. Where cross frames are present, the exterior girder distribution factors are
also determined according to AASHTO LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.2d (conventional
approximation for loads on piles). On curved bridges, the cross frames also resist
twisting of the superstructure. Pier cross frames are subjected to lateral loads from
wind, earthquake, and curvature. These forces are transmitted from the roadway slab to
the bearings by way of the pier cross frames. Intermediate cross frames also resist wind
load to the lower half of the girders. The primary load path for wind is the concrete
deck and pier diaphragms. Wind load on the bottom flange is shed incrementally
to the deck through intermediate cross frames. The essential function, however, is
to brace the compression flanges for all stages of construction and service life. As
such, continuous span girders require bottom flange bracing near interior supports.
Office practice requires intermediate cross frames, at spacing consistent with design
assumptions. The 25 foot maximum spacing of older specifications is not maintained
in the AASHTO LRFD code. A rectangular grid of girders and cross frames is not
significantly stiff laterally before the deck is cured. Both wind and deck placement can
cause noticeable deflections. In the case of deck placement, permanent sideway and
rotation of the steel framing may result. Some form of temporary or permanent lateral
bracing is thereforerequired.
Cross frames and connections should be detailed for repetitive fabrication, adjustment
in the field, and openness for inspection and painting. Cross frames consisting of
back-to-back angles separated by gusset plates are not permitted. These are difficult to
repaint. Cross frames are generally patterned as K-frames or as X-frames. Typically the
configuration selected is based on the most efficient geometry. The diagonals should
closely approach a slope of 1:1 or 45. Avoid conflicts with utilities passing between
the girders. Detailing of cross frames should follow guidelines of economical steel
bridge details promoted by the National Steel Bridge Alliance. Office practice is to
bolt rather than weld individual pieces. Oversize holes are not allowed in cross frame
connections if girders are curved.
Intermediate cross frames for straight girders with little or no skew should be designed
as secondary members. Choose members that meet minimum slenderness requirements
and design connections only for anticipated loads, not for 75percent strength
ofmember.
In general, cross frames should be installed parallel to piers for skew angles of 0
to 20. For greater skew angles, other arrangements may be used. Consult with the
Design Unit Manager or the Steel Specialist for special requirements.
Intermediate cross frames for curved I-girders require special consideration. Cross
frames for curved girder bridges are main load carrying members and tension
components should be so designated in the plans. For highly curved systems, it is more
efficient to keep members and connections concentric, as live loads can be significant.
Welded connections should be carefully evaluated for fatigue.
Web stiffeners at cross frames shall be welded to top and bottom flanges. This practice
minimizes out-of-plane bending of the girder web.
Bridge widening requires special attention to girder stability during bridge deck
placement. Lateral movement and rotation has been common with widening projects
around the country. Narrow framing, such as a two girder widening, requires bracing
to an existing structure. A common method for bracing is to install cross frames (in the
bay between existing and new girders) with only one bolt per connection to allow for
girder differential deflection but no rotation. Remaining bolts can be installed through
field-drilled holes after the slab hascured.
A. Steel weight, applied to steel section. Include 10 psf bridge deck formwork
allowance in the total dead load camber, but not in the steel weight camber.
The effect of removing formwork is small in relation to first placement, due to
composite action between girders and bridge deck. It isnt necessary to account for
theremoval.
B. Bridge deck weight, applied to steel section. This should be the majority of dead
load deflection.
C. Traffic barriers, sidewalks, and overlays, applied to long-term composite section
using 3n. Do not include weight of future overlays in the camber calculations.
D. Bridge deck shrinkage (if ).
Bridge deck dead load deflection will require the designer to exercise some judgment
concerning degree of analysis. A two or three span bridge of regular proportions, for
example, should not require a rigorous analysis. The bridge deck may be assumed to
be placed instantaneously on the steel section only. Generally, due to creep, deflections
and stresses slowly assume a state consistent with instantaneous bridge deck
placement. For unusual girder arrangements (multiple spans, unbalanced spans, curved
structures, etc.), and especially structures with in-span hinges, an analysis coupled with
a bridge deck placement sequence shall be used. This would require an incremental
analysis where previous bridge deck placement are treated as composite sections
(using a modulus of elasticity for concrete based on age at time of second pour) and
successive bridge deck placements are added on non-composite sections. Each bridge
deck placement requires a separate deflection analysis. The total effect of bridge deck
construction is the superposition of each bridge deckplacement. This analysis can also
be accomplished using staged construction features in finite element analysis software.
With the availability of these staged construction features, performing an incremental
analysis should be considered for all structures with 3 or more spans.
Traffic barriers, sidewalks, overlays, and other items constructed after the bridge deck
placement should be analyzed as if applied to the long-term composite section full
length of the bridge. The modulus of elasticity of the slab concrete shall be reduced
to one third of its short term value. For example, if fc = 4000 psi, then use a value
ofn=24.
Bridge deck shrinkage has a varying degree of effect on superstructure deflections.
The designer shall use some judgment in evaluating this effect on camber. Bridge deck
shrinkage should be the smallest portion of the total camber. It has greater influence
on shallower girder sections, say rolled beams. Simple spans will see more effect than
continuous spans. For medium to long span continuous girders (spans over 200feet
without any in-span hinges), bridge deck shrinkage deflection can be ignored. For
simple span girders between 150 and 250feet, the deflection should not exceed 1.
For calculation, apply a shrinkage strain of 0.0002 to the long-term composite section
using 3n.
In addition to girder deflections, show girder rotations at bearing stiffeners. This will
allow shop plan detailers to compensate for rotations so that bearing stiffeners will be
vertical in their final position.
Camber tolerance is governed by the Bridge Welding Code AWS D1.5, chapter 3.5.
A note of clarification is added to the plan camber diagram: For the purpose of
measuring camber tolerance during shop assembly, assume top flanges are embedded
in concrete without a designed haunch. This allows a high or low deviation from the
theoretical curve, otherwise no negative camber tolerance is allowed.
A screed adjustment diagram shall be included with the camber diagram. This diagram,
with dimension table, shall be the remaining calculated deflection just prior to bridge
deck placement, taking into account the estimated weight of deck formwork and deck
reinforcing. The weight of bridge deck formwork may be taken equal to 10 psf, or the
assumed formwork weight used to calculate total camber. The weight of reinforcing
may be taken as the span average distributed uniformly. The screed adjustment should
equal: (Total Camber Steel Camber)(deflection due to forms + rebar). The screed
adjustment shall be shown at each girder line. This will indicate how much twisting is
anticipated during bridge deck placement, primarily due to span curvature and/or skew.
These adjustments shall be applied to theoretical profile grades, regardless of actual
steel framing elevations. The adjustments shall be designated C. The diagram shall
be designated as Screed Setting Adjustment Diagram. The table of dimensions shall
be kept separate from the girder camber, but at consistent locations along girders. That
is, at 1/10th points or panel points. A cross section view shall be included with curved
span bridges, showing effects of twisting. See Appendix 6.4-A6.
For the purpose of setting bridge deck soffit elevations, a correction shall be made to
the plan haunch dimension based on the difference between theoretical flange locations
and actual profiled elevations. The presence of bridge deck formwork shall be noted
at the time of the survey. The presence of false decking need not be accounted for in
design or the survey.
6.3.12 Bridge Deck Placement Sequence
The bridge deck shall be placed in a prescribed sequence allowing the concrete in each
segment to shrink with minor influence on other segments. Negative moment regions
(segments over interior piers) must be placed after positive moment regions have
had time to cure. This helps minimize shrinkage cracking and provides manageable
volumes of concrete for a work shift.
Positive moment regions should be placed first, while negative moment regions
are placed last. Successive segments should not be placed until previous segments
attain sufficient strength, typically about 2000 psi or cure of 3 to 7 days. This general
guideline is sufficient for typical, well balanced span, however the designer should
check slab tensile stresses imposed on adjoining span segments. Required concrete
strength can be increased, but needless delays waiting for higher strengths should be
avoided. Also, the contractor should be given the option of placing positive moment
segments with little influence on each other at a convenient rate, regardless of curing
time. That is, segments separated by a span could be placed the same or next day
without any harm. These can be lumped in the same pour sequence.
6.3.15 Welding
All structural steel and rebar welding shall be in accordance with the Standard
Specifications, amendments thereto and the special provisions. The Standard
Specifications currently calls for welding structural steel according to the AASHTO/
AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code (BWC), latest edition and the latest edition of
the AWS D1.1 Structural Weld Code. The designers should be especially aware of
current amendments to the following sections of the Standard Specifications Sections
6-03.3(25) and 6-03.3(25)A.
Exceptions to both codes and additional requirements are shown in the Standard
Specifications and the special provisions.
Standard symbols for welding, brazing, and nondestructive examination can be found
in the ANSI/AWSA 2.4 by that name. This publication is a very good reference for
definitions of abbreviationsand acronyms related to welding.
The designer shall consider the limits of allowable fatigue stress, specified for the
various welds used to connect the main load carrying members of a steel structure. See
AASHTO LRFD Article 6.6. Most plate girder framing can be detailed in a way that
provides fatigue category C or better.
The minimum fillet weld size shall be as shown in the following table. Weld size
is determined by the thicker of the two parts joined unless a larger size is required
by calculated stress. The weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner
partjoined.
Base Metal Thickness of
Minimum Size of Fillet Weld
ThickerPartJoined
To inclusive
Over 5/16
In general, the maximum size fillet weld which may be made with a single pass is
5/16inch for submerged arc (SAW), gas metal arc (GMAW), and flux-cored arc
welding (FCAW) processes. The maximum size fillet weld made in a single pass is
inch for the shielded metal arc welding (SMAW)process.
The major difference between AWS D1.1 and D1.5 is the welding process
qualification. The only process deemed prequalified in D1.5 is shielded metal arc
(SMAW). All others must be qualified by test. Qualification of AASHTO M270
grade 50W (ASTM A709 grade 50W) in Section 5 of D1.5 qualifies the welding of all
AASHTO approved steels with a minimum specified yield of 50ksi or less. Bridge
fabricators generally qualify to M270 grade 50W (A709 grade 50W).
All bridge welding procedure specifications (WPS) submitted for approval shall be
accompanied by a procedure qualification record (PQR), a record of test specimens
examination and approval except for SMAW prequalified. Some handy reference aids
in checking WPS in addition to PQRare:
Matching filler metal requirements are found in BWC Section 4.
Prequalified joints are found in BWC Section 2.
AWS electrode specifications and classifications can be obtained from the structural
steel specialist. Many electrode specification sheets may be found online.
Highly skewed girders present difficult fit-up conditions. Setting screeds is also
complicated because of differential deflections between neighboring girders. Design
of cross frames and pier diaphragms must take into account twist and rotations of
webs during construction. This situation should be carefully studied by finite element
analysis to determine amount and type of movement anticipated during construction.
Details should be consistent. Unlike curved girders rotating away from plumb
at midspan, girder webs for skewed construction should be kept plumb atpiers.
TheNSBA has published Skewed and Curved Steel I-girder Bridge Fit, which is a
good reference on how to deal with fit-up of skewed and curvedgirders.
the fabricator to add splices subject to approval by the engineer. If there are fracture
critical components, they must be clearly identified along with CVN call-outs. See
Appendix6.4-A2.
6.4.5 Typical Girder Details
One or two plan sheets should be devoted to showing typical details to be used
throughout the girders. Such details include the weld details, various stiffener plates
and weld connections, locations of optional web splices, and drip plate details.
Include field splice details here if only one type of splice will suffice for theplans.
An entiresheet may be required for bridges with multiple field splice designs.
SeeAppendix 6.4-A3 and 6.4-A4. Note: Do not distinguish between field bolts
andshop bolts. A solid bolt symbol willsuffice.
Field splices for flanges should accommodate web location tolerance of per BWC
3.5.1.5. Allow a minimum of for out of position web plus for fillet weld, or a
total of minimum clear between theoretical face of web and edge of splice plate.
The bottom flange splice plate should be split to allow moisture to drain (use 4 equal
bottom flange splice plates). The fill plate does not need to be split.
Vertical stiffeners used to connect cross frames are generally 8 wide to accommodate
two bolt rows. They shall be welded to top and bottom flanges to reduce out-of-plane
bending of the web. All stiffeners shall be coped, clipped (or cut short in the case of
transverse stiffeners without cross frames) a distance between 4tw and 6tw to provide
web flexibility, per AASHTO LRFD Article6.10.11.1.1.
6.4.6 Cross Frame Details
Show member sizes, geometrics (work lines and work points), and connection details.
Actual lengths ofmembers and dimensions of connections will be determined by
the shop plan detailer. Details shall incorporate actual conditions such as skew and
neighboring members so that geometric conflicts can be avoided. Double angles shall
not be used for cross frames. Cross frames shall be complete subassemblies for field
installation. For highly loaded cross frames, such as at piers or between curved girders,
consider symmetric sections with little or no eccentricity in the connections. Where
possible, allow for repetitive use of cross frame geometrics, especially hole patterns in
stiffener connections, regardless of superelevation transitions. See Appendix6.4-A5.
Internal cross frames and top lateral systems for box girders are shop welded,
primarily. All connection types should be closely examined for detail conflict and
weld access. Clearance between bridge deck forming and top lateral members must
beconsidered.
surface of the top flange. The haunch distance between top of web and deck soffit shall
be 6 or greater to allow deck forming to clear top lateral members. Supplemental
blocking will be required to support deck forms on the typical waler system. See
example top lateral details Appendix6.4-A11.
Ideal girder construction allows full length web and flange plates to be continuously
welded without interruption of the welder. This process is routinely accomplished
with I-girder shapes, where web stiffeners are attached after top and bottom flanges
are welded to the web. With box girders, however, due to handling constraints, most
fabrication shops need to progress from top flange-to-web welding, welding stiffeners
to webs, and then welding the top flange plus web assemblies to the bottom flange.
This introduces a start and stop position at each web stiffener, unless enough clearance
is provided for the welder. To achieve this, the stiffener should be held back and
attached to the bottom flange by a member brought in after the bottom longitudinal
welds are complete. See detail Appendix 6.4-A11.
Small tractor mounted welders are able to run a continuous pass on the bottom external
weld, provided there is adequate shelf width. The standard offset between center
of web and edge of bottom flange is now2. In the past, this weld was primarily
performed by hand.
The most significant design difference between I-girders and box girders occur in
bottom flange compression regions. Using thicker material to provide stability is
not usually economical, given the typically wide unsupported flange widths. The
standard practice has been to stiffen relatively thin compression plates with a system
of longitudinal and transverse stiffeners. WSDOT practice is to use tee shapes, either
singly or in pairs for the wider plates. Ideally, the stiffeners are terminated at bolted
field splices. If the stiffener is terminated in a region of live load tension cycles, careful
attention needs to be paid to design fatigue stresses and the termination detail. See
details Appendix 6.4-A13.
Box girder inside clear height shall be 5feet or more to provide reasonable inspection
access. Less than 5feet inside clear height is not be permitted. Other girder types and
materials shall be investigated.
Drain holes shall be installed at all low points.
Geometrics for boxes are referenced to a single workline, unless box width tapers. The
box cross section remains tied to a centerline intersecting this workline and normal to
the bridge deck. The section rotates with superelevation transition rather than warping.
See box girder geometrics and proportions Appendix6.4-A10.
Box girders shall be supported by single centralized bearings when two or more boxes
make up the bridgesection. This requires diaphragms between boxes for bracing. See
pier diaphragm details Appendix6.4-A12.
6.99 References
The following publications can provide general guidance for the design of steel
structures. Some of this material may be dated and its application should be used
withcaution.
1. FHWA Steel Bridge Design Handbook (November, 2012)
This includes 19 volumes of detailed design references for I-girders and box
girders, both straight and curved, utilizing LRFD design. This reference also has
6detailed design examples for I-girder and box girder bridges, straight and curved.
2. Composite Steel Plate Girder Superstructures, by US Steel
Example tables and charts for complete plate girders, standardized for 34 and 44ft
roadways and HS-20 loading. Many span arrangements and lengths are presented.
3. Steel Structures, Design and Behavior by Salmon and Johnson
A textbook for steel design, formatted to AISC LRFD method. This is a good
reference for structural behavior of steel members or components, in detail that is
not practical for codes or other manuals.
4. Design of Welded Structures by Omer H. Blodgett.
This publication is quite helpful in the calculation of section properties and the
design of individual members. There are sections on bridge girders and many other
welded structures. The basics of torsion analysis are included.
5. Guide to Stability Design Criteria for Metal Structures, Sixth Edition by
RonaldD.Ziemian
6. AASHTO/NSBA Steel Bridge Collaboration Publications
These publications include several guidelines for design, detailing, fabrication,
inspection and erection of steel structures.
7. A Fatigue Primer for Structural Engineers, by John Fisher, Geoffrey L Kulak,
andIan F. C. Smith
8. Steel Construction Manual, Latest Edition, by American Institute of Steel
Construction
The essential reference for rolled shape properties, design tables, and specifications
governing steel design and construction.
9. Machinerys Handbook, Latest Edition by Industrial Press
A reference book for the machine shop practice; handy for thread types, machine
tolerances and fits, spring design, etc.
10. Painting of Steel Bridges and Other Structures, by Clive H. Hare
This is a good reference for paint systems, surface preparation, and relative costs,
for both bare and previously painted steel. Explanations of how each paint system
works, and comparisons of each on the basis of performance and cost are provided.
11. NCHRP Report 314, Guidelines for the Use of Weathering Steel in Bridges
This reference contains detailing information if weathering steel will be used.
Protection of concrete surfaces from staining and techniques for providing uniform
appearance is provided.
At interior piers The initial size, shape and number of columns and how they
are configured with the foundation (e.g., whether a single foundation element
supports each column, or one foundation element supports multiple columns)
At water crossings Pier scour depth, if known, and any potential for migration
of the water crossing in the future. Typically, the GB and the BSO should
coordinate pursuing this information with the HB.
Any known structural constraints that affect the foundation type, size,
orlocation.
Any known constraints that affect the soil resistance (utilities, construction
staging, excavation, shoring, and falsework).
C. Preliminary Foundation Design
The third phase is a request by the BSO for a preliminary foundation memorandum.
The GB memo will provide preliminary soil data required for structural analysis
and modeling. This includes any subsurface conditions and the preliminary
subsurfaceprofile.
The concurrent geotechnical work at this stage includes:
Completion of detailed boring logs and laboratory test data.
Development of foundation type, soil capacity, and foundation depth.
Development of static/seismic soil properties and ground acceleration.
Recommendations for constructability issues.
The BO may also request the HB to provide preliminary scour design
recommendations if the structure is located over a water crossing.
D. Structural Analysis and Modeling
In the fourth phase, the BSO performs a structural analysis of the superstructure
and substructure using a bridge model and preliminary soil parameters. Through
this modeling, the designer determines loads and sizes for the foundation based on
the controlling LRFD limit states. Structural and geotechnical design continues to
investigate constructability and construction staging issues during this phase.
In order to produce a final geotechnical report, the BSO provides the following
structural feedback tothe Geotechnical Engineer:
Foundation loads for service, strength, and extreme limit states.
Foundation size/diameter and depth required to meet structural design.
Foundation details that could affect the geotechnical design of the foundations.
Foundation layout plan.
Assumed scour depths for each limit state (if applicable)
For water crossings, the BSO also provides the information listed above to the
hydraulics engineer toverify initial scour and hydraulics recommendations are still
suitable for the site.
(See Chapter 2 for examples of pile design data sheets that shall be filled out and
submitted to the Geotechnical Engineer at the early stage of design.)
Bridge design shall consider construction loads to ensure structural stability and
prevent members from overstress. For example, temporary construction loads
caused by placing all of the precast girders on one side of a crossbeam can overload
a single column pier. Construction loads shall also include live loads from potential
construction equipment. The plans shall show a construction sequence and/or notes
toavoid unacceptable loadings.
On curved bridges, the substructure design shall consider the eccentricity resulting
from the difference in girder lengths and the effects of torsion. When superstructure
design uses a curved girder theory, such as the V-Load Method, the reactions from such
analysis must be included in the loads applied to thesubstructure.
Figure 7.1.6-1
Special note for single column/single shaft configuration: The seismic design
philosophy requires a plastic hinge in the substructure elements above ground
(preferably in the columns). Designers should note the magnitude of shear and
moment at the top of the shaft, if the column zero moment is close to a shaft
head foundation spring, the FEM and soil response program will not converge
and plastic hinging might be below grade.
Throughout the iteration process it is important to note that any set of springs
developed are only applicable to the loading that was used to develop them
(due to the inelastic behavior of the soil in the foundation program). This can
be a problem when the forces used to develop the springs are from a seismic
analysis that combines modal forces using a method such as the Complete
Quadratic Combination (CQC) or other method. The forces that result from
this combination are typically dominated by a single mode (in each direction as
shown by mass participation). Thisresults in the development of springs and
forces that are relatively accurate for that structure. If the force combination
(CQC or otherwise) is not dominated by one mode shape (in the same
direction), the springs and forces that are developed during the above iteration
process may not beaccurate.
LPILE may be used for a pile group supported footing. Pile or shaft foundation group
effects for lateral loading shall be taken as recommended in the project geotechnical
report. The liquefaction option in LPILE shall not be used (the liquefaction option shall
be disabled). The Liquefied Sand soil type shall not be used in LPILE.
7.2.3 Bridge Model Section Properties
In general, gross section properties may be assumed for all FEM members, except
concrete columns.
A. Cracked Properties for Columns
Effective section properties shall be inaccordance with the AASHTO Seismic
Section 5.6.
B. Shaft Properties
The shaft concrete strength and construction methods lead tosignificant variation
in shaft stiffness described asfollows.
For a stiff substructure response:
1. Use 1.5 c to calculate the modulus of elasticity. Since aged concrete will
generally reach a compressive strength of at least 6 ksi when using a design
strength of 4 ksi, the factor of 1.5is areasonable estimate for an increase
instiffness.
2. Use Ig based on the maximum oversized shaft diameter allowed by Standard
Specifications Section6-19.
3. When permanent casing is specified, increase shaft Ig using the transformed
area of a thick casing. Since the contractor will determine the thickness of
the casing, is a conservative estimate for design.
7 .2 .3-1 1 (7.2.3-1)
Where:
7 .3 .6-1
n = Es/E 13
c
1.0 c to calculate
1. Use 7 .4 .7-1 themodulus
of elasticity.
2. Use pile Ig, neglecting casing properties.
7 .8 .1-1
7.2.4 Bridge Model Verification
As with any7 .8 .2-1
FEM, thedesigner
should
review the foundation behavior to ensure
the foundation springs correctly imitate the known boundary conditions and soil
7 .9 .2-1out
properties. Watch for mismatch
of units.
7-B-1 .4
7-B-1 .5A 11
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 7-11
June 2016
7-B-1 .5B 33
Substructure Design Chapter 7
Designers should be careful to match the geometry of the FEM and soil response
program. If the location of the foundation springs (or node) in the FEM does
not match the location input to the soil response program, the two programs will
notconverge correctly.
E. Boundary Conditions (Method II)
To calculate spring coefficients, the designer must first identify the predicted shape,
or direction of loading, of the foundation member where the spring is located in
the bridge model. Thiswill determine if one or a combination of two boundary
conditions apply for the transverse and longitudinal directions ofasupport.
A fixed head boundary condition occurs when the foundation element is in double
curvature where translation without rotation is the dominant behavior. Stated
in other terms, the shear causes deflection in the opposite direction of applied
moment. This is a common assumption applied to both directions of a rectangular
pile group in a pile supported footing.
A free head boundary condition is when the foundation element is in single
curvature where translation and rotation is the dominant behavior. Stated in other
terms, the shear causes deflection in the same direction as the applied moment.
Most large diameter shaft designs will have a single curvature below ground line
and require a free head assumption. The classic example of single curvature is
a single column on a single shaft. In the transverse direction, this will act like a
flagpole in the wind, or free head. What is not so obvious is the same shaft will
also have single curvature in the longitudinal direction (below the ground line),
even though the column exhibits some double curvature behavior. Likewise, in the
transverse direction of multi-column piers, the columns will have double curvature
(frame action). The shafts will generally have single curvature below grade and the
free head boundary condition applies. The boundary condition for large shafts with
springs placed atthe ground line will be free head in most cases.
The key to determine the correct boundary condition is to resolve the correct sign
of the moment and shear at the top of the shaft (or point of interest for the spring
location). Since multi-mode results are always positive (CQC), this can be worked
out by observing the seismic moment and shear diagrams for the structure. If the
sign convention is still unclear, apply a unit load in a separate static FEM run to
establish sign convention at the point of interest.
The correct boundary condition is critical to the seismic response analysis. For
any type of soil and agiven foundation loading, a fixed boundary condition
will generally provide soil springs four to five times stiffer than a free head
boundarycondition.
F. Spring Calculation (Method II)
The first step to calculate a foundation spring is to determine the shear and moment
in the structural member where the spring is to be applied in the FEM. Foundation
spring coefficients should be based on the maximum shear and moment from the
applied longitudinal or transverse seismic loading. The combined load case (1.0L
and 0.3T) shall be assumed for the design of structural members, and NOT applied
to determine foundation response. For the simple case of a bridge with no skew,
the longitudinal shear and moment are the result of the seismic longitudinal load,
and the transverse components are ignored. This is somewhat unclear for highly
skewed piers or curved structures with rotated springs, but the principle remains
the same.
G. Matrix Coordinate Systems (Method II)
The Global coordinate systems used to demonstrate matrix theory are usually
similar to the system defined for substructure loads in Section 7.1.3, and is
shown in Figure 7.2.5-2. This is also the default Global coordinate system of GT
STRUDL. This coordinate system applies to this Section toestablish the sign
convention for matrix terms. Note vertical axial load is labeled as P, and horizontal
shear load is labeled as V.
Also note the default Global coordinate system in CSI BRIDGE uses Z as the
vertical axis (gravity axis). When imputing spring values in CSI BRIDGE the
coefficients in the stiffness matrix will need to be adjusted accordingly. CSI
BRIDGE allows you to assign spring stiffness values to support joints. By default,
only the diagonal terms of the stiffness matrix can be assigned, but when selecting
the advanced option, terms to asymmetrical {6x6} matrix can be assigned.
Py
My
Longit udinal Mx
Vx
Mz
Vz
Vx Py Vz Mx My Mz Disp. Force
Vx K11 0 0 0 0 0 x Vx
Py 0 K 22 0 0 0 0 y Py
Vz 0 0 K33 0 0 0 z = Vz
Mx 0 0 0 K 44 0 0 x Mx
My 0 0 0 0 K55 0 y My
Mz 0 0 0 0 0 K 66 z Mz
Where the linear spring constants or K values are defined as follows, using the
Global Coordinates:
K11 = Longitudinal Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K22 = Vertical or Axial Stiffness (kip/in)
K33 = Transverse Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K44 = Transverse Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K55 = Torsional Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K66 = Longitudinal Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
The linear lateral spring constants along the diagonal represent a point on a
non-linear soil/structure response curve. The springs are only accurate for the
applied loading and less accurate for other loadings. This is considered acceptable
for Strength and Extreme Event design. For calculation of spring constants for
Technique I see Appendix 7-B1.
I. Group Effects
When a foundation analysis uses LPILE or an analysis using PY relationships,
group effects will require the geotechnical properties to be reduced before the
spring values are calculated. Thegeotechnical report will provide transverse and
longitudinal multipliers that are applied to the PY curves. This will reduce the pile
resistance in a linear fashion. The reduction factors for lateral resistance due to the
interaction of deep foundation members is provided in the Geotechnical Design
Manual Section 8.12.2.5.
J. Shaft Caps and Pile Footings
Where pile supported footings or shaft caps are entirely below grade, their passive
resistance should be utilized. In areas prone to scour or lateral spreading, their
passive resistance should be neglected.
7.2.6 Lateral Analysis of Piles and Shafts
A. Determination of Tip Elevations
Lateral analysis of piles and shafts involves determination of a shaft or pile tip
location sufficient to resist lateral loads in both orthogonal directions. In many
cases, the shaft or pile tip depth required to resist lateral loads may be deeper than
that required for bearing or uplift. However, a good starting point for a tip elevation
is the depth required for bearing or uplift. Another good rule-of-thumb starting
point for shaft tips is an embedment depth of 6 diameters (6D) to 8 diameters
(8D). Refer also to the geotechnical report minimum tip elevations provided by the
Geotechnical Engineer.
A parametric study or analysis should be performed to evaluate the sensitivity
of the depth of the shaft or pile to the displacement of the structure (i.e. the
displacement of the shaft or pile head) in order to determine the depth required for
stable, proportionate lateral response of the structure. Determination of shaft or pile
tip location requires engineering judgment, and consideration should be given to
the type of soil, the confidence in the soil data (proximity of soil borings) and the
potential variability in the soil profile. Arbitrarily deepening shaft or pile tips may
be conservative but can also have significant impact on constructability and cost.
The following is a suggested approach for determining appropriate shaft or pile tip
elevations that are located in soils. Other considerations will need to be considered
when shaft or pile tips are located in rock, such as the strength of the rock. This
approach is based on the displacement demand seismic design procedures specified
in the AASHTO Seismic Specifications.
1. Size columns and determine column reinforcement requirements for Strength
and Service load cases.
2. Determine the column plastic over-strength moment and shear at the base of the
column using the axial dead load and expected column material properties. A
program such as XTRACT or CSI BRIDGE may be used to help compute these
capacities. The plastic moments and shears are good initial loads to apply to a
soil response program. In some cases, Strength or other Extreme event loads
may be a more appropriate load to apply in the lateral analysis. For example, in
eastern Washington seismic demands are relatively low and elastic seismic or
Strength demands may control.
3. Perform lateral analysis using the appropriate soil data from the Geotechnical
report for the given shaft or pile location. If final soil data is not yet available,
consult with the Geotechnical Engineer for preliminary values to use for
thesite.
Note: Early in the lateral analysis it is wise to obtain moment and shear
demands in the shaft or pile and check that reasonable reinforcing ratios can
be used to resist the demands. If not, consider resizing the foundation elements
and restart the lateral analysis.
4. Develop a plot of embedment depth of shaft or pile versus lateral deflection of
the top of shaft or pile. The minimum depth, or starting point, shall be the depth
required for bearing or uplift or as specified by the geotechnical report. An
example plot of an 8 diameter shaft is shown in Figure 7.2.6-1 and illustrates
the sensitivity of the lateral deflections versus embedment depth. Notice that at
tip depths of approximately 50 (roughly 6D) the shaft head deflections begin to
increase substantially with small reductions in embedment depth. The plot also
clearly illustrates that tip embedment below 70 has no impact on the shaft head
lateraldeflection.
5. From the plot of embedment depth versus lateral deflection, choose the
appropriate tip elevation. In the example plot in Figure 7.2.6-1, the engineer
should consider a tip elevation to the left of the dashed vertical line drawn in
the Figure. The final tip elevation would depend on the confidence in the soil
data and the tolerance of the structural design displacement. For example, if the
site is prone to variability in soil layers, the engineer should consider deepening
the tip; say 1 to 3 diameters, to ensure that embedment into the desired soil
layer is achieved. The tip elevation would also depend on the acceptable lateral
displacement of the structure. To assess the potential variability in the soil
layers, the Geotechnical Engineer assigned to the project should be consulted.
10 Ground Elev.
20
30
Shaft Tip Embedment (ft)
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
6. With the selected tip elevation, review the deflected shape of the shaft or
pile, which can be plotted in LPILE. Examples are shown in Figure 7.2.6-2.
Depending on the size and stiffness of the shaft or pile and the soil properties, a
variety of deflected shapes are possible, ranging from a rigid body (fence post)
type shape to a long slender deflected shape with 2 or more inflection points.
Review the tip deflections to ensure they are reasonable, particularly with rigid
body type deflected shapes. Any of the shapes in the Figure may be acceptable,
but again it will depend on the lateral deflection the structure can tolerate.
The engineer will also need to consider whether liquefiable soils are present and/
or if the shaft or pile is within a zone where significant scour can occur. In this case
the analysis needs to be bracketed to envelope various scenarios. It is likely that a
liquefiable or scour condition case may control deflection. In general, the WSDOT
policy is to not include scour with Extreme Event I load combinations. In other
words, full seismic demands or the plastic over-strength moment and shear, are
generally not applied to the shaft or pile in a scoured condition. However, in some
cases a portion of the anticipated scour will need to be included with the Extreme
Event I load combination limit states. When scour is considered with the Extreme
Event I limit state, the soil resistance up to a maximum of 25 percent of the scour
depth for the design flood event (100 year) shall be deducted from the lateral
analysis of the pile or shaft. In all cases where scour conditions are anticipated
at the bridge site or specific pier locations, the Geotechnical Engineer and the
Depth (ft)
Depth (ft)
Depth (ft)
Where:
K = Ksur
K = Translation or rotational spring
Ksur = Stiffness of foundation at surface, see Table 7.2.7-1
= Correction factor for embedment, see Table 7.2.7-2
Degree of Degree
Freedomof Freedom Ksur
Ksur Formatted Tab
Degree of Freedom Ksur Formatted Tab
Formatted Tab
GB L 0000....65 65
GB 3.4 L
GB L 1.2
65
65
Translation
Translation along x-axis
along x-axis
Translation
Translation along
along x-axis
x-axis 3
v . 4 1. 2
22 v B B
0.65
GB 3.4 L
GB L 0.65 0.4 L L 0.8
0.65
Translation
Translation along y-axis
along y-axis GB 3 . 4 L 0 . 4 L
Translation
Translation along
along y-axis
y-axis
2 vv 3.4 B
0.4 B 0
0..8
8
2
2 v B B B
B
GB 0.75
GB 1.55 L L 0.75 0.8
0.75
TranslationTranslation
Translation along
along z-axis
along z-axis z-axis GB 1 . 55 L 0 . 8
Translation along z-axis 1 vv 1.55 B 0.8
1
1 v B
B
3
GB
GB 3 L
Rocking
Rocking about
about x-axis GB 3 0.4 L L 0.1
Rocking about about x-axis
x-axis
Rocking x-axis 0 .
4 0 . 1
vv B
11 B
3 2.4
GB33 L 2.4
2. 4
Rocking about y-axis GB 00..47 47 L 00..034
034
Rocking about y-axis 0.034
Rocking about y-axis 1 vvv 0.47 B
11 B
B
3
L
2.45
22..45
45
3
Torsion about z-axis
Torsion about z-axis
GB
GB 00..53
GB 3 0 . 53 L
53 51
000...51
51
Torsion about z-axis BB
B
Where:
d = Height of effective sidewall contact (may be less than
total foundation height if the foundation is exposed).
h = Depth to centroid of effective sidewall contact.
Figure 7.2.7-2
DegreeDegree
of Freedom
Degree of
Degree of Freedom
of Freedom
Freedom
Degree of Freedom
Translation
Translation along
along x-axis
along x-axis 00..44
0
0...4
4
Translation
Translation x-axis D
D hd
hd B
B
L
L
0 4
Translation along along
x-axisx-axis 1 0
1 0...21
D
D 1 1 1 . 6
hd
hd B
B
L
L
1 0 21
21 B
1 . 6
1 1.6 BL2222 2
1 0.21 B 1 1.6 BL
B
B BL
BL
Translation
Translation along
along y-axis
y-axis BB LL 0000....4444
0 .4
Translation
Translation along
along y-axis D hd
Translation along y-axis
y-axis 1 1
1
00
0....21
21
21 D 1
D 1
1
11
1 .
.
1..66 LB
6
6
hd
hd B 222 L
1 0 21 L 1
L
L
L LB
LB
LB
2
2
Translation along z-axis 2
2
2
Translation
Translation along
along z-axis 23333
2
z-axis 1 D
D B
B d
d
B
B L
L
Translation along z-axis 1 1
1
1 D
2
2
1 21 B 22
2
2 .
. 6
6 B
1
1
22..66 L 11
00
0
0..32 .
.32 d B
32 BL 3
32
L
1 21
21 B
B
B L
L
L BL BL
21 BL
Rocking
Rocking about x-axis 2d d 00..22 B 0...2
0
0 2
2
Rocking about
about x-axis d 1
d
Rocking about x-axis
x-axis 1
1
12
2
2....5
5
5d 1
12
2dd d
d B
B
1 2 5 B 1 B D L
B
B
B
B
B D
B
D
D
L
L
L
Rocking
Rocking about
about y-axis d 00..66 1.5 3.7 d d 00..66
0 0.6
0..6 1..9
9 1.9 00..66 0.6
Rocking about y-axis
y-axis dd
6
d 11..99 d
d
1
d
111
1
1 .
. 4
4
d
1 .5 3 .7
d
d
Rocking about y-axis 111..44 L L 1 1..5
5 33..7
7 L
L D D
L
L
L D
L D
Torsion
Torsion about
Torsion about z-axis
z-axis
0.9
0.9
d 000...999
Torsion about
about z-axis
z-axis 1
1
2
2 ...6
6 1 1
B
B d
B d
Torsion about z-axis 1
1 2.61
2 6 1
L B
L B
L
L B
B
7 .3 .6-1 13 (7.3.2-1)
7 .4 .6-1
7 .4 .6-2
Page 7-28 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
7 .4 .7-1 June 2016
Chapter 7 Substructure Design
June 2016
Chapter 7
Figure 7.3.5-1
Page 7-33
Substructure Design
Substructure Design Chapter 7
D. Longitudinal Development
1. Crossbeams
Development of longitudinal reinforcement shall be in accordance
with AASHTO Seismic, Sections 8.8.4 and 8.8.8. Column longitudinal
reinforcement shall be extended into crossbeams as close as practically possible
to the opposite face of the crossbeam (below the bridge deck reinforcement).
For precast prestressed concrete girder bridges in SDC A and B with fixed
diaphragms at intermediate piers, column longitudinal reinforcement may
be terminated at top of lower crossbeam, provided that adequate transfer of
column forces is provided.
For precast prestressed concrete girder bridges in SDC C and D with two-stage
fixed diaphragms at intermediate piers, all column longitudinal reinforcement
should extend to the top of the cast-in-place concrete diaphragm (upper
crossbeam) above the lower crossbeam. Careful attention should be given that
column reinforcement does not interfere with extended strands projecting from
the end of the prestressed concrete girders. In case of interference, column
longitudinal reinforcement obstructing the extended strands may be terminated
at top of the lower crossbeam, and shall be replaced with equivalent full-height
stirrups extending from the lower to upper crossbeam within the effective
width as shown in Figure 7.3.5-2. All stirrups within the effective zone, based
on an approximate strut-and-tie model, may be used for this purpose. The
effective zone shall be taken as column diameter plus depth of lower crossbeam
provided that straight column bars are adequately developed into the lower
crossbeam. The effective zone may be increased to the column diameter
plus two times depth of lower crossbeam if headed bars are used for column
longitudinalreinforcement.
If the depth of lower crossbeam is less than 1.25 times the tension development
length required for column reinforcement, headed bars shall be used. Heads
on column bars terminated in the lower crossbeam are preferable from a
structural perspective. However, extra care in detailing during design and
extra care in placement of the column reinforcement during construction is
required. Typically the heads on the column bars will be placed below the lower
crossbeam top mat of reinforcement. Headed reinforcement shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM 970 Class HA.
Transverse column reinforcement only needs to extend to the top of the lower
crossbeam just below the top longitudinal steel. However, when the joint
shear principal tension is less than 0.11fc, minimum cross tie reinforcement
shall be placed acting across the upper cross beam in accordance with the
AASHTO Seismic, Sections 8.13.3. The minimum cross tie reinforcement
shall provide at least as much confining pressure at yield as the column spiral
can provide at yield. This pressure may be calculated assuming hydrostatic
conditions. If the joint shear principal tension exceeds 0.11fc, then additional
joint reinforcement as outlined by AASHTO Seismic, Sections 8.13.3 shall be
provided. With the exception of J-bars, the additional reinforcement shall be
placed in the upper and lower crossbeam. The cross tie reinforcement may be
placed with a lap splice in the center of the joint.
3. Shafts
Column longitudinal reinforcement in shafts is typically straight. Embedment
shall be a minimum length equal to lns = ls + s (per TRAC Report WA- RD
417.1 titled Noncontact Lap Splices in Bridge Column-Shaft Connections).
Where:
ls = the larger of 1.7 lac or 1.7 ld
lac = development length from the AASHTO Seismic 8.8.4 for the
column longitudinal reinforcement.
ld = tension development length from AASHTO LRFD Section 5.11.2.1
for the column longitudinal reinforcement.
s = distance between the shaft and column longitudinal reinforcement
COLUMN
SHAFT
S l ns
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
E. Transverse Reinforcement
All transverse reinforcement in columns shall be deformed. Although allowed in
the AASHTO LRFD Specification, plain bars or plain wire may not be used for
transverse reinforcement.
Columns in SDC A may use spirals, circular hoops, or rectangular hoops and
crossties. Spirals are the preferred confinement reinforcement and shall be used
whenever a #6 spiral is sufficient to satisfy demands. When demands require
reinforcement bars greater than #6, circular hoops of #7 through #9 may be used.
Bundled spirals shall not be used for columns or shafts. Also, mixing of spirals and
hoops within the same column is not permitted by the AASHTO Seismic
Specifications. Figure 7.3.5-4 and 7.3.5-5 show transverse reinforcement details for
rectangular columns in high and low seismic zones, respectively.
Columns in SDCs C and D shall use hoop reinforcement. Hoop reinforcement
shall be circular where possible, although rectangular hoops with ties may be used
when large, odd shaped column sections are required. Where the column diameter
is 3-feet or less, the WSDOT Steel Specialist shall be contacted regarding the
constructability of smaller diameter welded hoops.
When rectangular hoops with ties are used, consideration shall be given to column
constructability. Such considerations can include, but are not limited to a minimum
of 2-6 by 3-0 open rectangle to allow access for the tremie tube and construction
workers for concrete placement, in-form access hatches, and/or external vibrating.
A larger gap between transverse reinforcement should be provided at the top of
columns to allow space for the crossbeam longitudinal reinforcement to pass.
In SDCs C & D, the gap shall not exceed the maximum spacing for lateral
reinforcement in plastic hinge regions specified in AASHTO Seismic, Section
8.8.9. This can be of particular concern in bridge decks with large superelevation
cross slopes.
(7 .3 .6-2)
7 .4 .6-1
Where:
A , V , and d are as defined in AASHTO Article Notations
7 .4 .6-2 1hv issthedistance
from the hinge to where the bend begins (7.3.6-2)
Continue this spacing one-quarter of the column width (in the plane
Where: perpendicular to the hinge) past the bend in the hinge bars.
7 .4 .7-1
Av, Vs, and d are as defined in AASHTO Article Notations
1h is the distance from the hinge to where the bend begins
7 .8 .1-1
Continue this spacing one-quarter of the column width (in the plane perpendicular to
the hinge) past the7 .8 .2-1
bend in the
hinge
bars.
7 .9 .2-1
7-B-1 .1
7-B-1 .2 1 3
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.15 Page 7-45
December 2015
7-B-1 .3 1
7-B-1 .4
7-B-1 .5A 11
7-B-1 .5B 33
Page 7-44 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
7-B-1 .6A
Chapter 7 Substructure Design
Hinge Details
Figure 7.3.6-1
7 .4 .7-1 (7.3.7-1)
Where:
7 .8 .1-1
Ls = The larger of 1.7Lac or 1.7Ld (for Class C lap splice)
Lac = Development length of bar from the AASHTO Seismic 8.8.4.
7 .8 .2-1
Ld = Tension length from AASHTO LRFD 5.11.2.1
development
(Note: All applicable modification factors for Ld may be used except
for the reduction specified in Section 5.11.2.2.2 for As required/As
provided)
7 .9 .2-1
sc = Distance from longitudinal
reinforcement of outer column
to 7-B-1 .1
inner column.
Lp = Analytical Plastic Hinge Length defined in the AASHTO
Seismic 4.11.6-3.
7-B-1 .2 1 3
b. The longitudinal reinforcing in the inner column shall meet all the design
iii. The axial resistance of the inner column shall meet the demands of
strength load cases assuming the outer concrete has cracked and spalled
off. The gross area, Ag, shall be the area contained inside the spiral
reinforcement.
iv. The inner core shall be designed and detailed to meet all applicable
requirements of AASHTO Seismic Section 8.
2. Transverse Reinforcement
a. The portion of the transverse reinforcement for the inner core, inside
the larger column dimension (above the foundation), shall meet all the
requirements of the AASHTO Seismic and AASHTO LRFD Specification.
The demand shall be based on the larger of the overstrength plastic shear
demand (Vpo) of the inner column or the ultimate shear demand from
strength load cases at the hinge location. The transverse reinforcement
shall be extended to the top of the longitudinal reinforcement for the inner
column (Lns).
b. The portion of transverse reinforcement for the inner core, in the
foundation, shall meet the minimum requirements of the AASHTO Seismic,
Section 8.8.8, for compression members, based on the dimensions of the
inner column. This reinforcement shall be extended to the bend radius
of the of the longitudinal inner column reinforcement for footings or as
required for column-shaft connections.
c. A gap in the inner column transverse reinforcement shall be sized to
allow the foundation top mat reinforcement and foundation concrete to
be placed prior to setting the upper portion of the transverse inner column
reinforcement. This gap shall be limited to 5; a larger gap will require
the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineers approval. The spiral reinforcement
above the footing shall be placed within 1 of the top of footing to
reduce the required gap size. The WSDOT Spiral termination details
will be required at each end of this gap, the top of the upper transverse
reinforcement, but not the bottom of the lower transverse reinforcement
with spread footings.
3. Analytical Plastic Hinge Region
a. The analytical plastic hinge length of the reduced column section shall be
based on horizontally isolated flared reinforced concrete columns, using
Equation 4.11.6-3 of the AASHTO Seismic Specifications.
b. The end of the column which does not have a reduced column section shall
be based on Equation 4.11.6-1 of the AASHTO Seismic Specifications.
Open Gap Detail
Figure 7.3.7-2
7.4 Crossbeams
7.4.1 General Design
The following is the recommended procedure for strength design and load rating of
a two-stage, integral, non-prestressed crossbeam at multicolumn intermediate piers
supporting precast superstructures. The procedure is based on beam theory for a
tension-controlled element, which is an acceptable method for design and load rating.
The strut and tie method is also an acceptable procedure.
A. Stage I Design
1. Obtain load effects on the lower stage I crossbeam. The dead loads on the
crossbeam typically include the self-weight of the lower crossbeam, girders,
diaphragms, bridge deck, and the dead load from the upper stage II portion of
the crossbeam. Additionally:
A construction load equal to 15 psf over the entire deck area shall be
included in the Strength I and III load combinations. This construction
load is intended to account for formwork, work decks, miscellaneous
materials and equipment, and any construction related live loads (Bidwell
finishing machine, etc.). The load factor for the construction load shall be
inaccordance with Section 3.6.
Strength IV, which is the load combination relating to very high
dead load to live load force effects, need not be considered for this
condition as clarified in the 7th Edition of the AASTHO LRFD Bridge
DesignSpecifications.
Torsion due to unbalanced loading on the stage I crossbeam shall be
considered. The unbalanced cases shall include at a minimum, the case
where all girders are set on one side of the pier and the case where all
girders are in place on both sides but the deck is only placed on one side
ofthe pier.
2. Design the longitudinal reinforcement in the top and bottom of the lower
crossbeam for the controlling strength load case.
3. Design the transverse reinforcement in the lower crossbeam considering the
controlling strength shear demands, including the construction load previously
described. Only the transverse reinforcement that is fully enclosed and
anchored within the stage I crossbeam shall be considered to be effective.
4. Check minimum flexural and shear reinforcement, crack control by distribution
of flexural steel, and temperature and shrinkage requirements.
B. Stage II Design
1. The stage II crossbeam is full depth and fully composite with the stage I lower
portion. Apply the total DC, DW, LL, TU, and all other applicable load effects
on the stage II crossbeam, including loads which were applied to the stage
I crossbeam. This is a simplified procedure assuming the entire full depth
crossbeam is cast monolithic, and it may imply some load redistribution. The
construction load of 15 psf need not be considered in the stage II analysis.
2. Design the top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement for the controlling
strength load case. For the bottom reinforcement, use the largest required steel
area for either the stage I or stage II case. The crossbeam may either be treated
as a rectangular
Substructure Design section, or the effective width of the deck can be considered Chapter 7
as a T section. The
2. Design thetop longitudinal
top and reinforcement
bottom longitudinal in the
reinforcement stage
for the I lower
controlling strength
crossbeam is typically ignored.
load case. For the bottom reinforcement, use the largest required steel area for
either the stage I or stage II case. The crossbeam may either be treated as a
3. Design the transverse
rectangular reinforcement for the
section, or the effective combination
width of the deck can ofbethe controlling
considered as a T
strength load section.
case. ForThe top longitudinal reinforcement in the stage I lower crossbeam can
most crossbeams, torsion in the stage II analysis is
be ignored. The concrete
typically ignored.shear resistance shall be computed assuming the
full depth 3.
section.
DesignThe transverse
the transverse steel shear
reinforcement resistance
for the combination shall becontrolling
of the based on the
sum of Vs1 and Vs2. The Vs1 resistance shall be based on the shear steel
strength load case. For most crossbeams, torsion in the stage II analysis canandbe
ignored. The concrete shear resistance shall be computed
depth dv from the stage I crossbeam. The Vs2 resistance shall be based on the assuming the full depth
section.
shear steel that runsThe fulltransverse
depth and steelashear resistance
dv value shall be based on
corresponding to the
thesum Vs1 and
fullofdepth
Vs2. The Vs1 resistance shall be based on the shear steel and depth dv from the
of the crossbeam. Each vertical leg of transverse reinforcement shall only
stage I crossbeam. The Vs2 resistance shall be based on the shear steel that runs
be consideredfull
indepth
either V or V , never both. In the zones where girders
and as1dv values2corresponding to the full depth of the crossbeam. Each
are located, the outer rows of fullreinforcement
vertical leg of transverse depth shearshall reinforcement
only be considered is terminated.
in either Vs1 or
For inner rowsVs2of fullboth.
, never depth shear
In the reinforcement,
zones where girders arethe spacing
located, may
the outer beof full
rows
increased where
depththere
shear is congestion
reinforcement due to extended
is terminated. For innergirder
rows ofstrands,
full depth however
shear
the designer shall maintain as much shear reinforcement in these zones
reinforcement, the spacing may be increased where there is congestion dueas to
practicablypossible.
extended girder strands, however the designer shall maintain as much shear
reinforcement in these zones as practicably possible.
In the regions where shear reinforcement spacing varies across the shear
failure plane,Inthe
theresistance
regions wheremay
shearbereinforcement
determined basedvaries
spacing on the average
across the shearshear
failure
reinforcementplane,
areatheper unit length
resistance may bewithin the based
determined shearonfailure plane.
the average shearThe average
reinforcement
shear reinforcement arealength
area per unit per within
unit length
the shearmay beplane.
failure determined as follows:
The average shear
reinforcement area per unit length may be determined as follows:
7.4.1-1
=
cot
where:
Where: Av = area of shear reinforcement
Av = area ofs shear=reinforcement
spacing of shear reinforcement
a =
s = spacing of shear
i horizontal distance of shear plane crossing the stirrup zone i
reinforcement
ai = horizontal distance of sheardepth
d v = effective shear plane crossing the stirrup zone i
cot = for the simplified method, = 45 degrees and cot = 1.0
dv = effective shear depth
cot = for the simplified method, = 45 degrees and cot = 1.0
See Figure 7.4.1-1. For deep girders, the shear failure plane at 45 degrees will
typically run beyond the girder width and will intersect shear reinforcement on
either side of the girder. For smaller depth girders, such as WF42Gs, this average
shear reinforcement method may not suffice and more steel will need to be placed
in the girder zones, regardless of congestion constraints.
The concrete shear resistance, Vc, shall be based on the depth dv from the stage II
crossbeam.
See Figure 7.4.1-1. For deep girders, the shear failure plane at 45 degrees will
typically run beyond the girder width and will intersect shear reinforcement
on either side of the girder. For smaller depth girders, such as WF42Gs, this
average shear reinforcement method may not suffice and more steel will need
to be placed in the girder zones, regardless of congestion constraints.
The concrete shear resistance, Vc, shall be based on the depth dv from the stage
II crossbeam.
DESIGN SECTION
Av/s ZONE 3
NOTIONAL SHEAR CRACK
Av/s ZONE 2
Av/s ZONE 1
COLUMN
a1 a2 a3
dv/2 dv/2
2. Cantilever Abutments
If the height of the wall from the bearing seat down to the bottom of the footing
exceeds the clear distance between the girder bearings, the assumed 45 lines of
influence from the girder reactions will overlap, and the dead load and live load
from the superstructure can be assumed equally distributed over the abutment
width. The design may then be carried out on a per-foot basis. The primary
structural action takes place normal to the abutment, and the bending moment
effect parallel to the abutment may be neglected in most cases. The wall is
assumed to be a cantilever member fixed at the top of the footing and subjected
to axial, shear, and bending loads see Figure7.5.1-2.
Spill-Through Abutment
Figure 7.5.1-3
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 7-55
June 2016
Substructure Design Chapter 7
Rigid Frame Abutment
Figure 7.5.1-4
5. Bent-Type Abutments
An abutment that includes a bent cap supported on columns or extended
piles or shafts is shown in Figure 7.5.1-5. For structural reasons it may be
required to construct a complete wall behind a bridge abutment prior to bridge
construction. Bent-type abutments may be used where the abutment requires
protection from lateral and vertical loads and settlement. This configuration
shall only be used with the approval of the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
Itshall not be used where initial construction cost is the only determining
incentive.
A bridge approach slab shall span a maximum of 6-0 between the back of
pavement seat and the face of the approach embankment wall. The approach
slab shall be designed as a beam pinned at the back of pavement seat. The
approach slab shall support traffic live loads and traffic barrier reactions. The
approach embankment wall shall support the vertical live load surcharge. The
approach slab shall not transfer loads to the approach embankment wall facing.
An enclosing fascia wall is required to prohibit unwanted access with
associated public health, maintenance staff safety, and law enforcement
problems. The design shall include a concrete fascia enclosing the columns and
void. The fascia shall have bridge inspection access. The access door shall be a
minimum 3-6 square with the sill located 2-6 above finished grade. Contact
the State Bridge and Structures Architect for configuration and concrete
surfacetreatments.
Bent-Type Abutment
Figure 7.5.1-5
When the force transmitted through the bearing pads is very large, the designer
should consider increasing the bearing pad thickness, using PTFE sliding bearings
and/or utilizing the flexibility of the abutment as a means of reducing the horizontal
design force. When the flexibility of the abutment is considered, it is intended that
a simple approximation of the abutment deformation be made.
For semi-integral abutments with overhanging end diaphragms at the Extreme
Event, the designer shall consider that longitudinal force may be transmitted
through the end diaphragm. If the gap provided is less than the longitudinal
displacement demand, assume the end diaphragm is in contact with abutment wall.
In this case, the bearing force shall not be added to seismic earth pressure force.
B. Bearing Seats
The bearing seats shall be wide enough to accommodate the size of the bearings
used with a minimum edge dimension of 3 and satisfy the requirements of
AASHTO LRFD Section 4.7.4.4. On Labutments, the bearing seat shall be sloped
away from the bearings to prevent ponding at the bearings. The superelevation
and profile grade of the structure should be considered for drainage protection.
Normally, a drop across the width of the bearing seat is sufficient.
C. Transverse Girder Stops
Transverse girder stops are required for all abutments in order to transfer lateral
loads from the superstructure to the abutment. Abutments shall normally be
considered as part of the Earthquake Resisting System (ERS). Girder stops shall
be full width between girder flanges except to accommodate bearing replacement
requirements as specified in Chapter 9. The girder stop shall be designed to
resist loads at the Extreme Limit State for the earthquake loading, Strength loads
(wind etc.) and any transverse earth pressure from skewed abutments, etc. Girder
stops are designed using shear friction theory and the shear strength resistance
factor shall be s = 0.9. The possibility of torsion combined with horizontal shear
when the load does not pass through the centroid of the girder stop shall also be
investigated.
In cases where the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer permits use of ERS #3
described in Section 4.2.2, which includes a fusing mechanism between the
superstructure and substructure, the following requirements shall befollowed:
The abutment shall not be included in the ERS system, the girder stops shall be
designed to fuse, and the shear strength resistance factor shall be s = 1.0.
If a girder stop fusing mechanism is used on a pile supported abutment, the
combined overstrength resistance of the girder stops per AASHTO Seismic
Section 4.14 shall be less than the combined plastic shear resistance of
thepiles.
The detail shown in Figure 7.5.5-1 may be used for prestressed girder bridges.
Prestressed girders shall be placed in their final position before girder stops are cast
to eliminate alignment conflicts between the girders and girder stops. Elastomeric
girder stop pads shall run the full length of the girder stop. All girder stops shall
provide clearance between the prestressed girder flange and theelastomeric
girder stop pad.
For skewed bridges with semi-integral or end type A diaphragms, the designer
shall evaluate the effects of earth pressure forces on the elastomeric girder stop
pads. These pads transfer the skew component of the earth pressure to the abutment
without restricting the movement of the superstructure in the direction parallel to
centerline. The performance of elastomeric girder stop padsshall be investigated at
Service Limit State. In some cases bearing assemblies containing slidingsurfaces
may be necessary to accommodate large superstructure movements.
The footing beneath the joint may be monolithic or cast with a construction joint.
In addition, dowel bars may be located across the footing joint parallel to the wall
elements to guard against differential settlement ordeflection.
On semi-integral abutments with overhanging end diaphragms, the open joints must be
protected from the fill spilling through the joint. Normally butyl rubber is used to seal
the openings. See the end diaphragm details in the Appendices of Chapter 5 for details.
7.5.8 Construction Joints
To simplify construction, vertical construction joints are often necessary, particularly
between the abutment and adjacent wing walls. Construction joints should also be
provided between the footing and the stem of the wall. Shear keys shall be provided
at construction joints between the footing and the stem, at vertical construction joints
or at any construction joint that requires shear transfer. The Standard Specifications
cover the size and placement of shear keys. The location of such joints shall bedetailed
onthe plans. Construction joints with roughened surface can be used at locations
(except where needed for shear transfer) to simplify construction. These should be
shown on the plans and labeled Construction Joint With Roughened Surface. When
construction joints are located within the face of the abutment wall, a pour strip or an
architectural reveal should be used for a clean appearance. Details should be shown in
the plans.
7.5.9 Abutment Wall Design
When the primary structural action is parallel to the superstructure or normal to the
abutment face, thewall shall be treated as a column subjected to combined axial load
and bending moment. Compressivereinforcement need not be included in the design
of cantilever walls, but the possibility ofbending moment in the direction of the span
as well as towards the backfill shall be considered. Aportion of the vertical bars may
be cut off where they are no longer needed for stress.
A. General
In general, horizontal reinforcement should be placed outside of vertical
reinforcement tofacilitate easier placement of reinforcement.
B. Temperature and Shrinkage Reinforcement
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.10.8 shall be followed for providing the minimum
temperature and shrinkage steel near surfaces of concrete exposed to daily
temperature changes and in structural mass concrete. Onabutments that are longer
than 60, consideration should be given to have vertical construction joints to
minimize shrinkage cracks.
C. Cross Ties
The minimum cross tie reinforcement in abutment walls, except stub abutments,
shall be #4 tie bars with 135 hooks, spaced at approximately 2-0 maximum
center-to-center vertically and horizontally, seeFigure7.5.9-1.
SEE "TIE
2'-0" MAX. BASED ON
BAR DETAIL"
HORIZ. BAR SPACING
#4 TIE (TYP.)
#4 TIE (TYP.)
TIE BAR
SPACING DETAIL
TYPICAL SECTION
#4 TIES WITH 1'-0" MIN. LAP SPLICE.
SEE "TIE BAR SPACING DETAIL"
TIE EACH END OF LAP
SPLICE WITH WIRE #4 TIE
1" MIN.
1" MIN.
CLR.
CLR. 90 BEND
9. The abutment shall be designed for a bearing pressure at service loads not to
exceed 2.0 TSF and a factored load at strength and extreme limit states not to
exceed 3.5 TSF. The bearing pressure may be increased to 3.0 TSF at service
loads and 4.5 TSF at strength and extreme limit states if a vertical settlement
monitoring program is conducted in accordance with WSDOT GDM,
Section15.5.3.5.
10. Bridge approach slabs may be omitted.
Figure 7.5.11-1
PRECAST VOIDED OR
SLAB SUPERSTRUCTURE
4'-0" SURFACING
1'-0" MIN.
MIN.
5'-0" MIN.
BEAM, FULL WIDTH OF SLAB.
JOINT FILLER
COMPRESSIBLE FOAM BLOCK BEARING BED REINFORCEMENT(MAX.
(PROVIDE MIN. 4 IN. THICKNESS) VERTICAL SPACING OF 12 IN.)
PRECAST OR CIP
CONCRETE FACING
GEOTEXTILE FOR UNDERGROUND
DRAINAGE, LOW SURVIVABILITY, CLASS
A PER STD. SPECIFICATION SECTION
9-33.2(1) WITH 1 FT. MIN. HORIZONTAL
OVERLAP (ONLY NEEDED IF GEOGRID IS
USED FOR REINFORCEMENT).
(TYP.)
MAX.
1'-4"
PRIMARY REINFORCEMENT
B. Pedestals
A pedestal is sometimes used as an extension of the footing in order to provide
additional depth for shear near the column. Its purpose is to provide adequate
structural depth while saving concrete. For proportions of pedestals, see Figure
7.7.1-2. Since additional forming is required to construct pedestals, careful
thought must be given to the tradeoff between the cost of the extra forming
involved and the cost of additional footing concrete. Also, additional foundation
depth may be needed for footing cover. Whenever a pedestal is used, the plans
shall note that a construction joint will be permitted between the pedestal and the
footing. This construction joint should be indicated asaconstruction joint with
roughenedsurface.
Pedestal Dimensions
Figure 7.7.1-2
Load Factors
Table 7.7.2-1
Page 7-74 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 7 Substructure Design
Pier No. Service-I Limit State Strength Limit States Extreme Event Limit States
Figure 7.7.3-1
B. Bearing Resistance - Service, Strength, and Extreme Event Limit States
The nominal bearing resistance (qn) may be increased or reduced based on previous
experience for the given soils. The geotechnical report will contain the following
information:
Nominal bearing resistance (qn) for anticipated effective footing widths, which
is the same for thestrength and extreme event limit states.
Service bearing resistance (qser) and amount of assumed settlement.
Resistance factors for strength and extreme event limit states (fb).
Embedment depth requirements or footing elevations to obtain the
recommended qn.
Spread footings supported on SE walls or geosynthetic walls shall be designed with
nominal bearing resistances not to exceed 6.0 ksf at service limit states and 9.0 ksf
at strength and extreme event limit states. A vertical settlement monitoring program
shall be conducted where nominal bearing resistance exceeds 4.0ksf at service
limit states or 7.0 ksf at strength or extreme event limit states. See GDM Section
15.5.3.5 for additional requirements.
DC, LL, EQ
Superstructure
(super. & appr. slab)
Forces
Super. Bearing Forces
(Parallel to abut.)
DCabut
H
Substructure Forces
EVheel
LS PIR
EH
PAE a
EVtoe
D
Rep
R
POINT "O"
v
e XO
B/2 0
R
Footing
B
DC, LL, EQ
(superstructure)
Superstructure Forces
(Parallel to abut.)
Substructure Forces
Superstructure Forces
(Normal to Abutment)
EV
LS heel DC
abut
H
EH
PAE a PIR
EV
toe
H/3
D
RT R
ep
v POINT "O"
e X
B/2 0 O
R
ALL SOIL PRESSURE RESULTANTS
Footing
SHALL BE APPLIED AT THE CENTROIDS
OF THE DIAGRAMS OF PRESSURE B
ACTING ON THE ABUTMENT.
B. Bearing Stress
For geotechnical and structural footings design, the bearing stress calculation
assumes a uniform bearing pressure distribution. For footing designs on rock, the
bearing stress is based on a triangular or trapezoidal bearing pressure distribution.
The procedure to calculate bearing stress is summarized in the following outline.
See Abutment Spread Footing Force Diagrams for typical loads and eccentricity.
Step 1: Calculate the Resultant force (Rstr), location (Xostr) and eccentricity
for Strength (estr).
Xostr = (factored moments about the footing base)/(factored vertical loads)
Footings on Rock
Figure 7.7.4-3
7 .3 .6-1 13
C. Failure By Sliding
The factored sliding resistance (QR) iscomprised
of a frictional component ( Q )
7 .4 .6-1
and the Geotechnical Branch may allow
a passive earth pressure component (f
ep
Qep). The designer shall calculate QR based on the soil properties specified in the
geotechnical report. The frictional
7 .4 .6-2 component
acts along the base of the footing,
and the passive component acts on the vertical
face
ofaburied footing element.
The factored sliding resistance shall be greater than or equal to the factored
7 .4 .7-1
horizontal applied loads.
7 .7 .4-1
The service limit state bearing resistance (qser) will be a settlement-limited value,
typically 1. 7-B-1 .6B
has increased. If the footing size cannot be increased, consult the Geotechnical
Engineer for other solutions.
F. Concrete Design
Footing design shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD, Section 5.13.3 for
footings and the general concrete design of AASHTO LRFD Chapter 5. The
following Figure 7.7.4-4 illustrates the modes of failure checked in the footing
concrete design.
Figure 7.7.4-4
4. Bottom Reinforcement
Concrete design shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Specifications.
Reinforcement shall not be less than #6 bars at 12 centers to account for
uneven soil conditions and shrinkage stresses.
5. Top Reinforcement
Top reinforcement shall be used in any case where tension forces in the top
of the footing are developed. Where columns and bearing walls are connected
to the superstructure, sufficient reinforcement shall be provided in the tops
of footings to carry the weight of the footing and overburden assuming zero
pressure under the footing. This is the uplift earthquake condition described
under Superstructure Loads. This assumes that the strength of the connection
to the superstructure will carry such load. Where the connection to the
superstructure will not support the weight of the substructure and overburden,
the strength of the connection may be used asthe limiting value for determining
top reinforcement. For these conditions, the AASHTO LRFD requirement for
minimum percentage of reinforcement will be waived. Regardless of whether
ornot the columns and bearing walls are connected to the superstructure, a mat
of reinforcement shall normally be provided at the tops of footings. On short
stub abutment walls (4 from girder seat to top of footing), these bars may be
omitted. In this case, any tension at the top of the footing, due to the weight of
the small overburden, must be taken by the concrete in tension.
Top reinforcement for column or wall footings designed for two-way action
shall not beless than #6 bars at 12 centers, in each direction while top
reinforcement for bearing wall footings designed for one-way action shall not
be less than #5 bars at 12 centers in eachdirection.
6. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
For footings greater than 3feet thick, temperature and shrinkage reinforcing
shall be provided on the side faces in accordance with AASHTO LRFD,
Section 5.10.8.
Pile Embedment and Reinforcing Placement
Figure 7.7.5-2
B. Concrete Design
In determining the proportion of pile load to be used for calculation of shear stress
on the footing, any pile with its center 6 or more outside the critical section shall
be taken as fully acting on that section. Any pile with its center 6 or more inside
the critical section shall be taken as not acting for that section. For locations in
between, the pile load acting shall be proportioned between these two extremes.
The critical section shall be taken as the effective shear depth (dv) as defined in
AASHTO LRFD, Section 5.8.2.9. The distance from the column/wall face to
the allowable construction centerline ofpile (design location plus or minus the
tolerance) shall be used to determine the design moment of the footing. The strut
and tie design method should be used where appropriate.
7.8 Shafts
7.8.1 Axial Resistance
The factored axial resistance of the shaft (R) is generally composed of two parts: the
nominal end bearing (Rp) and the nominal skin friction (Rs). The general formula is as
follows, where is the limit state resistance factor.
R=jp Rp+js Rs (7.8.1-1)
The total factored shaft loading must be less than the factored axial resistance. Rp
and Rs are treated as independent quantities although research has shown that the end
bearing and skin friction resistance have some interdependence. Rp and Rs shown as a
function of depth will be stated in the geotechnical report for the bridge. End bearing
resistance, Rp, is typically provided by the Geotechnical Branch as a net value. Thus,
the effective weight of the shaft can be reduced by the total weight of the excavated
soil when examining compressive loads and resistances.
The designer shall consider all applicable factored load combination limit states
and shaft resistances when determining shaft axial resistance and demand and
shaft tip elevations. For some shaft designs, liquefiable soils, scour conditions and/
or downdrag forces may need to be considered. Determining which limit states to
include these conditions or forces can be complex. The Hydraulics Branch and the
Geotechnical Engineer shall be consulted to ensure overly and/or under conservative
load combinations and resistances are not being considered. Open and frequent
communication is essential during design.
Although the AASHTO LRFD Specifications include water loads, WA, in Extreme
Event I limit states, in most cases the loss of soil resistance due to scour conditions is
not combined with Extreme Event I load combinations. The probability of a design
earthquake occurring in the presence of the maximum scour event is low. However,
in some instances it is appropriate to include some scour effects. When scour is
included with Extreme Event I load combinations, the skin resistance of the soil, up
to a maximum of 25percent of the scour depth for the design flood (l00 year event),
shall be deducted from the resistance of the shaft. The loss of skin resistance for the
full scour depth for the design flood shall be considered when checking axial resistance
of the shaft for all strength and service limit states. The loss of skin resistance for the
full scour depth of the check flood (500 year event) shall be considered when checking
the axial resistance of the shaft for Extreme Event II limit states. It should be noted
that scour does not produce a load effect on the structure but changes the geometry of
the bridge pier and available soil resistance so that effects of other loads are amplified.
The engineer may also need to consider scour effects on piers that are currently outside
of the ordinary high water zones due to potential migration of rivers or streams during
flood events. The Hydraulics Branch will provide guidance for these rare cases.
Downdrag forces may also need to be considered in some designs. Downdrag forces
are most often caused by the placement of fill adjacent to shafts, which causes
consolidation and settlement of underlying soils. This situation is applicable to service
and strength limit states. Downdrag forces can also be caused by liquefaction-induced
settlement caused by a seismic event. Pore water pressure builds up in liquefiable soils
during ground shaking. And as pore water pressure dissipates, the soil layer(s) may
settle, causing downdrag forces on the shaft to develop. These liquefaction induced
downdrag forces are only considered in the Extreme Event I limit state. However,
downdrag induced by consolidation settlement is never combined with downdrag
forces induced by liquefaction, but are only considered separately in their applicable
limit states.
The downdrag is treated as a load applied to the shaft foundations. The settling soil,
whether it is caused by consolidation under soil stresses (caused, for example, by the
placement of fill), or caused by liquefaction, creates a downward acting shear force
on the foundations. This shear force is essentially the skin friction acting on the shaft,
but reversed in direction by the settlement. This means that the skin friction along the
length of the shaft within the zone of soil that is contributing to downdrag is no longer
available for resisting downward axial forces and must not be included with the soil
resistance available to resist the total downward axial (i.e., compression) loads acting
on thefoundation.
In general, the Geotechnical Engineer will provide shaft soil resistance plots as
a function of depth that includes skin friction along the full length of the shaft.
Therefore, when using those plots to estimate the shaft foundation depth required to
resist the axial compressive foundation loads, this skin friction lost due to downdrag
must be subtracted from the resistance indicated in the geotechnical shaft resistance
plots, and the downdrag load per shaft must be added to the other axial compression
loads acting on the shaft.
Similarly, if scour is an issue that must be considered in the design of the foundation,
with regard to axial resistance (both in compression and in uplift), the skin friction lost
due to removal of the soil within the scour depth must be subtracted from the shaft
axial resistance plots provided by the Geotechnical Engineer. If there is any doubt as
to whether or not this skin friction lost must be subtracted from the shaft resistance
plots, it is important to contact the Geotechnical Engineer for clarification on this
issue. Note that if both scour and downdrag forces must be considered, it is likely that
the downdrag forces will be reduced by thescour. This needs to be considered when
considering combination of these two conditions, and assistance from the Geotechnical
Engineer should be obtained.
The Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03, Chapters 6, 8, and 23, should be consulted
for additional explanation regarding these issues.
Following is a summary of potential load combination limit states that shall be checked
if scour effects, liquefiable soils and/or downdrag forces are included in the design.
The geotechnical report will provide the appropriate resistance factors to use with each
limit state.
A. Embankment Consolidation Downdrag
Embankment downdrag from fill or the presence of compressible material below
the foundations; no liquefaction.
Checks:
1. Include embankment induced downdrag loads with all Strength and Service
Limit States. Donot include with Extreme Limit States. Use maximum load
factor unless checking an uplift case, where the minimum shall be used.
Subtract the skin friction lost within the downdrag zone from the shaft axial
resistance plots provided by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Figure 7.8.1-1
These group reduction factors apply to both strength and extreme event limit states.
For the service limit state the influence of the group on settlement as shall be
determined from the AASHTO LRFD Specifications and the Geotechnical Design
Manual M 46-03.
that no two adjacent welded splices or couplers are located at the same location.
7 .4 .7-1
K. In single column/single shaft configurations, the spacing of the shaft transverse
reinforcement in 7 .7 .4-1
the splicezone
shall
meet
the
requirements of the following
equation, which comes from the TRAC Report titled, Noncontact Lap Splices in
Bridge Column-Shaft Connections:
7 .8 .1-1
7 .8 .2-1 (7.8.2-1)
Where:
7 .9 .2-1 shaft
Smax = Spacing of transverse
reinforcement
Ash = Area of shaft spiral or transverse reinforcement bar
fytr = Yield 7-B-1 .1
strength of
shafttransverse reinforcement
ls = Standard splice length of the column reinforcement, per AASHTO LRFD.
Al = Total area of longitudinal column
reinforcement
7-B-1 .2 1 3
ful = Specified minimum tensile strength
of column longitudinal reinforcement
(ksi), 90 ksi for A615 and 80 ksi for A706
k = Factor representing the ratio of column tensile reinforcement to total column
7-B-1 .3
reinforcement at the nominal
1
resistance. In the upper half of the splice zone,
k = 1.0. In the lower half of the splice zone, this ratio could be determined
from the column moment-curvature
analysis using computer programs
7-B-1 .4 simplify
XTRACT or CSiBridge. To
this process, k = 0.5 could safely be used
in most applications
7-B-1 .5A
The additional lateral 11 in the
reinforcement
upper half of the oversized pile shafts
is required to control cracking in this region. The volumetric ratio of transverse
reinforcement throughout
7-B-1 .5B the
33splice
zone
shall not be less that provided by a #6
spiral with a 6 pitch.
L. Longitudinal reinforcement
7-B-1 .6A shall
be provided
for the full length of shafts. The
minimum longitudinal reinforcement in the splice zone of single column/single
shaft connections7-B-1 .6B
shall bethe
larger
of 0.75
percent Ag of the shaft or 1.0 percent
Ag of the attached column. The minimum longitudinal reinforcement beyond
the splice zone shall be 0.75 percent Ag of the shaft. The minimum longitudinal
7-B-1 .7 11 1 1
reinforcement in shafts without single column/single shaft connections shall be
0.75 percent Ag of theshaft. 33 3 3
7-B-1 .8
7-B-1 .9
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 1 Page 7-91
June 2016
Substructure Design Chapter 7
M. The clear spacing between longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than 6
or more than 9. If a shaft design is unable to meet this minimum requirement,
a larger diameter shaft shall be considered. Alternatively, Grade 80 reinforcing
steel could be considered. Where 3-bar bundles are used, the plans shall allow
the contractor to construct the cage with two of the three bars located towards the
center of the shaft. This allows the contractor flexibility in constructing the cage,
but it reduces the flexural resistance of the shaft.
N. Longitudinal reinforcing in shafts should be straight with no hooks to facilitate
concrete placement and removal of casing. If hooks are necessary to develop
moment at the top of a shaft (in a shaft cap situation) the hooks should be turned
toward the center of the shaft while leaving enough opening toallow concrete
placement with a tremie.
O. Locations of longitudinal splices shall be shown in the contract plans. Mechanical
splices shall be placed in low stress regions and staggered 2-0 minimum.
P. Use of twoconcentric circular rebar cages shall be avoided.
Q. Resistance factors for Strength Limit States shall be per the latest AASHTO LRFD
Specifications. Resistance factors for Extreme Event Limit States shall be per
the latest AASHTO Seismic Specifications. The resistance factor for shear shall
conform to the AASHTO LRFD Specifications.
R. The axial load along the shaft varies due to the side friction. It is considered
conservative, however,todesign the shaft for the full axial load plus the
maximum moment. The entire shaft normally is then reinforced for this axial load
andmoment.
S. Access tubes for Crosshole Sonic Log (CSL) testing shall be provided in all shafts.
One tube shall be furnished and installed for each foot of shaft diameter, rounded
to the nearest whole number, and shown in the plans. The number of access tubes
for shaft diameters specified as Xfeet 6 inches shall be rounded up to the next
higher whole number. The access tubes shall be placed around the shaft, inside the
spiral or hoop reinforcement and three inches clear of the vertical reinforcement,
ata uniform spacing measured along the circle passing through the centers of
the access tubes. If the vertical reinforcement is not bundled and each bar is not
more than one inch in diameter, the access tubes shall be placed two inches clear
of the vertical reinforcement. If these minimums cannot be met due to close
spacing of the vertical reinforcement, then access tubes shall be bundled with the
verticalreinforcement.
T. Shafts shall be specified in English dimensions and shall be specified in sizes
that do not preclude any drilling method. Shafts shall be specified in whole foot
increments except as allowed here. The tolerances in Standard Specifications
Section 6-19 accommodate metric casing sizes and/or oversized English casing
sizes. Oversized English casings are often used so that tooling for drilling the
shafts, which are the nominal English diameter, will fit inside the casing. There are
a few exceptions, which will be discussed below. See Table 7.8.2-1 for casing sizes
and tolerances.
Table 7.8.2-1
Figure 7.8.2-1
The shaft diameter shall be based on the maximum column diameter allowed by
the following equation,
Maximum Column Diameter = Shaft Diameter 2*(Shaft Concrete Cover)
2*(Shaft Horizontal Construction Tolerance) 2*(Shaft Cage Thickness)
The shaft horizontal construction tolerance and shaft concrete cover shall conform
to Standard Specifications Section 6-19.
If the column diameter used in design is larger than the maximum allowed for
agiven shaft size, asdefined by the equation above, a larger shaft diameter shall
beused.
The shaft diameter specified here should not be confused with the desirable casing
shoring diameter discussed below.
V. Casing shoring shall be provided for all shafts below grade or waterline. However,
casing shoring requirements are different for shafts in shallow excavations and
deep excavations. Shafts in deep excavations require a larger diameter casing
shoring to allow access to the top of the shaft for column form placement and
removal. The top of shafts in shallow excavations (approximately 4 or less) can
be accessed from the ground line above, by reaching in or by glory-holing, and
therefore do not require larger diameter casing shoring, see Figure7.8.2-3.
Figure 7.8.2-2
Maximum Cage
(Outside) Reinf. Inside Clearance Cage
Nominal (Outside) Cage Diameter Diameter Below Clearance
Metric Casing to Accommodate of Metric Nominal (Outside) Metric Slip Slip at Slip
Diameter Metric Casing1 Casing2 Casing Diameter3 Casing Casing4
Meters Feet Inches Feet Inches Inches Feet Meters Inches Inches
3.73 12.24 130.52 10.88 140.52 137.52 11.46 3.49 8.16 3.0
3.43 11.25 118.71 9.89 128.71 125.71 10.48 3.19 8.16 3.0
3.00 9.84 101.81 8.48 111.84 108.81 9.07 2.76 8.15 3.0
2.80 9.19 95.51 7.96 105.51 102.51 8.54 2.60 7.36 3.0
2.50 8.20 83.70 6.98 93.70 90.70 7.56 2.30 7.36 3.0
2.20 7.22 71.89 5.99 81.89 78.89 6.57 2.00 7.36 3.0
2.00 6.56 64.02 5.34 74.02 71.02 5.92 1.80 7.36 3.0
1.50 4.92 45.12 3.76 55.12 52.12 4.34 1.32 6.97 3.0
1.2 3.94 34.08 2.84 44.09 41.09 3.42 1.044 6.57 3.0
1.00 3.28 30.22 2.52 36.22 34.22 2.85 0.87 4.57 1.5
0.92 3.00 26.87 2.24 32.87 30.87 2.57 0.78 4.57 1.5
Notes:
1. Provided by Malcolm Drilling. Assumes minimum of 5 clearance to inside of oscillator casing on 4 and larger and uses
3 of clearance on smaller than 4 (1.2 meters).
2. Provided by Malcolm Drilling.
3. Provided by Malcolm Drilling. Slip casing is 3 smaller than inside diameter of temporary casing from 1.2 meters to
3meters. 1 meter on down is 2 smaller in diameter.
4. Slip casing is typically to thick (provided by Malcolm Drilling). Cage clearance assumes thick casing.
Table 7.8.2-2
CENTRALIZER NOTES:
#4 (ASTM A706)
1. CENTRALIZERS SHALL BE EPOXY COATED
6 "S" MIN.
BAR x 3
* MINIMUM CONCRETE
COVER MINUS "
Figure 7.8.2-5
Centralizer Detail
Figure 7.8.2-4
7 .9 .2-1 (7.9.2-1)
Where:
7-B-1 .1 Factored moment applied to the pile group. This includes eccentric LL, DC,
M U group =
centrifugal force (CE), etc. Generally, the dynamic load allowance (IM) does
not
7-B-1 .2 apply. 1 3
C = Distance
from the centroid of the pile group to the center of the pile under
consideration.
= Moment
Igroup
7-B-1 .3 of
inertia
of1
the
pile group
N = Number
of piles in the pile group
PU pile group = Factored axial load to the pile group
= Downdrag
DD
7-B-1 .4 force specified in the geotechnical report
= Load
factor specified in the geotechnical report
Pile selfweight
7-B-1 .5A 11 is typically neglected. As shown above, downdrag forces are treated as
load to the pile when designing for axial resistance. However, it should not be included
Figure 7.9.11-1
The total factored pile axial loading must be less than fRn for the pile design.
Designers should note that the driving resistance might be greater than the design
loading for liquefied soil conditions. This is not an overdriving condition. This is due
to the resistance liquefied soils being ignored for design, but included in the driving
criteria to place the piles.
3. For capacity protected members at the extreme event limit state, expected
material properties may be used to determine the expected nominal moment
capacity. The expected yield strength, Fye, for steel tubes shall be taken
as1.1Fy.
B. Limit States
For strength limit states, the resistance factors for axial load effects on CFT shall
be taken per AASHTO LRFD for tension- and compression- controlled reinforced
concrete sections. The resistance factor for flexure shall be taken as 0.9. The
resistance factor for shear shall be taken as 0.85. For extreme event limit states,
resistance factors shall be taken as1.0.
C. General Dimensions
The minimum tube wall thickness shall not be taken less than 3/8 inch at the time
of installation. To develop the full plastic capacity of CFT or RCFT members, it is
necessary to ensure that local buckling does not occur prior to development of the
strength of the tube. Therefore the following D/t limits are recommended:
1. For members subjected primarily to flexural loading:
0.22 (7.10.2-1) (7.10.2-1)
0.22 (7.10.2-1)
2. For
members
0.15
(7.10.2-2)
subjected primarily to axial loading:
0.15
(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-3)
=
+ (7.10.2-2)
Where
D= is =the
+outside
0.15 ++ 0.9 of(7.10.2-3)
diameter (7.10.2-4)
the tube (in.), and t is the wall thickness of the
0 +
tube (in.).
= 0.15 + + 0.9 (7.10.2-4)
2
0.95 4
() = 0 + (7.10.2-5)
D. Stiffness 2
2
() = 2 2 2
0.22 0.95 4
3 (7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)
2 (7.10.2-5)
The effective0.22 stiffness, EI eff 3 0.95 CFT,
, of circular as defined in Equation 7.10.2-3, (7.10.2-6)shall
()
= ( ) + 4
be used to evaluate2deflections, 3 deformations, buckling
2 resistance, and moment
0.15
0.15 = ()
= ( 2 ) 3 (7.10.2-2)
0.95
(7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-2)
+ 4 (7.10.2-6)
magnification.
The effective stiffness factor, C, is defined in Equation 7.10.2-4.
1
= =
=
+( ) (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3)
+
(7.10.2-3)
1
=
(
)
(7.10.2-8)
0.9 (7.10.2-4) (7.10.2-9)
=
=0.15 0.15 = + +20 + +
0.9 (7.10.2-4) (7.10.2-4)
0 ++
() = 22 2 (7.10.2-9)
P
0 is()the=nominal
() = 2
=
2 2
compressive
resistance
0.95 0.95
0.95
without
moment,
4
4
4
4 P is the +factored
( 2axial
(7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5) )0.95 (7.10.2
2
load effect, and As is the2 combined area of the steel tube and steel reinforcing.
() = 22 2 233 3 0.95 4
4 + ( 2 )0.95
2
2
2
(7.10.2
=
()
() ()
= (
( = ( 2
))
2
2
)
0.95
0.950.95
+
+ +
4
4 4
+ 4 (
(7.10.2-6)
(7.10.2-6)0.95 ) (7.10.2
E. Flexure
and Axial
Resistance 3
3 3
3
2
2
The ()
= = ( of 2CFT ) and RCFT
0.95
(7.10.2-12)
+ 4 +be 4determined
( 0.95
the ) (7.10.2
= =flexural strength 3 (7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-7) members may using
plastic stress distribution
1 method (PSDM).
(7.10.2-13) The appropriate limit state stresses and
=
1
= =1
((
)) ( ) (7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
geometry is shown
in Figure7.10.2-1.
1
= = ( ) (7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-14)
Solutions
=
= 2
for the interaction
(7.10.2-9)
diagrams
(7.10.2-9) can be developed using parametric equations
2
2
for P(y) == andM(y) where y is the distance
(7.10.2-14) from the centroid to the neutral axis.
+ 0.5P22 is (7.10.2-15)
(7.10.2-10)
()
Apositive () = = 2
value
2
2
of
a
net compressive
0.95
0.95
4
4
force.
M
and
4
4
y are + (
+ (
positive
2
with
2 )0.95
the sign
)0.95
(7.10.2-10)
1.47
convention
= shown
+ 0.5 in Figure 33
7.10.2-1. The parameter
(7.10.2-15)
(7.10.3-1) 2
2
y varies between plus and
2 2
()
minus ()ri,= =where (2r
(
1.47 is
2)
the )
radius
0.95
of the
0.95 +
+ 4
concrete
4 + 4
core.
+ 4
(
( 0.95 ))
0.95
(7.10.2-11)
(7.10.2-11)
2 i 3
3
(7.10.3-1)
= =
4 + 6 2
(7.10.3-2)
(7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12)
2
WSDOT Bridge Design
Manual = 1 1 ( +)
)6 2 (7.10.3-2)
(7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-13)
=
M (23-50.16 4
Page 7-105
2
June 2016 250
=
+ (7.10.3-3)
= = 2 4
2 (7.10.2-14)
(7.10.2-14)
Substructure Design Chapter 7
0.22
0.22
0.22 (7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)
0.22
0.22
(7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)
0.15
0.15
0.15 (7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
0.15
0.15
(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
=
== +
+
+
(7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3)
=
= Plastic +
+
Stress
(7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3)
Distribution for CFT
Figure 7.10.2-2
=
==0.150.15++
0.15 + ++ + +
0.9 (7.10.2-4)
0.9 (7.10.2-4)
0.9 (7.10.2-4)
= = 0.15
0.15 + + 000+ + +
+ 0.9 (7.10.2-4)
+ 0.9 (7.10.2-4)
00 +
() ()==
() =
22222
0.95
0.95
0.95 4
4 (7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5)
()
() == 2
22
0.95
0.95 4
4
4
(7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5)
22
33 222
222 2 ) 333 +
()
() == (
( 22) ) 30.95
0.95
0.95 + 4
2 (7.10.2-6)
(7.10.2-6)
4
4 (7.10.2-6)
()
()
() = = (
= (
( 2
2
)) 2 2 333 0.95
0.95 +
+ 4
+ 4
2 (7.10.2-6)
(7.10.2-6)
3
(7.10.2-6)
= ==
(7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-7) (7.10.2-7)
= =
(7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-7)
1
= ==
1((( )))
1
1 (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
= =
1
((
)) (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8) (7.10.2-8)
= = = (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9)
= = 222 (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9) (7.10.2-9)
22
() ()==
() =
22222
0.95
0.95
0.95 4
4 4 +( (
( 2
2 )0.95
)0.95 (7.10.
(7.10.
()
() == 2
22
0.95
0.95 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
+
+
+
+ (
(
2
2
2
)0.95
)0.95
)0.95 (7.10.2
(7.10.2
(7.10.2
22
3 222
Page 7-106 2 2 333 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
()==
() = (
( 2 2 )) 2 2 3 0.95 0.95 +4
42 ++ +4 4 (( 0.95
0.95
)) (7.10.
(7.10.
22)) 33330.95
0.95 + 4 4 ( 0.95
2
()
() (22
= ( 0.95 ++ 4
+ 4
)) (7.10.2
(7.10.2
( ( 0.95
(7.10.2
() = ( ) 3 + 4 + 4 0.95
June )
2016
==
=
(7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12)
Chapter 7 Substructure Design
FHWA NHI-05-042 Design and Construction of Driven Pile Foundations, and the
Ferries Terminal Design Manual.
The rates for corrosion in soil above assume that the soil is not highly corrosive.
Asite-specific assessment should be considered where a corrosive soil environment
is suspected or known to exist. The potential for scour shall be considered when
choosing a design corrosion rate.
The ring shall be welded to the tube with complete joint penetration (CJP) welds
or fillet welds 7 .9 .2-1
on both the inside = / + / +
and outside of the tube. The fillet welds must be
capable of developing the full tensile capacity of the tube. For this purpose, the
minimum size,7 .10 .2-15 = shall
w, of the filletwelds =
be 4taken 1 0.6 as: 2 + 0.03163
1.33
7 .10 .3-1 (7.10.3-1)
7-B-1 .3 22 = , = 1.0 ( ), 22 = 2
1
2
7-B-1 .4 55 = = =
()
7-B-1 .5A 11 = ()
()
7-B-1 .5B 33 =
()
()
7-B-1 .6A 66 =
()
()
7-B-1 .6B 44 = ()
7-B-1 .7 = 11 + 16 = 61 + 66
2 2 2 3
2
() =( ) 3 3 0.95 + 4 2 + 4 (
2 5.27 2 2
7 .10 .3-3 4 2 + () = (
2 ) 3 0.95 + 4
(7.10.3-3)
=
1.33
5.27
(7.10.2-12)
7 .10 .3-3 7 .10 .3-1 4+ =
2 (7.10.2-7)
1
=
(
) (7.10.2-13)
1
Where f'cf (ksi) is the specified 228-day = compressive ( ) (7.10.2-8)
strength of the cap, Do is the
outside diameter of the
7 .10 .3-3 annular
=5.27
ring as shown
in Figure 7.10.3-1. (7.10.2-14)
4 + 2 =
2
(7.10.2-9)
C. Punching Shear 0 2
=
5.27 + 2
2
0.5
3.95 (7.10.2-15)
7 .10 .3-4 7 .10 .3-2 4 2+
+ 2
2
The pile7 .10 .3-4
cap shall haveadequate 0 ()
concrete
5.27
1.47 =4
depth, h,above
2 the 0.95 4
steel tube 4 +
to preclude
4+
2
(7.10.3-1)
punching through the pile cap. The value
of h shall satisfy:
2
2 3 2
() 2
= (
2 ) 0.95 + 4 + 4 (
3
2 5.27+
4 6 (7.10.3-2)
7 .10 .3-4 40 + =
2
(7.10.2-12) (7.10.3-4)
2
7 .10 .3-5 = + 21 5.27
7 .10 .3-3 =
2
+( ) 2 (7.10.2-13)
7 .10 .3-5 4 250
= =+ +
(7.10.3-3)
Where the total compressive force of 4the couple,
Cmax 2 , shall be taken as:
=
(7.10.2-14)
= + 2
(7.10.3-4) (7.10.3-5)
7 .10 .3-6
7 .10 .3-5 = += + 0.5 (7.10.2-15)
+ (7.10.3-5)
Cc and C are the
7 .10 .3-6
s compression forces in the concrete and the steel due to the
1.47
combined bending and axialload ascomputed 0 2 by
5.27 theplastic
(7.10.3-1)
stress distribution
7 .10 .3-4 + 1.75 (7.10. 3-6)
2 4+
method for the most extreme load effect at theappropriate
2 limit state.
7 .10 .3-7
7 .10 .3-6 4 +
2.5
2
2 (7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-2)
D. Pile Cap Reinforcement
7 .10 .3-7 6
The pile cap should follow conventional design practice and must be adequate to
sustain the foundation design loads. =However,
2
+ the
250concrete
cap (7.10.3-3)
thickness shall be
7 .10 .3-8
large enough to 7 .10 .3-5
preclude
7 .10 .3-7 punching shear
= 4and
+
cone
pullout
2 of the CFT piles. The
minimum concrete cap thickness,
7 .10 .3-8 d= f, shall
+ be
takenas: (7.10.3-4)
+ (7.10.3-5) (7.10.3-6)
7 .10 .3-8 7 .10 .3-6
The edge distance shallbe
7.10.3-9 large enough to accommodate
2 + 1.75 concrete struts
(7.10. 3-6)oriented
2
60 degrees from
7.10.3-9 the vertical originating
2 at the base of the ring. The minimum edge
distance, de, measured from center-of-tube
(7.10.3-7)
to the edge of the cap shall be taken as:
2.5
7 .10 .3-8
= + (7.10.2-3)
Substructure Design Chapter 7
= 0.15 + + 0.9 (7.10.2-4)
0 +
3 2
() = ( 2 2 ) 3
0.95 + 4
+ 4 (
= (7.10.2-12)
= 1 ( ) (7.10.2-13)
=
2
(7.10.2-14)
Reinforcement Detail at Cap Connection
Figure
= + 0.5
7.10.3-3 (7.10.2-15)
The cap shall be designed to resist
all1.47
shear load effects. Note that the minimum
(7.10.3-1)
required embedment results in an average shear stress in the critical area
surrounding the tube of 6fc (psi). Assuming
2 the
concrete
is capable of resisting a
4 + (7.10.3-2)
shear stress of approximately 2fc, vertical 6reinforcement
2 will be required to resist
an average shear stress of approximately 4fc. Additional requirements for shear
demand resulting from other load combinations
2 mustalso be considered.
250
=
4
+ (7.10.3-3)
2
Additionally, vertical ties shall be provided within the anchorage regions such that
at least two vertical ties intersect
the
= pull-out
+ cone depicted in (7.10.3-4)
Figure 7.10.3-1 on
each side of the CFT subjectto shear. Therefore
+ vertical ties shall be placed in the
(7.10.3-5)
region within 1.5le of the outside of the tube, and shall be placed at a maximum
spacing s, taken as: + 1.75
2
(7.10. 3-6)
2.5 (7.10.3-7) (7.10.3-8)
2 2
7.10.3-10 4 + 2
2 2
(7.10.3-10)
7.10.3-10 4 + 2
Where e is a coating factor, which shall be taken as 1.0 for uncoated bars, and
1.2for epoxy-coated bars.
The reinforcing cage shall extend into the CFT at least a distance of 2ld below
the top of the steel casing, where ld is the development length of the longitudinal
reinforcing.
The concrete cover above headed longitudinal reinforcing shall exceed 3dh,
where dh is the diameter of the head. The concrete side cover adjacent to a head
shall exceed dh. When headed bars are not used, the development of longitudinal
reinforcement into the cap shall be as specified in AASHTO LRFD or AASHTO
Seismic, as appropriate.
RCFT-to-Column Connection
Figure 7.10.4-1
Partially-filled CFT
Figure 7.10.5-1
7.12 Appendices
Appendix 7.3-A2 Noncontact Lap Splice Length Column to Shaft Connections
Appendix 7-B1 Linear Spring Calculation Method II (Technique I)
Appendix 7-B2 Pile Footing Matrix Example Method II (Technique I)
Appendix 7-B3 Non-Linear Springs Method III
Notes:
1. All values based on normal weight concrete with f'c = 4.0 ksi.
2. The basic splice length, Ls , is based on 1.7 times the tension development length Ld. Ld is calculated per
Section 5.11.2.1.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 7th Edition, 2015 Interim Revisions. The
1.7 (Class C lap splice) factor was maintained for the basic splice length calculations to be consistent with the
original TRAC research for noncontact lap splices. This table does not apply when column longitudinal bars are
bundled.
3. Development lengths are based on uncoated deformed bars. For epoxy coated bars add 0.2*Ls or 0.5*Ls to Lns
depending on column bar spacing and clear cover. See AASHTO 5.11.2.1.2 for spacing and cover requirements.
4. The clearance between the column and shaft reinforcement, s, is based on an out-to-out dimension of the
cages. Concrete cover to the column reinforcing is 2", and concrete cover to the shaft reinforcing is per Std.
Spec. 6-19.3(5)C. Also, s has been increased by the allowable shaft construction tolerances in Std. Spec. 6-
19.3(1)A. If an oversized cage is used in conjunction with an oversize casing, s may need to be increased further.
5. The reinforcement confinement factor, rc, is assumed to be 0.4 for all cases and is based on the assumption
that the column reinforcement is well confined with column transverse reinforcement, shaft transverse
reinforcement, and in most cases a permanent shaft casing.
6. All noncontact splice lengths have been rounded up to the nearest 6".
* Minimum common shaft diameter for specified column diameter to meet minimum clearance and
construction tolerances.
Py
My
Longit udinal Mx
Vx
Mz
Vz
Vx Py Vz Mx My Mz Disp. Force
Vx K11 0 0 0 0 K16 x Vx
Py 0 K 22 0 0 0 0 y Py
Vz 0 0 K 33 K 34 0 0 z = Vz
Mx 0 0 K 43 K 44 0 0 x Mx
My 0 0 0 0 K 55 0 y My
Mz K 61 0 0 0 0 K 66 z Mz
Standard Global Matrix
Figure 7-B1-2
Where the linear spring constants or K values are defined as follows using the Global
Coordinates:
K11 = +Vx(app)/+x = Longitudinal Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K22 = AE/L = Vertical or Axial Stiffness (k/in)
K33 = -Vz(app)/-z = Transverse Lateral Stiffness (k/in)
K44 = +Mx(app)/+x = Transverse Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K55 = JG/L = Torsional Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K66 = +Mz(app)/+z = Longitudinal Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K34 = -Vz(ind)/+x = Transverse Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K16 = +Vx(ind) /+z = Longitudinal Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K43 = +Mx(ind)/-z = Transverse Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)
K61 = +Mz(ind)/+x = Longitudinal Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)
Y Y
+ x - z
)
nd
z( i
+M )
pp
+ Mz( app) +Mz( i nd) p) z (a
x ( ap -V
+M d)
Long. + Vx( i nd) + Vx( app) ( in
X - Vz X
.
a ns
Tr
Z Z
+ Oz r ot . +Ox r ot .
LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
SPRINGS SPRINGS
Fixed Head Coordinate System
Figure 7-B1-3
Free Head
Linear Spring Calculation
If the shear andMethod
momentIIare creating deflection
(Technique I) in the SAME direction where the
spring is located, afreehead boundary condition is required to model the loaded
foundation in a finite element model. Ifa free head boundary condition is assumed
Method II (Technique II) described in Section 7.2.5.
que I) - Matrix Coefficient Definitions
ee Head Spring Calculations
Vertical Springs (K22)
K22)
Vertical spring constants can be calculated from the following three assumptions. See
nstants can be calculated from the following three assumptions. See
Figure 7-B1-4 and the following definitions. REF: Seismic Design of Highway Bridges
d the following definitions. REF: Page 6-30, Seismic Design of
Workshop Manual, Pub. No. FHWA-IP-81-2, Jan 1981.
Workshop Manual, Pub. No. FHWA-IP-81-2, Jan7 .2 .3-11981. 1
7 .3 .6-1
3
pile (in)
7 .4 .6-1
7 .4 .6-2
f pile embedded 7 .4 .6-1
7 .4 .6-2
es: 7 .4 .7-1
7 .4 .6-2
7 .4 .7-1
7 .8 .1-1
Pile Stress
Figure 7-B-1.e Pile Stress
7 .4 .7-1
7 .8 .1-1 Figure
7-B1-4
7 .8 .2-1
inearly varying skin friction:
7 .8 .1-1
7 .8 .2-1
E AE 7 .9 .2-1
Point Bearing
, with F = 1.0 (fully embedded), K 22Piles:
3
=
F 7 .8 .2-1 L
L 7 .9 .2-1
7-B-1 .1
7 .9 .2-1
7-B-1 .1
with
Friction Piles linearly varying
7-B-1 .2 skin
friction:
1 3
constant skin friction:
7-B-1 .1 AE
7-B-1 .2 K
, with F = 1.0, (fully embedded), 22 2 1 3
=
L 7-B-1 .3
1
L 7-B-1 .2
1 3
Friction
Piles
with
constant
skin 1friction:
7-B-1 .3
7-B-1 .4
(K55) 7-B-1 .3
1
7-B-1 .4
ogram calculates acceptable torsional spring
values for shafts and
7-B-1 .5A 11
oundation springs. In general, torsional spring
7-B-1 .4
constants
for
Vx
Py Vz Mx My Mz Disp. Force
7-B-1 .10 3
Vx K11
0 0 0 0 K16 x Vx
Py 0 K 22 0 0 0 0 y Py
Vz 0 0 K 33 K 34 0 0 z = Vz
Mx 0 0 K 43 K 44 0 0 x Mx
My 0 0 0 0 K 55 0 y My
Mz K 61 0 0 0 0 K 66 z Mz
by7-B-1 .3
the piles.
Thisaffects
the local stress in the footing and
1 7-B-1 .4
axial
loading
of the pile
much more than the column
moment and shear, which is usually the primary focus
fordesign.
7-B-1 .4 7-B-1 .5A 11
K11 and K66 (or K33 and
K44) alone do not predict the shape
or reaction of the
foundation element.
Thecross-couple term K16 (or K34) will add a shear force to
7-B-1 .5A
correct 11 moment
the applied deflection. 7-B-1 .5B 33
7-B-1 .11 7-B-1 .12
7-B-1 .12
The locations of matrix terms are shown in Figure 7-B1-2. The displacements are
local and this requires the spring coefficients to be moved to produce the correct
local reactions. The X axis is the new vertical direction. The Y axis is the new
longitudinal direction. The spring coefficient definitions and notation remains the same
as defined in Appendix 7-B1. Note the shift in diagonal terms and locations of the
cross-coupleterms.
Px Vy Vz Mx My Mz Disp. Force
Px K 22
0 0 0 0 0 x Px
Vy 0 K11 0 0 0 K16 y Vy
Vz 0 0 K33 0 K34 0 z Vz
Mx 0 0 0 K55 0 0 x Mx
My 0 0 K 43 0 K 44 0 y My
Mz 0 K 61 0 0 0 K 66 z Mz
Matrix in Local Coordinate System
Figure 7-B2-2
Where the linear spring constants or K values are defined as follows (see Figure 7-B2-3
for direction and sign convention):
K11 = -Vy(app)/-y = Longitudinal Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K22 = AE/L = Vertical or Axial Stiffness (k/in)
K33 = -Vz(app)/-z = Transverse Lateral Stiffness (k/in)
K44 = -My(app)/-y = Transverse Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K55 = JG/L = Torsional Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K66 = Mz(app)/z = Longitudinal Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K34 = -Vz(ind)/-y = Transverse Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K16 = -Vy(ind)/+z = Longitudinal Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K43 = -My(ind)/-z = Longitudinal Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)
K61 = +Mz(ind)/-y = Transverse Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)
X X
y - z
)
i nd
y(
-M )
pp
+ Mz( app) +Mz( i nd) p) z( a
(a
p -V
y
-M d)
-Vy( i nd) -Vy( app) Long. ( in
Y Y - Vz
s.
an
Tr
Z Z
+Oz r ot . -Oy r ot .
LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
SPRINGS SPRINGS
Px Vy Vz Mx My Mz
Px K 22 0 0 0 0 0 Disp. Force
kip kip x Px
Vy 0 442 0 0 0 27,685
in rad y Vy
Vz 0 0 K33 0 K34 0
z Vz
Mx 0 0 0 K55 0 0 x Mx
My 0 0 K 43 0 K 44 0 y My
kip in kip in
Mz 0 27,703 0 0 0 2,810,403 z Mz
in rad
PilePile
ModelModel UsingaaSet
Using Set of
of Non-linear
Non-linear Curves
PYPY Curves
Figure 7-B2-1
Figure 7-B3-1
Node placement for springs should attempt to imitate the soil layers. Generally, the
Node placement
upper of for
thesprings should
pile in stiff attempt
soils has the mosttosignificant
imitate contribution
the soil layers. Generally, the
to the lateral
upper of soilthe pile in
reaction. stiff insoils
Springs has the
this region most
should be significant
spaced at mostcontribution to the lateral
3 feet apart. Spacing
of 2.5 feet has demonstrated results within 10% of Lpile output moment and shear.
soil reaction. Springs in this region should be spaced at most 3 feet apart. Spacing of
Springs for the lower of the pile can transition to a much larger spacing. Stiff
2.5feet has demonstrated
foundations in weak soilsresults withinloads
will transfer 10%muchof LPILE
deeper inoutput
the soil moment and shear.
and more springs
would be sensible.
Springs for the lower of the pile can transition to a much larger spacing. Stiff
Transverse
foundations in weak andsoils
longitudinal springs must
will transfer loadsinclude
muchgroup reduction
deeper factors
in the to analyze
soil and more springs
the structure/soil response. Soil properties are modified in Lpile to account for Group
would be Effects.
sensible.
Lpile then generates PY curves based on the modified soil properties and
desired depths. See Section 7.2.5 for Group Effects.
Transverse and longitudinal springs must include group reduction factors to analyze
FEM programs
the structure/soil will accept
response. Soilnon-linear
propertiessprings
areinmodified
a Force (F)invs.LPILE
Deflection
to (L) format. for lateral
account
P values in a PY curve must be multiplied by the pile length associated with the spring
group effects. LPILE
in the FEM. Thisthen generates
converts a P valuePY curves based
in Force/Length unitsonto the modified
Force. soil
This cannot be properties
and desired
donedepths. See Section
during dynamic analysis7.2.5 for group
with some effects.(including GTStrudl).
FEM programs
FEM programs will accept non-linear springs in a Force (F) vs. Deflection (L) format.
P values in a PY curve must be multiplied by the pile length associated with the spring
in the FEM. This converts a P value in Force/Length units to Force. This cannot be
done during a response spectrum analysis with some FEM programs.
Soil Modulus - ES
Soil Modulus is defined as the force per length (of a pile) associated with a soil
deflection. As shown in Figure 7-B3-2, ES is a slope on the PY curve or P/Y. ES is a
secant modulus since the PY relationship is nonlinear and the modulus is a constant.
The units are F/L per L or F/L2, such as kips per square inch.
7.99 References
1. AASHTO (2011) "AASHTO Guide Specification for LRFD Seismic Bridge
Design," American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,
Washington, D.C.
2. ACI (2011) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI.
3. AISC (2010) Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings ANSI/AISC Standard
360-10, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
4. AISI. American Iron and Steel Institute.
5. Caltrans. (2008). Memo to Designers 3-1 Deep Foundations, California Department
of Transportation, Sacrameto, CA.
6. Hannigan, P. J., Goble, G.G., Likins, G.E., and Rausche, F. (2006). Design and
Construction of Driven Pile Foundation, FHWA NHI-05-042, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C., Vol. I.
7. Roeder, C.W, Lehman, D.E.(2012) Initial Investigation of Reinforced Concrete-
filled Tubes for use in Bridge Foundations, Report No. WA-RD 776.1, Washington
State Transportation Center (TRAC), University of Washington, Seattle, WA.
8. Roeder, C.W., Lehman, D.E., and Bishop, E. (2010) Strength and Stiffness of
Circular Concrete-filled Tubes," ASCE, Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol 136,
No 12, pgs, 1545-53, Reston, VA.
9. Roeder, C.W, Lehman, D.E., and Thody, R. (2009) "Composite Action in CFT
Components and Connections," AISC, Engineering Journal, Chicago, IL.
10. Stephens, M.T, Lehman, D.E, and Roeder, C.W. (2016) Concrete-Filled Tube
Bridge Pier Connections for Accelerated Bridge Construction. California
Department of Transportation, Report Number CA15-2417.
g. Wall Types 1 and 2 were designed for traffic barrier collision forces, as
specified in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section A13.2
for TL-4. These walls have been designed with this force distributed over
the distance between wall section expansion joints (48feet).
2. Eastern Washington Walls (Types 5 through 8)
a. The seismic design of these walls has been completed using and effective
Peak Ground Acceleration of 0.2g. Extreme Event stability of the wall was
based on 100 percent of the wall inertia force combined with 50 percent of
the seismic earth pressure.
b. Active Earth pressure distribution was linearly distributed in accordance
with Section 7.7.4. The corresponding Ka values used for design were 0.36
for wall Types 5 and 6, and 0.24 for Types 7 and 8.
c. Seismic Earth pressure distribution was uniformly distributed in accordance
with Geotechnical DesignManual Section 15.4.2.9, and was supplemented
by AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (Figure 11.10.7.1-1). The
corresponding Kae values used for design were 0.55 for Types 5 and 6, and
0.30 for Types 7 and 8.
d. Passive Earth pressure distribution was linearly distributed, and was
taken over the depth of the footing and the height of the shear key. The
corresponding Kp value used for design was 1.5 for all walls.
e. The retained fill was assumed to have an angle of internal friction of 36
degrees and a unit weight of 130 pounds per cubic foot. The friction angle
for sliding stability was assumed to be 32 degrees.
f. Load factors and load combinations used in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 3.4.1-1& 2. Stability analysis
performed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications Section 11.6.3 and C11.5.5-1 & 2.
g. Wall Types 7 and 8 were designed for traffic barrier collision forces, as
specified in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section A13.2
for TL-4. These walls have been designed with this force distributed over
the distance between wall section expansion joints (48feet).
B. Non-Standard Reinforced Concrete Retaining Walls
1. Resistance, Eccentricity, and Sliding Stability
For sliding, the passive resistance in the front of the footing may be considered
if the earth is more than 2 feet deep on the top of the footing and does not
slope downward away from the wall. Otherwise, the passive resistance shall
be ignored above the bottom of the footing for the Strength Limit States and
ignored above the top of the footing for the Extreme Event Limit States
The design soil bearing pressure at the toe of the footing shall not exceed the
factored soil bearing capacity supplied by the Geotechnical Engineer.
CT
LS
EQ
H1
LS
H
EQ
EV
4'-0" EH EQ
2
1
Figure 8.1.4-1
Application of Lateral Loads for walls with a horizontal backfill
Figure 8.1.4-1
2H
MAX.
2
S
1 *
EQ
H1
LS
EH EQ
WSDOT Bridge DesignEQ
Manual M 23-50.16 Page 8-7
H
EV
June 2016
4'-0"
DC
2
1
Figure 8.1.4-1
2H
MAX.
2
S
1 *
EQ
H1
LS
EH EQ
H
EQ
EV
4'-0"
DC
2
1
Figure 8.1.4-2
Application of Lateral Loads for walls with a sloping backfill
Figure 8.1.4-2
EXPA
NSIO
N JO
INT
Lt SPA
CING
F t
45
TY
P.
Figure 8.1.4-3
Application and Distribution of Vehicular Collision Load occurring near the midsection.
Figure 8.1.4-3
Lt EXPA
NSIO
Ft N JO
INT
SPA
CING
Lt EXPA
NSIO
Ft N JO
INT
SPA
CING
45
Figure 8.1.4-4
Application and Distribution of Vehicular Collision Load occurring near the end.
Figure 8.1.4-4
8.1.5 Design of Cantilever Soldier Pile and Soldier Pile Tieback Walls
A. Ground Anchors (Tiebacks)
See AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section 11.9 Anchored Walls.
The Geotechnical Engineer will determine whether anchors can feasibly be used
at a particular site based on the ability to install the anchors and develop anchor
capacity. The presence of utilities or other underground facilities, and the ability
to attain underground easement rights may also determine whether anchors can
beinstalled.
The anchor may consist of bars, wires, or strands. The choice of appropriate type
is usually left to the Contractor but may be specified by the designer if special site
conditions exist that preclude the use of certain anchor types. In general, strands
and wires have advantages with respect to tensile strength, limited work areas, ease
of transportation, and storage. However, bars are more easily protected against
corrosion, and are easier to develop stress and transferload.
The geotechnical report will provide a reliable estimate of the feasible factored
design load of the anchor, recommended anchor installation angles (typically
10degrees to 45 degrees), no-load zone dimensions, and any other special
requirements for wall stability for each project.
Both the tributary area method and the hinge method as outlined in AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section C11.9.5.1 are considered acceptable
design procedures to determine the horizontal anchor design force. The capacity
of each anchor shall be verified by testing. Testing shall be done during the anchor
installation (See Standard Specifications Section6-17.3(8) and Geotechnical
DesignManualM46-03).
1. The horizontal anchor spacing typically follows the pile spacing of 6 to 10feet.
The vertical anchor spacing is typically 8 to 12feet. A minimum spacing of
4feet in both directions is not recommended because it can cause a loss of
effectiveness due to disturbance of the anchors duringinstallation.
2. For permanent ground anchors, the anchor design load, T, shall be according
toAASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. For temporary ground
anchors, the anchor design load, T, may ignore extreme event loadcases.
3. The lock-off load is 60 percent of the controlling factored design load for
temporary and permanent walls (see Geotechnical DesignManual Chapter15).
Permanent ground anchors shall have double corrosion protection consisting of
anencapsulation-protected tendon bond length as specified in the WSDOT General
Special Provisions. Typical permanent ground anchor details are provided in the
Appendix 8.1-A1.
Temporary ground anchors may have either double corrosion protection consisting
of an encapsulation-protected tendon bond length or simple corrosion protection
consisting of grout-protected tendon bondlength.
C. Design of Lagging
Lagging for soldier pile walls, with and without permanent ground anchors, may be
comprised of timber, precast concrete, or steel. The expected service life of timber
lagging is 20years which is less than the 75 year service life of structures designed
in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
The Geotechnical Engineer will specify when lagging shall be designed for
an additional 250psf surcharge due to temporary construction load or traffic
surcharge. The lateral pressure transferred from a moment slab shall be considered
in the design of soldier pile walls and laggings.
1. Temporary Timber Lagging
Temporary lagging is based on a maximum 36 month service life before a
permanent fascia is applied over the lagging. The wall Design Engineer shall
review the Geotechnical Recommendations or consult with the Geotechnical
Engineer regarding whether the lagging may be considered as temporary as
defined in Standard Specifications Section6-16.3(6). Temporary timber lagging
shall be designed by the contractor in accordance with Standard Specifications
Section 6-16.3(6)B.
2. Permanent Lagging
Permanent lagging shall be designed for 100 percent of the lateral load that
could occur during the life of the wall in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications Sections 11.8.5.2 and 11.8.6 for simple spans
without soil arching. A reduction factor to account for soil arching effects may
be used if permitted by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Timber lagging shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications Section 8.6. The size effect factor (CFb) should be
considered 1.0, unless a specific size is shown in the wall plans. The wet
service factor (CMb) should be considered 0.85 for a saturated condition at
some point during the life of the lagging. The load applied to lagging should
be applied at the critical depth. The design should include the option for the
contractor to step the size of lagging over the height of tall walls, defined as
walls over 15feet in exposed faceheight.
Timber lagging designed as a permanent structural element shall consist of
treated Douglas Fir-Larch, grade No. 2 or better. Hem-fir wood species, due
to the inadequate durability in wet condition, shall not be used for permanent
timber lagging. Permanent lagging is intended to last the design life cycle
(75years) of the wall. Timber lagging does not have this life cycle capacity but
can be used when both of the following are applicable:
a. The wall will be replaced within a 20 year period or a permanent fascia will
be added to contain the lateral loads within that time period.
And,
b. The lagging is visible for inspections during this life cycle.
Weepholes can get clogged up or freeze up, and the water pressure behind the
wall may start to increase. In order to keep the water pressure from building, it is
important to have well draining gravel backfill and underdrains. Appropriate details
must be shown in the Plans.
No underdrain pipe or gravel backfill for drains is necessary behind cantilever
wingwalls. A 3 foot minimum vertical layer of gravel backfill shall be placed
behind the cantilever wingwalls and shown in the Plans.
Backfill for wall, underdrain pipe and gravel backfill for drain are not included in
the bridge quantities. The size of the underdrain pipe should not be shown on the
bridge plans as this is a Design PE Office item and is subject to change during the
design phase. If it is necessary to excavate existing material for the backfill, then
this excavation shall be a part of the bridge quantities for Structure Excavation
Class A Incl. Haul.
E. Expansion, Contraction and Construction Joints
Odd panels for all types of walls shall normally be made up at the ends of
thewalls. All expansion, contraction and construction joints shall be shown in the
plan sheets and are typically shown on the elevation.
1. Expansion Joints
For cast-in-place construction, a minimum of inch premolded filler should be
specified in the expansion joints.
Precast concrete cantilever wall expansion joints shall be in accordance with
the Standard Specifications Section 6-11.3(3).
For cantilevered and gravity walls, expansion joint spacing should be a
maximum of 60feet on centers. For cantilevered and gravity walls constructed
with a traffic barrier attached to the top, expansion joint spacing should be
consistent with the length determined to be adequate distribution of the traffic
collision loading.
For counterfort walls, expansion joint spacing should be a maximum of 32feet
oncenters.
For soldier pile and soldier pile tieback walls with concrete fascia panels,
expansion joint spacing should be 24 to 32feet on centers.
Expansion joints are not permitted in footings except at bridge abutments and
where the substructure type changes such as locations where spread footing to
pile footing occurs. In these cases, the footing shall be interrupted by a inch
premolded expansion joint through both the footing and the wall.
2. Contraction Joints
Contraction joints shall be spaced at a maximum of 30feet for walls with
expansion joints spaced at intervals exceeding 32 feet.
3. Construction Joints
Construction joints are only permitted in the footing. The maximum spacing
of construction joints in the footing shall be 120 feet. The footing construction
joints should have a 6 inch minimum offset from the expansion or contraction
joints in the wall stem.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 8-15
June 2016
Walls and Buried Structures Chapter 8
Figure 8.1.9-1
In which:
A f 0.10 (8.2-2)
Where:
As = Peak seismic ground acceleration coefficient modified by short-period site factor
D = Dead load of the noise barrier and its components
f = Dead load coefficient as specified in Table 8.2-1.
Location f
Monolithic connection 1.0
Monolithic connection on bridges 2.5
Connection of precast wall to bridge barrier 8.0
Connection of precast wall to retaining wall or moment slab barrier 5.0
8.2.3 Design
A. Standard Plan Noise Barrier Walls
1. Noise Barrier Walls detailed in Standard Plans D-2.04 through D-2.34, D-2.42
through D-2.44, D-2.48 through D-2.68 have been designed in accordance with
the following criteria.
a. AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers,
1989 and interims through 2002.
b. The seismic design was based on a PGA of 0.35g which corresponds to a
peak bedrock acceleration of 0.3g with an amplification factor of 1.18 for
stiff soil.
c. The Design Manual M 22 01, Chapter 740 tabulates the design wind
speeds and various exposure conditions used to determine the appropriate
walltype.
d. The design parameters used in the standard plan noise wall
foundationdesign are summarized in the Geotechnical DesignManual
Chapter 17.
2. Noise Barrier Walls detailed in Standard Plans D-2.36 and D-2.46 have been
designed in accordance with the requirements of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications, 6th Edition 2012 and interims through 2013, and the
requirements and guidance cited herein:
a. Load factors and load combinations for the design of all structural elements
are in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Tables 3.4.1-1 and 3.4.1-2.
b. Seismic design is in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Article 3.10.2.1,
considering site classes B, C, D, and E and the following:
i. Peak seismic ground acceleration coefficient on Rock (Site Class B).
1. PGA = 0.45g for Western Washington
2. PGA = 0.19g for Eastern Washington
ii. Horizontal response spectral acceleration coefficient at 0.2-sec period
on rock (Site Class B).
1. Ss = 1.00 for Western Washington
2. Ss = 0.43 for Eastern Washington
iii. Horizontal response spectral acceleration coefficient at 1.0-sec period
on rock (Site Class B).
1. S1 = 0.33 for Western Washington
2. S1 = 0.15 for Eastern Washington
iv. Modal analysis was performed for the first four periods. The elastic
seismic response coefficient Csm was computed for each modal period
in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Article 3.10.4.2 and all four Csm
coefficients were combined through the SRSS method.
For buried structures, with span lengths equal to or greater than 20 feet, the seismic
effects of potential unstable ground conditions (e.g., liquefaction, liquefaction
induced settlement, landslides, and fault dis-placements) on the function of the
buried structures shall be considered, except liquefaction need not be considered if
the liquefaction, landslides, or fault displacements do not cause life safety hazards.
As a guideline, if the depth of fill on top of the structure is more than one-half the
clear span along the skew, liquefaction induced settlement or local instability are
not likely to cause life safety hazards.
Page 8-24 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 8 Walls and Buried Structures
C. Connections
1. The joints between the upper and lower sections shall be designed for the
lateral forces due to the seismic and soil pressures per requirements above.
SeeStandard Specifications Section 7.02.3(6)C.
2. The segments at portals shall be designed for any lateral load due to the
overburden.
D. Joint Filler and Cover
All joints between segments shall be sealed by joint sealant in accordance with
ASTM C 990. All joints shall be wrapped with external sealing band in accordance
with ASTM C 877, except the bottom slab. See Section 8.4 Bridge Standard
Drawings fordetails.
8.3.5 Design of Precast Reinforced Concrete Three-Sided Structures
Precast reinforced concrete three-sided frame structures are chorded arch, arch,
or elliptical structures. These systems require a CIP concrete or precast footing
and walls. See Appendix 8.3-A4 for design criteria specific to three-sided precast
concreteculverts.
A. Materials
1. Concrete
Precast concrete shall be class 5000, 6000, or 7000 SCC. All cast in place
concrete shall be class 4000.
2. Steel
Nominal yield strength for reinforcement bar shall be 60 ksi. Wire fabric of
yield strength of 65 ksi may be used.
3. Cover
2 minimum cover for reinforcement at all faces.
B. Joint Design and Details
1. Tongue and groove, shear key, and other types of connection can be used to
control the differential settlements between segments or live load deflection.
Tongue and groove connection shall be fabricated per ASTM C 1786.
2. For structures with 2 or less fill cover on top, the top slab joint of the
precast box shall be designed as an edge beam in accordance with AASHTO
Section4.6.3.10.4.
3. Cast-in-place joints can be used for culverts with highway inside the structure.
C. Connections
1. For the precast three-sided culvert, the joints between the precast and wall
section shall be designed for the lateral forces due to the seismic and soil
pressures per requirements above with shear key, block restrainer, or dowel
bars. See Section 8.4 Bridge Standard Drawings for details.
2. The segments at portals shall be designed for any lateral load due to the
overburden.
ACI 350-06 has stricter criteria for cover and spacing of joints than the AASHTO
LRFD Specifications. Cover is not to be less than 2 inches (ACI 7.7.1), no metal or
other material is to be within 1 inches from the formed surface, and the maximum
bar spacing shall not exceed 12 inches (ACI 7.6.5).
Crack control criteria is in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.3.4 with
e = 0.5 (in order to maintain acrack width of 0.0085 inches, in accordance with
the commentary of 5.7.3.4).
Joints in the vaults top slab, bottom slab and walls shall allow dissipation of
temperature and shrinkage stresses, thereby reducing cracking. The amount of
temperature and shrinkage reinforcement is a function of reinforcing steel grade
"and length between joints (ACI Table 7.12.2-1). All joints shall have a shear key
and a continuous and integral PVC waterstop with a 4-inch minimum width. The
purpose of the waterstop is to prevent water infiltration and exfiltration. Joints
having welded shear connectors with grouted keyways shall use details from
WSDOT Precast Prestressed Slab Details or approved equivalent, with weld ties
spaced at 4-0 on center. Modifications to the above joints shall be justified with
calculations. Calculations shall be provided for all grouted shear connections.
The width of precast panels shall be increased to minimize the number of joints
between precast units.
For cast-in-place walls in contact with liquid that are over 10 in height, the
minimum wall thickness is 12. This minimum thickness is generally good practice
for all external walls, regardless of height, to allow for 2 inches of cover as well as
space for concrete placement andvibration.
After the forms are placed, the void left from the form ties shall be coned shaped,
at least 1 inch in diameter and 1 inches deep, to allow proper patching.
Detention vaults that need to be located within the prism supporting the roadway
are required to meet the following maintenance criteria. A by-pass piping system
is required. Each cell in the vault shall hold no more than 6,000 gallons of water to
facilitate maintenance and cleanout operations. Baffles shall be water tight. Access
hatches shall be spaced no more than 50feet apart. There shall be an access near
both the inlet and the outfall. These two accesses shall allow for visual inspection
of the inlet and outfall elements, in such a manner that a person standing on the
ladder, out of any standing water, will be in reach of any grab handles, grates or
screens. All other access hatches shall be over sump areas. All access hatches shall
be a minimum 30 inch in diameter, have ladders that extend to the vault floor, and
shall be designed to resist HS-20 wheel loads with applicable impact factors as
described below.
Detention vaults that need to be located in the roadway shall be oriented so that
the access hatches are located outside the traveled lanes. Lane closures are usually
required next to each access hatch formaintenance and inspection, even when the
hatches are in 12-0 wide shoulders.
A 16 kip wheel load having the dynamic load allowance for deck joints, in
AASHTO LRFD Table3.6.2.1-1, shall be applied at the top of access hatches and
risers. The load path of this impact force shall be shown in the calculations.
Minimum vault dimensions shall be 4-0 wide and 7-0 tall; inside dimensions.
Original signed plans of all closed top detention vaults with access shall be
forwarded to the Bridge Plans Engineer in the Bridge Asset Management Unit
(seeSection 12.4.10.B). This ensures that the Bridge Preservation Office will
have the necessary inventory information for inspection requirements. A set of
plans must be submitted to both the WSDOT Hydraulics Office and the Regional
WSDOT Maintenance Office for plans approval.
8.3.7 Design of Metal Pipe Arches
Soil pH should be investigated prior to selecting this type of structure. Metal Pipe
arches are not generally recommended under high volume highways or under
largefills.
Pipe arch systems are similar to precast reinforced concrete three sided structures in
that these are generally proprietary systems provided by several manufacturers, and
that their design includes interaction with the surrounding soil. Pipe arch systems shall
be designed in accordance with the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Bridges, and applicable ACI design and ASTM material specifications.
8.3.8 Design of Tunnels
Tunnels are unique structures in that the surrounding ground material is the structural
material that carries most of the ground load. Therefore, geology has even more
importance in tunnel construction than with above ground bridge structures. In short,
geotechnical site investigation is the most important process in planning, design
and construction of a tunnel. These structures are designed in accordance with the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, and FHWA-NHI-10-034 Technical
Manual for Design and Construction of Roadway Tunnels - Civil Elements.
Tunnels are not a conventional structure, and estimation of costs is more variable as
size and length increase. Ventilation, safety access, fire suppression facilities, warning
signs, lighting, emergency egress, drainage, operation and maintenance are extremely
critical issues associated with the design oftunnels and will require the expertise of
geologists, tunnel experts and mechanical engineers.
For motor vehicle fire protection, a standard has been produced by the National Fire
Protection Association. This document, NFPA 502 Standard for Road Tunnels,
Bridges, and Other Limited Access Highways, uses tunnel length to dictate minimum
fire protection requirements:
300feet or less: no fire protection requirements
300 to 800feet: minor fire protection requirements
800feet or more: major fire protection requirements
Some recent WSDOT tunnel projects are:
I-90 Mt. Baker Ridge Tunnel Bore Contract: 3105 Bridge No.: 90/24N
This 1500 foot long tunnel is part of the major improvement of Interstate 90. Work
was started in1983 and completed in 1988. The net interior diameter of the bored
portion, which is sized forvehicular traffic on two levels with a bike/pedestrian
corridor on the third level, is 63.5feet. The project is the worlds largest diameter
tunnel in soft ground, which is predominantly stiff clay. Construction by a stacked-
drift method resulted in minimal distortion of the liner and insignificant disturbance
at the ground surface above.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 8-29
June 2016
Walls and Buried Structures Chapter 8
Jct I-5 SR 526 E-N Tunnel Ramp Contract: 4372 Bridge No.: 526/22E-N
This 465 foot long tunnel, an example of the cut and cover method, was
constructed in 1995. Theinterior dimensions were sized for a 25 foot wide one lane
ramp roadway with a vertical height of 18feet. The tunnel was constructed in three
stages. 3 and 4 foot diameter shafts for the walls were placed first, a 2 foot thick
cast-in-place top slab was placed second and then the tunnelwas excavated, lined
and finished.
I-5 Sleater-Kinney Bike/Ped. Tunnel Contract: 6031 Bridge No.: 5/335P
This 122 foot long bike and pedestrian tunnel was constructed in 2002 to link an
existing path along I-5 under busy Sleater-Kinney Road. The project consisted of
precast prestressed slab unitsand soldier pile walls. Construction was staged to
minimize traffic disruptions.
8.5 Appendices
Appendix 8.1-A1 Summary of Design Specification Requirements for Walls
Appendix 8.3-A1 Precast Split Box Culvert Design Criteria
Appendix 8.3-A2 3-Sided Precast Culvert Design Criteria
Appendix 8.3-A3 Design Example of Racking Analysis of Precast Split
BoxCulvert
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges17th Edition for projects initiated prior to
Structural Earth Walls
General October1,2010.
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications for projects initiated after October 1, 2010, Geotechnical Design
Manual (GDM) and Bridge Design Manual (BDM).
Seismic AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
Moment slab barrier shall be designed in accordance with the WSDOT BDM and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Traffic
Design Specifications Section A13.3 for Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4 impact load, unless
Barrier
otherwise specified in the Contract Plans or Contract Special Provisions.
Design shall be based on current editions, including current interims, of the following documents; AASHTO
Proprietary Structural
General
Non-Preapproved
Seismic AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
Moment slab barrier shall be designed in accordance with the WSDOT BDM and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Traffic Design Specifications Section A13.3 for Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4 impact load, unless
Barrier otherwise specified in the Contract Plans or Contract Special Provisions.
Design shall be based on current editions, including current interims, of the following documents; AASHTO
General
Geosynthetic Walls
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 and Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.
and Non-Standard
Standard Plan
Seismic AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year Seismic Acceleration map.
For Standard Plan Geosynthetic walls use Standard Plan D-3.15, D-3.16, or D-3.17 for traffic barriers.
Traffic Special design barriers to be constructed on Standard Plan or Non-Standard Geosynthetic Walls shall be
Barrier designed in accordance with the WSDOT Bridge Design Manual and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications Section A13.3 for Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4 impact load.
Current Standard Plan walls are designed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 4th
Standard Reinforced Concrete
Edition 2007 and interims through 2008 and the Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 Nov. 2008.
Standard Plan and Non-
General Non-standard reinforced concrete cantilever walls shall be designed in accordance with the current editions,
CantileverWalls
including current interims, of the following documents; AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications,
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 and Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.
Seismic AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section A13.3 for
Traffic Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4 impact load. Ft is distributed over Lt at the top of barrier. Load
Barrier from top of barrier is distributed at a 45degree angle into the wall.
Current Standard Plan walls are designed for TL-4 impact loading distributed over 48feet at the base of wall
Design shall be based on current editions, including current interims, of the following documents; AASHTO
General
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 and Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.
Soldier Pile Walls
With & Without
Tie-Backs
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
Seismic
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section A13.3 for Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4
Traffic
impact load. Ft is distributed over Lt at the top of barrier Load from top of barrier is distributed downward into
Barrier
the wall spreading at a 45 degree angle.
Wall
Types Design Specifications
General Current Standard Plans D-2.04 through D-2.34, D-2.42, D-2.44, and D-2.48 through D-2.68 are designed in
accordance with AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers 1989 & Interims.
Standard Plans D-2.36 and D-2.46 are designed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Standard Plan Noise
Seismic Current Standard Plans D-2.04 through D-2.34, D-2.42, D-2.44, and D-2.48 through D-2.68 are designed in
accordance with AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers 1989 & Interims.
Standard Plans D-2.36 and D-2.46 are designed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
Traffic AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers 1989 & Interims.
Barrier Standard Plan D-2.46 traffic barrier is designed as stated in Chapter 8.
General Design shall be based on current editions, including current interims, of the following documents; AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, WSDOT GDM and WSDOT BDM.
Non-Standard
Noise Barrier
Seismic AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
Walls
Traffic WSDOT Bridge Design Manual and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section A13.3 for
Barrier Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4 impact load.
General All soil nail walls and their components shall be designed using thepublication Geotechnical Engineering
Circular No. 7 FHWA-IF-03-017.
The Geotechnical Engineer completes the internal design of the soil nail wall and provides recommendations
for nail layout. The structural designer will layout the nail pattern. The geotechnical engineer will review the
nail layout to insure compliance with the Geotechnical recommendations. Thestructural designer shall design
the temporary shotcrete facing as well as the permanent structural facing, including the bearing plates, and
Soil Nail Walls
shearstuds.
The upper cantilever of the facing that is located above the top row of nails shall be designed in accordance
with current editions, including current interims, of the following documents; AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, WSDOT GDM and WSDOT BDM.
Seismic AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
Traffic Moment slab barrier shall be designed in accordance with the WSDOT Bridge Design Manual and the
Barrier AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section A13.3 for Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4
impact load
General Design shall be based on current editions, including current interims, of the following documents; AASHTO
Proprietary Walls Gravity
Seismic AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 1000 year map design acceleration.
Traffic WSDOT Bridge Design Manual and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section A13.3 for
Barrier Concrete Railings considering a minimum TL-4 impact load.
8.99 References
1. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 5th Edition, American Association
of State Highway and Transportation Officials, Washington, D.C.
2. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th Ed., 2002
3. WSDOT Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges and Municipal
Construction, Olympia, Washington 98501.
4. ACI 350/350R-06 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures, ACI,2006.
5. Munshi, Javeed A. Rectangular Concrete Tanks, Rev. 5th Ed., PCA, 1998.
6. Miller, C. A. and Constantino, C. J. Seismic Induced Earth Pressure in Buried
Vaults, PVP-Vol.271, Natural Hazard Phenomena and Mitigation, ASME, 1994,
pp. 3-11.
7. Munshi, J. A. Design of Liquid-Containing Concrete Structures for Earthquake
Forces, PCA,2002.
8. NFPA 502, Standard for Road Tunnels, Bridges, and Other Limited
AccessHighways.
* Based upon 0.16 in. creep shortening per 100 ft. of superstructure length and 0.12 in. shrinkage
shortening per 100 ft. of superstructure length
** Based upon 0.31 in. creep shortening per 100 ft. of superstructure length and 0.19 in. shrinkage
shortening per 100 ft. of superstructure length
*** Can be increased to 800 ft. if the joint opening at 64 F at time of construction is specified in
the expansion joint table to be less than the minimum installation width of 1 in. This condition
is acceptable if the gland is already installed when steel shapes are placed in the blockout.
Otherwise (for example, staged construction) the gland would need to be installed at temperature
less than 45 F.
Where:
Ltrib = Tributary length of the structure subject to shrinkage
= Ultimate shrinkage strain after expansion joint installation; estimated
as 0.0002in lieu of more refined calculations
= Restraint factor accounting for the restraining effect imposed by superstructure
elements installed before the concrete slab is cast
= 0.0 for steel girders, 0.5 for precast prestressed concrete girders, 0.8for
concrete box girders and T-beams, 1.0 for concrete flat slabs
B. Thermal Effects
Bridges are subject to all modes of heat transfer: radiation, convection, and
conduction. Each mode affects the thermal gradients generated in a bridge
superstructure differently. Climatic influences vary geographically resulting
in different seasonal and diurnal average temperature variations. Additionally,
different types of construction have different thermal inertia properties. For
example, a massive concrete box girder bridge will be much slower to respond to
an imposed thermal stimulus than would a steel plate girder bridge composed of
many relatively thin steel elements.
Where:
Ltrib = Tributary length of the structure subject to thermal variation
= Coefficient of thermal expansion; 0.000006 in./in./F for concrete and
0.0000065 in./in./F for steel
T Bridge superstructure average temperature range as a function of bridge
typeand location
In design calculations, the minimum and maximum compressed widths of the seal
are generally set at 40 percent and 85 percent of the uncompressed width. These
measurements are perpendicular to the joint axis. It is generally assumed that the
compressed seal width at the normal construction temperature of 64F is 60 percent
of its uncompressed width. For skewed joints, bridge deck movement must be
separated into components perpendicular to and parallel to the joint axis. Shear
displacement of the compression seal should be limited to a specified percentage of
its uncompressed width, usually set at about 22 percent. Additionally, the expansion
gap width should be set so that the compression seal can be replaced over a
reasonably wide range of construction temperatures. Manufacturers catalogues
generally specify the minimum expansion gap widths into which specific size
compression seals can be installed. The expansion gap width should be specified on
the contract drawings as a function of the superstructure average temperature.
Solution:
Step 1: Calculate temperature and shrinkage movement.
Temperature: temp = (.000006)(100F)(200)(12/) = 0.72
Shrinkage: shrink = (.0002)(0.8)(200)(12/) = 0.19
Total deck movement at the joint: = 0.91
temp-normal + shrink-normal = (0.91)(cos 15) = 0.88
temp-parallel + shrink-parallel = (0.91)(sin 15) = 0.24
Step 2: Determine compression seal width required.
W > 0.88/0.45 = 1.96
W > 0.24/0.22 = 1.07
W > 4[(64F0F)/(100F0F) (0.72) + 0.19] (cos 15) = 2.51
Use a 3 compression seal
Step 3: Evaluate construction gap widths for various temperatures for a 3 inch
compression seal.
Construction width at 64F = 0.6(3) = 1.80
Construction width at 40F = 1.80 + [(6440)/(100 + 0)](0.72)(cos 15) = 1.97
Construction width at 80F = 1.80 - [(8064)/(100 + 0)](0.72)(cos 15) = 1.69
Conclusion:Use a 3 inch compression seal. Construction gap widths for
installation at temperatures of 40F, 64F, and 80F are 2 in., 1-13/16 in., and
1-11/16 in. respectively.
B. Rapid-Cure Silicone Sealants
Durable low-modulus poured sealants provide watertight expansion joint seals in
both new construction and rehabilitation projects. Most silicone sealants possess
good elastic performance over a wide range of temperatures while demonstrating
high levels of resistance to ultraviolet and ozone degradation. Other desirable
properties include self-leveling and self-bonding characteristics.
Rapid-cure silicone sealants are particularly good candidates for rehabilitation in
situations where significant traffic disruption consequential to extended traffic lane
closure is unacceptable. Additionally, unlike compression seals, rapid-cure silicone
sealants do not require straight, parallel substrate surfaces in order to create a
watertight seal.
Rapid-cure silicone sealants can be installed against either concrete or steel. It is
extremely critical that concrete or steel substrates be thoroughly cleaned before
the sealant is installed. Some manufacturers require application of specific primers
onto substrate surfaces prior to sealant installation in order to enhance bonding.
Consult the Bearing and Expansion Joint Specialist for specifics.
Solution:
Step 1: Calculate future temperature, shrinkage, and creep movements.
Temperature: temp = (.000006)(100F)(160)(12/) = 0.58
Shrinkage: shrink = 0 (Essentially all shrinkage has already occurred.)
Creep: creep = 0 (Essentially all creep has already occurred.)
Step 2: Calculate existing expansion gap widths at average superstructure
temperatures of 40F and 80F. These are estimated extreme sealant installation
temperatures.
G40F = 1.00 + [(64F - 4 0F)/(100F - 0F)] (.58) = 1.14
G80F = 1.00 - [(80F - 64F)/(100F - 0F)] (.58) = 0.91
Step 3: Check sealant capacity if installed at 40F.
Closing movement = [(100F - 40F)/(100F - 0F)](.58) = 0.35
0.35/1.14 = 0.31 < 0.50 Sealants A and B
Opening movement = [(40F - 0F)/(100F - 0F)](.58) = 0.23
0.23/1.14 = 0.20 < 1.00 Sealant A< 0.50 Sealant B
Step 4: Check sealant capacity if installed at 80 F.
Closing movement = = [(100F - 80F)/(100F - 0F)](.58) = 0.12
0.12/0.91 = 0.13 < 0.50 Sealants A and B
Opening movement = [(80F - 0F)/(100F - 0F)](.58) = 0.46
0.46/0.91 = 0.50 < 1.00 Sealant A
= 0.50 Sealant B
Conclusion: The existing 1 in. expansion gap is acceptable for installation of a
rapid cure silicone sealant system. Note that Sealant B would reach its design
opening limit at 0F if it were installed at a superstructure average temperature of
80F. Expansion gap widths at temperatures other than the normal temperature are
generally not specified on rapid cure silicone sealant retrofit plans.
C. Asphaltic Plug Joints
Asphaltic plug joints consist of a flexible polymer modified asphalt installed in
a preformed blockout atop a steel plate and backer rod. In theory, asphaltic plug
joints provided a seamless smooth riding surface. However, when subjected to
high traffic counts, heavy trucks, or substantial acceleration/deceleration traction,
the polymer modified asphalt tends to creep, migrating out of the blockouts. As a
consequence, WSDOT no longer specifies the use of asphaltic plug joints.
D. Headers
Expansion joint headers for new construction are generally the same Class 4000D
structural concrete as used for the bridge deck and cast integrally with the deck.
Expansion joint headers installed as part of a rehabilitative and/or overlay project
are constructed differently.
Being a flexible material, hot mix asphalt (HMA) cannot provide rigid lateral
support to an elastomeric compression seal or a rapid cure silicone sealant bead.
Therefore, rigid concrete headers must be constructed on each side of such an
expansion joint when an HMA overlay is installed atop an existing concrete
deck. These headers provide a rigid lateral support to the expansion joint device
and serve as a transition between the HMA overlay material and the expansion
jointitself.
WSDOT allows either polyester concrete or elastomeric concrete for expansion
joint headers. These two materials, which provide enhanced durability to impact
in regard to other concrete mixes, shall be specified as alternates in the contract
documents. General Special Provisions specify the material and construction
requirements for polyester and elastomeric concrete.
Modified concrete overlay (MCO) material can provide rigid side support for an
elastomeric compression seal or a rapid cure silicone sealant bead without the need
for separately constructed elastomeric concrete or polyester concrete headers. This
alternative approach requires the approval of the Bearing and Expansion.
Joint Specialist. Such modified concrete overlay headers may utilize welded wire
fabric as reinforcement. Contract 7108 which includes Bridges No. 90/565N&S
and 90/566N&S is an example.
Repeated impact and corrosion have deteriorated many existing roadway sliding
steel plate systems. In many instances, the anchorages connecting the sliding plate
to the concrete deck have broken. When the integrity of the anchorages has been
compromised, the steel sliding plates must generally be removed in their entirety
and replaced with a new, watertight system. Where the integrity of the anchorages
has not been compromised, sliding plates can often be retrofitted with poured
sealants or elastomeric strip seals.
B. Strip Seal Joints
An elastomeric strip seal system consists of a preformed elastomeric gland
mechanically locked into metallic edge rails generally embedded into the concrete
deck on each side of an expansion joint gap. Unfolding of the elastomeric gland
accommodates movement. Steel studs are generally welded to the steel extrusions
constituting the edge rails to facilitate anchorage to the concrete deck. Damaged
orworn glands can be replaced with minimal traffic disruption.
The metal edge rails effectively armor the edges of the expansion joint, obviating
the need for a special impact resistant concrete, usually required at compression
seal and poured sealant joints. The designer must select either the standard or
special anchorage. The special anchorage incorporates steel reinforcement bar
loops welded to intermittent steel plates, which in turn are welded to the extrusion.
The special anchorage is generally used for very high traffic volumes or in
applications subject to snowplow hits. In applications subject to snowplow hits
and concomitant damage, the intermittent steel plates can be detailed to protrude
slightly above the roadway surface in order to launch the snowplow blade and
prevent it from catching on the forward extrusion.
The special anchorage requires a 9 inches deep blockout, as opposed to 7 inches
deep for the standard anchorage. The standard anchorage is acceptable for
high traffic volume expansion joint replacement projects where blockout depth
limitations exist.
Metal edge rails may be field spliced using weld procedures provided by the strip
seal expansion joint manufacturer. However, elastomeric strip seal elements shall
not be field spliced. Each elastomeric strip seal element shall be furnished and
installed as a single, continuous piece across the full width of the bridge deck.
Design Example:
Given:A steel plate girder bridge has a total length of 600 feet. It is symmetrical
and has a strip seal expansion joint at each end. These expansion joints are skewed
10. Interior piers provide negligible restraint against longitudinal translation.
Bridge superstructure average temperatures are expected to range between 30F
and 120F during the life of the bridge. Assume a normal installation temperature
of 64F.
Find: Required Type A and Type B strip seal sizes and construction gap widths
at 40F, 64F, and 80F. Type A strip seals have a in. gap at full closure. Type B
strip seals are able to fully close, leaving no gap.
Solution:
Step 1: Calculate temperature and shrinkage movement.
Temperature: temp = (.0000065)(150F)(600)(12/) = 3.51
Shrinkage: shrink = 0.0 (no shrinkage; = 0.0 for steel bridge)
Total deck movement at each joint: = 3.51
temp-normal-closing = (120F - 64F)/(120F + 30F)(3.51)(cos 10)
= 1.29
temp-normal-opening = (64F + 30F)/(120F + 30F)(3.51)(cos 10)
= 2.17
Step 2: Determine strip seal size required. Assume a minimum construction gap
width of 1 at 64F.
Type A: Construction gap width of 1 at 64F will not accommodate 1.29
closing with a gap atfull closure. Therefore, minimum construction gap width
at 64F must be 1.29+0.50=1.79
Size required = 1.79 + 2.17 = 3.96 Use 4 strip seal
Type B: Construction width of 1 at 64F is adequate.
Size required = 1.50 + 2.17 = 3.67 Use 4 strip seal
Step 3: Evaluate construction gap widths for various temperatures for a 4
stripseal.
Type A: Required construction gap width at 64F = 0.50 + 1.29= 1.79
Construction gap width at
40 F = 1.79 + (64F40F)/(64F + 30F)(2.17) = 2.34
Construction gap width at
80F = 1.79 - (80F - 64F)/(120F - 64F)(1.29)=1.42
Type B: Construction gap width of 1 at 64F is adequate.
Construction gap width at
40F = 1.50 + (64F - 40F)/(64F + 30F)(2.17) = 2.05
Construction gap width at
80F = 1.50 - (80F - 64F)/(120F - 64F)(1.29) = 1.13
Conclusion: Use a 4 in. strip seal. Construction gap widths for installation at
superstructure average temperatures of 40 F, 64 F, and 80 F are 2-5/16,
1-13/16, and 1-7/16 for Type A and 2-1/16, 1, and 1 for Type B. (Note that
slightly larger gap settings could be specified for the 4 Type B strip seal in order to
permit the elastomeric glands to be replaced at lower temperatures at the expense
of ride smoothness across the joint.)
C. Bolt-down Panel Joints
Bolt-down panel joints, sometimes referred to as expansion dams, are preformed
elastomeric panels internally reinforced with steel plates. Bridging across
expansion gaps, these panels are bolted into formed blockouts in the concrete deck
with either adhesive or expansive anchors. Expansion is accompanied by stress and
strain across the width of the bolt-down panel between anchor bolts.
the support bar and bottom of the yoke support each center beam and allow it
to translate along the longitudinal axis of the support bar. Practical center beam
span lengths limit the use of multiple support bar systems for larger movement
range modular expansion joints. Multiple support bar systems typically become
impractical for more than nine seals or for movement ranges exceeding 27.
Hence, the single support bar concept typifies these larger movement range
modular expansion joints.
Center beam field splices have historically been the weak link of modular
expansion joints because of their high fatigue susceptibility and their tendency
to initiate progressive zipper-type failure. The reduced level of quality control
achievable with a field operation in regard to a shop operation contributes
to this susceptibility. Specific recommendations regarding center beam field
splices will be subsequently discussed as they relate to shop drawing review
and construction.
2. Movement Design
Calculated total movement range establishes modular expansion joint size.
WSDOT policy has been to provide a 15 percent factor of safety on these
calculated service movements. Current systems permit approximately 3 in. of
movement per elastomeric seal element; hence total movement rating provided
will be a multiple of 3 in. To minimize impact and wear on bearing elements,
the maximum gap between adjacent center beams should be limited to about
3 in.
To facilitate the installation of the modular joints at temperatures other than
the 64F normal temperature, the contract drawings shall specify expansion
gap distance face-to-face of edge beams as a function of the superstructure
temperature at the time of installation.
Modular expansion joint movement design relationships can be expressed as:
n = MR / mr
Gmin = (n - 1) w + n g
Gmax = Gmin + M7R
Where MR = total movement range of the modular joint
mr = movement range per elastomeric seal
n = number of seals
n1 = number of center beams
w = width of each center beam
g = minimum gap per strip seal element at full closure
Gmin = minimum distance face-to-face of edge beams
Gmax = maximum distance face-to-face of edge beams
Design Example:
Given:Two cast-in-place post-tensioned concrete box girder bridge frames
meet at an intermediate pier where they are free to translate longitudinally.
Skew angle is 0 and the bridge superstructure average temperature ranges
from 0F to 120F. A modular bridge expansion joint will be installed 60 days
after post-tensioning operations have been completed. Specified creep is 150
percent of elastic shortening. Assume that 50 percent of total shrinkage has
already occurred at installation time. The following longitudinal movements
were calculated for each of the two frames:
Frame A Frame B
Shrinkage 1.18 0.59
Elastic shortening 1.42 0.79
Creep (1.5 Elastic shortening) 2.13 1.18
Temperature fall (64F to 0F) 3.00 1.50
Temperature rise (64F to 120F) 2.60 1.30
Find:Modular expansion joint size required to accommodate the total
calculated movements and the installation gaps measured face-to-face of edge
beams at superstructure average temperatures of 40F, 64F, and 80F.
Solution:
Step 1: Determine modular joint size.
Total opening movement (Frame A) = (0.5)(1.18) + 2.13 + 3.00
= 5.72
Total opening movement (Frame B) = (0.5)(0.59) + 1.18 + 1.50
= 2.98
Total opening movement (both frames) = 5.72 + 2.98 = 8.70
Total closing movement (both frames) = 2.60 + 1.30 = 3.90
Determine size of the modular joint, including a 15 percent allowance:
1.15(8.70 + 3.90) = 14.49 Use a 15 in. movement rating joint
Step 2: Evaluate installation gaps measured face-to-face of edge beams at
superstructure average temperatures of 40F, 64F, and 80F.
MR = 15 (movement range)
mr = 3 (maximum movement rating per strip seal element)
n = 15/3 = 5 strip seal elements
n1= 4 center beams
w = 2.50 (center beam top flange width)
g = 0
Gmin = 4(2.50) + 4(0) = 10
Gmax = 10 + 15 = 25
G64F = Gmin + Total closing movement from temperature rise
= 10 + 1.15(3.90) = 14.48 Use 14
G40F = 14.5 + [(64F - 40F)/(64F - 0F)](3.00 + 1.50) = 16.19
G80F = 14.5 [(80F - 64F)/(120F - 64F)](2.60 + 1.30) = 13.39
Check spacing between center beams at minimum temperature:
G0F = 14.50 + 8.70 = 23.20
Spacing = [23.20 - 4(2.50)]/5 = 2.64 < 3 OK
Check spacing between center beams at 64 F for seal replacement:
Spacing = [14.50 - 4(2.50)]/5 = 0.90 < 1.50 Therefore, the center beams
must be mechanically separated in order to replace strip seal elements.
9.2 Bearings
9.2.1 General Considerations
Bridge bearings facilitate the transfer of vehicular and other environmentally imposed
loads from the superstructure down to the substructure, and ultimately, to the ground.
In fulfilling this function, bearings must accommodate anticipated movements
(thermal expansion/contraction) while also restraining undesired movements (seismic
displacements). Because the movements allowed by an adjacent expansion joint
must be compatible with the movement restriction imposed by a bearing, bearings
and expansion joints must be designed interdependently and in conjunction with the
anticipated behavior of the overall structure.
Numerous types of bearings are used for bridges. These include steel reinforced
elastomeric bearings, fabric pad sliding bearings, steel pin bearings, rocker bearings,
roller bearings, pot bearings, spherical bearings, disk bearings, and seismic isolation
bearings. Each of these bearings possesses different characteristics in regard to
vertical and horizontal load carrying capacity, vertical stiffness, horizontal stiffness,
and rotational stiffness. A thorough understanding of these characteristics is essential
for economical bearing selection and design. Spherical bearings, disk bearings, and
pot bearings are sometimes collectively referred to as high load multi-rotational
(HLMR)bearings.
Seismic isolation bearings mitigate the potential for seismic damage by utilizing two
related phenomena: dynamic isolation and energy dissipation. Dynamic isolation
allows a superstructure to essentially float, to some extent, while substructure elements
below move with the ground during an earthquake. The ability of some bearing
materials and elements to deform in certain predicable ways allows them to dissipate
seismic energy that might otherwise damage critical structural elements.
Given their unique, in many instances proprietary, nature and the need to holistically
incorporate their design with the overall seismic analysis and design of the structure,
aseparate.
9.2.2 Force Considerations
Bridge bearings must be explicitly designed to transfer all anticipated loads from
the superstructure to the substructure. These forces may be directed vertically,
longitudinally, or transversely with respect to the global orientation of the bridge. In
accordance with LRFD provisions, most bearing design calculations are based upon
service limit state stresses. Impact need not be applied to live load forces in the design
of bearings.
Experience has empirically led to the following practical load capacity approximations
for various bearing types:
Bearing Type Approx. Load Capacity
Steel reinforced elastomeric (Method B) Less than 800 kips
Fabric pad Less than 600 kips
Steel pin More than 600 kips
Spherical and disk More than 800 kips
Seismic isolation Less than 800 kips
Axial, rotational, and shear loading generate shear strain in the constituent
elastomeric layers of a typical bearing. Computationally, Method B imposes a
limit on the sum of these shear strains. It distinguishes between static and cyclic
components of shear strain by applying an amplification factor of 1.75 to cyclic
components to reflect cumulative degradation caused by repetitive loading.
In essence, elastomeric bearing design reduces to checking several mathematical
equations while varying bearing plan dimensions, number of elastomeric layers
and their corresponding thicknesses, and steel shim thicknesses. Because these
calculations can become rather tedious, MS Excel spreadsheets have been
developed and are available for designs using both Method A and Method B
procedures. See the Bearing and Expansion Joint Specialist for these design tools.
LRFD design may result in thicker steel reinforced elastomeric bearings than
previous designs, particularly for shorter span bridges. This is a consequence of the
increased rotational flexibility required to accommodate the 0.005 radian allowance
for uncertainties and partially to inherent conservatism built into the rotational
capacity equations.
Although constituent elastomer has historically been specified by durometer
hardness, shear modulus is the most important physical property of the elastomer
for purposes of bearing design. Research has concluded that shear modulus may
vary significantly among compounds of the same hardness. Accordingly, shear
modulus shall be specified on the plans as 165 psi at 73F without reference to
durometer hardness.
Elastomeric bearings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Specification
M 251 Plain and Laminated Elastomeric Bridge Bearings. Shims shall be
fabricated from ASTM A 1011 Grade 36 steel unless noted otherwise on the plans.
Bearings shall be laminated in inch thick elastomeric layers with a minimum
total thickness of 1 inch. For overall bearing heights less than 5 inches, a minimum
of inch of side clearance shall be provided over the steel shims. For overall
heights greater than 5 inches, a minimum of inch of side clearance shall be
provided. Live load compressive deflection shall be limited to 1/16 inch. AASHTO
Specification M 251 requires elastomeric bearings to be subjected to a series of
tests, including a compression test at 150 percent of the total service load. For this
reason, compressive dead load and live load shall be specified on the plans.
With respect to width, elastomeric bearings shall be designed and detailed as
follows:
1. For prestressed concrete wide flange girders (WF42G, WF50G, WF58G,
WF74G, and W95G), the edge of the bearing pad shall be set between 1 inch
minimum and 9 inch maximum inside of the edge of the girder bottom flange.
2. For prestressed concrete I-girders, bulb-tee girders, and deck bulb-tee girders,
the edge of the bearing pad shall be set 1 in. in side of the edge of the girder
bottom flange.
3. For all prestressed concrete tub girders, the edge of the bearing shall be set 1in.
inside of the edge of the bottom slab. Bearing pads for prestressed concrete tub
girders shall be centered close to the centerline of each web.
4. For all prestressed concrete slabs, one bearing pad and corresponding grout
pad is required for each end of the prestressed concrete slab. The centerline
of the bearing and grout pad shall coincide with the centerline of the
prestressed concrete slab. The need for steel shims shall be assessed during the
bearingdesign.
As mentioned earlier, LRFD Article 14.4.2.1 requires that a 0.005 radian allowance
for uncertainties be included in the design of steel reinforced elastomeric bearings.
This allowance applies to both rotations x and y. The LRFD Article 14.4.2
Commentary states "An owner may reduce the fabrication and setting tolerance
allowances if justified by a suitable quality control plan; therefore, these tolerance
limits are stated as recommendations rather than absolute limits." Consult with
the Bearings and Expansion Joint Specialist in instances in which the 0.005 radian
tolerance precludes convergence to a reasonable design solution.
In order to facilitate compressive load testing, future bearing replacement, and
vertical geometry coordination, the following table shall be included in the Plans:
2 (.14.10) T
=
L
.08 T
=
L
T = 12.5 L
Where = rotation due to loading plus construction tolerances
L = pad length (parallel to longitudinal axis of beam)
T = fabric pad thickness required
Design Example:
Given:DL + LL = 240 kips
Rotation = 0.015 radians
Allowable bearing pad pressure = 1200 psi
c = 3000 psi
Find: fabric pad plan area and thickness required
Conclusion:
Pad area required = 240,000/1200 = 200 in2
Try a 20 wide 10 long fabric pad
T = 12.5(.015)(10) = 1.88
Solution: Use a 20 10 1 fabric pad.
2. PTFE
Stainless Steel Sliding Surface Design PTFE shall be in. thick and
recessed 1/16 in. into a in. thick steel plate that is bonded to the top of the
fabric pad. With the PTFE confined in this recess, the LRFD code permits an
average contact stress of 4,500 psi for all loads calculated at the service limit
state and an average contact stress of 3,000 psi for permanent loads calculated
at the service limit state. The LRFD code permits slightly higher edge
contactstresses.
For example, suppose:
DL = 150 kips
LL = 90 kips
APTFE > (150 kips + 90 kips)/4.5 ksi = 53.3 in2
APTFE > 150 kips/3 ksi = 50.0 in2
Selected area of PTFE must exceed 53.3 in2
Stainless steel sheet shall be finished to a No. 8 (Mirror) finish and seal welded
to the soleplate.
C. Pin Bearings
Steel pin bearings are generally used to support heavy reactions with moderate to
high levels of rotation about a single predetermined axis. This situation generally
occurs with long straight steel plate girder superstructures.
D. Rocker and Roller Type Bearings
Steel rocker bearings have been used extensively in the past to allow both rotation
and longitudinal movement while supporting large loads. Because of their seismic
vulnerability and the more extensive use of steel reinforced elastomeric bearings,
rocker bearings are no longer specified for new bridges.
Steel roller bearings have also been used extensively in the past. Roller bearings
permit both rotation and longitudinal movement. Pintles are generally used to
connect the roller bearing to the superstructure above and to the bearing plate
below. Nested roller bearings have also been used in the past. Having been
supplanted by more economical steel reinforced elastomeric bearings, roller
bearings are infrequently used for new bridges today.
E. Spherical Bearings
A spherical bearing relies upon the low-friction characteristics of a curved PTFE
stainless steel interface to provide a high level of rotational flexibility in multiple
directions. An additional flat PTFEstainless steel surface can be incorporated
into the bearing to additionally provide either guided or non-guided translational
movement capability.
Woven PTFE is generally used on the curved surfaces of spherical bearings. Woven
PTFE exhibits enhanced creep (cold flow) resistance and durability characteristics
relative to unwoven PTFE. When spherical bearings are detailed to accommodate
translational movement, woven PTFE is generally specified on the flat sliding
surface also. The LRFD code permits an average contact stress of 4,500 psi for all
loads calculated at the service limit state and an average contact stress of 3,000 psi
for permanent loads calculated at the service limit state. The LRFD code permits
slightly higher edge contact stresses.
Both stainless steel sheet and solid stainless steel have been used for the convex
sliding surface of spherical bearings. According to one manufacturer, curved sheet
is generally acceptable for contact surface radii greater than 14 in to 18. in For
smaller radii, a solid stainless steel convex plate or a stainless steel inlay is used.
The inlay is welded to the solid conventional steel. If the total height of the convex
plate exceeds about 5 in, a stainless steel inlay will likely be more economical.
Most spherical bearings are fabricated with the concave surface oriented downward
to minimize dirt infiltration between PTFE and the stainless steel surface.
Structural analysis of the overall structure must recognize the center of rotation of
the bearing not being coincident with the neutral axis of the girder above.
The contract drawings must show the diameter and height of the spherical bearing
in addition to all dead, live, and seismic loadings. Total height depends upon the
radius of the curved surface, diameter of the bearing, and total rotational capacity
required. Consult the Bearing and Expansion Joint Specialist for design calculation
examples. Additionally, sole plate connections, base plate, anchor bolts, and any
appurtenances for horizontal force transfer must be detailed on the plans. The
spherical bearing manufacturer is required to submit shop drawings and detailed
structural design calculations of spherical bearing components for review by
theEngineer.
F. Disk Bearings
A disk bearing is composed of an annular shaped polyether urethane disk designed
to provide moderate levels of rotational flexibility. A steel shear-resisting pin in
the center provides resistance against lateral force. A flat PTFEstainless steel
surface can be incorporated into the bearing to also provide translational movement
capability, either guided or non-guided.
G. Seismic Isolation Bearings
Numerous seismic isolation bearings exist, each relying upon varying combinations
of dynamic isolation and energy dissipation. These devices include lead core
elastomeric bearings, high damping rubber, friction pendulum, hydraulic dampers,
and various hybrid variations.
Effective seismic isolation bearing design requires a thorough understanding
of the dynamic characteristics of the overall structure as well as the candidate
isolation devices. Isolation devices are differentiated by maximum compressive
load capacity, lateral stiffness, lateral displacement range, maximum lateral load
capacity, energy dissipation per cycle, functionality in extreme environments,
resistance to aging, fatigue and wear properties, and effects of size.
The Highway Innovative Technology Evaluation Center (HITEC) has developed
guidelines for testing seismic isolation and energy dissipating devices. With the
goal of disseminating objective information to design professionals, HITEC has
tested and published technical reports on numerous proprietary devices. These tests
include performance benchmarks, compressive load dependent characterization,
frequency dependent characterization, fatigue and wear, environmental aging,
dynamic performance at extreme temperatures, durability, and ultimate
performance.
9.2.6 Miscellaneous Details
A. Temporary Support before Grouting Masonry Plate
The masonry plate of a HLMR bearing is generally supported on a grout pad that is
installed after the bearing and superstructure girders above have been erected. This
procedure allows the Contractor to level and slightly adjust the horizontal location
of the bearing before immobilizing it by placing the grout pad. Several methods
have been developed to temporarily support the masonry plate until the grout is
placed. The two most commonly used methods will be discussed here.
1. Shim Packs
Multiple stacks of steel shim plates can be placed atop the concrete surface to
temporarily support the weight of the girders on their bearings before grouting.
Engineering judgment must be used in selecting the number and plan size of the
shims taking grout flowability and shim height adjustability into consideration.
2. Two-step Grouting with Cast Sleeves
A two-step grouting procedure with cast-in-place voided cores can be used
for smaller HLMRs not generally subjected to uplift. Steel studs are welded
to the underside of the masonry plate to coincide with the voided cores. With
temporary shims installed between the top of the concrete surface and the
underside of the masonry plate, the voided cores are fully grouted. Once the
first stage grout has attained strength, the shims are removed, the masonry plate
is dammed, and grout is placed between the top of the concrete surface and the
underside of the masonry plate.
B. Anchor Bolts
Anchor bolts shall be designed to resist all horizontal shear forces and direct
tension force due to uplift.
Anchor bolts shall be ASTM A 449 where strengths equal to ASTM A 325 are
required and ASTM A 354, Grade BD, where strengths equal to ASTM A 490 are
required. ASTM F 1554 bolts with supplemental Charpy test requirements shall be
specified in applications in which the bolts are subject to seismic loading.
9.2.7 Contract Drawing Representation
High load multi-rotational bearings are generally depicted schematically in the contract
drawings. Each bearing manufacturer has unique fabricating methods and procedures
that allow it to fabricate a bearing most economically. Depicting the bearings
schematically with loads and geometric requirements provides each manufacturer the
flexibility to innovatively achieve optimal economy.
9.2.8 Shop Drawing Review
The manufacturer designs and develops shop drawings for high load multi-rotational
bearings. The Engineer is responsible for checking and approving the calculations and
shop drawings. The calculations shall verify the structural adequacy of all components
of the bearing. Each bearing shall be detailed to permit the inspection and replacement
of components.
Expansion joints must accommodate seismic movements in order for seismic isolation
bearings to function properly. The effect of this increased movement upon expansion
joint demands shall be carefully considered. Modular expansion joints are generally
designed to accommodate longitudinal service movement only. Design of modular
expansion joints to accommodate longitudinal service movement is generally based
upon limiting the movement capacity per elastomeric seal to 3 inches maximum in
order to limit the fraction of wheel load imposed upon any one centerbeam and to
assure that elastomeric seals will not detach under service load conditions. Because the
fatigue limit state almost always controls centerbeam and support bar design, a larger
movement capacity per cell is acceptable to accommodate seismic movement provided
that 1) support bars and boxes are detailed to accommodate the increased movement
and 2) elastomeric seal detachment is acceptable. Standard modular expansion joints
are not designed to accommodate transverse bridge movements. Seismic modular
expansion joints must be used if transverse movement must also be accommodated.
9.3.2 General Design Criteria
Seismic isolation bearings shall be designed in accordance with the requirements
of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for Seismic Isolation Design. The response
modification factors (R-factors) contained in Article 6 shall not be used if the
provisions of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design are
being followed for the design of the bridge.
9.3.3 Seismic Isolation Bearing Submittal Requirements
The selected manufacturer shall develop and submit seismic isolation bearing
design calculations and shop drawings to WSDOT for review and approval. Design
calculations and shop drawings shall be based upon the loads, movement demands,
schematic details, and engineering requirements contained in the contract drawings
and Special Provisions. All suppliers are required to provide calculations and shop
drawings regardless of the contracting method or whether sole source procurement
has been approved. The use of seismic isolation bearings for WSDOT projects shall
fully comply with the requirements herein. A manufacturer's design report will not be
accepted in lieu of complying with the following five requirements:
A. Shop Drawings
Fully engineered shop drawings shall be submitted to document compliance with
contractual material and design requirements and to provide a baseline reference
for future engineering evaluation during the design life of the bridge. Shop
drawings shall clearly show all individual components, constituent materials,
connections, dimensions, surface finishes, coatings, and tolerances necessary to
fabricate components and fully assemble the bearing. Shop drawings do not need to
identify proprietary aspects of individual components or fabrication procedures (for
example, low-friction sliding material and its attachment to steel components).
B. Shop Drawings
The Engineer shall review the shop drawings to assure that
All shop drawings are stamped and signed.
Shop drawings include plan and elevation view of the assembled bearings and
details of each constituent component. Such details shall include all dimensions
and tolerances necessary to complete manufacturing.
All component materials shall be specified on the shop drawings and shall
conform with the requirements of the Special Provisions.
All component flatness tolerances and surface roughness requirements are
depicted on the shop drawings and are consistent with the Special Provisions.
All corrosion protection system details (galvanization, paint) for steel
components, bolts, and washers are designated on the shop drawings and are in
conformance with the Special Provisions and the Standard Specifications.
Bearings have been designed and detailed to accommodate full inspection
and removal and replacement of all components subject to wear or other
anticipateddamage.
Adequate clearances, including applicable tolerances, have been provided
between components in order to accommodate assembly and service
movements.
Positive connections are provided between all components to assure individual
components will not separate under unanticipated seismic movements.
All connections have been designed to accommodate loads shown on the
contractdrawings.
Shop drawings stipulate handling and storage requirements for both shipment
and jobsite storage.
Masonry and sole plate connections are integrated into the bearing design.
Specific directives are provided for setting the bearings as a function of the
bridge temperature. These directives shall include a rational method for
assessing the temperature of the superstructure.
Grouting procedure and temporary shim requirements underneath the masonry
plate are clearly depicted on the shop drawings.
Shop drawings stipulate that all bearings shall be marked for location and
orientation as required by the Special Provisions
E. Ice Loads
A 3 psf ice load may be applied around all the surfaces of structural supports,
horizontal members, and luminaires, but applied to only one face of sign panels
(Section 3.7, AASHTO 2015).
Walk-through VMS shall not be installed in areas where appreciable snow loads
may accumulate ontop of the sign, unless positive steps are taken to prevent snow
build-up.
F. Fatigue Design
Fatigue design shall conform to AASHTO Section 11 with the exception of tube
shape. AASHTO does not provide fatigue calculations for shapes with less than
8 sides. Therefore in calculating the Constant Amplitude Fatigue Threshold, DT
(Table 11.9.3.1-2, AASHTO 2015) was taken to be the larger outer flat to flat
distance of the rectangular tube. Fatigue Categories are listed in Table 11.6-1.
Overhead Cantilever and Bridge Sign and signal structures, high mast luminaires
(HMLT), poles, and bridge mounted sign brackets shall conform to the following
fatigue categories.
Fatigue Category I: Overhead cantilever sign structures (maximum span of 35 feet
and no VMS installation), overhead sign bridge structures, high level (high mast)
lighting poles 80 feet or taller in height, bridge-mounted sign brackets, and all
signal bridges. Also included is any structure on a roadway with a speed limit in
excess of 35 mph and an ADT exceeding 10,000 or ADTT exceeding 1,000.
Fatigue Category II: For structures not explicitly falling into Category I or III.
Fatigue Category III: Lighting poles 50feet or less in height with rectangular,
square or non-tapered round cross sections, and overhead cantilever traffic signals
at intersections (maximum cantilever length 65feet). Where vehicle speeds are
posted less than 35 mph or any structure where a failure will not affect traffic.
Sign bridges, cantilever sign structures, signal bridges, and overhead cantilever
traffic signals mounted on bridges shall be either attached to substructure elements
(e.g., crossbeam extensions) or tothe bridge superstructure at pier locations.
Mounting these features to bridges as described above will help to avoid resonance
concerns between the bridge structure and the signing or signal structure.
The XYZ limitation shown in Table 10.1.4-2 shall be met for Monotube
Cantilevers. The XYZ limitation consists of the product of the sign area (XY)
and the arm from the centerline of the posts tothe centerline of the sign (Z). See
Appendix 10.1-A2-1 for details.
G. Live Load
A live load consisting of a single load of 500 lb distributed over 2.0feet
transversely to themember shall be used for designing members for walkways and
platforms. The load shall be applied at the most critical location where a worker or
equipment could be placed, see AASHTO 2015, Section3.6.
B. Geometrics
1. Signs shall be installed at approximate right angles to approaching motorists.
For structures above a tangent section of roadway, signs shall be designed to
provide a sign skew within 5 fromperpendicular to the lower roadway (see
Figure 10.1.2-2).
Sign Skew on Tangent Roadway
Figure 10.1.2-2
Figure 10.1.2-4
C. Aesthetics
1. The support structure shall not extend beyond the limits of the sign unless the
extension isunavoidable.
2. The sign support shall be detailed in such a manner that will permit the sign
and lighting bracket to be installed level.
3. When the sign support will be exposed to view, special consideration is
required in determining member sizes and connections to provide as pleasing
an appearance as possible.
D. Sign Placement
1. Signs shall not be placed under bridge overhangs. This causes partial shading
or partial exposure to the elements and problems in lifting the material into
position and making the required connections. Signs shall never be placed
directly under the dripline of the structure. These conditions may result in
uneven fading, discoloring, and difficulty in reading.
2. A minimum of 2 inches of clearance shall be provided between back side of the
sign support andedge of the bridge. See Figure10.1.2-5.
Sign Horizontal Location
Figure 10.1.2-5
E. Installation
1. Resin bonded anchors or cast-in-place ASTM F593 Group 1 Condition A
anchor rods shall be used to install the sign brackets on the structure. Size
and minimum installation depth shall be given in the plans or specifications.
Theresin bonded anchors shall be installed normal to the concrete surface.
Resin bonded anchors shall not be placed through the webs or flanges of
prestressed or post-tensioned girders unless approved by the WSDOT Bridge
Design Engineer. Resin bonded anchors shall not be used at overhead locations
other than with horizontal hole/anchor alignment.
2. Bridge mounted sign structures shall not be placed on bridges with steel
superstructures unless approved by the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
Note: Denotes Main Load Carrying Tensile Members Or Tension Components Of Flexural Members.
Table 10.1.4-2
10.1.5 Foundations
A. Monotube Sign Bridge and Cantilever Sign Structure Foundation Types
The foundation type is to be used shall be based on the geotechnical investigation
performed and geotechnical report completed by the geotechnical engineer of
record. Standard foundation designs for standard plan truss-type sign structures
are provided in WSDOT Standard Plans G-60.20 and G-60.30 and G-70.20
and G-70.30. Monotube sign structure foundations are Bridge Design Office
conventional designs and shall be as described in the following paragraphs:
1. Foundation Type 1, a drilled shaft, is the preferred foundation type. The
Bridge Design Office conventional sign structure drilledshafts are designed
for a lateral bearing pressure of 2,500 psf. See Bridge Standard Drawings
10.1A41 for shaft and 10.1-A42 shaft cap for Foundation Type 1 standard
design information. The Geotech report forthisfoundation should include the
soil friction angle and if temporary casing is required for shaftconstruction, in
additional to the allowable lateral bearing pressures. When temporary casing is
specified in the geotechnical report, it shall be clearly shown on shaft plans, for
each requiredshaft.
2. Foundation Type 2 is an alternate to Type 1 when drilled shafts are not suitable
to the site. Foundation Type 2 is designed for a lateral bearing pressure of
2,500psf. See Appendix10.1A43 for Foundation Type 2 Bridge Design
Office conventional designinformation.
3. Foundation Type 3 replaces the foundation Type 2 for poor soil conditions
where the lateral bearing pressure is between 2,500 psf and 1,500 psf. See
Bridge Standard Drawing10.1-A4-3 for Type3 Foundation Bridge Design
Office conventional design information.
4. Barrier Shape Foundations are foundations that include a barrier shape cap on
the top portion of Foundation Types 1, 2, and 3. Foundation details shall be
modified to include Barrier Shape Cap details. Appendix10.1-A5-1 details a
single slope barrier.
B. Luminaire, Signal Standard, and Camera Pole Foundation Types
Luminaire foundation options are shown on Standard Plan J-28.30. Signal Standard
and Camera Pole foundation options are provided on Standard Plans J-26.10 and
J-29.10 respectively.
C. Foundation Design
Shaft type foundations constructed in soil for sign bridges, cantilever sign
structures, luminaires, signal standards and strain poles are designed in accordance
with the current edition of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals; Section 13.10; Embedment of Lightly
Loaded Small Poles And Posts. This design method assumes the presence of
uniform soil properties with depth, including a single value for Allowable Lateral
Bearing Pressure. For foundation locations with multiple soil layers within the
anticipated foundation depth (and multiple values of allowable lateral bearing
pressure), consideration should be given to using a single weighted average
value of allowable lateral bearing pressure for design. For foundation locations
where a soft soil (with low allowable lateral bearing pressures) is overlaid by a
stronger soil (with higher allowable lateral bearing pressures), the foundation can
be conservatively designed for the lower allowable lateral bearing pressure value.
This design method accounts for the lateral loads applied to the foundation due
to the soil pressure (increasing with depth) and the lateral loads applied from the
structure above. An additional increase in lateral resistance should not be added for
increasing soil lateral pressures with depth.
No provisions for foundation torsional capacity are provided in Section 10.13 of
the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic
Signals. The following approach can be used to calculate torsional capacity of sign
structure, luminaire, and signal standardfoundations:
Torsional Capacity, Tu,
Tu = F*tanD 10.1.5(1)
Where:
F = Total force normal to shaft surface (kip)
D = Diameter of shaft (feet)
= Soil friction angle (degree), use smallest for variable soils
3. Monotube Sign Bridge and Cantilever Structures Bridge Design Office Non-
Conventional Design Foundations
The Geotechnical Engineer of record shall identify conditions where the
foundation types (1, 2, or 3) will not work. In this case, the design forces are
calculated, using the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports
for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals, and applied at the bottom
of the structure base plate. These forces are then considered service loads
and the non-conventional design foundation is designed with the appropriate
Service, Strength, and Extreme Load Combination Limit States and current
design practices of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and this
manual. Some examples of these foundations are spread footings, columns
and shafts that extend above ground adjacent to retaining walls, or connections
to traffic barriers on bridges. The anchor rod array shall be used from Tables
10.1.4-1 and 10.1.4-2 and shall be long enough to develop the rods into the
confined concrete core of the foundation. The rod length and the reinforcement
for concrete confinement, shown in the top fourfeet of the Foundation Type 1,
shall be used as aminimum.
4. Signal Foundation Design
The traffic signal standard GSPs under Section8-20 shall apply for foundations
in substandard soils.
D. Foundation Quantities
1. Barrier quantities are approximate and can be used for all Foundation Types:
Class 4000 Concrete 7.15 CY (over shaft foundation)
Grade 60 Rebar 372 lbs
2. Miscellaneous steel quantities (anchor rods, anchor plate, and template) for all
Monotube Sign Structure foundation types are listed below (per foundation).
Quantities vary with span lengths asshown.
60feet and under = 1,002 pounds
61feet to 90feet = 1,401 pounds
91feet to 120feet = 1,503 pounds
121feet to 180feet Barrier mounted sign bridge not recommended
for these spans.
3. Monotube Sign Bridge and Cantilever Sign Structure Type 1-3 Foundation
quantities for concrete, rebar and excavation are given in Table 10.1.5-1. For
Sign Bridges, the quantities shown below are for one foundation and there are
two foundations per Sign Bridge. If the depth Z shown in the table on Bridge
Standard Drawing10.1-A4-1 is increased, these values should be recalculated.
SL-1 Weak Post Texas T-411
Figure 10.2.3-1
C. Traffic Barrier 32 Shape F (TL-4)
This configuration was crash tested in the late 1960s, alongwith the New Jersey
Shape, under NCHRP 230 and again at this test level under NCHRP 350. The
steeper vertical shape tested better than the New Jersey face and had less of
an inclination to roll vehicles over upon impact. For future deck overlays, an
encroachment of 2.0 in., leaving a 1.0 in. lip has been satisfactorily tested for safety
shapes, see AASHTO Article C13.7.3.2. For complete details see Bridge Standard
Drawings 10.2-A1 and 10.2-A2.
32 F-Shape 34 Single Slope
Figure
10.2.3-2
32 Vertical Oregon 3-Tube
Figure 10.2.3-3
42 F-Shape
42 Single Slope
Figure 10.2.3-4
In order to prevent this unnecessary overdesign of the deck overhang, the nominal
traffic barrier resistance to transverse load RW (AASHTO LRFD A13.3.1)
transferred from the traffic barrier to deck overhang shall not exceed 120 percent
of the design force Ft (AASHTO LFRD Table A13.2-1) required for a traffic
barrier. The deck overhang shall be designed in accordance with the requirements
of AASHTO LRFD A13.4.2 to provide a flexural resistance Ms, acting coincident
with the tensile force T. At the inside face of the barrierMs may be taken as:
Rw H
for an interior barrier segmentMs =
LC + 2 H
Rw H
and for an end barrier segmentMs =
LC + H
However, Ms need not be taken greater than Mc at the base. T shall be taken as:
Rw
for an interior barrier segmentT =
LC + 2 H
Rw
and for an end barrier segmentT = LC + H
The end segment requirement may be waived if continuity between adjacent
barriers is provided.
When an HMA overlay is required for initial construction, increase the weight for
Shape F traffic barrier. See Section 10.2.4.C for details.
B. Geometry
The traffic face geometry is part of the crash test and shall not be modified.
Contact the WSDOT Bridge and Structure Office Bridge Rail Specialist for
furtherguidance.
Thickening of the traffic barrier is permissible for architectural reasons. Concrete
clear cover must meet minimum concrete cover requirements but can be increased
to accommodate rustication grooves orpatterns.
C. Standard Detail Sheet Modifications
When designing and detailing a bridge traffic barrier on asuperelevated bridge
deck the following guidelines shall be used:
For bridge decks with a superelevation of 8 percent or less, the traffic
barriers (and the median barrier, if any) shall be oriented perpendicular to the
bridgedeck.
For bridge decks with a superelevation of more than 8 percent, the traffic
barrier on the low side of the bridge (and median barrier, if any) shall be
oriented perpendicular to an 8 percent superelevated bridge deck. For this
situation, the traffic barrier on the high side of the bridge shall be oriented
perpendicular to the bridge deck.
The standard detail sheets are generic and may need to be modified for each
project. The permissible modifications are:
Removal of the electrical conduit, junction box, and deflection fitting details.
Removal of design notes.
If the traffic barrier does not continue on to a wall, remove W1 and W2 rebar
references.
Removal of the non-applicable guardrail end connection details and verbiage.
If guardrail is attached to the traffic barrier, use either the thrie beam end
section Design F detail orthe w-beam end section Design F detail. If the
traffic barrier continues off the bridge, approach slab, or wall, remove the
following:
Guardrail details from all sheets.
Conduit end flare detail.
Modified end section detail and R1A or R2A rebar details from all sheets.
End section bevel.
Increase the 3 toe dimension of the Shape F traffic barriers up to 6 to
accommodate HMAoverlays.
June 2016
Interior End*
Interior End* Interior End* Interior End* Interior End* Interior End*
Chapter 10
*Traffic barrier cross sectional dimensions and reinforcement used for calculation of end segment parameters are the same as interior segments (except TL-5 Single Slope 42 in . barrier
where end section reinforcement differs from interior segments) . Parameters for modified end segments shall be calculated per AASHTO-LRFD article A13 .3, A13 .4, and the WSDOT BDM .
**a = 1 for an end segment and 2 for an interior segment
Loads are based on vehicle impact only . For deck overhang design, the designer must also check other limit states per LRFD A13 .4 .1 .
fv = 60 ksi
f'c = 4 ksi
Table 10.2.4-1
Page 10-25
Signs, Barriers, Approach Slabs, and Utilities
Signs, Barriers, Approach Slabs, and Utilities Chapter 10
5. The length of the concrete barrier required for stability shall be no more than
10times the overall height limited to the length between barrier expansion
joints (or one precast section). The barrier shall act as a rigid body behavior
and shall be continuous throughout this length of barrier. Any coupling between
adjacent barrier sections or friction that may exist between free edges of barrier
and the surrounding soil shall be neglected.
6. A special impact analysis shall be performed at the barrier ends if the barrier
terminates without being connected to a rigid object or dowelled to another
barrier. Differential barrier deflection from barrier impact may cause a vehicle
to snag on the undeflected barrier. The barrier depth may need to be increased
at the end to prevent this deflection.
7. The differential grade traffic barrier shall have dummy joints at 8 to 12 foot
centers based on projectrequirements.
8. Full depth expansion joints with shear dowels at the top will be required at
intervals based on analysis but not to exceed a 120-0 maximum spacing.
9. Barrier bottom shall be embedded a minimum 6 below roadway. Roadway
subgrade and ballast shall be extended below whole width of differential grade
barrier.
Median traffic barriers with a grade difference greater than 4-0 shall be designed
as standard plan retaining walls with a traffic barrier at the top and a barrier shape
at the cut face.
10.3.2 Traffic Barrier Moment Slab
A. General
The guidelines provided herein are based on NCHRP Report 663 with the
exception that a resistance factor of 0.5 shall be used to determine rotational
resistance. This guideline is applicable for TL-3, TL-4, and TL-5 barrier systems as
defined in Section 13 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge DesignSpecifications.
Ls = 10 K Static Equivalent for Ls = 23 K Static Equivalent for
TL3 and TL4 Barriers TL5 Barriers
W
ha = Moment Arm La
Top of Barrier to
Point of Rotations Pavement Overburden
C.G.
A = Point of Rotation
Compacted Backfill
P
Varies with Wall Type
Lw
The torsional rigidity constant for moment slabs shall be based on a solid
rectangle using the followingformula:
Where:
2a = total width of moment slab
2b = average depth of moment slab
For example:
Minimum Moment Slab Width = 48 inches: a = 24 inches
Minimum Moment Slab Average Depth = 10 inches: b = 5 inches
J = J60 = 13,900 in4
P = W tan r (2)
Where:
W = weight of the monolithic section of barrier and moment slab between
joints or assumed length of rigid body behavior whichever is less,
plus any material laying on top of the moment slab
r = friction angle of the soil on the moment slab interface ()
If the soil-moment slab interface is rough (e.g., cast in place), r is equal to the
friction angle of the soil s. If the soil-moment slab interface is smooth (e.g.,
precast), tan r shall be reduced accordingly (0.8tan s).
The moment contribution due to any coupling between adjacent moment slabs,
shear strength of the overburden soil, or friction which may exist between the
backside of the moment slab and the surrounding soil shall be neglected.
C. Guidelines for the Soil Reinforcement
Design of the soil reinforcement shall be in accordance with the Geotechnical
Design Manual Chapter15.
D. Design of the Wall Panel
The wall panels shall be designed to resist the dynamic pressure distributions as
defined in the Geotechnical Design Manual Chapter15.
The wall panel shall have sufficient structural capacity to resist the maximum
design rupture load for the wall reinforcement designed in accordance with the
Geotechnical Design Manual Chapter15.
The static load is not included because it is not located at the panel connection.
Depending on the type and number of other roadway features present at the bridge
site (such as approach curbs and barriers, drainage structures, sidewalks, utilities
and conduit pipes) or special construction requirements such as staged construction,
other questions in the Notes to Region pertaining to the bridge approach slabs may
beappropriate.
Special staging conditions exist when the abutment skew is greater than 30 and for
wide roadway widths. This includes bridge widenings with (or without) existing
bridge approach slabs. The preliminary plan should include details showing how these
conditions are being addressed for the bridge approach slabs, and the designer shall
include appropriate questions in the Notes to Region asking for concurrence with the
proposeddesign.
10.6.2 Bridge Approach Slab Design Criteria
The standard bridge approach slab design is based on the following criteria:
1. The bridge approach slab is designed as a slab in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD. (StrengthLimit State, IM = 1.33, no skew).
2. The support at the roadway end is assumed to be a uniform soil reaction with
abearing length thatisapproximately the length of the approach slab, or
25/3=8.
3. The Effective Span Length (Seff), regardless of approach length, is assumed to be:
25 approach 8 = 17
4. Longitudinal reinforcing bars do not require modification for skewed approaches
up to 30 degrees orfor slablengths greater than 25.
5. The approach slab is designed with a 2 concrete cover to the bottom reinforcing.
10.6.3 Bridge Approach Slab Detailing
The bridge approach slab and length along center line of project shall be shown in the
Plan View ofthe Bridge Layout sheet. The Bridge Plans will also include approach
slab information as shown onPlanSheets 10-A1-1, 10-A1-2, and 10-A1-3. The
Approach Slab Plan sheets should be modified as appropriate to match the bridge site
conditions. Approach slab Plan Views shall be customized for the specific project and
all irrelevant details shall be removed.
Plan View dimensions shall define the plan area of the approach slab. The minimum
dimension from the bridge is 25. If there are skewed ends, then dimensions shall
be provided for each side of the slab, or a skew angle and one side, in addition to
the width. For slabs on a curve, the length along the project line and the width shall
beshown.
Similar to Bridge Traffic Barrier detailing, approach slab steel detailing shall show
size, spacing, and edge clearance. The number and total spaces can be determined by
the contractor. If applicable, the traffic barrier AS1 and AS2 along with the extra top
transverse bar in the slab shall be shown in the Plan View. AS1 bars shall be epoxy
coated. Also remember that the spacing of the AS1 bars decreases near joints. When
the skew is greater than 20 degrees, then AP8 bars shall be rotated at the acute corners
of the bridge approachslab.
Bending diagrams shall be shown for all custom reinforcement. All Bridge Approach
Slab sheets will have the AP2 and AP7 bars. If there is a traffic barrier, then AP8, AS1,
and AS2 bars shall be shown.
Additional layout and details may be required to address special roadway features and
construction requirements such as: roadway curbs and barriers, sidewalks, utilities and
conduits and staging.
Thismeans, if sidewalks and interior barriers (such as traffic-
pedestrian barriers) are present, special details will be required in the Bridge Plans to
For all skewed abutments, the roadway end of
the bridge approach slab shall be
normal to the roadway centerline. The Bridge Design Engineer shall be consulted
when approach slab skew is greater than 30 degrees. Skews greater than 20 degrees
require analysis to verify the bottom mat reinforcement, and may require expansion
jointmodifications.
The roadway end of the approach may be stepped to reduce the size or to accommodate
staging construction widths. A general rule of thumb is that if the approach slab area
can be reduced by 50SY or more, then the slab shall be stepped. At no point shall the
roadway end of the approach slab be closer than 25 to the bridge. These criteria apply
existing bridge approach slabs. If stepped, thedesign shall provide
to both new and
the absolute minimum number of steps and the longitudinal construction joint shall be
located on a lane line. See Figure 10.6.4-1
for clarification.
Skewed Approach ~ Typical Skewed Approach ~ Stepped
Skewed Approach
Figure 10.6.4-1
Page 10-40 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 10 Signs, Barriers, Approach Slabs, and Utilities
In addition, for bridges with traffic barriers and skews greater than 20 degrees, the
AP8 bars shall be rotated inthe acute corners of the bridge approach slabs. Typical
placement is shown in the flared corner steel detail, Figure 10.6.4-2.
L Type Abutment Anchor Detail
Figure 10.6.5-1
PCCP Roadway Dowel Bar Detail
Figure 10.6.6-2
Alternate Longitudinal Joint Detail
Figure 10.6.6-3
Figure 10.7-1
Signs, Barriers, Approach Slabs, and Utilities
Figure 10.7.1-1
June 2016
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
Chapter 10
Chapter 10 Signs, Barriers, Approach Slabs, and Utilities
Figure 10.7.2-1
Figure 10.7.2-2
General Notes
All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the requirements of the state of
Washington, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and
Municipal Construction, current edition. The utility conduits shall be labeled in accordance with
Section 6-01.10.
All steel in utility supports, including fastenings and anchorages, shall be galvanized in accordance
with AASHTO M-111 or M-232 (ASTM A-123 or A-153 respectively).
All utilities and utility support surfaces, including any galvanized utilities, shall be given a primer
coat of state standard formula A-6-86 and two coats of state standard formula C-9-86. The final
coat shall match the bridge color.
Galvanized metal or aluminum utilities completely hidden from public view may be exempted from
the above painting requirements.
Any painted surfaces damaged during construction shall be cleaned and painted as noted above.
Appearance of the utility installation shall be given serious consideration in all cases. Where
possible, the utility installation shall be hidden from public view.
The notes and criteria explained here are presented as a guide only. Each proposed utility
installation shall be submitted to the Department of Transportation for approval on an
individual basis. Compliance with these criteria does not assure approval, nor does
variance from these criteria, for reasonable cause, necessarily exclude approval.
Design Criteria
1. Pipelines carrying volatile fluids through a bridge superstructure shall be designed by the
utility company in accordance with WAC 480-93, Gas Companies - Safety, and Minimum
Federal Safety Standard, Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Section part 192. WAC
468-34-210, Pipelines - Encasement, describes when casing is required for carrying volatile
fluids across structures. Generally, casing is not required for pipelines conveying natural gas
per the requirements of WAC 468-34-210. If casing is required, then WAC 468-34-210 and
WAC 480-93-115 shall be followed.
2. Utilities shall not be attached above the bridge deck nor attached to railing or rail posts.
3. Utilities shall not extend below bottom of superstructure.
Exhibit "
"
Permit/Franchise
DOT Form 224-047 EF
Revised 5/10 Page of
4.
The utilities shall be provided with suitable expansion devices near bridge expansion joints
and/or other locations as required to prevent temperature and other longitudinal forces from
being transferred
General Notes and to bridge
Designmembers
Criteria
. for Utility Installations to Existing Bridges
5. Rigid conduit shall extend 10 feetWSDOT Form 224-047
(3 meters) minimum, beyond the end of the bridge
abutment. Figure 10.8.1-1
6. Utility supports shall be designed such that neither the conduit, the supports, nor the bridge
members are overstressed by any loads imposed by the utility installation.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 10-49
June 2016 7. Utility locations and supports shall be designed so that a failure (rupture, etc.) will not result in
damage to the bridge, the surrounding area, or be a hazard to traffic.
Signs, Barriers, Approach Slabs, and Utilities Chapter 10
Exhibit
" "
Permit/Franchise
DOT Form 224-047 EF
Revised 5/10 Page of
4. The utilities shall be provided with suitable expansion devices near bridge expansion joints
and/or other locations as required to prevent temperature and other longitudinal forces from
being transferred to bridge members.
5. Rigid conduit shall extend 10 feet (3 meters) minimum, beyond the end of the bridge
abutment.
6. Utility supports shall be designed such that neither the conduit, the supports, nor the bridge
members are overstressed by any loads imposed by the utility installation.
7. Utility locations and supports shall be designed so that a failure (rupture, etc.) will not result in
damage to the bridge, the surrounding area, or be a hazard to traffic.
8. Conduit shall be rigid.
(Items 1 through 8 may be cross-referenced with Bridge Design Manual, Utilities Section.)
9. Lag screws may be used for attaching brackets to wooden structures. All bolt holes shall meet
the requirements of Sections 6-04.3(4) and 6-04.3(5) of the Washington State Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, current
edition.
10. Welding across main members will not be permitted. All welding must be approved.
11. Utilities shall be located to minimize bridge maintenance and bridge inspection problems.
12. Attach conduits or brackets to the concrete superstructure with resin bond anchors. Lag
screws shall not be used for attachment to concrete.
13. Drilling through reinforcing steel will not be permitted. If steel is hit when drilling, the
anchorage location must be moved and the abandoned hole filled with nonshrink grout
conforming to the requirements of Section 9-20.3(2) and placement shall be as required in
Section 6-02.3(20) of the Washington State Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, current edition.
14. There shall be a minimum of 3 inches (80 millimeters) edge distance to the center line of bolt
holes in concrete.
15. All utilities and utility supports shall be designed not only to support their dead load but to
resist other forces from the utility (surge, etc.) and wind and earthquake forces. The utility
company may be asked to submit one set of calculations to verify their design forces.
16. Drilling into prestressed concrete members for utility attachments shall not be allowed.
17. Water or sewer lines to be placed lower than adjacent bridge footings shall be encased if
failure can cause undermining of the footing.
Exhibit "
"
Permit/Franchise
DOT Form 224-047 EF
Revised 5/10 Page of
General Notes and Design Criteria for Utility Installations to Existing Bridges (continued)
WSDOT Form 224-047
Figure 10.8.1-1
design shall carefully locate pipe expansion joints and the corresponding longitudinal
load-carrying support.
Electrical conduits that use PVC shall have an expansion device for every 100 foot of
pipe due tothe higher coefficient of expansion. If more than two joints are specified, a
cable or expansion limiting device is required to keep the ends from separating.
Utility Blockouts Blockouts shall be provided in all structural members that
prohibit the passage of utilities, such as girder end diaphragms, pier crossbeams,
and intermediate diaphragms. These blockouts shall be large enough to fit deflection
fittings, and shall be parallel to the utility. For multiple utilities, anote shall be added
to the plans that the deflection fittings shall be staggered such that no fitting is located
adjacent to another, or the blockouts shall be designed to fit both fittings. Expansion
fittings shallbe staggered.
Gas Lines or Volatile Fluids Pipelines carrying volatile fluids through a bridge
superstructure shall be designed by the utilitycompany in accordance with WAC
480-93, Gas CompaniesSafety, and Minimum FederalSafety Standard, Title 49
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Section part 192. WAC 468-34-210, Pipelines
Encasement, describes when casing is required for carrying volatile fluids across
structures. Generally, casing is not required for pipelines conveying natural gas per the
requirements of WAC 468-34-210. If casing is required, then WAC 468-34-210 and
WAC 480-93-115 shall befollowed.
Water Lines Transverse support or bracing shall be provided for all water lines to
carry Strength and Extreme Event Lateral Loading. Fire control piping is a special
case where unusual care must be taken to handle the inertial loads and associated
deflections. The Utility Engineer shall be involved in the design of supports resisting
dynamic action loads and deflections.
In box girders (closed cell), a rupture of a water line will generally flood a cell before
emergency response can shut down the water main. This shall be designed for as an
Extreme Event II load case, where the weight of water is a dead load (DC). Additional
weep holes or open grating shall be considered to offset this Extreme Event (see
Figure10.8.3-1). Full length casing extending 10-feet beyond the end of the bridge
approach slab shall be considered as an alternate to additional weep holes or open
grating.
Sewer Lines Normally, an appropriate encasement pipe is required for sewer lines
on bridges. Sewer lines shall meet the same design criteria as waterlines. See the utility
agreement or the Hydraulic Section for types of sewer pipe material typically used.
Electrical (Power and Communications) Telephone, television cable, and power
conduit shall be galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (RGS) or Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride
Conduit (PVC). Where such conduit is buried in concrete curbs or barriers or has
continuous support, such support is considered to be adequate. Where hangers or
brackets support conduit at intervals, the maximum distance between supports shall be
5feet.
Concrete Utility Supports
Figure 10.8.3-1
The galvanized steel conduit shall be wrapped with corrosion resistant tape at least one
foot inside and outside of the concrete structure, and this requirement shall be so stated
on the plans. The corrosion resistant tape shall be 3M Scotch 50, Bishop 5, Nashua
AVI10, or approved equal. The usual location ofthe conduit throughout the remainder
of the bridge should be in the trafficbarrier.
Pull boxes shall be provided within the barrier for each conduit at each end of the
bridge and at a maximum spacing of 180feet. For fiber optics only, spacing shall not
exceed 360feet. The pull box size shall conform to the specifications of the National
Electric Code or bea minimum of 8inches by 8inches by 18 inches to facilitate
pulling of wires. Galvanized steel pull boxes (or junctions boxes) shall meet the
specifications of the NEMA Type 4X standard for stationary-form barrier, shall meet
the specifications of the NEMA 3R and be adjustable in depth for slip form barrier,
and the NEMA junction box type shall be stated on the plans. Stainless steel pull boxes
may be used as an option to the galvanizedsteel.
In the case of existing bridges, an area 2feet in width shall be reserved for conduit
beginning at a point either 4feet or 6feet outside the face of usable shoulder. The
fastening for and location of attaching the conduit to the existing bridge shall be
worked out on a job-by-job basis.
10.8.5 Conduit Types
All electrical conduits shall be galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (RGS) or Rigid
Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC).
Steel Pipe All pipe and fittings shall be galvanized except for special uses.
PVC Pipe PVC pipe may be used with suitable considerations for deflection,
placement of expansion fittings, and of freezing water within the conduits. PVC pipe
shall not be placed in concrete traffic barriers when the slip form method is used due to
damage and pipe separation that often occurs during concrete placement.
10.8.6 Utility Supports
The following types of supports are generally used for various utilities. Selection of
a particular support type shall be based on the needs of the installation and the best
economy. All utility installations shall address temperature expansion in the design of
the system or expansion devices.
Utility supports shall be designed so that a failure will not result in damage to the
bridge, the surrounding area, or be a hazard to traffic. Utility supports shall be designed
so that any loads imposed by the utility installation do not overstress the conduit,
supports, bridge structure, or bridgemembers.
Designs shall provide longitudinal and transverse support for loads from gravity,
earthquakes, temperature, inertia, etc. It is especially important to provide transverse
and longitudinal support for inserts that cannot resistmoment.
The Bridge Engineer shall request calculations from the utility company for any
attachment detail that may be questionable. Utility attachments, which exert moments
or large forces at the supports, shall be accompanied by at least one set of calculations
from the utility company. Bridge attachments designed to resist surge forces shall
always be accompanied by calculations.
Concrete Embedment This is the best structural support condition and offers
maximum protection to the utility. Its cost may be high for larger conduit and the
conduit cannot bereplaced.
Pipe Hangers Utility lines shall be suspended by means of cast-in-place inserts,
whenever possible. This is the most common type of support for utilities to be hung
under the bridge deck. This allows the use of standard cast-in-place inserts and is
very flexible in terms of expansion requirements. For heavy pipes over traffic (10
water main or larger), a Safety Factor of 1.5 should be used to resist vertical loads
for Strength Design. This is to avoid complete failure of the utility hanger system by
failure of one hanger. Vertical inserts will not provide resistance to longitudinalforces.
Longitudinal and transverse supports shall be provided for ITS conduits. Vertical
supports shall be spaced at 5 foot maximum intervals for telephone and power
conduits, and at a spacing to resist design loads for all other utilities.
When 3/4 or 7/8 diameter hanger rods are suspended from cast-in-place inserts, at
least three of the following inserts shall be identified: Cooper B-Line B22-I Series,
Unistrut 3200 Series, Powerstrut 349Series, Halfen HT5506 or similar. The specific
cast-in-place insert within each series shall be identified based on the required length
of insert. The cast-in-place insert shall be at least 6 long and hot dipped galvanized
inaccordance with AASHTO M 111 or AASHTO M 232.
The insert shall not interfere with reinforcement in the bridge deck. The inserts shall
be installed level longitudinally and transversely. When the superelevation of the
roadway is not significant, a single, long insert may be used to support multiple hanger
rods. When the superelevation becomes significant, a single insert may be used for
eachhanger.
Occasionally large diameter utilities require pipe rolls that only fit on 1 diameter
hanger rods. When 1 diameter hanger rods are required, the Anvil Fig. 286 insert shall
be used. The designer shall only specify this insert when absolutely necessary.
The Bridge Engineer shall verify that the cast-in-place insert has sufficient capacity
tosupport the loads from the hanger rod.
Transverse supports may be provided by a second hanger extending from a girder or
by a brace against the girder. The Bridge Standard Drawing 10.8-A1-1 and 10.8-A1-2
depict typical utility support installations and placement at abutments anddiaphragms.
Transverse supports shall, at a minimum, be located at every other vertical support.
4. Write a letter of reply or email to the Region so a copy will be returned to you
indicating the package has been accepted and sent out.
5. Stamp and date the plans using the same date as shown on the letter of reply
oremail.
6. Create a file folder with the following information:
a. Bridge no., name, utility company or utility type, and franchise or permit
number.
b. One set of approved plans and possibly one or two pages of the original
design plans if necessary for quick future reference. Previous transmittals
and plans not approved or returned to correction should be discarded to avoid
unnecessary clutter of the files.
c. Include the letter of submittal and a copy of the letter of reply or email after
ithas beenaccepted.
7. Give the complete package to the Design Unit Manager for review and place the
folder in the utility file after thereview.
Natural surveillance and access control strategies limit the opportunity for crime.
Territorial reinforcement promotes social control through a variety of measures.
These may include enhanced aesthetics or public art. Image/maintenance and
activity support provide the community with reassurance and the ability to stop
crime by themselves. Target hardening strategies may involve fencing or concrete
enclosures or they may include all techniques to resolve crime or chronic trespass
into one final step.
B. WSDOT implements FHWAs CSS design development principles through
Executive Order E1028. The CSS methods require designers to consider the
physical, economic, and social setting of a project. Stakeholders interests are to be
accounted for; including area residents and businessowners.
10.13.5.3 Design Criteria
New bridges need to address design for the environment by basic criteria:
Slopes under bridges need to be steep; around a 1:1 slope, and hardened with
something like solid concrete so that flat areas cannot be carved into the hillside.
Flat areas under bridge superstructures attract inappropriate uses and should
beomitted.
Illegal urban campers have been known to build shelters between the concrete
girders. Abutment walls need to be high enough that they deny access to the
superstructure elements. When it is not feasible to design for deterrence the
sites need to be hardened with fencing buried severalfeet into the soil or with
solid concrete walls. See Figures 14.2.3a and 14.2.3b for high security fence and
concrete wall examples.
Regular chain link is easy cut, therefore stouter material needs to be specified.
Landscape design should coordinate with region or headquarters landscape
architects. Areas need to be visible to law enforcement.
10.14 References
WSDOT Context Sensitive Solutions Executive Order E 1028
Newman, O. Defensible Space: Crime Prevention Through Urban Design. New York:
Macmillan.1972.
Jacobs, Jane. The Death and Life of Great American Cities. New York:
RandomHouse.1961.
Detailing Practice North arrow shall be placed on layouts and footing/foundation layouts. Chapter 11
Related details shall be grouped together in an orderly arrangement: lined up
horizontally and vertically and drawn to the same scale.
Office
Do inspection records
not crowd the forwith
drawing thedetails.
bridge, and the bridge layout orientation
and pier identification should be laid out to be consistent with the Bridge
The following is a standard sheet configuration when plan, elevation, and
Preservation Office inspectionrecords.
sectional views are required.
PLAN DETAILS
D. Lettering
1. General TITLE BLOCK
D. Design
Bridge Lettering Lettering
Manual M 23-50shall be upper case only, slanted at approximately 68 degrees.
PageGeneral
11-1
August 2006 text is to be approximately high.
1. General
Text shall be oriented so as to be read from the bottom or right edge of the
Lettering
sheet. shall be upper case only, slanted at approximately 68degrees.
General text is to be approximately high.
Detail titles shall be a similar font as general text, about twice as high and of a
Text
heavier be oriented
shallweight. so asalltotitles
Underline be read
with from bottom
theline
a single rightedge
havingorthe of the
same weight as
sheet.
the lettering.
Detail titlesnumber
The mark shall bebubble
a similarfor font as general
reinforcing steeltext,
shall about twice ashigh and
be a rectangle.
of a heavier weight. Underline all titles with a single linehaving the same
Epoxyascoated
weight reinforcement shall be noted by an E inside a triangle:
the lettering.
42 #6
2. Dimensioning
2. Dimensioning
A dimension shall be shown once on a drawing. Duplication and
unnecessary
A dimensiondimensions
shall be shownshould
oncebeonavoided.
a drawing. Duplication and unnecessary
dimensions should be avoided.
All dimension figures shall be placed above the dimension line, so that they
mayAll be read from
dimension the bottom
figures shall be or the right
placed aboveedge ofthe sheet,
the dimension line,assoshown in may
that they the
followingdetail:
be read from the bottom or
shown in the following detail: the right edge of the sheet, as shown in the following
detail:
OID
AV
1'-0"
"
1'-0
"0
1'-
1'-0 "
" 1'-0
1'-0" 1'-0"
AVOID DIMENSION LINES
INCLINED AS SHOWN ABOVE.
Reinforcing bar clearance need not be specified on the plans unless different from
the General Notes.
When details or structural elements are complex, utilize two drawings, one for
dimensions and the other for reinforcing bar details.
Dimensions 12 inches or more shall be given in feet and inches unless the item
dimensioned is conventionally designated in inches (for example, 16 pipe).
Dimensions that are less than one inch over an even foot, the fraction shall be
preceded by a zero (for example, 3-0).
Page 11-2 Place dimensions outside the view, preferably
WSDOTto the right
Bridge or below.
Design ManualHowever, in
M 23-50.16
the interest of clarity and simplicity it may be necessary to place them otherwise.
June 2016
Examples of dimensioning placement are shown on Appendix 11.1-A1.
Chapter 11 Detailing Practice
When details or structural elements are complex, utilize two drawings, one
for dimensions and the other for reinforcing bardetails.
Dimensions 12inches or more shall be given infeet and inches unless the
item dimensioned is conventionally designated in inches (for example,
16pipe).
Dimensions that are less than one inch over an even foot, the fraction shall
be preceded by azero (for example, 3-0).
Place dimensions outside the view, preferably to the right or below.
However, in the interest of clarity and simplicity it may be necessary to
place them otherwise. Examples of dimensioning placement are shown on
Appendix 11.1-A1.
Chapter 11 Detailing Practice
E. Line Work
E. Line Work
All line work must be of sufficient size, weight, and clarity so that it can be
All line work must be of sufficient size, weight, and clarity so that it can be easily
easily read from aprint that has been reduced to 11 17 or one-half the size
read from a print that has been reduced to 11 x 17 or one-half the size of the original
of the drawing.
original drawing.
The line style used for a particular structural outline, centerline, etc., shall be
The line style used for a particular structural outline, centerline, etc., shall be kept
kept consistent wherever that line is shown within aset of bridge plans.
consistent wherever that line is shown within a set of bridge plans.
Line work shall have appropriate gradations of width to give line contrast as
Line work shall have appropriate gradations of width to give line contrast as shown
shown below. Care shall be taken that the thin lines are dense enough to show
below. Care shall be taken that the thin lines are dense enough to show clearly when
clearly when reproduced.
reproduced.
Centerline Thin
Dimension Thin
Leader Thin
Break line Thin
Extension line Thin
Existing structure
Medium
reference line
Existing structure
Thin
hidden line
Hidden Medium
Rebar Medium
Section Heavy
Outline or
Heavy
visible line
When drawing structural sections showing reinforcing steel, the outline of the
sections shall be a heavier line weight than the rebar.
The order of line precedence (which of a pair of crossing lines is broken) is as
follows:
1. Dimension lines are never broken.
2. Leader line from a callout.
3. Extension line.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 11-3
June 2016
Detailing Practice Chapter 11
When drawing structural sections showing reinforcing steel, the outline of the
sections shall be aheavier line weight than therebar.
The order of line precedence (which of a pair of crossing lines isbroken) is as
follows:
1. Dimension lines are never broken.
2. Leader line from a callout.
Detailing Practice
3. Extension line. Chapter 11
F. F. Scale
Scale
Scales
Scales are
arenot
nottotobebeshown in in
shown thethe
plans.
plans.
When selectinga ascale,
When selecting scale, it should
it should be kept
be kept in mind
in mind thatdrawing
that the the drawing
will bewill be
reduced.
reduced.
Generally,Generally,
the minimum theminimum scale for
scale for a section a section
detail detail
with rebars with
is rebar
= 1. Theis =
minimum
1. scale to be
The minimum usedtoonbesteel
scale useddetails will details
on steel be =will
1. be = 1.
The contractplan
The contract plansheets
sheets
areare
notnot to used
to be be used to take
to take measurements
measurements in the inthe
field. field.
They will,
They will,however,
however,bebe
drawn
drawn using scales
using thatthat
scales can can
be found on any
be found onstandard
any standard
architectural or engineering scale.
architectural or engineering scale.
Care shouldbebetaken
Care should takenthat
that
allall structural
structural elements
elements are accurately
are accurately drawndrawn toscale.
to scale.
Sections andviews
Sections and viewsmaymaybebe enlarged
enlarged to show
to show moremore detail,
detail, butnumber
but the thenumber
of different
ofdifferent scalesbeused
scales used should keptshould be kept to a minimum.
to a minimum.
G. Graphic Symbols
1. Graphic symbols shall be in accordance with the following:
Page 11-4 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
a) Structural steel shapes: See also AISC Manual of Steel Construction. June 2016
b) Welding symbols: See Lincoln Welding Chart.
Chapter 11 Detailing Practice
G. Graphic Symbols
1. Graphic symbols shall be in accordance with the following:
a. Structural steel shapes: See also AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
b. Welding symbols: See Lincoln Welding Chart.
c. Symbols for hatching different materials are shown on Appendix 11.1-A2.
Chapter 11 Detailing Practice
H. Structural Sections, Views and Details
H. Structural
A section Sections,
cutsViews
throughandtheDetails
structure, a view is from outside the structure, a
Adetail
sectionshows astructural
cuts through elementa in
the structure, more
view detail
is from usually
outside a larger ascale.
the structure, detail
shows
Whenevera structural
possibleelement in more
Sections anddetail usually
views shall bea larger
takenscale.
looking tothe right,
ahead onpossible,
Whenever stationing, or down.
sections and views shall be taken looking to the right, ahead on
stationing,
Care shallorbedown. taken to ensure that the orientation of a detail drawing is
identical
Care shall betotaken
that of to the plan,
ensure thatelevation, etc., from
the orientation whichdrawing
of a detail it is taken. Wheretothere
is identical
is a skew in the bridge any sections should be taken from plan
that of the plan, elevation, etc., from which it is taken. Where there is a skew in the views.
bridge any sections
The default is to should be taken
be looking ahead onplan
from views. The only mention of view
stationing.
orientation
The default is is to ifbethe viewahead
looking is looking back on The
on stationing. stationing.
only mention of view orientation
isOn
if the view
plan andis elevation
looking back on stationing.
drawings where there is insufficient space to show cut
Onsections
plan andand details,drawings
elevation the section
whereandthere
detail drawing should
is insufficient space to beshow
on thecutplan sheet
sections
immediately following the plan and elevation drawing unless
and details, the section and detail drawing should be on the plan sheet immediately there are a series
of related
following theplans.
plan and If itelevation
is impractical
drawing tounless
show there
detailsareon asection
a series drawing,
of related plans.a detail
Ifsheet should immediately
it is impractical follow
to show details on athe section
section drawing.
drawing, In other
a detail words, the order
sheet should
immediately
of plan sheets follow the section
should be from drawing.
generalInplan
othertowords,
more the orderdetail.
minute of plan sheets
should
A circlebe from general plan to more minute detail.
divided into upper and lower halves shall identify structural sections,
Aviews, and details.
circle divided Examples
into upper are shown
and lower inAppendix
halves shall 11.1-A3.sections, views,
identify structural
and details.
Breaks Examples
in lines are shown provided
are allowable in Appendix that11.1-A3.
their intent is clear.
Breaks in lines are allowable provided that their intent is clear.
I. Miscellaneous
I. Miscellaneous
Callout arrows are to come off either the beginning or end of the sentence.
This means
Callout arrowsthe aretop line ofofftext
to come for the
either arrows coming
beginning off of
or end thethe
leftsentence.
of the callout
This
means bottom
orthethe top lineline of text
of text for for
arrowsarrows pointingright.
coming off the left of the callout or the bottom
line of textfor
Except forthe
arrows
Layout,pointing
wallright.
elevations are to show the exposed face regardless
of direction
Except of stationing.
for the Layout, The Layout
wall elevations sheet
are to show stationing
the exposed willface
read increasing
regardless of left
to right.ofThe
direction elevation
stationing. Thesheets
Layout will represent
sheet thewill
stationing view in increasing
read the field aslefttheto wall
right.
The elevation
isbeing sheets will represent the view in the field as the wall is being built.
built.
Plan
L. Reinforcement Detailing
Contract documents shall convey all necessary information for fabrication
of reinforcing steel. Inaccordance with Standard Specifications
Section6-02.3(24), reinforcing steel details shown in the bar list shall be
verifiable inthe plans and other contract documents.
Reinforcement type and grade is specified in Standard Specifications
Section9-07.2 and need not be provided elsewhere in the contract documents
unless itdiffers.
Size, spacing, orientation and location of reinforcement shall be shown on the
plan sheets.
Reinforcement shall be identified by mark numbers inside a rectangle.
Reinforcing bar marks shall be called out at least twice. The reinforcement
including the spacing is called out in one view (such as a plan or elevation).
The reinforcement without the spacing is called out again in atleast one other
view taken from a different angle (such as a section).
Epoxy coating for reinforcement shall be shown in the plans by noting an E
inside a triangle.
The spacing for reinforcement shall be on a dimension line with extension
lines. Do not point to a single bar and call out the spacing. Reinforcement
spacing callouts shall include a distance. If the distance is an unusual number,
give a maximum spacing. Do not use equal spaces as in, 23equal spaces
= 18-9 (the steel workers should not have to calculate the spacing).
Also,never use the word about as in, 23 spaces @ about 10 = 18-9 (this
is open to too much interpretation). Instead these should read, 23 spaces @
10 max. = 18-9.
Reinforcement geometry shall be clear in plan details. Congested areas, oddly
bent bars, etc. can be clarified with additional views/details/sections or adjacent
bending diagrams. In bending diagrams, reinforcement dimensions are given
out-to-out. It may be necessary to show edges of reinforcement with two
parallel edge lines to clearly show working points and dimensions.
Reinforcement lengths, angles, etc. need not be called out when they can be
determined from structural member sizes, cover requirements, etc. Anchorage,
embedment and extension lengths of reinforcement shall be dimensioned in
theplans.
Standard hooks per AASHTO LRFD 5.10.2.1 need not be dimensioned or
called out, but shall be drawn with the proper angle (90, 135 or 180). Seismic
hooks per AASHTO LRFD 5.10.2.2 (used for transverse reinforcement in
regions of expected plastic hinges) shall be called out on theplans whenever
they are used.
Splices in reinforcement are required when reinforcement lengths exceed
the fabrication lengths in BDM 5.1.2.F. They may also be necessary in other
locations such as construction joints, etc. The location, length and stagger of lap
splices shall be shown on the plan sheets. Tables of applicable lap splice lengths
are acceptable with associated stagger requirements. Type, location and stagger
of mechanical and welded splices of reinforcement shall be shown.
Where concrete cover requirements differ from those given in the standard
notes or Standard Specifications Section6-02.3(24)C, they shall be shown
in the plans. It shall be clear whether the cover requirement refers to ties and
stirrups or the main longitudinal bars.
Bar list sheets shall be prepared for plan sets including bridges. They shall
be included at the end of each bridge plan set. They are not stamped. They
are provided in the plans as a convenience for the Contractor and are to be
used at their own risk. Despite this warning, Contractors sometimes use the
bar list directly to fabricate reinforcement without confirming details from
the plans. Designers should therefore strive for accuracy in the bar list. An
accurate bar list also serves as a checking mechanism and a way to calculate
reinforcementquantities.
The reinforcing for some structural members such as approach slabs, shafts,
piles, barrier, retaining walls, bridge grate inlets, sign structure foundations,
precast SIP deck panels and precast girders are not shown in the bar list at
the end of the bridge plan set but may include their own bar list on their
plan sheets. These components typically have shop plans, include steel
reinforcement within their unit costs and/or are constructed by separate
sub-contractors.
Other reinforcement detailing references include ACI 315-99 Details
and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement, ACI 318-08 Building Code
Requirements for Structural Concrete, and CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice May 2003.
11.1.2 Bridge Office Standard Drawings and Office Examples
A. General
The Bridge Office provides standard drawings and example sheets of various
common bridgeelements.
B. Use of Standards
The Standard Drawings are to be considered as nothing more than examples of
items like girders or traffic barriers which are often used and are very similar
from job to job.
They are to be copied to a structure project and modified to fit the particular
aspects of the structure. They are not intended to be included in a contract plan
set without close scrutiny for applicability to the job.
C. Changes to Standards
New standard drawings and revisions to existing drawings shall be approved
by the Bridge Design Engineer and shall be made according to the same office
practices as contract plan sheets.
E. Abutment
Bridge elements that have not yet been built will not be shown. For example,
the superstructure isnot to be shown, dashed or not, on any substructure details.
Elevation information for seals and piles or shafts may be shown on the
abutment or pier sheets.
Views are to be oriented so that they represent what the contractor or inspector
would most likely see on the ground. Pier 1 elevation is often shown looking
back on stationing. A note should be added under the Elevation Pier 1 title
saying Shown looking back onstationing.
F. Intermediate Piers/Bents
Each pier shall be detailed separately as a general rule. If the intermediate piers
are identical except for height, then they can beshown together.
G. Bearing Details
H. Framing Plan
Girder Lines must be identified in the plan view (Gir. A, Gir. B, etc.).
I. Typical Section
Girder spacing, which is tied to the bridge construction baseline
Roadway slab thickness, as well as web and bottom slab thicknesses for box
girders
A dimension
Limits of pigmented sealer
Profile grade and pivot point and cross slopes
Utility locations
Curb to curb roadway width
Soffit and drip groove geometry
J. Girders/Diaphragms
Prestressed girder sheets can be copied from the Bridge Office library but they
must be modified to match the project requirements.
K. Bridge Deck Reinforcement
Plan and transverse section views
L. Expansion Joints
M. Traffic Barrier
Traffic barrier sheets can be copied from the Bridge Office library but they
must be modified tomatch the project requirements.
N. Bridge Approach Slab
Approach slab sheets can be copied from the Bridge Office library and
modified as necessary for the project.
O. Barlist
The barlist sheets do not require stamping because they are not officially part of
the contract planset.
Page 11-10
E.
Labeling
symbol () is used for length including lengths less than a foot.
used structural steel shapes. Note that the inches symbol () is omitted,
Detailing
but the
foot
The following table shows the usual method of labeling some of the most frequently
Page 11-13
Practice
August 2006
Bridge Design Manual M 23-50
Detailing Practice Chapter 11
11.1.7 Abbreviations
A. General
Abbreviations, as a rule, are to be avoided.
Because different words sometimes have identical abbreviations, the word
should be spelled out where the meaning may beindoubt.
A few standard signs are in common use in the Bridge and Structures Office.
These are listed with the abbreviations.
A period should be placed after all abbreviations, except aslistedbelow.
Apostrophes are usually not used. Exceptions: pavt., reqd.
Abbreviations for plurals are usually the same as the singular. Exceptions:
figs., no., ctrs., pp.
No abbreviations in titles.
B. List of abbreviations commonly used on bridge plan sheets:
A
abutment ABUT.
adjust, adjacent ADJ.
aggregate AGG.
alternate ALT.
ahead AHD.
aluminum AL.
American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM
American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials AASHTO
and &
angle point A.P.
approved APPRD.
approximate APPROX.
area A
asbestos cement pipe ASB. CP
asphalt concrete AC
asphalt treated base ATB
at @ (used only to indicate spacing
or pricing, otherwise spell it out)
avenue AVE.
average AVG.
B
back BK.
back of pavement seat B.P.S.
bearing BRG.
begin horizontal curve (Point of Curvature) P.C.
begin vertical curve BVC
bench mark BM
between BTWN.
bituminous surface treatment BST
bottom BOT.
boulevard BLVD.
bridge BR.
bridge drain BR. DR.
building BLDG.
buried cable BC
C
cast-in-place CIP
cast iron pipe (C.I.P.)
center, centers CTR., CTRS.
centerline
center of gravity CG
center to center CTR. TO CTR., C/C
Celsius (formerly Centigrade) C
cement treated base CTB
centimeters CM.
class CL.
clearance, clear CLR.
compression, compressive COMP.
column COL.
concrete CONC.
conduit COND.
concrete pavement PCCP
(Portland Cement Concrete Pavement)
construction CONST. or CONSTR.
continuous CONT. or CONTIN.
corrugated CORR.
corrugated metal CM
corrugated steel pipe CSP
countersink CSK.
county CO.
creek CR.
cross beam X-BM.
crossing XING
cross section X-SECT.
cubicfeet CF or CU. FT. or FT.
cubic inch CU. IN. or IN.
cubic yard CY or CU. YD. or YD
culvert CULV.
D
degrees, angular or DEG.
degrees, thermal C or F
diagonals(s) DIAG.
diameter DIAM. or
diaphragm DIAPH.
dimension DIM.
double DBL.
drive DR.
E
each EA.
each face E.F.
easement EASE., ESMT.
East E.
edge of pavement EP
edge of shoulder ES
endwall EW
electric ELECT
elevation EL. or ELEV.
embankment EMB.
end horizontal curve (Point of Tangency) P.T.
end vertical curve EVC
Engineer ENGR.
equal(s) or = (mathematical result) EQ. (as in eq. spaces)
estimate(d) EST.
excavation EXC.
excluding EXCL.
expansion EXP., EXPAN.
existing EXIST.
exterior EXT.
F
Fahrenheit F
far face F.F.
far side F.S.
feet (foot) FT. or
feet per foot FT./FT. or / or /FT.
field splice F.S.
figure, figures FIG., FIGS.
flat head F.H.
foot kips FT-KIPS
foot pounds FT-LB
footing FTG.
forward FWD.
freeway FWY.
G
gallon(s) GAL.
galvanized GALV.
galvanized steel pipe GSP
gauge GA.
General Special Provisions GSP
girder GIR.
ground GR.
guard railing GR
H
hanger HGR.
height HT.
height (retaining wall) H
hexagonal HEX.
high strength H.S.
high water H.W.
high water mark H.W.M.
highway HWY.
horizontal HORIZ.
hot mix asphalt HMA
hour(s) HR.
hundred(s) HUND.
I
included, including INCL.
inch(es) IN. or
inside diameter I.D.
inside face I.F.
interior INT.
intermediate INTERM.
interstate I
invert INV.
J
joint JT.
junction JCT.
K
kilometer(s) KM.
kilopounds KIPS, K.
L
layout LO
left LT.
length of curve L.C.
linearfeet L.F.
longitudinal LONGIT.
lump sum L.S.
M
maintenance MAINT.
malleable MALL.
manhole MH
manufacturer MFR.
maximum MAX.
mean high water MHW
mean higher high water MHHW
mean low water MLW
mean lower low water MLLW
meters M.
mile(s) MI.
miles per hour MPH
millimeters MM.
minimum MIN.
minute(s) MIN. or
miscellaneous MISC.
modified MOD.
monument MON.
N
National Geodetic Vertical Datum 1929 NGVD 29
near face N.F.
near side N.S.
North N.
North American Vertical Datum 1988 NAVD 88
Northbound NB
not to scale NTS
number; numbers #, NO., NOS.
O
or /
original ground O.G.
ounce(s) OZ.
outside diameter O.D.
outside face O.F.
out to out O to O
overcrossing O-XING
overhead OH
P
page; pages P.; PP.
pavement PAVT
pedestrian PED.
per cent %
pivot point PP
Plans, Specifications and Estimates PS&E
plate or PL
point PT.
point of compound curve PCC
point of curvature P.C.
point of intersection P.I.
point of reverse curve PRC
point of tangency P.T.
point on vertical curve PVC
point on horizontal curve POC
point on tangent POT
polyvinyl chloride PVC
portland cement concrete PCC
pound, pounds LB., LBS., #
pounds per square foot PSF, LBS./FT., LBS./ ,or #/
pounds per square inch PSI, LBS./IN., LBS./ ,or #/
power pole PP
precast P.C.
pressure PRES.
prestressed P.S.
prestressed concrete pipe P.C.P.
Puget Sound Power and Light P.S.P.&L.
Q
quantity QUANT.
quart QT.
R
radius R.
railroad RR
railway RWY.
Range R.
regulator REG.
reinforced, reinforcing REINF.
reinforced concrete RC
reinforced concrete box RCB
reinforced concrete pipe RCP
required REQD
retaining wall RET. WALL
revised (date) REV.
right RT.
right of way R/W
road RD.
roadway RDWY.
route RTE.
Page 11-20 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 11 Detailing Practice
S
seconds SEC. or
Section (map location) SEC.
Section (of drawing) SECT.
sheet SHT.
shoulder SHLD. or SH.
sidewalk SW. or SDWK
South S.
southbound SB
space(s) SPA.
splice SPL.
specification SPEC.
square foot (feet) SQ. FT. or FT.
square inch SQ. IN. or IN.
square yard SY, SQ. YD. or YD.
station STA.
standard STD.
state route SR
stiffener STIFF.
stirrup STIRR.
structure, structural STR.
support SUPP.
surface, surfacing SURF.
symmetrical SYMM.
T
tangent TAN. or T.
telephone TEL.
temporary TEMP.
test hole T.H.
thick(ness) TH.
thousand M
thousand (feet) board measure MBM
ton(s) T.
total TOT.
township T.
transition TRANS.
transportation TRANSP.
transverse TRANSV.
treatment TR.
typical TYP.
U
ultimate ULT.
undercrossing U-XING
V
variable, varies VAR.
vertical VERT.
vertical curve V.C.
vitrified clay pipe VCP
volume VOL. or V
W
water surface W.S.
weight(s) WT.
welded steel pipe WSP
welded wire fabric W.W.F.
West W.
Willamette Meridian W.M.
wingwall W.W.
with W/
without W/O
Y
yard, yards YD., YDS.
year(s) YR.
11.3 Appendices
Appendix 11.1-A1 Dimensional Callout Example
Appendix 11.1-A2 Typical Details
Appendix 11.1-A3 Typical Section Callouts
SEE DETAIL 1
A A
15 15
SECTIONS AND DETAIL ON THIS
BRIDGE SHEET ARE SHOWN ON
USE WITH LARGE OR BRIDGE SHEET NO. 15
STAGGERED CUT
SECTION OR VIEW
USE WITH A SMALLER
A CUT SECTION OR VIEW
14
15
SECTION A DETAIL 1
14 14
VIEW A SECTIONS AND DETAIL ON THIS
14 BRIDGE SHEET ARE TAKEN ON
BRIDGE SHEET NO. 14
15
PILE TIP
ELEV.
2"
SIZE AS APPROPRIATE
Structure excavation for the construction of wing walls shall be computed using limits shown in
Figure 11.2.6-2.
Figure 12.2.5-1
Figure 11.2.6-1
Structure excavation for the construction of wing walls shall be computed using
limits shown in Figure 12.2.5-2.
11.2-2 August 2002
Figure 11.2.6-2
Figure 12.2.5-2
Figure 12.2.5-3
Figure 11.2.6-3
Figure 12.2.5-4
Figure 11.2.6-4
Figure 11.2.6-4
Prior Prior
to pier construction,
to pier construction, when
when (1)a a(1)
fulla full height
height fill with fill with surcharge
or without surcharge is
Prior to pier construction, when (1) full height fill withororwithout
without surchargeis required for settlement,
is required for settlement,
required (2)for
the settlement,
original groundorline(2) the original ground line is above theshall
finish grade line,
or (2)orthe original ground line is isabove
above the finish grade
the finish gradeline,
line,structure excavation
structure excavation be computed
shall to
be computed to
the upper
1 foot limit
0 inchesof structure
below the finishexcavation shall
grade (pavement) be
line computed
(see to 1 foot
Figure 11.2.6-5).
1 foot 0 inches below the finish grade (pavement) line (see Figure 11.2.6-5).
0 inches below
the finish grade (pavement) line (see Figure12.2.5-5).
Figure 11.2.6-5
Figure 12.2.5-5
Figure 11.2.6-5
Page 12-6
11.2-4 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
August 2002
June 2016
Criteria
B. Special Excavation
B. Special Excavation
The excavation necessary for placement of riprap around bridge piers is called Special Excavation
The excavation necessary for placement of riprap around bridge piers is called
(see Figure 11.2.6-6).
Special Excavation (see Figure 12.2.5-6).
Special excavation shall be computed from the top of the seal to the existing stream bed or ground
Special
line excavation shall
along the slopes be computed
indicated from
in the Plans. the top
Special of the will
excavation sealonly
to the existing
include stream
excavation outside
bed or
theground
limits ofline along
structure the slopes indicated in the Plans. Special excavation will
excavation.
only include excavation outside the limits of structure excavation.
The limits for special excavation shall be shown in the Plans.
The limits for special excavation shall be shown in the Plans.
Figure 12.2.5-6
Figure 11.2.6-6
C. Shaft Excavation
C. Shaft Excavation
Excavation necessary for the construction of shaft foundations is measured by
Excavation necessary for the construction of shaft foundations is generally measured by the cubic
volume and paid for at the unit contract price per cubic yard for Soil Excavation
yard and paid for at the unit contract price per cubic yard for Soil Excavation for Shaft Including
For Shaft
Haul.IncludingHaul.
The usual limits
The usual forforcomputing
limits shaftexcavation
computing shaft excavation
shallshall
be thebe thelines
neat neatoflines of the
the shaft shaftand from
diameter
diameter
the bottom elevation of the shaft as shown in the Plans to the ground surface as it existsthe
as shown in the Plans, the bottom elevation of the shaft as shown in at the time of
Plans, andexcavation.
shaft the top of the ground surface, defined as the highest existing ground
point as shown in the Plans within the shaftdiameter.
The methods of measurement and payment and the limits for shaft excavation shall be specified in the
The methods of measurement and payment and the limits for shaft excavation shall
Special Provisions.
11.2.6 be specified
Shoring in theSpecial
or Extra Provisions.
Excavation, Class A
12.2.6 ShoringAll
orexcavation
Extra Excavation,
in the dry whichClass
requiresAworkmen to enter the excavated area and which has a depth of
4 feet or more is required to be shored, unless the earth face is excavated at its angle of repose (Extra
Shoring, cofferdams or caissons, or extra excavation required for construction of
Excavation).
bridge footings and reinforced concrete retaining walls constructed in the wet or dry
All excavation
is classified which isor15Extra
as Shoring feet orExcavation,
less from the Class
edge ofA.
a traveled pavementSpecifications
See Standard is also required to be shored.
All excavation adjacent to railroad tracks shall also be shored.
Section2-09.3(3).
Cofferdams are required for all underwater excavation or excavation affected by ground water.
Structural shoring (for dry excavation) or cofferdams (for wet excavation) is required
for all excavations
Shoring, nearorcompleted
cofferdams, structures
caissons or extra (foundations
excavation required forof
thebridges, walls,
construction or footings and
of bridge
buildings), near underground utilities, near railroad tracks, and near pavement.or
reinforced concrete retaining walls constructed in the wet or dry is classified as Shoring Extra
All
Excavation, Class A.
other excavation fourfeet or more in depth shall be either shored with structural
shoring or cofferdams, or shall meet the open-pit excavation requirements as specified
in Standard Specifications Section2-09.3(3)B.
For the purpose of estimating the cost for shoring or extra excavation, Class A, it is
necessary to compute the peripheral area of an assumed sheet pile enclosure of the
August 2002 11.2-5
excavated area.
While payment for Shoring or Extra Excavation, Class A, is made at a lump sum
contract price, the costs are a function BRIDGEof the overall
DESIGN MANUAL height of excavation. In general,
Criteria
each side of the excavation for each pier shall be categorized into an average
overall height range as shown on WSDOT Form 230-031 (i.e., less
Quantities than 6feet,
Computation 6 to
of Quantities
10feet, 10to 20feet, or greater than 20feet), the area for the side computed using
the appropriate width
For the purpose times thetheaverage
of estimating overallorheight,
cost for cofferdams theoroverall
for shoring area for
extra excavation, the
Class A, side
it is
necessary to compute the peripheral area of an assumed sheet pile enclosure
shall be entered in the category that matches the sides average overall height. These of the excavated area.
calculations
Whileare required
payment for oreach
for Shoring Extrapier of theClass
Excavation, bridge
A, is as applicable.
made at a lump sumSee accompanying
contract price, the costs
are a function of overall height
Figure 12.2.6-1 and sample calculation. of excavation. In general, each side of the excavation for each pier shall be
categorized into an average overall height range as shown on Form 230-031 (i.e., less than 6 feet, 6 to 10
For excavation
feet, 10 toin
20 the
feet, dry, thethan
or greater peripheral
20 feet), thearea shall
area for be the
the side perimeter
computed using theof the horizontal
appropriate width
times the average overall height, the overall area for the side shall be entered in the category that matches
limits of structure excavation times the height from the bottom of the footing to the
the sides average overall height. These calculations are required for each pier of the bridge as applicable.
ground surface at the time
See accompanying Figureof excavation.
11.2.6-7 and sample calculation.
For excavation in water,
For excavation thetheperipheral
in the dry, area
peripheral area shallshall
be thebe the perimeter
perimeter of the
of the horizontal horizontal
limits of structure
limits of structure excavation times the height from the bottom of the seal to
excavation times the height from the bottom of the footing to the ground surface at the time 2feet
of excavation.
Figure 12.2.6-1
Figure 11.2.6-7
Sample Calculation:
For this pier (Figure 12.2.6-1):
Side A: average height = (4 + 6)/2 = 5feet
width = 15feet
area = 5 X 15 = 75 squarefeet
Side B: average height = (6 + 15)/2 = 10.5feet
width = 20feet
area = 10.5 X 20 = 210 squarefeet
Side C: average height = (10 + 15)/2 = 12.5feet
width = 15feet
area = 12.5 X 15 = 187.5 squarefeet
Side D: average height = (4 + 10)/2 = 7feet
width = 20feet
area = 7 X 20 = 140 squarefeet
For this example
Height Category Area
less than 6feet 75 squarefeet
6feet to 10feet 140 squarefeet
10feet to 20feet 210 + 188 = 398 squarefeet
greater than 20feet N.A.
These numbers would be entered on WSDOT Form 230-031 as follows:
Item Use Item Description Shoring or Quant.
Standard Item Standard Extra Excavation, ClassA Dry: (EnterTotal for Unit of
Number4012 Item Average OverallHeight BridgeHere) Meas. L.S.
12.2.7 Piling
The piling quantities are to be measured and paid for in accordance with Standard
Specifications Sections 6-05.4 and 6-05.5. Computation of piling quantities shall
follow the same provisions.
Timber test piles are driven outside the structure limits and are extra or additional
piling beyond the required number of production piling. See Standard Specifications
Section6-05.3(10).
Concrete or steel test piles are driven within the structure limits and take the place of
production piling. In this case, the quantity for number and length of production piling
is reduced by the number and length of test piling.
The quantity for Furnishing _____ Piling _____ is the linear measurement of
production piling below cut-off to the estimated pile tip (not minimum tip)
specified in the Geotechnical report. (Does not include test piles.)
The quantity for Driving _____ Pile _____ is the number of production piling
driven. (Does not include test piles.)
Pile tips are required if so specified in the Geotechnical report. The tips on the test piles
are incidental to the test pile; therefore, the number of pile tips reported on the Bridge
Quantities Form 230-031 should not include the number of pile tips required on the
testpiles.
12.2.8 Conduit Pipe
It is WSDOT practice to embed two 2-inch diameter conduit pipes in all exterior
concrete barriers constructed on bridges and retaining walls. The only exceptions to
this practice are inside barriers of side-by-side twin bridges, and other project specific
locations with the approval of the Bridge Design Engineer. Only WSDOT electrical
systems may use these conduit pipes. Conduit pipes for other private utilities cannot
be embedded in structure elements, and must be otherwise suspended or attached to
the structure, in accordance with the franchise lease agreement negotiated between the
private utility and the Regions Utility Engineer.
In accordance with Standard Specifications Section8-20.1(1) and RCW 19.28.161,
conduit pipe installation work is considered electrical work that can only be performed
by licensed electricians. As such, conduit pipe quantities can only be included in
electrical work bid items, such as electrical lump sum bid items for Illumination
System, Traffic Signal System, and Communication System, or stand-alone unit
contract bid items for Conduit Pipe 2 In. Diam. Conduit pipe quantities cannot be
made incidental to structural bid items such as Superstructure, Traffic Barrier,
PedestrianBarrier,etc.
For bridges and retaining walls in projects that also include other electrical system
work for illumination, traffic signals, and ITS systems, the conduit pipes and their
associated junction boxes shall be included inthe lump sum bid item cost estimates for
the appropriate electrical system lump sum bid item.
For bridge and retaining walls in projects without any electrical system work (e.g., the
conduit pipes are isolated and will exist initially as spares), the conduit pipe quantity
shall be calculated for Conduit Pipe 2In. Diam, per linear foot. The measurement
shall be the sum of all conduit pipe through the barriers and into the ground mounted
junction boxes buried off the ends of the bridge corners as shown in the traffic barrier
standard details. Each conduit pipe shall terminate in a separate junction box as shown
in thesedetails.
12.2.9 Private Utilities Attached To Bridge Structures
As mentioned above, conduit pipes for private utilities cannot be embedded in structure
elements, and must be otherwise suspended or attached to the structure, in accordance
with the franchise lease agreement negotiated between the private utility and the
Regions UtilityEngineer.
Because attachment of private utilities to bridge structures are subject to franchise
lease agreements, the construction costs for furnishing and installing these utilities,
including all associated supports, need to be kept separate from other bid items. The
only portion of the utilities and their supports that can be made incidental to structure
bid items, such as Superstructure and Bridge Deck are the concrete inserts cast
into the deck slab of the bridge. All other quantities for the private utilities, including
the support rods, braces, and conduit pipes, shall be included in the associated bid
item(s) established for each separate private utility, whether as a lump sum bid item, or
measured by linear measurement. These separate bid item(s) for these private utilities
are the responsibility of the Design PE Office.
The same practice applies to WSDOT conduit pipes when such conduit pipes for ITS
or other systems are suspended or attached to the structure. Other than the concrete
inserts for support of such WSDOT conduit pipes, all other quantities for external
WSDOT conduit pipe systems shall be included in the appropriate WSDOT electrical
system lump sum bid item, under the responsibility of the Design PE Office or the
Region Traffic Design Office.
12.2.10 Drilled Shafts
Soil excavation for shaft including haul is measured by the cubic yards of shaft
excavated. The cubic yards shall be calculated based on the shaft diameter shown in
the Plans and the top of shaft and bottom of shaft elevations shown in the plans, less
all rock excavation as defined below. Excavation of soil between existing ground line
and the top of shaft elevation is considered incidental work and is not included in any
specific quantity measurement.
Rock excavation for shaft including haul is measured by the cubic yards of shaft
excavated. The cubic yards shall be calculated based on the shaft diameter shown in
the Plans, the top of rock line, defined asthe highest bedrock point within the shaft
diameter, and the bottom of shaft elevation shown in thePlans.
Furnishing and placing temporary casing is measured by the linearfeet of required
temporary casing installed within the limits shown in the Plans and as required by the
geotechnicalreport.
B. Responsibilities
1. Bridge Project Support Unit
The Bridge Project Support Unit is responsible for preparing the prospectus,
project summary, preliminary, and final contract estimates and updating the
preliminary estimate as needed during the design phase of theproject.
The Bridge Project Support Unit assists the WSDOT Region Offices and other
outside Local Agency Offices, such as counties and cities, to prepare prospectus
and project summary estimates when requested inwriting.
2. Designer
The designer is responsible for providing preliminary quantities and final
quantities to the Bridge Project Support Unit to aid in the updating of
preliminary estimates and the preparation of contractestimates.
C. Documentation
Whenever a cost estimate is prepared by the Bridge and Structures Office for an
outside office, a Cost Estimate Summary sheet (Appendix 12.3-B1) shall be filled
out by the Engineer preparing the estimate. The Cost Estimate Summary shall be
maintained in the Job File. During the design stage, the summary sheet shall be
maintained by the Bridge Design Unit. At a minimum, the Cost Estimate Summary
should list the initial and all subsequent cost estimates for each Preliminary Plan
distribution made. It is the Design Unit Managers responsibility to ensure the
summary sheet is up to date when the job file is submitted to the Bridge Project
Support Unit for preparation of the BridgePS&E.
D. Cost Data
1. General
The Bridge costs summarized in Appendix A represent common highway,
railroad, and water crossings. Consult the Bridge Project Support Unit for
structures spanning across large rivers or canyons and other structures requiring
high clearances or special design and constructionfeatures.
The square foot costs are useful in the conceptual and preliminary design
stages when details or quantities are not available. The various factors affecting
costs as outlined in Section 12.3.2 must be considered in selecting the square
foot cost for a particular project. As a general rule, projects including none or
few of the high-cost factors will be close to the mid-range of the cost figures.
Projects including many of the high-cost factors will be on the high side.
The user must exercise good judgment to determine reasonable costs. During
the preliminary stage, it is better to be on the prudently conservative side for
budgetingpurposes.
The Bridge Plan distribution will specify a due date for the return of review
comments to the Bridge Specifications and Estimates Engineer. This date is
typically one week prior to the scheduled Bridge PS&E turn-in date, but can be
modified to suit project specific schedule considerations.
C. Bridge PS&E Development
Following the distribution of the Bridge Plans, the Bridge Specifications and
Estimates Engineer will review the Bridge Plans, develop the Bridge Special
Provisions and Bridge Cost Estimate, and prepare the bridge working day schedule.
See Sections 12.4.4, 12.4.5, 12.4.6, and 12.4.7.
D. Bridge PS&E Distribution
At the completion of the Bridge PS&E package, or at the scheduled Bridge PS&E
turn-in date, whichever comes first, the Bridge Specifications and Estimates
Engineer will distribute the Bridge PS&E. The Bridge PS&E package should
include the items specified in Section 12.4.9.A, and should be distributed to those
identified in Section 12.4.9.B.
12.4.4 Reviewing Bridge Plans
The Bridge Specifications and Estimates Engineer performs the following tasks after
receiving the Bridge Plans submittal:
A. Job File
Review correspondence and emails in the job file for the items of work and
other commitments which need to be included in the Bridge PS&E. Identify
items that need special provisions and bid item references. Identify items that
require additional research by, and information from, the bridge designer, Region
designers, or others. Confirm that the job file fly leaf information has been
completed by the designer (Form 221-076).
B. PS&E Check List (Form 230-037 and Appendix 12.4-A1)
Review the form as completed by the bridge designer for identified needs for
special materials, construction requirements, permits, etc., which may need Special
Provisions suchas:
Permits: United States Coast Guard
Agreements: utilities on bridge, etc.
Materials: high strength structural steel, high-strength concrete, polyester and
polymer concrete, carbon fiber wrap, high-load elastomeric bearing pads and
other high capacity bridge bearings,etc.
Construction Requirements: temporary access, stage construction,
construction over railroad, special welding and welding inspection
requirements, and other special constructionrequirements
Special Items: modified concrete overlay or special architectural, paint, and
sealertreatments
Proprietary Materials: identification of, and justification for use of, products
and materials which are specified in the Bridge Plans by specific manufacturer
and model, instead of generic manufacture
All Standard Bid Items listed in the spreadsheet shall include the Standard Bid Item
number assigned to that bid item. All non-standard bid items shall be identified by
the appropriate pre-qualification code for the bid item work. The pre-qualification
codes specified in the Standard Item Table should be reviewed to help establish the
appropriate code for non-standard bid items. When in doubt, the general Bridge
and Structures pre-qualification code of (B0) should be used.
All bridge cost estimates shall include mobilization, but do not include sales tax,
engineering, contingencies or inflation.
12.4.6 Preparing the Bridge Specifications
A. General
There are two categories of Special Provisions:
1. General Special Provisions (GSPs) are supplemental specifications which are
standardized and approved for Statewide use by the WSDOT Construction
Office. The library of GSPs is maintained by the WSDOT Design Office.
GSPs are formatted to supplement specific Standard Specifications Sections.
GSPs are identified by their publication and effective date in parenthesis
immediately preceding the GSP text. GSPs are published normally three times
during a calendar year April, August, and December.
2. Project Specific Special Provisions include all supplemental specifications
which are not GSPs. Project Specific Special Provisions, as the name implies,
are intended for project specific use, whether one time or infrequent. The vast
majority of Project Specific Special Provisions are formatted to supplement
specific Standard Specifications Sections. However, in rare cases, they
can be formatted as stand-alone following the Description/Materials/
Construction Requirements/Measurement/Payment format. Project Specific
Special Provisions are identified by six asterisks in parenthesis immediately
preceding the text or heading. A Project Specific Special Provision that sees
frequent use can be standardized and elevated to GSPstatus.
B. Procedure
Based on review of the Bridge Plans and the PS&E Check List, the Bridge
Specifications and Estimates Engineer determines the items of work which are
not already covered by the Standard Specifications and for which supplemental
specifications are needed. Based on this determination, and review of the current
list of Amendments, GSPs, a Bridge Special Provision runlist is prepared, listing
the code numbers of the applicable Amendment and GSP documents needed for the
project. Current Amendment and GSP documents are listed in the WSDOT Design
Office Project Development web site.
These documents are listed following the section order of the Standard
Specifications, Amendments first, followed by the Special Provisions. Fill-in blanks
for GSPs requiring project specific information can be completed at thistime.
When the Standard Specifications, Amendments and GSPs are insufficient to cover
project specific requirements, Project Specific Special Provisions are developed,
and added by name at the appropriate location in the runlist.
See the Plans Preparation Manual Division 6 for further discussion and example
flowcharts.
When the Bridge Special Provision file is complete with all Special Provisions
needed to accompany the Bridge Plans, the Bridge Specifications and Estimates
Engineer requests a single space document of the Bridge Special Provision file for
use in the Bridge PS&E distribution.
12.4.7 Preparing the Bridge Working Day Schedule
A. General
The Bridge Specifications and Estimates Engineer calculates the number of the
working days necessary to construct the bridge portion of the contract, based on
the quantities shown in the Summary of Quantities form submitted with the Bridge
Plans, and enters the time in the special provision Time for Completion. The
working days are defined in the StandardSpecifications Section 1-08.5.
B. Procedure
The first task of estimating the number of working days is to list all the
construction activities involved in the project. These include all actual construction
activities such as excavation, forming, concrete placement, and curing; and
the non-construction activities such as mobilization, material and shop plan
approval. Special conditions such as staging, limited access near wetlands, limited
construction windows for work in rivers and streams, limited working hours due to
traffic and noise restrictions, require additional time.
The second task is to assign the number of working days to each construction
activity above (see Appendix 12.4-A2). The Construction Time Rate table can
be used as a guide to estimate construction time required. This table shows the
average rate of output for a single shift, work day only. Adjustment to the rates of
this table should be made based on project size, type of work involved, location
of the project, etc. In general, larger project will have higher production rates than
smaller projects, new construction will have higher production rates than widening,
and unstaged work will have higher production rates than stages work.
The last step is to arrange construction activities, with corresponding working days,
into a construction schedule on a bar chart, either by hand on the Construction
Working Day Schedule Form230-041 (see Appendix 12.4-B1) or by computer
using a scheduling program. List the activities in a logical construction sequence,
starting from the substructure to the superstructure. Items shall overlap where
practical and the critical path shall be identified.
B. Procedure
The cover memorandum should be addressed to either the Region Plans Engineer
(all Regions except for Olympic Region) or the Region Design Project Engineer
(Olympic Region only). Others that should be included as ccs in the distribution
are as follows:
1. FHWA Washington Division Bridge Engineer.
2. Region Design Project Engineer (except for Olympic Region already
addressed above).
3. Region Construction Project Engineer (if known and if different from the
Region Design ProjectEngineer).
4. Northwest Region Area Engineering Manager (Northwest Region only).
5. Region Project Development Engineer (Eastern, North Central, South Central,
and Southwest Regions only).
5. Bridge Construction Engineer.
6. Materials Laboratory.
7. Bridge Preservation Office.
8. Bridge Management Engineer (for all Bridge Replacement, Seismic Retrofit,
and Bridge Repairprojects).
9. All Bridge Design Unit Managers whose units contributed Bridge Plans to
theproject.
10. All bridge consultants who contributed Bridge Plans to the project.
11. Bridge Consultant Liaison Engineer (when bridge consultants contribute Bridge
Plans totheproject).
Modifications to the distribution list should be made by the Bridge Specifications and
Estimates Engineerbased on Region involved, and project specific requirements.
12.4.10 PS&E Review Period and Turn-in for AD Copy
A. Description
The PS&E Review Period between Bridge PS&E turn-in and Ad Date is used to
allow the Region to compile PS&E from their Design PE Office and all support
groups into a Review PS&E set that can be distributed to all interested parties
for review and comment. The process ensures that all parts of the PS&E are
compatible, complete, and constructible.
B. Procedure
Each Region has its own specific process, but the general procedure is similar. The
Bridge and Structures Office review set is addressed to the Bridge Project Support
Engineer. This occurs shortly after the Bridge PS&E turn-in date. Upon receipt in
the Bridge and Structures Office, the Review PS&E set is delivered to the Bridge
Specifications and Estimates Engineer assigned to the project. The review is to be
performed, and comments returned to the Region, by the due date specified in the
distribution letter. Review comments should be returned to both the Region Plan
Reviewer and the Region Design PE contact assigned to the project, as identified in
the distributionletter.
Depending on the scope of the project, and the Region responsible for the
project, there may be a meeting to discuss review comments. If such a meeting
is held (generally about halfway through the PS&E review period), the Bridge
Specifications and Estimates Engineer and others from the Bridge Design Unit
responsible for the project, should consider attending if discussion of Bridge PS&E
review comments islikely.
Shortly after the specified due date for review comments passes, Region comments
on the Bridge PS&E should be received by the Bridge Specifications and Estimates
Engineer and/or the bridge designer(s) in the Bridge Design Unit. These review
comments on the Bridge PS&E should be addressed before the final Bridge PS&E
is turned-in for AD Copy printing. The Bridge Specifications and Estimates
Engineer makes all necessary revisions to the Bridge Cost Estimate and Bridge
Special Provisions, and notifies the appropriate contacts in the Region Design PE
Office and the Region Plans Office when these changes are complete. This should
be completed at least two weeks prior to the scheduled Ad Date.
After the Bridge Design Unit has completed all necessary revisions to the Bridge
Plans, the Bridge Plans are signed and dated in blue ink by the appropriate
engineers, and the signed originals turned in to the Bridge Specifications Engineer.
Copies of these signed plans are sent to the Region for use in the AD Copy PS&E.
This should be completed one to two weeks prior to the scheduled Ad Date.
Theoriginal signed plans are forwarded to the Bridge Plans Engineer in the Bridge
Project Support Unit.
Not Included In
Bridge Quantities List
Environmental And Engineering Service Center
Bridge and Structures Office
Type of Structure
The following is a list of items for which the Bridge and Structures Office is relying on the Region to furnish
plans, specifications and estimates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Bridge Quantities
Bridge and Structures
Drilled Holes: Less than 12/305 mm long: Greater than 12/305 mm long:
Number Diameter Number Diameter Length
Inch/mm Inch/mm LF/M
Inch/mm Inch/mm LF/M
Inch/mm Inch/mm LF/M
Core Drilled Holes: Less than 12/305 mm long: Greater than 12/305 mm long:
Number Diameter Number Diameter Length
Inch/mm Inch/mm LF/M
Inch/mm Inch/mm LF/M
Inch/mm Inch/mm LF/M
0071
GSP Item Removing Existing Bridge L.S.
0071
Type Area SF/SM
Page 2 of 6
DOT Form 230-031 EF
Revised 07/2011
Page 2 of 6
DOT Form 230-031 EF
Revised 07/2011
4148 Std. Item Epoxy-Coated St. Reinf. Bar For Bridge LB/KG
4149 Std. Item St. Reinf. Bar for Bridge LB/KG
4151 Std. Item St. Reinf. Bar for LB/KG
-- Sp. Prov. Wire Mesh SY/SM
4166 Std. Item Lean Concrete CY/M3
-- Std. Item Conc. Class CY/M3
4322 Std. Item Conc. Class 4000 for Bridge CY/M3
4155 Std. Item Conc. Class 4000 for Traffic Barrier CY/M3
4202 Std. Item Conc. Class 4000 for CY/M3
4200 Std. Item Conc. Class 3000 for CY/M3
4325 Std. Item Conc. Class 5000 for Bridge CY/M3
4205 Std. Item Conc. Class 5000 for CY/M3
Page 3 of 6
DOT Form 230-031 EF
Revised 07/2011
Page 3 of 6
DOT Form 230-031 EF
Revised 07/2011
4357 Sp. Prov. Bridge Rail - Low Fence Type - Superstr. LF/M
-- Sp. Prov.
-- Sp. Prov.
Page 4 of 6
DOT Form 230-031 EF
Revised 07/2011
Page 4 of 6
DOT Form 230-031 EF
Revised 07/2011
-- Sp. Prov.
Page 6 of 6
DOT Form 230-031 EF
Revised 07/2011
Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab SF $130 .00 $155 .00 $180 .00
Span 20 - 60 FT.
Prestressed Concrete Slabs SF $110 .00 $130 .00 $150 .00
Span 13 - 69 FT.
Prestressed Concrete Decked Bulb -Tee Girder SF $130 .00 $155 .00 $180 .00
Span 40 - 115 FT.
Reinforced Concrete Retaining Wall (Exposed Area) SF $55 .00 $75 .00 $90 .00
UNIT COSTS
Permanent Geosynthic Wall w/ Shotcrete Facing SF $20 .00 $35 .00 $50 .00
Permanent Geosynthic Wall w/ Concrete Fascia Panel SF $30 .00 $45 .00 $60 .00
Soil Nail Wall SF $80 .00 $100 .00 $130 .00
Shotcrete Facing SF $20 .00 $30 .00 $40 .00
Concrete Fascia Panel SF $30 .00 $40 .00 $50 .00
Soldier Pile Wall (Exposed Area) SF $100 .00 $120 .00 $130 .00
Soldier Pile Tieback Wall (Exposed Area) SF $140 .00 $160 .00 $200 .00
Concrete Crib Wall Concrete Headers SF $40 .00 $50 .00 $60 .00
*Based on limited cost data . Check with the Bridge PS&E Engineer .
Special Cases:
Tunnel - Outside dimension from top of footing to top of footing over the tunnel roof,
i .e ., including walls and top width .
For small jobs (less than $100,000), use the high end of the cost range as a starting point .
Before using these structure unit costs for any official WSDOT project cost estimate,
contact the Bridge and Structures Office at (360) 705-7201
to discuss the specific project criteria and constructability related risks,
so an appropriate structures construction cost can be provided.
UNIT COST
BID ITEMS UNIT LOW HIGH
Furnishing Piling
Conc. _____ Dia. LF $35.00 $45.00
Steel TYP HP 12x53 LF $30.00 $35.00
Timber Creosote Treated LF $10.00 $12.00
Timber Untreated LF $8.00 $10.00
** Pile Tip
CIP Concrete (Steel Casing Short Tip) EACH $200.00 $250.00
CIP Concrete (Steel Casing 10 Stinger) EACH $4,500.00 $5,500.00
Steel (H-Pile) EACH $120.00 $220.00
Timber (Arrow Tip) EACH $25.00 $45.00
SUBSTRUCTURE
UNIT COST
BID ITEMS UNIT LOW HIGH
Shafts
Soil Excavation For Shaft Including Haul CY $300.00 $600.00
Rock Excavation For Shaft Including Haul CY $600.00 $800.00
Furnishing & Placing Temp. Casing For Shaft LF $125.00 $350.00
Furnishing Permanent Casing For Shaft LF $150.00 $600.00
Placing Permanent Casing For Shaft EACH $2,000.00 $3,000.00
Casing Shoring LF $150.00 $350.00
Shoring or Extra Excavation CL.A Shaft EST $10,000.00 $25,000.00
Conc. Class 4000P For Shaft CY $250.00 $350.00
St. Reinf. Bar For Shaft LBS $1.00 $1.50
CSL Access Tubes LF $10.00 $15.00
Removing Shaft Obstructions EST 10% of all of above shaft ____
For small jobs (less than $100,000), use the high end of the cost range as a starting point.
** Pile ultimate capacity will affect these prices. Check with Bridge PS&E Engineer if unsure.
UNIT COST
BID ITEMS UNIT LOW HIGH
SUPERSTRUCTURE
UNIT COST
BID ITEMS UNIT LOW HIGH
For small jobs (less than $100,000), use the high end of the cost range as a starting point .
MISCELLANEOUS
UNIT COST
BID ITEMS UNIT LOW HIGH
Sign Support (Brackets, Mono, or Truss Sign Bridges) LBS $5 .00 $7 .00
Painting Existing Steel Bridges (Lead Base) TON (Steel) $650 .00 $900 .00
Painting New Steel Bridges LBS (Steel) $0 .12 $0 .15
Masonry Drilling
Holes up to 1'-0" in depth
1" Diameter EACH $30 .00
1 " Diameter EACH $35 .00
2" Diameter EACH $40 .00
2 " Diameter EACH $42 .00
3" Diameter EACH $44 .00
3 " Diameter EACH $46 .00
4" Diameter EACH $52 .00
5" Diameter EACH $54 .00
6" Diameter EACH $70 .00
7" Diameter EACH $90 .00
For holes greater than 1'-0" in depth and up to 20'-0" in depth, use 1 .5 x above prices .
If drilling through steel reinforcing, add $16 .00 per lineal inch of steel drilled .
For small jobs (less than $100,000), use the high end of the cost range as a starting point .
Page
Bridge
River Bridge 162/14 ______________________________________
May 2008
12-42
__________________________________
Appendix
Estimate
Transmittal
Date of
Assume
Accuracy %
Estimate Made By
Field Data
(Dated)
Date Layout
Made
Foundation
Date Rec.
Preliminary
Quantities
Final
Quantities
Estimate By
Sq. Ft. Area
District
Design
Branch
Program
Development
of Cost Remarks
10-2-91 $517,000.00 15% DMJ 8-91 3 Please See Cover Transmittal
June 2016
M 23-50.16
Appendix 12.4-A1 Special Provisions Checklist
Type of Structure
B. Railroads
Railroad Bridge
Railroad in Vicinity
C. Order of Work
Approach embankment settlement period
Stage construction sequence
D. Traffic Control
Reduction in traffic lanes
Traffic within feet of new construction
Traffic detoured, no traffic on bridge
One way traffic on bridge
F. Falsework
Falsework opening over existing roadway
Falsework opening over railroad
Falsework opening over water
Protection of falsework
Supported from existing structure
Not supported from existing structure
Special falsework release sequence required
G. Foundation
G. Foundation
Excavation near existing pavement
Excavation near railroad track or facilities
Concrete Seals
Seal construction using a berm
Cofferdams
Pumping water from foundation excavation required
Riprap at piers
Removal of unsuitable material
Rock excavation requiring threshold limit value
Special Excavation
H. Forms
Special forms for architectural treatment
Fractured Fin Finish
Variable depth random board finish
3/4 inch random board finish
Remove forms from cells which have access (Box grider)
I. Piles
Concrete test pile
Concrete piling inch diameter
Steel test pile
Steel piling
Timber Test Pile
Timber piling
Pile loading test
Pile minimum tip elevations
Pile splice
Pile tip
Preboring for pile
Driving piles in highly developed business or residential areas
Excavation for pile
Driving from existing structure
No driving from existing structure
Overdriving of piles
J. Shafts
Required permanent casing
Required temporary casing
Casing shoring
Shaft Seal
CSL access tubes
J. Shafts
L. Superstructure
Concrete class
Post - tensioning tendons
Elastomeric bearing pads (pad only)
Elastomeric bearing pad assembly (fabricated assembly)
Fabric pad bearing
Disc bearing
Spherical bearing
Cylindrical bearing
Electrical Conduit
Expansion joint
M. Steel Structure
Structural Carbon Steel
Structural Low Alloy Steel
Structural H.S. Steel
Steel Casting
A - 307 Fasteners
M - 164 Fasteners
F-1554 Fasteners
Shop Assembling
Notch Toughness Requirements
Application of Paint - Color No.
Steel Erection
N. Timber Structures
Untreated
Creosote treated
Salt treated
Glulam deck panels
Type and grade of timber
Fire prevention requirement needed
P. Drainage System
Special bridge drains
Bridge grate inlets
Downspout
Q. Surface Finish
Fractured fin finish
Sandblast finish
Variable depth random board finish
3/4 inch random board finish
Pigmented sealer
T. Waterproofing
T. Waterproofing
Membrane waterproofing (Deck Seal)
U. Miscellaneous Items
Temporary oak blocks
Poured rubber
Expaned polstyrene
Plastic waterstops
Expanded rubber
Butyl rubber sheeting
Grout, comp. strength psi at day, location
Electrical conduit
W. Repair Work
Epoxy Crack Sealing
Timber Redecking
Concrete Deck Repair
X. Other Items
Ceramic Tiles
Sturctural Earth Wall
Tieback Wall
Noise Barrier Wall
Winter Conditions
Work Access
Work hours or seasonal restrition
Work Bridge
Detour Bridge
* Concrete
** All times are based on a single crew with 8-hour work DAYS
13.1 General
Bridge load rating is a procedure to evaluate the adequacy of various structural
components to carry predetermined live loads. The Bridge Load Rating Engineer
in the WSDOT Bridge Preservation Office is responsible for the bridge inventory
and load rating of existing and new bridges in accordance with the National Bridge
Inspection standards (NBIS) and the AASHTO Manual for Bridge Evaluation (MBE),
latest edition. Currently, only elements of the superstructure will be rated, however,
if conditions warrant, substructure elements may need to be rated. The superstructure
shall be defined as all structural elements above the column tops including
dropcrossbeams.
Load ratings are required for all new, widened, or rehabilitated bridges where the
rehabilitation alters the load carrying capacity of the structure. Load ratings shall
be done immediately after the design iscompleted and rating calculations shall be
filed separately per Section 13.4 and files shall be forwarded toWSDOTs Load
RatingEngineer.
The Bridge Preservation Office is responsible for maintaining an updated bridge load
rating throughout the life of the bridge based on the current condition of the bridge.
Conditions of existing bridges change over time, resulting in the need for reevaluation
of the load rating. Such changes may be caused bydamage to structural elements,
extensive maintenance or rehabilitative work, or any other deterioration identified by
the Bridge Preservation Office through their regular inspection program.
New bridges that have designs completed after October 1, 2010 shall be rated based on
the Load and Resistance Factor Rating (LRFR) method per the MBE and this chapter.
NBI ratings shall be based on the HL-93 truck and shall be reported as a rating factor.
For bridges designed prior to October 1, 2010, partially reconstructed or rehabilitated
bridges where part of the existing structure is designed by the Allowable Stress Method
(ASR) or by the Load Factor Method (LFR), and other existing structures, NBI ratings
can be based oneither the LFR or Load Resistance Factor Rating (LRFR) methods.
The rating factors shall be based on HS loading and reported in tons when using the
LFR method. Verify with WSDOTs Load Rating Engineer regarding which load rating
method to use for bridges designed prior to October 1, 2010.
By definition, the adequacy or inadequacy of a structural element to carry a specified
truck load will be indicated by the value of its rating factor (RF); that is, whether it is
greater or smaller than 1.0.
When rating the full section of a bridge, like a box girder or 3D truss, or
crossbeams, with
13.1.1A1 two
or more lanes, the following
formula applies when rating
overload trucks.
13.1.1A2 (13.1.1A-2)
The formula above assumes that there is one overload truck occupying one lane,
and one of the legal trucks occupying each of the remaining lanes. Trucks shall be
placed in the lanes in a manner that produces the maximum forces. The live load
factor for both of the legal truck and permit truck shall be equal and are dependent
on the permit truck. The LLlgl shown in the equation above corresponds tothe
maximum effect of the legal truck(s).
Condition Factor (cc)
Condition factor is based on the Bridge Management System (BMS) condition
state of the element per the most recent inspection report. The engineer should
consider the quantity of each element in a fair or poor condition state and the
notes describing the condition of an element when determining the appropriate
conditionfactor.
Structural Condition of Member c
Good or Satisfactory, BMS Condition 1 or 2 1.00
Fair, BMS Condition 3 0.90
Poor, BMS Condition 4 0.85
Table 13.1-1
For cases where a permit truck is combined with a legal truck, the multiple
presence factor for the total number of lanes loaded in each case shall be applied
toall loads.
In cases where RF for legal loads is less than 1, which would require the bridge
to be posted, live load factors may be reduced (interpolated based on ADTT), per
Section 6A.4.4.2.3 of the MBE.
Dynamic Load Allowance (Impact)
Dynamic load allowance is dependent on the approach onto the bridge and
condition of the deck and joints based on the latest inspection report.
NBI BMS
Truck IM Element1681 Flag322
HL 93 (All Span Lengths):
Inventory 33% N/A N/A
Operating 33% N/A N/A
Legal & Permit Trucks:
Spans 40 or less 33% N/A N/A
Legal & Permit Trucks, Spans greater than 40
Smooth Riding Surface Along Approach onto 10% 8 1, 2 or none
the Bridge, Bridge Deck and Expansion Joints
Minor Surface Deviations and Depressions 20% 6 3
Severe Impact to the Bridge 30% 3 4
Verify the conditions of the deck and joints to identify any deficiencies in the deck
that would cause impact to the structure. For potholes less than 1 deep use 20 %
impact, and use 30% impact for depths greater than 1. For multi span bridges,
take into consideration the type and location of the deficiency and whether Impact
would be applicable to the entire structure or not. If the Inspection report has no
NBI Code 1681 or BMS Flag 322, then assume Smooth approaches.
Live Loads
The moving loads shall be the HL-93 loading, the AASHTO legal loads (including
three AASHTO trucks and notional rating load), and the two WSDOT overload
vehicles (See Figures 13.1-1 and 13.1-3 thru 13.1-9). Inventory and operating
ratings shall be calculated for the HL-93 truck. In cases where the rating factor
for the Notational Rating Load (NRL) is below 1.00, then the single unit vehicles
(SUV) shall be evaluated for posting, see MBE for SUVconfigurations.
13.1.2 Load Factor Method (LFR)
The load factor method can be applied to structures designed prior to October
2010. Ratings shall be performed per the MBE. Capacities, resistance factors,
and distribution factors shall be based on the AASHTO Standard Specifications
17thedition.
13.1.21 (13.1.2-1)
Where:
RF = Rating factor
C = Nominal member resistance
= Resistance factor based on construction material
D = Unfactored dead loads
LL = Unfactored live loads
S = Unfactored prestress secondary moment or shear
IM = Impact
DL = Dead load factor for structural components and attachments
LL = Live load factor
smooth approaches.
13.1.21
13.1.1A1
Impact (IM) for design and legal loads
is span dependent:
13.1.22
13.1.1A2 (13.1.2-2)
Where:
L is equal to span length
13.1.23
13.1.21
When rating the full section of a bridge, like a box girder or 3D truss, or
crossbeams, which have
13.1.22 two or
more lanes, the following formula applies when
rating overload trucks.
13.1.23 (13.1.2-3)
The formula above assumes that there is one overload truck occupying one lane,
and one of the legal trucks occupying each of the remaining lanes. Trucks shall be
placed in the lanes in a manner that produces the maximum forces. The LLlgl shown
in the equation above corresponds to the maximum effect of the legal trucks(s).
The LL corresponds to the live load factor for the overload truck and isthe same
for both legal and overload trucks. The same multiple presence factor for the total
number of lanes loaded should be applied to all loads.
Resistance Factors (LFR) Method
The resistance factors for NBI ratings shall be per the latest AASHTO Standard
Specifications. Following are the NBI resistance factors assuming the member is in
good condition:
Steel members: 1.00 (Flexure)
1.00 (Shear)
Prestressed concrete 1.00 (Flexure, positive moment)
0.90 (Shear)
Post-tensioned, cast-in-place: 0.95 (Flexure, positive moment)
0.90 (Shear)
Reinforced concrete: 0.90 (Flexure)
0.85 (Shear)
For prestressed and post-tensioned members, where mild reinforcing steel is used
to resist negative moment, the resistance factors for reinforced concrete section
shall be used in the ratings.
the cross
In cases where there is deterioration in a member, section
shall
be reduced
13.1.1A1 based
on
the inspection report. 13.1.1A1
For
cases where is
deterioration in
members
13.1.1A1
described in general terms, reduce resistance factors of member by 0.10 for BMS
13.1.1A2 Condition State
of 3,
and reduce
resistance
13.1.1A2 factors
by0.20for
BMS Condition
13.1.1A2
13.1.1A1 State
of4. The engineer should consider the quantity of each element in a fair or
poor condition
state
and the notes describing the condition
13.1.21
of an element when
13.1.21
determining
the
appropriate
resistance
13.1.21
factor.
13.1.1A2
Service Method(LFR) Method 13.1.22
13.1.22
13.1.22
13.1.21 Prestressed and
post-tensioned members in positive
moment regions, and where
post-tensioning is continuous
over the supports,
13.1.23 shall also
be rated
based
on
13.1.23
13.1.22 allowable
stresses at
service
loads. The
13.1.23 lowest
rating
factor between
service and
ultimate methods shall be the governing inventory rating.
13.1.23Inventory
Rating
13.1.24
13.1.24
13.1.24
Concrete Tension: Concrete Compression:
13.1.25 13.1.25
13.1.24
13.1.25
(13.1.2-4) (13.1.2-5)
13.1.26
13.1.26
(13.1.2-6)
13.1.25
13.1.26
Prestressing Steel Tension:
13.1.27
13.1.27
(13.1.2-7)
13.1.27
13.1.26
13.1.28 13.1.28
13.1.28
Page 13-6
13.1.27 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual
M 23-50.16
June 2016
13.1.1A1
13.1.25
Chapter 13
Bridge Load Rating
13.1.1A2
13.1.26
Operating Rating
13.1.21
13.1.27
Prestressing Steel Tension:
13.1.22
13.1.28
(13.1.2-8)
Where:
RF = 13.1.23
Rating factor
c = Compressive strength of concrete
Fd = Dead load stress
Fp = Prestressing
13.1.24 stress
Fs =
Stress due to secondary prestressforces
Fl = Live load stress
IM = Dynamic
13.1.25load allowance
(Impact)
y* = Prestressing steel yield stress
13.1.3 Allowable Stress 13.1.27
Method (ASD)
The allowable stress method is applicable to only timber structures. Impact is not
applied to timber13.1.28
structures.
Rating Equation:
13.1.31 (13.1.3-1)
Where:
RF = factor
Rating
*Fa = Allowable stress
Fd = Dead load stress
Fl = Live load stress
*Fa, for inventory rating, shall be per AASHTO Standard Specifications. For operating
rating, FA shall be increased by 33%
8k 32 k 32 k
*In negative moment regions of continuous spans, place an equivalent load in the other spans to
produce maximum effect.
Legal Trucks
Legal lane is applicable to Spans over 200 (LRFR & LFR Methods)
Legal lane is applicable to spans over 200 (LRFR & LFR Methods)
Legal lane is applicable to Spans over 200 (LRFR & LFR Methods)
Legal
Legal lane
lane for
for continuous
continuous spans
spansand
andreactions
reactionsatatinterior piers(LRFR
interiorpiers FR Method)
(LRFR Met
Method)
Figure 13.1-7
Legal lane for continuous spans andFigure 13.1-7 at interior piers (LRFR
reactions FR Method)
Met
Overload Trucks Figure 13.1-7
Overload Trucks
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 13-9
June 2016
Bridge Load Rating Chapter 13
Overload Trucks
For integral crossbeams on prestressed girder bridges, the composite section shall be
considered for all loads for the rating. The rating equation does not provide a method
for considering staged load conditions.
13.2.7 In-Span Hinges
For in-span hinges, rating for shear and bending moment should be performed based
on the reduced cross-sections at the hinge seat. Diagonal hairpin bars are part of this
rating as they provide primary reinforcement through the shear plane.
13.2.8 Girder Structures
Girders shall be rated on a per member basis.
13.2.9 Box Girder Structures
Bridges with spread box girders shall be rated on a per box basis. Otherwise, the rating
shall be for the full bridge cross-section for all applied loads.
13.2.10 Segmental Concrete Bridges
Segmental Concrete Bridges shall be rated per Section 6A.5.13 of the MBE.
13.2.11 Concrete Slab Structures
Rate cast-in-place (CIP) solid slabs on a per foot of width basis. Rate precast panels
on a per panel basis. Rate CIP voided slabs based on a width of slab equal to the
predominant center-to-center spacing ofvoids.
When rating flat slabs on concrete piling, assume pin-supports at the slab/pile
interface of interior piers and the slab continuous over the supports. If ratings using
this assumption are less than 1.0, the piles should be modeled as columns with fixity
assumed at 10 below the ground surface.
13.2.12 Steel Structures
Checking of fatigue shall not be part of the rating evaluation.
For horizontally curved bridges, flange lateral bending, diaphragms and cross frames
shall also be rated.
Pin and hanger assemblies shall be rated. Splices of fracture critical girders shall
berated.
13.2.13 Steel Floor Systems
Floorbeams and stringers shall be rated assuming they are pinned at the supports.
Assume the distance from outside face to outside face of end connections as the
lengths for the analysis. Live loads shall be applied to thefloorbeam as moving point
loads at any location between curbs, which produce the maximum effect.
Rating of connections is not required unless there is evidence of deterioration.
13.2.14 Steel Truss Structures
Typical steel trusses are rated on a per truss basis assuming all truss members have
pinned connections. Insome special cases, a 3D analysis may be required or fixed
connections may be assumed.
In general, rate chords, diagonals, verticals, end posts, gusset plates, stringers and
floorbeams. For state bridges, gusset plates shall be rated based on WSDOTs criteria
(contact Load Rating Engineer for criteria) otherwise, use FHWA publication number
FHWS-IF-09.014. Structural pins shall be rated; analyze pins for shear, and the side
plates for bearing capacity.
Tension members and splices subjected to axial tension shall be investigated for
yielding on the gross section and fracture on the net section.
For truss members that have been heat-straightened three or more times, deduct 0.1
from the resistancefactor.
13.2.15 Timber Structures
Unless the species and grade is known, assume Douglas fir. Use select structural for
members installed prior to 1955 and No. 1 after 1955. The allowable stresses for beams
and stringers shall be as listed in theAASHTO Specifications.
The nominal dimensions should be used to calculate dead load, and the net dimensions
to calculate section modulus. If the member is charred, it may be assumed that of
material is lost on all surfaces. Unless the member is notched or otherwise suspect,
shear need not be calculated.
13.2.16 Widened or Rehabilitated Structures
For widened bridges, rate crossbeams.
For existing portion of the widened bridge, a load rating shall be performed if the load
carrying capacity of the longitudinal members is altered, or the dead and live loads
have increased due to the widening.
Longitudinal rating for the widened portion will be required, except in cases where
the widened portion has the same capacity of the existing structure or exceeds it.
For example, if a slab bridge is widened and the reinforcing in the widened portion
matches the existing structure, then no rating will be required. Another example,
if a girder bridge is widened using same section as the existing bridge with the
same ormore reinforcing, and the same or less live and dead loads, then it will not
requirerating.
For rehabilitated bridges, a load rating shall be required if the load carrying capacity
ofthe structure is altered by the rehabilitation.
13.2.17 Culverts
The distribution of live load thru fill shall be per the corresponding AASHTO Design
Specification used for the rating. Structures with fill depth greater than 8 feet and
exceeds the span length do not require rating.
Use the load rating equation for box culverts and corresponding factors per the latest
MBE and interims.
13.2.18 Overloads
If the rating factor for either of the overloads is less than 1when rating a longitudinal
member, provide the Live Load Distribution Factors for both single and multiple lanes
in the calculations; for X-beams, analyze it with a single overload truck and report the
rating factors for both single and multiple lanes on the Load Rating Summary Sheet.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 13-13
June 2016
Bridge Load Rating Chapter 13
13.5 Appendices
Appendix 13.4-A1 LFR Bridge Rating Summary
Appendix 13.4-A2 LRFR Bridge Rating Summary
PE Stamp
Bridge Name:
Bridge Number:
SID Number:
Span Types:
Bridge Length:
Design Load:
Rated By:
Checked By:
Date:
AASHTO 1
AASHTO 2
AASHTO 3
NRL
OL-1
OL-2
NBI Rating RF Tons (US) Controlling Point
Inventory
Operating
Remarks:
13.4-A1
PE Stamp
Bridge Name:
Bridge Number:
SID Number:
Span Types:
Bridge Length:
Design Load:
Rated By:
Checked By:
Date:
Inventory (HL-93)
Operating (HL-93)
Remarks:
13.4-A2
13.99 References
1. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification
2. AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th edition
3. AASHTO Manual For Bridge Evaluation
4. WSDOT Bridge Inspection Manual M 36-64
14.1 Introduction
14.1.1 General
The purpose of this chapter is to provide guidance for the planning and implementation
of projects that may benefit from the application of rapid bridge construction
technologies and methods. This chapter was prepared to provide bridge engineers with
a basic understanding of different Accelerated Bridge Construction (ABC) methods
available, help guide project specific selection of ABC methods, and to encourage the
use of the ABC methods described in this chapter, or other innovative approaches to
rapid bridge construction. It was also prepared to provide guidance with the design and
detailing of precast concrete superstructure and substructure elements for accelerated
bridge construction. For the sake of this chapter, ABC and Innovative Bridge
Construction are encompassed in the term ABC.
This chapter is written in accordance with the AASHTO Guide Specifications for
LRFD Bridge Seismic Design, 2nd Edition. It is WSDOTs application of the Federal
Highway Administrations Every Day Counts. It is intended to compliment the
documents listed below:
Accelerated Bridge Construction Manual, Publication Number FHWA-HIF-12-013
Development of a Precast Bent Cap System for Seismic Regions, NCHRP
Report681
Connection Details for Prefabricated Bridge Elements and Systems, Publication
Number FHWA-IF-09-010, March 2009
Modern implementations of ABC have been demanded by tight traffic control
requirements in urban areas. Bridges used to be constructed on new alignments,
connecting communities together in modern ways for the first time where there
was no traffic and lower demand to travel from one community to another. Prior to
modern times, the advancements made during the Industrial Revolution advanced
new materials and construction techniques sped up construction. We saw bridge
construction transform from stone construction used in ancient times, to include steel,
concrete, and members subject to much larger forces than in the past. Its the expressed
desire here to apply the benefits of new advancements in materials and construction
techniques to a wider array of projects and take the position of minimal time on site the
expectation of every project.
The goal of ABC is to deliver projects earlier to the traveling public, reducing the
impacts of on-site construction to motorists, promoting traveler and worker safety,
and reducing environmental impacts. ABC uses different methods of project delivery
and construction to reduce the project schedule, on-site construction time, and public
impact. With the ever increasing demand on transportation infrastructure, and the
number of bridges that are approaching the end of their service lives, the need for ABC
becomes more apparent. ABC should be viewed as a subset of a larger accelerated
project delivery effort encompassing all aspects of project development including
contract administration through construction contract acceptance.
ABC methods are generally safer than conventional construction methods because
much of the construction can be done offsite, away from traffic. Quality can also
be improved because the construction is often completed in a more controlled
environment compared to on-site conditions. Ease of construction and design can be
improved as standardized bridge pieces are developed. The use of ABC comes with
challenges that need to be overcome on a project-specific basis, often accelerating the
schedule increases the cost of the project. This increased project delivery cost can be
offset by reductions in road user costs and economic loss to the affected communities.
14.1.2 ABC Methods
Many different methods to facilitate ABC are available. Some of those methods are
discussed in greater detail later in this chapter. They include precast bridge piers,
geosynthetic reinforced abutments with precast slab or deck girder superstructures,
precast decks, precast footings or entire abutments, or any combination thereof.
Installation of these bridge elements can be aided with use of lateral sliding of large
bridge members or self-propelled modular transporters, or heavy cranes. Contractually,
ABC can be aided with the use of alternate project delivery methods, such as Design-
Bid-Build, Design-Build or General Contractor/Construction Manager.
less space is need on site, and the offsite location could be at a less sensitive location.
If there were concerns with disturbing the adjacent ground, smaller construction sites
near a bridge could be beneficial.
Bridge designs with many similar pieces, such as long retaining walls, bridge decks,
or bridges with many piers are also good candidates for ABC. The smaller pieces can
be shipped in on semi-trucks and placed immediately. The repetition would bring more
economic value to the ABC component of the project and bring the cost of the precast
piece down.
Often precast pieces can be used to provide a structural shell that will serve multiple
purposes. Precast pieces can be used to form a caisson or a coffer dam that will define
a dry work zone which be filled in with concrete later. The shell could simply provide
a void that makes shipping a piece easier, which will get filled with concrete when
another bridge portion is poured.
Construction schedules can make ABC worth considering. Lateral sliding of bridge
superstructures have been used such that an existing bridge can be used until the
critical moment where one bridge is rolled out, and a new one rolled in. Months of
construction can take place next to the location the bridge would be used, and in a
matter of hours the new structure could be slid into place.
In general, where time on a job site ought to be minimized, ABC would make a good
choice to consider.
14.2.3 Prefabricated Bridge Elements and Systems
For the sake of bridge design, use of Prefabricated Bridge Elements and Systems
(PBES) is one strategy that can meet the objectives of accelerated bridge construction.
PBES are structural components of a bridge that are built offsite, or near-site of a
bridge, and include features that reduce the onsite construction time and mobility
impact time that occur from conventional construction methods. PBES includes
innovations in design and high-performance materials and can be combined with the
use of project delevery and material procurement methods that invoke faster on-
site construction. Because PBES are built off the critical path and under controlled
environmental conditions, improvements in safety, quality, and long-term durability
can be better achieved.
Prefabricated bridge elements can also be used in combination with other accelerated
bridge construction methods. Commonly used prefabricated bridge elements are pre-
stressed concrete girders, including I-girders, adjacent inverted T-beams and boxes, full
depth and partial depth deck panels and prefabricated abutments, pier crossbeams, pier
columns, and footings, as well as precast three-sided and four-sided box culverts.
Prefabricated bridge elements are used to reduce the on-site time required for concrete
forming, rebar tying and concrete curing, saving weeks to months of construction
time. Deck beam elements eliminate conventional onsite deck forming activities. To
reduce onsite deck forming operations, deck beam elements are typically placed in an
abuttingmanner.
Prefabricated elements are often of higher quality than conventional field-constructed
elements, because the concrete is cast and cured in a controlled environment. The
elements are often connected using high strength grout, and post-tensioning or pre-
tensioning. Close attention should be given to these connections.
Page 14-4 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 14 Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
Connection strength is often a concern when with PBESs. There are many tools
available to provide durable, high strength connections. The grouted duct technology
discussed in detail later in this chapter is one method. Other methods are grouted duct
couplers, key and socket connections, and cast-in-place joints encompassing precast
members with high strength concrete.
A. Prefabricated Elements
Prefabricated Elements are a category of PBES which comprise a single structural
component of a bridge. Under the context of ABC, prefabricated elements reduce
or eliminate the onsite construction time that is needed to build a similar structural
component using conventional construction methods. An element is typically built
in a prefabricated and repeatable manner to offset costs.
B. Bridge Deck Elements
Bridge deck elements eliminate activities that are associated with conventional
bridge deck construction, which typically includes onsite installation of forms,
overhang bracket and formwork installation, reinforcing steel placement, paving
equipment set up, concrete placement, and concrete curing, all typically occurring
in a sequential manner.
Examples of Bridge Deck Elements include:
partial-depth precast bridge deck panels
full-depth precast bridge deck panels with and without longitudinal
post-tensioning
lightweight precast bridge deck panels
FRP bridge deck panels
steel grid (open or filled with concrete)
orthotropic bridge deck
other prefabricated bridge deck panels made with different materials
orprocesses
C. Beam Elements
Beam Elements are composed of two types: deck beam elements and full-
width beam elements
Deck Beam Elements eliminate conventional onsite deck forming activities as
noted above. To reduce onsite deck forming operations, deck beam elements
are typically placed in an abutting manner.
Examples of Deck Beam Elements include:
adjacent deck bulb tee beams
adjacent double tee beams
adjacent inverted tee beams
adjacent box beams or voided slabs
modular beams with decks
post-tensioned concrete thru beams
other prefabricated adjacent beam elements
Note: Although not preferred under the context of ABC, a separate construction
phase, performed in an accelerated construction manner, may be required to
finish the deck. A deck connection closure pour, overlay, or milling operation
using innovative materials can be used to expedite the completion of the deck.
In some situations, the placement of overlays can be accomplished during off-
peak hours after the bridge is opened to traffic.
Full-width beam elements eliminate conventional onsite beam placement
activities. They are typically rolled, slid, or lifted into place to allow deck
placement operations to begin immediately after placement. Given their size
and weight, the entire deck is not included.
Examples of Full-Width Beam Elements include:
truss span without deck
arch span without deck
other prefabricated full-width beam element without deck
D. Prefabricated Pier Elements
Prefabricated pier elements eliminate activities that are associated with
conventional pier construction, which typically includes onsite form installation,
reinforcing steel placement, concrete placement, and concrete curing, all typically
occurring in a sequential manner.
Examples of Prefabricated Pier Elements include:
prefabricated caps for caisson or pile foundations
precast spread footings
prefabricated columns
prefabricated column crossbeams
prefabricated combined crossbeams and columns
other prefabricated pier elements
E. Prefabricated Abutment and Wall Elements
Abutment and wall elements eliminate activities that are associated with
conventional abutment and wall construction, which typically includes form
installation, reinforcing steel placement, concrete placement, and concrete curing,
all occurring in a sequential manner.
Abutment and wall elements may be built in a phased manner using
conventional construction methods, but under or near an existing bridge without
disruptingtraffic.
Examples of Abutment and Wall Elements include:
prefabricated caps for caisson or pile foundations
precast footings, wingwalls, or back walls
sheet piling, steel or precast concrete
prefabricated full height wall panels used in front, behind, or around
foundationelements
cast-in-place concrete abutments and walls used with or without precast
elements if built in a manner that is accelerated, or has no impact to mobility
ABC Questionnaire
Figure 14 .2 .6-1
ABC Questionnaire
Figure 14.2.6-1
This section explores a few structural systems that an engineer may wish to consider . The
systems described here are ones WSDOT has reviewed and developed to a level that is ready
for production work . There are other systems available in the referenced documents, and an
engineer may wish to develop their ownABC Flow
systems Chart
and details . These systems may include
Figure 14.2.6-2
continuous flight augers, rapid fill systems including expanded polystyrene fill, rapid ground
improvement, or other precast structural systems not described below .
Page 14-10 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
This sectiondiscusses the precast bent system in great detail . WSDOT has worked closelyJune
with2016
researchers and is a leader in pursuing its development and considers this chapter an excellent
Chapter 14 Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
For many
Chapter 14 typical bridges a single precast column element is sufficient .
Accelerated and However, the segmental
Innovative Bridge Construction
column concept was included in the validation and HfL demonstration project .
PrecastBent
Precast Bent System,
System, Exploded
ExplodedView
View
Figure
Figure 14 .3 .1 .1-1
14.3.1.1-1
Draft, October 12, 2015 ~ Edited 10-12-15 Page - 5 -
Elevation of
Elevation of Column
Column and andPier
Pier
Figure
Figure 14 .3 .1 .1-2
14.3.1.1-2
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 14-13
June 2016
Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction Chapter 14
Column splices shall incorporate grouted ducts on at least one abutting end of a
column within a joint. Rebar that is expected to protrude into a duct shall be cast
with the rest of the column segment.
Geometric requirements required in other bridge design requirements shall still
bemet.
Other requirements are listed below:
WSDOTs Standard Specifications shall be followed.
Grouted ducts shall be a semi-rigid, galvanized, ferrous, corrugated metal duct.
Concrete segments may be constructed on site or at a precast
manufacturingfacility.
Embedment requirement for grouted duct splices, regardless of seismic design
category, are shown in Table 14.3.1.4-1.
Bar Size Nominal Duct Size (in.) Embedment/BarDiameter Embedment Length, (in.)
#3 2 29 12
#4 2.5 27 15
#5 3 21 15
#6 3 18 15
#7 3 21 20
#8 3.5 18 20
#9 3.5 16 20
#10 3.5 18 25
#11 4 16 25
#14 4 16 30
#18 4.5 16 40
AASHTO Seismic 8.2 and 8.8.9 specify placement of transverse reinforcement into
the joint for a distance not less than one-half the maximum column dimension or
14.0in. from the face of the column connection into the adjoining member. Therefore,
according to these alternative provisions, when SD1 is greater than or equal to 0.10but
less than 0.14, minimum transverse reinforcement is required for cast-in-place
joints. When SD1 is less than 0.10, transverse shear reinforcement is not required.
For all values of SD1 in SDC A, the designer may choose to conservatively provide
a rational design for joint reinforcement as specified in AASHTO Seismic 8.13
andC8.13.1.
Precast crossbeam connections for SDC B, C, and D are designed and detailed to
provide a force transfer mechanism through the joint and crossbeam based on research.
The precast crossbeam design provisions for SDC A are more than those for SDC B,
but are deemed appropriate for all values of SD1 in SDC A.
14.3.1.5.2 Joint Proportioning
A. Precast Crossbeam Connections
The provisions of AASHTO Seismic 8.13.2 shall be used for joint proportioning,
except that the nominal yield stress of the column longitudinal reinforcement may
be used in lieu of the expected yield stress.
For SDC A, joint proportioning of crossbeams only requires the designer
to provide sufficient length to anchor column longitudinal reinforcement in
the joint. Minimum embedment length provisions in Table 14.3.1.4-1 for
column longitudinal reinforcement anchored in precast crossbeam connections
areappropriate.
B. Grouted Duct Connection
Transverse reinforcement in the form of tied column reinforcement, spirals,
hoops, or intersecting spirals or hoops shall be provided. Minimum transverse
reinforcement in the joint for grouted duct connections shall be based on AASHTO
Seismic Equation 8.13.3-1 and 8.13.3-2. Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall
not exceed 0.3DS or 12 in, where Ds is the depth of the superstructure.
AASHTO Seismic 8.13.5 and C8.13.5 summarize related design provisions and
background on non-integral crossbeam systems using grouted duct or crossbeam
pocket connections.
Minimum transverse reinforcing in the joint is required to help ensure the
Chapter 14 does notAccelerated
connection andinInnovative
become a weak link BridgeHowever,
a precast bent system. Construction
the
nnovative Bridge Construction
additional joint shear reinforcement required for SDC B, C, and D is not required.
Grouted
Grouted duct connections
duct connections shall beshall be reinforced
reinforced such
such that that vertical
vertical stirrupsstirrups witharea,
with a total a totalAsjvi ,
jvi
evenlyAsover
spaced area, , spaced evenly over a length Dcshall
through the joint shall satisfy:
hat vertical stirrups with a total area,
a length Dc through the joint satisfy:
all satisfy: A jvi 0.08 A Equation 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-1
Equation 14.3.1.5.2-1
s st
Equation 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-1 and shall be detailed as shown in Figure 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-1 through Figure 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-3 . Details of the
and shall be detailed as shown in Figure 14.3.1.5.2-1 through Figure 14.3.1.5.2-
1 through Figure 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-3 .
connectionDetails of the
include
3. Details ofducts, vertical stirrups
the connection includeinside
ducts,the joint, and
vertical bedding
stirrups layer
inside reinforcement
the joint, and are
joint, and bedding layershown
reinforcement
inbedding are
Figure layer
14 .3 .1 .5 .2-1 .
reinforcement are shown in Figure 14.3.1.5.2-1.
GroutedDuct
DuctJoint
Joint Shear
Shear Reinforcement
Reinforcement DetailsDetailsSDC
SDCAA(Section)
Chapter 14Grouted AcceleratedFigure
and Innovative
Figure14 .3 .1 .5 .2-1
14.3.1.5.2-1
Bridge(Section)
Construction
f 'c D'cp
0.04
t pipe max f yp cos Eq . 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-2
Equation 14.3.1.5.2-2
0.0598in
Where:Where: fc = nominal compressive strength of the crossbeam pocket concrete (ksi)
fc 12,= 2015
Draft, October nominal
D cp =
compressive
~average
Edited 10-12-15strength
diameter of the crossbeam
of confined crossbeampocket concrete
pocket (ksi)
fill between Page 13
corrugated
Dcp = average diameter of confined
steel pipe walls (in) crossbeam pocket fill between corrugated steel
pipe
fyp walls (in)yield stress of steel pipe (ksi)
= nominal
fyp = nominal yield stress of steel pipe (ksi)
= angle between horizontal axis of bent crossbeam and pipe helical corrugation
= angle between horizontal axis of bent crossbeam and pipe helical corrugation
or lock seam (degrees)
or lock seam (degrees)
Vertical
Vertical stirrups
stirrups inside
inside the the
jointjoint
shallshall consist
consist of double
of double leg stirrups
leg stirrups or ties
or ties of aof a bar
bar size no smaller
size no smaller than that of the crossbeam transverse reinforcement. A minimum
than that of the crossbeam transverse reinforcement . A minimum of two stirrups or equivalent of
two stirrups or
ties shall be used . equivalent ties shall be used.
Figure 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-4 through Figure 14 .3 .1 .5 .2-6 show details of the connection, including the
steel pipe, vertical stirrups inside the joint, and bedding layer reinforcement .
Grouted Duct Full Ductility Joint Shear Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Section)
Grouted Duct Full14 .3 .1 .7 .4-1
Figure Ductility Joint Shear
Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Section)
Figure 14.3.1.7.4-1
Grouted Duct Full Ductility Joint Shear Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Elevation)
Grouted Duct Full14 .3 .1 .7 .4-2
Figure Ductility Joint Shear
Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Elevation)
Grouted Duct Full Ductility Joint Shear
Figure Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Elevation)
14.3.1.7.4-2
Figure 14 .3 .1 .7 .4-2
Grouted Duct Full Ductility Joint Shear Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Plan)
Figure 14 .3 .1 .7 .4-3
Grouted Duct Full Ductility Joint Shear Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Plan)
C. Crossbeam Pocket Grouted Duct Full
Connection Ductility
Figure Joint Shear
14 .3 .1 .7 .4-3
Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Plan)
Crossbeam pocket connections shall use a helical,
Figure lock seam, corrugated steel pipe to form the
14.3.1.7.4-3
crossbeam C. pocket .
Crossbeam Pocket Connection
The thickness of the corrugated pipe shall be sized to satisfy transverse
reinforcement ratio requirements specified in AASHTO Seismic 8 .13 .3 .1 .
Crossbeam pocket connections shall use a helical, lock seam, corrugated steel pipe to form the
crossbeam pocket . The thickness of the corrugated pipe shall be sized to satisfy transverse
reinforcement ratio requirements specified in AASHTO Seismic 8 .13 .3 .1 .
This pipe, placed between crossbeam longitudinal reinforcement, serves both as
a stay-in-place form and as well as joint transverse reinforcement, the hoops. The
duct diameter is sized to provide adequate tolerance for crossbeam placement over
column longitudinal bars, and the duct thickness is sized to satisfy transverse joint
Chapter 14
reinforcement Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
requirements.
A supplementary hoop is required at each end of the duct to limit dilation and
A supplementary hoop is required
potential unraveling. at each
Crossbeam end of
pocket the duct to
connection limit dilation
research and potential
demonstrated the
unraveling . Crossbeam pocket connection
effectiveness of this reinforcement. research demonstrated the effectiveness of this
reinforcement .
Joint shear reinforcement requirements outside the joint match those for cast-
Joint shear reinforcement
in-place connections. requirements
However, basedoutside
on the joint match
research results,those
only for cast-in-place
limited vertical
connections .
stirrups are needed within the joint to achieve suitable joint performance,are
However, based on research results, only limited vertical stirrups andneeded
horizontal
within the J-bars are
joint to achieve not required.
suitable For constructability
joint performance, reasons,
and horizontal double-leg
J-bars are notvertical
required . For
stirrups or
constructability ties aredouble-leg
reasons, specified. Placement of overlapping
vertical stirrups or ties arestirrups in the
specified . joint is likely
Placement of
not practical
overlapping stirrups due to joint
in the increased congestion
is likely in the
not practical joint
due and resulting
to increased decreaseininthe joint and
congestion
construction
resulting decrease intolerance for crossbeam
construction tolerance erection.
for crossbeam erection .
As in
As shown shown in Figures
Figures 14.3.1.7.4-4
14 .3 .1 .7 .4-4 throughthrough 14.3.1.7.4-6,
14 .3 .1 .7 .4-6, inverted
inverted U-bars,U-bars, or may be
or hairpins,
hairpins, may be optionally placed within the pocket to help restrain potential
optionally placed within the pocket to help restrain potential buckling of top crossbeam flexural
buckling
bars within of top crossbeam flexural bars within the joint.
the joint .
Crossbeam Pocket Full Ductility Joint Shear Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Section)
Crossbeam Pocket Full
Figure Ductility Joint Shear
14 .3 .1 .7 .4-4
ReinforcementDetailsSDCCandD (Section)
Figure 14.3.1.7.4-4
Crossbeam Pocket Full Ductility Joint Shear Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Elevation)
Crossbeam PocketFigure Full Ductility Joint Shear
14 .3 .1 .7 .4-5
Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Elevation)
Crossbeam Pocket Full Ductility Joint Shear
Figure Reinforcement
14.3.1.7.4-5 Details SDC C and D (Elevation)
Figure 14 .3 .1 .7 .4-5
Crossbeam Pocket Full Ductility Joint Shear Reinforcement Details SDC C and D (Plan)
Figure 14 .3 .1 .7 .4-6
Crossbeam Pocket Full Ductility Joint
Crossbeam Shear
Pocket FullReinforcement Details
Ductility Joint ShearSDC C and D (Plan)
14 .3 .1 .7 .5 Socket-Type Figure
Footing Connections
Reinforcement 14 .3 .1 .7 .4-6
Details SDC C and D (Plan)
Figure 14.3.1.7.4-6
Where socket-type connections are used to connect precast columns to CIP spread footings or
14 .3 .1 .7 .5 Socket-Type
pile caps, the following Footing Connections
requirements shall be followed .
Where socket-type
The interface of theconnections are used
precast column to connect
with the precast
footing shall be columns to CIP
intentionally spread footings
roughened to an or
pile caps, the following requirements shall be followed .
amplitude of 0 .70 in . The column-to-footing shear interface shall be designed for interface shear
using
The Sectionof5 .8 .4
interface of AASHTO
the precast columnLRFD
withBridge Design
the footing Specifications .
shall To account
be intentionally roughenedfor to
potential
an
shrinkage cracking around the column, the cohesion factor, c, shall be taken as zero .
amplitude of 0 .70 in . The column-to-footing shear interface shall be designed for interface shearThe
using Section 5 .8 .4 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications . To account for potential
shrinkage cracking around the column, the cohesion factor, c, shall be taken as zero . The
14.3.1.7.6 Precast
14 .3 .1 .7 .6 PrecastColumn
Column
Precast
Precast columns
columns and crossbeams
and crossbeams thatthat
areare used
used with
with thethe
HfLHfL
bentbent system
system areare covered
covered by
by AASHTO Seismic 8. The columns of such systems are not considered precast
AASHTO Seismic 8 . The columns of such systems are not considered precast concrete piles .
concretepiles.
A. Interface Shear Transfer Capacity of Precast Bent Systems
A. Interface Shear Transfer Capacity of Precast Bent Systems
The interface shear capacity between precast column and crossbeam or between segments of
columns
precast The interface shear
shall be capacity between
determined precast
using Section column
5 .8 .4 and crossbeam
of AASHTO or between
LRFD Bridge Design
segments of precast columns shall be determined using Section 5.8.4 of AASHTO
Specifications . To account for cyclic loading effects and the potential for significant cracking, the
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. To account for cyclic loading effects and
cohesion factor, c, shall be taken as zero and the friction factor, , shall be 0 .60 . The factors, K1
the potential for significant cracking, the cohesion factor, c, shall be taken as zero
and K2 shall be 0 .2 and 0 .8 ksi, respectively .
and the friction factor, , shall be 0.60. The factors, K1 and K2 shall be 0.2 and
B. Splicing of Longitudinal Reinforcement in Columns Subject to Ductility Demands for
0.8ksi,respectively.
SDCs C and D
Page 14-34 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
Where tensile force is transferred between reinforcing anchored into steel ducts using Junehigh
2016
strength grout and bars adjacent to the duct, the splice length, lsplice, shall be the longer of the
Chapter 14 Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
E. Development Length for Column Bars Extended into Oversized Drilled Shafts
for SDCs C and D
Where socket connections are used, column bars may be terminated with straight
bar embedment or mechanical anchorages capable of developing the column bar
specified ultimate tensile strength per Class HA per ASTM A970.
Chapter 14 Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
All column bars may be terminated at the same location, provided the confinement
steel required in Section 14.3.1.7.7A is included.
The bars shall be extended into the transition or splice zone of the pile shaft . The embedment
The
depth bars
shall shall
meet theberequirements
extended intoofthe transition
Section or splice
7 .4 .4C . zone of the depth
The embedment shallThe
pile shaft. also include
embedment depth shall meet the requirements of Section
the total bar end cover distance of both column and shaft bars . 7.4.4C. The embedment
depth shall also include the total bar end cover distance of both column and
shaftbars.Drilled Shaft
14 .3 .1 .7 .7
14.3.1.7.7
Where Drilledconnections
socket-type Shaft are used to connect precast columns to drilled shafts the
column-to-shaft
Where socket-type connections arebe
side interface shall intentionally
used to connectroughened to an amplitude
precast columns of 0 .70 in .
to drilled shafts
Because axial loads can
the column-to-shaft sidebe supported
interface shallbybeend bearing of roughened
intentionally the columntoonanthe shaft, a of
amplitude shear
0.70 in.
friction interface design is not required . However, consideration shall be given to temporary
support of the precast column and to proper consolidation of concrete between the column base
Because axial loads can be supported by end bearing of the column on the shaft, a
and shaft to ensure that an adequate load path is provided .
shear friction interface design is not required. However, consideration shall be given
to temporary support of the precast column and to proper consolidation of concrete
between the column
A. Lateral base and
Confinement forshaft to ensure
Oversized thatShafts
Drilled an adequate loadCpath
for SDCs andisDprovided.
A. Lateral
Where socketConfinement
connections of Oversized
forprecast Drilled
columns are Shafts
used tofor SDCscolumns
connect C and Dwith drilled shafts,
adequate
Where confinement reinforcement
socket connections mustcolumns
of precast be included to react
are used the internal
to connect tension
columns withforces that
develop . Lateral
drilled confinement
shafts, reinforcement
adequate confinement along the column
reinforcement must beembedment
included tolength shall satisfy
react the
Section 7 .8 .2K .
internal tension forces that develop. Lateral confinement reinforcement along the
column embedment length shall satisfy Section 7.8.2.K.
The confinement reinforcement requirements over the top portions of oversized pile shafts that
connect confinement
Thewith reinforcement
precast columns requirements
are included overtiethe
to provide top portions of
reinforcement oversized
to resist pileforces
prying
shafts that connect with precast columns are included
introduced near the top of the shaft by the precast column . to provide tie reinforcement
to resist prying forces introduced near the top of the shaft by the precast column.
Experimental testing by Hung, et . al . 2013 has shown that adequate strength may be achieved
in such
Experimental
connections,testing by Hung,
provided et. al.confinement
the lateral 2013 has shown that adequate
reinforcement strengthbymay
as defined Eq . 7 .8 .2-1 is
included . The additional confinement reinforcement required over the upper half of theas
be achieved in such connections, provided the lateral confinement reinforcement
embedment by Equation
defined length 7.8.2-1
is intended to is included.
limit The
potential additional
shaft damage, confinement
which tendsreinforcement
to occur at the top of
required over the upper half of the embedment
the shaft if adequate confinement is not provided .
length is intended to limit potential
shaft damage, which tends to occur at the top of the shaft if adequate confinement
is not provided.
14 .3 .1 .7 .8Superstructure Capacity Design for Integral Crossbeams for Longitudinal
Direction for SDCs
14.3.1.7.8 Superstructure C andDesign
Capacity D for Integral Crossbeams for
Longitudinal Direction for SDCs C and D
The effective width of open-soffit superstructure resisting longitudinal seismic moments, Beff,
Thebe
may effective widthbyofEquation
determined open-soffit superstructure
14 .3 .1 .7 .8-1 resisting
for open soffit,longitudinal
girder deckseismic
superstructures
moments, B
supported oneff, may be determined by Equation
dropped crossbeam integral bents . 14.3.1.7.8-1 for open soffit, girder deck
superstructures supported on dropped crossbeam integral bents.
Beff = DC + 2 DS 1 + DS 2 Equation 14 .3 .1 .7 .8-1
Equation 14.3.1.7.8-1
Where:
Where:
DC DC == diameter
diameter of
of the
thecolumn
column(in.)
(in .)
DS1D = = depth
depthof
ofdropped
dropped portion of of
portion crossbeam (in.) (in .)
crossbeam
S1
DS2D = depth of superstructure (in.)
S2 = depth of superstructure (in .)
Where:
Where:TC = column Tc associated with column overstrength plastic hinging
v jv = tensile force Equation 14 .3 .1 .7 .9-3
moment,
TC = column lactensile
(MDpoc +(kips)
DS 1 +associated
2force DS 2 ) with column overstrength plastic hinging moment,
lac = length of column and additional effective crossbeam reinforcement
Mpo (kips)
Where: embedded
lac= length of column into upperand stage, DS2, of
additional crossbeam
effective (in)
crossbeam reinforcement embedded into
Where integralupper
TC = column dropped
tensile stage,
force DS2, of crossbeam
crossbeam
associated construction (in)is used,
with column calculation
overstrength of the
plastic average
hinging moment,
horizontal, Mpovertical
(kips) and joint shear stresses must take into consideration the actual
Where integral dropped crossbeam construction is used, calculation of the average horizontal,
configuration
lac= length ofof the joint
column andregion, including
additional the crossbeam
effective force transfer load path between
reinforcement embedded into
vertical and joint shear stresses must take into consideration the actual configuration of the joint
the superstructure
upper stage,andDsubstructure.
, of crossbeam These load
(in) paths may be different in the two
region, including the force S2
transfer load path between the superstructure and substructure .
principal directions of the bent.
These
Where load
integral paths may
dropped be different
crossbeam in the twoisprincipal
construction directionsofofthe
used, calculation theaverage
bent . horizontal,
Inand
vertical thejoint
transverse direction,must
shear stresses the fulltakedepth of the combined
into consideration thedropped crossbeam of the joint
actual configuration
Inand
theupper
transverse
diaphragm is used, because the full depth participates in the joint and upper
direction, the full depth of the combined dropped crossbeam
region, including the force transfer load path between the superstructure and substructure .
diaphragm is used, because the full depth participates in the joint force transfer .
forcetransfer.
These load paths may be different in the two principal directions of the bent .
InInthe thelongitudinal
longitudinaldirection,
direction, force
force transferonly
transfer only occursinin
occurs thetheupper
uppercrossbeam
crossbeamorordiaphragm
In the transverse
diaphragm direction, the full depth
where the superstructure of the combined dropped crossbeam and upper
where the superstructure frames into frames into the crossbeam.
the crossbeam . This reduces
This effectively effectively the depth of the
diaphragm is
reduces used,
the because
depth of the
the full
joint depth
region participates
in the in
longitudinal the joint force
direction, transfer .
although this
joint region in the longitudinal direction, although this is partially offset by the increase in the
is partially
In theeffective width
longitudinal offset by the
parallel
direction, to increase
thetransfer
force in the
crossbeam . onlyeffective
This
occurs width
increase
in parallel to the
arisescrossbeam
the upper due crossbeam.
to the ability of the lower
or diaphragm
This
wherecrossbeam increase arises due
to distribute
the superstructure frames to
forcesthe ability
intoalong of the lower
its length before
the crossbeam . crossbeam to distribute
introducingreduces
This effectively forces into forces
the actual
the depth joint
of the
along
joint region its
region .inThe length before
the increase introducing
in effective
longitudinal direction,width forces into
is based
although the
this on actual joint
a spreading
is partially region.
offsetatby The
a 45-degreeincrease
the increase angle
in thestarting at
in effective width is based on a spreading at a 45-degree angle starting
effective width parallel to the crossbeam . This increase arises due to the ability of the lower has a
the face of the column . Spreading is stopped at the center of the at the
superstructure, facewhich
of theofcolumn.
depth Spreading iswidth stoppedshown at the in
center of 14 .3 .1 .7 .9-1 .
the superstructure, which has a
crossbeam to D S2 . The effective
distribute forces along itsislength Figure
before introducing forces into the actual joint
depth of D . The effective width is shown in Figure 14.3.1.7.9-1.
S2 in effective width is based on a spreading at a 45-degree angle starting at
region . The increase
the face
Effective Width for
of the column . an Integral
Spreading DroppedatCrossbeam
is stopped the center Connection Considering
of the superstructure, Force
which has a
depth ofTransfer in the
DS2 . The Longitudinal
effective width isDirection
shown in of the Bridge.
Figure 14 .3 .1 .7 .9-1 .
Effective Width for an Integral Dropped Crossbeam Connection Considering Force Transfer in
the Longitudinal Direction of the Bridge .
Figure 14 .3 .1 .7 .9-1
Effective Width for an Integral DroppedFigure 14.3.1.7.9-1
Crossbeam Connection Considering Force Transfer in
the Longitudinal Direction of the Bridge .
Figure 14 .3 .1 .7 .9-1
Draft, October 12, 2015 ~ Edited 10-12-15 Page 33
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 14-39
June 2016
Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction Chapter 14
The effective reinforcement in the upper crossbeam joint region is that column
reinforcement that extends into the upper diaphragm and the crossbeam stirrups
and other bars that extend from the lower crossbeam into the upper diaphragm over
the effective width of the longitudinal joint shear region, DC+2DS1+DS2.
The column tensile force is calculated using AASHTO Seismic Equation 8.13.2-8.
C. Minimum Joint Shear Reinforcing
When grouted ducts are used, transverse reinforcement shall be included around
the ducts that anchor column reinforcement. The transverse reinforcement in
the joint shall satisfy AASHTO Seismic Equations 8.13.3-1 and 8.13.3-2 and
applicable requirements of AASHTO Seismic 8.13.4 and 8.13.5.
D. T Joints
The provisions in this article apply to integral dropped crossbeam construction. The
required vertical stirrups, Ajv, shall extend of the full depth of the crossbeam.
E. Knee Joints
The provisions in this article apply to integral dropped crossbeam construction. The
required vertical stirrups, Ajv, shall extend of the full depth of the crossbeam. The
full depth of the integral crossbeam, DS1+DS2, shall be considered when laying out
the required additional reinforcement.
F. Horizontally Isolated Flares
Where precast column segments are larger than the interface and bedding layer
connecting to the crossbeam, the requirements for horizontally isolated flares
shallapply.
The design of such systems should include both the geometry of the bedding layer
and any length of column that is similarly reduced in cross section. The combined
length of these defines the gap thickness.
14.3.2 Geosynthetic Reinforced Soil Integrated Bridge System
The GRS-IBS method has been used for supporting bridge abutments increasingly
around the country with success. The FHWA has developed a manual for this type of
bridge abutment, provided on the following FHWA website:
www.fhwa.dot.gov/everydaycounts/technology/grs_ibs
Proprietary SE walls supporting abutments shall not be considered preapproved, and
shall not be used beyond the limits described herein unless approved by the WSDOT
State Geotechnical Engineer and the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
See Section 7.5.11 for design requirements of abutments supported on reinforced
soilwalls.
Full-depth precast bridge deck systems consist of the precast panels, grout between the
14.3.3 Precast Decks
supporting girder and the precast panel, temporary support and forms along the girder to retain
Full-depth
the grout, precast
pockets or bridgetodeck
block-outs systems consist
accommodate of theconnections
the shear precast panels, grout
to the between
girder, the
transverse
supporting girder and the precast panel, temporary support and forms along
joints between the precast panels and some type of overlay to provide for rideability . the girder
to retain
Longitudinal the grout, pockets
post-tensioning or block-outs
may also be includedto in
accommodate
the system . the shear connections to the
girder, transverse joints between the precast panels and some type of overlay to provide
for rideability.
A full-depth precast deckLongitudinal
consists ofpost-tensioning mayconcrete
a series of precast also be included in the
panels that aresystem.
full depth in
thickness with the length
A full-depth anddeck
precast width determined
consists by specific
of a series bridge
of precast geometry .
concrete panelsThethatlength along
are full
the roadway
depthisinapproximately
thickness with8theto 12 feet and
length and width
a width equal to the
determined by full bridge
specific widthgeometry.
bridge or half bridge
width forThe
wide bridges (greater than 50 feet) . Panels span between the
length along the roadway is approximately 8 to 12 feet and a width equalsupporting girders
to theand
full bridge
are designed width or or
as reinforced half bridge width
prestressed for wide
concrete bridges
using (greater than
pretensioning 50 feet). Panels The
or post-tensioning .
general span between
preference of the supporting
contractors girders
is to and are designed
use prestressed as reinforced
concrete to eliminateor possible
prestressedcracking
concrete
from handling using
and pretensioning
shipping . or post-tensioning.
See Figures The general
14 .3 .3-1 and 14 .3 .3-2 preference
for typical layoutofofcontractors
a precast
deck . is to use prestressed concrete to eliminate possible cracking from handling and
shipping. See Figures 14.3.3-1 and 14.3.3-2 for typical layout of a precast deck.
Typical
Typical Plans Plans for Skewed
for Skewed Panel Panel
Figure 14.3.3-2
Figure 14.3.3-2
The panels can be designed for composite or non-composite action with the
supporting girders. A non-composite design is much simpler and easier to fabricate
because of the elimination of the shear connections which complicate forming the
panel and require special placement of shear reinforcement or studs and restricts
post-tensioningoperations.
The benefits of precast full depth deck systems include improved quality, reduced
The panels can be designed for composite or non-composite action with the supporting girders .
construction time or impact on traveling public, possible weight reduction and
A non-composite design
reduction of total is much
project cost. simpler and easier to fabricate because of the elimination of
the shear connections which complicate forming the panel and require special placement of
Because
shear the precast
reinforcement deck system
or studs is produced
and restricts in a plant environment,
post-tensioning operations . the quality is
superior to field cast concrete bridge decks. The variability of construction due to
Theenvironmental conditions
benefits of precast can be
full depth easily
deck accommodated
systems in a plant
include improved with consistency
quality, reduced construction
to minimize negative impact on the casting operations and deck
time or impact on traveling public, possible weight reduction and reduction of quality. The sizeproject
total of cost .
casting units is smaller thereby reducing the mix, placing and finishing variability that
exists in the field. Also, because the units are small, curing can be easily controlled and
Because the precast deck system is produced in a plant environment, the quality is superior to
applied as soon as possible to achieve the best material performance characteristics.
field cast concrete bridge decks . The variability of construction due to environmental conditions
High performance concrete (HPC) is recommended for all bridge decks and requires
can be easily accommodated in a plant with consistency to minimize negative impact on the
quality construction practices to achieve the best performance characteristics. Plant
casting operations and deck quality . The size of casting units is smaller thereby reducing the
casting provides greater assurance that the performance characteristics of HPC will be
mix,achieved.
placing and
Thisfinishing variability
issue becomes morethatcritical
exists as
in available
the field . field
Also,labor
because the units
decreases are small,
or labor
curing can be
turnover foreasily controlled
contractors and applied as soon as possible to achieve the best material
continues.
performance characteristics . High performance concrete (HPC) is recommended for all bridge
Many
decks andprojects
requiresconstructed using full-depth
quality construction precast
practices deck panels
to achieve have
the best demonstrated
performance
a significant reduction
characteristics . in construction
Plant casting time, impact
provides greater on the
assurance thattraveling public or characteristics
the performance impact
on peak traffic flow. The construction time reduction has been documented
of HPC will be achieved . This issue becomes more critical as available field labor to bedecreases or
from 50 to 75 % of the time required for cast-in-place bridge deck construction.
labor turnover for contractors continues .
The demonstrated construction time savings meets the publics demand for faster
construction and less impact to traffic. The reduced construction time also reduces the
safety hazards to motorists and workers by reducing the total time they are exposed to
the work zone.
Draft, October 12, 2015 ~ Edited 10-12-15 Page 36
Page 14-42 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 14 Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
Successful projects using full-depth precast deck systems have also shown flexibility
for accommodating the peak traffic flows for projects in high traffic urban locations.
The projects demonstrate the ability to replace decks during non-peak traffic and have
the full roadway open for peak traffic. This can be accomplished with night only work,
weekend only work, or other non-peak traffic period work.
A great advantage provided by precast full-depth bridge deck panels is that the panel
construction is removed from the critical path and can be fabricated prior to need at
the project site for installation. For bridge construction, this will generally remove
a considerable amount of work from the critical path and permit construction to be
completed earlier. Also, precast components can significantly remove the amount of
work required to be competed at the job site and reduces the risk to traffic and worker
safety. This provides greater flexibility in establishing the project schedule and allows
concentration by the contractor on the critical path items.
Another advantage provided by full-depth precast bridge deck panels is the ability to
reduce the dead load with the use of lightweight concrete. Although, the same weight
reduction can be achieved for cast-in-place decks through use of lightweight concrete,
the precast plant environment makes the use of lightweight concrete more desirable.
The complexities of mixing, placing, finishing and curing lightweight concrete are
simplified and easier to accommodate in a plant environment. The majority of precast
plants provide central mix operation, shorter haul times, shorter placement times,
quicker finishing times and quicker application of curing. All of these items have an
impact on the successful use of lightweight concrete and the probability of success is
significantly greater in the plant environment.
Like self-centering columns, Shape Memory Alloy (SMA) and Engineered Cementitious
Composite (ECC) products are introduced into bridge design as a means to improve ductility,
seismic resilience, and serviceability of a bridge after an earthquake .
SMA is a class of alloys that are manufactured from either a combination of nickel and titanium
or copper, magnesium and aluminum . The alloy is shaped into round bars in sizes similar to
conventional steel reinforcement . When stressed, the SMA can undergo large deformations and
return to original shape . This deformation can be recovered by either the application of heat
Page 14-44 (Shape Memory Effect) or removal of stress (Superelastic or Bridge
WSDOT Pseudoelastic effect) M(Langoudas
Design Manual 23-50.16
2008 and Hodgson 1990) . Figure 14 .4 .2-1 shows the stress-strain profile for loading and2016
June
Chapter 14 Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
ShapeMemory
Shape MemoryAlloy
Alloy Stress-Strain
Stress-Strain Model
Model
Figure 14.4.2-1
Figure 14 .4 .2-1
ECC is in the family of High Performance Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Composites and is
similar to traditional concrete mixes, except that the mix includes a polyvinyl alcohol fiber and
omits the course aggregate . ECC replaces conventional concrete in columns to provide a
moderate tensile strength and increase ductility to accommodate the large deformations of the
SMA . The use of ECC eliminates the spalling expected of conventional concretes in the hinge
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16 Page 14-45
region .
June 2016 Figure 14 .4 .2-2 shows the stress-strain profile comparison of confined and unconfined
ECC (f`c = 5 ksi) and conventional concrete (f`c = 4 ksi)(Li 2007 and Xu 2010) .
Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction Chapter 14
Shape Memory Alloy Stress-Strain Model
Figure 14 .4 .2-1
ECC is in the family of High Performance Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Composites
ECC is in theand is similar
family of Highto Performance
traditional concrete mixes, except
Fiber Reinforced that the mix
Cementitious includes a and
Composites polyvinyl
is
alcohol fiber
similar to traditional and omits
concrete mixes,the course
except aggregate.
that ECC replaces
the mix includes conventional
a polyvinyl concrete
alcohol fiber and in
columns
omits the course to provide
aggregate . ECC a moderate tensile strength
replaces conventional and increase
concrete ductility
in columns to accommodate
to provide a
the large
moderate tensile deformations
strength of theductility
and increase SMA. The use of ECC eliminates
to accommodate the spalling expected
the large deformations of the
SMA . The use of conventional
of ECC eliminatesconcretes in the hinge
the spalling region.
expected of Figure 14.4.2-2
conventional shows the
concretes stress-strain
in the hinge
profile
region . Figure comparison
14 .4 .2-2 shows theof confined and profile
stress-strain unconfined c =confined
ECC (f`of
comparison 5 ksi) and
andconventional
unconfined
concrete (f` = 4
ECC (f`c = 5 ksi) and conventional
c ksi)(Li 2007 and Xu 2010).
concrete (f`c = 4 ksi)(Li 2007 and Xu 2010) .
8 6 Unconfined ECC
Confined ECC 5
6 Unconfined Conv.
Stress (ksi)
Stress (ksi)
4
Concrete
4 3
2
2
1
0 0
-0.005 0.005 0.015 0.025 0.000 0.010 0.020 0.030
Strain (in/in) Strain (in/in)
EngineeredCementitious
Engineered Cementitious Concrete
Concrete Stress-Strain
Stress-StrainModel
Model
Figure 14.4.2-2
When combined in the plastic hinge zones of bridge columns, the SMA and ECC
materials
Draft, October 12, 2015are designed
~ Edited to provide high levels of strain with a super-elastic performance
10-12-15 Page 39
to allow for large deflections with negligible permanent deformation and minimal
damage. This combination of materials provides the ductility a bridge column needs to
perform well in a seismic event while providing enough elasticity to restore the bridge
closer to its original shape than conventional concrete and rebar, even with proper
detailing (Cruz 2012).
Bars fabricated with SMA are coupled with conventional steel reinforcing located
outside the plastic hinge region to reduce the amount of SMA used in the bridge
column. The engineered cementitious material can be poured within the plastic hinge
region separately from the rest of the column concrete.
An example of a column with ECC and SMA reinforcing in the plastic hinge regions
isshown in Figure 14.4.2-3.
14 .5 .1 Lifting Devices
Lifting locations for precast elements shall be shown in the design plans . The engineer is
responsible for checking the handling stresses in the element for the lifting locations shown on
the plans . Elements shall be designed using the following general criteria:
The tolerance of casting elements is critical to a successful installation . One of the most
important tolerances is the location of the grouted duct splices . Make the dimension
measurements from a common working point or line in order to specify tolerances of critical
elements . Templates shall be used where practical . Center to center measurements can lead to
a build-up of tolerance errors .
Page 14-48 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
The typical detail drawings shall include details of maximum allowable tolerances . June
Include these
2016
details in all precast substructure projects .
Chapter 14 Accelerated and Innovative Bridge Construction
14.5.3 Tolerances
The tolerance of casting elements is critical to a successful installation. One of
the most important tolerances is the location of the grouted duct splices. Make the
dimension measurements from a common working point or line in order to specify
tolerances of critical elements. Templates shall be used where practical. Center to
center measurements can lead to a build-up of tolerance errors.
The typical detail drawings shall include details of maximum allowable tolerances.
Include these details in all precast substructure projects.
Include a requirement in the project specifications that, unless templates are used to the
satisfaction of the engineer. Note that erection tolerances are also extremely important,
especially with placement of the crossbeam on multiple columns prior to installation
of the elements at the bridge site. This is especially true for grouted splice couplers.
Verify the spacing of the couplers as well as their orientation within the element. The
splice reinforcement is often left longer than required in the fabrication yard so that the
bars can be cut the exact length in the field as the construction progresses. The dry fit
can still be done in this case with the longer bars.
14.5.4 Assembly Plans
Most bridge construction projects require contractors to submit erection plans for
bridge girders. Prefabricated substructures require an even higher level of pre-
construction planning. Project specifications shall include requirements that the
contractor submit an assembly plan for the construction of the entire structure
including the precast substructure.
Include as a minimum the following in the assembly plan:
size and weights of all elements
minimum curing time of elements before shipping to the site
picking points of all elements
sequence of erection
temporary shoring and bracing
grouting procedures
location and types of cranes
a detailed timeline for the construction including time for curing grouts and
closurepours
SPMTs are typically used to replace bridges that carry or span major roadways.
Time limitations or impacts to traffic govern the need for a quick replacement.
Locating an off-site BSA to build the superstructure is a critical component
for using SPMTs. There needs to be a clearly defined travel path between the
staging area and the final bridge location that can support the SPMT movements
(vertical clearances, horizontal clearances, turning radii, soil conditions, utility
conflicts,etc.).
SPMTs can also be used to place a bridge over a waterway. In this case, the bridge
superstructure is constructed offsite, and then SPMTs transport the superstructure
fromthe BSA onto a barge which travels the waterway to the final bridge site.
Some of the common criteria that govern the use of SPMTs are the following:
There is a need to minimize the out-of-service window for roadways on or under
the structure
There is a major railroad track on or under the bridge
There is a major navigation channel under the bridge
The bridge is an emergency replacement
The road on or under the bridge has a high ADT and/or ADTT
There are no good alternatives for staged construction or detours
There is a sensitive environmental issue
Refer to the following document for more information about the use of SPMTs:
Manual on the Use of Self-Propelled Modular Transporters to Remove and Replace
Bridges, Publication Number FHWA-HIF-07-022, June 2007.
14.99 References
Pang, J.B.K, K.P. Steuck, L. Cohagen, J.F. Stanton, and M.O.Eberhard. 2008. Rapidly
Constructible Large-Bar Precast Bridge-Bent Seismic Connection, WSDOT Research
Report WA-RD 684.2, Washington State Department of Transportation, Olympia, W A.
Eberhard, M.O., J.B.K. Pang, J.F. Stanton, K.P. Steuck. 2008. Anchorage of
Large-Diameter Reinforcing Bars Grouted Into Ducts, WSDOT Research Report
WA-RD 684.1, Washington State Department of Transportation, Olympia, WA.
Haraldsson, O., T. Janes, M. Eberhard, and J. Stanton. 2013. Precast Bent System
forHigh Seismic RegionsLaboratory Tests of Column-to-Footing Socket
Connections, FHWA-HIF-13-039, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC.
Hung, V., J. Stanton, and M. Eberhard. 2013. Precast Bent System for High
SeismicRegionsLaboratory Tests of Column-to-Drilled Shaft Socket Connections,
FHWA-HIF-13-038, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC.
Gregory A. Banks, Myles Parrish, and Charles W. Spry, Replacing the Boeing
NorthBridge, PCI Journal | MayJune 2015 P 29-38
Christopher M. Vanek, Victor Ryzhikov, and Bijan Khaleghi, Restoring a collapsed
span over the Skagit River, JanuaryFebruary 2015 | PCI Journal
State-of-the-Art Report on Seismic Design of Precast Concrete Bridges,
PCI SD-01-13, First Edition
Bijan Khaleghi, Eric Schultz. Stephen Seguirant, Lee Marsh, Olafur Haraldsson,
MarcEberhard. and John Stanton, Accelerated bridge construction in Washington
State: From research to practice, Fall 2012-PCI Journal, P 34-49
Lagoudas, D.C. 2008, Shape Memory Alloys: Modeling and Engineering Applications.
New York, NY: Springer Science and Business Media, LLC.
Hodgson DE, Wu MH, Biermann RJ. 1990, Shape Memory Alloys. ASM Handbook:
ASM International. 897-902.
Li, Victor C., 2007, Engineered Cementitious Composites (ECC) Material,
Structural, and Durability Performance. In Nawy, E. (ed), Concrete Construction
Engineering Handbook, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Chapter 24.
Xu, Shi-Lang and Xiang-Rong Cai, 2010, Experimental Study and Theoretical Models
on Compressive Properties of Ultrahigh Toughness Cementitious Composites. Journal
of Materials in Civil Engineering, 22(10), 1067-1077.
Cruz, C., and M. Saiidi, 2012, Shake Table Studies of a 4-Span Bridge Model with
Advanced Materials. Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 138, No. 2,
pp.183-192.
Horizontal clearance shall be measured from the center of the outside track to
the face of pier. When the track is on a curve, the minimum horizontal clearance
shall be increased at the rate of 1 for each degree of curvature. An additional
8 of clearance for off-track equipment shall only be provided when specifically
requested by the railroad.
B. Crash Walls
Crash walls, when required, shall be designed to conform to the criteria of
the AREMA Manual. To determine when crash walls are required, consult
thefollowing:
Union Pacific Railroad, Guidelines for Design of Highway Separation
Structures over Railroad (Overhead Grade Separation)
AREMA Manual
WSDOT Railroad Liaison Engineer
The Railroad
Page 15-2 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.16
June 2016
Chapter 15 Structural Design Requirements for Design-Build Contracts
C. Substructure
For highway over railway grade separations, the top of footings for bridge piers or
retaining walls adjacent to railroad tracks shall be 2 or more below the elevation of
the top of tie and shall not have less than 2 of cover from the finished ground. The
footing face shall not be closer than 10 to the center of the track.
15.2.3 Detour Structures
A. Live Load
See Section 3.4.1
B. Detour bridge traffic barrier shall be designed to meet the applicable
AASHTO LRFD criteria.
15.2.4 Inspection and Maintenance Access
A. General
Bridges shall be configured to allow inspectors direct access to bearings, and access
to within 3-feet of superstructure surfaces. See also Figure 2.3.11-1 for under-
bridge-inspection-truck clearance requirements.
B. Bearings
Adequate clearance for maintenance and inspection of bearings shall be provided.
The clearance shall be adequate to inspect, remove and replace the bearings.
Jacking points shall be provided for bearing replacement. Jacking points shall be
designed to support 200 percent of the calculated lifting load.
C. Safety Cables and Anchors
Built-up plate girder bridges with girders 5-feet deep or greater in depth shall be
detailed with safety cables for inspectors walking the bottom flanges. At large
gusset plate locations on truss bridges (3-feet wide or wider), cables or lanyard
anchors shall be placed on the inside face of the truss so inspectors can utilize
bottom lateral gusset plates to stand on while traversing around the main truss
gusset plates.
D. Abutment Slopes
Slopes in front of abutments shall provide enough overhead clearance to the
bottomof the superstructure to access bearings for inspection and possible
replacement (3-feet minimum for girder type bridges and 5-feet minimum
forconcrete slabs).
E. Access and Lighting
1. Concrete Box and Prestressed Concrete TubGirders
See Section 5.2.6 for design criteria.
2. Composite Steel Box Girders
See Section 6.4.9 for design criteria.
3. Access Doors, Lighting, Receptacles and Penetrations
All Access doors shall have a minimum 2-6 diameter or 2-6 square clear
opening. Lock box latches shall be installed on all access doors accessible
from ground level. Access hatches shall swing into the box girders and shall
be placed at locations that do not impact traffic. Lighting and receptacle
requirements shall be in accordance with WSDOT Design Manual Chapter
1040. Air vents shall be in accordance with Figures 5.2.6-1 and 5.2.6-2.
Box girder penetrations (vents and drain holes) greater than one inch in
diameter through the exterior shall be covered with galvanized wire mesh
screen to prevent vermin and birds from accessing the interior of the box girder.
The wires shall have a maximum spacing of inch in both directions.
15.2.5 Bridge Types
Bridges shall conform to the following superstructure depth-to-span ratios based on
past WSDOT experience, superseding AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
Section 2.5 2.6.3.
The optional live load deflection limits of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications Sections 3.6.1.3.2 and 2.5.2.6.2 shall be satisfied.
For both simple and continuous spans, the span length is the horizontal distance
between centerlines of bearings.
Refer to Section 2.2.4 for superstructure depth requirements for inspection and
maintenance access.
For the required minimum depth to span ratios see Section 2.4.1.
15.2.6 Aesthetic Design Elements
The primary goal of the aesthetic design is to build visual compatibility between
the new elements and their current surroundings. The existing elements, along
with proposed and existing structures, typically establish an identifiable visual
characteristic. These existing elements such as lighting fixtures, railings street
hardware, construction materials, colors, and finishes, are to be included as an integral
part of the new construction program. Examples of new elements may include but are
not limited to:
Bridge structure type
Bridge structure major elements such as pier and crossbeam form
Bridge structure minor elements such as railings and light standards
Retaining wall materials, configuration and finishes
Noise wall material, configuration and finishes: as viewed from the corridor
Noise walls: as viewed from the neighborhoods
Vista view points
Median and roadside planting areas
Color selection
Opportunities for community funded art in accordance with WSDOT Design
Manual Public Art Policy, Chapter 950
Some design elements are planned to be functionally and visually consistent with
features in the Projects adjacent structures. Other elements benefit by retaining
flexibility within a consistent palette of materials, colors, and design forms in order to
provide the design-build- process flexibility in developing potential solution.
The final design and configuration of these Project features and other functional
components will require ongoing communication, review, and coordination between
the design-build Contractors design team and WSDOTs review team.
15.2.7 Architectural Design Standards
The RFP documents will include architectural standards. These will accommodate
the functional requirements of the preferred design solution as well as address the
contextual conditions of the Project area. They will be sensitive to corridor continuity
as well as the scale, character and texture of the area.
The standards will provide a reference for the Projects context sensitive design and
pass along the findings of the urban design analysis conducted during the Projects
planning and early design phases. The standards describe the Projects urban design
features and aide in the creation of an attractive facility that will be functional,
maintainable over time, as well as add to the areas visual character.
Depending on the project complexity, the standards may be highly detailed and
prescriptive or they may be more general in nature, such as a simple list of criteria.
15.2.8 Methods
The design-builder shall comply with the architectural standards. The design-
builder shall also be responsive to the existing urban design documents in the
adjacentcorridors.
The design-builder shall employ the highest standard of care by implementing
national best practices in urban design. The methods shall include, but not limited to,
such techniques a Context Sensitive Design (CSS) and Crime Prevention Through
Environmental Design (CEPTED).
15.2.9 Design-Builder Urban Design Team
Where required in the RFP, the design-builder shall include aesthetic design team
member resources. This shall include an experienced urban designer capable of
working with other team members and to address final context sensitive design issues,
construction details, and special project design features. The urban designer shall be an
architect with urban project experience.
The architect shall be licensed in the State of Washington and be responsible for the
coordination and development of the projects architectural components. Preference
shall be given to a team with an architect experienced in bridge architecture.
Preference shall also be given to teams where the architect has a current standing with
professional organizations such as the American Institute of Architects (AIA) or the
American Institute of City Planners (AICP). The architect shall seal the applicable
design documents.
When required by the RFP, and in order to assure consistency with the RFP
architectural design standards, the design-builder shall form an Urban Design
Team. The team shall consist of, as a minimum, a design builder project urban
design manager, a WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office Structures Engineer, the
WSDOT State Bridge and Structures Architect and the Region or HQ Principal
LandscapeArchitect.
15.2.10 Analysis and Design Criteria for Structural Widenings and Modifications
The widening of a bridge shall be of a similar superstructure type as the existing.
Theoverall appearance and geometrical dimensions of the widening shall be the
same or as close as possible to those of the existing structure. Materials used in the
construction of the widening shall have the same thermal and elastic properties as the
materials in the original structure. Prestressed concrete girders may be used to widen
existing cast-in-place concrete structures.
The members of the widening shall be proportioned to provide similar longitudinal and
transverse load distribution characteristics as the existing structure.
Differential settlement between the new and existing structures shall be taken
intoaccount.
The design of the widening shall conform to current standards and not the standards
used to design and construct the existing structure. The strength of the existing
structure shall be checked utilizing current design standards. Existing components shall
be strengthened as necessary so that their capacity/demand ratios are not worsened.
Seismic design of bridge widenings shall be in accordance with Section 4.3.
Diaphragms for the widening shall coincide with and be parallel to the
existingdiaphragms.
Falsework for the widening shall be supported from the existing structure if the
widening does not require additional girders or substructure. Otherwise, falsework for
the widening shall not be supported from the existing structure.
If the widening requires additional girders or substructure, a closure strip shall be
provided. All falsework supporting the widening shall be released prior to placing
concrete in the closure strip. Formwork supporting the closure strip shall be supported
from the existing structure and the widening.
For Type 1 ERS for SDC C or D, if columns or pier walls are considered an
integral part of the energy-dissipating system but remain elastic at the demand
displacement, the forces to use for capacity design of other components shall be a
minimum of 1.2 times the elastic forces resulting from the demand displacement
in lieu of the forces obtained from overstrength plastic hinging analysis. Because
maximum limiting inertial forces provided by yielding elements acting at a plastic
mechanism level is not effective in the case of elastic design, the following
constraints are imposed.
1. Unless an analysis that considers redistribution of internal structure forces
due to inelastic action is performed, all substructure units of the frame under
consideration and of any adjacent frames that may transfer inertial forces to the
frame in question shall remain elastic at the design ground motion demand.
2. Effective member section properties shall be consistent with the force levels
expected within the bridge system. Reinforced concrete columns and pier walls
shall be analyzed using cracked section properties. For this purpose in absence
of better information or estimated by Figure 5.6.2-1, a moment of inertia equal
to one-half that of the uncracked section shall be used.
3. Foundation modeling shall be established such that uncertainties in modeling
will not cause the internal forces of any elements under consideration to
increase by more than 10 percent.
4. When site-specific ground response analysis is performed, the response
spectrum ordinates shall be selected such that uncertainties will not cause the
internal forces of any elements under consideration to increase by more than
10percent.
5. Thermal, shrinkage, prestress or other forces that may be present in the
structure at the time of an earthquake shall be considered to act in a sense that
is least favorable to the seismic load combination under investigation.
6. P-Delta effects shall be assessed using the resistance of the frame in question
atthe deflection caused by the design ground motion.
7. Joint shear effects shall be assessed with a minimum of the calculated elastic
internal forces applied to the joint.
8. Detailing as normally required in either SDC C or D, as appropriate, shall
beprovided.
Use of expected material strengths for the determination of member strengths for
elastic response of members is permitted.
The use of elastic design in lieu of overstrength plastic hinging forces for capacity
protection described above shall only be considered if designer demonstrates that
capacity design of Article 4.11 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD
Bridge Seismic Design is not feasible due to geotechnical or structural reasons.
Type 3 ERS may be considered only if Type 1 strategy is not suitable and Type 3
strategy has been deemed necessary for accommodating seismic loads. Isolation
bearings shall be designed in accordance with the AASHTO Guide Specifications
for Seismic Isolation. Isolation bearings shall conform to Section 9.3.
Limitations on the use of ERS and ERE are shown in Figures 4.2.2-1, 4.2.2-2,
4.2.2-3, and 4.2.3-4.
Figure 4.2.2-2 Type 6, connection with moment reducing detail should only
be used at column base if proved necessary for foundation design. A fixed
connection at base of column remains the preferred option for WSDOT bridges.
The design criteria for column base with moment reducing detail shall consider
all applicable loads at service, strength, and extreme event limit states.
4.2.2-3 Types 6 and 8 are not permissible for non-liquefied configuration and
permissible for liquefied configuration.
C. Seismic Ground Shaking Hazard
Guide Specifications Article 3.4
For bridges that are considered critical or essential or normal bridges with a site
Class F, the seismic ground shaking hazard shall be determined in accordance with
the site specific procedure in Article 3.4.3 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for
LRFD Seismic Bridge Design.
In cases where the site coefficients used to adjust mapped values of design ground
motion for local conditions are inappropriate to determine the design spectra in
accordance with general procedure of Article 3.4.1 (such as the period at the end
of constant design spectral acceleration plateau (Ts) is greater than 1.0 second or
the period at the beginning of constant design spectral acceleration plateau (To)
is less than 0.2 second), a site-specific ground motion response analysis shall
beperformed.
D. Selection of Seismic Design Category (SDC)
Guide Specifications Article 3.5
A pushover analysis shall be used to determine displacement capacity for both
SDCs C and D.
E. Temporary and Staged Construction
Guide Specifications Article 3.6
For bridges that are designed for a reduced seismic demand, the contract plans
shall either include a statement that clearly indicates that the bridge was designed
as temporary using a reduced seismic demand or show the Acceleration Response
Spectrum (ARS) used for design.
F. Load and Resistance Factors
Guide Specifications Article 3.7
Use load factors of 1.0 for all permanent loads. The load factor for live load shall
be 0.0 when pushover analysis is used to determine the displacement capacity. Use
a live load factor of 0.5 for all other extreme event cases. Unless otherwise noted,
all factors shall be taken as 1.0.
mobilized, the structural design of the abutment wall, and whether the wall is
permitted to be damaged by the design earthquake. The lateral load capacity of
walls shall be evaluated on the basis of a rational passive earth-pressure theory.
The participation of the bridge approach slab in the overall dynamic response of
bridge systems to earthquake loading and in providing resistance to seismically
induced inertial loads may be considered if allowed by the RFP Criteria.
2. 5.2.2 - Longitudinal Direction
The abutment may be considered as part of the ERS for a continuous
superstructure. If the abutment is considered as part of the longitudinal
Longitudinal
Longitudinal
Longitudinalrestrainers
restrainers
ERS,restrainersshall
shall
shallnot
the abutment not
not be
be
beused
used
usedatat
stiffness atthe
and the
theend
end
endpiers
piers
piers
capacity (abutments).
(abutments).
(abutments).
shall be determined as illustrated
4.2.11
4.2.11
4.2.11 Abutments
Abutments
Abutments schematically in Figure 5.2.2-a for semi-integral abutments, Figure 5.2.2-b
for L-shaped abutments with backwall fuse, and Figure 5.2.2-c for L-shaped
abutments without backwall fuse.
(a)
(a)
(a) Semi-integral
(a)Semi-integral
Semi-integral Abutment
Semi-integralAbutment
Abutment
Abutment (b) L-shape Abutment (c) L-shape Abutment Backwall
(b)
(b) L-shape
(b)L-shape
L-shape Abutment
Abutment
BackwallFuses
Backwall
AbutmentBackwall
Backwall (c)
(c)
(c)L-shape
L-shape
L-shapeAbutment
Abutment
AbutmentBackwall
Does Not Fuse
Backwall
Backwall
Fuses
Fuses
Fuses Does
Does
DoesNot
Not
NotFuse
Fuse
Fuse
Abutment Stiffness and Passive Pressure Estimate
Figure
Figure
Figure5.2.2
5.2.2
5.2.2---Abutment
Abutment
AbutmentStiffness
Stiffness
Stiffnessand
and
andPassive
Figure 5.2.2 Passive
PassivePressure
Pressure
PressureEstimate
Estimate
Estimate
BDM
BDM
BDMFigure
Figure
Figure4.2.11-1
4.2.11-1
4.2.11-1
Abutments shall be designed to sustain the design earthquake displacements.
The passive abutment resistance shall be limited to 70percent of the value
Where
Where
Wherethe the
thepassive
passive
passivepressure
pressure
pressureresistance
resistance
resistanceof of
ofsoils
soils
soilsbehind
behind
behindsemi-integral
semi-integral
semi-integralor or
orL-shape
L-shape
L-shapeabut- abut-
abut-
obtained using the procedure given in Article 5.2.2.1.
ments
ments
mentswill
will
willbe
be
bemobilized
mobilized
mobilizedthrough
through
throughlarge
large
largelongitudinal
longitudinal
longitudinalsuperstructure
superstructure
superstructuredisplacements,
displacements,
displacements,the the
the
bridge
bridge
bridgemay 3.
may
maybe 5.2.2.1
bebedesigned
designed- Abutment
designedwith with
withthe
the Stiffness
theabutments
abutments
abutmentsas and
as
askey Passive
key
keyelements
elementsPressure
elementsof of
ofthe
the Estimate
thelongitudinal
longitudinal
longitudinalERS. ERS.
ERS.
Abutments
Abutments
Abutments shall
shall
shallbe
be
bedesigned
Abutment designed
designed to
totosustain
stiffness, sustain
sustain
Keff inthethe
thedesign
design
designand
kip/feet, earthquake
earthquake
earthquake
passivedisplacements.
displacements.
displacements.
capacity, Pp inWhenWhen
When
kips, shall
abutment
abutment
abutmentstiffness
stiffness
stiffness and
and
andcapacity
capacity
be characterized capacitybyare
are
are included
included
included
a bilinear in
orininother
the
the
thedesign,
design,
design,
higheritititorder
should
should
should be
be
berecognized
recognized
recognized
nonlinear relationship
that
that
thatthe
the
thepassive as shown
passive
passive pressure
pressure
pressureinzone
Figure
zone 5.2.2.1.by
zonemobilized
mobilized
mobilized When
bybyabutmentthe motion
abutment
abutment of the back
displacement
displacement
displacement extends
extendswall
extends is primarily
beyond
beyond
beyond
the
the
theactive
active translation,
activepressure
pressure
pressure zone
zone passive
zonenormally
normally
normally pressures
used
used
usedforfor may
forstatic
static be
staticserviceassumed
service
service load
load uniformly
loaddesign.
design.
design.This
This
Thisdistributed
isisisillustrat-
illustrat-over the
illustrat-
ed
ed
edschematically
schematically height
schematicallyin (H )
ininFigures
Figuresof
Figures
w the
1a
1a
1aandbackwall
and
and1b.1b. or
1b. Dynamic
Dynamicend diaphragm.
Dynamicactive active
activeearth
earth The
earthpressure total
pressure passive
pressureacting
acting
actingon on force
the shall
onthe
the
abutment
abutment
abutmentneed needbedetermined
need not
not
notbe
be as: in
beconsidered
considered
considered ininthe
the
thedynamic
dynamic
dynamicanalysis
analysis
analysisofof
ofthethe
thebridge.
bridge.
bridge. The The
Thepassive
passive
passive
abutment
abutment
abutmentresistance
resistance
resistanceshall
shall
shallbe
be
belimited
limited
limited to
to
Pp = pp Hw Ww to70%
70%
70% of
of
of the
the
thevalue
value
value obtained
obtained
obtained using
using
using the
the
the procedure
procedure
procedure (5.2.2.1-1)
given
given
giveninininArticle
Article
Article 5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.
Where:
pp = passive lateral earth pressure behind backwall or diaphragm (ksf)
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.1---Abutment
Abutment
Abutment Stiffness
Stiffness
Stiffnessand and
andPassive
Passive
PassivePressure
Pressure
PressureEstimate
Estimate
Estimate
Hw = height of back wall or end diaphragm exposed to passive earth
pressure(feet)
Abutment
Abutment stiffness,KKK
Abutmentstiffness,
stiffness, effin
ininkip/ft,
kip/ft,
kip/ft,and
and
andpassive
passive capacity,PPP
passivecapacity,
capacity, pppin
ininkips,
kips,
kips,should
should
shouldbe
be
becharac-
charac-
charac-
Ww = effeff
width of back wall or diaphragm (feet)
terized
terized
terizedby
by
byaaabilinear
bilinear
bilinearoror
orother
other
otherhigher
higher
higherorder
order
ordernonlinear
nonlinear
nonlinearrelationship
relationship
relationshipas as
asshown
shown
showninininFigure
Figure
Figure
5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.
5.2.2.1.When
When
Whenthe the
themotion
motion
motionof of
ofthe
the
theback
back
backwall
wall
wallisisisprimarily
primarily
primarilytranslation,
translation,
translation,passive
passive
passivepressures
pressures
pressures
may
may
maybebe
beassumed
assumed
assumeduniformly
uniformly
uniformlydistributed
distributed
distributedover
over
overthethe
theheight
height
height(H
(H(Hww)w))of
of
ofthe
the
thebackwall
backwall
backwallor or
orend
end
end
diaphragm.
diaphragm.
diaphragm.The The
Thetotal
total
totalpassive
passive
passiveforce force
forcemay
may
maybebe
bedetermined
determined
determinedas:as:
as:
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual
PPP
pp=
p==ppM
pp
pH
23-50.16
pHH W
wwwWW
www (5.2.2.1-1)
(5.2.2.1-1)
(5.2.2.1-1) Page 15-15
June 2016
where:
where:
where:
Hw = height
Hw of
= height
back wall
of back
or end
wall
diaphragm
or end diaphragm
exposed to
exposed
passivetoearth
passive
pressure
earth (ft)
pressure (ft)
Structural Design Requirements for Design-Build Contracts Chapter 15
Ww = width
Wwof
= back
widthwall
of back
or diaphragm
wall or diaphragm
(ft) (ft)
For L-shape abutments, the expansion gap should be included in the initial estimate o
For L-shape abutments, the expansion gap shall be included in the initial
estimatethe secant
of the stiffness
secant as specified
stiffness in: in:
as specified
Pp
K eff 1 = (5.2.2.3-2)
(F
w H w + Dg ) (5.2.2.3-2)
Where:
Dg where:
= width of gap between backwall and superstructure (feet)
For SDCs DgC= and D,of
width where pushoverbackwall
gap between analysesand
are superstructure
conducted, values (ft) of Pp and
the initial estimate of Keff1 should be used to define a bilinear load-displacement
behaviorFor of the
SDCsabutment
C and D, forwhere
the capacity
pushoverassessment.
analyses are conducted, values of Pp and the ini-
of Keff1 should be used to define a bilinear load-displacement behavior o
tial estimateDirection
6. 5.2.3 - Transverse
Transverse the stiffness
abutmentoffor the capacity
abutments mayassessment.
be considered in the overall dynamic
response of bridge systems if allowed by RFP Criteria. The transverse abutment
stiffness5.2.2.4-Modeling
used in the elasticPassive
demandPressure Stiffness
models shall in the
be taken Longitudinal
as 50-percent Direction
of the
elastic transverse stiffness of the adjacent bent.
In the longitudinal direction, when the bridge is moving toward the soil, the full pas-
Girder stops are expected
sive resistance to fuse
of the soil at thebe
may design event earthquake
mobilized, but when the level of moves away from
bridge
acceleration to limit the demand and control the damage in the abutments and
the soil no soil resistance is mobilized. Since passive pressure acts at only one
supporting piles/shafts. The forces generated with elastic demand assessment
abutment
models shall at used
not be a time, linear
to size theelastic dynamic
abutment models
girder stops. and frame
Girder pushover
stops for models should
abutments only include aonpassive
supported a spreadpressure
footingspring at one
shall be abutment
designed in anythe
to sustain given model. Secant
lesser
stiffness values
of the acceleration for passive
coefficient, pressure
As, times shall be developed
the superstructure dead independently
load reaction for each abut-
ment. plus the weight of abutment and its footing or sliding friction
at the abutment
forces of spread footings. Girder stops for pile/shaft-supported foundations
shall be designed to sustain the sum of 75 percent total lateral capacity of the
piles/shafts and shear capacity of one wingwall.
The stiffness of fusing or breakaway abutment elements such as wingwalls
(yielding or non-yielding), elastomeric bearings, and sliding footings shall not
be relied upon to reduce displacement demands at intermediate piers.
Unless fixed bearings are used, girder stops shall be provided between all
girders regardless of the elastic seismic demand. The design of girder stops
shall accommodate unequal forces that may develop in each stop.
When fusing girder stops, transverse shear keys, or other elements that
potentially release the restraint of the superstructure are used, then adequate
support length meeting the requirements of Article 4.12 of the AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design shall be provided. Additionally,
the expected redistribution of internal forces in the superstructure and other
bridge system element shall be considered. Bounding analyses considering
incremental release of transverse restraint at each end of the bridge shall also
beconsidered.
7. 5.2.4 - Curved and Skewed Bridges
The passive pressure resistance in soils behind semi-integral or L-shape
abutments shall be based on the projected width of the abutment wall normal
to the centerline of the bridge. Abutment springs shall be included in the local
coordinate system of the abutment wall.
L. Foundation General
Guide Specifications Article 5.3.1
The required Foundation Modeling Method (FMM) and the requirements for
estimation of foundation springs for spread footings, pile foundations, and drilled
shafts shall be Modeling Method II as defined in Table 5.3.1-1.
M. Foundation Spread Footing
Guide Specifications Article C5.3.2
Foundation springs for spread footings shall be determined in accordance with
Section 7.2.7, Geotechnical Design Manual Section 6.5.1.1.
N. Procedure 3: Nonlinear Time History Method
Guide Specifications Article 5.4.4
The time histories of acceleration used to describe the earthquake loads shall be
selected in accordance with Geotechnical Design Manual Section 6-A.6.
O. Ieff for Box Girder Superstructure
Guide Specifications Article 5.6.3
The gross moment of inertia shall be used for box girder superstructure modeling.
P. Foundation Rocking
Guide Specifications Article 6.3.9
Foundation rocking shall not be used for the design of WSDOT bridges.
Q. Drilled Shafts
Guide Specifications Article C6.5
For WSDOT bridges, the scale factor for p-y curves or subgrade modulus for large
diameter shafts shall not be used.
R. Longitudinal Direction Requirements
Guide Specifications Article 6.7.1
Case 2: Earthquake Resisting System (ERS) with abutment contribution may be
used provided that the mobilized longitudinal passive pressure is not greater than
70 percent of the value obtained using the procedure given in Article 5.2.2.1.
S. Liquefaction Design Requirements
Guide Specifications Article 6.8
Soil liquefaction assessment shall be based on Geotechnical Design Manual
Section 6.4.2.8.
T. Reinforcing Steel
Guide Specifications Article 8.4.1
Reinforcing bars, deformed wire, cold-draw wire, welded plain wire fabric and
welded deformed wire fabric shall conform to the material standards as specified in
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall conform to Standard Specifications Section 9-07.2 and
the following criteria. Only ASTM A 706 Grade 60 reinforcing steel shall be used
in members where plastic hinging is expected for SDCs B, C, and D. ASTM A
706 Grade 80 reinforcing steels may be used for capacity-protected members as
specified in Article 8.9. ASTM A 706 Grade 80 reinforcing steel shall not be used
for oversized shafts where in-ground plastic hinging is considered as a part of ERS.
Deformed welded wire fabric shall not be used.
Wire rope or strands for spirals and high strength bars with yield strength in excess
of 75 ksi shall not be used.
Guide Specifications Article C8.4.1
The requirements for plastic hinging and capacity protected members do not apply
to the structures in SDC A, therefore use of ASTM A706 Grade 80 reinforcing steel
is permitted in SDC A.
For SDCs B, C, and D, the moment-curvature analyses based on strain
compatibility and nonlinear stress/strain relations are used to determine the plastic
moment capacities of all ductile concrete members. Further research is required
to establish the shape and model of the stress-strain curve, expected reinforcing
strengths, strain limits, and the stress-strain relationships for concrete confined by
lateral reinforcement made with ASTM A 706 Grade 80 reinforcing steel.
U. Concrete Modeling
Guide Specifications Article 8.4.4
Where in-ground plastic hinging is part of the ERS, the confined concrete core
shall be limited to a maximum compressive strain of 0.008 and the member
ductility demand shall be limited to 4 maximum.
V. Expected Nominal Moment Capacity
Guide Specifications Article 8.5
The expected nominal capacity of capacity protected members using ASTM A 706
Grade 80 reinforcement shall be determined by strength design formulas specified
in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications based on the expected
concrete strength and reinforcing steel yield strengths when the concrete reaches
0.003 or the reinforcing steel strain reaches 0.090 for #10 bars and smaller, 0.060
for #11 bars andlarger.
Replace the definition of mo with the following:
mo = overstrength factor
= 1.2 for ASTM A 706 Grade 60 reinforcement
=1.4 for ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcement
an expected nominal moment capacity, Mne, at any location along the shaft, that is,
equal to 1.25 times moment demand generated by the overstrength column plastic
hinge moment and associated shear force at the base of the column. The safety
factor of 1.25 may be reduced to 1.0 depending on the soil properties.
The design moments below ground for extended pile shaft may be determined
using the nonlinear static procedure (pushover analysis) by pushing them
laterally to the displacement demand obtained from an elastic response spectrum
analysis. The point of maximum moment shall be identified based on the moment
diagram. The expected plastic hinge zone shall extend 3D above and below
the point of maximum moment. The plastic hinge zone shall be designated as
a nosplice zone and the transverse steel for shear and confinement shall be
providedaccordingly.
AC. Superstructure Capacity Design for Transverse Direction (Integral Bent
Cap) for SDCs C and D
Guide Specifications Article 8.11
For SDCs C and D, the longitudinal flexural bent cap beam reinforcement shall
be continuous. Splicing of cap beam longitudinal flexural reinforcement shall be
accomplished using mechanical couplers that are capable of developing the tensile
strength of the spliced bar. Splices shall be staggered at least 2 feet. Lap splices
shall not be used.
AD. Superstructure Design for Non Integral Bent Caps for SDCs B, C, and D
Guide Specifications Article 8.12
Non integral bent caps shall not be used for continuous concrete bridges in SDC B,
C, and D except at the expansion joints between superstructure segments.
AE. Integral Bent Cap Joint Shear Design
Guide Specifications Article 8.13.4.1.1
In addition to the T-joints listed in Article 8.13.4.1.1, the exterior column joints
for box girder superstructure and other superstructures if the cap beam extends the
joint far enough to develop the longitudinal cap reinforcement shall be considered
T-joints for joint shear analysis in the transverse direction.
AF. CastinPlace and Precast Concrete Piles
Guide Specifications Article 8.16.2
Minimum longitudinal reinforcement of 0.75 percent of Ag shall be provided for
CIP piles in SDCs B, C, and D. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided for
the full length of pile.
between existing and new structures. For example, a shaft foundation may be
used in lieu of spread footing.
5. Existing Strutted Columns
The horizontal strut between existing columns may be removed. The existing
columns shall then be analyzed with the new unbraced lengths and retrofitted
ifnecessary. The horizontal strut between existing columns may be remove
6. Non Structural Element Stiffnesscolumns shall then be analyzed with the new unbraced length
if necessary.
Median barriers and other potentially stiffening elements shall be isolated
fromthe columns to allow 6. Nondeformation.
column Structural Element Stiffness
Table 5.1.1-1
2. Modulus of Elasticity
For calculation of the modulus of elasticity, the unit weight of plain concrete
(wc) shall be taken as 0.155 kcf for prestressed concrete girders and 0.150
kcf for normal-weight concrete unless project specific data is available.
The correction factor (K1) shall be taken as 1.0 unless project specific data
isavailable.
3. Shrinkage and Creep
Shrinkage and creep shall be calculated with relative humidity (H) taken as 75
percent unless project specific data is available. The maturity of concrete (t)
shall be taken as 2000 days. In determining the age of concrete at time of load
application (ti) one day of accelerated curing by steam or radiant heat shall be
taken as equal to seven days of normal curing.
4. Grout
Grout pads with thickness exceeding 4 shall be reinforced with steel
reinforcement. Non-shrink grout conforming to Standard Specifications Section
9-20.3(2) shall be used in keyways between prestressed concrete girders.
5. Mass Concrete
Concrete placements with a least dimension of greater than 6-feet shall
be considered mass concrete, except that shafts need not be considered
massconcrete.
The temperature of mass concrete during placement and curing shall not exceed
160 F. The temperature difference between the geometric center of the mass
concrete and the center of nearby exterior surfaces during placement and curing
shall not exceed 35 F.
A thermal control plan shall be submitted by the Design-Builder for review
and comment for mass concrete placements. The thermal control plan
may include such things as: a thermal analysis; temperature monitors and
equipment; insulation; concrete cooling before placement; concrete cooling
after placement, such as by means of internal cooling pipes; use of smaller, less
frequent placements; or other methods proposed by the Design-Builder and
accepted by the WSDOT Engineer.
Concrete mix designs may be optimized (such as by using low-heat cement,
fly ash or slag cement, low-water/cement ratio, low cementitious materials
content, larger aggregate, etc.) as long as the concrete mix meets other
projectrequirements.
6. Shotcrete
Shotcrete shall not be used for permanent structures, including exterior wall
fascia surfaces, unless allowed by RFP Criteria. Shotcrete may be used for
temporary applications.
7. Lightweight Aggregate Concrete
Lightweight aggregate concrete shall not be used, unless allowed by
RFPCriteria.
B. Reinforcing Steel
1. Grades
Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to WSDOT Standard Specifications
Section 9-07.2 and Section 15.4.2.T. Use of ASTM A 706 Grade 80 steel
reinforcing bars shall conform to Section 5.1.2
2. Compressive Development Length
The minimum compressive development length shall be 1-0.
3. Splices
Minimum lap splice lengths, for both tension and compression, shall be 2-0.
When two bars of different diameters are lap spliced, the length of the lap
splice shall be the larger of the lap splice for the smaller bar or the development
length for the larger bar.
4. Welded Wire Reinforcement in Prestressed Concrete Girders, Walls,
Barriers and Deck Panels
Welded wire reinforcement may be used to replace steel reinforcing bars in
prestressed concrete girders, walls, barriers, and deck panels.
Welded wire reinforcement shall be deformed.
Longitudinal wires and welds shall be excluded from regions with high shear
demands, including girder webs. Longitudinal wires for anchorage of welded
wire reinforcement shall have an area of 40 percent or more of the area of the
wire being anchored as described in ASTM A497 but shall not be less than D4.
5. Reinforcing Bar Dowels and Resin Bonded Anchors
Allowable tensile loads and minimum required embedment for reinforcing bar
dowels shall be in accordance with Section 5.5.4.A.4. If it is not possible to
obtain this embedment, the allowable load on the dowel shall be reduced by the
ratio of the actual embedment divided by the required embedment.
Before core drilling, existing reinforcement shall be located by non-destructive
methods or by chipping if existing reinforcement cannot be damaged. Core
drilled holes shall be roughened.
C. Prestressing Steel
Prestressing steel shall be AASHTO M 203 Grade 270 low relaxation for strands
and AASHTO M 275 Type II for bars.
The refined estimate for computing time-dependent losses shall be used.
Partial prestressing is not permitted.
15.5.3 Design Considerations
A. Service and Fatigue Limit States
The exposure factor for AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 5.7.3.4
Control of Cracking by Distribution of Reinforcement shall be based upon a
Class 2 exposure condition.
Concrete stresses in prestressed members shall be limited to the allowable stresses
shown in Table 5.2.1-1.
B. Strength Limit State
The shear design of prestressed members shall be based on the general procedure
of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 5.8.3.4.2. The shear design of
non-prestressed members shall be based on either the general procedure, or the
simplified procedure of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 5.8.3.4.1.
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 5.8.3.4.3 Simplified Procedure for
Prestressed and Non-prestressed Sections shall not be used.
The maximum spacing of shear and torsion reinforcement shall be 18 inches.
C. Post-Tensioning
A 2 minimum clearance shall be provided between post-tensioning ducts with
outer diameter greater than 3. A 1 minimum clearance shall be provided between
post-tensioning ducts with outer diameter less than or equal to 3.
Confinement reinforcement shall be provided to confine curved post-tensioning
tendons in accordance with Section 5.8.1.F.
The size of the anchorage zone in the plane of anchor plates shall be large enough
to provide a minimum of 1 clearance from the plates to any free edge.
Structure shortening effects due to post-tensioning shall be included in the design.
The camber shall be shown on the plans and shall include the effect of both dead
load and final prestressing.
All post-tensioning anchorages in webs of box girder or multi-stem superstructure
shall be vertically aligned. Tendons adjacent to post-tensioning anchorages shall
meet the minimum tangent length and minimum tendon radii requirements of
Section 5.8.1.D.
15.5.4 Superstructures
A. Reinforced Concrete Superstructures
The use of CIP reinforced concrete bridge superstructures without post-tensioning
shall be restricted to widening existing reinforced concrete bridge superstructures.
Longitudinal post-tensioning shall be provided for all new CIP reinforced concrete
bridge superstructures.
B. Box Girder Superstructures
1. Intermediate Diaphragms for Curved Concrete Box Girder Bridges
Intermediate diaphragms shall be provided for curved concrete box girder
bridges with centerline radius, R, less than 800 feet. Minimum diaphragm
spacing shall be as follows:
For 600 feet R < 800 feet - at midspan.
For 400 feet R < 600 feet - at points of span.
For R < 400 feet - at points of span.
2. Temperature Effects
Thermal stresses shall be investigated in design using the following criteria:
a. A mean temperature 50 F with rise 45 F and fall 45 F for longitudinal
analysis using one-half of the modulus of elasticity (Maximum
SeasonalVariation.)
b. The superstructure box girder shall be designed transversely for a
temperature differential between inside and outside surfaces of 15 F with
no reduction in modulus of elasticity (Maximum Daily Variation).
c. The superstructure box girder shall be designed longitudinally for a top slab
temperature increase of 20 F with no reduction in modulus of elasticity.
3. Drains
Drains shall be placed in the bottom slab at the low points of each cell. Drain
hole details shall be in accordance with Figure 5.3.8-1.
C. Prestressed Concrete Girder Superstructures
1. WSDOT Standard Girder Types and Construction Sequences
Prestressed concrete girders shall be a WSDOT standard girder type in
accordance with Appendices 5.6-A1-1 and 5.6-A1-9.
Prestressed concrete girder superstructures shall follow a construction sequence
in accordance with Appendix 5.6-A1-2.
2. Superstructure Continuity
Prestressed concrete girder superstructures shall be designed for the envelope
of simple span and continuous span loadings for all permanent and transient
loads. Loads applied before establishing continuity (typically before placement
of continuity diaphragms) need only be applied as a simple span loading.
Continuity reinforcement shall be provided at supports for loads applied after
establishing continuity.
3. Continuous Structure Configuration
Girder types and spacing shall be identical in adjacent spans over intermediate
piers. Girder types and spacing may be changed at expansion joints.
4. Girder Ends
Prestressed concrete girders shall have a standard end type in accordance with
Section 5.6.2.E. Prestressing strands at girder ends shall be extended into
diaphragms and made continuous in accordance with Section 5.1.3.D.
Girder end skew angles for trapezoidal tub, slab, wide flange deck, wide flange
thin deck and deck bulb-tee prestressed concrete girders shall be limited to
30degrees. Girder end skew angles for all other prestressed concrete girders
shall be limited to 45 degrees.
The splitting resistance of pre-tensioned anchorage zones shall be as described
in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 5.10.10.1. The end vertical
reinforcement shall not be larger than #5 bars and spacing shall not be less than
2. The remaining splitting reinforcement not fitting within the h/4 zone may
be placed beyond the h/4 zone at a spacing of 2.
5. Diaphragms
Diaphragms for prestressed concrete girder superstructures shall be cast-in-
place concrete.
Diaphragms shall be oriented parallel to girder support skew. On curved
bridges, diaphragms shall be placed on radial lines. Intermediate and end
diaphragms shall be in accordance with Appendices 5.6-A1-1 and 5.6-A1-9.
D. Bridge Steels
Use AASHTO M 270/ASTM A 709 grades 50 or 50W for plate girders and box
girders. Use of AASHTO M 270/ASTM A 709 Grade HPS 70W is permissible
but availability is limited and shall be confirmed prior to actual use in design.
AASHTO M 270 grades HPS 50W and HPS100W may only be used if allowed by
the RFP Criteria. For wide flange beams, use AASHTO M 270/ASTM A 709 Grade
50S or ASTM A 992. For ancillary members such as expansion joint headers, utility
brackets, bearing components or small quantities of tees, channels, and angles,
ASTM M 270/ASTM A 709 bridge steels are acceptable but are not required. In
these cases, equivalent ASTM designated steels may be used.
All main load-carrying members or components subject to tensile stress shall be
identified in the plans and shall meet the minimum Charpy V-notch (CVN) fracture
toughness values as specified in AASHTO LRFD Table 6.6.2-2, temperature zone
2. Fracture critical members or components shall also be designated in the plans.
Structural tubes and pipes are not considered prequalified under the Bridge Welding
Code. They are covered under the Structural Welding Code AWS D1.1. Structural
tubingASTM A 500 shall not be used for dynamic loading applications. ASTM
A 1085 is a newer cold formed and welded HSS section specification that is a
Gr 50 steel. Supplements for heat treating and CVNs are included and may also
be specified. CVN tests are typically performed in the flats of the HSS square or
rectangular tube sections. CVN values in the bend radius of the tubes are lower
than values obtained in the flats. Heat treating of the sections can improve the
values, but no data is currently available. A